Archive of Our Own ^beta

Chapter Text

Taufan had never read the novel himself. He had only heard about it from others who excitedly recounted every scene in the novel in detail. A novel about the fight for the throne with a fantasy adventure genre. An intriguing novel if you asked Taufan's opinion, but not intriguing enough for him to want to read it. 

It wasn’t because the plot was boring, because, truth is, the novel had everything Taufan liked in it—magic, miracles of Gods and Goddesses, magical creatures, and many adventures. It sounded very interesting, right? Of course, it would have been a great novel if only the ending had been as great as the rest of the novel. 

Unfortunately, it was just one of many other trashy novels. A novel with an ending that would make readers feel anger and hurl curses. Yes, a novel with a bad ending where the main character dies. 

You read that right, the main character in the novel would indeed die. And what made it worse was that he was killed on the day of his coronation, which was the main character’s goal from the beginning. It’s like… what was the point of making the main character go through all those hardships to reach his goal if he was just going to be killed in the end? 

Fortunately, it wasn’t Taufan who read that story. If he had read it, he might have coughed up blood out of sheer rage. He might even have sent a string of curses to the author of that novel. So, Taufan planned to forget about the unpleasant novel and continue his life as usual.

Then why did Taufan wake up in this place?

This wasn’t his room. How did he end up in this place? A strange room he had never seen before. The room was so spacious with decorations too luxurious for someone like him, just an ordinary college student.

“Where is this?!” thought Taufan.

༻༺━━━━⁎∗.*.∗⁎━━━━༻༺

This wasn’t his room. Not his home. And not his world.

A blue flag with the emblem of a phoenix holding a sword seemed to mock Taufan’s current situation.

A phoenix holding a sword.

Only one thing came to Taufan’s mind when he saw that emblem.

Ignisia.

A kingdom known as the Kingdom of Fire with Ignis, the God of Fire, as the protector of this kingdom. A kingdom with seven princes, each possessing different powers, yet only the Fourth Prince had been blessed by the protective god of Ignisia. Only he had the power of fire that aligned with the beliefs and traditions of the Ignisia Kingdom.

What could be worse than entering a novel?

Entering a novel you’ve never read.

Especially if the body you now inhabit is that of an outcast prince, ignored by his other brothers.

“This is going to be troublesome.”

How was he supposed to return to his own world? As far as he remembered, this novel didn’t have a good ending. The main character in this story—Halilintar—the First Prince of the Ignisia Kingdom, would be killed on the day of his coronation.

Could it be that he had to ensure Halilintar could ascend to the throne safely in order to return to his world?

“I will make sure Halilintar successfully ascends to the throne. I will save you.”

Taufan would risk everything to ensure Halilintar’s safe ascension to the throne. With every step he took, he would have to solve the mysteries threatening the Kingdom and uncover the secrets that would change the course of the novel.

Boboiboy Fanfiction

©  Boboiboy | Animonsta Studio

A/N: The entire story is purely fictional, and the author does not profit from writing this story. If there are any similarities in ideas, character names, or locations, they are purely coincidental.

≫ ──── ≪•◦ ❈ ◦•≫ ──── ≪

Chapter Text

Boboiboy Fanfiction

©  Boboiboy | Animonsta Studio

A/N: The entire story is purely fictional, and the author does not profit from writing this story. If there are any similarities in ideas, character names, or locations, they are purely coincidental.

≫ ──── ≪•◦ ❈ ◦•≫ ──── ≪

How does a transmigration story begin?

The main character narrates about a novel or game they once read or played, where there was a particular character they either hated or pitied. They’d think, ‘If that were me…’ and then die for various reasons. Most often, they were hit by a truck.

It’s quite funny to me and entirely illogical.

Well, of course, it’s illogical because I live in the modern world of the 21st century, where people are more inclined to believe in science that can be proven rather than in irrational things like transmigration or the like. So, I don’t understand why I’m experiencing something like this.

It doesn’t make any sense.

Wasn’t I living a perfectly fine life? I wasn’t a child forgotten by my parents. Nor was I an orphan who had to work tirelessly just to have a decent life. I also didn’t harbor any grudges or regrets about my life. And I wasn’t obsessed with any novel or game.

I was just an ordinary person. A 21-year-old art student trying to get through this tough semester.

So, it was only natural that when I opened my eyes in this strange world, the first thing I felt was confusion. Where am I? Why am I in this unfamiliar room? Moreover, a room so luxurious that I could never have imagined it. The next thing I felt was panic. How could I be in this strange room? Didn’t I just fall asleep in my own bed after being exhausted from working on my college assignments last night?

I tried to scream, but that’s when I realized that no sound came out. The panic I was experiencing was replaced by a feeling of profound weakness in my body. Even lifting my hand felt incredibly exhausting. It took a lot of effort just to maintain consciousness. What’s happening? Why does my body feel so weak and tired? I also felt a tightness in my chest that I didn’t understand. Do I actually have asthma without knowing it?

Honestly, I was really scared and confused. But who could I ask for help? Waking up in a strange room with such a weak body, all alone with no one else around. This was terrifying and confusing for me.

Could I be dreaming?

Yes, maybe this is just a dream.

I closed my eyes again, hoping that when I opened them, I’d be back in my room. But what I hoped for was nothing but futile. What I saw when I opened my eyes again was the same scene I had seen before. My body was still as weak as it was before, maybe even weaker now.

What’s happening?

Why am I not back in my room?

Was I kidnapped?

But who would want to kidnap me? I’m just an ordinary art student, not wealthy, and my grades are only average. Even the laptop I use for college is a hand-me-down from my father. My phone is outdated, and it wouldn’t fetch much money even if sold. Moreover, I live in a small boarding house with inadequate facilities to save money. If I were to summarize, there’s no reason for anyone to kidnap me.

Wait! Could this be a human trafficking syndicate?

Did they kidnap me to take my organs?!

Is that why my body feels so weak and powerless?! Don’t tell me they’ve already taken my organs!

I wanted to check my body, but just moving my hand was incredibly difficult. But who am I if I give up because of this? Even though this is the first time I’ve felt such a weak body, as an art student who always has to make it to campus on time even after sleepless nights, this shouldn’t stop me from checking my own condition!

My hands trembled as I tried to lift the blanket covering my body. What is this blanket made of? Why is it so heavy to lift? It feels like trying to move a pile of wet clothes that haven’t been wrung out. Or is it because my body is just too weak? Trying to get up is so hard; not only does my body feel heavy and my energy feel nonexistent, but now I realize that my head hurts terribly and my chest feels so tight. What’s going on?! Is this the effect of the sedative?! What kind of sedative is this?!

“Your Highness! You shouldn’t be moving too much right now!” Suddenly, a voice reached my ears. And along with that, a young girl dressed as a maid approached me. She gently pushed me back to lie down.

Who is she? Is she, my kidnapper?

But she’s just a young girl! Why would she want to kidnap someone like me who has nothing?

“Aaa…” I tried to speak. But that was all I could manage. I still tried to get up, even though the girl continued to hold me back. What is this?! Am I losing to a little kid, especially a girl? How weak is my body right now?

I became even more panicked when the girl held me down with more force and started shouting for someone. Who is she calling? Her accomplice? Is this really a human trafficking syndicate?! Am I going to die like this?!

A young man entered my field of vision. He looked fit, with quite prominent arm muscles even though he was wearing strange clothes, in my opinion.

“Sir Fang, His Highness keeps resisting. What should we do?”

“I’ll call the doctor right away and have Maripos come to assist you,” the young man said before leaving. At that moment, I noticed that a sword was strapped to his waist. Why is he carrying a sword? Is that what he’s going to use to extract my organs?! But wouldn’t that make it messy? Wait, why am I even thinking about this? More importantly, I need to free myself from this girl’s grip now.

While I was still struggling without giving up to escape from the girl’s grasp, another young man entered the room. His hair was so white and long, tied in a ponytail. He was also wearing servant’s clothes like the girl. I would have paid attention to that detail if I weren’t panicking over the fact that I had now seen three strangers who most likely were involved in my kidnapping. My legs, which had been kicking in an attempt to free myself, were now held down by the white-haired young man.

I was exhausted, my body hurt, and my head felt like it was going to explode any moment. But I refused to give up to my kidnappers. I had to escape. I had to get back home. I didn’t want to die like this.

In the middle of my struggle, I felt something prick my neck. Slowly, I began to feel my eyes grow heavy, and my body started to relax. What did they do to me? Did they sedate me again? No… I mustn’t lose consciousness. I have to keep fighting. I… I… I don’t want to die. That was my last thought before darkness completely consumed me.

...

When I opened my eyes again, I was still in the same room. This time, my body felt much more exhausted and in pain compared to before. I really couldn’t move even a single finger. Only my eyes could scan my surroundings. Although I still felt scared and panicked, I decided to calm myself down first this time. I tried to think rationally about why I ended up here and how I could return to my home. In the silence of the room I occupied, I tried to investigate what had happened to me.

First, I woke up in a strange room I had never seen before. This room looked like a bedroom but was so luxurious and large. It was probably bigger than the rented house I lived in during college. Its luxury only reminded me of wealth. I thought, how could I be in such a luxurious room like this?

Second, my body felt so weak and powerless. It felt as if I was gravely ill and incurable. Even earlier, the little girl who held me down was much stronger than me, a 21-year-old man. I was sure I didn’t have any deadly illness that would make me this weak.

Third, although I still had doubts about the people who appeared earlier, now that I think about it, it seems there was some mistake. They all called me 'Your Highness,' and the room I was in was too luxurious to be a detention room. They, who I suspected were part of a human trafficking syndicate, why would they detain me in such a luxurious room? How could these people be short on money when their detention room was this luxurious? I could swear the chandelier in the middle of the room was made of pure crystal. And even if it wasn’t, its price would already be in the tens of millions considering its complexity.

Then the fourth and very serious problem is that I couldn’t speak. My mouth seemed locked, and every syllable I tried to utter only came out as ‘Aaa,’ very torturous because now I couldn’t even move my finger. What exactly did they give me? Was it a strong sedative?

While I was thinking about it, I heard the creak of the door opening. Unconsciously, my body tensed, and I quickly closed my eyes to pretend to be asleep. I still didn’t know who these people were or why they were keeping me here. It’s better to play it safe than to rashly confront them.

I heard footsteps approaching the place where I lay, the sound stopping at what I assumed was the side of the bed. I kept my eyes closed, pretending to sleep even though my heart was on high alert against whoever entered this room. Then I felt something touch my forehead. A hand that felt rough and calloused. Despite that, the hand touched my forehead so gently, even stroking my hair with affection. Confusion quickly attacked me again. What? Who? And why is they touching me so gently?

Don’t tell me I’m in the home of a psychopath obsessed with me?! Just imagining it was enough to make me shiver. And based on the hand touching me, it was probably a man, wasn’t it?! Panicked, I tried to recall anyone who had approached me in my 21 years of life. But it was futile because I couldn’t remember anyone ever showing an interest in me.

“How is he?”

I heard a deep voice close to me. This voice must belong to the man who touched me, right? But why did his voice sound so familiar? Like I had heard it somewhere before.

“The doctor said His Highness the Prince is still in shock, which led to this panic attack. We still don’t know what happened before His Highness had this panic attack, but I suspect it’s related to the previous incident.” I heard another man’s voice, this time softer than the first man. This voice, I had never heard before. Even this voice was different from the young man with the sword earlier.

“Are you sure it’s just a panic attack? He looks like he’s in a lot of pain.” The man’s voice sounded sad for some reason. And I am indeed in pain right now! Pain, confusion, and fear. Who are you all, and why have you been speaking so politely all this time? Why does someone keep mentioning ‘Your Highness’? Where am I?

“Keep monitoring him and report to me what happens.” I felt the man’s hand, which had been touching me, slowly move away. Losing the warmth so suddenly, for some reason, made me feel unwilling. Something in my soul wanted that hand to linger on my head, stroking my hair with affection as before. What is this strange feeling?

“Yes, Your Highness.” Along with that, I heard footsteps moving away and the sound of the door opening before closing again.

I’m really confused now. I want to open my eyes but am afraid of the people around me. People I don’t recognize at all, in a place so unfamiliar to me. Without realizing it, my spinning thoughts led me to fall asleep. Because the next time I opened my eyes, the surroundings had turned dark. The only source of light was a candle quite far from where I was lying and the moonlight streaming through one of the windows not covered by curtains. My body was no longer as exhausted as before; this time, I could move my body even though it was still weak. While I was struggling to sit up, suddenly a pair of arms supported me. I thought it was the same hands that held me down the first time I tried to get up, but it wasn’t the maid I found. Instead, it was the white-haired young man who had held my leg earlier.

I was a bit scared when he touched me, but the young man’s demeanor was so gentle, “Your Highness, what can I do for you?”

“Aaa…” I still couldn’t use my voice to speak. I could only wave my hand, hoping the young man understood what I meant. My body hurt from lying down for so long, plus I was dizzy, and I needed to sit up. I was also thirsty and hungry. Fortunately for me, the white-haired young man seemed to understand what I meant because next, he was already helping me to sit up. A large, soft pillow was placed behind me to keep me comfortable while sitting. He also swiftly began relighting some of the candles in the room.

I tapped the nightstand next to the bed to get his attention, pointed to my throat, and made a drinking gesture. The young man nodded and said he would quickly fetch water and food for me to eat.

Left alone in this room, I began to get lost in my thoughts again. What happened and where exactly I was remained the main questions in my head. But I began to doubt that the people I had seen earlier were part of a human trafficking syndicate. I mean, from what I heard, such people are very cruel to their victims. They wouldn’t want to put their victims in such a luxurious room or treat them so politely. I was more convinced that they were all people with a Chūnibyō complex[1] who liked to cosplay[2].

[1] Chūnibyō complex: A Japanese term that refers to an adolescent's belief that they possess special powers or are involved in fantastical situations, often acting out imaginary scenarios.  
[2] Cosplay: A contraction of the words "costume" and "play," where participants dress up as characters from anime, manga, video games, or other pop culture sources, often attending conventions or events.

Now, the most crucial question is: where am I? So far, I haven’t seen a single sign of technological advancement from my time. For example, the young man earlier chose to go through the trouble of lighting candles one by one instead of using lights, which would be much easier and more practical. Or the fact that the young man carrying a sword was dressed like a palace guard from ancient times. Oh, right, that young man with the sword—was the sword he carried real? Or was it just a prop? Could I actually be on a film set with a kingdom theme? Although it sounds plausible, it still doesn’t answer my question of why I’m here. It’s impossible that I was suddenly kidnapped from my room just to be part of a film shoot for a story I know nothing about, right?

My thoughts were interrupted by the creaking sound of a door opening. The white-haired young man had returned, pushing what I believed to be a trolley typically used to serve food in luxury restaurants. On it was something I assumed was food prepared for me. I should be suspicious of this young man; he could have put something in the food he brought—perhaps poison or drugs. Unfortunately, the hunger I had been feeling since I woke up dulled my suspicions. The young man bent down to take something from the bottom of the trolley, which was a small wooden folding table. He placed it in front of me and began to serve the food. As soon as the cover was lifted, I was met with a bowl of soup emitting a delicious aroma. My stomach began to rumble, and I stared at the soup in front of me with a worshipful gaze. Why does it feel like it’s been ages since I last ate, even though I remember just finishing a plate of fried rice before waking up in this strange room?

The young man handed me a glass of water, but my weak hand couldn’t even hold the weight of the glass, causing me to spill it. I thought the young man would be angry with me, but instead, he said nothing and handed me another glass of water. This time, he helped me drink it. As the water entered my mouth, I felt immense relief as if I hadn’t drunk anything in days. My throat, which had been hurting, was soothed by just a glass of what I had considered ordinary water.

“Can you hold the spoon, Your Highness?”

I looked at the young man in confusion. Why did he sound doubtful that I could hold a spoon? It’s just a spoon! Then I remembered that I couldn’t even hold the weight of a glass of water. Even so, I refused to appear weaker and took the spoon provided on the small table. My hand trembled as I picked it up, and the spoon felt much heavier than the book-filled bag I usually carried around.

What is this thing made of? Why is it so heavy?

It took me some time to adjust to the weight of the spoon, and during that time, the young man standing by my side didn’t say a word. His face remained expressionless. Ignoring him slightly, I tried to scoop the aromatic soup in front of me. Of course, my trembling hand only made me eat like a messy child. The only thing I was grateful for was that it was just me and this young man in the room, allowing me to pretend I had no sense of shame at the moment.

As I expected, the soup tasted incredibly delicious. I would have downed it in one gulp if only my hands cooperated with me. I had no idea how long it took me to finish the soup, but it must have been a long time because the young man had to replace the candles several times as they were about to burn out.

When the young man took the bowl from in front of me, he paused and stared at the bowl in his hands. Oh.. does he think I’m too greedy for finishing all of it? Should I have eaten only a little? Is he going to be angry with me?

“Your Highness... it’s unusual for you to finish your meal.”

Is he really mad because I finished my food?

The young man closed his eyes with one of his hands. Wait! Are you seriously angry because I finished my food?! Should I throw it up? No. Don’t be silly. That would only make him angrier.

When the young man lowered his hand, it wasn’t anger I saw on his face but happiness? His eyes were teary, and it seemed like he was about to cry, but he smiled as if something made him very happy. It was as though I had just given him the most beautiful gift.

“I’m glad you didn’t refuse to eat this time. You even finished your meal. This is progress, Your Highness. If you keep it up, I’m sure your stamina will soon recover, and you won’t have to be confined to your room any longer.”

Huh? Wait, wait a minute. What do you mean? Refuse to eat? My room? Why do I feel like you’re speaking an alien language and not a human one? How can this luxurious room be my room? Also, I’ve never refused food. As a student living on a tight budget, I’ve trained myself to eat anything to survive. Whenever possible, I finish all my food. Even when I’m sick, I force myself to eat—though I often end up vomiting it back up from being too full.

“I will ask the maids to change your sheets and blankets, Your Highness. Please be patient for a moment.” After saying that, the young man turned and left with his trolley. He didn’t leave the room like before; instead, he just pushed the trolley out and seemed to be talking to someone. I simply watched him. He wasn’t very tall, perhaps around my height, with long white hair tied in a ponytail. I think I noticed two moles under his eyes earlier. I hadn’t thought much of it before, but his irises were purple. That’s not a common color as far as I know. It’s almost impossible for a human to have such eyes color. The young man with the sword also had a strange appearance. His hair was purple, and his irises were red. The little girl earlier had orange hair with eyes matching her hair color.

Part of me thinks these people are deeply dedicated to their cosplay. But another part of me is beginning to feel that this entire situation is strange. Why do I feel... as if I’m not in the world I’ve always known? It’s like... I’m in another world.

Am I... really in another world?

Chapter Text

Boboiboy Fanfiction

©  Boboiboy | Animonsta Studio

A/N: The entire story is purely fictional, and the author does not profit from writing this story. If there are any similarities in ideas, character names, or locations, they are purely coincidental.

≫ ──── ≪•◦ ❈ ◦•≫ ──── ≪

'The True Heir of Ignisia'

It is a fantasy adventure novel that tells the story of a kingdom with seven princes. The main character of the novel is one of the seven princes. It is a story about the fight for the throne among the princes, spiced up with various adventures that the protagonist must undertake to achieve his goal—to become the King of Ignisia. It would be an interesting novel to read if only the protagonist had a happy ending like most novels.

Unfortunately, it is one of those trash novels that kills off the protagonist at the end. The protagonist, the First Prince of the Seven Princes, is brutally murdered on his coronation day.

Yes, I didn't read the novel myself but still felt angry upon learning its ending. My second younger brother is the one who read it. He couldn’t stop talking about the novel at every opportunity he got, whether in person or through private messages. He was initially drawn to read it because one of the important characters in the novel shares his name. Although he isn’t someone who usually reads, he suddenly became interested in reading a novel just because a character had his name.

I remember he sounded so dejected when he described the ending of ‘The True Heir of Ignisia’ because the protagonist was killed on his coronation day. At that time, I didn’t think much of it because I figured it was just a novel and he would get over it soon. I, too, who initially intended to read the novel, decided against it due to the bad ending.

But now I regret it. Why didn’t I read that cursed thing?! I should have read it if I knew it would turn out like this. I would have banged my head on the table in stress, but instead of feeling a hard surface, I felt a warm hand covered in a white glove.

“Your Highness, I really don’t want to explain to Prince Halilintar why you’re suffering from a headache and have a lump on your head,” the young man beside me said.

I merely glanced at the young man with a lazy expression. His hand is still holding my head to prevent it from hitting the table.

“He won’t know if you don’t tell him,” I grumbled.

“He will know even if I don’t tell him.”

I waved my hand lazily. I continued to reflect on my current situation while still wondering how I ended up like this.

I have entered a novel. And worse, it’s a novel I had never read before. How did I realize I was in a novel? Honestly, it took me two days to realize I was in a novel and not in my own world anymore. The first day I spent panicking and sleeping, and the second day wasn’t much different. Except by the end of that day, I finally realized what had happened to me. All thanks to the young man beside me. His name is Maripos—an unusual name in my opinion.

That day, Maripos talked about my older brother—the First Prince—who would be visiting. I didn’t understand at first until Maripos mentioned his name. Prince Halilintar von[1] Ignisia. The First Prince of the Ignisia Kingdom and the protagonist of the novel ‘The True Heir of Ignisia’, the person who would tragically be killed on his coronation day. And my current body is that of the Second Prince, Taufan von Ignisia, known as the Exiled Prince. Believe me, when I first realized this, I was so scared that I fainted in front of Maripos.

[1] "von" means "from." So, the name Halilintar von Ignisia means Halilintar from Ignisia.

I spent a whole month coming to terms with my situation. The first week after realizing it was spent in panic and denial. The second and third weeks were used trying to find a way back to my own world. I tried everything, from the simplest methods to the most extreme. Like attempting to hang myself, cutting my veins, and even jumping into the nearby lake. Recalling it, Maripos and the other servants must have been very troubled during that time.

My crazy actions ended after I realized none of them worked. The fourth week I used to write anything I knew about the novel. Of course, my knowledge was very limited since I hadn’t read it myself. But fortunately, my brother had described the contents of the novel in great detail.

The setting of the novel is a kingdom called Ignisia. Ignisia is a large kingdom with the strongest military power compared to other kingdoms. It can be said that Ignisia is a powerful and feared kingdom in this continent. Ignisia is often referred to as the Kingdom of Fire because the first King of Ignisia who founded the kingdom was blessed by the God of Fire, Ignis. Most of Ignisia’s inhabitants also greatly believe in and worship Ignis. However, Ignisia is not a kingdom that restricts its people’s beliefs; there are a total of six other gods and goddesses who also contributed to making Ignisia a strong and feared kingdom. These six gods and goddesses have also blessed the previous rulers of Ignisia.

In the novel, the seven princes of Ignisia are blessed by different gods. Halilintar, the First Prince, is blessed by Blits, the Goddess of Thunder. Taufan—the body I’m currently in—the Second Prince, is blessed by Vint, the Goddess of Wind. Gempa, the Third Prince, is blessed by Terra, the God of Earth. Blaze, the Fourth Prince, is blessed by Ignis, the God of Fire and the most widely worshipped deity in Ignisia. Ice, the Fifth Prince, is blessed by Vaser, the God of Water. Duri, the Sixth Prince, is blessed by Gevix, the Goddess of Plants. And lastly, Solar, the Seventh Prince, is blessed by Lig, the God of Light.

Strangely, each prince in Ignisia has names similar to mine and my brothers’. I don’t remember my brother ever mentioning this. No, he often did, but at the time I didn’t feel anything odd for some reason. As I think about it now, how could a novel by an unknown author accurately write the names of my brothers and our order? It’s strange, but unfortunately, I don’t know how to find the answer. That’s why I decided to ignore it for now and focus on the real issue at hand.

'The True Heir of Ignisia' tells the story of the fight for the throne among the princes. Not all the princes are involved in the throne figthing—only Halilintar, the First Prince; Blaze, the Fourth Prince; and Solar, the Seventh Prince, are engaged in the fight for the throne. Each of them has a powerful faction supporting their claim to the throne. When I first heard my brother’s story, I was confused. Why didn’t Ignisia appoint a Crown Prince to prevent such a fight for the throne? My brother told me that the previous King died before he could appoint a Crown Prince, which caused the kingdom to split into three factions. The first faction supports Halilintar as the King, considering it his right as the eldest son to ascend to the throne and his status as a skilled swordsman since his youth. The second faction supports Blaze because, of the seven brothers, only Blaze received a blessing from Ignis, who is believed to be the protector deity of Ignisia. The last faction supports Solar as the heir due to his genius, which is believed to lead Ignisia to become more advanced and powerful.

Ignisia is not a kingdom that adheres to the principle of the firstborn becoming the King. As long as the princes prove their worth, they are eligible to fight for the throne. And the princes deemed worthy are the three mentioned earlier. The situation will cause a lot of chaos due to these differing opinions. Meanwhile, the other four princes seem to be ignored. Taufan is the long-forgotten prince with little regard, Gempa prefers to work as a volunteer for the poor, Ice is disliked by many because the deity who blessed him was an enemy of Ignis, and Duri spends most of his time caring for plants.

I am still lacking a lot of information as I cannot remember every detail my brother mentioned, but I know that eventually, Halilintar will be crowned King of Ignisia. Unfortunately, he is killed on the day of his coronation. I intended to let the story unfold as it should, believing that changing what has been written would only bring negative consequences for me. Besides, the original Taufan is the discarded prince, ignored by everyone including his brothers. His role in the novel is also very minimal. Nevertheless, he will remain alive until the end of the story, albeit forgotten.

Perhaps once the story ends, I might be able to return to my own world. I was truly determined to do so until I met the main character himself—Prince Halilintar von Ignisia.

I was left speechless when I saw his face. Not only does his name match my brother's, but his face and voice are also so similar. It felt as if I was facing my own brother. The only difference between this Halilintar and my brother is the color of their eyes. Halilintar has blood-red eyes, while my brother has brown eyes. Their way of speaking and their body gestures are also very similar. It’s as if they are the same person.

What is really happening? Why do I feel like this is not an ordinary novel?

After meeting Halilintar, I felt an unusual urge. It led me to spontaneously decide to get involved in the development of this novel. I have to protect Halilintar, I thought. I’m not doing this because Halilintar resembles my brother; after all, my relationship with my brothers was never good. I’m doing this because if Halilintar can safely ascend the throne, perhaps I can return to my world. I was so sure of this until I realized what I had just decided.

How am I supposed to protect Halilintar? He is the youngest and strongest swordsman in the kingdom, blessed by the Goddess of Thunder, who is said to have the most powerful abilities, and he has strong supporters backing him. And I, a discarded prince with no support, want to protect him? Doesn’t that sound ridiculous? Also, the body I inhabit is so weak; I get exhausted just walking a few meters. Sometimes, on bad days, I will even cough up a bit of blood and end up in bed all day. What is happening to this body? Why is it so weak when it received a blessing from such a powerful goddess?

If this is the case, I am the one who needs protection. It’s truly a miracle that Taufan is still alive until the end of the story. With a body like this, he should have died earlier than Halilintar.

Oh, by the way, I feel something odd. In the novel, it is described that Taufan is a discarded prince, forgotten by his brothers. He has been moved to another palace because he is considered unworthy as a prince. Although I am the only one living in the palace I currently inhabit, it doesn’t feel like I have been discarded and forgotten. The palace has servants who attend to me and maintain it, there are guards in every corner, and I have a personal servant—Maripos—and a personal guard—Captain Fang. There is also a personal doctor available at any time. When I walked around the palace to map it out in my head, I found a warehouse full of herbal plants.

Halilintar also often visits and asks about my condition. I also know that he is the one who stroked my hair on the first day I arrived in this world. Every time I speak with Halilintar, it is clear that he cares deeply for me. I may not have met the other princes yet, but so far, I don’t feel forgotten at all.

If I may say so, this is the life I have always dreamed of. A relaxed life without urgent assignments to complete. 

Yes, of course, this life would be perfect if my body weren’t so weak, but who am I to complain?

...

"Your Highness, you shouldn't be wandering around at this time," Maripos said. Though he sounded concerned, the young man continued following me without any intention of stopping me. I waved my hand dismissively and chose to check on Captain Fang, who was walking a few steps behind me.

"Is there a problem, Your Highness?" Captain Fang asked. His face was expressionless, reminding me of Maripos when I first entered this world. The difference was that Captain Fang seemed genuinely unable to show any expression, while Maripos could easily display his emotions—especially if you made him angry, which I had done several times.

"The weather is nice today, so I want to paint by the lake. Tell the servants to bring my painting supplies," I said.

I watched Captain Fang nod before he bowed to me in respect. Then, the young man left to carry out my orders. Meanwhile, Maripos continued to glare at me sharply, but I pretended not to understand the meaning behind his gaze. I knew why Maripos was looking at me like that, and I deeply regretted it. He must have some trauma associated with the lake. Yes, it was because I once jumped into the lake right in front of him. He panicked and jumped in to pull me out. I have to admit, his panic was quite amusing at the time.

But I wouldn't do something foolish like that again. Aside from the fact that I had to suffer through a high fever that night, I also realized that my actions were futile. I couldn't return to my world.

When we arrived at the lake, I tried to find a comfortable spot to paint. There was a shady tree by the lake, its branches and leaves casting a shadow over the surrounding area. It was the perfect place for me to paint. Maripos continued to watch me closely but said nothing, for which I was quite grateful.

The original Taufan and I shared a similar interest. He loved to paint, and so did I. I had seen his previous works, and our painting styles were quite similar, so I didn't have to worry about drawing attention because our paintings differed. When Captain Fang returned with a servant carrying my—or rather, the original Taufan's—painting supplies, I let Maripos take over and set everything up for me. I wondered, what should I paint today?

Maybe I'll just let it flow naturally.

While I was painting, Maripos challenged Captain Fang to a duel, only to be easily defeated. Another servant came to bring us snacks, and other various activities unfolded around me. I didn't take my eyes off the canvas in front of me but laughed as I listened to the sounds they made. Taufan must have been a kind and laid-back prince, as his subordinates felt free to joke around cheerfully yet still served him with great respect.

"Your Highness, I think it's time to head back," Maripos said as he approached me. I glanced at him and gave a small smile, "Alright. I'm tired too."

I set down my brush and took a moment to look at my painting. It wasn't completely finished, but I liked how it was turning out. At that moment, Maripos also looked at my painting, seeming puzzled before pointing to a spot in the painting.

"Your Highness... this?"

Looking more closely, I noticed the spot Maripos was pointing to was a small child dressed in green, peeking out from behind a tree. I had simply painted what was in front of me, and the child happened to appear when I was painting the tree, "Yes, I saw him earlier. Why? Is something wrong?"

"No. It's just... he's the Sixth Prince. It's unusual for him to visit this lake."

Wait. The Sixth Prince? That means he's one of Taufan's brothers, right? If I'm not mistaken, the Sixth Prince's name is Duri, and he's blessed by the Goddess of Plants. It's said that he prefers to focus on plants rather than get involved in the fight for the throne. What is he doing here? Isn't the princes' palace far from the one I'm staying in?

"Maybe... he's just bored?"

Maripos didn't answer, but he looked at me with a skeptical gaze, as if doubting my current mental capacity. I held back a sigh. What do you expect from me, Maripos? I'm just someone from another world who suddenly entered your beloved prince's body.

But this piqued my curiosity. Prince Duri is the twin brother of Prince Solar. Excluding Taufan, who was deemed unworthy as a prince, Prince Duri is always considered the weakest among them. However, I know that's not true. Gevix is no ordinary goddess. She is one of the strongest deities to have ever blessed a leader of Ignisia. I've read various books explaining the powers of the deities who blessed the princes. Blits is the strongest in offense but weak in defense. Vint is better suited for long-range combat and defense. Terra has strong offense and defense but is slow in attack. Ignis is similar to Blits, Vaser is quite mysterious so I don't know much about him, Gevix, often considered weak, has high healing power, and Lig, though his attack is very strong, consumes a great amount of energy in a single strike.

So, in summary, there's no prince who can truly be called weak. Perhaps Duri purposely stayed away from the fight for the throne for his twin brother, Solar. But why would Duri do that when he could just declare his non-participation like Gempa did?

...

"Your Highness, it's time for you to take your medicine."

As soon as I saw Maripos approaching me with a bowl of thick black liquid, I just wanted to run away. Because of Taufan's frail and weak body, he had to sustain his life by consuming medicine day after day. And guess what? None of those medicines tasted good! They were so bitter that when I first took them, I ended up vomiting them back up.

In the month I've been in the body of the Second Prince of Ignisia, I've tried various ways to avoid drinking that terrifying black liquid. But Maripos, Captain Fang, and even Papileon—the girl who restrained me when I first woke up in this world—always managed to find me and force me to drink it. I admit that the effects of that liquid are indeed very beneficial for me, but it’s so bitter that I can’t even feel my tongue. Who exactly is the person who created that horrifying concoction? Why not make it in pill form to make it easier to consume? The only consolation I have after drinking that bitter medicine is the jar of honey that’s always on the nightstand.

The sweet taste of honey always manages to neutralize the bitterness of the medicine. And perhaps this is why Taufan always drank his tea with honey—I learned this from Maripos.

"It still tastes horrible," I muttered after drinking the bowl of black liquid that Maripos claimed was medicine.

"You always say that, Your Highness," Maripos replied casually. He opened the jar of honey and handed me a small spoon. I quickly scooped up some honey and put it into my mouth. I couldn’t stop cursing whoever created medicine that bitter.

"Perhaps it’s better if you spend the day indoors today, Your Highness."

I nodded in agreement with Maripos' suggestion. It was true that I felt very tired today for some reason. My head also felt dizzy, and my body seemed to have no energy at all. It would be better if I spent this time sleeping and regaining my strength. It's a shame there’s no technology like in my world. If there were, I would definitely choose to laze around watching movies or browsing social media.

Since there was nothing else I could do, I chose to recall the plot of 'The True Heir of Ignisia' to determine my next steps. If I’m not mistaken, the story begins when Halilintar is 24 years old. Since the original Taufan’s age is only two years younger than Halilintar, that means Halilintar is currently 18 years old. Which means there are still six years before the story begins. I seem to remember my brother saying something about Halilintar’s journey taking quite a long time. He was almost 30 years old when he was crowned King. Possibly between 28 and 29 years old. That means there are still 10 to 11 years before Halilintar is killed. Ten years is not a short time, but it can’t be considered long either. I need to do something before this happens.

I can’t recall the first event that takes place in the novel because it’s been quite a while since my brother told me about it. It seems like there wasn’t anything important, just an introduction to the characters. The events of six years from now, when the story begins, might not remain the same with me in it. My presence alone must have caused a butterfly effect[2] that will change the storyline completely, meaning I can’t rely on the novel’s content to help me. I have to find my own way to help Halilintar survive on his coronation day.

[2] The Butterfly Effect is a term in “Chaos Theory” related to “sensitive dependence on initial conditions,” where small changes in one place can result in significant differences in a later state.

Unfortunately, I have no idea how to do that. Before this, I was just an art student, and nothing I learned in college is useful in helping me save Halilintar. And even though I’ve tried to learn a lot about this world, I still don’t understand anything. Why do the MCs in transmigration novels always manage to do this so easily? Is that what they call the protagonist's halo? Why don’t I have it? It’s so unfair.

But I’ve noticed something strange. Halilintar, who will ascend as King but dies on his coronation day, is the strongest swordsman in the Ignisia Kingdom. He’s also blessed by the Goddess of Thunder, who is known to be aggressive and powerful. And in my encounters with Halilintar, he’s shown himself to be a very vigilant person. He almost slammed me to the ground when I walked behind him without saying a word. How could someone like him die so easily? My brother didn’t explain anything about Halilintar’s death—he seemed so shocked to find that the ending of his favorite novel was like that.

The question of who wants to kill Halilintar sounds heavy because Halilintar must have many enemies. But how about the question of who can kill Halilintar? Halilintar couldn’t possibly die at the hands of just anyone. I have two speculations. First, the person who kills Halilintar is someone much stronger than him. Second, it’s someone he trusts.

Finding someone stronger than Halilintar who can kill him isn’t easy, but it’s not impossible either. Halilintar maybe the strongest in Ignisia. But he’s not the strongest in the entire world. Someone could have hired a person from outside Ignisia to kill Halilintar. Whoever wanted to do that must be very wealthy and hold a great grudge against Halilintar.

As for the second thought, Halilintar must have trusted this person so much that he let his guard down. How he was killed, I still don’t know. It could have been with poison or a direct attack. Whatever it was, it ultimately resulted in Halilintar’s death.

Hah… life as a noble isn’t easy, is it?

“Your Highness, it's time for your tea with Prince Halilintar.” Maripos’ voice interrupted my train of thought. I had forgotten that ever since I took over Taufan’s body and tried all sorts of crazy things to return to my world, Halilintar had started spending more and more time with me. Maripos said that previously Halilintar would only come at night when I was asleep, but now he also visits when I’m awake. He said it might be because Halilintar was afraid I would act out again, as even Maripos was still worried I might do so. I really couldn’t blame them for thinking that way, but I had promised I wouldn’t do it again.

“Should I tell him that you are not feeling well today?”

“No. It’s fine. I will meet him. He will make a fuss if you tell him that.”

Maripos nodded and said he would help me get ready.

Hmm, I still wonder why the novel said that Taufan was forgotten by his brothers. If that were true, then wouldn’t Halilintar be wasting his time visiting Taufan so often? He always seems concerned when I can’t get out of bed due to my frail condition. And from the way he looks at me and treats me, I can tell that Halilintar is someone who deeply cares about his brothers. Perhaps the novel didn’t mean Halilintar but rather Taufan’s other brothers? Because so far, I’ve only ever met Halilintar.

Either way, I’ll find out soon enough.

“Have you been waiting long, Your Highness?” I asked the young man in front of me.

He shook his head. “No.”

Yes, let me introduce him. This young man is Halilintar von Ignisia, the protagonist of the novel The True Heir of Ignisia, and now my brother. Overall, Halilintar’s personality and appearance resemble my brother in my previous world, except for his red eyes and his affection toward me. It really makes me wonder if my brother also transmigrated into this novel, or if this is actually an alternate world from my own.

“What have you been doing today?”

“Not much. I have just been reading books in my room, Your Highness.”

“Aren’t you going outside to play today?”

“No. I just want to stay in my room today.”

Halilintar didn’t respond. Now, he was staring at his teacup, which had remained untouched. Meanwhile, I was busy adding more sugar to my tea. I could still taste the bitterness from the medicine I had earlier. Maybe I should ask the doctor who usually checks on me if the medicine could be changed into pill form so I wouldn’t have to endure the bitterness for so long.

As I was about to add yet another sugar cube, Halilintar reached out to stop my hand from adding more to my tea. He looked at me seriously and said, “That’s enough. Don’t consume too much sugar.”

“I can still taste the bitterness on my tongue,” I complained.

Halilintar released his hand that was restraining me. I immediately added the last sugar cube to my tea and stirred it roughly. Ahh... the bitterness is so torturous. So torturous. If only the bitterness on my tongue had disappeared, I definitely wouldn’t be able to drink tea that now tastes like sugar water.

“Oh, right. I saw Prince Duri by the lake yesterday. Wha—”

“The lake?! You went to the lake again?!” Halilintar leaned toward me, his expression a mix of anger and worry. I nearly spilled my tea when he shouted. He usually didn’t act this way. Halilintar was always calm and appeared indifferent, seemingly unaffected by anything. Though, I could understand the reason behind his unusual behavior. Just like Maripos, whom I had troubled and made suffer over the past month, Halilintar had suffered too. Every time I acted out in my attempts to return to my world, Maripos would stop me and then report it to Halilintar. I think I’ve aged them both within a month.

“Calm down, Your Highness. I was only there to paint.”

Halilintar’s tense body relaxed, though his sharp gaze on me remained. Of course, he would be suspicious of me. Things had only calmed down in the past week, considering that two weeks ago, I had been constantly causing a scene—ahh, I felt a bit embarrassed recalling it.

“Regarding what I said earlier. I saw Prince Duri by the lakeside yesterday. Isn’t the prince’s palace quite far from here?”

Halilintar, though only 18 years old, now looked exhausted as if he were 30 when I brought up Prince Duri. Being the eldest is never easy, even if you’re a prince. The young man rubbed his face and gave me a tired look. “Yes, I’m sure he snuck out again.”

“Oh? I thought he was… only 9 years old, right? That is quite a distance for him to travel here.”

He had indeed walked quite far from his palace to get here. Although I had never set foot outside the palace grounds, I remembered that whenever Halilintar visited, he always came by carriage. I had also once requested a map of the Kingdom to check the location of the other princes’ residences. It wasn’t a distance a 9-year-old should have been able to cover.

“Yes, he is still 9 years old. But Duri has his ways of traveling to various places.”

“Ah... he must have very nimble feet.”

Halilintar gave a small smile. “Indeed.”

Chapter Text

No matter how many times I look at this body, I still feel horrified by the fact of how skinny the body I now inhabit is. My previous self didn’t have a muscular body like most of my friends or brothers either. But at least I wasn’t as thin as the body of Taufan, the Second Prince of Ignisia. It might not be an exaggeration to say that he looks like a walking corpse. His fingers alone look like bones wrapped in skin, and his skin is so pale. Like right now, the clothes I’m wearing feel so loose on my body, even though I can see the marks indicating they’ve been resized multiple times to fit Taufan’s frame. Did this child never eat before? Why is he so thin? And his skin is so pale even though I’ve started getting used to sunbathing every morning and sleeping earlier.

It’s quite ironic how Taufan is blessed by the Goddess of Wind, yet his body looks like it could be blown away by a single gust.

“The weather has been so hot lately. Choose something thinner and lighter for me to wear,” I ordered Maripos. Oh, I’m getting used to the whole commanding thing.

“Yes, Your Highness. I will prepare it immediately.”

While Maripos is preparing the clothes I’ll wear today, I’m thinking about where I should go. Should I go to the lake and finish my painting or laze around on the terrace reading a book? Hmm, but I already planned to strengthen this body a bit while trying out the powers it has. Taufan is blessed by the Goddess of Wind, right? Halilintar in the novel is blessed by the Goddess of Thunder, which allows him to use lightning magic in various battles. Taufan should also have considerable power, even if his body is weak. It seems I’ll have to trouble Captain Fang to accompany me today.

“Maripos, after this, call Captain Fang,” I said as Maripos helped me get dressed.

“Yes, Your Highness.”

Now, how should I test Taufan’s powers? Do I have to say something to activate them, or can it happen naturally? Really, how do the MCs in transmigration stories instantly know how to use their powers? Why don’t they provide a guidebook on how to use your powers, like ‘take a deep breath and focus your mind on something,’ or something like that? Ah, it’s just troublesome.

Since Taufan is blessed by the Goddess of Wind, his powers should be related to the wind. However, I don’t recall my brother ever mentioning anything related to wind in the novel. In fact, he only briefly discussed the Goddess of Wind to explain Taufan’s very brief backstory.

Could the other reason Taufan is considered unworthy as a prince be because he can’t use his powers? So if that’s the case, no one would suspect anything if I can’t use wind power, right? I just want to see if Taufan has any powers and if I can use them or not. If not, I’ll start training my stamina so I won’t suffer from this weak physique all the time. And maybe this way, I won’t have to take those bitter medicines anymore.

My thoughts were interrupted by a knock on the door, accompanied by Maripos’s voice saying he had arrived with Captain Fang. I immediately gave them permission to enter the room that had become my chamber for the past month. Maripos entered first, followed by another young man with dark purple hair and red eyes. His body was tall and muscular, and he was wearing a soldier’s uniform with a sword strapped to his waist.

As Maripos moved to stand behind me, Captain Fang remained standing in place, waiting for me to state my reason for calling him.

“Captain, I hope you don’t mind accompanying me to the training grounds today.”

“The training grounds? But why, Your Highness?”

“I want you to train me.” I smiled cheerfully as I said it, hoping my smile would soften Captain Fang. Unfortunately, that was far from my expectation.

“What do you mean, Your Highness?!” Maripos exclaimed. When I turned to him, I could see his face flushed red, and he looked angry. I didn’t understand why Maripos seemed angry, and Captain Fang hadn’t said anything, which only made the situation worse.

“Huh?”

“Your Highness, would you mind if I asked why you want to do this?” Captain Fang finally spoke. But for some reason, his gaze seemed intimidating, as if he was staring directly into my soul, making me want to spill all the truths I was hiding.

“He is right, Your Highness! What do you mean by suddenly wanting to train your body?! Just a few days ago, you were coughing up blood! Moreover, if you overexert yourself, you won’t be able to get up later. Also, with the weak body you have now, how do you expect to be trained by Captain Fang?”

I know Taufan has poor health and a weak body. He always looks pitiful, even though I’ve tried to make him look better. But hearing Maripos spill all that makes me feel both sorry and annoyed at the same time. Honestly, I still wonder why I ended up in Taufan’s body. Is it because we share the same name and face? But still, waking up in such a weak body when you’re used to having a strong one is really troublesome. And I have no intention of getting used to having a weak body. At the very least, I need to make Taufan’s body capable of walking long distances or running without worrying about fainting due to weakness. And I think it would be good if I found out whether Taufan has any power I can use in the future.

“Even though what Maripos said was rather impudent, I agree with him, Your Highness. We just do not want anything bad to happen to you,” Captain Fang stated.

I know they’re saying this out of concern, but it won’t change my mind about wanting to have a much healthier body than I have now. Finally, after a series of arguments with both of them—mostly with Maripos—Captain Fang agreed to train me. He said he would give me light exercises to build up my stamina and instructed me to immediately inform him if anything went wrong. Maripos still opposed it and kept saying that what I had decided was a bad idea. I completely ignored that. Now, I am following Captain Fang to the training grounds, accompanied by Maripos, who keeps nagging about all the things I shouldn’t do.

Sometimes I feel like Maripos treats me like a baby. Or is it just my imagination?

Once we arrived at the training grounds, I told Maripos to stop nagging and stand at the edge of the grounds to watch us. Maripos agreed, although his sharp eyes kept following my every move. But never mind that; I’d better focus on what I’m about to do now. According to Captain Fang, since my body is too weak, we will start with the basics. He just asked me to run as best as I could. He said it was to measure my body’s stamina. Although I agreed with what he said, it still hurt because he considered me so weak.

As I had already guessed, Taufan’s body couldn’t last long running. I barely ran for a minute before I felt so exhausted and out of breath. With such a weak body, how did Taufan survive until the end of the novel without dying from exhaustion or illness? Is it because he has the Goddess's blessing?

“Your condition is much worse than I thought, Your Highness. Maybe it is best if we stop now.”

“No!” I shouted.

“I’m fine,” I said, though struggling to catch my breath.

Captain Fang looked doubtful, and from the corner of my eyes, I could see Maripos shifting uneasily as if he was now considering whether to drag me away from the training grounds or let me stay. I straightened up, trying to look better.

One thing about me, I’m a person with a lot of determination. Do you think how someone like me could make it to the end of the semester in an art major? Now that I’m determined to strengthen Taufan’s body, I won’t go back on my word. Besides, my goal is to protect Halilintar, the best swordsman in Ignisia. How can I achieve my goal if my body is this weak?

Maybe Captain Fang realized there was no use in persuading me. He sighed and continued the training he had planned for me. I was asked to run again, but this time at a much slower pace than before. He said it was important to gradually build up my stamina before increasing the intensity of the training.

Oh, my body is going to hurt so much after this.

Honestly, I’m quite impressed with myself for lasting through two hours of training—though most of it was rest time. Even Captain Fang praised me for not giving up, even though he knew it must have been tough for me. Maripos—as I had predicted—panicked and asked if I was okay and whether I had any injuries. Should I call him Mom for acting like one? I can already imagine the look on Maripos’s face if I did that.

Now, I just need to check if Taufan has any powers. Though I’m not sure how to do that. Should I just think about it? Or is there a specific technique for it? I think I remember in the fantasy novels I’ve read, they talk about something like focusing mana on a single point, and so on. Now the real problem is, how do I focus mana? And how do I know if I have mana inside me? Is it like focusing your mind on something and trying to sense your surroundings? Why don’t I have a cheat code like the main characters in transmigration novels usually do?

I wanted to ask Captain Fang about it, but he would surely become suspicious of me. How could I, the Prince of Ignisia who received the Goddess's blessing since birth, not know how to use mana? Ah, I feel so pathetic.

First, let's try the method I've always read about in transmigration novels. Sit cross-legged, focus my mind on one thing, and try to sense the mana within my body.

Seconds passed, and I felt nothing. Ugh, this method is useless. Or maybe it's just me who's incompetent? Next, I tried to focus my mind on the wind around me—because, you know, the Goddess of Wind is the one who blessed the original Taufan. At that moment, I finally felt something. It was like there was something inside my chest that I couldn't explain. Something that urged to be released. The wind that blew around me also started to feel strange. Like... it was raging.

Why? What did I do wrong? Did I miss a step? How do I control it? How do I stop it?

That's when I felt a pair of hands gripping my shoulders firmly. When I opened my eyes, Captain Fang was in front of me with a panicked expression. He seemed to be saying something, but I couldn't hear anything over the sound of the wind. I opened my mouth to ask what he was saying, but instead of words, something thick and metallic-tasting came out. Captain Fang's face grew more panicked as my blurry vision caught sight of the blood I had just vomited. I noticed other shadows moving around me, which I guessed must have been Maripos.

My point of view shifted as Captain Fang lifted my body and began to run. My head rested limply on his shoulder as my consciousness began to slip away. Before I lost consciousness, I finally heard Maripos's voice, running behind us, shouting at me to hold on.

...

"...wrong... Your Highness."

"...I... why... the medicine isn't working?"

I blinked my eyes several times, trying to focus on the voices I was hearing as my vision slowly adjusted to what I was seeing. To be honest, I had been looking at that ceiling for over a month, but it still felt unfamiliar to me. The voices became clearer than before, and now I could guess who was talking. It was Maripos and Halilintar. I knew Maripos must have hurried to send a message to Halilintar when I fainted, and perhaps Halilintar came as soon as he heard. Why could I already imagine what they would say to me?

I tried to sit, even though my body felt extremely weak at the moment. I felt a sense of déjà vu for some reason. It seemed like when I first opened my eyes in this world, I felt the same way. A feeling of being so weak and exhausted that I couldn't explain. I opened my mouth to say something, but no sound came out. Sure enough, I had lost my voice again. This was exactly like when I first arrived in this world.

The door creaked open, and Halilintar stepped in, followed by Maripos. The first to notice that I was awake was Halilintar. He froze in place, his eyes staring straight at me. I tried to smile, though the exhaustion I felt only intensified, demanding that I close my eyes again.

Halilintar quickly moved to my side. His hand reached out and gently touched my hair. He knelt beside me and looked at me. With us being so close, I just realized that Halilintar's eyes were red and slightly swollen. It seemed he had just been crying. Why was he crying? What was he crying about?

I tried to reach out my hand, but Halilintar caught it and lowered it. He continued to gently stroke my hair, his smile looking sad, with eyes that radiated desperation.

"Please don't do that again. Your body can't handle your power. I will always protect you, so I beg you, Taufan, don't use your power anymore," Halilintar said. His voice trembled, sounding as desperate as his gaze. This time, he looked like he was about to cry as he pleaded with me. His body shook, and his eyes glistened as he tried to hold back tears. This made me feel incredibly guilty for causing him to be like this. I tried once more to reach out my hand. This time, Halilintar didn't stop it; instead, he looked at me with curiosity.

It was a bit more difficult than I imagined, but I managed to touch Halilintar's face. I wanted to tell him not to worry, but unfortunately, my lost voice wasn't helping at all. The only thing I could do was smile at him. Halilintar smiled back at me, but I knew it didn't lessen what he was feeling at the moment. There was a high chance I would be punished and not allowed to train my body again. Honestly, I wondered how Taufan, with such a weak body, could survive with his power. Even for a moment, I knew that the power within Taufan was immense. So strong and difficult to control. I could liken the power Taufan possessed to a storm that raged continuously and was impossible to calm. With such great power and such a weak body, how had Taufan not died from a mana explosion?

For some reason, I felt something strange about this. Taufan was a prince. If he were born with a weak body, they wouldn't have let him bear the Goddess's blessing without trying to strengthen his body.

Nah, I would think about it later. It would be best if I went back to sleep now. I was so tired just trying to stay conscious like this. Halilintar remained by my side until I fell asleep. It seemed he had no intention of leaving me anytime soon. I just hoped he wouldn't get into trouble because of it.

When I opened my eyes again, Halilintar was no longer by my side. Perhaps he had returned to the Prince's palace and his duties as a prince. Blinking my eyes repeatedly, I tried to sit up even though my body still screamed in exhaustion. Unlike when I first woke up in this world, maybe because I was starting to get used to having a weak body, I wasn't as surprised to find myself so tired and weak, even just from sitting up.

"Your Highness? Are you awake?" I heard Maripos's voice, followed shortly by the sound of footsteps approaching me. The young man stood beside me and looked at me with a worried expression, his hand reaching out to help me sit comfortably.

"Ah..." I forgot that my voice was still gone. I replaced my intended thanks with a slight nod to the young man. And Maripos was a capable person because he understood my gesture so easily.

"It is my duty to serve you, Your Highness." Maripos said.

I pointed to my throat and then rubbed my stomach to indicate that I was thirsty and hungry. As before, Maripos understood what I meant and quickly went to fetch food and drink for me. I was left alone with my thoughts.

Taufan had a weak body. That wasn't surprising because I'd been in his body for over a month now. He had immense power. This I only discovered while training my body. With the amount of power he had, I guessed it was difficult to control for several reasons. First, because I was an amateur who knew nothing about magic and such. Second, because Taufan's body was so weak compared to even a small child. Didn't Halilintar beg me earlier not to use my power again because my body couldn't handle it?

If Halilintar went so far as to say that, I became even more certain that something was wrong with Taufan's condition. Should I find out if Taufan was really born with a weak body, or was there something that caused his body to be like this? If I remember correctly, the Ignisia Kingdom had a habit of recording the development and achievements of their Princes and Princesses from birth until death. And there were only a few reasons why records would be stopped. The first was if the Prince or Princess died, and the second was if they were expelled from the Royal family. Taufan's records should still exist, even though he was a forgotten Prince.

I'll look for them after my body is in better condition.

...

It took me three days to regain my voice and an additional day to free myself from Maripos' strict supervision. During my recovery, Halilintar no longer visited me. I guessed he was very busy with his duties as a Prince, leaving him no time to check on my condition. It wasn’t an issue, although I did feel a bit lonely without him. However, he always made sure to write letters, which I would receive at night.

Now, I was preparing to go to the palace library to find out why Taufan never used his powers. Maripos had insisted on bringing me any book I wanted, but how could I let Maripos know that I wanted to read archives about Prince Taufan? He would be suspicious of why I wanted to know about myself. As usual, Captain Fang was accompanying me. Although Maripos wanted to join us, I assigned him other tasks.

Speaking of Captain Fang, he was nearly dismissed by Halilintar for allegedly being negligent in his duties and nearly causing my death. I had to write a lengthy letter to persuade Halilintar not to fire the young man and to try to lessen his punishment. After all, what happened was entirely my fault, but because of my status as a prince, the blame was instead placed on Captain Fang, who had done nothing but follow my requests. This caste system is truly troublesome.

“Your Highness, are you sure you will be alright?” Captain Fang asked as he helped me out of the carriage. I didn’t understand why Captain Fang and Maripos seemed so worried just because I wanted to go to the library. It’s not like I’m heading to a battlefield or something.

“I'll be fine,” I said, although honestly, I still didn’t understand their behavior.

At first, I thought Maripos and Captain Fang’s concern was related to my near-death experience a few days ago. I wasn’t too aware of it either because I was so busy admiring the architecture of the Main Palace, which was vastly different from the Palace where I lived. The corridors were full of captivating paintings and extraordinary statues. Marble floors and gold ornaments adorned every corner of the palace. Even the curtains were red with gold accents, giving off an opulent vibe. Crystal chandeliers hung from the ceilings, and large vases decorated every room. It’s no wonder that those who lived in such luxury would consider the Palace where I lived to be so simple, claiming I had been discarded. Imagine a prince who lived in such grandeur being ‘exiled’ to a place that was far less luxurious than this.

My admiration for the architecture of the Main Palace made me oblivious to the stares of the people around me. It was only when I reached the library and found the librarian acting unfriendly towards me that I noticed. He questioned me with a flat expression and a harsh voice. He didn’t even show me the respect due to a Prince. Normally, in a transmigration novel, the MC would slap anyone who was disrespectful to remind them of their place.

Unfortunately, though I was annoyed by the treatment I received, keeping my hands healthy without breaking bones was a priority for me. Besides, I didn’t want to cause any trouble that might burden Halilintar or others. After all, I was only here to read the archives about Taufan, and after that, I would have no further business here. It’s better to enjoy my time in my palace with servants who properly respect me.

“Let me help you, Your Highness.” Captain Fang offered to carry some of the books I found interesting. Besides being reading material for later, it also served as an alibi so Maripos wouldn’t be suspicious.

I found the archives about Taufan on a bookshelf in the corner of the library. The books on that shelf were covered in dust, which only indicated the laziness of the librarian and the fact that this place might have been forgotten or didn’t interest those who entered the library. Meanwhile, the archives about the other Princes could be easily found at the front of the library.

Captain Fang placed the books he carried on the table that I choose, “Is this all, Your Highness?”

“Yes, if you’re bored, you can go out and take a walk. I’ll be here for a while, reading.”

But Captain Fang shook his head, looking at me with a serious expression before saying, “I’ll stay here and keep an eye on you, Your Highness”

Even though it wasn’t very comfortable to have someone watching over you while you read, I still let the young man do as he pleased. After all, Captain Fang was my personal guard, and he was assigned to protect me. Maripos would scold him if he knew he left my side. I also assured him he could sit whenever he wanted if he got tired of standing.

Without wasting much time, I began reading the archives about Taufan. It was stated that at Taufan’s birth, the wind blew strongly, nearly causing a storm. This was a sign that the Wind Goddess was watching over the second child of the King and Queen. Ten days after his birth, Vint bestowed a blessing upon the baby, giving him his name. Taufan. It was mentioned that Taufan was a cheerful child from an early age and easily laughed. He wasn’t fussy like Halilintar and was easy to play with. Additionally, Taufan had been able to use wind magic since he was 1 year old. Although his magic was uncontrolled and only used for trivial things like flying his toys or the leaves he liked.

Wow, I didn’t know the archives would be this detailed about someone.

I skipped over some details about Taufan’s childhood as it mostly described Taufan’s mischievousness and how he loved to prank his siblings. From this, I could conclude that Taufan was like any other child. Cheerful and playful. There was no mention of him being born with a weak body. On the contrary, Taufan seemed very healthy and full of energy. The records were all positive until I reached the notes from when Taufan was 11 years old. At that time, he lost his mother, the Queen, to a mysterious illness.

In the same year, Taufan managed to awaken the final stage of his Wind power.

Wait a minute. I reread the sentence to make sure I hadn’t misread it. Taufan managed to awaken the final stage of his power? The final stage?! At 11 years old?!

I had read several books about Vint and her powers before this. And there are three stages of power that Vint grants to humans. The first stage is Wind. The most basic power. It cannot be called weak, but it cannot be called strong either. Then the second stage is Cyclone. Much stronger than Wind and more aggressive but still controllable, though more difficult. The final stage is Tempest. Stronger than the previous two stages and more uncontrollable. It was even mentioned in the books that those who possessed wind power could only reach and control the final stage when they had a strong mental state. Even then, after training for decades. And Taufan, who was only 11 years old at the time, managed to awaken such a powerful force?! How could this be?! Moreover, he skipped the second stage and directly entered the third stage. This child... should I call him a genius or a madman?

I continued reading to ensure the continuation. It was stated that Taufan nearly flattened Ignisia when he awakened his final stage of power—which didn’t surprise me—and then fell into a coma for a month. It was a miracle he didn’t die because of it. After Taufan woke from his coma, he seemed to have become a different person. He was always frightened and trembling if anyone tried to approach him. His power often went out of control because he couldn’t yet manage it well. He became paranoid, if I could say so. Then when he was 14 years old, the King passed away due to illness. Not long after that, Taufan was moved from the Rising Sun Palace to the SunSet Palace—my current residence.

Why did the King and Queen die at such a young age? Did they have a history of a fatal disease that caused them to die early?

As I continued reading the records about Taufan, I realized something was off. The records about him when he was 14 years old were so sparse. The documentation ended with Taufan's relocation to the Sunset Palace, then skipped to when he was 15 years old. This section began discussing his weakening physical condition. Taufan's declining health began to affect his powers; he could no longer use them. If he did, there would be risks he'd have to bear, like what I experienced a few days ago. Wait, why does this seem so sudden? When he was 14, there was no mention of Taufan having a weak body, even though he had become a paranoid person. But by the time he was 15, he suddenly had a frail body? It feels like something is missing.

Unfortunately, no matter how much I flipped through the pages to find what was missing, I couldn’t find anything.

What happened? Who actually wrote this archive? Did they get lazy writing about Taufan just because he was exiled to the Sunset Palace?! No, even the records about Taufan when he was 15 years old were still as detailed as before. It's as if someone deliberately hid what happened to Taufan when he was 14. Perhaps that's where the reason lies for why Taufan's body became so weak despite possessing such immense power—considering the fact that an 11-year-old child nearly leveled Ignisia.

"Captain Fang."

"Yes, Your Highness?"

"How long have you been working for me?" I asked. Captain Fang is my personal guard. Basically, he is someone who has to be around me almost all the time. Maybe he knows something.

"Since a year and a half ago, Your Highness."

A year and a half? I thought he had been with me for a long time. Turns out, it hasn't been that long. Aren’t there any others who have worked for me for a long time?

"What about the other workers in the palace?"

"I am not too sure about this, Your Highness. But most of the workers in your palace started around the same time as I did."

"Hm? Isn't there anyone who's been here much longer than that?"

Captain Fang didn't answer immediately, creating an awkward silence. When I turned to look at him, I saw that he was staring at me as if assessing me. This made me realize how foolish my question was. How could I not know who has been working with me for a long time? Especially since the records mentioned that Taufan was known for his brilliant mind before he started shutting himself off.

"Ahem! I mean… yeah… in the two years after I was relocated to the Sunset Palace, I rarely interacted with anyone other than you, Maripos, and the servants who directly served me. Maybe there are long-time workers in the Sunset Palace that I’m not aware of."

Even for a moment, I was sure I saw the corner of Captain Fang's lips lift a few millimeters before he returned to his usual stoic expression. The young man cleared his throat, "I am really sorry, Your Highness. I am also not that close to the other workers, but from what I heard when I started working with you, all the workers who initially served in the Sunset Palace before you were relocated had been dismissed or ordered to serve somewhere else."

"Huh? All of them?"

"Yes. Except for Butler Maripos, we are all considered new workers."

All except Maripos? Does that mean Maripos was with me even before I was relocated to the Sunset Palace? Ah, I can’t possibly ask him about this directly, can I? Then what’s the reason all the previous servants of the Sunset Palace were dismissed or relocated? Did they somehow offend Taufan? Even so, it seems impossible that Taufan would fire them. Even though I don’t know the original Taufan, I’m sure he wasn’t the type to abuse his status to oppress others. Also, judging by the current servants at the Sunset Palace who are so kind to me, there’s no way Taufan would have been the one to fire the previous servants.

What exactly happened when Taufan was 14 years old?

Chapter Text

Although I didn’t find the answers I was looking for, I’m quite satisfied with the things I’ve learned about the original Taufan. I also borrowed several books about Ignisia history and some novels to use as an excuse to deceive Maripos. Captain Fang kindly helped me carry them—or maybe he did it because he felt it was his duty? Either way, it doesn’t matter to me. My arms now feel like limp noodles that could easily snap, so there’s no way I could carry a stack of books on my own.

"Your Highness, why didn’t you ask Maripos to carry these books? Instead of coming here yourself, wouldn’t it be better if you had Maripos do it?"

"Hm? I just wanted to check on a few things. Besides, it’s been a while since I went out; a little stroll would be pleasant."

Captain Fang didn’t say anything else. One thing I like about Captain Fang is that he doesn’t ask too many questions. If I had gone with Maripos, he would definitely have tried to dig into everything I said until he got to the root of it. And he’s smart enough to do it in a way that makes me afraid I might accidentally reveal my identity. I don’t know what they would do if they found out I’m not Taufan, their prince, but I know it wouldn’t end well. They’d most likely think of me as some malicious entity with evil intentions toward Ignisia, or even worse. So, I have to be careful not to expose my true identity.

"Your Highness, would you like to rest for a moment?" Captain Fang asked. From the look on his face, he seemed worried about me, which I can’t blame him for because now I’m already out of breath just from walking from the library to the exit. Damn, why is this place so big? What were people thinking when they built this palace?

"It’s alright, I’m just a little tired."

That was a lie. I feel like I’m about to die just from walking. This weak body is really something.

"I truly do not mean to be rude, Your Highness, but you do not look alright," Captain Fang said.

Do I look that bad? I thought I had gotten better at hiding my condition, but apparently, he can still see through me. I want to take his advice and rest for a moment because I really am exhausted. But for a while now, I’ve felt uneasy, a sense of unrest that I can’t quite understand. I just want to get back to my residence as soon as possible. Being in this place is gradually making me feel vulnerable and unsafe. Whether this feeling belongs to the original Taufan or is my own, ever since I left the library, I’ve been feeling like this. Is this what they call a bad premonition?

"It’s fine, I am quite tired now, but I want to get back as soon as possible."

Captain Fang looked at me for a moment, saying nothing, which made me think that maybe he didn’t believe my excuse, even though what I said was the truth.

"Would you like me to carry you, Your Highness?"

I cleared my throat to hide my laughter. Somehow, I found it amusing how Captain Fang offered to carry me. His face was expressionless while he held the books in both hands. How did this young man expect to carry me while holding such books?

Realizing what he had said, Captain Fang turned his gaze away from me, pretending nothing had happened, though his ears turned red from embarrassment. I chuckled at his awkwardness. No matter how you look at it, Captain Fang is just 18 years old, a human who might make silly mistakes one day. And today is one of those days. I wanted to tease him, but Captain Fang isn’t that close to me. Unlike Maripos, Captain Fang tends to keep a certain distance between us. Maybe this is because I am a prince while he is my personal guard.

Isn’t there an unwritten rule that nobles shouldn’t mingle with those of lower status? Ah, so annoying.

Unfortunately, our fun ended abruptly when we crossed paths with a group of teenagers while descending the stairs. They were dressed in fine clothes, their chins held high, suggesting they were the children of nobles who had come to the palace for some reason. I intended to pass them by without getting involved. After all, in transmigration novels, the main character always gets into trouble when encountering people like them. Also, I didn’t know their names. I had only named them in my head based on their appearances. Blame Taufan for not leaving me with any memories.

"Isn’t this His Highness, the Second Prince? What an honor to meet you here. Or should I say… surprising." One of them remarked. I could see a mocking smile on his face and the way he gave a half-hearted bow. I really don’t know how low Taufan’s reputation has fallen in his kingdom, but I know the kid in front of me is being disrespectful. I noticed his friends giggling, even pointing at me while speaking loudly.

How should I respond to them? In transmigration novels, the MCs usually confront people like these in a manner different from the original owner. They would slap or sarcastically insult those who belittle them, putting these people in their place. However, with my body being too fragile, I'd probably break my hand if I tried to slap them. Besides, I haven’t really figured out how the nobility in this world operates. Is it normal for a discarded and forgotten prince to act arrogant, or is he still respected because he’s a prince? Ah, just thinking about it gives me a headache.

Let's just deal with them normally; after all, they're just teenagers who can’t tell right and wrong yet. I'm an adult, and this isn’t my world, nor am I the one they’re truly insulting. With that mindset, I managed to calm myself down and not get angry at them. Instead, I put on a friendly smile and said, “I’m glad you feel that way, Young Master…”

What are their names? Why don't they wear name tags so I can identify them? Who could possibly remember the names of all the nobles in this kingdom? I bet even Halilintar couldn't remember them all.

Strangely, the teenagers' expressions shifted from cheerful to sour. What went wrong? Didn’t I smile at them politely? Are they blaming me for not remembering their names? Tch, they're mad over something that isn't even my fault. Ah, living in this place is really complicated.

“It seems the Prince has forgotten my name. Allow me to introduce myself then.”

Is it just me, or does this teenager seem angry even though he’s smiling? I noticed that although he lowered his body slightly, his eyes remained fixed on me, filled with contempt.

“My name is Pavan Morgan, the first son of Count Morgan, Your Highness.”

Even after he introduced himself, I still had no idea who he was. Is he an important figure in the kingdom, which gives him the audacity to act so disrespectfully towards one of its princes? Should I ask Maripos for a list of the kingdom’s nobles?

“Ah… Young Master Pavan,” I said, pretending to recognize him even though I had no idea who he was. I just hoped my smile was convincing.

It seems once again my smile didn't have the desired effect. I need to practice my smiling skills from now on.

Pavan, the teenager who had been speaking to me all along, scoffed and rolled his eyes. That’s not polite behavior, right? I think it isn't—especially since Captain Fang promptly stepped forward to stand protectively in front of me. His tall stature and piercing gaze made him appear incredibly intimidating. Captain Fang lowered his head to stare directly at the teenagers, especially at Pavan. The other teenagers flinched, stepping back in fear when faced with Captain Fang. But Pavan remained in place, glaring defiantly at Captain Fang. I have to admit this teenager is quite brave, or is it that he’s just stupid? Many people say that stupidity and bravery have a thinner line between them than a sheet of paper.

“Young Master Morgan, please mind your manners in front of the royal family,” Captain Fang said. His voice somehow matched his intimidating appearance. He’s only 18 years old, yet he can easily intimidate others just with his voice or his presence. Unfortunately, Pavan, as I mentioned earlier, either brave or stupid, didn’t heed Captain Fang’s warning.

“You, a commoner, should also mind your manners in front of noble. Who do you think you are to speak to a noble like me?” Pavan exclaimed, pointing at Captain Fang with his finger. His expression clearly showed his disdain for Captain Fang, while Captain Fang remained silent and unmoving. Oh, this annoyed me more than before. I touched Captain Fang's shoulder, signaling him to step aside slightly. “Young Master Pavan, as much as I ‘enjoy’ seeing your face and your friends', it’s unfortunate that I must return to my quarters.”

Pavan still maintained his mocking smile. Perhaps he thought I was a coward who would run away.

“Since you happened to visit this place, consider stopping by the library. The books there are quite interesting. I’m sure if you read some of them, we could have a proper two-way conversation like humans.”

I watched with satisfaction as Pavan’s expression gradually changed. He didn’t respond to my words; instead, he just glared at me. I tried to suppress my laughter at seeing his sour face and his inability to counter my words. I kept smiling at him, which seemed to annoy him even more. Whatever was on his mind, he ultimately decided to leave rather than continue engaging with us.

Unfortunately, I underestimated Pavan just because he’s still a teenager. The boy chose to push me and Captain Fang as he passed by. Maybe the force he used wasn’t that great, but I, who was already exhausted and standing at the edge of the stairs, lost my balance and fell.

Out of all the things I thought I might experience, dying from falling down the stairs wasn't on my list—especially being pushed by a reckless teenager who doesn't know the difference between right and wrong.

My hands instinctively reached out, trying to grab onto something, anything, but there was nothing to hold onto to stop my fall. I could only watch as Captain Fang threw aside the books he was holding and ran toward me.

"YOUR HIGHNESS!" Captain Fang shouted, his face a mixture of panic and fear.

He reached out, trying to catch me, but only his fingertips brushed against my collar slightly. Strangely, everything seemed to move in slow motion. Time seemed to stop for everyone else and for me too, but I knew my body was going to hit the floor hard. In the split second before I hit the ground, all I could think was whether Halilintar would blame Captain Fang again and try to expel him because of this. I sincerely hoped that wouldn't happen.

Just as I was sure my body was mere inches from the floor, I heard an unfamiliar voice shout, "Roots, entangle!" and suddenly, my fall was halted. I was still in mid-air, suspended by thick plant roots that had somehow appeared out of nowhere. Although these roots were firm and solid, they held me gently, preventing my fall. It was as if these roots had a mind of their own, caring for me. Still bewildered, I heard Captain Fang's voice asking if I was alright. How should I answer him? On one hand, my heart was still pounding from the fall, but on the other hand, I was perfectly fine, albeit confused by the roots that had just saved me.

Slowly, the roots began to lower me safely to the floor. Even when my legs wobbled, unable to support me properly, they steadied me, making sure I could stand on my own. Without thinking, I stroked the roots, and they seemed to enjoy it. Do these things actually have thoughts of their own? They reminded me of puppies, behaving like this.

"Prince, are you alright?"

I wasn’t sure when Captain Fang had gotten so close, but he was now standing in front of me. Perhaps I had been too focused on the roots, which were now slowly retreating. Following their movement, I noticed a young boy standing not far from Captain Fang and me.

"Prince? Are you hurt?"

"Huh? No. No. I'm fine."

Captain Fang still looked skeptical, but he didn't press further. He glanced at me once more before turning his gaze to something behind me. When Captain Fang bowed, I turned and saw the young boy walking toward us. He smiled brightly, bouncing slightly as he waved his arms in the air.

"Greetings to Prince Duri." Captain Fang said.

Prince Duri? Duri? So this child is one of the princes and the sixth brother of Taufan?

Duri von Ignisia, twin brother of Solar and blessed by Gevix, the Goddess of Plants. I couldn’t quite remember what important role Duri played in the novel, but I had a feeling he was a significant character.

When my eyes met his, my chest suddenly ached, though I didn’t know why. My heart felt as if it was being squeezed, and a deep sorrow settled in my heart. I couldn’t understand where this feeling was coming from. I admit that Duri, like Halilintar, resembled my sixth brother greatly, but this was my first time meeting Prince Duri. I also didn’t have a particularly deep connection with my own brother, so this emotion was completely unfamiliar and unexpected. Honestly, this was a new feeling for me, and I wasn't prepared to face it. Moreover, I had no idea why I was feeling this way. 

I clutched my chest as the pain intensified, my legs trembling as if they couldn’t support my weight any longer. This sensation felt as if it was tearing me apart, pulling me down. No. This wasn’t my emotion. If I think back, didn’t I feel something similar when I first met Halilintar? Could this be Taufan’s emotions? Does that mean a part of Taufan’s consciousness still lingers in this body? But why did he have these feelings? It felt as though he was seeing his dead brother again. But as far as I know, only Halilintar died at the end of the novel. Duri, who didn’t take part in the fight for the throne, would lead a much more peaceful and safe life compared to his twin brother, Solar.

"Prince!"

I could feel Captain Fang catching me, and I vaguely heard his panicked voice calling out to me. Unfortunately, this strange sensation gnawing at my heart had consumed all of my attention. Captain Fang’s voice now sounded like a ringing in my ears. My vision blurred, and I struggled to breathe. Why? What was happening to me? I was perfectly fine just moments ago, so why was I like this now?

I remained conscious as Captain Fang lifted me, though I could barely hear him shouting something. The ringing in my ears was so loud and disorienting. This was truly torturous because I was still conscious even though I felt like I was about to faint. Captain Fang carried me into a room—a bedroom, to be precise. He carefully laid me down on the bed. Unfortunately, I still couldn’t hear what he was saying, and my vision remained blurred. Then, a green light appeared near me. Something was happening, but I didn’t know what. I couldn’t tell how long the green light lasted before it was replaced by a golden light. At this point, I felt my eyes growing heavier. I was either going to sleep or pass out. Either way, I didn’t care.

…

“I will save you. I promise I will save all of you, Your Highness.” He cried while holding the hand of the young boy in front of him. The boy only smiled, gently patting his hand, “It’s okay, brother. Let it go.”

But he shook his head. He didn’t want to hear those words from the boy in front of him. The question of why this boy was so resigned to his fate kept swirling in his mind. What could he do to save this boy? What could he do to save them all? Why had none of his actions succeeded? He only wanted to save them; was it so difficult to achieve? What else did he have now except for his soul in his body and the pain etched into his heart?

If he also exchanged his soul, would he be able to save them all?

...

It seems I dreamt something sad, but I don’t remember what it was. I chose to forget it upon waking up; after all, dreams are just passing flowers, right?

When I woke up, as usual, Maripos was the one by my side. He was still as noisy as ever, even scolding me for not listening to him. I chose to ignore the young man’s scolding and focused on other things. For example, Halilintar was staring at me so intensely as if he wanted to tear me apart, or the little boy in green who was doodling on my blank canvas. Why were they both here? Just being with Maripos was exhausting enough; why did they have to add to my burden?

Maripos hadn’t finished scolding when Halilintar pushed him aside to get to me. I wanted to thank him but hesitated when I saw Halilintar’s expression.

“Taufan, I hope you have a good explanation.”

Huh? Why is Halilintar like this with me? He looked so angry, and I didn’t understand why. What had I done wrong? Even when I tried to commit suicide to return to my original world, Halilintar wouldn’t scold me immediately upon waking. He would usually wait until the next day before starting his scolding. So why is he like this now?

“I... honestly, I’m confused about what you mean, Your Highness.”

I could only watch as Halilintar roughly rubbed his face. He looked at me, still with anger in his eyes, then glanced at Maripos and shifted his gaze to the little boy who was completely unbothered by what was happening. When he looked back at me, his expression was much calmer, but I could tell that he still had anger in his chest that he was trying to control.

“You nearly died today. Duri said you were pushed down the stairs by Count Morgan’s son. And your guard, once again, your guard failed to protect you. What do you think you’re doing at the Main Palace? What would have happened to you if Duri hadn’t been there?”

When Halilintar mentioned Captain Fang, I remembered the purple-haired young man again. I hope Halilintar doesn’t dismiss or punish Captain Fang for what happened today. It wasn’t his fault.

“Where is Captain Fang, Your Highness?”

“Why are you still asking about that?!” Halilintar raised his voice. I flinched involuntarily, even the little boy who had been engrossed in painting now glanced at us with his green eyes. Seeing Halilintar like this reminded me of my eldest brother. He wasn’t someone who was patient and often got angry at our antics. When I was younger I thought he was too extreme, but as I grew up, I began to understand the burden he carried as the eldest child. Perhaps Halilintar is like that too. As the eldest and a brother, he has the responsibility to take care of his younger brothers. But as a prince, he has a duty to think about his people. Not to mention the fight for the throne that he will face. His burdens are too much for someone who is only 18 years old.

I gestured for Maripos to come closer and help me sit up. During this, Halilintar didn’t take his eyes off me, but his expression gradually softened compared to before. The young man sat on the edge of my bed, looking at me while waiting for me to explain.

“Your Highness, first of all, I didn’t know this would happen. However, I can assure you that Captain Fang is completely innocent in this matter. So, don’t punish him.”

Halilintar looked skeptical, but fortunately, he didn’t say anything and only allowed me to continue speaking.

“Secondly, I went to the Main Palace because there was something I wanted to find in the library,” Before Halilintar could interrupt me, I quickly continued, “Also, I’ve been here for a long time. I just wanted to take a walk for a while.”

At my last sentence, Halilintar’s expression turned sad. He reached out, took my hand, and squeezed it gently. From the way he looked at me, I could tell there were many things he wanted to say, but he chose to remain silent. Halilintar gently stroked the back of my hand, waiting for me to continue explaining. He had become the Halilintar I knew from this world. Although I must admit, I was still not used to this gentler version of Halilintar.

“And lastly, I think all of this happened because my body is too weak. I’m not trying to defend Count Morgan’s son, but he surely didn’t mean to do it. So don’t be too angry, Your Highness.” I said. I forced a smile, hoping Halilintar wouldn’t be so angry as to kill Pavan and his family. I often watch dramas with royal themes, and if someone is disrespectful, especially if they endanger a royal family member, they might receive a death sentence. Just thinking about it makes me shudder. If this story of mine were a novel and I were the main character, readers might think that my heart is too soft. What can I say? I live in the peaceful 21st century and have never faced situations like this before. The fact that a person's life in this world doesn’t mean much even if you’re a noble only makes me long for my own world even more.

When I mentioned Count Morgan’s name, Halilintar’s expression darkened again. He released my hand and stood up.

“He dared to endanger you, Taufan. And you can still say he didn’t mean to? Your guard has also confirmed that he insulted and pushed you. I will not forgive those who have dared to harm my family. He and his family will pay for what he has done.”

As much as I am touched by Halilintar’s affection for me—specifically for his brothers—I don’t want a massacre to occur just because of a young boy’s mistake. Pavan did make a fatal mistake, I don’t deny that. But should his family also suffer because of his actions?

“Of course. It is their fault for not properly raising their child. They will not receive the death penalty, but Pavan Morgan will be imprisoned for life for his crimes against the royal family, all of their assets will be confiscated, and his entire family will be sold into slavery.” Halilintar said when I asked about it.

What kind of frightening system is this? I thought their titles would only be downgraded to Baron or made into commoners, but sold into slavery? Even if Pavan’s intention was to hurt me, this punishment is too severe for his family.

“Your Highness, as much as I appreciate your concern for me, let me decide what punishment is appropriate for them to avoid bias.”

Halilintar’s expression remained the same as before; he seemed to not believe that I could decide on a punishment for Pavan and his family—he wasn’t wrong, to be honest—because I genuinely didn’t know what kind of punishment could satisfy Halilintar’s feelings without harming those who were not involved in this incident. Can’t this issue be resolved with just an apology? I don’t like prolonging matters related to me, especially since I still don’t know the fate of Captain Fang.

Halilintar remained adamant that Pavan and his family must receive the harshest punishment, regardless of whether the actions of their son were intentional or not. I knew I wouldn’t be able to convince Halilintar at this moment; I would have to wait until he calmed down before trying to persuade him again. Let’s set aside Pavan and his family for now; I need to find out what happened to Captain Fang.

“What about Captain Fang? I hope Your Highness doesn’t plan to dismiss him again.”

Halilintar’s furrowed brow was answer enough for me. I sighed quietly, hard to believe that such an impulsive young man would one day win the fight for the throne.

Chapter Text

Boboiboy Fanfiction

©  Boboiboy | Animonsta Studio

A/N: The entire story is purely fictional, and the author does not profit from writing this story. If there are any similarities in ideas, character names, or locations, they are purely coincidental.

≫ ──── ≪•◦ ❈ ◦•≫ ──── ≪

If I meet Pavan again, I'll make Captain Fang knock some sense into him so that the boy realizes the gravity of his actions, which not only endangered himself but his entire family. He should bow and thank me for preventing him and his family from being sold as slaves. I spent three days persuading Halilintar to cancel the punishment for Captain Fang and Pavan's family, with an additional two days to stop Halilintar from going to Count Morgan's residence and killing Pavan outright.

Thinking about the difficulties I've faced in the past five days to save them, I feel like I deserve a reward. At the very least, a thank you.

Of course, I don't expect Pavan and his family to come to the Sunset Palace to thank me. What noble would bother to thank a discarded prince? The only consolation I received was Captain Fang sincerely thanking me and promising to continue protecting me. That is enough for me.

After what happened to me, Halilintar has tightened his watch over me. He also forbids me from going anywhere without taking more than two guards with me. I really don't understand why Halilintar is so worried about me that he's become like this—could it be related to Taufan almost leveling Ignisia five years ago? I don't think it's because of that. Never mind, I don't want to think about it.

I have other things to worry about right now. One of them is the child currently playing with Maripos. A child who has the exact same face and name as my own younger brother in my world, Prince Duri. This child has been frequently visiting my palace for some unknown reason. He never talks to me and only plays with Maripos. When I try to talk to him, he just looks at me with a strange expression. As if me talking to him is something I shouldn't be doing.

Besides playing with Maripos, he also often scribbles on my blank canvases or runs around the garden with a few other servants. More often, he invites Papileon to play with him. Seeing his behavior, I think what was said in the novel about Taufan not having a good relationship with his brothers is true. Maybe Halilintar is the exception.

"Your Highness, you look pale. Are you all right?" Captain Fang said as he approached me. I, who was sitting on a bench in the garden watching Maripos and Duri play, just gave him a smile. Actually, my physical condition is fine, the fatigue I felt when I first woke up in this world is no longer an obstacle for me, though sometimes I wish I didn't feel it. The problem lies in my emotions. Every time I see Duri, I always feel the same thing I felt when I first saw him.

I have tried to recall the contents of the novel "The True Heir of Ignisia" that my brother told me about, but no matter how hard I try to remember, there isn't a single mention of the death of any prince other than Halilintar. And that was only at the end of the novel. So why do I have this feeling? No, more accurately, why does Taufan feel this way? Did something happen before I entered Taufan's body? Like he accidentally caused Duri to nearly die? Because that would explain Duri's attitude towards me and the feelings I have right now. I want to ask Maripos or Halilintar, but unfortunately, they would probably find it strange if I asked them about it. The records on Taufan are also completely useless, as they don't mention anything about why Taufan's relationship with his siblings deteriorated.

It only states that when Taufan woke up from his coma, he became paranoid. He avoided everyone and always seemed fearful. I'm also still thinking about the missing records on Taufan. Was he hated by someone enough that they wanted to erase records of him? And why only the records from when he was 14 years old? What happened then?

Ah, my head hurts just thinking about it. I'm really not cut out for this kind of intense thinking.

I massaged my temples and let out a small groan, not expecting Captain Fang to notice and start asking about my condition again. Even though I told him I was fine, the young man was reluctant to believe me. He insisted that I should return to my room and rest instead of sitting under the sun and making myself sicker. Why do I feel like Captain Fang is starting to become like Maripos, who is always nagging at me?

"Your Highness, are you feeling pain somewhere?"

Ugh. Captain Fang's fussiness attracted Maripos' attention, and now that young man has started bombarding me with a series of questions that I can't answer one by one. To avoid these two people who have become far more talkative than my own mother, I had to admit to them that I felt tired and wanted to return to my room. Though their faces looked worried when I said I was tired, there was relief in their eyes because I wasn't being stubborn and chose to comply.

"I will leave you to rest, Your Highness," Maripos said while bowing. I smiled faintly, waved at him, and told him he could go now. Fortunately, I managed to stop him and Captain Fang from calling the doctor. It wouldn't be good to trouble that old man just to calm down the excessive worry of my subordinates.

Now, it might be a good idea to go back and read the notes I made on 'The True Heir of Ignisia' to double-check the storyline of this novel.

"Brother... are you... always this weak?"

I flinched in surprise at the voice. When I turned around, I found Duri standing not far from my open bedroom window. I was sure Maripos had assigned some guards to escort him back to the Prince's Palace earlier. The child stared at me intensely, tilting his head slightly with his green eyes fixed on me as if trying to see through my thoughts. The cheerful smile he always showed to those around him disappeared, and his serious expression made me nervous and awkward in front of him, despite him being much younger than me. Could it be because he's a prince who has already grown accustomed to dealing with various people even though he's still a child?

"Pr-Prince! How did you get in?"

I could only laugh awkwardly when Duri raised an eyebrow, giving me a look as if asking if I was serious with that question. Duri didn't comment on my question, he glanced towards the window, then raised his hand to point at the climbing vines growing around my balcony.

Huh? What?

Creeping vines?

Since when vines started creeping onto my bedroom balcony?!

Wait, let's calm down. Duri is the Prince blessed by Gevix, the Goddess of Plants. When he saved me the other day, he also used creeping vines, so this is something natural for him—though not for me.

"Don't tell me you climbed up.." I stopped myself from saying more.

When Duri shrugged indifferently, I wondered how many times this kid had done this. No wonder Halilintar looked stressed whenever I brought up Duri; it turns out this kid likes to cause trouble like this. Maybe this is how he managed to escape from the Prince's Palace and come to the Sunset Palace back then—though I still don't know how he managed to travel the considerable distance to this place.

"Brother.. have you really become weak? Didn't you used to defeat Brother Halilintar in duels?"

What? Taufan? Defeat Halilintar? A Taufan who would faint after running for just 5 minutes could defeat Halilintar, a skilled swordsman and the strongest person in Ignisia?! No, wait. The records say the previous Taufan was a talented child, who had started using his power at a young age and mastered wind control much faster than his predecessors. Moreover, at the age of just 11, he managed to awaken his final stage power—though it didn't end well. It shouldn't be surprising that he could defeat Halilintar. The reason Taufan could no longer use his powers was due to his body weakening without explanation. That means if I manage to strengthen Taufan's body, there's a chance I can use his powers.

"Unfortunately, my body is not in good condition, Your Highness." I said while giving him a smile. Duri seemed dissatisfied with my words—not that I blame him—he looked sullen as if wanting more answers that I couldn't give. I'm sorry, Duri, I can't comfort you with more answers because I don't know why your brother's body is so weak either.

"But why?"

I could only smile at him because I didn't know how to answer that question. Why did Taufan, who was born healthy and cheerful, change so drastically? I don't know. He was just a side character who appeared occasionally in the novel, easily forgotten and insignificant. He wasn't remembered, let alone honored.

"Brother.. you're hiding something, aren't you?"

For a 9-year-old, Duri had sharp instincts. I knew if I answered with a lie, he would immediately detect it. My choices were to remain silent or tell him the truth, and I chose the first. Duri didn't know Taufan well; he was only 7 years old when Taufan was 'banished' to the Sunset Palace, and although the records said they often played together, their relationship couldn't be considered very close.

I tried to change the subject of our conversation, "What brings you here so often, Your Highness? I doubt Prince Halilintar gave you permission to visit this place frequently."

When I mentioned Halilintar's name, Duri's expression soured. It was as if I had just said something he didn't like.

"I don't like it there. It's more fun here."

"Why is that, Your Highness?"

"Everyone is always busy."

It's only natural for the people around Duri to be busy. He and his brothers are Princes, their schedules far more packed than children their age. Moreover, with both of their parents gone, no one can watch over them as before. Even so, I still feel sorry for this child. Though his status is that of a Prince, he is also a 9-year-old boy who should be spending his time playing and learning with his brothers. Fortunately, Duri doesn't have to be involved in the fight for the throne, as that would only make him suffer more. This makes me start thinking about Solar's fate, who will eventually be involved in the fight for the throne. He and Duri are the same age, after all.

"Doesn't Your Highness have responsibilities too? Shouldn't Your Highness be attending classes?"

Duri pouted. He turned his gaze away from me with a 'hmph' that signaled his annoyance at my question. I wanted to laugh at this child; he was so adorable trying to look angry like that.

"I don't think it's good for you to skip class like this. What will Prince Halilintar say later?" I said, pretending to think about how Halilintar would react if he found out one of his younger brothers often sneaked away to this place—though I already knew how Halilintar would actually react. And yes, Halilintar already knew that Duri often ran away to this place because every time Halilintar came to my palace, he would always ask what Duri did while he was here.

"Um.." Duri became uneasy. He started fiddling with his fingers while staring down at the floor. I really wanted to keep teasing him; he was so cute, but I couldn't bear it because the child looked like he was about to cry at any moment.

"How about this, Your Highness, you're free to come here as long as you get permission from Prince Halilintar. Also, Your Highness must attend classes diligently from now on. If you succeed, I'll give you a gift."

When I mentioned a gift, Duri's expression brightened. As expected, he's just like other children his age who love gift.

"A gift?"

"Yes! A gift."

"What is the gift?"

I could see how he tried to appear uninterested, even though his expression told a different story. Children can be so adorable—though often more annoying.

"Of course, it's a secret. Do we have a deal now, Your Highness?"

Duri put on a thoughtful expression, as if he were seriously considering whether or not to make a deal with me. I had to hold back my laughter at the cute expression on his face. If Duri is this adorable, I wonder how Solar is. Being the youngest of the seven brothers, he must be just as endearing as Duri, who is his twin brother. Hopefully, he's not a bookworm like my youngest brother.

After a while, Duri finally made up his mind. He looked at me with a serious expression—it would have been convincing if he were older, but right now, it only made him look even cuter. He extended his hand toward me, indicating that we should shake hands like businessmen sealing a deal.

"Alright, I agree."

He was so cute when he said it. I don't remember my younger brother ever being this adorable, even though they have the same face and name.

"But the gift you prepare has to be interesting!" Duri said. I shook his hand, "Of course, Your Highness. However, it would be best if you notify me in advance when you plan to visit, so I can prepare the gift in time."

Duri shook our hands, looking very happy about our agreement. No matter how mature a child tries to be, they are still just a child. After successfully making a deal with Duri, I managed to persuade him to return to the Prince's Palace. This time, I entrusted Captain Fang to escort him, ensuring that he wouldn't escape again—he had slipped away from the previous guards assigned to escort him.

It was quite exhausting dealing with that child. I threw myself onto the bed, lost in thought. Honestly, I'm not sure how to behave around Duri. Unlike Halilintar, who always tries to engage me in conversation so that I can figure out how to act around him, Duri just watches me in silence. I was very nervous earlier. Now I just hope my behavior didn't seem suspicious to him. Because no matter how much Halilintar values me, if I do something suspicious in front of one of his brothers, I doubt Halilintar would let it slide.

I hope this will make Duri reduce the frequency of his visits to my palace.

...

I know I shouldn't hope for too much, because lately, anything I hope for doesn't happen.

All I can do now is smile awkwardly at the little boy standing in front of me. Duri is smiling brightly, looking so proud as he hands me a letter with the royal seal. The letter is from Halilintar, asking about my well-being and apologizing for not being able to visit me. However, the main point of the letter is that Halilintar is requesting me to allow Duri to visit my palace whenever he wants. Who am I to refuse the request of the First Prince and future king of Ignisia?

Beside me, I can hear Maripos trying to stifle his laughter. The young man had already told me that it wouldn't be easy to make Duri stop coming to my palace. He said that Duri would do anything to ensure he could do what he wanted.

I'm taking back my words about Duri being adorable and unlike my younger brother because now he really looks just like him. Without realizing it, I narrowed my eyes at him, this cunning child.

"Brother Halilintar has already agreed. He said I can come whenever I want as long as I don't skip any classes. And I haven't skipped a single class all week." The proud expression on Duri's face seemed to tell me to praise him. As much as I felt tricked by him, I couldn't refuse him. I'm a bit curious about what method Duri used to get Halilintar to allow him to frequently travel from the prince's palace to mine.

"However, I remember asking Your Highness to send me a notice before coming here." I said, slightly amused to see how Duri’s expression slowly started to change. He, who had initially appeared so confident, now lowered his head and fidgeted with his fingers. I knew I shouldn’t tease him, but I couldn’t help myself.

"But what shall we do, Your Highness? Since you came without notice, I haven’t been able to prepare the gift." I said, pretending to be sad because I couldn’t prepare a gift for the little prince before me. Duri seemed even more anxious.

"But I really wanted to prepare that gift for Your Highness."

"Uh... I... I..." Duri looked like he was about to cry, his eyes welling up with tears. I wanted to tease him further, but Maripos stopped me.

"Prince." I could hear a note of reprimand in Maripos’ voice. It seemed he was trying to remind me not to cross the line. Even though Taufan was much older than Duri and they were both princes, Taufan’s status was still much lower than Duri’s. Taufan was merely a discarded prince; almost the entire Kingdom didn’t consider him worthy of being their prince. No matter how I thought about it, it felt unfair for Taufan to receive such treatment. The fact that he couldn’t address his brothers by their names or how he had to bow his head to them only made me feel angry on his behalf. Why did Taufan have to endure this? Why was he cast aside?

Was it all because he could no longer use his power? Why did Ignisia choose to abandon him instead of trying to heal him, leaving him forgotten in this palace? Forget it, after all, this world is just a novel, and Taufan is merely one of the unfortunate characters created by the author to make the protagonist shine.

"I’m sorry, Your Highness." I said. Duri looked at me hesitantly, perhaps confused as to why I was apologizing to him.

"But the gift for Your Highness really isn’t ready because I didn’t know you were coming today."

Although he seemed disappointed, Duri accepted my words gracefully. While Duri still seemed to keep his distance from me, he appeared much more comfortable around me than before. Now, he would respond to my words if I brought up random topics like what kind of cake he liked or suggestions for plants that are easy to grow and don’t require extra attention. A few times, he even tried to invite me to play—which, unfortunately, I couldn’t do very often given how weak my body was—or sometimes he would ask me to teach him how to paint what he wanted. Halilintar occasionally came to visit along with Duri. He would run around the garden, chasing Duri, and they would both laugh heartily afterward. At those moments, I saw the First Prince of Ignisia as a brother who truly loved his siblings.

Perhaps the reason both of them enjoyed visiting this place was that they could shed their masks as princes and run around like children of their age. They could joke and laugh as loving siblings instead of undermining each other to fight for the throne. They could escape the strict surveillance that had always haunted them.

I was happy they were happy, but I also felt a bit burdened by their frequent visits to my palace. It meant less time for myself, and I had to deal with both of them. Facing one of them alone was already overwhelming; now I had to deal with both.

…

"Why do you suddenly want to go to the kitchen, Your Highness? Is there something you want to eat? I can ask the Royal Chef to make it for you, or I can go to Cukiernia Cesarska[1] to ask them to make whatever you want."

[1]Cukiernia Cesarska means ‘Emperor’s Pastry Shop’ in Polish. This place is purely a fictional creation of the author. In the story, it is a pastry shop that provides luxurious cakes for the king and members of the Royal Family. It is very difficult to get cakes from this shop unless you have strong influence.

Once again, Maripos decided to be even more nagging than my mother. Why was this young man so protective of Taufan? Is it normal for a servant to be this attentive to their master? For now, I’ll assume what Maripos does is common for a servant.

"I just want to prepare a gift for Prince Duri."

"A gift?" Maripos sounded skeptical of what I said. "What kind of gift do you want to prepare?"

"Oh, that’s a secret." I said that on purpose to tease Maripos. Sure enough, the silver-haired young man—Maripos got mad at me when I said his hair was white and insisted that the color was silver—looked as if he wanted to burst out with a series of words to retort me. Luckily for my ears, Captain Fang decided to appear with the ingredients I had requested.

"I found almost everything you wanted, Prince, except for what you called baking powder and icing sugar." Captain Fang said.

I had actually anticipated this, but it was still disappointing. After all, the novel ‘The True Heir of Ignisia,’ set in a kingdom, had not yet developed technology comparable to my world. It was as if I had been thrown into Europe during the era when kingdoms still stood. Perhaps around the Middle Ages if I were to guess, but they had all sorts of wonders. So expecting to find ingredients suitable for cake recipes from my world here felt almost impossible. I don’t know how to make baking powder, but I can adjust the recipe I know so it doesn’t require it. Icing sugar is also something easy to make; I can make it myself. This way, I can prepare a gift for Duri and fulfill my promise. My younger sibling, Duri, from my original world, really liked sweet foods. Since Duri in this world and Duri in my world have the exact same behavior, maybe their love for sweet foods is also the same.

"Aah! Your Highness! What are you doing?!" Maripos exclaimed. He took the knife from my hand and raised it as high as possible as if I would try to snatch it back. I should have sent that young man away. I shouldn’t have fallen for his sweet talk that promised not to disturb me.

I glanced at Captain Fang, who was just standing silently in the corner of the room, observing us. He only stood there watching as I was scolded by Maripos. I was also sure that when he averted his gaze, that young man was trying to hold back his laughter.

"Maripos, I’m just trying to bake a cake here!" 

"No! The last time you held a sharp object, you tried to stab yourself. How can I trust you with something dangerous like this?" 

Ugh. I can't deny Maripos' words because, indeed, the last time I tried to stab myself with a bread knife—ridiculous, I know. It was a futile attempt because I didn’t die, I only ended up with a painful wound. I also tried slitting my wrists by breaking a flower vase in my room, but that failed too. Maybe that's why Maripos doesn’t trust me when it comes to sharp objects, but how am I supposed to bake a cake if he keeps stopping me whenever I hold a knife or try to approach the oven?

I had to go through various arguments with Maripos just to convince him to let me bake the cake. There were several conditions Maripos imposed on me. First, I wasn’t allowed to hold sharp objects like knives; if anything needed to be cut, I had to hand it over to Maripos to handle. Second, I wasn't allowed to approach the oven because it was considered dangerous. The baking would also be done by Maripos. Lastly, every ingredient I used had to be directly supervised by Maripos.

I must have been in a really bad state back then for Maripos to distrust me this much. I don’t know whether to laugh or feel sad about this.

"I don’t remember you ever baking before, Your Highness. How can you be so skilled at this?" 

AA! I’ve made a mistake. What should I do now? No matter Taufan’s status, he’s still been a prince since birth. In this palace, I’ve never had to do any chores—there would always be someone to prepare my meals, wash my clothes, even bathe me if I wanted. So how could a prince who has never done any work suddenly be skilled at baking?! What should I say to Maripos?

"That... that’s my secret," I quickly said, hoping Maripos would stop asking questions. The silver-haired young man stared at me so intensely, it was like he wanted to uncover everything in my mind, just like one of my strict professors. Is he going to start interrogating me now?

Maripos’ expression still showed he didn’t believe me, but he shifted his gaze, as if deciding not to press me further. Did I really get away with it so easily? After knowing Maripos for over a month, he’s someone who’s persistent and won’t stop until he gets a clear answer. What made him let me off so easily this time? Was it because this was just a trivial matter?

Let’s just forget about it.

I decorated and cut the finished cake, then placed it into a special box that Captain Fang had purchased earlier. This should be attractive enough for the children, right? 

I felt a bit hesitant to give it to Duri, even though I was so confident before that Duri would like it. What have I done? I should’ve just let Maripos buy the cake from the famous bakery in the capital. 

What if the cake doesn’t suit Duri’s taste? After all, he’s a prince. The food he eats has always been the best the kingdom can provide. It’s unlikely that an ordinary cake made by me will satisfy him. But there’s no turning back now, especially since I’ve already asked Maripos to send a letter to Duri stating that I’m expecting his presence at my palace. I can only hope that Duri doesn’t embarrass me in front of Maripos and Captain Fang.

I asked Maripos to arrange my meeting with Duri later. I trust that young man can handle it well while I try to enjoy my time by finishing my painting. Unfortunately, because I stood for too long working on my painting, my legs became numb and difficult to move. Oh my gosh, I have to persuade Halilintar and Maripos again to let me train my body. This body is too weak! At the very least, let me train until I don’t struggle with daily activities.

"Your Highness, are you alright?" 

Captain Fang, as usual, was always perceptive and considerate. He approached me and helped me stand properly. It’s somewhat embarrassing that I have to rely on others, especially those much younger than my original age, just to walk or stand. But I’ve ignored that mindset after living in Taufan’s body for over a month now. Sometimes, I even need Maripos’ help just to use the restroom, so what’s the big deal about being helped to walk by Captain Fang?

"My legs went numb from standing too long." 

Captain Fang simply nodded and helped me walk to the garden bench. He assisted me in sitting down and even offered to massage my legs—which I initially refused but eventually accepted after Captain Fang looked at me as if I had just kicked him out into the rain. I spent quite some time just sitting on the garden bench, enjoying the view and Captain Fang’s massage, until Maripos came with the news that Duri had arrived at my palace and was now waiting for me. 

Ah, suddenly I feel nervous.

Chapter Text

Boboiboy Fanfiction

©  Boboiboy | Animonsta Studio

A/N: The entire story is purely fictional, and the author does not profit from writing this story. If there are any similarities in ideas, character names, or locations, they are purely coincidental.

≫ ──── ≪•◦ ❈ ◦•≫ ──── ≪

Honestly, I don’t have high hopes that Duri will like the gift I’ve prepared for him. I’ve already braced myself for the possibility that Duri will reject it harshly. But none of that can lessen my nervousness when facing him. It feels as though I’m about to face a strict professor for an exam, even though he’s just a little kid much younger than my youngest brother.

"I’ve prepared a gift for Your Highness, although it might not suit Your Highness’s taste." As I said this, I signaled Maripos to bring the box containing the cake I had made.

As I suspected, Duri looked curious as soon as Maripos placed the box in front of him. It seemed that the color and pattern of the box had successfully caught his attention—Captain Fang had chosen well. Most kids would shake the gift to check it out, but Duri, being a prince, knew that wasn’t the proper thing to do, especially in front of the person who gave it to him. Though he seemed excited, Duri opened the gift calmly. He began by carefully untying the satin ribbon I had used to bind and beautify the box, then gently lifted the lid.

I watched nervously as the cheerful smile on Duri’s face slowly faded. I knew he wouldn’t like it.

"This... is a cake," Duri said. He sounded disappointed, as if he had expected me to give him something more special.

"Yes. I made it this morning, but it seems it doesn’t suit Your Highness’s taste." Sadly, I had to accept the fact that I had failed to make him happy. Baking cakes was one of my skills, and my brothers always loved them, but of course, it wasn’t enough to satisfy a noble.

"Wait, brother made this?"

"Yes, Your Highness."

I saw Duri chuckle softly, holding the box and looking at me as if he had just been given a treasure. I didn’t understand—how could this child’s mood change so quickly? Didn’t he look sad when he found out I had only given him a cake and not something special? So why is he smiling happily now?

The mood of children is as hard to read as the mood of women.

One thing’s for sure: I had kept my promise to Duri, and now I have a little boy who will always come to my palace asking me to make cakes for him.

...

Ignisia Kingdom is a kingdom without a king and a crown prince at the moment. You could say it’s like a country without a head of state. This alone should have been enough to cause political upheaval and civil war, but the fact is that the government in Ignisia has continued to function well, even up until Halilintar’s future coronation. This is all thanks to Ignisia’s Prime Minister, who has run the government since the king fell ill and could no longer rule. From what my younger brother told me, the Prime Minister is responsible for running the government until Ignisia’s new king is selected, but he suddenly disappeared when Halilintar was about to be crowned king.

I didn’t get any further explanation about this. Whether he was killed, kidnapped, or deliberately disappeared after Halilintar was declared the rightful heir to the throne remains a mystery.

What is clear is that the man is still alive and is currently running Ignisia’s government. And there is one thing I want from him.

If Halilintar wants to quickly become the legitimate heir to the throne, he needs the support of the Prime Minister. The remaining problem is that the man is neutral, which means he won’t take sides with anyone. Even before he disappeared, the Prime Minister never supported any prince. For Halilintar to gain his support, Halilintar must prove himself worthy of being king. But hasn’t everything Halilintar done so far been enough? From what I’ve heard from Maripos, Halilintar has been performing duties equal to those of a Crown Prince. You could say he’s an uncrowned Crown Prince. What more does he need to prove?

How can I make the Prime Minister see that Halilintar is worthy of being a king? There’s no way I can simply meet him and ask him to support Halilintar. Not only would I be seen as undermining his position, but I also wouldn’t be able to meet him because my current status is that of an outcast prince. Ugh, this is so frustrating.

Why do I have to think about all these things that I never had to think about before just to get back to my world? And why did I have to end up in a novel like this? Why couldn’t I have been put in a simple novel about the main character enjoying their vacation on a pleasant tropical island? Why not something like that?!

"Your Highness, what do you think it takes to be a worthy king?"

When I asked Halilintar that question, he glared at me as if he wanted to split my head open with just his gaze.

"Why are you asking this, Taufan? Don’t tell me you’re planning to join the fight for the throne." Halilintar’s voice sounded cold and piercing, different from the Halilintar I had known for over a month in this world. Outsiders might think that Halilintar was perhaps feeling threatened by my question, but I knew full well that it wasn’t because of that. Although I had only known him for a month and a half, I knew that Halilintar didn’t see me as a threat—or so I interpreted. Somehow, I knew that Halilintar deeply loved his brothers, especially Taufan, and would never consider him a threat. Halilintar must be acting this way out of worry. He was worried that the brother he cherished the most might get involved in the brutality of the throne struggle.

"I’m just asking, Your Highness. How could I possibly be worthy of participating in the fight for the throne?"

Halilintar’s gaze towards me gradually softened, almost appearing melancholic if I had to describe it. He opened his mouth as if to say something but eventually said nothing. We sat in an awkward silence for several minutes, neither of us willing to start a conversation.

Then, suddenly, Halilintar spoke, "Becoming a worthy King is a complicated matter. There are so many things considered as requirements to be a King, so many things that need to be proven. But no one knows for sure. Some say you must be the strongest to protect your people and your kingdom. Some say you must be the wisest to prosper your land. And others say you must have a big heart and the wisdom to understand the needs of your people."

Halilintar looked at me, a small smile on his face as he said, "What do you think, Taufan? What does it take to be a worthy King?"

Ugh. Why ask me? I have no idea what the answer is. If I hadn’t been thrown into this world, I would never have even thought about what makes someone worthy of being a King. All this time, I was content living as a law-abiding civilian in my country. True, the leaders of my government weren't the best; many committed crimes to satisfy their greed while exploiting ordinary people like me. But what do I know about politics?

"I'm not quite sure, Your Highness. It never crossed my mind."

"Yes, don't dwell on it too much," Halilintar said.

"What makes someone worthy of being a King, in my opinion, is when they can carry the burden of the kingdom on their shoulders. When they can put the people above all else. For a King, his people are his family, his beloved, his friends, and his siblings. He must not bring them suffering and must always think of them. He must be prepared to turn away from family, lovers, friends, and siblings if it’s for the sake of his people."

"If that's the case, do you feel worthy of being a King, Your Highness?"

"That’s a heavy question, Taufan. Others might think you're inciting civil war if you ask that openly in public. And I cannot answer it. But since it's just you and me here, I will answer your question."

After saying that, Halilintar looked at me intensely. There was no smile on his face, and he appeared very serious. I had never seen Halilintar like this. His emotions were unreadable, and I couldn’t tell what he felt or thought. It felt like I was facing Captain Fang when I first entered this world.

"No. I don't yet feel worthy of being a King."

Halilintar didn’t elaborate further, but I understood what he meant. The reason Halilintar didn’t feel worthy was because he still couldn’t make decisions firmly for the sake of his people. He hadn’t yet turned away from his family for the good of his people. I had never thought about this before, but how much must Halilintar sacrifice to become the King of Ignisia?

I decided to change the subject. I started talking about Duri, who loved my baking, or the painting I had recently finished. The earlier conversation was soon forgotten, as if we had made a silent agreement never to bring it up again.

"Ah, Your Highness."

"Yes, Taufan?"

"I hope you would grant me permission to start training my body again."

Halilintar narrowed his eyes at me, his brows furrowed, and then he raised one eyebrow as if questioning whether I was serious. Perhaps I’ve only known Halilintar for a month and a half, but I already knew how to persuade him to grant my requests. There were three surefire steps to melt the heart of Ignisia’s First Prince. The first was to make yourself appear pitiable.

"I know you're worried about my condition, Your Highness, but recently I've been getting tired even just walking around the palace. Sometimes, I can't get out of bed. Even now, holding a paintbrush feels heavy."

Halilintar’s expression began to change. He looked sad when I said that. I cheered inwardly, knowing I was one step closer to success. Now for step two. Give him a reasonable argument.

"I won’t do any strenuous exercise, Your Highness. Just enough to improve my stamina. Besides, Maripos will always supervise my training."

I could see how Halilintar was starting to waver in his decision. Though I felt guilty for manipulating him, I was doing this for everyone’s sake. For Halilintar, for all the people I had inconvenienced, and for Taufan himself. When I return to my world and Taufan’s soul returns to his body, he shouldn’t have to suffer in such a weak body.

The last thing I needed to do, or step three, was to look at Halilintar with a pleading expression—I knew I was getting better at it since I often used it on Maripos.

As expected, Halilintar finally gave in. He sighed loudly but smiled afterward. He then said I shouldn’t push myself too hard and that Maripos had to report my progress to him. I agreed without a second thought.

...

"Once again, Your Highness, I strongly oppose this idea," Maripos said for the umpteenth time that day.

I couldn’t respond to Maripos because I was still throwing up, though I really wanted to tell him to stop talking.

After receiving permission from Halilintar, I asked Captain Fang to train me again. As before, Captain Fang had me run as far as I could. Everything was fine, really. Until I stupidly tried to keep running even after I had reached my limit. And here I am, throwing up my breakfast while listening to Maripos scold me. The silver-haired young man gently rubbed my back, even though his mouth kept spewing complaints toward both me and the innocent Captain Fang.

Maripos was acting like a mother hen again.

I could only smile resignedly as Maripos, still scolding, pulled me to lean on his shoulder. He wiped the corner of my mouth with a clean handkerchief and ordered a passing servant to bring me water. Fortunately, he didn’t drag me back to my room and force me to stay in bed all day. Although training ended quickly, I had completed one more lap after Maripos let me go.

Even so, after finishing my training, the old doctor, Taufan’s personal physician, was waiting in my room to examine me. I squinted at Maripos, feeling betrayed, but he seemed unaffected.

"The Prince’s condition is worsening. I do not recommend physical training at this time," Theron, the old doctor, said with a worried frown. His dark eyes looked at me the way a grandfather would look at a gravely ill grandchild.

Judging from Maripos' expression, it seemed like he would report this to Halilintar, which would result in me being forced to stay in bed. This can't happen! How can I ensure Halilintar ascends the throne if all I can do is lie in bed? I won't be able to return to my world if Halilintar fails to become king!

"Isn't there a way to increase my stamina? Or something to strengthen my body?"

"Your Highness, some time ago, physical exercise might have helped you increase your stamina little by little. But now, for some reason, your condition has worsened, and physical exercise may only make it worse."

Huh? What's wrong? Why is my body suddenly deteriorating? I haven’t done anything dangerous; I haven’t recklessly tried to figure out Taufan’s powers again. I’ve even always taken the terrible medicine Maripos gave me.

"What about medicine? Isn’t there any medicine that can help me?"

Theron shook his head. "Unfortunately, I don’t dare prescribe you any other medicine, Your Highness. I’m afraid your body won’t accept it. Your body keeps deteriorating, and I doubt the medicines you’ve been taking so far will be effective."

Even though I knew the body I’m inhabiting is weak, I didn’t expect it to be this bad to the point that the doctor is afraid to prescribe anything else.

Does this mean I’ve lost the chance to return to my world? Am I going to be trapped here forever as Taufan, the second prince of Ignisia who was cast aside and eventually dies like this?

I can’t accept this, but I also don’t know what to do. I’m not a doctor, and this is a foreign world with many things that don’t exist in mine. Moreover, this world is a novel I never read. Even if I had read it, Taufan was just a side character, rarely mentioned. His past or whatever illness he suffered from was never written in the novel. I also can’t recall any other character having the same issue as Taufan.

"Your Highness." Faintly, I heard someone calling me, but I couldn’t recognize the voice.

The voice turned into a light touch on my shoulder. I felt the bed next to me dip under the weight of someone sitting on it. Not long after, I felt a gentle embrace that gradually became a warm hug. Without being able to stop it, my eyes began to feel hot, and sobs started escaping from my mouth.

I’m a 21-year-old adult. I shouldn’t be crying over something like this. But the hopelessness building in my chest at the thought of not being able to return to my world just pushed me to cry and scream because of it. Why is this happening to me? Why was I sent to this world? Haven’t I been living my life well enough? I’ve never stolen or killed, and even in this world, all I’ve done is think about how to help Halilintar so I can go back home. I love my world, even though it’s not perfect. But it’s where my home is. It’s where I’m supposed to be.

I don’t know how long I cried, but I knew my head hurt from crying too much, and my eyes were swollen. But my heart felt much lighter than before. I was still leaning on Maripos, who was still holding and comforting me. I never thought the day would come when I’d be this emotional. Maybe it’s because the body I’m in is still a teenager? Maybe it’s making me go through puberty again.

"Are you alright, Your Highness?"

I only nodded in response. Slowly, Maripos released his embrace, giving me a small smile before standing up to pour a glass of water for me.

"I’m sure there will be a way to make you healthy again, Your Highness. Please don’t lose hope yet."

Once again, I only nodded. I stared at the glass in my hand as I began to gather my thoughts. The doctor said that physical exercise would only worsen my condition, and even the medicine I’ve been taking will soon lose its effectiveness. Why is this happening? Taufan had no history of illness; he was born as healthy and strong child. Suddenly falling to this point, there must be something causing it.

"Maripos, why am I like this? Why has my body become this weak?"

Maripos didn’t immediately answer my question. He remained silent for a moment before taking the glass from my hand and placing it on the bedside table. The young man then knelt in front of me, "I cannot say for sure, Your Highness. I have served and observed you for a long time. You had a healthy body and always ran around energetically with Prince Halilintar and Prince Gempa. But two years ago, your condition worsened."

Two years ago? Wasn’t that when Taufan was exiled to the Sunset Palace? That’s right. Something must have happened two years ago. Especially since Taufan’s records stopped around the time he was transferred to the Sunset Palace and resumed when he was 15 years old.

"Do you know why?"

"This is just a rough guess, Your Highness. It might be the effect of the poison you consumed at that time."

Poison?! Taufan drank poison? Was someone trying to kill him? If so, is that the reason behind the missing records of Taufan when he was 14 years old? Perhaps Taufan’s poisoning was recorded in the archives, and the person who poisoned him erased the evidence. But something doesn’t add up. Given how much Halilintar cares for Taufan, he would have immediately ordered an investigation into this, and the person responsible wouldn’t have escaped the protagonist’s pursuit, right?

"Was the poison that bad that its effects couldn’t be fully removed?"

"Have you forgotten, Your Highness? It was a very dangerous poison. It didn’t kill instantly but tortured slowly. The body would feel unbearably hot as if it were burning, but trying to cool it with water would feel like being plunged into a frozen hell. Even the lightest touch would feel like being pierced by a thousand needles. If Prince Halilintar hadn’t found the antidote in time, you might have continued to suffer until your death."

Ugh. Is there really such a horrifying poison in this world? Who created it? Are they some kind of psycho who enjoys torturing others?

Another question is, who holds such a deep grudge against Taufan that they would give such a terrifying poison to a 14-year-old child? No. No. This can't be a personal vendetta against Taufan. From my experience in his body for almost two months, Taufan isn’t someone who would have enemies. His personality did become a bit gloomy and quiet after the incident five years ago, but it's hard for someone like Taufan to gather enemies. Before that, he was a prince loved by everyone, with a cheerful and kind personality, along with a little mischievousness that brought laughter to everyone. Even after being cast aside, the servants and guards who served him respected and adored him.

Could it be that Taufan was poisoned because they were targeting someone else?

The King and Queen are already dead. Taufan drank the poison after he was exiled to the Sunset Palace. He was no longer considered a worthy prince by Ignisia at that time. Who would be affected if Taufan died?

'If Prince Halilintar hadn’t found the antidote in time, you might have continued to suffer until your death.'

That sentence suddenly popped into my mind. That’s right. Taufan is the brother that Halilintar loves the most. Maripos always exaggerated that Halilintar would turn the world upside down if that was what I wanted. Halilintar’s love for Taufan is so great that his mental state would be severely impacted if Taufan died. At that time, still grieving the loss of their father, Halilintar would be shattered if his most beloved brother died too. Perhaps this was a scheme to mentally break Halilintar so that he wouldn't be able to participate in the fight for the throne. Maybe this was the doing of the factions supporting the Fourth or Seventh Prince. Oh, what a cunning and cruel plan.

"Your Highness?"

"Did you find out who gave me the poison?"

Maripos shook his head with a regretful expression, "Unfortunately not, Your Highness. We couldn't find who poisoned you. There are no traces at all. Even the bottle that might have held the poison couldn’t be found. Everything disappeared as if it never existed."

Never existed?

"Um... my memory is a bit hazy, but how did I drink the poison?"

"You were reading a book in the garden at that time, Your Highness. The doctors assumed the poison came from the tea you drank, but I was the one who brewed and poured the tea for you. The tea in the pot was not poisoned at all. You dropped your glass onto the floor at that time, and it broke, spilling the tea. However, when the remaining tea in the broken glass was examined, there was no poison in it."

Oh, this is a far more complicated issue than I thought. But I’ll set that aside for now. What’s more important is understanding why Taufan’s body has weakened like this.

"Didn’t you say earlier that Prince Halilintar managed to find an antidote for me? Then why do you think the poison is still the cause of my body’s weakness?"

"As I mentioned earlier, Your Highness, it’s just my rough guess. Although the doctors and poison experts deployed to examine you said there was no remaining poison in your body, your condition mysteriously worsened since then. To the point where it is as it is now."

If what Maripos said is true, maybe there was another poison that Taufan ingested. A poison that can’t be detected even by poison experts. A poison that doesn’t kill instantly but weakens gradually. I thought this world was all about magic and the like, but there’s something more to it. A fascinating yet terrifying world.

After that, Maripos didn’t say anything more about the poison or my weakened body. He helped me change clothes and brought me dinner. The next day, I asked Maripos to call Doctor Theron because there was something I wanted to discuss with him. He said I shouldn’t engage in physical training as it would worsen my condition, and yesterday I was too emotional to think clearly. Now that I reflect on it, in a world full of magic like this, where even a poison exists that tortures so cruelly, surely there must be something that can improve my health, even just a little.

"To be honest, Your Highness, I really don’t recommend you take any other medicines because of your body. But I understand your desire, and I will do my best to find out. Regarding the physical training you mentioned, I actually don’t recommend it, but you could try light walks for 10 to 15 minutes. After all, I feel like staying in bed all the time isn’t good for you either."

I agreed with what Theron said, so I ordered Maripos to call Captain Fang so we could discuss the proper method for physical training for me. Captain Fang had never trained someone as weak as me before, so it’s understandable that he didn’t know what to do. Besides that, Theron promised me he would try everything he could to find a way to improve my health, and even though I felt bad for him, he reassured me that I didn’t need to worry about it.

I guess I should sincerely thank Maripos. If he hadn’t comforted me yesterday, I’m sure I would still be feeling depressed about the thought of not being able to return to my world. I’m glad I have someone like Maripos by my side. Taufan is very lucky to have someone like him.

For two weeks, I’ve been undergoing physical training with Captain Fang and continuously consulting with Theron. We kept increasing the difficulty each time I surpassed my limits. Theron also helped search for any medicines my body could tolerate and aided me in improving my health. I just hope he can find something soon before the situation gets any worse.

The beginning of this novel is still about six years away, and I hope I can endure until then. As far as I remember, the only one of the seven Princes who dies is Halilintar. Taufan, though rarely mentioned, is still alive by the end of the novel. I clearly remember his name being mentioned by my younger brother when he was telling me about Halilintar's coronation party. I distinctly recall him saying, "Taufan, the Second Prince who never showed himself to the public, finally showed his face that day."

If Taufan really survives until the end of the story, despite his weakening body like this, then I must say that his will to live must be very strong. Or... he managed to find something that helped him survive until the end. I’m not sure. Especially since he’s just a side character that is rarely mentioned.

I don’t exactly know what happened after Halilintar died because my brother didn’t want to talk about it anymore, but most likely, Taufan also died afterward. I mean, he must have been in such shock after learning that the only brother who cared for him died tragically. But there’s also a possibility that he survived and tried to avenge Halilintar’s death.

I’ve been thinking about this for a long time—there’s a chance that Halilintar’s killer came from the faction that didn’t support him. Whether it’s from the Fourth Prince’s faction or the Seventh Prince’s faction. In fact, they might have even joined hands to kill Halilintar. After all, if Halilintar dies, they are the ones who would benefit. I just can’t imagine the Fourth and Seventh Princes being ruthless enough to kill their own brother for the throne. Especially someone like Halilintar. Based on what I know from the novel, although he competed for the throne with his two brothers, he never tried to bring them down or distance them from the throne. And Halilintar himself said that he wasn’t fit to be a king because he couldn’t turn his back on his brothers. Power must have blinded the two of them if Halilintar died because of this.

And if that’s the case, they probably tried to kill Taufan to break Halilintar’s spirit. Unfortunately, Taufan didn’t die. Even so, they managed to weaken his body to the point where he was constantly on the brink of death. This alone was enough to distract Halilintar from various kingdom matters. Also, Maripos said that the day before I entered Taufan’s body, Taufan had survived an assassination attempt. At first, I was puzzled as to why someone would target a prince who had already been abandoned by his own kingdom, but now everything is clear. They wanted to kill the person so close to Halilintar to weaken his spirit.

I’m sure I’ll face assassination attempts in the future too. Improving my physical condition has now become more important so I can escape if something like that happens. I also have to be more vigilant toward the Fourth and Seventh Princes or those close to them.

A world where brothers kill each other for power—what a terrifying world.

Yet, part of me feels that Blaze and Solar couldn’t possibly kill Halilintar. It’s similar to when I first met Halilintar and Duri, as if something inside me was telling me not to be suspicious of them. If my hunch is correct, it’s probably the lingering consciousness of Taufan in this body. He likely trusted his brothers so much and doesn’t want me—the one inhabiting his body—to harbor suspicions against them. Although I want to rely solely on logic, I know I shouldn’t ignore Taufan’s residual consciousness. This could be an important clue for the future. For now, I’ll set it aside.

The training I’ve undergone over the past two weeks hasn’t helped much. I still feel so tired and weak every day. Theron said I should stop my training for now because he doesn’t want me to overburden my body, and this time, I agree with him. I don’t understand why my condition has worsened despite following all of Theron’s instructions, and Captain Fang has only given me light exercises while constantly monitoring me.

Upon hearing about my deteriorating condition, Halilintar visits me more often now, sometimes even staying with me instead of returning to the Prince’s Palace. During those moments, I see how fragile Halilintar looks, as if he could fall apart with just a small breeze. No wonder many are targeting Taufan.

“Please stay strong, Taufan. I’ll do anything for you. Please stay by my side.”

This is what I hear Halilintar say every night when he thinks I’ve fallen asleep. Every time he says it, he holds my hand so tightly, like he’s holding on to a lifeline. I want to comfort him, but even I need Maripos to keep me strong, and I’m not sure how I can offer any comfort to Halilintar. Especially since the one Halilintar is crying over is his brother Taufan, not me.

Sometimes, when Duri visits, he uses his powers on me. It eases my pain, albeit only slightly. I once asked Maripos why Duri’s powers couldn’t fully heal Taufan when he was blessed by a Goddess who could heal all kinds of diseases. Maripos said that Duri’s powers hadn’t fully developed yet; he could only heal minor injuries and ailments like colds or fevers. Meanwhile, in Taufan’s case, even the experts couldn’t identify what was wrong with him. It’s impossible to expect a 9-year-old to understand what’s happening to him. But Maripos also said I could recover completely if I met Gevix and asked her to heal me. I don’t put much hope in that. I haven’t even met Vint, the Goddess who supposedly blessed Taufan, so how could I expect to meet Gevix, another Goddess?

I feel like I just want to give up and accept my fate. Maybe I won’t be able to return to my world and am destined to die in the body of a discarded prince. But every time I see Halilintar and Duri, I remember my brothers in my original world. Though I’m not close to them, I’d do anything to see them again. I just want to go home.

...

One day, when I was finally able to get out of bed and bask in the sun in the garden, out of nowhere, a large bear with golden fur shimmering in the sunlight appeared. I was utterly shocked and scared when I saw it, but the servants and guards around me seemed unfazed. Captain Fang didn’t draw his sword, and Maripos didn’t try to carry me away. Either they couldn’t see the bear, or they were already accustomed to its presence.

Slowly, the bear approached us. Honestly, I was still worried and scared of the bear. I mean, who can stay calm when a giant bear suddenly walks toward them? I desperately wanted to run away, but my legs suddenly felt weak and immobile. My tongue was tied, unable to speak. The fear flowing through me had frozen my body. I was sure my face had turned pale by the time the bear reached me.

“Ma-Maripos.” I stammered as I called out to him.

“Yes, Your Highness?”

My hand trembled as I pointed at the giant bear in front of me. I couldn’t say a word, especially when the bear opened its mouth. I felt like my soul had left my body. I thought I might have fainted because the next thing I knew, Maripos was sitting beside me, and my head was resting on his shoulder. The bear was still there, this time sitting while staring at me. I flinched as the bear began to move again. Maripos didn’t seem to notice the panic I was feeling, as he gently rubbed my back, just as he always did on painful days.

“W-why is it... h-how did it get in here?” At that moment, I pressed myself even closer to Maripos. Especially when the bear stood up and moved toward me again. What does this bear want from me?! Does it want to eat me?! Why doesn’t it go after Captain Fang, who is much bigger and more muscular than I am?! I’m thin and full of sickness; I must not taste good!

“I believe it came through the main gate as usual, Your Highness. Prince Gempa was very angry when he found out Oak climbed the wall and startled you last year.” Maripos replied calmly. His hand still rubbed my back, seemingly unconcerned with me pressing against him or the fact that I was wrinkling his clothes by gripping them so tightly.

“O-Oak?”

At that moment, the bear, which had been watching me, moved its head. Its ears twitched as it came even closer to me. I felt like I was going to faint again because of it. Why does this thing seem more interested in me than before?!

Chapter Text

Boboiboy Fanfiction

©  Boboiboy | Animonsta Studio

A/N: The entire story is purely fictional, and the author does not profit from writing this story. If there are any similarities in ideas, character names, or locations, they are purely coincidental.

≫ ──── ≪•◦ ❈ ◦•≫ ──── ≪

The concept of a spirit animal was something I used to regard as a figment of people's imagination, because how could you possibly believe that your personality or spiritual essence could be the same as an animal's? I mean, you are a human, born a human and raised as one—why would you equate yourself with an animal?

But apparently, what I thought was mere fiction in my world is very much a reality in this one. I shouldn’t have been surprised by this, because if gods and goddesses are real, then how could something so trivial not be, right?

That said, the concept of spirit animals in this world is quite different from the one I knew in mine. Here, spirit animals are more like spirits or embodiments of the gods’ and goddesses’ powers, but in the form of animals. They help, guard, and protect the humans they choose. They can even lend their powers to the humans they choose. Of course, not just any human can be chosen by a spirit animal—they must first receive a blessing from the gods and goddesses. Even then, they have to pass a test, and each test is always different. So, it is very rare for a human to have a spirit animal.

Rare doesn’t mean impossible, though, because one of the owners of a spirit animal happens to be Taufan’s brother, the Third Prince of Ignisia, Gempa von Ignisia.

The golden bear I thought was about to eat me turns out to be Gempa’s spirit animal, named Oak.

How do I know it belongs to Gempa? Simply put, I learned this from Duri and Halilintar. Just as I was about to faint again with the bear approaching me, Duri and Halilintar came to visit me. The moment the bear saw them, it immediately backed away from me and chose to approach Duri and Halilintar instead. Duri shouted the bear’s name, looking incredibly happy, and even ran to hug the bear, which was several times bigger than him. Halilintar also seemed completely at ease with the bear, patting its head and asking about the Third Prince, Gempa.

To calm my heart, which was beating wildly, and to process the new information I had just received, I asked Maripos to take me back to my room, using the excuse that I was starting to feel dizzy and tired. The good news is that Maripos immediately guided me back to the palace. The bad news is that my excuse made Halilintar fuss about my health.

And here I am, sitting on my bed with a book in my lap while Halilintar and Duri are enjoying tea and cakes. Ah, the book I’m reading right now is about spirit animals—not only as an alibi so I won’t be dragged into conversation, but also as a way to study more about spirit animals.

Back to the golden bear, who is currently chewing on a tree branch that Duri gave him. Since he belongs to Gempa, that means he is an earth-element spirit animal. His abilities are more or less the same as Gempa’s, but far stronger. Some spirit animals can even be considered as representatives of the gods and goddesses. Judging by how this animal has a clear physical form and can be hugged and petted by Duri and Halilintar, it means he has enough power to manifest a physical body. Moreover, his form is that of a large bear, possibly standing at 2 meters tall! It’s very likely that he’s the spirit animal representing Terra, the God of Earth.

It seems that the princes of Ignisia indeed possess powers far beyond those of children their age.

Oak, the golden bear, apparently came to the Sunset Palace to deliver herbs from Gempa for Taufan—I overheard Halilintar and Maripos discussing it. He’s been doing this every six months since Taufan was transferred to this palace. The herbs sent by Gempa aren’t just any herbs. They are rare medicinal plants that can’t be found on the market. Why did Gempa choose to send herbs to Taufan, knowing that Halilintar is already supplying him with herbs? Simply put, all the herbs Gempa sends are ones that Halilintar can’t find in the marketplace—I also learned this from Halilintar and Maripos’ conversation. Besides delivering herbs, Oak also brought other items like a wooden carving shaped like a bird and a letter.

I placed the wooden carving with the rest of the wooden figurine collection, which I suspect also came from Gempa, and then I began reading the letter that the golden bear had brought.

The letter was mostly asking about my well-being and sharing news about Gempa’s daily life. From the letter, I learned that Gempa is currently stationed at the eastern border of Ignisia, helping the people there. That place is known as the poorest area in Ignisia, even though Halilintar has tried to advance it—I heard this directly from Halilintar, who once came to complain to me. If I recall correctly, Gempa has always been described as a compassionate person who helps everyone. Honestly, I’m more convinced that the people of Ignisia see Gempa as the one most deserving of becoming their king. Unfortunately, Gempa has already declared that he won’t participate in the fight for the throne and is content with his status as the Third Prince of Ignisia.

No one opposes Gempa’s decision—or more accurately, no one can oppose his decision.

Seeing the letter from Gempa, it seems his relationship with Taufan isn't that bad. In fact, I could say they have a relationship like typical siblings. Maybe it's said that Taufan's relationship with his brothers is bad because they don't spend much time together. I'm a little curious now about how Taufan's relationship is with his three other brothers.

"What did Gempa say?"

Halilintar's voice startled me, and I lifted my head to meet his gaze. It seems he's been watching me ever since I started reading Gempa's letter.

"Eh? Oh... he's just asking how I am and telling me a little about his daily life."

Halilintar nodded. "He never wants to send letters to me. Even though I always write to him. He only wants to exchange letters with you."

Eh? Is Halilintar's relationship with his second brother that bad? Why would Gempa, known for being kind and caring, refuse to write to his eldest brother? Moreover, he only wants to exchange letters with Taufan, who doesn't have much of anything.

When I looked at Halilintar again, I saw him smirking. Should I assume he's just teasing me, or is he mocking me right now? Let's set this aside for now; I better focus on the bear that's still chewing.

How long is that bear planning to stay in my room? Will it leave when Halilintar and Duri go, or will it remain? I'm still not sure if that bear is safe, even though Duri has been playing with it. How do you expect me to consider that creature safe when it takes the form of a wild beast from my world?!

Whether it was due to being disturbed by my continuous staring or something else, the bear lifted its head and stared back at me. Its eyes were as black as coal, but the reflection of light in them looked like stars in the night sky. Its fur was thick and golden, shimmering—I wonder if its fur feels soft or rough. Overall, the creature actually looks adorable, but once again, it's a bear! It has claws that look very sharp. Not to mention, it's a spirit animal with power nearly equal to a god's.

I flinched as Oak stood up and walked toward me. What should I do? How did the original Taufan treat Oak? Did he pet the bear, or was he as scared as I am right now? I really don't know what to do, and Oak is now standing right in front of me. With its snout, it nudged the book on my lap, causing it to fall to the floor, and then it rested its head on my lap. Its eyes looked at me—if I had to interpret it—as if pleading.

In the midst of my dilemma, I heard Duri exclaim, "That's not fair! Oak, you're so biased!"

After his outburst, Duri stood and stomped his foot. He looked very upset. Meanwhile, Halilintar seemed to be hiding his laughter by pretending to sip tea, while Maripos turned his gaze away from me, but his shoulders were shaking with restrained laughter.

Eh? What? Why?

I looked at Duri, then at Halilintar, then at Maripos, then at the bear who was grumbling. Confused about what was happening.

"Yeah, that's Gempa's bear, of course, its personality is like his."

What do you mean by that?

"Brother, Oak wants you to scratch its ears. Oak is a spoiled brat who clings to you. Always has been," said Duri.

Duri, you just told me to scratch a bear's ears?! A bear?! Do you want to see your brother live with just one hand?!

Even though I was still afraid of the creature that looked so clingy in my lap, I tried to muster up some courage. Surely Halilintar and Maripos wouldn't just sit by if they saw this bear trying to do something that might harm me. Alright, I will bet my life on the two guys who are always so fussy about my well-being. My hand, which had been hovering in the air, slowly lowered. Hesitantly, I tried to touch this golden bear. It shifted slightly when I touched it but then calmed down and began to make a low grunting sound—I don't know what it meant. The bear's eyes closed as if enjoying my touch. Do bears normally act like this?

I tried doing what Duri said earlier, scratching its ears. At that moment, Oak leaned into my touch like a cat when you scratch behind its ears. Could this bear actually be part cat?

"Oak is really attached to you, no wonder," commented Halilintar. I decided that was just an unfounded remark.

Despite its appearance as a large, terrifying bear with golden fur, Oak was actually very clingy. It whined when I stopped scratching its ears and even gave me a pleading look like I had just kicked it away. Besides that, Oak's fur was surprisingly soft and pleasant to the touch. No wonder Duri hugged this bear right away when they met. I thought it would feel rough like tree bark. Oak still stayed with me even after Halilintar and Duri returned to the Prince's Palace. This bear also seemed no longer interested in Duri, even though Duri tried to bribe it with food and a new chunk of wood to chew and claw. This made Duri sulk and seemed to give Halilintar a headache.

But Oak, Gempa's spirit animal, seemed unconcerned that it had just caused trouble for the two Ignisia princes. Whether because it was a powerful spirit animal or because it belonged to the Third Prince of Ignisia, it wouldn't change what this bear already done.

As Halilintar said, Oak was very attached to me. Or more precisely, to the original Taufan. It must have really liked the original Taufan, and Taufan probably treated Oak very well. Honestly, I'm still worried about the bear's sharp claws, especially when it stands on two legs. However, as if sensing my discomfort, Oak remained quietly in the corner of my room and only approached me when it wanted his ears scratched. Even then, Oak stayed calm, resting its head on my lap while making a whining sound that, strangely enough, sounded cute.

"Do you want to reply to Prince Gempa's letter right away, Your Highness?"

"Oh-oh.. just bring me the paper and quill. I'll write it after I'm done with Oak."

Hearing its name mentioned, Oak rubbed its face against my stomach. How admirable that the strength it used was so gentle, as if I were merely petting a spoiled cat and not a giant bear. It must have measured its strength to avoid hurting me, who is too weak.

I must have been too caught up in petting Oak and forgot about Gempa's letter. How should I respond to his letter? What did Taufan usually write in his letters to Gempa? Maybe I should write it the way I write to Halilintar. From what I can gather, Gempa is a kind brother, and he cares for Taufan just as Halilintar cares for Taufan. So, it can't be wrong, right?

...

I must express my deepest gratitude to Gempa. The herbal remedy he sent me has been incredibly helpful. I no longer feel the intense pain I had been experiencing over the past few days. Theron said it was because the herbs Gempa provided are rare, ones that can't even be bought with money. The odds of finding them are 1 in 1,000,000. While this sounds exaggerated to me, I know Theron is telling the truth. I’ve checked books on rare medicinal plants and found some of the ones Gempa sent me. All of them are plants that only grow at specific times and places, and harvesting them is extremely difficult. One of them is a plant called Sun Drop[1]. This plant only grows in the driest desert where it’s said the sun always shines, and it never rains. I’m not entirely sure of the exact location of this desert, but the book mentions that many dangerous monsters inhabit the desert, along with monsters that also seek this plant. This makes finding Sun Drop incredibly dangerous, even seemingly impossible.

[1] Sun Drop is a magical plant or herbal remedy that the author created for this story. The plant appears as a bush with small transparent-petaled flowers and yellow spherical stamens that emit light.

I don’t know how Gempa, who is clearly only 15 years old, managed to find this plant and send it to me. Perhaps Oak had a hand in this, or maybe Terra himself intervened and helped Gempa find it. Whatever the case, I am deeply grateful to him for sending it to me.

You might be wondering how I could consume the herbal remedy sent by Gempa when Theron had said he didn’t dare prescribe me any other medication. It turns out that most of the plants Gempa sent have high efficacy without side effects. For example, Sun Drop, which I mentioned earlier, is an ancient plant renowned for its ability to heal various diseases. In the past, it was sought after as a key ingredient in making high-grade elixirs[2] that were said to cure any illness, no matter how severe. However, as humanity and magic progressed, and due to the fact that it only grows in deserts and only blooms once every hundred years before dying, combined with the dangers involved in harvesting it, this plant gradually faded into obscurity.

[2] An elixir is a sweet liquid used for medicinal or healing purposes.

Typical of humans, always looking for alternatives because they don’t want to put in the effort.

When I first read about this plant, I was overjoyed, thinking that I would finally be free from this weak body. But it turns out that even an ancient plant couldn't heal me. While Sun Drop may be able to cure a wide range of illnesses, whatever happened to Taufan’s body cannot be easily fixed with this ancient plant—even though I’m sure Gempa went through many hardships to obtain it.

Of the 7 rare herbs Gempa sent me, I could only consume 2 of them. The other 5—though Theron says they have effects similar to Sun Drop—cannot be consumed directly. They require further processing that only experts can handle. So, we can only store these rare herbs for now; fortunately, they have a long shelf life.

As a token of my gratitude to Gempa, I made him some biscuits—Maripos suggested it—and mentioned it in my reply letter. I sent everything the same way he sent the herbs to me, through Oak. I need to remind that bear not to secretly eat the biscuits meant for Gempa. Believe me, Oak tried to steal a few from the compartment tied around its neck. It had to be scratched and fed to make Oak keep its sharp claws away from Gempa’s biscuits. After spending 3 full days in my palace, Oak finally decided it was time to return to where Gempa is now. I escorted the bear as it left the palace—or rather, it dragged me along to escort it. As we walked toward the main gate, Oak turned back several times to look at me, as if wanting to say it still wished to stay with me and get more scratches. As much as I enjoy petting the large, soft-furred bear, I’m still wary of its very sharp claws. Besides, Gempa surely needs Oak. It’s not good to keep his spirit animal in my palace for too long. Who knows what could happen to the Third Prince when his bear isn’t with him?

Once I began feeling better, I tried to find out why Taufan’s body had weakened so quickly. Unfortunately, I hit a dead end. At first, I suspected that somehow, I had ingested a poison that was weakening my body. But every food and drink I consume has been thoroughly inspected. Maripos personally oversees the preparation of my meals, and he always tastes my food first to ensure it’s safe. Then I thought perhaps the medicine I had been taking was the issue, but again, that wasn’t the case. Theron checked the process of making the medicines, as well as the ingredients used. He said there was nothing wrong with the ingredients or the process. Unless the two of them were conspiring to kill Taufan, which would mean they had been lying to me all this time.

And once again, I have to say, my heart knows they couldn’t do that to me. Why am I so certain, even though I’ve only known them for 2 months? The answer is simple: I choose to trust the remaining consciousness of Taufan within this body. Every time I harbor suspicion toward them, just like when I doubted Blaze and Solar, the remnants of Taufan’s consciousness seem to tell me that they didn’t do what I’m thinking.

'If you trust them so much, why did you let me enter your body? Why didn’t you return to your body and let me go back to my world?' I thought.

My complaints were useless because I was still trapped in the weak body of the Second Prince of Ignisia. I wanted to bang my head against the wall again, but Maripos’ sharp gaze on me made me abandon that idea.

Let’s not complain too much; it’s better for me to think about what to do next. My body is getting better; I no longer feel as much pain or weakness as before. I can even run much longer now, which is truly a blessing for me. Even so, Theron strongly warned me to be cautious since he still doesn’t know what caused my body to weaken so suddenly. He still recommends light physical exercises to avoid putting too much strain on my body, and I still have to take those awful-tasting medicines every day. Unfortunately, the honey I always eat after taking the medicine ran out a few days ago.

"My honey is still unavailable," I sighed in resignation when Maripos brought me a bowl of that black liquid, which I call the deadly elixir.

“I have contacted the store where we usually buy the honey, Your Highness. However, they said their stock is currently empty and may not be restocked until next month.”

Oh… why is it that every time I receive a blessing, there’s always a misfortune waiting for me? I really don’t want to drink that bitter black liquid without the honey to help lessen the taste. But I know very well that rather than being stubborn and childish, it’s better for me to just drink my medicine. I thought drinking it in one go might reduce the bitterness, but that didn’t work—the medicine tasted just as bitter as always. I tried persuading Theron to turn the medicine into a pill form, but he said he wasn’t an alchemist who could do that without altering the medicine’s efficacy. He said I would need to find an alchemist capable of such a thing. I wanted to ask Halilintar to find one for me, but I didn’t, as Halilintar already has too many things to worry about, and finding an alchemist because I dislike the taste of bitter medicine isn’t something worth bothering him with.

Oh, how I miss modern medicine!

“Your Highness, I will give you a candy, but you are only allowed to have one.”

Hearing Maripos’ words made me excited. Calmly, like a child waiting for their parents to give them candy, I sat on the edge of the bed and looked at Maripos with hopeful eyes. I could see him sigh at my behavior, though he smiled helplessly, much like how Halilintar does when he can’t resist fulfilling my requests. He took off his gloves, then pulled out a small package from his pocket and unwrapped it. A red, transparent candy, glittering like a crystal, now rested in his hand. It reminded me of candy from my world.

I laughed and opened my mouth, waiting for Maripos to feed me the candy. Like a baby bird waiting to be fed by its mother, I thought.

Maripos smiled fondly and placed the candy in my mouth, which I accepted happily. The sweet taste slowly spread in my mouth, reducing the bitterness from the medicine I had just taken. Although it wasn’t as sweet as the honey I usually eat after taking medicine, this candy helped enough.

“I will prepare more candies for you, Your Highness. But remember, you are only allowed to eat one after taking your medicine.”

I nodded at Maripos’ suggestion. Yes, yes, prepare more for me. My mouth feels terribly bitter after taking medicine, at least with candy I can lessen the bitterness.

Perhaps I should look for a recipe to make candies even sweeter than the ones Maripos gives me. I seem to remember a type of sweet that became popular because of a movie in my world. If I’m not mistaken, it’s called Turkish Delight. I could also ask Captain Fang to find me a special container to hide the candy from Maripos. He’s far too strict when it comes to sweets, though both I and the original Taufan love them very much.

“Your Highness, will you be attending the ceremony at the Goddess Wind Temple this year?”

“The Goddess Wind Temple?”

“Yes, Your Highness. Soon there will be a Kite Festival to honor the Goddess Wind. Before the festival, the followers of the Goddess Wind will gather at the temple and hold a ceremony as a form of tribute.”

Ah, how could I forget that Ignisia has many gods and goddesses that they worship and believe in like deities? Of course, there would be festivals like this to honor them in Ignisia. And since Taufan is someone blessed by the Wind Goddess, these kinds of things must be common for him.

“Do I have to go to the temple?”

"Not necessarily, Your Highness. You’ve refused to attend the ritual for the past three years. However, many people see you as a representative of the Wind Goddess and are anticipating your arrival."

Doesn't that mean I have to attend? I don’t want to participate in any rituals; it feels wrong to worship anything other than the God I believe in from my world. I’m not a devout person—often I forget to pray or worship diligently—but it still feels wrong to turn away. I know this world exists only within a novel, but it has become a real world for me until I can return to my own. Honestly, I don’t want to go, but perhaps by doing so, I can find clues about why I was sent here. Maybe the Goddess knows who sent me to this world and why I’m here. Also, I’ll consider it a trip after being confined to the palace for so long.

"When do I have to leave?"

"The Goddess Wind Temple is at the peak of Mount Vintara, about a week’s journey from the Capital by carriage. So, if you leave two days from now, you will arrive just in time for the ritual."

"Will Prince Halilintar allow me to go?"

"I’m sure Prince Halilintar will understand, Your Highness."

Honestly, I doubt Halilintar will allow me to travel outside the Palace, especially on a trip to a mountain peak. However, this is a ceremony for the Wind Goddess, the Goddess worshiped by many of Ignisia’s people and who blessed Taufan. He will surely permit me to go. Yes, though I know Halilintar will likely make a fuss about it if he does allow me to leave.

"Bring me paper and a quill. I’ll write a letter to ask Prince Halilintar," I told Maripos. He replied that he would bring it right away, bowed, and then left my room. After Maripos left, I picked up a few books about Vint, the Wind Goddess, lying on the nightstand and began to read.

I don’t know what the ceremony I’ll be attending—if Halilintar permits—will be like, and I can’t possibly ask Maripos. From the way he talks, I already know Taufan has been attending this ceremony since childhood. Didn’t Maripos just say that people now consider me a representative of the Wind Goddess? What if they ask me to lead the ceremony? What excuse can I use to say I have no idea about the ceremony? Wait, the ceremony is going to be held at the Temple of the Wind Goddess, right? In the novels I’ve read, these gods and goddesses usually have priests who lead the ceremonies, maintain, and run the temples. Maybe the Temple of Vint has a priest who will conduct the ceremony. Perhaps I only need to be present and stand there. You know, like a display.

But just to be safe, I’ll start learning about the ceremony.

Chapter Text

Boboiboy Fanfiction

©  Boboiboy | Animonsta Studio

A/N: The entire story is purely fictional, and the author does not profit from writing this story. If there are any similarities in ideas, character names, or locations, they are purely coincidental.

≫ ──── ≪•◦ ❈ ◦•≫ ──── ≪

Between Halilintar and Maripos, I can’t tell who’s more talkative. But I do know that both of them are extremely chatty when it comes to my well-being, or more specifically, Taufan’s well-being. After I wrote a letter requesting permission to attend the ceremony at the Wind Goddess Temple, Halilintar rushed to the Sunset Palace and started arguing with me. It took a lot of effort to persuade him this time. I thought the matter was settled when he left, but then he returned with a large number of servants. They were ordered to prepare everything I needed for the journey to the Wind Goddess Temple. He even somehow managed to summon craftsmen to customize the carriage I would be using, saying it would make the trip more comfortable with less bumping around.

Meanwhile, Maripos was running back and forth, making sure everything was to his and Halilintar's satisfaction. In the end, I was left alone to relax in the garden while the two of them busied themselves with whatever they had planned. I know that the journey to the Wind Goddess Temple requires a lot of preparation, but I didn’t expect Halilintar to personally oversee everything. Truly a caring brother. Or should I say overly protective?

“Captain Fang, would you like some cake?” I offered a piece of cake to Captain Fang, who had been standing behind me all this time. This wasn’t a cake I made; Halilintar had brought it when he arrived, and it was delicious. I’d give two thumbs up to the baker!

“I do not think it is appropriate for you to offer me cake, Your Highness. Especially cake from Prince Halilintar.” Captain Fang’s voice was calm and emotionless, as usual.

“Eh… come on. Maripos isn’t here, don’t be so stiff. Sit with me, everyone else is busy today, and they won’t notice,” I said.

But Captain Fang was far too serious for an 18-year-old. He declined my offer again—politely, of course. Why is this young man so hard to soften up? Even my pleading tricks don’t work on him, though they’re highly effective on Halilintar and Maripos.

“Captain Fang, you’re so rigid. How will you ever find a lover if you’re this stiff?” I complained.

“I never had any intention of finding a lover, Your Highness,” Captain Fang responded calmly.

Ugh. He’s going to be the type of man who ends up married to his job. And yet, he’s still so young and has a handsome face. I’m sure if he were a knight in the Main Palace, there would already be a long line of women waiting for him. Too bad he has to work here. Well, I’m happy he’s stationed here. Captain Fang is very dedicated to his job and never skips a day of work. He takes his duties seriously, as he’s doing now by refusing my offer to sit and enjoy some cake with me. Taufan is truly fortunate to have people like Maripos and Captain Fang by his side. Maybe it’s Halilintar who arranged for them to serve and protect Taufan?

Yes, it’s definitely him. After all, according to Captain Fang, all the servants who originally worked in the Sunset Palace were either fired or reassigned elsewhere. Halilintar was probably worried they might treat Taufan poorly, so he ensured that the palace staff and guards were composed of competent people who treated Taufan well. I should thank him for that. Even though he did it for Taufan, I’m also benefiting from his actions because now I’m in the body of the Second Prince.

"Captain Fang, what is your family like? I mean, do you have siblings, or are you an only child? What family are you from? And what led you to become a knight at my palace?"

Captain Fang didn’t answer. I glanced at him, seeing the young man staring straight ahead at nothing but the view of the flower garden, which Duri and a few gardeners had designed a few weeks ago. Maybe Captain Fang didn’t want to answer my question because he didn’t like talking about himself. After all, he had always been quiet since I first met him. I must have gotten too used to having Maripos constantly chattering beside me, and now it felt like something was missing with only Captain Fang around. Ahh… At times like this, I actually miss Maripos.

"I… have an older brother, Your Highness."

"Oh?"

Oh! So Captain Fang does want to talk! I was just about to apologize and tell him to forget my question.

"Really? What is he like? Is he similar to you?"

"I suppose so. Our parents always said I looked like him when I was a child."

"Ehh? Only when you were a child? What about now?"

"I do not know, Your Highness."

I turned to Captain Fang. He still hadn’t shifted his gaze from the garden, but now there was a faint smile on his face. Although, I had to say, his smile seemed a bit sad, and his eyes didn’t appear to be focused on the garden in front of us but rather on something else. Something far away and perhaps unreachable. Could it be that Captain Fang’s brother...

"I’m sorry."

"No, you have done nothing wrong, Your Highness. It was a long time ago anyway." At that moment, Captain Fang smiled wider than he usually did with me. He… looked more like someone his age when he smiled like that.

"O-oh... So why did you become a knight at this palace? I mean, you could have had a much brighter future if you became a knight at the Main Palace, right?"

Compared to before, Captain Fang answered much quicker this time.

"You could say that at the time, I was desperate, Your Highness."

"Desperate?"

"Yes, after all, I was already 16 years old and did not have any kind of job to make a living. I did not know what else to do to survive."

A 16-year-old worrying about something like that in this world? I felt ashamed of myself because at that age, all I thought about was playing with my friends. I didn’t even study properly, and my grades at school were pretty bad because of it. My parents often scolded me, and back then, I just ignored their concerns. If I ever returned to my world, I’d contact them to apologize and thank them for all their sacrifices for me.

"Uh... where are your parents?"

"They passed away a long time ago, Your Highness. Long before I came of age. Maybe when I was 5 years old. After that, my brother was the one who raised me."

Now I was overwhelmed with guilt for asking Captain Fang about his family. He had lost his parents as a child, and his brother had probably died too, though I didn’t know when. The life he’d gone through was too harsh, and it made me sad for him. How I wished I could help him, though sadly, I couldn’t do anything since all of it happened in the past.

"In the midst of my desperation, I saw a recruitment notice for soldiers and signed up without much thought. They had water and bread, I thought. I did not care where I was stationed or what duties I’d be given."

My heart ached for what Captain Fang had gone through. He was still so young but had already experienced so many terrible things. But again, no matter how I felt, I couldn’t do anything to change Captain Fang’s past. Besides, I’m sure Captain Fang isn’t the only one with a sad past. Many other characters in the novel might have their own tragic stories, even if we don’t know much about them or only see them briefly.

"So that’s how you ended up here?"

"Yes, Your Highness."

"Hm, thank you for all your hard work, Captain!"

Captain Fang chuckled softly, probably finding my behavior amusing. That’s fine; I’m happy to make him laugh. Someone as young as Captain Fang shouldn’t be living so rigidly. He’s only 18 years old, after all. Too young. He should still be enjoying his life.

I tried offering him cake again, still politely refused, but that’s okay. Once I returned to my room, I was faced with Maripos, busy directing the servants to pack Taufan’s clothes into a large wooden chest. Ehh... do we really need to bring that many clothes?

"Maripos… I don’t think we need to bring that many clothes."

"What are you saying, Your Highness? We never know if the journey will be hot or cold, if it will rain or be windy, if the ground will be wet or dry, we must be prepared for all conditions. Your comfort and safety are the top priorities." Maripos spoke passionately.

I thought I was just going to the Wind Goddess Temple for a ceremony, but this felt more like preparing for an overseas trip. Ugh… Maripos' behavior reminded me of my mother whenever she was about to travel somewhere.

Maripos then started explaining the travel routes we would take and the conditions of each area. I glanced at Captain Fang, who was now helping Papileon and one of the maids—whose name I think was Ana—pack the books I usually read into another chest. Then I looked over at Halilintar, who was peacefully sipping his tea, completely unconcerned that I had to endure Maripos’ endless chatter.

Ah, when I said I missed Maripos, it didn’t mean I wanted to hear him talk non-stop like this.

…

The ceremony of reverence for the Wind Goddess is performed by the High Priest of the Wind Goddess Temple. They would recite prayers, offer sacrifices, and perform dances as a form of respect for the Wind Goddess, Vint. The ceremony would conclude with the flying of wind chimes into the sky. Usually, this is done by a prince or princess blessed by the Wind Goddess. If none are present, another noble who has received the blessing of the Wind Goddess will do it. As a prince blessed by the Wind Goddess, it should have been Taufan who performed this. Unfortunately, he has refused to attend the ceremony for three years. Now, because I’m the one in his body, it’s up to me to fly the chimes.

When I learned this, I panicked because I still didn’t know how to control Taufan’s powers. In the short time I’ve spent in his body for nearly three months, I’ve tried to figure out his powers. My first attempt ended badly, and I almost killed myself due to my carelessness. After that, I promised not to recklessly try again, so I began studying everything I could find about wind powers from the available books. It took time for me to understand the contents and to practice what was written in them. At least now I can blow a gentle breeze within a 1-meter radius. A very slow progression, I know. But I don’t want to risk injuring myself again. Being bedridden and unable to speak was pure torture.

Luckily for me, Halilintar, who strictly forbade me from using my powers, spoke to the Priest at the Wind Goddess Temple so that I wouldn’t have to perform the ceremony’s closing. They’ve appointed a noble’s child to do it. While it makes me sound rather pathetic, at least I don’t have to come up with an excuse to avoid participating in the ceremony and can quietly be a spectator without disturbance.

Finally, after what I considered overly thorough preparations—way too thorough, in my opinion—Maripos said we were ready to leave for the Wind Goddess Temple. Halilintar deployed an excessive number of royal troops just to accompany me. In my view, it wasn’t necessary, but at least I managed to convince him to only send a few. I can’t remember the name of the Commander of the royal troops escorting me, but he seems quite familiar with Maripos. Maybe it’s because Maripos has been working at the palace for a long time. I also successfully persuaded Maripos not to bring more servants. For goodness’ sake, it’s just a trip to the temple, so why do Halilintar and Maripos act as if I’m going on a diplomatic mission to a neighboring country? Though I know they would never allow me to travel like that.

We didn’t just use one horse-drawn carriage, but two. One large and very comfortable carriage is the one I rode in. The other, much smaller, was used to transport goods. The soldiers rode horses in front, on the sides, and behind the carriage. Maripos sat inside the large carriage with me, while the two other servants rode in the carriage carrying the goods. They were originally instructed to walk behind the convoy, but how could I let them struggle while I sat comfortably inside? I asked for them to be in the same carriage as me, but Maripos stopped me. He said it wasn’t proper for a prince to ride in the same carriage as common servants. I still don’t understand the caste system, but it seems Maripos could sit with me because he’s Taufan’s personal servant and the head steward of the Sunset Palace. Plus, he’s the one who takes care of all my needs, so of course, he has to stay close. Meanwhile, the two other servants were just ordinary maids. They would be responsible for preparing meals when we camped, cleaning the clothes I would wear, and performing various other menial tasks. Since they didn’t have direct interaction with me, it wasn’t an issue for them to be in a different carriage.

Still, I couldn’t help but feel bad that they had to work so hard and only had space in the goods carriage.

Our convoy consisted of 22 people. Eleven soldiers from the Main Palace assigned by Halilintar, four soldiers from my own palace, two servants, two carriage drivers, Captain Fang, Maripos, and myself. I still think the convoy is too large, though Maripos keeps assuring me this is a small group for a prince and doesn’t reflect the wealth and prosperity of Ignisia. But Taufan’s status is that of a discarded prince, so why care about the image of a discarded prince?

In one day, we managed to leave the capital and pass through several towns before stopping in a city to rest. The city, called Tarín, had so many inhabitants. The buildings looked like something out of medieval Europe. Stone and wooden houses with towers beside them—or was that a chimney? The streets were crowded even though it was night, and the lighting came from some kind of crystal that emitted light. Unlike the lamps from my world that required power to function, these crystals naturally emitted light when in the dark. That’s why they’re widely used as a source of illumination. Maripos said that both the Main Palace and the Prince’s Palace used them, but the Sunset Palace didn’t. That hurt.

A soldier was sent to find us an inn to rest for the night. After what felt like an eternity, we finally found an inn to stay at. Without me having to tell him, Maripos immediately booked rooms for us. One room for me and him—because Maripos didn’t want to leave me alone while outside the palace, one room for the two maids who came with us—they were women, so it wouldn’t be proper to have them sleep with the rough soldiers, and one room for every three soldiers. The drivers said they would sleep in the stables to watch over the horses—I asked Maripos to persuade them, but they said they preferred being with the horses. Strange. Meanwhile, Captain Fang stayed in the same room with me as well. Like Maripos, he refused to leave me alone. He said that no one could know what might happen. This time, I agreed with both him and Maripos, because if Taufan had faced an assassination attempt while in the palace, what wasn’t possible now that I’m outside with limited security? Besides, in transmigration novels, when the MC embarks on a journey like this, they usually encounter an ambush or something similar—I really hope that doesn’t happen to me.

"Your Highness, it is time for you to sleep," Maripos said for the umpteenth time. I whined at him—not very mature, I know—and hugged his waist, claiming I couldn’t sleep because I was too excited to be out of the palace.

Once again, I saw Maripos sigh in resignation and then smile affectionately at me. He stroked my hair, letting me continue to hug his waist. He acted a lot like Halilintar. A doting older brother. I wondered if Maripos had younger siblings of his own, which might explain his behavior towards me.

Maripos let me stay up late, even accompanying me. We read a book together while I leaned on his shoulder. Captain Fang had no intention of joining us; he said he didn’t like reading. Instead, he sat in the corner of the room polishing his sword.

I must have fallen asleep while reading a book, for when I opened my eyes, I was already in bed. Last night, I had been sitting on the floor with Maripos, reading together. Neither Maripos nor Captain Fang were in the room where I was staying now. They were probably attending to something. Not wanting to trouble them, I got up and waited for Maripos to arrive with my change of clothes—I didn’t know where they kept the chest with the clothes—while I resumed reading the book I had been reading with him last night.

I didn’t have to wait long, for about ten minutes later, Maripos came bringing me breakfast, along with two other servants who carried the clothes I was to wear today. They silently prepared everything as I ate my breakfast.

I glanced towards the window that Maripos had opened, listening intently to the bustle of the city I had just arrived in. As I suspected, the city had a large population. The noise of people beginning their day’s activities was clearly audible. There was a man shouting—calling out to people to check out his wares, an argument over the type of apples, the sound of horses pulling carriages, and various other sounds. It was truly a busy city.

Honestly, I wanted to explore the city. After all, I had only ever spent time in the Sunset Palace. I wanted to see the world within this novel with my own eyes, to see its people, their culture, and much more. However, I realized that I was on a journey with a deadline and could not afford to waste time. Maybe when we return from the temple, I could ask Maripos to allow me to explore some of the cities we visit.

We continued our journey after the horses were fed and re-hitched to the carriages. This time, Captain Fang led his horse to walk beside the carriage I was riding in. From the open window, I tell a story to Captain Fang because I was bored with nothing to do. Captain Fang wasn’t much of a talker, but he was a good listener. He would occasionally respond to my words, and sometimes Maripos would join in on our conversation. I must say, the atmosphere felt far more pleasant today compared to when we left the kingdom. The Commander of the Royal Troops assigned by Halilintar was still as stiff as usual, and the soldiers following him were likewise. Perhaps they behaved this way because they weren’t familiar with us.

We passed through a few more towns before finally entering the forest as night approached. Maripos handed me a map and began to explain the route we were taking in more detail. This time, I listened carefully to what he was saying. He said that the forest we entered was just an ordinary forest, not a magical one, but it was home to many wild animals and poisonous plants. Maripos reminded me not to wander off when we set up camp. I promised him that I wouldn’t leave his side or Captain Fang. I was serious about my promise because, truthfully, I didn’t like being in the forest, especially at night. Who knows what might emerge from the darkness?

We didn’t go too far into the forest before the Commander of the Royal Troops —whose name I still didn’t know—suggested that we stop and set up camp. The soldiers quickly began unloading the supply carts to gather the equipment needed for setting up the tents. It was clear that they were well-trained at this; they must have camped in forests many times before. Some went to gather firewood while others helped the drivers tend to the exhausted horses. As for me, I sat leaning against a tree with Captain Fang standing beside me. I watched as the two servants who had accompanied us ran around preparing dinner from the game some of the soldiers had hunted. They must be exhausted from taking care of us. After we visit the Wind Goddess Temple, I should give them a holiday.

Then Maripos came and brought me a blanket. He also instructed me to sit by the campfire they had lit to ensure I stayed warm until my tent was ready. I had suggested to him that it might be better for me to sleep in the carriage instead, at least the soldiers wouldn’t have to go through the trouble of setting up a tent for me. But once again, Maripos reminded me that I was a prince—despite being a discarded one—and that Halilintar had specifically ordered them to ensure my safety and comfort. Now, I could only hope they were being paid well for all their hard work.

“Maripos, how much longer will our journey take?”

“We have been traveling at a much faster pace than I initially expected. If we keep up this speed, we might arrive earlier. Perhaps in three days, we will reach Mount Vintara.”

“Oh, much sooner than I imagined.”

“His Highness Prince Halilintar gave you the finest and fastest horses in the Kingdom for this journey.”

Of course. Halilintar wouldn’t allow any obstacles in the way of his beloved younger brother’s journey. I wonder if he treats all his brothers the same as he treats Taufan, or if Taufan is a special case. I hope the other princes don’t feel jealous of the affection Halilintar shows Taufan.

I stared at the campfire burning in front of me. The sight of the fire reminded me of Halilintar and Gempa, my brothers from my original world. I could say I had my own memories with them and a campfire. If I remember correctly, we were about 10 years old at the time. We had gone camping with Father and Uncle Pian. Let’s just say we were mischievous kids full of curiosity. We decided to explore, wandering out of Father and Uncle’s supervision, and ended up getting lost. I remember Halilintar holding Gempa’s hand in fear as we tried to find our way back through the dark forest. I also remember Gempa trying to stay calm and lead us. But I don’t recall what I was doing then—maybe I was just as scared as Halilintar, or maybe I was trying to comfort him.

Another thing I remember is when we stopped out of exhaustion. Gempa and I gathered dry wood and leaves while Halilintar lit the fire. We slept holding hands that night. And what I remember most is Halilintar trying to keep watch over us even though he was terrified. Whether in my world or this one, Halilintar has always tried to protect us, his younger brothers, even though he too needed someone to protect him. The next morning, Father and Uncle Pian, along with the search team, found us. It’s a funny memory now when I think about it.

But now, this memory makes me miss them, as it resurfaced in my mind. We used to be so close—why did we drift apart? I pulled the blanket tighter around myself. I thought to myself that if I managed to return to my world, I would take my two brothers camping again. And this time, we would bring lots of flashlights because Halilintar is still as scared as he was when we were kids. Without realizing it, I laughed, and Maripos glanced at me in confusion. I quickly gave him a smile while thinking about all the things I wanted to do once I returned to my original world.

“What are you thinking about, Your Highness?”

“Halilintar...”

Just like when Maripos comforted me a few weeks ago, I felt a hand on my shoulder again, and slowly I was pulled to lean against him. I allowed him to half-embrace me while my head rested on his shoulder. "You must miss him a lot, Your Highness." 

"...Yes." 

I knew that the Halilintar Maripos referred to is Halilintar, the First Prince of Ignisia, not Halilintar, my real brother. But right now, I missed both of them. I missed the warmth of this world's Halilintar towards me, and I also missed my scaredy-cat brother Halilintar. Oh, how I wished I could see my brothers again. 

"This will be a short journey, Your Highness. You won't even realize it when we return to the palace." 

I chuckled at Maripos' words but said nothing. Our comforting moment was interrupted by one of the soldiers—his name was Luis, and he was a soldier from my palace—who said that my tent was ready. Maripos suggested it would be best for me to rest in my tent while waiting for dinner. I had to agree with him; sitting by the campfire only made me think more about my brothers and how much I missed them, as well as my own world. 

My dinner was rabbit meat made into a stew. Maybe due to the lack of spices and the limited cooking methods, it tasted so bad that I wanted to gag, but I knew it wasn't polite to waste food. Especially not after the servant had prepared this with effort, and also the soldier who caught this animal for me to eat. I just hoped Taufan's body wouldn't have any digestive problems. 

At moments like these, I really missed the touch of modern technology from my world. The geniuses who created that technology should have been present in this world too and developed it to be far more advanced. The author of this novel really lacked creativity.

Chapter Text

Boboiboy Fanfiction

©  Boboiboy | Animonsta Studio

A/N: The entire story is purely fictional, and the author does not profit from writing this story. If there are any similarities in ideas, character names, or locations, they are purely coincidental.

≫ ──── ≪•◦ ❈ ◦•≫ ──── ≪

Two days in the forest and another day passing through several villages until we finally arrived at Mount Vintara. It was a very tall mountain, its peak shrouded in mist. Truly, a fitting place for the Wind Goddess Temple. We didn’t immediately begin climbing the mountain; the horses needed rest, as did the soldiers. We rested at the foot of the mountain. This time there was no need to set up camp because we wouldn’t be staying the night here. The Commander of the Royal Troops —whose name I now know is Kaika, and I’ve stopped caring whether his name is unique or not—said that we had to climb the mountain before nightfall.

The spot chosen for our rest was near a river, so I could wash my face after almost two full days in the carriage. When we arrive at the temple later, I hope they allow me to bathe before the ceremony, as my body is sticky from sweat and I feel very smelly, even though I haven’t done anything. Of course, Maripos and my attendants have said they are ready to fetch water from the river and heat it so I can bathe, but I’ve made it clear that I don’t want to trouble them. We are here to rest before climbing the mountain, not to bathe. Besides, I’m a man, not bathing for a day or two isn’t a big deal to me—aside from the discomfort in my body.

As I was enjoying the cold water on my feet, I faintly heard the sound of birds chirping. The right thing to do would be to ignore the source of the sound. I mean, I’m in the wild with a lush environment, so there are bound to be birds nesting or foraging nearby. But I was so bored because during this journey all I had done was sit and read books or play guessing games with Maripos. My common sense told me this would get me into trouble, but my curiosity said I had to find out what kind of bird was making that sound.

I glanced toward Maripos, who was talking with Commander Kaika, then at Captain Fang, who was feeding his horse, the soldiers busy chatting, and the two attendants who were resting. Without putting my shoes back on, I slowly started walking toward the source of the bird's chirping that wouldn’t stop. Sometimes sneaking away is necessary.

The further I walked, the louder the bird's chirping became, letting me know I was heading in the right direction. I didn’t know how far I had walked; I just kept going toward the sound. At one point, I finally realized my foolishness. Didn’t I promise Maripos never to leave his side? And here I am. In the forest, barefoot, and not knowing the way back. Maripos would be very mad at me, and this certainly wouldn’t escape Halilintar’s ears. When I return to the Kingdom later, Halilintar will scold me and maybe forbid me from being alone no matter the time.

I decided to sit on a large rock while waiting for Maripos and the others to come looking for me. Of course, I wasn’t foolish enough to try to find my way back—I could get even more lost if I did that. Now I had to think about what excuse to give Maripos so he wouldn’t be too mad at me. Should I say I was enchanted by the bird's chirping, which led me away from them? That’s ridiculous.

Then, again, I heard the chirping like before. This time the sound was so clear, as if the bird was nearby. Suddenly I stood up, tilting my head toward the sky to try to spot the bird that had made the sound and led me to this place. Among the tall tree branches, I saw no birds. There were a few squirrels watching me—they probably thought I was a pathetic human, alone in this forest. Strange, such a clear sound, but no bird in sight.

I tried again to listen closely to the sound. My feet moved toward the direction I believed the sound was coming from. It was a bush with small blue flowers. They looked like forget-me-nots, but they weren’t forget-me-nots. The closer I got to the bush, the stronger the chirping I heard. I bent down to peek into the bush, slowly kneeling in front of it. I saw behind the bush, a small bird. Its feathers were a shimmering blue, though some parts of its body were covered in mud. The bird tilted its head when it saw me, and it no longer chirped like before. Instead, it seemed curious about me. I admit, for a bird so small, it had quite a loud voice.

It was about the size of a sparrow. I remember there are similar birds in my world. Small birds that are blue, though I don’t remember their name. But it seems this bird and the ones in my world are a bit different. Because as far as I know, there are no birds with shimmering feathers like this one. How can I describe it… this bird somehow feels magical to me.

As I reached out my hand toward the bird, it slowly hopped toward me until it was perched on my index finger. I brought it closer to my face to observe the bird. I was right when I said this bird was different from the ones in my world. Its eyes, which I initially thought were black, were actually dark blue. Not only that, the bird's eyes looked like they were made of sapphire. And its feathers, as I mentioned before, were blue with a bit of yellow on its chest. I could also say this was an intelligent bird because when I brought my other finger closer, the bird moved, signaling it wanted to be petted.

For some reason, this bird reminded me of Oak, Gempa’s spirit animal.

“Prince!”

I was startled by the shout. I knew it was Maripos’s voice; he must have come to look for me. Then I turned my gaze back to the small bird still perched on my finger. Why didn’t the bird fly away? Could something be wrong with it?

“Prince! Prince Taufan!”

Again, I heard Maripos calling my name. I carefully transferred the bird to my palm and gently cupped it with both hands. I began running toward the sound of Maripos’s voice, shouting, “Over here! Maripos, I’m over here!”

My lack of caution caused me to slip on the moss, and I fell. My hands and feet hurt, surely injured, but I didn’t care. I made sure I didn’t crush the small bird in my fall, then slowly stood up again and resumed running. But over time, Maripos’s voice became fainter, and I began to lose the sound entirely. What—what is going on? I was certain Maripos’s voice had been so close to me, and I had shouted back to him. He should have heard me and been heading my way! Why couldn’t I hear his voice now? No. Not just Maripos’s voice, this forest had suddenly become eerily silent. I could even hear my own heartbeat now.

What is happening?

“Maripos!” I shouted. In this silence, my voice sounded so clear, I could even hear the echo of my call.

What is going on?

Why does it feel like I'm in another world right now?

And it’s funny because the reality is, I am in another world, not my original one.

Trying to stay calm, I walk in the direction I believe the sound of Maripos came from. But no matter how long or how far I walk, I always end up back at the same place. I know because I've passed by those blue-flowered bushes three times. I'm walking in circles. No matter how many turns I take, I keep returning to those blue-flowered bushes. What is really happening right now? Is this what people in my world call being spirited away by a jinn? Ridiculous. As if jinns even exist here. But what if they do?

I shake my head. No, I can’t think like that. They say that if you think about it, it might appear. So, I should just keep walking and try to find a way out. The bird in my grasp chirped once, maybe I was holding it too tightly. I loosened my grip on the bird, "Do you know the way out? You’re the one who called me here, aren’t you?”

Just like when I found it, the bird tilted its head a few times, then gently pecked my thumb. I could only chuckle slightly; how silly to ask a bird for directions, a bird that might have been asking for help itself earlier.

When I saw the blue-flowered bush for the umpteenth time, I chose to give up. I sat back down on the large rock from earlier, hoping Maripos would soon find me. If not Maripos, at least someone from my party.

I placed the small bird on my lap and began to examine it. Its body was dirty with mud. I took a handkerchief from my pocket and wiped the mud from its feathers. When I touched its left wing, the bird jumped away from my touch. Something must be wrong with its left wing. Gently, I held the bird again, as carefully as I could, and began to stretch out its left wing. The bird squirmed weakly, probably in pain. My guess was right, its left wing was broken, which was probably why it couldn’t fly and could only chirp for help.

“You’re so unfortunate, and so small. I don’t know how to care for a bird, but Maripos probably knows how to take care of you.” I said, stroking its head with one finger.

The response I got was a chirp, maybe it was asking if I could heal it, or maybe it was wondering what I was talking about. I felt like I was going mad talking to a bird while lost in this forest, but I couldn’t help it. Instead of thinking about possibilities I didn’t like, it was better to talk to this little bird. At least it could distract me.

“But we need to get out of here first. Unfortunately, I don’t know how to do that. Maripos will scold me for this, I just hope Halilintar won’t forbid me from traveling after this.”

Once again, the bird chirped in response to my words. It must be confused about what I was saying. Sorry, little bird, I seem to be having a crisis of sanity here. I lay down on the large rock, it was so hard. I had gotten used to sleeping in such soft and comfortable beds. Even on this journey, I still had a decent bed. The carriage I rode was also designed with the comfort of its occupants in mind. Hah, I’ve only been in this world for three months, and I’m already used to the luxurious life of a pampered prince.

The sky above was blue and clear. Such a beautiful day if only you weren’t lost in the forest.

Wait a minute…

The sky?

I sat up suddenly, causing the small bird I had laid on my chest to fall. Luckily, I caught it before it rolled off the rock. The bird chirped, clearly angry at me. But now I couldn’t focus on it. I realized one thing when I first entered this forest earlier: when I looked up to find the bird that was chirping, I only saw the trees growing lushly with branches and twigs touching each other. Their thick leaves had covered the sky, and the only way light could enter was through the gaps in the leaves. But now, I could clearly see the sky stretching above me, even though I was in the same place as before.

And that’s when I realized there was some kind of transparent screen around me. I tried reaching out, touching the transparent screen. If my guess was correct, it was some kind of barrier that kept me from leaving this place and made me end up walking in circles. It felt like I wasn’t touching anything, but when I tried to walk through it, I ended up back where the blue-flowered bushes were. What is this? I’ve never read anything like this in the books, and Maripos never mentioned a misleading forest like this. He only warned me about wild beasts and poisonous plants.

I looked up again, seeing the sky above me. I realized that whatever barrier surrounded me couldn’t reach the sky. So, the conclusion is that to get out of here, I might have to fly out. The problem is, I don’t know how to do that! No, actually I do, unfortunately, I can’t.

In the book about people who have wind powers, there was a poor nobleman who could walk on air. He used that method to escape debt collectors at first, but then made a name for himself when he used it in war. Windstep[1] is the term he gave to that method. Windstep, as the name suggests, utilizes wind to create stepping stones that you can walk on. It allows you to walk or even run in the air. Most people blessed by Vint can perform this simple step. In fact, it can be said that it’s the first thing they learn when trying to control their power. I’m sure if it was the original Taufan, he would’ve easily moved out of this place.

[1] Windstep, is an ability possessed by users of wind power. It works by concentrating wind at a point to form a foothold that allows you to stand on it.

It feels pointless trying to find a way out because I can’t get past it. It’s like being offered fresh fruit, but I don’t have the money to buy it.

The little bird I had neglected earlier chirped again. It looked at me, then lifted its head and looked at the sky. Soon after, it began to flutter its wings. Was it asking me why I hadn’t flown out yet?

“I want to get out too, but I can’t. All I can do is blow a gentle breeze for about a meter, it’s useless in this situation.”

The bird chirped again.

“Are you saying I should try it, no matter what?”

Call me crazy, but I actually saw the bird nod its head. The bird just answered my question! What kind of bird is this?

No, this is not the time for me to think about the type of bird. I should be thinking of a way to get out of this place. Right, I shouldn’t give up so easily. Who knows how long I’ll be trapped here and how long it will take for Maripos to find me? I shouldn’t rely on others to come and save me; I have to save myself. 

I try again to remember how to do the windstep. After all, it’s a basic technique that even children can learn. This shouldn’t be a problem for me. And besides, I’ve read about it multiple times. The first thing I need to do is feel the wind around me. The good news is the wind keeps blowing in this forest. Then I have to focus and not let the wind control me instead. Otherwise, it will be just like the first time I tried to figure out Taufan's powers. 

Focus isn’t my strong suit, but I will keep trying. I don’t know how long it took, but eventually, I felt the wind blowing in this forest starting to swirl around me. Alright, this is half good news and half bad news. The good news is that it means I managed to control the wind around me, but the bad news is that if I lose control, I’ll end up killing myself. Let’s stay calm and remember what I need to do. 

After controlling the wind, I need to focus it on a single point, making it so I can step on it. It sounds so easy, but in reality, it’s so difficult. I failed many times but kept trying again. Until after countless attempts, I finally managed to create one I could step on. Unfortunately, the longer I used this power, the more dizzy and tired I became. This isn’t good, I can probably only use the windstep ten times, but the transparent barrier I saw is so high. Either way, I have to make it work! 

If I estimate the height of this body, which is about 160 cm, the distance I can jump would probably reach 1.5 meters. 1.5 meters x 10 means the distance I can cover might reach 15 meters. The trees in this forest might be about 10-13 meters tall, and the barrier is only as high as the trees. Ten steps should be enough for me to get out of this place. It should!

I glanced back at the large rock earlier, and the blue bird still hadn’t moved. It’s still watching me so seriously. Well, after all, its wing is broken, and it can’t fly. Where would it want to go with a broken wing? I picked up the blue bird, tucking it safely into the inner pocket of the coat I was wearing. Alright, it’s time to try to get out of this place. 

I only have one chance; I can’t fail. My hands clenched and opened nervously as I glanced back at the transparent barrier, which stopped before reaching the treetops. I can do this. I have to! 

I created the first step and jumped onto it. A bit wobbly, and I nearly fell, but thankfully I managed to balance myself. Nine more steps to go. Like before, I created another wind step and jumped again. I kept going like that until the 8th step, where I nearly fell from the height because I almost lost control of the wind I was controlling. 

My chest began to tighten, along with my head, which was spinning. I was also growing more tired by the moment. I can’t keep this up; I’ve been using this power for too long, I need to hurry. 

This time, I let myself jump first, then created a step after. I was truly betting everything on my skills and determination alone. My vision began to blur, dark spots starting to appear at the edges of my sight. I knew it wouldn’t be long before I lost consciousness, but I had to hold on, I was getting so close to escaping. Now I’m on the 9th step. I only need one more step, and I’ll be free. Just one. One more! 

I pushed myself, even when I felt something trickling from my nose or the metallic taste starting to spread in my mouth. I kept holding on, trying to stay conscious. I jumped again, and as my awareness slowly began to fade, I knew that if I passed out, I wouldn’t wake up again—I’d fall from 10 meters high and die. 

I succeeded in creating the final step and managed to pass through the barrier. After getting out, the sounds that had previously disappeared came rushing back. The desperate shouts of Maripos and the soldiers who were looking for me. Maybe it was the relief I felt at hearing familiar voices or the fact that the forest looked so beautiful from this height—I could even clearly see Mount Vintara, which we were heading toward—I felt much calmer and less panicked, even as I fell after losing my foothold. I fell from the sky, but I didn’t panic at all. Is this because I’ve had the experience of falling down the stairs before? 

I thought my body would hit the ground hard, but before that happened, someone caught me. 

“Commander Kaika!” I shouted as soon as I saw his face. Commander Kaika didn’t smile, his brows furrowed, and his eyes stared at me sharply. But I laughed, patting his cheek as I said, “Nice catch!” 

Then I think my eyes rolled to the back of my head, and I lost consciousness. 

…

“Don’t go too high, Taufan! You could fall!” The woman’s voice was full of worry, while the man next to her just laughed and kept encouraging the boy who was currently jumping in the air. 

“Mom! I’m flying now!” The boy shouted, laughing joyfully, especially when he saw his two siblings only able to watch from the ground. Unfortunately, because he was too focused on his siblings and parents, he didn’t realize he’d lost his footing and fell. Panicking, he couldn’t control his power, and the wind began to swirl around them. The woman earlier screamed when she saw him fall, and his siblings called out his name, but before his body hit the ground, he was caught by a pair of strong and warm arms.  

“Oops, it seems our little hero has flown enough for today.” The man who caught him said. His amused chuckle masked his own panic. The child in his arms still looked shocked, but soon he started laughing again. 

“Dad! Nice catch!”

…

My head feels so painful, and so does my throat. It feels like I've swallowed sand while banging my head against a rock. And again, I dreamt of something I can't remember. Should I ignore it like last time or try to recall it? I choose the former because I think easing my headache is more important. I struggle to get up, but the dizziness in my head doesn't help at all, and I almost fall due to my pathetic attempt. As I touch the blanket covering my body, I realize I'm now in a place I don't recognize.

I start observing my surroundings. This room is much smaller than Taufan's room in the Sunset Palace but far larger than my room in my original world. The walls are made of white stone, and a blue tapestry with a wind vortex design hangs on the wall. A large open window, a brown wooden door, and a chandelier hang from the ceiling. The bed I’m in is quite simple, using only white sheets without any canopy curtains. There’s no side table, nor any sofa or table like those found in a noble's chamber to entertain guests. Everything is so simple. Very simple.

Where am I?

The wooden door that was previously closed slowly opens, making a creaking sound that draws my attention. Maripos steps in alongside a woman draped in white robes. When he sees that I’m sitting up, Maripos hurries towards me. From the expression on his face, I know he’s angry with me, but maybe he’s holding back, not wanting to scold me in front of this unfamiliar woman.

“I am delighted to see you are awake, Your Highness.” Maripos puts extra emphasis on ‘Your Highness,’ and I know I’m truly in trouble because of it. I smile apologetically at him, unsure of my voice since my throat still feels so sore at the moment. Please, Maripos, forgive me for being so entranced by the chirping of the little bird. Ah! Right! Where’s the little bird? They didn’t throw it away, did they?

Just as I’m about to ask about the bird, Maripos hands me a glass of water—I don’t know when he poured it for me. Gratefully, I accept the water and drink it. My throat, which was so sore and dry earlier, gradually starts to feel better. Cheers to water!

I quietly glance at the woman who had entered with Maripos. Who is she?

“Your Highness, this is the High Priestess of this temple, Lady Aarav.”

I almost spit out the water I was drinking when Maripos introduced her. The High Priestess? Why is she here? Where exactly am I?

“Eh… Maripos… it seems like I’ve been asleep for quite some time, but where am I?”

At that moment, the calm expression on Maripos’ face slowly starts to crack. His eyes begin to water, and his face turns red. He grips my shoulders tightly and looks at me seriously. “Your Highness, you are not just asleep for quite some time. You disappeared in the forest for an entire day, then somehow fell from the sky, covered in blood, and did not wake up for two full days!”

I can only blink, struggling to process the information. To be honest, I knew my time inside the barrier would probably take quite a while, but I didn’t expect it to last the whole day. And being unconscious for two days? Wow… way longer than I thought. Eh? Wait a minute, didn’t I use Taufan’s power to escape that barrier? But why doesn’t my body feel as exhausted as before, and I can speak now? Could it be that all the medicines I’ve been drinking are finally working? If that’s the case, I won’t try to escape again when Maripos orders me to drink them!

Then I hear soft laughter. The woman who had been quietly observing us now walks towards the large open window, extending her hand, and I see a faint blue light emerge from it. Then I feel the wind begin to blow into the room, directly toward me and Maripos. I thought she was going to attack us, but it turns out she’s only sending a gentle breeze our way. For some reason, the wind makes my body feel much lighter, and gradually, the headache I felt upon waking up begins to fade away.

“Your Highness, it is an honor to meet you in person,” the woman said. She bowed slightly to me as a sign of respect.

“As Lord Maripos mentioned earlier, this lowly name is Aarav, and I am the High Priestess of this temple.”

Temple? Does that mean I’m in the Wind Goddess Temple right now? When did we ascend? Was it while I was unconscious?! They must have had a hard time. No wonder Maripos is so angry with me. I guess I should apologize to Maripos and everyone else I troubled.

“I have long wanted to meet you, Your Highness. But Prince Halilintar said your health has been worsening day by day. I was very saddened by that.”

Huh? What? She’s never met Taufan in person? But didn’t Taufan only refuse to attend the ceremony for the past three years?

“I understand that you must be very confused right now, Your Highness. After all, I was only appointed as the High Priestess a year ago. The previous High Priest passed away before that, and I succeeded her.” Aarav continued.

Wait a minute. If I’m in the Wind Goddess Temple and have been unconscious for two days… does that mean I’m late for the ceremony to honor Vint?! Then why did I come all this way, endangering myself?

“The ceremony… am I too late?”

Aarav smiled at me, “No, Your Highness. You are just in time for the ceremony.”

Chapter Text

Boboiboy Fanfiction

©  Boboiboy | Animonsta Studio

A/N: The entire story is purely fictional, and the author does not profit from writing this story. If there are any similarities in ideas, character names, or locations, they are purely coincidental.

≫ ──── ≪•◦ ❈ ◦•≫ ──── ≪

Layangara. It is the name of a ceremonial tribute to Vint, an event that takes place before the Kite Festival, symbolizing freedom, strength, and the blessings of the Wind Goddess. The ceremony held at the Wind Goddess Temple is deeply solemn and filled with spirituality, reminding me of religious ceremonies from my old world. Indeed, Vint is a deity revered and worshipped by the people here, and for some, I suppose she is like a God. This ceremony is a form of gratitude and respect that her followers show to the Wind Goddess.

I had been dressed by Maripos as finely as possible, given that this was the first time Taufan would be seen again at the Layangara Ceremony after three years of absence. He insisted that even if I wouldn't be the one releasing the wind chimes, I must still present myself properly before the followers of the Wind Goddess. I am a prince, after all, though my status has changed. What a hassle—I'm certain no one would care whether I attended or not.

The ceremony was held in the temple hall, where all of Vint’s followers gathered and sat, waiting for the High Priestess to arrive and commence the ritual. Truthfully, I wanted to choose a seat tucked away in the back corner to avoid drawing attention. However, some temple priests, upon seeing me, told me they had prepared a special place for me as soon as they knew I would be attending.

Guess what?

Yes, that seat was right in the front, where everyone could see me. Oh, goodness! I was utterly embarrassed, being the center of so many stares. Some looked at me with disdain, some with eyes as bitter as if I had insulted their mothers, some didn’t care to look at me at all, while a few appeared curious. The ceremony hadn’t even begun, and I already wanted to go home. Maripos, please, take me home!

I miss my phone. If I had it right now, I could just pretend not to notice those around me. When will I return to my own world?

Fortunately, I didn’t have to endure the embarrassment much longer, as I soon heard the delicate chime of bells accompanied by the soft beat of drums. That was when Aarav, clad in white robes with curved blue embroidery along their edges, entered the temple. She walked in calmly, her attire untouched by the breeze. Her long black hair was braided back, unadorned by any accessories. Her expression was serene and peaceful, and in her hands, she held an object shaped like a spiral of wind—the same symbol I had seen on the temple’s carpet.

A gentle breeze touched my skin as Aarav entered the temple, as if she had called the wind to flow inside to mark her arrival. It’s extraordinary how her presence alone could impact the entire hall. It made me wonder what the original Taufan would be like if he could freely use his powers.

With Aarav’s arrival, the Layangara Ceremony began.

...

I am so tired.

Even though I did nothing but sit and observe the ongoing ceremony, I feel exhausted and want to sleep right now. Maybe it's because, throughout the entire ceremony, all I could do was sit for hours on end without doing anything. I nearly drifted off to sleep when Aarav began reciting prayers and delivering sermons—I couldn’t understand a single word. At least the dances they performed managed to entertain me a bit. The ceremony finally reached its end when Aarav called for the noble who would release the wind chime into the sky. At that moment, all eyes were on me instead of the dark-haired girl walking up to the altar. Maybe they wondered why the prince wasn’t the one releasing the wind chime, even though he was present. Sorry to ruin your expectations, but I’m not as great as the Taufan you know. I could only pretend not to notice their stares and focused on watching the girl about to release the wind chime. She looked to be about Taufan's age or maybe a bit younger. Her dress was quite simple—perhaps because she was attending a tribute ceremony for the Goddess—just a plain light-blue dress without any embroidery. She wore no jewelry except for a butterfly hairpin that matched the color of her dress.

The girl held the wind chime with both hands, closed her eyes as if in prayer, and then, when she opened her eyes, she extended her hands to the sky. The wind chime in her hands slowly ascended, chiming melodiously as it gradually disappeared into the blue sky.

Ah, so that’s why the temple hall doesn’t have a roof.

With the wind chime’s ascent, the entire Layangara Ceremony was concluded. I made my escape as quickly as possible before anyone could approach me. I had noticed Aarav smiling at me and some young priests looking curious, as though they wanted to come closer. Sorry, but I just want to get back to my room and sleep now.

Unfortunately, being too focused on making my escape, I accidentally bumped into someone, and we both fell. It was the girl who had released the wind chime earlier!

“I’m sorry, I was so careless not to see you,” I said, extending a hand to help her up.

“It’s alright, I couldn’t see very well today either,” she said, accepting my hand.

Once she stood up properly, I let go and glanced around. It was quieter here compared to the temple hall, and I sighed in relief. Crowded places make me uncomfortable, like everyone is watching me. Then, I heard a small gasp from the girl I’d bumped into. When I looked at her again, she had put on round glasses from I don’t know where. Ah, maybe that’s why she said she couldn’t see very well earlier. But why did she take off her glasses during the ceremony? Wouldn’t it have been hard for her if she’d made a mistake because she couldn’t see clearly?

“I have committed a great sin! Forgive me, Your Highness! I am guilty for making you fall,” she said, bowing as low as possible, almost making me think she’d kneel if I said something to frighten her.

“Oh, no, no. I’m at fault for not paying attention. Please, straighten yourself.”

The girl stood up straight but still avoided looking at me. If I had to say, she seemed scared. Why are you afraid of me? I’m not going to eat you! Is she worried because I’m a prince? But isn’t Taufan merely a discarded prince, seen as unworthy by his own people? The proof is that Pavan can freely insult me and even push me downstairs.

“I saw what you did earlier. It was incredible,” I said, trying to ease the tension between us. But instead of relaxing, the girl grew even more tense and frightened.

“I… I am most unworthy to take your place, Your Highness. I beg for forgiveness.”

Goodness! Why is she like this? As far as I know, Taufan is a relaxed and kind-hearted prince. At Sunset Palace, the servants and guards serve me kindly without a trace of fear. They also don’t display the disrespect I thought I’d initially receive. And from Taufan’s records, he really was just a mischievous and cheerful prince. Then why is this girl so afraid?

“Please don’t. I’m not in a position to do that. Besides, you did nothing wrong.”

The girl still looked as scared, nervous, and uncomfortable as before, despite what I said. I could only offer her a smile and mention that I had to go. Honestly, I wanted to talk to her more, especially since I didn’t know her name. But she seemed so anxious near me—I still have no idea why. I didn’t have the heart to make her more uncomfortable, so I quickly left. Inwardly, I wondered what had made her so afraid of me. Had Taufan ever done something to her that caused this reaction?

On my way back, I ran into Captain Fang. I called out to him, and the young man looked at me expressionlessly but came over. He steadied me as I nearly stumbled again, tripping over my own feet. Why does it feel like I keep embarrassing myself?

“Captain Fang! What are you doing here? I thought you’d be with Maripos and Commander Kaika.”

"Maripos asked me to wait for you, Your Highness."

"But why here?"

"I am not a follower of the Wind Goddess, Your Highness. I am not permitted to approach during the ceremony."

I just learned of that rule. It’s rather inconvenient, really. I thought that since Captain Fang is Taufan’s personal guard, he could freely enter the temple. Oh well, the ceremony is over, and I can go back now.

"Captain Fang, do you know where the little bird that was inside my robe before I fainted is?"

"Are you referring to the small blue bird with a broken wing?"

"Yes! Where is it? Maripos didn’t throw it away, did he?"

Captain Fang gave a slight smile, "No, Your Highness. You needn’t worry; as far as I know, Maripos took it to care for it."

I sighed in relief, grateful they didn’t discard the little bird. I went through a lot of trouble just to save it. If Maripos had thrown it away, I would have been mad with him.

I started telling Captain Fang about the Layangara Ceremony, also mentioning the wind chimes that had been released. As usual, Captain Fang listened attentively without interrupting. I didn’t mention the girl; I would save that to ask Maripos later.

At that moment, we crossed paths with a group of young nobles. It gave me a sense of déjà vu, especially when I saw Pavan Morgan and his friends among them—I was surprised to learn that they, too, were blessed by the Wind Goddess. Ah, why can’t my days ever go peacefully?

Just like at the Main Palace, as soon as the noble group saw me, their expressions turned condescending. They truly didn’t care that Taufan was still their prince. I glanced at Captain Fang, now standing beside me, his hand firmly on the sword at his waist. It was as if he were contemplating cutting them all down to prevent them from disturbing me. As much as I wished he would, I knew that wasn’t the right thing to do.

Unlike before, this time it wasn’t Pavan Morgan who approached me, but an older-looking young man with brown hair. He wore the same arrogant expression that Pavan had when I first met him. I still didn’t know the names of all the nobles in Ignisia; after all, the list Maripos had given me lacked any pictures. Even if it had, there’s no way I could remember them all.

"Your Highness, we were quite surprised to see you attend the ceremony today," the brown-haired young man said. His friends began to snicker behind him. Is that all they can do? However, Pavan and the dark-haired girl I had bumped into earlier didn’t laugh. Pavan averted his gaze from me, while the girl lowered her head.

This time, I didn’t smile at them—as I had before. I simply looked at them without emotion. Seeing my lack of response, the young man seemed slightly annoyed but quickly hid it with a smile.

"Ah, where are our manners, right? I am the second son of Viscount Ford. Lonan Ford," the young man said. Like Pavan when he introduced himself, he bowed slightly while still watching me. He was even worse than Pavan; I could clearly see the mocking smile on his face and the disdain in his eyes.

Viscount Ford. I remember that name. He is a figure with considerable influence in the capital. Despite only holding the rank of Viscount, he possesses significant wealth. He has always acted as though he’s in a neutral faction, yet he’s actually a supporter of the Fourth Prince. And now, here I am, facing his second son. How unlucky I am. Has my luck been wearing thin since entering Taufan’s body, or is it Taufan’s misfortune lingering with his body no matter that a different soul now inhabits it?

I put on a smile, "A pleasure to meet you, Lord Lonan."

The smirk on Lonan’s face grew. I knew he only wanted to humiliate me in front of the other nobles. Perhaps he wanted to trample my dignity as a prince while also reminding me that I was nothing more than a prince discarded by the kingdom.

"Since you’re here, Your Highness, why not join us?" Lonan gestured towards the nobles gathered behind him.

I glanced at the young nobles standing behind him, "It’s a pleasure to meet all of you, young lords and ladies. I would love to chat with you all and express the joy in my heart at this meeting. How unfortunate that I must return to my quarters to attend to pressing matters."

Lonan kept his smile intact, "Such a shame, Your Highness. We were hoping to speak with you at length. Perhaps you would be willing to enlighten us on the urgent matters that steal you away from us?"

The corners of my mouth twitched. I also noticed Captain Fang, who looked as if he wanted to step forward against them but restrained himself, likely to avoid causing trouble for me as he had last time. Lonan was deliberately suggesting that I should be grateful to them and pleading to socialize with them instead of leaving as I pleased. He was implying that, as a disgraced prince, I had no right to walk away from them. Oh, how I’d love to see his expression if Halilintar were here with me right now. Would he still dare to insult the beloved younger brother of the First Prince, Ignisia’s finest swordsman?

"There’s a book awaiting my return, and I simply can’t let it wait any longer."

Lonan looked disbelieving when I mentioned the book, as if he hadn’t expected me to refuse his invitation just for a book. But that book was far more valuable than this snot-nosed brat in front of me.

"A book?" I could see the corners of Lonan’s lips twitching, probably holding back his emotions. Ugh, spoiled brat!

"Lord Lonan may not believe it, but there’s a certain activity that requires one to have the ability to read. It makes people much more insightful. You should try it sometime, my Lord." I said, smiling broadly.

Pavan, who had been quiet until now, let out a suppressed chuckle. So did the black-haired girl who had kept her head down. They both pretended nothing was happening while Lonan and the other nobles glared at them. But when I looked at them, Pavan and the girl both had red faces and shaking shoulders from holding back their laughter.

Lonan's face flushed red with anger and embarrassment, but he still tried to keep smiling at me. He was about to say something else when I heard my name being called. When I turned, I saw Aarav walking toward us. The young nobles seemed uneasy, apparently afraid to do anything in front of the High Priestess of the Wind Goddess Temple. Ha! And they insulted their prince so easily!

“Oh! It seems I interrupted a meeting between Your Highness and these young nobles. My deepest apologies.” Although she said that, Aarav had a smile on her face. She even winked at me. I just chuckled, knowing she must’ve come to help me when she saw I was approached by these nobles. Aarav then said she had something to discuss with me—which I knew was a lie—and invited me to go to the altar room, where the statue of Vint was located and where the priests made offerings. When I glanced back at Lonan, his sharp gaze told me he would get back at me for the embarrassment I had caused him today. Hmph, adolescent brat.

“I’m truly sorry you had to experience that, Your Highness. Even though they are blessed by the Wind Goddess, they did something so shameful to you in her temple,” Aarav said, her voice filled with regret as she looked down at the ground, as though she was the one who had wronged me, not those nobles.

“No, no. It’s no trouble at all. They just... don’t know what they’re doing.” More precisely, they were just arrogant nobles who thought they could trample on Taufan, the abandoned Prince.

“You are as kind-hearted as ever, Your Highness.”

I just laughed. Aarav accompanied me until I arrived at the room they’d given me as my quarters. She said she had other matters to attend to but hoped for more time to talk with me. Entering the room, I was greeted by the sound of Maripos and the chirping of birds echoing in turn. I saw Maripos standing near the window, muttering something to himself.

“Maripos?”

Maripos looked at me, “Your Highness, you have returned.”

I smiled at him. Then, a bird flew swiftly toward me. It was the same blue bird I had saved the other day. Now, it could fly and was chirping at me. I held out my hand, and just like before, it perched on my fingers.

“Wasn’t its wing broken? How is it able to fly now?”

“The priests have healed it, Your Highness.”

Huh? The priests of the Temple of the Wind Goddess also have healing abilities? I thought only those blessed by Gevix could heal. Could they possibly heal me? Probably not. If they could, I’m sure Halilintar would’ve asked them to do so long ago.

Your life is truly complicated, Taufan.

“Why are you still here, little bird?” I asked the bird softly as I touched its head with my fingertip. 

At that moment, I sensed an unsettling aura from Maripos. When I turned to look, he was smiling at me, but his smile sent chills down my spine. I instinctively took a step back in fear, and the bird on my hand started chirping louder, clearly frightened by Maripos too. Maripos was indeed terrifying when angry—though still not as terrifying as Halilintar.

“Your Highness, I am very much looking forward to a good explanation of where you went earlier.”

“Um... yeah...” I glanced left and right, hoping someone could save me from Maripos. But unlike before, when Aarav saved me from those nobles, this time it was just Maripos and me in the room. Captain Fang stood outside, and even if he were in the room, he wouldn’t help because Maripos would scold him and tell him to keep quiet.

“Your Highness.”

The tone of Maripos’s voice was truly frightening. He sounded so calm yet furious at the same time. I understood why he was like this, but I was still scared.

“I honestly don’t even know where it was,” I said.

“Are you playing games with me, Your Highness?”

“No! I’m serious!” I shook my head frantically.

Maripos’s expression softened a bit, but his eyes narrowed suspiciously at me.

“When resting by the river, I heard the sound of birds chirping. Before I knew it, I had followed the sound into the forest and ended up getting lost. Then, while waiting for you and the others to find me, I came across this little bird. Turns out, it was the one making that noise,” I explained.

“How far did you go, Your Highness? We combed the forest all day and couldn’t find you.”

“That’s the part you won’t believe, Maripos!”

Maripos raised an eyebrow as if he was wondering what I could possibly say that would be so unbelievable.

“I could hear you calling for me. I even called back so you’d know my location, but you never came, and your voice disappeared. It felt as if I’d been taken to another world. Then I realized I was surrounded by some sort of transparent barrier. When I reached out to touch it, I felt nothing, but when I tried to go past it, I always ended up back in the same spot.”

Maripos looked surprised this time but didn’t say anything. Instead, he gestured for me to continue.

“But there was no barrier in the sky, so I used windstep to get out of it. That’s why I fell from the sky; luckily, Commander Kaika caught me.” At the end of the sentence, I purposely laughed to lighten the mood. Unfortunately, Maripos just looked angrier, so I chose to lower my head in remorse. Maripos still didn’t say anything, and when I peeked at him, he seemed to be deep in thought, then looked at me with a complicated gaze.

“You said… it was like you were taken to another world?”

“Yes! I couldn’t hear any sound at all. Even the smallest sounds, like insects, I couldn’t hear. At that moment, it felt like I was isolated from the outside world. All sounds vanished from the forest for some reason.”

“I’ve heard similar stories to what you’re saying.”

“Really?”

“Yes, Your Highness. There were a few others who also disappeared at the foot of Mount Vintara and then reappeared from the sky. They said the same thing you did—like they were taken to another world. It’s believed that some kind of illusion formation surrounds the forest at the foot of Mount Vintara, and that’s what trapped them. However, the priests at the temple say that no one has ever installed an illusion formation at the foot of the mountain. When a search was conducted, no formation was found. No one knows what it is or what causes it. But this happened a very long time ago. It’s been twenty years since anyone last disappeared and reappeared from the sky.”

Why did hearing Maripos say that make me feel afraid? When I was alone in the forest, I didn’t feel this kind of fear. Could it be that the djinn really exist? When I go down the mountain, I won’t stray far from Maripos and Captain Fang! Even if the two of them get tired of my presence, I’ll stick close to them! I don’t want to be taken away by a djinn again!

Maybe because what I experienced was something others had experienced as well, Maripos didn’t bring it up anymore. He let me go without scolding me but said he would still report it to Halilintar. That young man will surely scold me for wandering around carelessly and using my powers without thinking it through. Yes, that’s something to worry about once I return to the kingdom. For now, I’ll enjoy my time here at the Temple of the Wind Goddess. Aarav said I’m free to stay as long as I want, so I’ve decided to stay at the Wind Goddess Temple for a week before going back. Aside from not wanting to meet Halilintar too soon—he’ll scold me the moment we meet—I also want to enjoy this place. Luckily, I’m the only one who can stay at the Temple of the Wind Goddess as I please. Other nobles aren’t allowed to stay except to attend the Layangara Ceremony. Before the ceremony, they can only stay at the inn at the foot of the mountain and must descend after it’s over. Let’s call it a special privilege I have as a prince.

Who knows, while I’m staying at her temple, Vint might appear and tell me why I was sent to this world, right?

It may seem impossible, but who knows?

The little bird I named Blue is still with me. Even though I opened the window and tried to let it fly back to nature, it kept following me. Sometimes it perches on my shoulder or flies around my head. I don’t understand why this bird keeps following me, considering I only brought it out of that barrier and didn’t heal it. It should be following the priests who healed it. But I don’t mind its presence—it cheers me up with its chirping. I’m still not sure what kind of bird this blue one is. I’ve asked the temple priests, hoping they might know about this little bird, but I came up empty-handed. They know as little as I do. Maybe when I get back to the palace, I should make sure of this bird’s species.

“I see you’re enjoying your time here, Your Highness.”

“Aarav!” I smiled when the woman approached me and sat across from me. I had been enjoying tea while listening to Blue chirping.

“You look much healthier, Your Highness.”

“Yes, my body feels much lighter, and I don’t tire as quickly.”

“I’m glad to hear that, Your Highness. The Wind Goddess Temple is sacred to the Wind Goddess; of course, her followers will find comfort in this place.”

I just smiled. Perhaps Aarav was right—the reason I now feel so light is because I’m in the holy place of the Goddess who blessed Taufan. After all, when I first woke up in this place, when Aarav used her power on me and Maripos, I also felt a sense of lightness, and my headache disappeared. Maybe the answer to healing this body lies with Vint, the Goddess who blessed Taufan. I have to meet Vint if that’s the case.

“Aarav, have you ever met Vint?”

Aarav looked surprised by my question. She stared at me for a moment, then shifted her gaze to the large open window. The wind blew into the room through the window, lifting the sheer white curtains, and I closed my eyes to enjoy the breeze. I love it here—though it’s the top of the mountain, the temperature isn’t too cold. It feels refreshing and pleasant instead. If a place like this existed in my world, I’m sure it would be packed with visitors.

“I apologize, Your Highness. Your question truly surprised me; I’m at a loss on how to answer.”

“No, it’s my fault for asking so suddenly.”

After that, we sat in silence. I enjoyed my tea, and Aarav sat across from me, deep in thought. Blue was enjoying the crumbs I gave him; he always demanded food after he finished chirping. Naughty bird.

“I… and the other priests in this temple have never met the Wind Goddess herself, Your Highness,” Aarav said after a long pause. I glanced at her and saw a complicated expression on her face.

Has Vint really never met any human she blessed directly? But I remember reading in a book about her that she once appeared to a priest at the Temple of the Wind Goddess. Could it be that certain conditions must be met to meet her?

“But… the High Priest before me did meet her, Your Highness.”

Oh?!

“Master Reo said he had met the Wind Goddess.”

“When did that happen?”

“It was at your birth, Your Highness.”

I fell silent, mulling over Aarav’s words. If I remember correctly, in Taufan’s records, when he was born, the wind blew fiercely, almost turning into a storm. It seems Vint truly cared for Taufan to the point of appearing on the day he was born. But what is it exactly that Vint is watching over in Taufan? Could I be able to meet Vint because I’m now in Taufan’s body? Or will Vint know that the soul within this body no longer belongs to the original Taufan?

“So then… do you think I could meet her?”

Aarav smiled at me, “If it’s you, I’m sure the Goddess would be more than happy to meet you.”

Chapter Text

Boboiboy Fanfiction

©  Boboiboy | Animonsta Studio

A/N: The entire story is purely fictional, and the author does not profit from writing this story. If there are any similarities in ideas, character names, or locations, they are purely coincidental.

≫ ──── ≪•◦ ❈ ◦•≫ ──── ≪

If you're wondering what I've been doing during my time at the Temple of the Wind Goddess, the answer is simple. I just did what I usually do when I’m at the Sunset Palace—minus having to bake cakes for the young prince who always visits the palace. Occasionally, I also accompany Aarav to the altar room—the place where Vint’s statue is located. I hope Vint will show herself to me—although I don’t know what I need to do to make her appear. When I asked Aarav what I should do about it, she just smiled and said, “You’ll know in time.”

Such an unhelpful answer.

During my time at the Wind Goddess Temple, I learned that Taufan, as a prince blessed by the Wind Goddess, is truly regarded with great reverence here. Regardless of his status as an outcast prince or the fact that he no longer holds any power in the kingdom, the priests at the Wind Goddess Temple still respect him deeply. They don’t care if Taufan has nothing left; they only care that he is the youngest wind power user to have reached the final stage of his power. Although his power is still imperfect, the priests here believe that Taufan is truly Vint’s chosen one—I’m a little skeptical of that. They’re confident that if Taufan can properly control his power, he will become the strongest wind user ever. There’s also the fact that he is the first Royal member to receive the blessing of the Wind Goddess in 50 years. Wow... their expectations are sky-high, and now I’m the one who feels burdened by them.

Unlike Ignis, who has blessed many princes and princesses of Ignisia, Vint only blesses a select few whom she deems worthy. She’s similar to Vaser, who is also highly selective about whom he blesses, though she’s far more generous than the God of Water. It’s said that the last member of the royal family she blessed before Taufan was born was a princess. However, that didn’t end well because the princess abused her power, angering Vint. It’s said that the goddess swore not to bless any more members of Ignisia’s royal family, but Taufan’s birth changed everything. I wonder what Vint saw in Taufan that made her change her mind. Just how special is this Second Prince of Ignisia, who has been cast aside, to Vint?

Oh, I’ve also learned the identity of the young girl who flew the wind chime during the Layangara Ceremony. Her name is Ying, the adopted daughter of Marchioness Kuputeri. You might be curious about the background of this shy girl. I was curious too when Aarav told me about her. Especially since I don’t recall any characters named Ying or Marchioness Kuputeri in the novel 'The True Heir of Ignisia'—I’m really amazed at how protagonists in transmigration stories can remember every character in the novel they read, along with the plot. So I asked Maripos. Ying is the daughter of a merchant. Her father and mother came from a distant land, from a different continent. She looks like someone of Chinese descent in my world, if you ask my opinion. The reason she, a foreigner, can live freely in Ignisia is because the Marquioness saw talent in her and wanted to nurture it. Essentially, she is the Marchioness’s student, but due to the many regulations she would have to comply with to settle in Ignisia as a foreigner, the Marquioness decided to adopt her instead.

I also learned from Maripos that the Marchioness was one of the Queen’s—Taufan’s mother’s—close friends. However, it seems that the Queen’s death not only dealt a blow to her family but also to her friends. The Marchioness has not visited the palace since the Queen’s passing. She chose to busy herself with her responsibilities in her territory, even ignoring summons from the King. But if that’s the case, why didn’t she ever appear to help Halilintar in the novel? After all, Halilintar is the son of her friend.

Perhaps something happened to her, or maybe she decided not to involve herself with the royal family after her friend’s death. I’ll think more about her later; she could be a great help in the future. Maybe I should try to befriend her adopted daughter, Lady Ying, to get closer to her. Marchioness Kuputeri would be a valuable ally in securing the throne for Halilintar. But how can I get along with Lady Ying when she seems so terrified of speaking to me?

“Why was Lady Ying so frightened when I praised her performance at the ceremony?”

“I’m not entirely sure, Your Highness. However, I have a guess.”

“Hm?”

“She’s just a commoner who became a noble through the kindness of Marchioness Kuputeri. Being ordered to replace a prince at a sacred ceremony for the Wind Goddess, especially with your presence at the event, must have made her feel pressured. Furthermore, I’ve often heard that Lady Ying is frequently looked down upon because of her background as a commoner.”

I already knew that caste systems are both frustrating and terrifying, but I didn’t realize they were this bad. Poor Lady Ying, no wonder she was frightened when she met me. Maybe she thought I was just like the nobles who always belittle her. What a miserable fate. I hope she’s doing okay.

The next time I meet her, I must prove that I’m not like the other nobles. I don’t look down on her for being the adopted daughter of Marquioness Kuputeri. In fact, I greatly admire what she did at the Layangara ceremony. I hope she doesn’t think I was mocking her. After all, I’m not the real prince; I just happened to enter the body of one.

Without realizing it, I’ve already spent nearly a week at the Wind Goddess Temple. Maripos has started to get busy packing and ensuring everything is in order for my journey back to the palace. Commander Kaika and the other soldiers are just as busy as Maripos, preparing for the return trip. They have to check their horses as well as their weapons. As with the trip here, I’m only accompanied by Captain Fang now because everyone else is busy. Even Aarav and the priests at the Temple are preoccupied with their own activities.

On my last day at the Wind Goddess Temple, I decided to take a short walk. I don’t know when I’ll have the chance to visit a place as beautiful and calming as this again, so I want to make the most of the time I have.

I have visited almost every part of the Wind Goddess Temple, from the prayer room—rumored to be accessible only to the High Priest—to the altar room where Vint's statue resides, the ceremonial hall, and even the kitchen of this temple. Yet, among them all, I particularly love the small garden within the temple grounds. Perhaps because it reminds me of the garden in the Sunset Palace, but perhaps it’s also because it offers a rare moment of solitude, away from prying eyes.

It's a very small and simple garden, with shrubs bearing sky-blue flowers, much like the ones I saw in the forest. There’s also a single garden bench and a statue of an angel in the middle. I don’t know why they placed that angel statue here. Perhaps it’s purely decorative, as the statue of Vint is vastly different from this little angel. One thing is certain, Blue often perches on the statue’s shoulder and chirps happily. Like right now, for instance. Since I arrived at this garden, the bird that was originally perched calmly on my shoulder began flying around the statue and landed on its shoulder. It chirps merrily as usual, surely a sign of how much it loves this statue.

"Your Highness, forgive my impertinence, but what do you plan to do with that bird?" Captain Fang asked.

Honestly, I haven’t given it much thought. I don’t know if Blue is a wild bird or someone’s pet. I also don’t know its species or why it feels as though it understands everything I say to it. To be honest, I’d love to bring Blue back to the palace as my pet—its chirping could keep me entertained in moments of boredom in this world devoid of technology. However, I’m unsure how Halilintar would react to the bird; he might see Blue as a threat to his beloved younger brother’s fragile health.

Besides, turning a bird accustomed to the freedom of flight into a pet seems cruel, doesn’t it? It would be like taking away its freedom. Living in the Sunset Palace for so long has driven me nearly mad at times, feeling as though I’ve been caged. Coming from a life of freedom in my original world, I suddenly had to live as an outcast prince confined to a small palace once used to exile concubines. Isn’t that just tragic? So, I can’t imagine locking Blue in a cage.

“I’m still considering it.”

“I’ve noticed the bird always stays close to you and never strays far. I thought you might want to take it as a pet.”

“Not necessarily. It’s a bird, meant to fly free in the skies. Perhaps it’s only sticking close to me now because it’s out of its natural habitat and sees me as a safe option. When we descend the mountain, I’ll return it to where I found it.”

“I’ll accompany you when that time comes, Your Highness.”

I turned to look at Captain Fang, who bowed his head with his right hand on his chest.

“Of course. This time, don’t take your eyes off me, Captain.”

“I won’t, Your Highness.”

...

Before my entourage and I descended the mountain, Aarav and the other priests at the Wind Goddess Temple gave us numerous gifts. I had tried to refuse, as we only brought two carriages—and one was already packed with items from the palace—but they insisted I accept them. Feeling it would be rude to decline, I agreed, and some of the items were loaded into the carriage I was traveling in. While Maripos grumbled about the cramped space, I managed to appease him by promising that once we reached the foot of the mountain, we would find the nearest village or town to rent another carriage.

As I had promised Captain Fang, I asked him to accompany me to the spot where I found Blue. Maripos wanted me to bring at least Commander Kaika and a few other soldiers as well, but their presence alone would scare off many forest creatures. Besides, I felt Captain Fang alone was enough to accompany me. At least this time, I wouldn’t end up lost on my own again.

Truthfully, I didn’t entirely remember the path to the blue-flowered bush. Back then, I had been guided by the bird’s calls and hadn’t paid much attention to my surroundings. Even after escaping that strange barrier, I fainted and woke up already inside the temple. Still, I walked without fear of getting lost or going the wrong way. It was as though I knew this forest as intimately as the back of my hand. After some time, Captain Fang and I finally arrived at the spot where I found Blue and had been trapped by that peculiar barrier. The same large rock and the same blue-flowered bush were there. It felt a bit unsettling to return to the place that had trapped me for an entire day.

“Is this the place, Your Highness?”

“Yes, this is where I found Blue and was trapped in some sort of barrier.”

"However, I don't sense anything strange, Your Highness. Nor do I see any signs of an illusion formation being built around here."

"I know."

Even Aarav couldn't explain the strange barrier that trapped me. The priests at the temple had also been searching for a week to uncover the mystery of the barrier. None of them succeeded in finding anything about it. I let out a heavy sigh, tilting my head back to look at the leaves of the trees touching each other. This time, the sky didn't look like it did before.

"Blue, I guess this is your farewell to me."

I extended my hand to my left shoulder, where the blue bird was perched comfortably. It hopped onto my index finger and remained calm as I moved my hand toward my face. It tilted its head several times and pecked my thumb, just as it did the first time I met this blue bird.

Blue chirped several times, flapping its wings. I didn't know what it meant, whether it was bidding me farewell or asking why I had brought it here.

"I care about you even though we were only together for a week. You're a delightful companion. But it would be a great sin to take your freedom away just for my affection. Goodbye, Blue." At that moment, I raised my hand, and Blue flew off from my grasp. It didn't look back as it continued to fly through the leaves covering the sky above us. I stood still, watching Blue as it disappeared into the distance. I would never meet that little bird again. Ah, how soft-hearted I was, becoming attached to a small creature that might not even remember me.

"Are you all right, Your Highness?"

"Yes, of course. Why wouldn't I be? I'm just feeling melancholic for a moment."

The indifferent gaze of Captain Fang told me that I had failed to convince him once again. Captain Fang, why are you so hard to persuade?

"Forget it. Let's return before Maripos starts getting hysterical."

"Yes, Your Highness."

I still thought about Blue as I walked back. Would that little bird truly be all right? I didn't even know what caused its wing to break. Perhaps it was attacked by a predator or collided with something while flying. If it happened again, who would be there to help it? Why was I so worried about a bird? This must be how people feel about their pets. Now I was a little envious of Gempa, who had Oak—even though Oak was a spirit animal. I wanted a pet of my own too. Could I ask Halilintar for one?

"Your Highness, this is for you." Captain Fang suddenly placed a bunch of wildflowers of various colors in my hands. Naturally, I was bewildered by his actions. Why is he giving me a bunch of wildflowers so suddenly? Were these flowers perhaps rare medicinal plants or something?

"Huh? Why? What?"

"You seemed very sad after releasing the bird. Prince Duri said you could be cheered up with flowers."

That little rascal. I won't bake him any cakes when we get back to the palace. How dare he say I could be cheered up with flowers! He made me sound like a woman! I did enjoy admiring the flowers in the palace garden, but that didn’t mean I wanted to be handed a bunch of wildflowers so abruptly! Especially by my personal guard, who had no expression whatsoever when he gave them to me! But how could I bear to say that to Captain Fang? He was an 18-year-old young man whose life had been hard since childhood. Perhaps he never had someone to comfort him when he was sad, yet he still tried to cheer up his prince, who seemed sad over parting with a bird. He was a caring young man, despite his indifferent appearance.

I smiled at Captain Fang, took out a handkerchief from my pocket, and wrapped the wildflowers into a simple bouquet. "Thank you very much, Captain."

Captain Fang only nodded. I hoped this would be the only misguided idea that Duri ever planted in his mind. Captain Fang, you truly are just a naive young man who doesn’t understand relationships with others.

When we returned to where Maripos and the other soldiers were waiting, I was immediately bombarded with questions from Maripos. He inspected me from head to toe to ensure I wasn’t hurt. It felt like if Maripos didn’t worry about me for a day, he wouldn’t be himself. Other times, I might have found him annoying, but this time, I was grateful to have someone so concerned about my well-being—or perhaps I should say, Taufan’s well-being. After finally calming Maripos down, we hurried to continue our journey to the nearest village to rent a new carriage. The village we were heading to was named Thaya, located near the mountain’s foothills, a small yet prosperous village, if I had to describe it.

We didn’t stay long enough for me to explore the village. Maripos only assigned two soldiers to rent a carriage from the villagers and transfer my belongings from my carriage to the rented one. Honestly, I wanted to look around this village, but Maripos forbade it. He said that unlike the temple priests, who were overly respectful, or the residents of Tarín City, who seemed indifferent to royal matters, the people of Thaya Village truly didn’t acknowledge Taufan as their prince anymore. I wouldn’t be honored or treated like other members of the royal family, and there was a possibility of an attack if they discovered my identity. Should I thank Halilintar for ordering the craftsmen not to place the royal emblem on this carriage? Surely, he had considered the possibility of me stopping in cities or villages that didn’t see Taufan as their prince.

I could only regret not being able to stroll around this village. From what I saw, Thaya Village looked quite beautiful and interesting to explore. Why did the villagers, whose village was so close to the Wind Goddess Temple who blessed Taufan, become the ones who hated Taufan the most? Could it be that they were initially Taufan’s supporters but became disappointed when Taufan could no longer use his powers and was cast out by his own kingdom? If that were true, once again, I could only sympathize with Taufan.

Once all the belongings were transferred, we left Thaya Village. At that moment, I noticed some villagers glancing at my carriage and pointing toward me. Maripos quickly drew the curtain over the carriage window and looked at me.

“We’ll be back at the palace soon, Your Highness.”

I simply nodded. Did the villagers recognize my identity? What would have happened if Maripos hadn’t closed the curtain? Would they have approached the carriage and attacked me? I could only let out a small sigh. Poor Taufan.

“Don’t think about them, Your Highness. They placed their hopes too high on you when you successfully awakened your final stage of power,” Maripos said. He smiled at me, making me feel a little calmer.

Perhaps most of Ignisia's people are like the residents of Thaya Village. They pinned their hopes on Taufan too high after he managed to reach the final stage of his powers. They didn’t consider that at the time, Taufan was just an 11-year-old boy who had just lost his mother. And instead of consoling or guiding him, who was still lost, they burdened him with their expectations. Then, when Taufan couldn’t meet their expectations and was 'cast aside' to the Sunset Palace, they turned away from him and hated him for failing to meet their hopes. Now I realize how strong Taufan is for staying sane despite the treatment he received from his people, even though he was so young. If it were me, I might have gone mad long ago.

"Maripos, sit by my side. I feel tired."

Maripos followed my words without saying anything. Once he sat beside me, I leaned on his shoulder and hugged him. His hand wrapped around me, occasionally stroking my hair. I’m truly grateful for the umpteenth time to have Maripos. If I had to go through this world alone without someone like Maripos by my side, I’d feel like dying. He is the older brother everyone needs.

"Maripos, stay by my side," I murmured.

I thought my voice was small and unheard by Maripos, but when I lifted my head, I saw Maripos smiling gently at me. His lavender eyes looked at me with affection and sincerity. Then he said, "I will never leave your side, Your Highness. I will always be here for you."

Oh, Maripos, even if I return to my original world and Taufan's soul returns to his body, please hold onto your promise. Just as I always need you, I know Taufan always needs you too.

...

I must have fallen asleep on Maripos's shoulder. We were reading a book together at that time, but maybe because the book was boring, I dozed off. When I woke up, I was still leaning on Maripos’s shoulder, but my body felt stiff and sore. The inside of the carriage was very dark, and it seemed Maripos had also fallen asleep because he didn’t say anything as I started shifting slightly away from him. I peeked out of the carriage; it was truly night.

"Is there a problem, Your Highness?" one of the soldiers walking beside the carriage asked when he noticed me peeking out.

"No. But aren’t we going to stop to rest?" This time, I opened the curtain to have a clearer view of my surroundings. We were in the forest, even though I was sure we had still been in a residential area earlier. The sky had darkened, and the light source came from the moon and the torches held by some of the soldiers.

"Just a bit longer, Your Highness. We are still searching for a safe spot to set up camp for the night."

"Ah, alright." With that, I closed the curtain again and let the darkness envelop the inside of the carriage. Maybe it’s just my imagination, but somehow I felt like we were traveling on a different path from the one we took when we came. Did they change the route? Before departing from the palace, I remember Maripos saying the round trip route would be the same. Was there a problem with the previous route? I hope not.

Not long after, the carriage stopped, and the soldier who had spoken to me earlier informed me that they would soon set up camp. By then, Maripos was already awake, and he immediately got out to ensure my tent was properly set up. I also stepped out of the carriage to look for Captain Fang because he was the only one besides Maripos who was close enough to me and willing to accompany me. However, when I found him, he was tying up the horses and helping the coachmen feed them. I didn’t want to disturb him.

I intended to return to the carriage to wait for Maripos, but Captain Fang noticed my presence. He said something to the nearby coachman and then approached me.

"Forgive me, Your Highness. Were you looking for me?"

"Yes, but you seemed busy. Don’t mind me; I’ll return to the carriage and wait for Maripos."

Captain Fang shook his head. "I will accompany you, Your Highness."

I didn’t refuse Captain Fang’s words. I let the young man walk behind me as I returned to the carriage to wait for Maripos to finish whatever he was doing. Captain Fang actually suggested I sit by the campfire to keep my body warm, but I avoided the campfire, constantly thinking about my brothers in my original world. I missed them, and how I wished I could return to my world. Unfortunately, I couldn’t. Not yet.

I sat inside the carriage while Captain Fang stood at the carriage door, vigilant. I knew he wouldn’t want to enter the carriage even if I asked him to keep me company inside while waiting for Maripos. He was too serious about his duty—I didn’t mind at all. Thankfully, he didn’t mind talking to me while keeping watch.

"It feels like we’re taking a different route from the one we came on. Or is it just my imagination?"

"You are correct, Your Highness. Commander Kaika suggested changing the route because the previous one was attacked by bandits."

"Bandits? They won’t come here, will they?"

"I hope not, Your Highness. This route is quite far from the previous one. But you don’t need to worry; Commander Kaika and the soldiers with him are the best in the kingdom. They will protect you, Your Highness."

I responded with a hum because, honestly, I wasn’t convinced. My unease grew when Captain Fang mentioned bandits. As Captain Fang said, Commander Kaika and the soldiers accompanying him were the best in the kingdom, which is why Halilintar assigned them to guard me. It wasn’t that I doubted their abilities, but I doubted their sincerity toward me. They were indeed accompanying me on this journey on Halilintar’s orders, but would they risk their lives for a prince who had been cast aside?

Chapter Text

Boboiboy Fanfiction

©  Boboiboy | Animonsta Studio

A/N: The entire story is purely fictional, and the author does not profit from writing this story. If there are any similarities in ideas, character names, or locations, they are purely coincidental.

≫ ──── ≪•◦ ❈ ◦•≫ ──── ≪

I couldn’t sleep because I kept thinking about Captain Fang’s words. Bandits are troublesome. They can never truly be eradicated. They are like weeds—pulled out only to grow back again. Moreover, most bandits don’t discriminate when choosing their targets. Whether it’s nobles or mere peasants, they will still attack for their own gain. They also always attack in groups to ensure they won’t lose.  

I trust Commander Kaika and the other soldiers, and I trust Captain Fang and the soldiers from the Sunset Palace. However, I’ve been feeling worried since earlier. My hands are sweating, my heart is pounding, and my stomach feels unsettled with anxiety. I hope all of this is just my imagination and that our journey will be fine.  

“You look exhausted, Your Highness.”  

“Yeah, I couldn’t sleep last night.”  

I thought Maripos would scold me for not resting properly or bombard me with questions. But instead, he didn’t do what I had expected. The young man moved beside me, gently wrapped his arm around my shoulders, and rested my head on his shoulder. He softly rubbed my arm, making me feel comforted by his presence.  

“You can rest now, Your Highness,” Maripos suggested. I simply nodded and tried to relax. Nothing will happen, I tried to convince myself.  

We continued traveling all day without taking a break, not even to water the horses. Commander Kaika said he was worried that lingering too long in the forest might lead us to encounter bandits. Despite feeling sorry for the horses and the attendants, I agreed with Commander Kaika’s words. I absolutely did not want to run into bandits.  

Before sunset, we stopped in an area near a river to rest and spend the night. Commander Kaika seemed as though he wanted to keep going without considering the others’ conditions. To some extent, I understood his reasoning—if possible—I also wanted to keep moving to reach the palace as soon as possible. But we also had to consider the others traveling with us. The horses must be exhausted from walking all day carrying heavy loads, and the maids sitting in the cargo carriage were surely tired as well. More importantly, we needed to recover our strength since we didn’t know what lay ahead. We couldn’t act selfishly without taking them into account.  

This time, Maripos heeded my request not to set up tents, probably sharing the same worries as I did. They only laid out thick sleeping mats on the ground near the campfire for me. The two maids who accompanied me also sat near the fire, leaning on each other. I offered them blankets to keep them warm. Meanwhile, the soldiers took turns standing guard.  

Captain Fang sat right next to me, his hand always on the hilt of the sword resting on his lap, his eyes scanning our surroundings with vigilance. Maripos sat beside me as well, and I held his hand to calm both myself and him. Tonight felt heavy, the air filled with tension. It was such a stark contrast to our journey to the temple. Commander Kaika seemed extremely tense, and the soldiers following him appeared restless. The bandits must have been formidable to make the commander of the kingdom’s elite forces so uneasy.  

“Maripos, are the bandits really that terrifying?” I whispered to Maripos.  

Perhaps because the atmosphere was so tense, my voice startled Maripos. Luckily, he didn’t scream—he merely tightened his grip on my hand, which hurt a bit. But I didn’t protest about it at all.  

“If it were just an ordinary bandit group, there might not be much to worry about, Your Highness. The problem is that the bandit group attacking is the Crimson Moon, led by Kaldar. That man is infamous for his cruelty and brutality toward his opponents. He attacks indiscriminately, whether nobles or commoners, elders or children, men or women.”  

The name of that bandit group sounded a bit over the top to me. They must not be very good at naming things.  

“Are they so strong that they make Commander Kaika so worried?”  

“You may not know this, Your Highness. But the Crimson Moon is a ruthless bandit group that is extremely difficult to handle,” Captain Fang suddenly joined our conversation. I glanced at him, then at Maripos, who nodded in agreement with Captain Fang’s words.  

“The Crimson Moon has committed various crimes, and its leader, Kaldar, even more so. If the Crimson Moon committed ten crimes, their leader has committed a hundred. They’ve been involved in murder, robbery, rape, kidnapping, human trafficking, massacres, and much more.”  

Why did the leader of the Crimson Moon sound so terrifying? Can someone be that evil?  

“If that’s the case, why hasn’t the kingdom done anything to deal with them? They sound very troubling.”  

At that moment, both Maripos and Captain Fang glanced at Commander Kaika, who was currently giving instructions to his subordinates.  

“It’s not that the kingdom hasn’t done anything. They’ve formed groups to hunt down and deal with the bandits. But not only have they been unable to do so, many of them died in the process. Commander Kaika and his younger brother were also part of such a group. Commander Kaika’s younger brother was killed by Kaldar at that time.”  

Ah! So that’s why Commander Kaika has been so uneasy. He’s not just worried but also filled with anger. I’m sure that if he didn’t have the responsibility of protecting me, Commander Kaika would have already run off to confront the bandits and avenge his brother. Now I’m even more worried. Can Commander Kaika remain focused on his duty when facing the man who killed his brother?  

I glanced quietly at Commander Kaika. The man kept his gaze fixed on the dark forest, his hand on the hilt of his sword. Anyone approaching him might find themselves split in two, judging by his demeanor.  

“Commander Kaika is loyal to his duty; you don’t need to worry, Your Highness,” Maripos said. From his tone, I could tell he was trying to reassure me. Perhaps he knew what I was thinking about Commander Kaika and was implying that the commander would prioritize his duty to protect me over personal matters.  

I still held Maripos’s hand as I leaned on his shoulder, watching the fire consume the wood. Sleep eluded me, and I might end up not sleeping again tonight. I could only watch the fire anxiously, hoping for dawn to come. Surely, I wasn’t the only one praying for the sun to rise—everyone around me must have been hoping for the same.  

A tremor ran through my body. I didn’t know if it was from fear or the cold. I felt Maripos shift closer to me. He released our hands, which had been intertwined, and wrapped his arm around me. His hand gently stroked my back in a soothing gesture.  

I didn’t know how long we sat in silence, staring at the campfire. My eyes were heavy, and so was my body. I just wanted to go home and sleep. I wouldn’t even protest if Halilintar scolded me for being careless and getting lost in the forest. The silence of this forest was oppressive, as if it were choking me and stealing the air from my lungs. Call me cowardly, like a girl, but I didn’t want to die. I also didn’t want anyone else to die for me.

The silence was shattered by an arrow flying toward me. I didn’t realize it, but the quick reflexes of Captain Fang and Maripos were what saved me. Before the arrow could hit me, Maripos pulled me down to the ground with us lying flat. At the same time, Captain Fang swiftly drew his sword and cut the arrow in half. I—lying on Maripos’s chest at that moment—could only blink in confusion until I heard a shout, “Ambush! Protect the prince!”

Everything became a blur after that. I don’t know how Maripos did it, but the next thing I knew, I was already on my feet, with Maripos standing in front of me. He was positioned to shield me. I looked around; the soldiers had surrounded me, swords in hand. Then I noticed unfamiliar faces encircling us as well. They looked very disheveled, their clothes torn and dirty, their hair mostly long and unkempt. By the firelight, I could see some of them had terrifying scars. Not to mention their weapons. While our soldiers carried swords, these bandits wielded an assortment of arms. Some had swords, though different from our soldiers’ straight blades—they were curved and serrated. Others held axes, nunchaku-like sticks, massive hammers that seemed far too heavy, and even dual knives, among other weapons I couldn’t name.

Then one of them, a tall, burly man with a scarred, intimidating face and red hair, stepped forward. His expression was a mix of arrogance and disdain, which only made him more menacing. I guessed he was their leader. Could this be Kaldar?

I observed my soldiers; their faces hardened as the man approached, their grips on their swords tightening, and Maripos stepped back slightly.

“What a delightful sight, seeing Ignisia’s delicate flower finally step out of its glasshouse,” the man said. His voice was deep and booming, resonating through the silent forest.

Huh? A delicate flower? Who was he referring to? There were only two women with us. I glanced over to see them hiding behind the carriage with the two coachmen, a few soldiers standing guard there as well. But the man wasn’t looking at them. His gaze was fixed directly on me, whom Maripos was trying to keep hidden.

“Kaika, has your prince lost his love for his precious flower?” the man spoke again, this time addressing Commander Kaika, who stood in front of us.

I couldn’t see Commander Kaika’s expression since he had his back to me, but if I had to guess, it wasn’t a good one.

The man turned his gaze back to me. His expression was unreadable, as were his eyes. But I knew I was terrified to look at him.

“Little prince, you do look like a beautiful flower. I wonder how much you’d fetch if sold. Surely you’d be worth a fortune, wouldn’t you?”

Chills ran down my spine, my heart pounding faster in fear, and my body trembling. I felt like a small, helpless animal before the man.

“How dare you speak about the prince like that!” Maripos shouted.

At the same time, Commander Kaika bellowed, “Watch your tongue, Kaldar!”

The man—Kaldar—burst into laughter, as if what Maripos and Commander Kaika had said was the funniest thing in the world. Or perhaps it truly was. To a man who had committed countless crimes, Maripos’s and Commander Kaika’s protective attitudes toward me probably seemed absurdly amusing.

“There will be many lining up to claim the beloved flower of Prince Halilintar,” Kaldar continued laughing as he spoke, though his hungry gaze remained locked on me.

Just like before, another arrow was shot in my direction. This time, the target was Maripos, who stood before me. But Commander Kaika managed to slice the arrow before it could harm Maripos. Any semblance of calm from earlier instantly vanished. I don’t know who moved first, but soon the soldiers were battling the bandits, and Commander Kaika was confronting Kaldar. I remained within the circle of soldiers protecting me, while Maripos slashed someone’s neck with the knife in his hand.

I couldn’t describe how I felt at that moment. I felt nauseous and horrified seeing the blood pouring from that person’s neck, but I was also terrified of suffering the same fate if they attacked me.

The clash of swords and the cries of battle blended into one cacophony. It was a slaughter! Their numbers far exceeded ours! What should I do? I couldn’t use my powers properly; my body was too weak to wield a sword, and I saw no way out of this situation.

I scanned my surroundings. A soldier was stabbed by a bandit, causing him to fall and disrupt the protective formation. The remaining soldiers tried to cover the gap, but they were outnumbered by the bandits. The bandits quickly broke through and reached for me. One of them even managed to grab my clothes. But Maripos slashed their hand with his knife. He immediately grabbed my hand and pulled me away. The soldiers yelled for him to take me and leave, but Maripos didn’t turn back to answer. He simply tightened his grip on me, and we started running. I tried to keep up with his pace, though he was far too fast for me. A few bandits gave chase. I had no idea where Maripos was taking me, but I trusted him.

I tripped over roots and rocks multiple times but kept running. If I fell, I got back up and ran again. By the time Maripos stopped, we seemed far from the ambush site. I tried to catch my breath, feeling like I might die from the intense run.

 It felt as if the air refused to stay in my lungs, and my stomach churned, making me want to vomit. I glanced at Maripos, and though he was also catching his breath, he wasn’t nearly as bad as me. Such an unfair difference. Thankfully, this body was much better than when I first inhabited it. If it were still the same, Maripos might have had to carry me while running. The training I did with Captain Fang hadn’t been in vain.

“Are you all right, Your Highness?”

Still trying to catch my breath, I could only give him a thumbs-up as a response. While I was still panting, Maripos rolled up his left pant leg. I watched as he pulled out a knife that looked much shorter than the one he had been holding before. He also retrieved another dagger from inside his shirt. Did Maripos always hide so many knives on him?!

“Do you always carry that many knives?!”

“One never knows when an attack might happen, Your Highness. I just like to be prepared for anything.”

Maripos was right, of course, but I had always thought of him as an ordinary servant. I never expected him to have combat skills and to carry so many hidden weapons. Do all the servants in the Sunset Palace have combat skills like him? Or is that just a standard for becoming a servant in Ignisia?

“We’re not safe yet, Your Highness. There’s still a chance they’re chasing us. If it comes to it, I will hold them off, and you must run to the north. There’s a town there that will protect you. Just show them the brooch you’re wearing. It bears the royal emblem; they will know you’re a member of the royal family.”

My eyes widened at Maripos’s words. He wanted me to leave him behind to save myself?!

“I won’t leave you.”

“Don’t be stubborn, Your Highness. Your safety is what matters most.”

“No! Maripos, you promised to always stay with me! You promised to always be by my side!”

I knew I was being childish, demanding Maripos keep his promise in a life-or-death situation. But I couldn’t leave Maripos to sacrifice himself. Even though my time with him had been short, I knew I cared deeply for him. I didn’t want him to die for me. More than I didn’t want the soldiers to die for me. Maripos was precious to me. He was my friend and brother.

Maripos looked at me with a complicated expression. He didn’t answer and instead turned his face away. Did he really want me to leave him behind? How could he think my life was so much more valuable than his own?

We didn’t have time to continue the discussion because the bandits chasing us had arrived. They laughed at the sight of Maripos and me. They called us cornered rats. I wouldn’t deny it. Maripos still didn’t look at me; he only focused on the bandits. I silently counted. There were four visible, but there were surely more in hiding. My hands clenched tightly as I felt a mixture of fear and anger. I was afraid for my life. I was afraid of dying. But I was also angry—angry at myself for being unable to do anything. Angry for only being able to hide while others fought for me.

As the wind began to blow fiercely, Maripos rushed forward, plunging the knife in his hand into the neck of the nearest bandit. He slit the bandit’s throat without a word and quickly attacked another. Maripos moved so swiftly, so skillfully, as if he had done this countless times before. The bandits, initially shocked by Maripos's attack, began to react. They turned their attention to him, momentarily forgetting about me, who stood frozen in the background.  

Maripos’s speed was beyond my comprehension; I only knew he kept moving because of the bodies that kept falling. My guess was correct—there were more bandits than I initially thought. Now, six corpses lay on the ground, their necks gushing blood.  

I knew Maripos had targeted the vital points in their necks, ensuring a swift death. Perhaps he wanted to end it quickly.  

Seeing the continuous collapse of bodies, I began to hope that Maripos and I might survive this nightmare. But I underestimated their numbers. There were far too many of them, and Maripos was the only one fighting. It didn’t take long for them to block Maripos’s attacks and strike him. Maripos was flung a considerable distance from where he had been standing.  

I rushed to him, his body covered in blood, looking utterly disheveled. Both knives he had been using were nowhere to be found.  

“Maripos!” I held him, helping him to sit up.  

Maripos gripped my hand tightly, staring at me with a seriousness that sent chills down my spine. His lavender irises appeared frightening for some reason. “You must run, Your Highness.”  

“No! No! I won’t leave you! Let’s run together!”  

Maripos didn’t respond. He only turned his head to the side and spat out a mouthful of blood. Fear gripped me as I saw him cough up blood. His body was covered in blood, but I knew it wasn’t his—it was the blood of those he had killed earlier. But blood from his mouth was another matter entirely. Maripos must have been injured somewhere I couldn’t see.  

Despite trembling and clearly struggling, Maripos stood again, positioning himself to protect me. He no longer had weapons, and his body was undoubtedly at its limit. He shouldn’t have sacrificed himself for me like this. The bandits drew closer, stepping over the bodies of their fallen comrades.  

“This little rat sure bites hard. Well, no surprise. He’s still a silver wolf, even without his pack. So the little prince wasn’t completely abandoned by his kingdom, huh?” one of them sneered.  

I flinched as they stepped closer.  

“Your price better be worth the trouble.”  

“Shut up!” Maripos shouted. “You won’t take him anywhere!”  

The bandits, despite the many companions Maripos had killed, laughed and mocked him, calling him a weak animal.  

As before, Maripos was the first to attack. This time, he grabbed a sword from one of the corpses on the ground and charged at them. But clearly exhausted, his speed was no longer what it had been—he was much slower, and his strikes lacked depth. The bandits easily overpowered him. They kicked his stomach as he fell to the ground. I could do nothing but scream and throw stones at the bandits, trying to drive them away from Maripos, who was now being beaten mercilessly.  

Despair filled me—how useless I was. If I were the original Taufan, I would have been able to use my powers to protect Maripos. I could have attacked them with the power I possessed. But I am not the original Taufan. I had nearly died just from using Windstep because I couldn’t control it properly.  

I picked up a sword from the ground, not knowing what to do with it. But I swung it at anyone who tried to approach me. Maripos still lay motionless on the ground, battered and bruised. I didn’t know if he was dead or still alive.  

“Tch. Such a nuisance,” one of them said, swinging his sword to parry mine. My grip on the sword had always been weak, and the force of his strike sent the sword flying from my hands.  

The man raised his hand and slapped me hard. I fell to the ground from the blow, my cheek stinging intensely. I could taste iron in my mouth—perhaps I had bitten my tongue during the slap.  

One of them grabbed my arm roughly, forcing me to stand, while the man who slapped me seized my face. He showed no gentleness—not that I expected it. The man grinned gleefully, while I glared back at him with anger and hatred.  

“His eyes are blue, like gemstones. He’ll fetch a high price,” he remarked, releasing my face and shoving me. He ordered the one holding me to tie me up and take me away.  

I struggled and resisted, but they slapped me again. My hair was yanked, and I was dragged along. Everything hurt—so much so that I wanted to cry. Yet no tears fell from my eyes. I refused to appear more pitiful in front of them.  

As I was dragged closer to Maripos’s body, I fought back again, biting the man dragging me as hard as I could. He let go in surprise and pain, and I wasted no time running toward Maripos.  

“Tch. You’re such a bother. If it weren’t for your value dropping if you were crippled, I’d cut off your legs right now.”  

I was terrified of their threats, but I cared more about Maripos’s condition. I couldn’t do anything—I wasn’t strong or fast. The only thing I could do was hold Maripos as tightly as possible so they couldn’t separate him from me. They wanted to sell me; they needed me alive. Hadn’t they just said I’d be worth less if I were damaged? That meant they needed me intact and breathing.  

Desperation consumed me as they managed to separate me from Maripos. My hair was gripped so tightly that I thought my scalp might tear. I kicked, punched, and did everything I could to make them release me.  

“What should we do with him?” one of them asked, pointing at Maripos, who still lay helplessly on the ground.  

“Just kill him. Our job is to capture the prince.”  

“No! No! No!”  

No matter how much I struggled, the man holding me didn’t budge. He tightened his grip on my hair, making the pain unbearable.  

“Shut up!” the man yelled, pulling my hair back, forcing me to look at him. He laughed as he saw my pain and desperation, delighting in my futile struggle.  

Then he pushed my head forward, forcing me to watch as one of his men raised a sword to strike Maripos’s neck.  

No!  

No!  

No!  

“NO!!”  

I had no idea what happened next. But I felt the wind blow fiercely, quickly forming a whirlwind. The bandits froze, staring in confusion at the sudden whirlwind. It grew larger by the second.  

In their moment of confusion, I felt the grip on my hair loosen slightly. I took the opportunity to break free and ran to Maripos, hugging him to protect him from whatever was happening. I had no idea what would happen after that.  

I thought the bandits would attack me again and try to take me away, but all I heard were the sounds of the fierce wind and their screams.  

I held Maripos tightly, burying my face in his neck, not daring to lift my head. The wind continued to blow violently, and the whirlwind persisted—I knew it was still there because I could feel it.  

Long after, the screams faded, and the harsh wind that had ravaged the forest slowly subsided. Still, I didn’t dare move or let go of Maripos.

I only lifted my head when I heard the sound of birds chirping. In front of me, there was a blue bird I knew very well.  

"Blue?"  

The bird chirped again, tilting its head left and right before flying toward me. I stretched out my hand while my other hand still supported Maripos. Blue perched on my finger, pecking at it as usual.  

"What are you doing here?" My voice was hoarse, and my throat ached, but I didn’t care at all.  

Blue chirped again. It then flew in circles above my head for a moment before landing on the ground. This prompted me to check my surroundings. The bandits were no longer there. Saying they were gone doesn’t quite fit—what’s more accurate is that they were no longer alive. All of them lay on the ground a few meters away from me and Maripos. Slowly, I laid Maripos on the ground and stood up to inspect our situation.  

The bandits Maripos killed earlier were still there, but now there were additional severed body parts. I felt both nauseous and horrified by the scene. The bodies of the bandits Maripos killed remained intact, but the bodies of those still alive just moments ago were now scattered in pieces. I saw severed legs and arms everywhere. As I walked farther, I stumbled over something—it turned out to be the head of the man who had slapped me first. The frozen expression on his face was filled with terror and fear. Yet earlier, he was the one who made me so terrified. I quickly moved away from him out of fear.  

What exactly happened here?  

It seemed as though they had been cut apart by something incredibly sharp and in an incredibly short amount of time. Was it because of the whirlwind earlier? But why were Maripos and I unaffected by it?  

I decided not to dwell on it for now. I returned to Maripos, who was still unconscious. He was severely injured, and I knew he wouldn’t survive if we stayed here. Maripos might die because of it. With great difficulty, I managed to get Maripos onto my back. I forced my weak and aching body to carry him and walk to the north, as Maripos had directed me earlier. I couldn’t return to my group because I didn’t know their fate. Perhaps they had managed to escape, but it was also possible they had been slaughtered. The safest choice was to head to the city Maripos had mentioned and seek help there. I hoped it wasn’t too far away.  

Blue accompanied us, flying ahead as if showing me the way. I was exhausted and in pain, but I forced my legs to keep moving.  

"Please hold on, Maripos," I whispered.  

I kept praying in my heart for God to give me strength, so I could keep walking and save Maripos. I had to reach that city as soon as possible to save him. I didn’t know how far I had walked or how long, but the sky gradually began to turn orange. A sign that morning was coming. That was when I saw it—the city walls standing tall a few hundred meters away. Relief flooded me as I saw it, and I adjusted Maripos’s position on my back and kept walking. Almost there. I was almost there!  

When I arrived, a fierce-looking guard stopped me and asked for my identity, while another seemed panicked and helped me lower Maripos. My hands trembled, but I managed to detach the brooch still pinned to my clothes. I showed it to the guard, and they looked utterly shocked. Then I heard them shouting for the city gates to be opened. After that, things became very blurry to me. I only knew that many guards came rushing toward me, shouting something. The adrenaline that had been coursing through my body slowly subsided, making the pain and exhaustion I had been holding back become even more unbearable. The last thing I remembered was a large, middle-aged man appearing and saying something I couldn’t hear.

Chapter Text

Boboiboy Fanfiction

©  Boboiboy | Animonsta Studio

A/N: The entire story is purely fictional, and the author does not profit from writing this story. If there are any similarities in ideas, character names, or locations, they are purely coincidental.

≫ ──── ≪•◦ ❈ ◦•≫ ──── ≪

My body ached so much, it felt as if I had been trampled by a horse. Although, I had never been trampled by a horse before. The throbbing pain in my head didn’t help at all. I tried to open my eyes, but the blinding light forced me to shut them again. Maybe it was better to go back to sleep. Maripos would surely understand why I woke up late.

Right!

Maripos!

The memories of the last events flowed into my mind. I opened my eyes, ignoring the painful light that seemed intent on blinding me. I sat up despite my body screaming in pain. I scanned my surroundings anxiously. This was a room I didn’t recognize at all, and Maripos was nowhere to be seen. Panic and fear took over me. Had the bandits returned and captured me? Had they sold me somewhere and killed Maripos? If so, I had to escape. The room’s window was open, but they might have placed some kind of barrier to prevent me from fleeing through it. That left the door as the only option. If the door opened, I would attack whoever came in and make my escape.

I needed a weapon to defend myself. Scanning the room, I didn’t see anything that could be used as one. But I could make one.

There was a vase on the bedside table. I shattered it, grabbing a piece that was large and sharp enough, clutching it tightly in my hand, not caring if it hurt me.

The sound of the breaking vase surely attracted attention. I hid, waiting for the right moment to dash out. A young woman dressed as a maid stepped into the room. She looked confused at the broken vase pieces near the bed. That was my chance—I bolted out as fast as I could. I didn’t care about anything as I ran. This place was completely unfamiliar to me. This wasn’t the Sunset Palace, nor the Main Palace, nor the Wind Goddess Temple. Where am I?

I kept running, avoiding those chasing me or anyone who got in my way. Where was the exit?! Where was it?!

Then I hit a dead end. The door before me was locked and wouldn’t budge no matter how hard I pushed. The people chasing me had found me. They looked threatening, ordering me to return to the room. I refused. I wouldn’t go back!

One of them even drew a sword. I stepped back, stopped by the locked door behind me. I glanced left and right in panic. If I broke the window to my left and jumped, could I escape them? I didn’t know what floor I was on, but it must have been high enough since all I could see was the sky.

Then a small door to my right opened, and two young girls stepped out. They looked very young and didn’t seem as strong as the people in front of me. Without thinking, I grabbed one of them and held her hostage. The shard of the vase was still in my hand, and I pressed it against the girl’s neck, forcing the people chasing me to back off. The girl screamed, maybe she was crying, but I didn’t care. I wanted out of this place. I had to get out of here!

The people chasing me stopped approaching, now looking cautious. If I had to use this girl as a hostage to escape, I wouldn’t hesitate to do it. When one of them tried to get closer, I pressed the shard deeper against her neck.

“Don’t come any closer! I’ll kill her! Don’t anyone come near me!”

They froze again. This time, they raised their hands in the air, as if to show they weren’t dangerous. I didn’t trust them. If they had bought people from those bandits, they were just as dangerous as the bandits!

“Your Highness!”

That voice…

“Maripos?”

How could I hear Maripos’s voice? What was happening? Were they trying to mess with my mind with some illusion?

“Your Highness.” From among the crowd, a young man stepped forward. His hair was silver and tied back in a ponytail, his skin pale, and his eyes lavender. There was a faint bruise on his face, just below his left eye. His right hand was bandaged and hung across his chest.

I couldn’t believe what I was seeing.

“Maripos?”

“Yes, Your Highness. It’s me.”

Was the person before me truly Maripos, or were they trying to confuse me with an illusion? The young man approached, undeterred by my glares and shouts for him to stay back. He only stopped when I pressed the shard harder against the girl’s neck.

“Your Highness, you are safe now. I’m here for you,” he said softly, cautiously, just like Maripos always did when I had a panic attack. Was it really Maripos? Did that mean Maripos had survived?

“Maripos…”

“Yes, Your Highness.”

“Maripos!” I let go of the girl I had been holding. She ran off as soon as I released her, and I didn’t care where she went. Maripos came closer, wrapping me in his one arm. I hugged him tightly in return and cried. It had been so terrifying. I was scared out of my mind, thinking I was alone. I felt like a small animal desperately struggling before its predator. I thought they had killed Maripos, and I had failed to protect him.

I didn’t know what happened next, but Maripos must have guided me back to the room I had left. He helped me lie down on the bed and promised to stay by my side until I woke up. I remember nodding to him and holding his hand to make sure he wouldn’t leave.

The next time I woke up, I was in the same room as before. But unlike earlier, I didn’t feel panicked or scared. Maripos was still there beside me, still holding my hand.

...

"I am glad to see you are doing much better, Your Highness."

I could only smile shyly at the man before me. His tall, broad frame, coupled with a thick beard that covered his face, gave him an imposing appearance. Yet his eyes sparkled, and I knew he would be handsome if he ever shaved. He was the owner of the residence I was staying in—or rather, the lord of the region I had come to. Count Balakung. His name sounded odd to me, just like the man himself. But he was kind.

I remembered seeing him before I passed out.

Maripos had explained everything to me. I fainted after confirming my identity to the gate guards. They immediately brought me into the city, where I was cared for at Count Balakung's residence. Not long after that, Commander Kaika and the others arrived in the city to look for us. I was unconscious for two whole days, while Maripos regained consciousness a day before me. I was glad they all survived. Truly, I was relieved. Some of our belongings were damaged or lost, but what object could possibly be more important than someone’s life?

Some of the soldiers were severely injured during the attack, but they all survived. They were still alive. Even the two servants I brought along survived, though their bodies were now marked with scars.

And Maripos. Maripos was still alive. He was still breathing.

"I... deeply apologize for the commotion I caused yesterday," I said, embarrassed.

I genuinely regretted causing such a scene at Count Balakung's residence, even taking a girl hostage and hurting her. If Maripos hadn’t arrived in time, I might have done something far worse. Just thinking about it made me feel sick to my stomach.

"You have just been through a traumatic event, Your Highness. Waking up in such a strange place, all alone, must have been terrifying. At least I am glad you chose to leave through the door and not jump out the window," Count Balakung said. He laughed as he glanced at the open window in the room.

"Uh… yeah… because I thought there was a barrier that would stop me from jumping out."

Count Balakung continued laughing, his voice booming in the room. It reminded me a little of Kaldar, but Count Balakung’s laughter was warm and comforting. I liked hearing it.

"You really are something, Your Highness."

I didn’t understand what he meant, so I simply smiled.

"Prince Halilintar has been informed of your arrival here. I estimate he will arrive today, as it takes at least three days of non-stop horseback travel from the capital."

How did they inform him? Did they send a letter using an owl like in the movies? Or did they have some kind of device for quick communication?

I nodded again. "Thank you. Truly, thank you."

"It is no trouble, Your Highness. I am glad I could help."

After that, we talked about a few light topics. He told me about his greenhouse and invited me to visit it once I was well enough. He was a nobleman from a neutral faction, supporting no one in particular. He didn’t treat me any differently from the other princes. He was genuinely kind. Also, he and some of his followers were blessed by Gevix, the Goddess of Plants. That explained why his residence was filled with greenery—when I looked outside earlier, I thought I was seeing a forest. Thanks to their blessings, our wounds healed quickly. My body still ached, but it wasn’t as bad as before. I could say the pain was something I’d grown accustomed to since inhabiting Taufan’s body. Maripos’s injuries had also been treated, though his arm still had to be bandaged for a few more days because they said his bones were too fragile to move recklessly.

Count Balakung didn’t ask me anything about the bandits. Perhaps he had already received explanations from Commander Kaika and Maripos.

By midday, Halilintar and his horse arrived at Count Balakung’s residence. The horse hadn’t even fully stopped when he jumped down from it. He stumbled and almost fell but didn’t seem to care. I watched everything from my bedroom window, chuckling softly. Halilintar’s expression was so amusing. I could faintly hear the commotion downstairs. Ah, it wouldn’t be Halilintar if he didn’t cause a ruckus, right?

Not long after, my bedroom door opened. A disheveled and breathless Halilintar stood in the doorway. I waved at him as a greeting. Before I could say anything, Halilintar rushed toward me and enveloped me in a tight embrace. One of his hands rested behind my head, gently stroking my hair, while the other was on my back. I returned his hug, my eyes welling up as I heard him say I was safe now.

Ugh. I missed him so much. I missed Halilintar. I thought I would die when the bandits captured me. I thought I’d never see Halilintar again as they dragged me away.

I must have been crying in his arms because the next thing I remembered was Halilintar trying to comfort me.

"I’m sorry, Taufan. I’m so sorry. I should have protected you."

This wasn’t anyone’s fault but the bandits’. I wanted to tell him that, but my mouth stayed shut, and my tears kept flowing. I clung tightly to Halilintar’s clothes, wrinkling them and staining them with tears and snot.

I cried for a long time until my eyes hurt and swelled. By then, Halilintar and I had moved to the bed. We sat on it with Halilintar’s arm around me. I leaned against his shoulder, still sobbing but feeling much better than before.

"You must have been so scared."

I wasn’t just scared. I was so terrified it felt like I was going to die. Before they appeared, when they shot their arrows, when they surrounded us, when they chased me and Maripos, when they beat Maripos and I couldn’t do anything, when they grabbed me and said they would cut off my legs, when they were about to kill Maripos, when I had to carry Maripos on my back to find help, even when I was already in a safe place. I was scared the entire time, but I tried to be brave because I knew I had to fight alone. Especially when Maripos collapsed, leaving only me. As I carried Maripos out of the forest, I tried to stay strong, convincing myself that I could do it, even though every step I took was so difficult.

"Yeah. That’s really terrifying," I said honestly. Even so, I smiled at him, knowing I was safe now and there was nothing to fear anymore. Halilintar also smiled at me.

Unfortunately, that moment of peace vanished when Halilintar brought up the time I got lost in the forest recently and started scolding me. Ugh, couldn’t he wait until we got back? Didn’t he just comfort me earlier? Typical Halilintar.

The next day, after I had fully recovered, I apologized to the maid I had taken hostage. She was a kind girl, and although I could tell she was scared to meet me, she still mustered the courage to see me and accept my apology. I truly regretted hurting her. I wished I could give her something as a sign of my remorse, but I didn’t have a single coin—my money was held by Maripos, and I couldn’t just take it. Luckily for me, Halilintar promised to provide suitable compensation to the girl. I also apologized to the servants and guards at Count Balakung’s residence for all the trouble I caused. Most of them looked at me hesitantly, and some seemed like they were about to faint. I must have caused a lot of problems, huh?

"You know, you don’t have to apologize to them one by one. You could have just asked Maripos to convey your apologies," Halilintar said. When I nearly tripped over a rock, Halilintar grabbed my shoulder to steady me so I wouldn’t fall. After that, he didn’t let go of my shoulder, and his other hand even held mine as if guiding someone very weak.

"It feels much more sincere if I meet them directly, Your Highness. An apology should come from the person who made the mistake, not just be passed on to someone else."

Halilintar didn’t reply immediately. He just stayed silent, looking at me with furrowed brows. Had I said something wrong? Maybe Halilintar wasn’t used to this because he was a prince. Since when do nobles apologize to their servants? Had I done something wrong? Perhaps the original Taufan never apologized to his servants, no matter how kind and friendly he was to them. Taufan was a prince by birth, raised as royalty. Unlike me, just an ordinary person. I shouldn’t have done this if I didn’t want to raise suspicion. But my heart couldn’t be at peace if I let it go.

"You..."

What’s this? Had Halilintar noticed something was off about me? Did he realize I wasn’t his beloved little brother?

"Turns out, you haven’t changed at all."

Huh? What does he mean by that?

I clearly didn’t understand what Halilintar meant. Did he mean Taufan had also done what I did or said what I said? But I chose to ignore it because Halilintar was now looking at me warmly. His gaze was soft and full of affection, just as he always showed me.

"Your Highness, do I look scary?"

"Why do you ask that?"

"Didn’t Your Highness see their expressions when I came to meet them? They looked like they had seen a ghost. Even more so when I said I was sorry and apologized for causing them trouble. They looked like I was sentencing them to death. Am I really that scary?"

"Hmm... I wonder why. Maybe it’s because your face is scary."

I glared at him in protest, giving him a pinch on the waist, but it seemed to have no effect on Halilintar because he just laughed when I pinched him. Was I too weak, or was Halilintar’s skin too thick?

Halilintar let go of me, stepping away while teasing me, saying my face looked ridiculous right now. I chased after him, and he ran away from me. Just you wait, Halilintar. If I catch you, I’ll pinch you as hard as I can until you feel the pain!

...

We spent another two days at Count Balakung's residence before resuming our journey to the Capital. Halilintar stayed with us, though he didn’t ride in the carriage like Maripos and me. Instead, he rode his horse—a reddish-brown steed much larger than the other horses, and it looked terrifying. I might get crushed like an ant if I stood next to it. How could Halilintar ride such a massive horse? I guess it’s because of his protagonist’s halo.

“Maripos, what happened to those bandits?”

“Commander Kaika managed to capture some of them. Unfortunately, Kaldar escaped. However, from what I heard, Commander Kaika managed to inflict a fairly serious wound on him.”

I see. I thought Commander Kaika had defeated him. It seems Kaldar is not to be underestimated. He and his group have committed various crimes indiscriminately, and even the kingdom's elite forces couldn’t subdue him. He also killed Commander Kaika’s younger brother. He is a dangerous man. It was sheer bad luck to encounter him. I hope I never cross paths with him again.

“Ah... I hope this journey goes smoothly.”

“I wish for the same, Your Highness.”

I glanced out the carriage window. Captain Fang was walking beside the carriage, just like at the start of our journey. When he turned to look at me, I smiled and waved at him. Captain Fang, though he always appeared stiff and emotionless, returned my smile and wave. Of course, Captain Fang’s smile was faint, almost imperceptible, and his wave was slow compared to mine. But that didn’t matter—I felt closer to Captain Fang because of this!

“Do you need anything, Your Highness?” Captain Fang asked, moving his horse closer to the carriage so we could talk.

“Not really, I just wanted to look around for a bit.”

Captain Fang nodded but maintained his horse’s pace alongside the carriage. Like at the start of our journey, I talked a lot with Captain Fang. Just trivial things, like how the lemon cake at Count Balakung’s residence was delicious or how I found some wildflowers identical to the ones Captain Fang had given me in Count Balakung’s greenhouse. Captain Fang, as always, listened attentively. A few times, I caught him smiling at my silly stories, and he even laughed when Maripos scolded me for recounting my clumsiness. I cherished them both—they were my friends in this world.

Perhaps I talked too much and lost track of time. By the time the carriage stopped, the sun was beginning to set. We had arrived in a small town called Karina. I peeked out the window and saw Commander Kaika saying something to Halilintar. Perhaps they felt my gaze because they turned to look at me. Halilintar waved and smiled, in contrast to Commander Kaika’s increasingly sour expression. Ouch, it seemed Commander Kaika disliked me even more. I had caused too much trouble during this journey, so it was understandable if Commander Kaika wasn’t fond of me. But it still hurt.

We rented a modest inn. Halilintar said it was better to avoid crowds, and I agreed. However, I underestimated Halilintar’s fame. The innkeeper, realizing Halilintar would be staying there, became overly excited and prepared a feast as if hosting a king—not entirely wrong, as Halilintar would ascend the throne in the future. The townspeople, upon hearing the news, flocked to see him. The landlord even sent messengers inviting us to rest at their residence. Halilintar was like a celebrity.

While Halilintar was busy with the many people eager to meet and talk to him, I snuck away to the bathroom with Maripos. I wanted to bathe and sleep; sitting in the carriage all day was exhausting.

“Thankfully, they have hot water. Otherwise, your bath would have to wait until I finished heating the water,” Maripos said as he poured the last bucket of hot water into the wooden tub. It felt like stepping into a traditional Japanese bath, like in the movies.

“Honestly, I don’t mind cold water, but you always make a fuss about it.”

Maripos shook his head and placed his hands on his hips. “Your Highness, how many times must I tell you that your comfort is my top priority after your safety?”

I just laughed. Seeing Maripos in a white shirt with the sleeves rolled up to his elbows, his hair tied messily with some strands sticking to his sweaty face, and standing with his hands on his hips reminded me of my mother. She often scolded me for taking late-night baths with cold water.

“Alright, alright, thank you so much, Maripos.”

After washing myself with soap, I finally sank into the wooden tub filled with water Maripos had prepared. The water was no longer hot but warm—just how I liked it.

Ah... soaking in a wooden tub of warm water relaxed my body. Of course, I always enjoyed hot baths at Count Balakung’s residence, but this felt different. It must have been because I had been sitting in the carriage all day and could finally unwind. Maripos was still bustling around the bathroom, even though I told him to bathe with me or rest until I finished. Maripos always overburdened himself.

Oh well, I’d better enjoy this warm water. It was so comfortable.

I nearly fell asleep in the tub if not for Maripos waking me.

“Your Highness, you might catch a cold if you soak for too long.”

“Ehh... but I still want to soak.”

“No, Your Highness. You must get out now.”

Pouting, I still obeyed Maripos. At least the soreness in my body had lessened. I would surely sleep soundly tonight.

“Ah?!”

I turned to Maripos. He was holding the edge of the wooden tub I had just soaked in, likely about to drain the water. However, his gaze was fixed on me, looking utterly shocked and somewhat bewildered.

“Your Highness, please turn around. Let me examine your back.”

“Huh? Why? What’s wrong?”

I tried to look at my back. What was wrong? Was something stuck there that I hadn’t noticed? Or was there an unnoticed wound?

Maripos approached, holding my shoulders and turning me to face away from him. I felt his fingers hovering over my bare skin. Then he touched the middle of my back, his fingers moving up and down as if inspecting something.

“Your Highness...” Maripos! Please don’t leave your words hanging like that! I was getting nervous about something I didn’t even know!

“What? What is it?”

“How did you get this mark?”

“What mark? Maripos, what are you talking about?”

“This.” His fingers were still on the middle of my back. It seemed he was pointing at something there. But I couldn’t see it! I didn’t know what mark was on my back! If Maripos had just noticed it, that meant it had appeared during this journey. When and how it got there, I had no idea, as I had never checked my back or bathed with anyone before this.

"The mark of a pair of blue wings. How did you get it?"

"Maripos, I don’t know what you’re talking about. But can we discuss this after I’m no longer naked? I’m starting to feel cold." I was really getting cold. While I was still in the warm water, it felt so comfortable that I almost fell asleep, but now I was shivering, and Maripos was bringing up a mark I’d never seen before.

Maripos sighed and grabbed a thick cloth hanging nearby, wrapping it around my body.

"Maripos, you really are fit to be a mother." I nudged him with difficulty.

"Who are you calling a mother, Your Highness?"

"Obviously, you."

I burst out laughing at the sour expression on Maripos's face. He always got annoyed whenever I called him a mother, but he never scolded me or told me to stop. He would just tickle me or pinch my cheeks. Maripos, you really are a caring mother. Thumbs up to you.

When we reached the room, Maripos held up a mirror before I got dressed. He told me to check my back and confirm the mark he mentioned. Honestly, I didn’t think it was that important, but I did it anyway because I knew Maripos wouldn’t stop talking if I didn’t.

Just as Maripos said, there was a mark on my back now. Right in the middle of my back, a mark shaped like a pair of blue wings. Like bird wings. It wasn’t too big, but not too small either. People would immediately notice it when they saw my back, just like Maripos did earlier in the bathroom.

"Huh? This..."

There was another mark on my body besides the pair of wings. On the left side of my pelvis, slightly toward the center, there was another mark. It looked like a whirlwind, similar to the symbol of the Wind Goddess at the temple. Its color was a pale blue, almost gray, and it appeared faint, as if it might disappear. I touched it without realizing it.

"That’s the symbol of the Wind Goddess's blessing. Its color is slowly returning, probably because you’ve started using your powers again."

Huh? This pale color is actually coming back? Does that mean the mark had disappeared from my body before? But wait, I’ve never heard about this. I’ve read every book about gods and goddesses I could find. I’ve also read as much as I could about Vint. None of those books ever mentioned marks appearing on the bodies of those blessed. Judging by Maripos's calm demeanor, it means this mark has been on my body for a long time. No. This mark has been on Taufan’s body for a long time, long before I entered it. A mark symbolizing the blessing of a goddess, huh? Does that mean the other six princes have them too?

If I think back, Duri had something similar on his palms. That kid always wore gloves and rarely showed his hands. But when eating cake with me, he would take off his gloves, allowing me to see them. On both his palms were marks shaped like sharp leaves. Their color was bright green, unlike the whirlwind mark on my body. That must be the symbol of Gevix’s blessing for Duri.

Now I’m curious about the marks the other princes have. What might Halilintar's and Gempa's look like? Oh, maybe I can ask Halilintar about it later.

"Your Highness, where did you get this mark?" 

Maripos pressed the wing-shaped mark on my back again. Right, he’s been wanting to talk about this since earlier.

"I don’t know either. I wouldn’t even know it was on my back if you hadn’t mentioned it."

Maripos's expression turned complicated. He seemed to be thinking hard about something. He didn’t even respond to my words as he helped me get dressed. What exactly is Maripos thinking? And why is this wing-shaped mark so important to him?

"Your Highness... do you remember Oak?" Maripos asked after a long silence.

"Huh? Of course. Gempa’s golden bear."

"You know Oak is a spirit animal, don’t you?"

I just nodded. Why is Maripos asking about Oak? What does Oak have to do with the wing-shaped mark on my back?

"Prince Gempa has claw marks on both his upper arms. That’s the sign of his bond with a spirit animal."

Bear claws? Is Maripos suspecting that the wing-shaped mark on my back is a sign from a spirit animal? But I’ve never even made contact with any spirit animal other than Oak! And besides, aren’t they supposed to be picky? Even then, they give tests to their chosen humans. I don’t remember taking any test or anything like that!

"Maripos, don’t be ridiculous. Are you suggesting this mark belongs to a spirit animal?"

"Yes, Your Highness. Where else would you have gotten it if not from that? Unless you randomly had someone tattoo your back while staying at Count Balakung’s residence and then forgot about it."

That’s not funny, Maripos. I’m a decent man who takes good care of my body. There’s no way I’d stain it with a tattoo—though, well... the marks on Taufan’s body do look like tattoos.

"Besides, what spirit animal would want to bond with me? I’m just a discarded prince who can’t even use my powers properly."

"Your Highness!"

Maripos looked upset, his brow furrowed, and his eyes glared sharply at me. Why is he so angry when I’m just stating facts? The truth is, Taufan’s status really is that of a discarded prince, isn’t it? Also, I really can’t use the powers in this body properly, even after a long time of training. I’ve nearly died multiple times trying to use them. What spirit animal would choose me?

"Ah, we’d better drop this conversation. I want to sleep." I waved my hand dismissively. Maripos looked like he wanted to say something, but he closed his mouth and just sighed in resignation.

"Do you want to read a book before bed, Your Highness?"

Of course! I quickly sat on the bed, waiting for Maripos to return with a book. Some of the books I brought on the journey to the Wind Goddess’s Temple were damaged during the bandit attack. Only a few survived that attack, which is such a shame. They were good books I hadn’t read yet. Luckily, Count Balakung kindly gave me some books from his library to accompany me on the journey. Halilintar also promised to buy me new books when we arrived in Tarín City. Apparently, the city has quite a few bookstores with diverse collections. I can’t wait!

Chapter Text

Boboiboy Fanfiction

©  Boboiboy | Animonsta Studio

A/N: The entire story is purely fictional, and the author does not profit from writing this story. If there are any similarities in ideas, character names, or locations, they are purely coincidental.

≫ ──── ≪•◦ ❈ ◦•≫ ──── ≪

Ever since traveling with Halilintar, I’ve felt much calmer and more relaxed. Maybe it’s because I trust his abilities as Ignisia’s best swordsman, or perhaps it’s one of the charms of being a protagonist. Either way, I’m happy he’s here for me. Like now, we’ve resumed our journey after a slightly chaotic breakfast at the inn. Halilintar is guiding his horse to walk beside the carriage, just like Captain Fang did yesterday. Naturally, I engage him in conversation to pass the time. Unlike Captain Fang, who would only respond with smiles and nods, Halilintar answers everything I say. He even laughs, and occasionally, his hand would reach out so I could hold it.

“Taufan, do you want to try horseback riding?”

Huh?

“Huh?”

Why did Halilintar suddenly ask me that? Does he want to kill me? I take back what I said earlier about him!

Halilintar leans forward, patting his horse’s neck before looking at me. “Yes. Do you want to try horseback riding with me?”

“Err... thank you for the offer, but I’m fine in the carriage.”

“Don’t be like that; you need to stretch your legs too.”

“No, thank you, Your Highness. I’ll stay in the carriage.”

Yeah... that’s what I said, but I don’t know why I ended up in this situation. Now I’m sitting on Halilintar’s horse. It’s so high up that it’s making me dizzy. Is it always this high when riding a horse? I looked left and right, hoping someone would save me. But aside from Maripos, who looked very worried, everyone else seemed completely calm. Don’t they realize I’m about to faint on this terrifying giant horse?! When the horse moved, I became so scared that I almost fell off.

“Ah, you need to be careful.” Halilintar—who, I don’t know when, had already sat behind me—caught me before I could fall. He held the reins and nudged the horse. The horse started moving again, this time at a walk. I clung tightly to the edge of the saddle, praying I wouldn’t fall off this monstrous beast.

“You’re still scared of horseback riding,” How dare Halilintar laugh at me at a time like this. Didn’t he realize my heart was beating so fast it was about to explode?

“Don’t close your eyes; sit up straight.”

I turned to him, hoping he’d see the anger on my face. But instead, he just laughed. He nudged the horse again. This time, the horse didn’t just walk—it started running. I must have screamed because I was sure I heard a shout drowned out by laughter. Was it just my imagination, or did the horse really start running very fast? Now, even holding onto the saddle didn’t feel like enough to keep me safe.

“Don’t worry, Taufan. Brother is here.”

“Don’t worry, Taufan. Brother is here.”

Huh? Just now... it sounded like I heard another voice besides Halilintar’s. It sounded like a child’s voice. But maybe I was just hallucinating because I was riding a horse that was too big with an inattentive Halilintar.

Maripos! Save me from this suffering!

...

I will never ride a horse again for the rest of my life! Especially Halilintar's horse!

Damn Halilintar for taking me around on his horse without considering my constant screams of fear of falling off. Sometimes I feel like he deliberately made the horse go faster just to make me scream louder. His antics remind me of my brother. My brother would do anything to prank me too! Turns out they're the same person! Equally evil!

"Are you alright, Your Highness?" Maripos hurriedly held me after Halilintar helped me off his horse.

"I feel like I'm going to die, Maripos," I said. I wasn’t exaggerating. It truly felt like I was going to die. My heart was still racing so fast I was sure it would explode. My stomach churned, and I felt nauseous.

"I need to lie down for a bit. I feel so dizzy."

Before Maripos could guide me to the carriage, my feet left the ground, and I was suddenly being carried princess-style. Of course, it was Halilintar who did it. What else did this young man want from me?

"Sorry, I must have been too excited because it’s been a long time—"

Halilintar didn’t finish his sentence. He just smiled at me and carried me into the carriage so I could lie down. At least he looked regretful, so I wasn’t too mad at him.

"We’ll rest here, so don’t worry and get some sleep."

Even if you didn’t say it, I was already planning to sleep. Thank you for making me want to throw up my breakfast. Halilintar laughed when I glared at him, saying I hadn’t changed. This was the second time he said that. Now I was really curious about the original Taufan because of Halilintar’s words. Since waking up in this place, I never tried to be the original Taufan. I didn’t try to imitate his personality, his way of speaking, or his writing. I just acted like myself. Sure, I was worried someone might suspect me, but none of them seemed suspicious of me. At first, I thought it was because they were happy their gloomy prince had become cheerful again, but now that I think about it, isn’t it strange?

It feels like... the original Taufan and I are the same person.

Even so, I’m sure we’re different entities. I clearly remember my childhood with my family in my original world. I remember that world vividly because I lived there for 21 years. I know I have a family there waiting for me to return to them. Also, my friends and my unfinished college. I know my dream is to graduate and earn a degree to make my parents proud. But here I am, in this strange world I believe is a novel. Playing the role of a prince cast out from a kingdom. I truly know nothing about this world, and I have no memories of spending time here. It’s obvious this isn’t my world.

Ah! Thinking about it just gives me more headaches! I’d better sleep now.

I didn’t sleep for long because when I woke up, the sun was still shining brightly. What woke me up were voices that sounded like a group of people discussing something. I blinked my eyes several times, trying to gather the remnants of my awareness to listen more clearly.

"...bad I fainted after that. I really don’t know what happened afterward."

That was Maripos’s voice.

"The place looked like it had just been hit by a storm. Many trees were downed, and all the bandits there were dead. Some bodies were still intact; they died from stab wounds to their necks. But the others were in pieces."

This time it was Commander Kaika speaking.

"Are there any signs of cutting on the trees or surroundings?" I heard Halilintar ask.

They were discussing the incident when Maripos and I escaped. I was curious about that too. When Maripos was about to be killed, a sudden, powerful whirlwind appeared. I only thought about protecting Maripos, so I didn’t pay much attention. I had no idea where that whirlwind came from. I don’t even remember using Taufan’s powers. Even if I did, there’s no way I could have survived creating such a strong and massive whirlwind. Yet here I am, alive and well, and I even managed to carry Maripos to the city before collapsing from exhaustion.

"Yes, there are some trees and ground with marks as if cut by something extremely sharp."

Really? I don’t remember that. Maybe because it was nighttime, and I wasn’t focused on my surroundings except for the body parts scattered on the ground. Ugh... Thinking about it again gives me chills and nausea. Maybe I won’t be able to eat dinner tonight.

"That must be Wind Blade. Taufan only used it once when—" Halilintar stopped. Why did he stop talking? I want to know! What is Wind Blade, and when exactly did Taufan use it?! And why would he use such a terrifying power?!

"The point is, it’s a dangerous attack. Taufan said he never wanted to use it again because the attack was too cruel."

That’s true, it’s too cruel. An attack that slices people into pieces. It could easily hit innocent people by accident. But the question remains, who did it? Is there another wind-powered individual who happened to be in the same place as Maripos and me that night?

"One thing I don’t understand, Your Highness. Why were they targeting Prince Taufan?" Maripos asked.

Huh? Why is Maripos asking that? Isn’t it obvious because they’re bandits and happened to encounter a carriage carrying a noble? Of course, they’d want to rob me, right?

"You noticed it too, Maripos?"

Eh? Why is Commander Kaika joining in?

I didn’t hear a reply, so I assumed Maripos nodded.

"What do you mean?"

"Your Highness, when the attack began, an arrow was shot directly at Prince Taufan. If I hadn’t pulled the Prince away, and if Fang hadn’t cut the arrow, there would be a hole in the Prince’s head by now. I feel... this wasn’t an ordinary bandit attack. They specifically targeted Prince Taufan."

There was no response again. I moved as slowly as possible to peek out the window. Near the carriage were Halilintar, Maripos, Commander Kaika, and Captain Fang. I could only see Maripos and Commander Kaika’s faces, while Captain Fang and Halilintar had their backs to me. Now I could only guess their expressions based on the atmosphere. Halilintar, no doubt, must have a furious expression. As for Captain Fang, he was probably still expressionless as usual.

"Kaldar also said something indicating he wanted to sell Prince Taufan, and after the Prince and Maripos escaped, they stopped attacking us. That’s why none of us died that night. Kaldar didn’t care about the two carriages filled with treasures; he even ordered his men to focus on chasing the Prince. It’s very strange because Kaldar is a greedy man; he wouldn’t leave a single coin behind during a robbery. Which means the Prince’s value was far greater than the treasures in the two carriages."

"His men said the same thing when they caught up to us. Their focus was solely on the Prince. It’s also strange they managed to know our location even though we changed routes upon hearing of a bandit attack on the previous path."

Captain Fang, who had been silent all this time, finally opened his mouth and said, "A diversion."

The three of them simultaneously turned to Captain Fang. Amazing how Captain Fang could remain calm under their stares. If it were me, I’d probably be extremely nervous.

"The attack on that route was a diversion. They must have considered that. Attacking the route we were supposed to take would force us to change course. The only other way back to the palace is the route we're currently taking. They have been waiting for us there because they knew we would pass through it. This attack was planned."

Captain Fang's tone was so calm, yet I could sense how serious he was. It was precisely because of this that I felt even more terrified, especially when I recalled the words of the bandit who held me captive. He said his target was only me. I thought it was just because he wanted to sell me off as a noble. It turned out there was another purpose behind his words. My hands trembled, and I tried to cover my mouth to keep from making a sound. How could I have forgotten? Taufan had already faced an assassination attempt before I entered his body. Not to mention the incident two years ago when he almost died from drinking deadly poison. Someone or some group was targeting his life, and now it's happening again. They even used bandits to eliminate Taufan. Why do they want to kill him so badly? He's just a weak 16-year-old boy despised by his kingdom!

Is this all really just to remove Halilintar from the throne? Why does it feel like there’s more to it? Did Taufan offend someone so dangerous?

Ah, why is everything becoming more complicated?

"I will investigate this as soon as we reach the palace. No one is to inform Taufan. Let him… let him rest."

I saw Maripos and Commander Kaika nod their heads, while Captain Fang remained silent. Halilintar glanced at him but quickly averted his gaze. It seemed he still held a grudge because I had opposed him twice to defend Captain Fang.

The three of them began to walk away, leaving only Halilintar standing in place. Watching him from this angle, I realized how much burden he had to bear since childhood. As a child, as a brother, as a prince, and in the future, as a king. Despite his young age, his burdens were far greater than anyone could imagine. He looked so lonely and miserable.

Halilintar then turned around, waving his hand in the air, perhaps to shoo away insects. Then he walked toward the carriage. I quickly returned to my previous position, pretending to be asleep. The carriage door opened gently, and Halilintar stepped inside. He must have sat across from me, staring at me. This young man had a habit of watching me while I slept, especially when his mind was troubled. I felt a touch on my hand and instinctively flinched.

"Don't worry, Taufan. Brother is here."

"Don't worry, Taufan. Brother is here."

...

"Don't worry, Taufan. Brother is here." The young boy stretched out his arms.

"I will always protect you!" He sounded so confident, despite his small frame. The other boy looked at him with admiration. His blue irises sparkled like sapphires under the sunlight.

"Promise?" He held out his hand with his pinky extended.

Their pinkies intertwined. "Of course, that's our promise."

...

"I will always protect you. I promise."

"Give it back."

I couldn’t breathe. It felt like something was choking me. Wh-what is this? Why so sudden? No matter how hard I tried to take a breath, I still couldn’t breathe. The air seemed to avoid me. My ears buzzed, my vision darkened, and my chest hurt so much. Someone, please help me!

"Give it back!"

"Hel…p…" I whimpered, pleading for anyone to release me from this suffering. It felt like someone was screaming, someone was touching me too. Please… I beg you…

"Gi-"

No one knows how long this torment lasted. Just when I thought I was truly going to die, air rushed back into my lungs. I gasped as much as I could, trying to fill my nearly empty lungs. My surroundings were still blurry, the light blinding my eyes. But I didn’t want to close them. I struggled to keep breathing, even though it was so hard.

Blurry shadows appeared and disappeared. Everything still looked so unclear, and my ears rang painfully.

"...an! ...fan! TAUFAN!"

My vision finally cleared, and I could hear properly again. The blue sky was the first thing I noticed, followed by the painful light that nearly blinded me. Then, a hand blocked the sunlight from my eyes.

"It’s okay, Taufan. It’s okay. Brother is here. Brother is here. You’re safe now."

I tried to move, but my body felt so heavy, as if something was holding me down. I reached out to the hand still above my eyes, my own trembling and weak, but the owner of the hand allowed me to lower it. Halilintar’s face was the next thing I saw. He looked worried but also relieved. His cheeks were wet, and his eyes glistened with unshed tears. He smiled at me, then I felt like I was being pulled closer to him.

"Bro… ther…?"

"Hm, yes. It’s me."

I could only stare at him. I couldn’t speak, not because I had lost my voice but because I didn’t know what to say. I felt my body being lifted, now cradled in Halilintar’s arms.

"How much longer until we reach the next town?" Halilintar asked Commander Kaika. I hadn’t realized he was nearby. Maripos and Captain Fang were also present, along with some soldiers at a reasonable distance. Did I… cause trouble again?

Commander Kaika glanced at me briefly, then shifted his gaze back to Halilintar. "About two more hours, Your Highness."

Halilintar said nothing. He just walked away, still carrying me. He brought me into the carriage, never putting me down. In the end, I sat on his lap, and he continued to hold me. Maripos entered shortly after.

"Your Highness… I don’t think it would be comfortable for you to keep holding Prince Taufan like that."

Halilintar’s embrace only tightened, as if he had no intention of letting me go anytime soon. I could only look at Maripos and shake my head. I still didn’t know what had happened earlier. The unpleasant experience that felt like torture leading to death still haunted me—it must have been just as tormenting for Halilintar in a different way. It’s best to let him do as he pleases; otherwise, this young man might explode later.

Besides, I enjoyed being held by him. It felt… safe and warm. My heart whispered that it felt like coming home, even though I knew it wasn’t true.

"Hm? What is it, Taufan? Is something wrong?"

I just shook my head. Drawing myself closer to him, I clutched his clothes. It must seem odd to see two teenage boys hugging like this, but boys have feelings too. I just wanted to be near Halilintar right now.

"Don’t worry, Taufan. Brother is here."

"Don’t worry, Taufan. Brother is here."

Again? How many times has it been now that I’ve heard that voice? Why do I keep hearing it? Every time I hear it, it’s always after Halilintar says those words. The same sentence, but a different voice. Also... earlier, I seemed to see something strange. Those two children... were they Halilintar and Taufan as kids? Their relationship has been close since childhood. That must have been from the memories of the original Taufan.

By the way, why do I keep hearing the voice of a child repeating Halilintar's words? Does it have a certain meaning?

Forget it for now.

Halilintar actually held me in his arms for the entire 2-hour journey. How could he bear to carry me for two hours? Was my body weight truly that light for him? Meanwhile, for two hours, I couldn’t do anything except play with the buttons on Halilintar’s shirt. I intended to read a book, but my head still hurt. Every time I tried to chat with Maripos, Halilintar would prevent it by pressing my face against his chest, making it hard for me to talk. So I really couldn’t do anything else but play with his shirt buttons.

Halilintar still didn’t let go of me even after we stopped at an inn. Unlike before, when he chose a simple inn, this time the inn we arrived at looked very large and luxurious, as if it was meant only for nobles and wealthy people.

“Aren’t you tired of carrying me all this time?”

“Well... I’d be lying if I said no. My body is sore, and my arms are starting to ache, but that’s just a minor issue.” Halilintar winked with his left eye, flashing a playful smile. I laughed at his antics, not protesting even though he still carried me out of the carriage.

“Find the best doctor in this area and make sure they arrive within 30 minutes. Then instruct them to prepare the best room immediately; I want everything ready when I enter.” Halilintar spoke to one of the soldiers. Ah, the authority of a prince. I watched the soldier bow to Halilintar and then run into the inn.

“Taufan, would you like to sit in the garden?”

The garden?

I stared at Halilintar for a moment, then shifted my gaze to find the place he meant. It turned out that in the inn’s courtyard, there was a small garden. There was a fountain in the center and a small gazebo for enjoying tea and the surrounding view.

I didn’t need to say anything because Halilintar had already taken me there. He seated me on one of the chairs and then sat beside me.

“Is it really okay for you to carry me like that?”

“Hm? Why?”

“There were a lot of people watching. They probably don’t like seeing their first prince being so close to a prince who—”

Suddenly, Halilintar slammed the table in front of us, startling me so much that I couldn’t continue my sentence. I looked at him, noticing the angry expression on his face again, just like the day when Pavan pushed me down the stairs. I could only stay silent, afraid of making him angrier. Halilintar rubbed his face, looking frustrated. Then he looked at me, his red irises filled with despair. “Taufan, please don’t say things like that again. You’re my brother, just like our other five brothers. Prince or not, I am your brother, and you are my brother. If I have to throw away my status as a prince to be with my brother, I will.”

I was stunned. Truly stunned. I never expected Halilintar to say such a thing. I knew he cared deeply for his family, but to the extent of discarding his status as a prince just to be with his brother...

“Your Highness...”

“Don’t say such hurtful things again, okay?”

I could only nod. Halilintar looked so sad when he said that, as if he wanted to cry but was holding it back. This Halilintar is a good brother. He prioritizes his family above everything else. However, this Halilintar is not yet fit to be a king. He hasn’t placed his kingdom above everything else. In the novel, what had Halilintar sacrificed to become the king he is?

I turned my gaze away from Halilintar when I heard approaching footsteps. Commander Kaika and Maripos came toward us. Commander Kaika’s face looked as serious as always, while Maripos appeared worried. He kept glancing at me, even when he bowed to Halilintar. I smiled and gave him a small wave, hoping it was enough to reassure him. Then I felt as if someone was trying to drill a hole in my head. I quickly turned to find Commander Kaika glaring at me. Why does he hate me even more?! I haven’t done anything except sit with Halilintar this whole time!

“Kaika,” Halilintar said, his tone sounding reprimanding, and his face looked annoyed. Commander Kaika immediately shifted his gaze away from me. He seemed to sigh as if dealing with someone troublesome. Hmph! Sorry if I’m a nuisance, Commander Kaika.

“The doctor you requested has arrived, Your Highness.”

As if on cue, Maripos stepped forward to help me stand. I didn’t realize my legs were this weak until I almost fell when Maripos helped me up. A little grateful that Halilintar had been carrying me all this time; otherwise, I would have fallen the moment I tried to get out of the carriage. That would have been so embarrassing.

Halilintar also stood up when I did, catching me when I nearly stumbled and looking ready to carry me again. I placed my hand on his arm and shook my head. I didn’t want to be carried again; I wanted to walk. Fortunately, Halilintar didn’t insist. When he was about to help me walk, Commander Kaika stopped him and said he wanted to talk privately. Although he didn’t look pleased, Halilintar nodded in agreement.

“Taufan, you go ahead inside,” Halilintar said, smiling warmly at me and patting my hair. I nodded in response, letting Maripos help me walk to the inn.

I only took a few small steps and already felt exhausted. Ugh! Legs, move properly! Maripos patiently helped me walk toward the inn. When I finally entered, I wanted to collapse onto the bed and rest. My legs hurt so much. Unfortunately for me, I had to delay that plan. The room assigned to me was on the top floor, which meant I had to climb countless stairs to reach it. I asked Maripos if my room could be moved to the first floor, but Maripos said the room Halilintar requested was only available on the top floor. Why isn’t there an elevator in this world? I could only cry internally.

“Your Highness, if you allow me, I will carry you upstairs,” Maripos offered. I hesitated a little, considering Maripos had been severely injured during the bandit attack. Even though his wounds had healed, he shouldn’t strain his body by carrying me.

“The stairs look too many, Maripos.”

Maripos glanced at the stairs he had to climb and winced, as if he could already imagine the difficulty of carrying me up all those steps. I truly lamented the slow progress of technology in this world. They had magic and magical beasts, yet they couldn’t create something to make life easier? An elevator would be greatly appreciated. Thank you.

"I can help you, Your Highness."

Both Maripos and I jumped in surprise at the sudden voice. We turned around at the same time to find Captain Fang standing calmly. His face was still expressionless, but there was a faint glint of amusement in his eyes. He must be silently laughing at me and Maripos. Captain Fang, I didn’t know you could be this sly.

“Allow me to assist you, Your Highness.”

“Eh? But there are so many stairs. It must be troublesome.”

“Don’t worry, Your Highness. I can manage.”

I glanced back at the stairs we needed to climb, thinking about how I wouldn’t be able to make it on my own. My weak legs would refuse to move after climbing just ten steps. I really needed help. So, I nodded, signaling my agreement to Captain Fang’s offer.

Captain Fang didn’t immediately lift me like Halilintar had; this time, he seemed hesitant. As I suspected, climbing that many stairs while carrying someone else would be quite a burden.

I wanted to tell him that he didn’t have to push himself, but the faint blush on Captain Fang’s face made me pause.

“Um... should I carry you the same way Prince Halilintar did before?”

I had no idea what expression I was making at that moment, but judging by the heat rising to my face, I was sure I was blushing. Captain Fang had carried me twice before in a princess carry, but back then, I had either been unconscious or on the brink of death. If he carried me in a princess carry now, while I was fully aware, it would be so embarrassing! Being carried like that by Halilintar was one thing—he was my brother, and Taufan’s body instinctively trusted him. But with Captain Fang, it was a different story. My dignity as a man would vanish in an instant. Especially since this wasn’t the Sunset Palace but a public place. There would be so much gossip. People would definitely say, “Prince Taufan is weaker and more spoiled than a girl; he asked his guard to carry him like a princess.”

AAAA! Just imagining it was mortifying!

“Ahem. Your back. Just carry me on your back.”

“As you wish, Your Highness.”

Captain Fang approached and knelt on one knee. Awkwardly, I climbed onto his back, letting him stand up. I almost choked him in surprise when he began walking steadily. Captain Fang didn’t say a word, remaining calm as he ascended the stairs one by one. Maripos followed us, staring intently. He seemed puzzled but said nothing.

When we reached the top floor, I asked Captain Fang to put me down so I could walk to my room on my own. However, the young man refused, saying he might as well carry me all the way to the room. Honestly, I felt incredibly embarrassed about it, but I didn’t insist on getting down. Since there was a free ride, I decided to take advantage of it. He finally set me down once we arrived at the room, allowing me to take in the sight of what would be my quarters. It was a large and luxurious room, far more opulent than Taufan’s room in the Sunset Palace.

How should I describe it? The bed was massive, with satin sheets and pillows and blankets that looked soft and comfortable. There were nightstands on either side of the bed, each topped with what appeared to be an extremely expensive lamp. Then there was a painting in a golden frame on the wall, a large vase that I knew only wealthy people could afford, a crystal chandelier, luxurious velvet curtains, a balcony offering a view of the city, and countless trinkets I couldn’t even name. Was that carpet embroidered with gold thread?! It looked like it sparkled! Was this what they called a VVIP room? Truly remarkable, the power of a prince!

“I’ll bring the doctor here immediately, Your Highness,” Maripos said. He bowed and stepped out of the room. Meanwhile, Captain Fang stood in the corner, his eyes scanning the surroundings. Perhaps he was ensuring the place was free from danger.

As I had planned, I threw myself onto the bed, relishing the softness of the mattress beneath me. I was glad Halilintar had chosen this room.

Chapter Text

Boboiboy Fanfiction

©  Boboiboy | Animonsta Studio

A/N: The entire story is purely fictional, and the author does not profit from writing this story. If there are any similarities in ideas, character names, or locations, they are purely coincidental.

≫ ──── ≪•◦ ❈ ◦•≫ ──── ≪

For the umpteenth time, I stared at the mark on my back through the reflection in the mirror. I wasn’t particularly curious at first, but every time Maripos helped me dress or bathe, he would always touch that mark. Whenever I asked why he was so interested in the mark on my back, he would answer that he wanted to know where it came from. Even though I had already told him that if I knew, I would have told him immediately.  

The mark is shaped like a pair of bird wings, colored blue. Blue, hmm... That’s right, when I carried Maripos to the city, didn’t Blue come with us? Then why I didn't see it when I woke up? Was it already gone? Had the bird returned to where it came from? Besides, what was it even doing there? That forest is so far from where I freed it. How it found us in that forest remains a mystery to me.  

I looked at my back again, this time much lower. The whirlwind mark on this body looks pitiful compared to Duri’s. But according to Maripos, its color has returned because I’ve started using my powers. Does that mean its color will become as vibrant as Duri’s if I keep using my powers?  

Sigh... this world is truly full of mysteries.  

When I came out of the bathroom, I was surprised to find Halilintar sitting casually in one of the chairs, reading the book I read with Maripos last night. The young man looked up when he heard the door open, smiling warmly as he always did when he was with me.  
“You have an interesting taste in books, Taufan.”  

Eh?  

Eh?!  

AAA!! That stupid novel about an illogical romance written by an author who daydreaming too much!!  

“No! You’re misunderstanding! I don’t like books like that! I only read it because the maid at Count Balakung’s residence recommended it!”  

Halilintar laughed, laughing at me as I tried to explain why I was reading that book. Oh god, this is so embarrassing. Why did I agree to read that book? Ah, right. It was because Tarisa—the maid girl I had taken hostage—said it was an interesting book. In reality, the contents of that book were utter nonsense! A love story between a poor girl and a prince. The entire thing was complete rubbish! It only focused on their romance and didn’t resolve the existing problems properly! Not to mention there were so many ambiguous scenes in it. It’s so embarrassing that Halilintar knows I read something like that!  

“Well, there’s nothing wrong with reading it. Maybe you’re hoping to find a girl like her?” The smile on Halilintar’s face looked unpleasant, as if he was teasing me right now.  

“Or do you want to find the Prince?”  

What the heck is that?!  

“By the way, why are you here, Your Highness?”  

Halilintar closed the book in his hand. “Ah, I wanted to take you out for a walk.”  

“A walk?”  

“Yes. Didn’t I promise to buy you a new book?”  

“But didn’t you make that promise for when we’re in Tarín City?”  

Halilintar didn’t say anything, he just smiled. I don’t understand why Halilintar wants to take me out for a walk now, when I thought we would continue our journey right away. I’m not refusing, really, I’m just confused.  

“Is it okay?”  

I’m afraid that this city is like Thaya Village, where the people didn’t like me. I’m afraid I’ll cause trouble for Halilintar, even though he’s one of the candidates to become King. What will people say if they see him walking around with me?  

"Don't worry. The majority of Fontis City's residents are followers of the Water God; they are calm and peaceful people as long as you don't disturb them."

Alright, I trust Halilintar's judgment. Besides, I'm already bored of just staying inside the room or carriage all day. It's good to do something a little fun, right?

After gaining my approval, Halilintar patted my shoulder and left the room. He said he would let Maripos help me get ready. Being a noble is troublesome, huh? The clothes you wear daily—no matter how fine they are—can't be worn when going out. There's another set of clothing for that. So many rules of etiquette.

When I stepped out of the room, I found Halilintar leaning against the wall beside the door. He must have been waiting for me. He smiled, extended his hand, and said, "Allow me to be your knight today, Your Highness."

I laughed at Halilintar's joke. I placed my hand on his and replied, "Take good care of me, Sir Knight."

When we exited the inn, there was already a carriage waiting for us. It wasn't the carriage I'd been riding in all this time; this one was much smaller and simpler in comparison. Still, it wasn’t something an ordinary person would ride in.

"Maripos isn’t coming with us?" I asked when I noticed the silver-haired young man wasn’t anywhere around. It was strange; there was no way Maripos would be late. He’s always a step ahead of me, and he’s also always the one waiting for me.

"No, it’s just the two of us today. Maripos has other matters to attend to."

I wonder what kind of matter could be so important that Maripos wouldn’t accompany me. Perhaps something urgent that couldn’t be left unattended. Captain Fang and Commander Kaika were nowhere to be seen either; they were probably busy training or something like that. Besides, Halilintar is the best swordsman in Ignisia, so I guess there won’t be any trouble even if we don’t bring any guards.

Fontis City is a beautiful city. Like Tarín City, which has many people with various activities, so too does Fontis City. Perhaps because the majority of its people are followers of Vaser, the Water God, you can easily find fountains in this city. Additionally, there is a large lake near the city with a small structure resembling a temple in the middle of it. Halilintar said that it was a small temple built for Vaser, where the city’s residents often give their offerings. They would place their offerings on boats woven from palm leaves and send them to the center of the lake. They believe that if their boat reaches the small temple, their prayers will be granted by Vaser.

Halilintar took me around the market, saying I might find something interesting. I thought so too. And perhaps I could find something to bring back as a gift for Duri.

There were many stalls selling beautiful trinkets. We approached one and began looking for something good.

"Is there anything you like?"  

"Hm... I’m still looking."

There were so many items. I didn’t know the names of them all, but they looked like beautiful jewelry crafted with care. I picked up a brooch with a pale purple gemstone. Its color reminded me of Maripos's eyes. Ah... I wanted to give this to him.

"Do you like that?"  

"Um... but I didn’t bring any money with me."

"I’ll buy it for you."

"No. That’s not necessary. Besides, I want to give it to Maripos. It wouldn’t be right to give someone a gift using someone else’s money." I reluctantly put the brooch back. If I had known I’d find something like this, I would’ve asked Maripos to give me some money. Yeah, I never carry money myself; Maripos worries I’ll become a target for robbery. I share the same concern, after all. Robbery is something that can happen anywhere and anytime, right?

"Just take it; after all, it’ll be yours. You have the right to do whatever you want with it after that."

Having a wealthy older brother sure is nice. I picked up the brooch again and then continued searching. I found something like a charm with tassels and beads. As I held it up, the seller smiled and immediately approached me. "That’s a sword ornament. It’s very suitable for a young man like you. It’s quite trendy now, especially among those who carry swords."

Hearing that, I glanced at Halilintar instead. He was also examining the trinkets on display. I didn’t need something like this since I didn’t even know how to use a sword. However, Halilintar was a skilled swordsman, and he even had his sword with him now. Would it still count as a gift if it was bought with Halilintar’s money? I decided not to care about that.

"Are there any other designs?"

"Oh, certainly, young master." As he said this, the seller put away the box of sword ornaments and brought out another wooden box. Inside, there were various ornaments. I picked one that caught my eye. It had a simple design with red thread tassels, and at one end, there was a black pearl.

"An excellent choice, young master. Are you sure you don’t want something more luxurious?" The seller pointed at one made of golden thread, but I thought it wouldn’t suit Halilintar.

"No, I’ll take this one."

"Very well. Is there anything else?"

"Do you have something green that reminds you of a forest?"

"A forest? Ah... we have an interesting new arrival today." Saying this, he put away the box of sword ornaments and brought out another box. It was filled with sparkling gemstones. The seller picked up a small stone about the size of a thumb and handed it to me. It was green—I didn’t know any other name for the color—and it sparkled, resembling Duri’s eyes. So beautiful. I was sure Duri would love it.

"I like this one."

"Very well, I’ll wrap it up for you. Is there anything else you’d like, young master?"

"I don’t think so."

I let the seller take the brooch, the sword ornament, and the gemstone. While waiting, I began observing my surroundings. The atmosphere of the market in Fontis City wasn’t as bustling as I’d heard about Tarín City. The merchants offered their goods gently, not shouting to attract customers, and the customers who came also spoke softly. The seller serving us spoke that way too. Perhaps that was the characteristic of this city. They were as gentle as water, calm and peaceful, like the lake in this city. But even though they seemed peaceful, water could sometimes be dangerous. Isn’t there a saying, "Still waters run deep"? People like them could be very dangerous if disturbed.

But I was happy to be here. I didn’t have to worry about other people’s gazes and could enjoy my time walking around with Halilintar without any disturbances.

"Sorry to keep you waiting; here are your items."

I turned back to the stall we had visited. By then, Halilintar had already taken the package the seller handed him, and he had also paid for it.

I never realized shopping without spending your own money could be this enjoyable. I should bring Halilintar shopping more often. I asked the seller about the location of a bookstore in the city. He gave me directions to the best one, and I pulled Halilintar toward it. He had promised to buy me books, so he had to keep his word. Halilintar laughed as I tugged on his hand, saying I was like an excited child. Come on, I didn’t know when I’d get another chance to leave the palace, so I was making the most of it.

The bookstore, as the seller had said, was filled with all kinds of books. I loved it—so many interesting books with various covers. Ah, this place was beautiful.

"Oh! The second volume is out!" I picked up an orange-covered book from the shelf. It was the second volume of a novel I’d been reading. I loved the first one. It was a story about a young man who wanted to conquer the world. The author was amazing at portraying the characters, and the plot was so intriguing that it always left me curious. Not to mention the magical elements in it that made you want to dive into that world. Even though I was already living in a book.

"Do you like that story?"

"Yes! Maripos read it with me a few weeks ago. I’m so curious about what happens next. Will the protagonist gain the trust of the fairies and continue his journey, or will he sacrifice his only good friend to move forward? And then—" I stopped talking when I realized Halilintar was just watching me. Oh, it must be annoying to hear me ramble about the novel I was reading.

"Sorry. I got too excited. It must be annoying to listen to me talk like this."

"No, go on. I like seeing you like this. It’s been a long time."

Halilintar smiled, but for some reason, I felt he was sad. Especially his crimson eyes, which seemed to be reminiscing about memories that couldn’t be relived. Was it his memories with the original Taufan? I wished I had a bit of the original Taufan’s memories so I’d know how to comfort Halilintar.

To distract Halilintar from his sadness, I invited him to browse the bookstore, looking for other books and recommending a few to him. In the end, I only chose two books from the many in the store. There are still plenty of books in the palace I haven’t read yet. I should finish those first before asking for new ones.

Somehow, we ended up in the city square, sitting by the fountain and enjoying the view of Fontis City. It’s so beautiful. I think I’m starting to enjoy life as someone who’s entered a book.

“Taufan, I’ll be over there for a bit. Is it okay if you wait here?” Halilintar pointed to a bar. Wow… it seems like the people in this city love drinking so much that there’s a bar open in the middle of the day.

“Sure. Besides, I’m not a kid.”

Halilintar ruffled my hair and even whispered, “Such a kid,” before walking away.

I still find it hard to believe that people in Fontis City love drinking so much that bars are open during the day. Or maybe it’s just some of them. After all, I’ve often seen drunk people in the middle of the day in my world. Perhaps it’s a form of escape for some of the city’s residents. But they must be peaceful drunks since I haven’t seen anyone causing trouble yet.

Where else should we go? I’ve seen so much of Fontis City, even bought a few things too. Maybe returning to the inn would be a good idea. I’m sure Maripos has finished all his errands for the day. We could read together. I’d finish the nonsensical novel I started last night with him. At least the character named Joanne is entertaining in an otherwise annoying story.

Oh, right. I remembered some things my brother told me about The True Heir of Ignisia. Halilintar is supposed to have a fiancée. But he rejected his prospective bride on the very first day they met and earned the nickname “The Heartbreaker Prince.” My brother didn’t tell me why Halilintar refused the girl. Maybe he already has someone he loves? But as far as I know, the novel doesn’t have a romance genre. The True Heir of Ignisia is just a story about Halilintar’s journey to become a king. He does have some female friends along the way, but none of them manage to capture his heart. Even so, Halilintar is bound by palace rules. He’s of marrying age, and don’t nobles usually arrange marriages for their children when they’re still young?

If the story, which begins six years from now when Halilintar is 24, only starts addressing his engagement, isn’t that quite late? Has he been rejecting engagements all this time? But how is that possible? He’s the first prince and the strongest candidate to be king.

I can understand Taufan’s position. He’s a discarded prince. What noble would want to give their daughter to a prince with no future? Besides, he’s always sick and has a very frail body. Marrying him would only make his partner suffer. Gempa also prefers traveling to various places. He’d see a partner as a chain tying him to one spot, and I’m sure he wouldn’t like that. Unless his partner also loves traveling as much as he does.

I don’t know much about Blaze and Ice since I’ve never met them, but based on what I remember, Blaze is someone who loves war. Similar to Ignis. He’s always on the battlefield and loves challenging people to fight him. Meanwhile, Ice… he’s very reserved. But as far as I know, he’s just like Blaze, always on the battlefield, only returning when absolutely necessary.

Duri… ah, he’s a romantic. Maybe when he grows up, he’ll meet someone he likes. As for Solar, he’s entirely focused on his studies. I feel like if he weren’t involved in the fight for the throne, Solar would just want to spend his time in the library, reading books all day or conducting various research. Maybe he’d travel to meet other scholars and learn new things.

There must be a reason Halilintar keeps rejecting engagements and defying tradition.

“So pretty.”

Huh?

I snapped out of my thoughts because of that voice. In front of me stood a little girl with fiery red hair. She looked directly into my eyes, her gaze sparkling. It reminded me of Duri when I made a new cake for him. I glanced left and right to find the girl’s parents, but I didn’t see any adults who looked like her or seemed to be searching for her.

“So pretty!”

Huh?

“Me?” I pointed at myself, and the girl nodded. She smiled widely, showing two missing upper teeth. It made me laugh; she’s so cute.

“Thank you. What’s your name?”

“Lilia.”

“What a beautiful name. I’m Taufan.”

“Oh! Like the prince’s name!”

I just smiled at her. I was surprised she knew about Taufan and still smiled. Lilia, the little girl, sat beside me. She said she loves watching the fountain behind us. I can understand why she likes it; it really is beautiful.

“Brother, your eyes are so pretty. Like the gemstone of the God Vaser!”

I blinked quickly. I know Taufan has blue eyes that sparkle in the light. They’re very beautiful, like they’re made of shimmering gemstones. But are they really that pretty, or is it just because Lilia is a child and drawn to shiny things? Besides, comparing Taufan’s eyes to the gemstone of the God Vaser feels… odd. After all, Taufan is blessed by Vint, the Goddess of Wind.

“Haha… really?”

“Uh-huh! So pretty!”

Well, it's just the words of a child. I stroking Lilia's hair and letting her tell me about her daily life while we waited for Halilintar. This girl must be around the same age as Duri, if not younger. Listening to her talk like this reminded me of Duri, and I missed that kid a little. Maybe I should bake something delicious once I get back to the palace.

Lilia was still chatting when an explosion suddenly echoed. The ground shook, and I instinctively grabbed Lilia to protect her. She clung to me tightly, her body trembling in fear. In the distance, smoke began to rise. The townsfolk started shouting something. At that moment, I could only stare at the bar Halilintar had entered earlier. Where was he?

"Brother, I’m scared," Lilia said, clutching my clothes tightly. Her eyes were watery, and her lips trembled. I bent down to look at her, offering the best reassuring smile I could manage while stroking her hair.

"Don’t be afraid; everything will be okay."

Honestly, those were just empty words because I wasn’t sure if everything would be okay or not. When I lifted my head again, two fireballs came hurtling toward Lilia and me. Without thinking, I raised my hand, bracing myself for excruciating pain. But it never came. When I opened my eyes—which I hadn’t realized I’d closed—I found myself still standing in the same spot with Lilia, but now surrounded by some sort of translucent shield with a bluish hue.

Did... did I do this?!

No, that didn’t matter. What mattered now was finding a safe place. I quickly picked Lilia up and ran away from there. Just seconds after we left the fountain, a body flew and crashed into it, shattering it completely. What shocked me more was that the person who hit the fountain wasn’t dead and still managed to stand. It was a teenage boy with brown hair and sun-kissed skin. In his hand, flames flickered like something out of a fantasy movie.

Then someone else appeared—a figure dressed entirely in black with their face concealed by a mask. They held a sword in their hand. They looked strong and dangerous. I could tell, especially when their gaze landed on me. I shivered in fear, taking a step back and holding Lilia tighter.

When the figure in black lunged toward me, the boy with the flames jumped in and stopped them. They began to fight. I took the opportunity to escape with Lilia. I kept running but was stopped when something was thrown in my direction. Fortunately, I managed to dodge it.

It was the flame-wielding boy. He didn’t look good. His body was covered in wounds and blood. At that moment, I had no idea what was going on between him and the figure in black, but I knew nothing good would come from getting involved. So I intended to ignore the injured boy, even though my conscience screamed at me to help him. However, when I turned to run in another direction, I found myself face-to-face with the figure in black.

"Ah... What do we have here? A delicate flower strayed from his prince."

Honestly, I hated that nickname. Why did every villain I met always call me a flower? Do I look like I have petals and leaves? That’s something I’ll ponder later—if I survive this encounter.

I took slow steps backward, trying to create distance between myself and the person in front of me. When they lunged at me, I resigned myself to my fate, knowing I wouldn’t be able to escape or fight back. But no pain came. I had braced myself for unbearable agony before death, yet when I opened my eyes—again, without realizing I’d closed them—I saw Halilintar standing in front of me. He held a sword with a black and red blade in his hand. Sparks of electricity flickered from his body.

Halilintar glanced back at me, then his eyes shifted to the injured boy lying on the ground not far from us. At that moment, I saw frustration in Halilintar’s eyes, though I didn’t know why. I decided to ignore it for now.

I didn’t need to be told to run. As soon as Halilintar refocused on the figure in black, I rushed away with Lilia. I set the girl down once we were far enough from the battle. I told her to find a safe place and stay there until the situation calmed down. Lilia hesitated for a moment but eventually did as I said. Once I saw her leave, I turned back. I returned to where Halilintar was fighting—not to watch the fight; I wasn’t foolish enough to risk my life for that. I knew Halilintar was strong; he wasn’t called Ignisia’s swordmaster for nothing. So I was confident he could defeat the figure in black.

My reason for returning was the injured boy still lying on the ground. When I approached him, he was struggling to get up, his body trembling.

He looked shocked to see me, probably because he’d seen me and Lilia run earlier. He likely hadn’t expected me to come back. I knelt in front of him, extending my hand to help him up. The boy still looked surprised, but he accepted my help. His body was quite heavy—not like Lilia, who was still a child. But I knew I could carry him. I’d carried Maripos through the forest alone; there was no way I couldn’t carry this boy to safety. Supporting him slowed us down too much, so I knelt in front of him, telling him to climb onto my back.

"Why are you here?" the boy asked after we’d walked far enough from the battle.

"Did you want me to leave you there while they fought with inhuman powers?"

The boy snorted. I would’ve been offended if my life weren’t on the line.

"That’s not what I meant. I mean, why are you in this city?"

"I’m just a tourist passing through."

"Tourist?"

I could hear the disbelief in the boy's voice. But I chose not to comment on it. Whether he believed me or not was up to him. The fact remained that I had just saved his life from the inhuman battle now raging between Halilintar and whoever that person in black was.

"Yes. Now stay quiet and let me think about where to take us to stay safe."

I was certain I heard a scoff, but thankfully, the boy didn’t say anything else. For now, it was better to find a safe place to hide. My best option was to return to the inn. Unfortunately, the streets of this city looked so similar that I was completely lost. I had no idea which way to go to get back to the inn.

"Go over there." The boy on my back suddenly spoke, pointing toward a building that looked like it had been abandoned for a long time. The old structure appeared ready to collapse at any moment, making me skeptical of the boy’s suggestion.

"Are you sure?"

"Just go there. Do you know any other safe place?"

I rolled my eyes at the irritation in his tone. Even so, I did as he said. The closer I got to the building, the more I could see how decrepit it truly was. I couldn’t believe this place would keep us safe. If the person in black didn’t end up killing us, then this crumbling building certainly would! It looked like it would fall apart the moment we stepped inside!

I set the boy down from my back to open the wooden door, which appeared to be rotting. Contrary to my expectation that it would break apart the moment I touched it, the door was surprisingly sturdy—so much so that I had to exert a lot of effort to open it. The door creaked loudly as it swung open, probably because its hinges were rusted. I helped the boy—whose name I still didn’t know—into the building and then closed the door behind us.

The interior of the building was pitch dark, with the only light coming from a broken window without curtains. Then, the boy I had rescued lit a flame in his hand. The glow from the fire illuminated the room, though not enough to see clearly. At least we could make out the state of the place. It seemed to be an abandoned mansion. From the outside, it hadn’t looked like one. The room we entered appeared to be a living room or something similar. There were many overturned chairs and tables, a dusty crystal chandelier shattered on the floor, numerous paintings on the walls that were damaged either by age or something else, but other than that, the room was nearly empty. Looters must have taken most of the valuables after the place was abandoned. Judging by how chaotic it was, I guessed the owners had left in a hurry, without time to pack their belongings. I also noticed some dark stains on the peeling white walls. They looked like old, dried bloodstains. This must have been the site of a murder!

Wait! Did I just rescue a murderer?!

I turned around cautiously, my heart pounding in anticipation. The boy I had saved earlier was now lying on one of the sofas that seemed intact despite being covered in dust. Somehow, he had made the flame float in the middle of the room to serve as a light source. I hadn’t let my guard down around him, even though he now looked helpless. If he wasn’t a murderer, he could still be a thief, and this might be his hideout! Besides, his disheveled appearance only made me more suspicious. Was I going to be killed for discovering his hiding place?! But he was the one who told me to come here!

"Ugh!" The sound startled me. I saw the boy, who had been lying on the sofa, move slightly but then stop. He clutched his stomach, reminding me that his condition was far from good.

Damn my conscience.

I could only sigh and approach him. He seemed wary—though I was the one who should have been cautious—as I drew closer. I didn’t say anything to him, just reached into my pocket and handed him a small bottle filled with a silvery liquid.

"What’s this?"

"Moonflower extract[1] and fairy tears[2]."

[1] Moonflower is a magical plant created for this story. Its bloom is round, silvery white with yellow stamens hanging out, and it only grows under moonlight, blooming on a full moon. It has many health benefits, one of which is healing wounds.

[2] Fairy tears are an ingredient used in potions for healing wounds. They are often combined with Moonflower to maximize their effectiveness.

"Wait—What?!"

"I said, it’s Moonflower extract and fairy tears."

"I heard you the first time, but what I meant is, how can you give something so valuable away just like that? Do you even know who I am?"  

Huh? What is he talking about? I have plenty of these in the Sunset Palace Warehouse. There are dozens of similar small bottles and even more of other kinds. Besides, the one I gave him was one of the gifts from Count Balakung. Ever since that bandit attack incident, Maripos has insisted that I always carry a healing potion. He said you never know when you’ll get hurt. Once again, he’s right. Maripos really does suit being a mother. I should start calling him Mother Maripos. It sounds fitting.  

“I gave it to you because you’re injured. Why? Are you some kind of thief who doesn’t like accepting charity?”  

The teenager threw something at me—I didn’t even notice what it was—but I managed to dodge it. This brat! I should’ve just left him there! Ah, no. My conscience would torment me if I left him. I’m just too kind, apparently.  

The teenager didn’t protest anymore. He opened the bottle and drank its contents.  

“What’s your name, and why was that person chasing you?” I decided to pry for some information from the teenager.  

He stared at me for a moment, then at the small bottle in his hand. “Az—Ace. My name’s Ace. I don’t even know who that person is. They just appeared out of nowhere and started attacking me.”  

“Are you sure you didn’t commit some crime that made them hold a grudge against you?”  

“Hey! Everyone loves me, and it’s not my fault if they doesn’t like me.”  

Ugh, teenage logic. I just shrugged. I fixed the position of one of the chairs, dusted it off, and sat down. Maripos would be furious if he saw me showing up with dirty clothes, but he’d have to blame it all on Halilintar. He’s the one who dragged me on this trip, not the other way around.  

“Are you really just a tourist in this city?”  

“What, did you expect me to be? A prince looking for his true love?”  

The teenager—Ace—gave me an unimpressed look. But then, he burst out laughing. The way he laughed felt oddly familiar, as if I’d met him somewhere before. Or maybe someone in my world used to laugh just like him? But I don’t recognize his face or voice at all. How strange.  

“In that case, you’re just an unlucky tourist who got involved in all of this.”  

I muttered, “I know,” not expecting Ace to hear me. The teenager then started taking off his clothes, probably to check his wounds. Meanwhile, I began thinking about Halilintar and Lilia. I hope they’re okay. There’s nothing I can do to help Halilintar right now other than hide. I wish I could’ve brought Lilia to hide with me, but bringing one person was already difficult enough—how could I possibly bring two? I’m not as strong as Halilintar or Commander Kaika. Just being able to protect myself is already a miracle.  

Am I cursed with Taufan’s bad luck or something?  

Chapter Text

Boboiboy Fanfiction

©  Boboiboy | Animonsta Studio

A/N: The entire story is purely fictional, and the author does not profit from writing this story. If there are any similarities in ideas, character names, or locations, they are purely coincidental.

≫ ──── ≪•◦ ❈ ◦•≫ ──── ≪

"How do you know this place is safe?"  

Ace glanced at me for a moment, then shifted his gaze to the corner of the room that wasn’t illuminated by the firelight. The teenager’s expression suddenly appeared filled with sadness. Did I ask something wrong?  

"This... this was my hideout with my brother."  

"Was? What happened to your brother?" Was his brother dead?  

Ace sighed, "Nothing happened to him. If you're thinking he's dead, get that thought out of your head." I grinned at his response. This kid could read my mind. "We used to come to this city often. He was the one who first found this place, and we often hid here until Father came looking for us."  

"Oh? You're not a native of Fontis City?"  

"No, but I often come to this city."  

"Did you always come with your parents?"  

"No, I came alone."  

A teenager traveling alone to another city. I shook my head slightly; this kid’s parents were very irresponsible. But maybe it was because he came from a nearby town, and since the people of Fontis City were peaceful, his parents trusted nothing would happen to him if he came here. Maybe his parents were merchants, which was why they often came to this place.  

"Then, how did this place become a safe place? This building looks very old, as if it’s been abandoned for decades and could collapse at any moment."  

"There’s a protective spell on this building that shields it from outside attacks."  

Ah... no wonder he told me to bring him here. Well, that’s a relief if that’s the case.

I didn’t know how much time we spent here, but just as I was about to doze off, I heard a loud bang. It startled me and made me jump up. Ace did the same. I became worried—had we been found? Was it those men in black again? I looked at Ace; his expression looked sour. More like he was annoyed rather than worried. 

"Are you sure this place is safe?"  

Ace sighed, "Mostly."  

Mostly?! And you’re telling me this now?!  

The sound of another explosion echoed, making me even more anxious. However, Ace didn’t look worried. He ruffled his hair, seemingly frustrated. Without saying anything, he stood up and walked toward the door. I called out to stop him, but unfortunately, he didn’t listen. My only choice now was to hide and watch what the teenager was doing. Ace opened the door far more easily than I had earlier—maybe because he was used to it, having come to this place often. As soon as the door opened, a red flash darted into the room and destroyed a wall. Ace ducked to avoid it, looking completely unfazed by the attack, as if he had experienced it many times before. That’s when I saw Halilintar standing at the doorway. He looked fine, except his clothes were slightly dirty, and his hair was messy.  

"What do you think you’re doing here?!" Halilintar hissed as he roughly grabbed Ace’s arm. Did they know each other?  

I was utterly shocked when Ace yanked his arm away from Halilintar, even clicking his tongue and turning his face away. What?! Who exactly was Ace to be able to do that to the First Prince of Ignisia?! Was he a noble? But what noble would dare act that way toward the Prince?! If he did that to me, I’d understand. But this was Halilintar! The First Prince of Ignisia and one of the strongest candidates for the throne!  

"Don’t think you’ll get away from this," Halilintar said. Ugh, he sounded furious. I hoped he wasn’t mad at me too.  

Halilintar stepped into the room, passing by Ace, who was still standing by the door. I truly didn’t know what to say or do, so I just stood still in my place until Halilintar approached me. The angry expression on his face slowly faded, replaced by the familiar look of concern I had seen many times before. He didn’t say anything, just pulled me into a hug. His body trembled, probably from exhaustion after fighting those person in black earlier.  

"I’m sorry."  

"It’s not your fault. You didn’t know this would happen."  

"Even so, I shouldn’t have left you like that."  

I thought Halilintar was about to cry. He became so emotional when it came to my well-being. I glanced at Ace, who was staring at us. His gaze seemed complicated. I saw sadness, envy, and anger. He was probably thinking about his brother. I didn’t know what had happened between them, but maybe they had a complicated relationship right now. I wanted to call out to him, but Ace had already turned around and walked away.  

"Your Highness, do you know Ace?" I pushed Halilintar away.  

"Ace?"  

"The boy just now."  

Strangely, Halilintar fell silent. He had acted like he knew Ace earlier, so why did he now seem unsure of what to say?  

"Yes. Let’s say I do."  

"Will he be okay?"  

"He will be. You should worry about yourself. We’re going back to the inn now."  

I didn’t protest Halilintar’s words. Honestly, I was tired of all this. I wanted to ask Halilintar about the person in black, but I decided to do it later. I had just started enjoying my time wandering around this world—why did someone have to ruin it?  

I told Halilintar about Lilia, and he promised to check on the girl for me. I saw Ace as we were getting into the carriage. He was staring at me so intensely it almost felt like he wanted to bore a hole through my head. Strangely, when I waved at him, he looked surprised and turned his face away. Goodness, did I make someone hate me again?  

He seemed fine before Halilintar showed up. Maybe he was mad at Halilintar, and seeing me being close to him only made him direct his anger at me.  

Poor me.

...

Halilintar didn’t accompany me into the inn. He simply handed me over to Captain Fang and Maripos with a warning to keep an eye on me and call for a doctor, then left. His reason was that he had urgent matters to attend to. He did hand me a bundle containing the items we bought today and ruffled my hair before leaving, but his behavior was a bit strange. Perhaps the matter was truly urgent. I couldn’t force him to stay; after all, he is a prince who will one day become king. Of course, his responsibilities far outweigh mine, as I am merely a castaway prince.  

This time, Captain Fang didn’t need to carry me to reach my room. I was fine and could walk on my own, though I did have to stop after climbing a few steps to catch my breath—who designed this building anyway?!  

As I expected, Maripos scolded me upon seeing my dirty clothes. He probably thought I had been rolling in the dirt while out with Halilintar. I told him about Lilia, the person in black, and Ace. Maripos had such an expressive face; it was fascinating to observe his reactions. When I talked about Lilia, he listened attentively and even smiled when I shared her antics. His expression turned horrified and fearful when I mentioned the person in black I encountered today. He muttered something about Halilintar’s recklessness—apparently, Maripos had the nerve to criticize Halilintar! Then his expression changed again when I talked about Ace. He looked confused, as if he knew something and didn’t at the same time.  

“Even though the end of our outing wasn’t pleasant, I had a lot of fun today.”  

“I’m glad to hear that, Your Highness.”  

“Right! I have something for you!”  

“For me?”  

“Yes!” I reached for the bundle Halilintar had handed me. It was impressive how he managed to keep it intact while fighting. Perhaps he had left it somewhere for safekeeping.  

I pulled out two books from the bundle, followed by a silver brooch with a pale purple gemstone.  

“This is for you. The color reminded me of your eyes.”  

Maripos froze. He just stared at the brooch I placed in his hand. Did he not like it? Maybe I should’ve chosen a brighter one. As I debated whether to take the brooch back, Maripos finally looked at me. His eyes were wet, and tears slowly trickled down his cheeks. Why was he crying?! Did I give him the wrong gift? Did he hate it?  

“Maripos, I apolo—”  

“Your Highness, I will treasure this with my life,” Maripos said with determination.  

Huh?  

“What? That’s too much. It’s just a brooch.”  

“No. It’s more than that. It’s a gift from you, Your Highness. This is the most precious thing I own.”  

Really? But I just bought it at the market, and it wasn’t expensive. What made Maripos so happy about receiving the brooch? People’s thoughts really do vary.  

Halilintar returned later that night. I was still reading when he sneaked into my room. He seemed surprised to find me still awake and asked about it. I showed him the book I’d been reading, and after that, Halilintar fell silent. He sat on one of the sofas in the room, seemingly lost in thought. Did he come here just to think? Driven by curiosity, I set aside the book I’d been reading and approached him.  

“Is something bothering you, Your Highness?”  

“Hm? Oh, I’m just thinking a little.”  

Halilintar didn’t seem inclined to share his thoughts. I decided to let him think; maybe it was something so complex that it left him frustrated and distressed. I picked up the book I’d been reading, sat beside him, and leaned against him. I remembered my mother saying that even though my eldest brother appeared strong and capable of bearing anything, he needed someone to support him. I hadn’t done anything for him in my world, but I hoped I could help support Halilintar in this one.  

I might not have any power, but I hope Halilintar knows that I will always be by his side.  

Halilintar rested his head on mine, and we sat in silence for several minutes. I started to feel sleepy, but I forced my eyes to stay open and continued reading. Even so, it was hard to focus. I had read the same sentence repeatedly and still didn’t understand it. Perhaps I should go to sleep now.

"Taufan."

"Hm?"

"I... want to ask you something."

I tried my best to stay awake, blinking repeatedly in hopes it would help. It clearly didn’t, but I refused to give in. At the very least, I had to stay awake to hear Halilintar’s question. I prayed my mind was still sharp enough to give him an answer.

"Let’s say person A has two friends. He loves both of them very much. But as a human, A has a favorite. He loves B more than C. One day, C makes a serious mistake, putting B in danger. A is angry with C for endangering their friend. However, C blames it all on A. A is at fault for favoring one over the other, for not giving his love equally. What do you think about C’s perspective?"

Ah, this is a common issue in relationships involving more than two people. Honestly, I don’t know the perfect answer to this problem. It’s true that as a human, A will likely have a favorite. He wouldn’t be able to distribute his love equally. But that doesn’t mean C has no right to feel hurt or upset about it. Unfortunately, that doesn’t justify C’s actions toward B either.

"I can’t give you a definitive answer, Your Highness."

"That’s okay. I just want to hear your perspective."

"Maybe... C has a point."

"You mean, A is the one at fault here?"

"Not exactly. But C must have felt very lonely because A only paid attention to B. He also wants to be loved and cherished like that. He must have felt isolated, neglected. Perhaps he didn’t mean to endanger B; maybe he was just trying to get A’s attention. He wanted A to see him too. Blaming it all on A isn’t entirely fair, but C’s jealousy isn’t baseless either."

"Then what should A do?"

"Loving two people equally is difficult. Even parents often have a favorite child. But that doesn’t mean the love they give is any less. A just needs to show C that he loves him too. That C is just as important to him as B."

Halilintar seemed to ponder my words seriously. I didn’t know who he was referring to in his story, though I suspected A was him. Only he knew who B and C were.

"Thank you, Taufan."

I could only give him a thumbs-up, the drowsiness overtaking me. I wasn’t sure if Halilintar said anything else or if I just imagined it. I was certain I fell asleep while leaning on Halilintar, but when I woke up in the morning, I was already in bed. Halilintar must have carried me here.

Maripos was in the room when I woke up. In fact, he was the reason I woke up. He opened the curtains, letting in the blinding sunlight that disrupted my sleep, and spoke loudly and cheerfully to wake me up. He was always like this.

Still very sleepy, I noticed that besides the book I had been reading last night, there was a note and two candies on the bedside table. I picked them up, recognizing Halilintar’s neat and precise handwriting. The note contained an apology from Halilintar for not being able to join me for breakfast and for being absent from the inn until midday. He mentioned having urgent matters to attend to but promised to return so we could continue our journey to the palace. Ah, perhaps his unresolved issues from yesterday.

"Maripos, can we go to the city today?"

"I don’t think that’s a good idea, Your Highness."

"Why not?"

"Didn’t you say you were attacked by an unknown person yesterday? How do you expect me to let you go to the city again after all that? Besides, Prince Halilintar instructed me to keep an eye on you."

"Actually, I was just inadvertently caught up in someone else’s problem," I tried to clarify. It was clear that I wasn’t the original target of the person in black. He attacked Ace, and I was certain he didn’t even know I was in the city. I wasn’t sure why he suddenly turned to attack me. "There was a little girl involved. She got caught up in it by accident, and I want to make sure she’s okay."

Maripos looked like he wanted to argue with me. But then he gave a weak smile, seeming to concede even though I wouldn’t have forced the issue if he had forbidden it. Well, maybe I would’ve been a little stubborn, but I truly wouldn’t have recklessly insisted if Maripos thought it wasn’t safe for me.

"I will inform Fang and Commander Kaika to escort you, Your Highness. Prince Halilintar already warned me about this, and he also instructed Commander Kaika to investigate the little girl you mentioned."

Ah... Halilintar truly knew me well enough to anticipate that I wouldn’t rest until I got some reassurance. I might need to give him something as thanks. Of course, besides the sword tassel I bought with his money. I’d ask Maripos about it later.

After breakfast, Captain Fang and Commander Kaika accompanied me to Lilia’s house. Maripos came along, of course; yesterday was an exception because he had other matters to attend to. Lilia’s house was fairly standard for Fontis City residents—a two-story home, not too big or small, indicating that her parents were well-off enough to support their family. Remembering the cheerful little girl, I knew she wasn’t neglected or mistreated by her parents. At least that was reassuring, knowing she came from a good family.

I knocked on the door, feeling slightly nervous for some reason. The one who opened the door was a woman who bore a striking resemblance to Lilia. She had long red hair, like flames, and honey-colored eyes. As I recalled, Lilia had pitch-black eyes, like ink. Perhaps she inherited them from her father.

The woman looked shocked to see me, bowing deeply, reminding me of Lady Ying when we first met.

"Greetings to His Highness, the Second Prince, Prince Taufan."

Oh? She recognized me immediately? I thought no one would recognize Taufan, considering he had been "exiled" to the Sunset Palace two years ago and hadn’t shown his face in public for five years. Apparently, he still had a bit of a reputation—not a good one, surely.

The woman, whom I suspected to be Lilia’s mother, remained bowing. Perhaps she was waiting for me to command her to stand upright. I still didn’t fully understand these etiquettes—good grief!

I cleared my throat, signaling her to straighten up. She complied, though she still seemed hesitant to meet my gaze, her expression turning to fear upon noticing Commander Kaika and the guards accompanying us—not my idea, truly! Maripos arranged all of it!

"I was told... that this is the home of Lilia..." What is Lilia's last name? I didn’t ask her at the time, and I also didn’t ask Maripos earlier. "A little girl with red hair and black eyes."

The fear on the woman’s face grew even more intense. She stepped back unconsciously, her expression looking as though the person standing before her was the Grim Reaper come to take her soul. Should I feel offended by this?

Then, so suddenly, the woman dropped to the ground. She prostrated herself before me, almost kissing my shoes if I hadn’t stepped back in shock.

"Your Highness... Lilia... she’s just a little girl. She doesn’t understand what she’s done. I beg you to forgive her mistakes. Please don’t punish her." The woman sounded utterly desperate. Her voice was as if it were being strangled by something.

W-what?! Why does she think I’ve come to punish Lilia?! I just wanted to make sure she’s okay! Do I look that terrifying? The staff at Count Balakung’s residence also looked terrified when I came to apologize to them.

I wanted to say something, but then I heard a high-pitched voice shout, "Fairy brother!"

From inside the house, I saw Lilia standing on the stairs. She looked fine, thankfully. The little girl ran down the stairs in a hurry—I was a bit worried she might trip and fall, but thankfully, she didn’t. Lilia didn’t notice the woman who had been prostrating on the ground now staring at her in horror. She even shook her head frantically at Lilia, as if telling her not to come out. But Lilia paid no attention; she rushed toward me, hugged me, and laughed, "Fairy brother, I’m so happy to see you again."

"Hello again, Lilia."

I heard a choking sound. At that moment, I glanced at the red-haired woman, who looked utterly terrified. Her face was pale, her body trembling, and it seemed she might faint if left like that for too long. I picked Lilia up into my arms, glanced at Maripos, and signaled him to handle the woman. I didn’t want the woman, who was likely Lilia’s mother, to faint in front of Lilia.

"Ma’am, I believe you need an explanation right now. If you don’t mind, may we come inside your house?"

Though still visibly shaken, the woman nodded and allowed us inside. Her house was simple but cozy and warm. Truly a home filled with a happy family. The furniture was modest, mostly made of wood. There were some toys scattered on the floor, a vase filled with freshly cut dahlias—I guessed from this morning—a worn-out old sofa, and a slightly wobbly wooden table with uneven legs. I sat on the old sofa, still holding Lilia in my arms. The woman didn’t dare speak, though she kept watching me and Lilia. She looked cautious, like a mother hen guarding her chick from a predator.

I felt a little sad being associated with the predator here, especially since Taufan’s face was soft and rather beautiful. It turned out that having a pretty face wasn’t enough to make you look harmless.

"I believe you are Mrs. Ione Green, Lilia Green’s mother."

The woman, whom I guessed correctly to be Lilia’s mother, turned to look at Maripos as he spoke. Her expression was still full of wariness, but she answered his words, "Yes. I am Lilia’s mother."

Maripos smiled—not a genuine smile, if you ask me. It was the kind of smile you see on people whose job requires dealing with others. A smile that was purely a formality.

"In that case, allow me to introduce myself. I am Maripos, the personal attendant of Prince Taufan. I assume you are already aware of the attack yesterday."

Mrs. Ione nodded stiffly. Maripos continued, undeterred by the woman’s discomfort, "At that time, your daughter, Lilia, was with Prince Taufan. Our presence here is not to accuse or punish your daughter. Prince Taufan merely wishes to ensure your daughter is safe. According to him, he inadvertently involved your daughter in a dangerous situation, which is why he has come to ensure her well-being and to apologize to you for endangering her."

Maripos explained so well. I doubted I could have done the same if I had been the one tasked with explaining. Even so, Mrs. Ione’s expression did not improve. In fact, it worsened. She looked utterly terrified when Maripos mentioned the apology. Honestly, I felt very sad now. Why do people see my apologies as something so frightening? Or is it that people in this world aren’t used to apologizing?

Lilia touched my face at that moment, surprising me. But I smiled, seeing her so focused. Her black irises sparkled like obsidian, truly beautiful if I had to say. She would grow up to be a lovely girl admired by many.

"Brother, I know you’re a fairy." Lilia whispered to me.

I knew she had been calling me 'Fairy' all this time, but I thought it was just a childlike whim. When we first met, she said my eyes looked like Vaser’s gem. I thought it was because Taufan’s appearance was indeed striking, which made her call me 'Fairy,' especially since today Maripos dressed me all in white, except for the soft blue satin shirt I wore under my robe. Even when I looked in the mirror earlier, I was surprised. I didn’t expect Taufan to look so beautiful when dressed properly. However, most of Taufan’s face resembled my own, and I knew I wasn’t attractive. It felt a little uncomfortable knowing this.

"Oh?"

"Yes! I saw your wings yesterday." Lilia was still whispering, though her voice was loud enough to be heard by everyone in the room.

Wings? I don’t have wings.

I was clearly confused by Lilia’s words, but the girl giggled as if she had just shared a big secret. Maybe she mistook the bluish glow from the shield that protected her at the time as wings—I doubted it, actually, but there wasn’t a more logical explanation. Mrs. Ione looked on the verge of fainting as Lilia laughed. I felt so guilty for causing her such distress just because of my selfish wish.

I set Lilia down; the little girl pouted but didn’t protest. I smiled at her and gave her the candy Maripos had prepared before we came here.

I looked at Mrs. Ione, who flinched when I did. It made me wonder just how terrifying Taufan seemed in the eyes of others. I chose to ignore it for now, still looking at her and smiling as sincerely as I could. "Mrs. Ione, I understand your discomfort with my presence in your home," I began. Mrs. Ione quickly said 'no' to deny my words, though her entire demeanor said otherwise. I wouldn’t hold it against her because I would also feel uncomfortable if many strangers came to my home. "Even so, as Maripos mentioned, my purpose in coming here is to check on your daughter, Lilia. I met her yesterday and unintentionally involved her in a dangerous situation. I even left her alone to return to your home instead of escorting her and ensuring her safety."

"You are not obligated to do this, Your Highness," Mrs. Ione said, her voice so small it was almost a squeak.

I smiled. "Lilia is my responsibility because I am much older than her, and she got involved in this because of me. At that time, due to certain circumstances, I couldn't take responsibility and left her behind."

I knew Taufan was only 16 years old and could not yet be considered an adult. But for heaven's sake! Lilia was much younger—she might be the same age as Duri or even younger. How could I have left her alone to escape at that time? While I had taken her away from the inhuman fight between Halilintar and the person in black, it was still utterly irresponsible. What if their fight had veered toward Lilia? What would I have done if she had gotten hurt? The horrifying truth was that even if I could go back in time, I wouldn't change my decision. I would still take Lilia to what I thought was a safe place and leave her to help Ace.

"I deeply regret this matter. I know this isn't something that can be atoned for just by giving a gift, as it concerns Lilia's life. But I sincerely hope you will accept this token from me." After saying this, I glanced at Maripos. The young man quickly took a neatly wrapped box from Captain Fang's hands and handed it to Mrs. Ione, who still looked stunned.

After saying a few more words to Mrs. Ione, I took my leave. Lilia tugged at my cloak and whined about the wings, but Mts Ione quickly picked her up and scolded her for being impolite. I had no words for that; I simply smiled and waved at Lilia, who pouted in her mother's arms. Mrs. Ione bowed deeply with Lilia in her embrace as I turned away—I knew because I glanced back.

The entire visit made me feel uneasy, but I said nothing. It was clear that both Maripos and Captain Fang noticed my mood, yet they too said nothing and merely followed me in silence.

I returned to the inn past midday. By then, Halilintar had already returned, and this time he was with a teenager who looked familiar. It was Ace! How and why he was here, I had no idea.

I wanted to speak with him, but Halilintar immediately pulled me aside and told me to get into the carriage I had been using. He said we would leave for the palace right away.

He didn't give me a chance to talk at all. His behavior suddenly became strange, though he still treated me very gently. He even gave me a cake before shutting the carriage door. Even so, I noticed that Halilintar's expression didn't look good. His smile didn't reach his eyes, and it was as if he was wearing a mask.

What happened? 

Did I do something wrong? 

Was he angry because I left the inn to visit Lilia?

I could only peek through the carriage window, watching him say something to Ace. Ace did not look happy—in fact, if I had to say, he looked angry. Judging by the sharpness of his gaze, he was furious.

Ace rode the same horse as Halilintar. He sat in front of Halilintar, much like how Halilintar had me ride with him before. His arms were crossed in front of his chest, resembling a child sulking. Halilintar, on the other hand, seemed indifferent to Ace's behavior, as if he was used to dealing with temperamental kids.

I was utterly confused. Who exactly was Ace? How could he sit on the same horse as Halilintar like that? As far as I knew, Halilintar was sensitive and disliked physical contact with others, except for those he cared about. So far, I had only seen him allow Duri and me to touch him. Was Ace one of Taufan's siblings? Yet his face looked so different, and as far as I knew, there was no prince named Ace. Or perhaps he was a relative. I wasn't sure.

"Maripos... do you know that boy?"

Maripos stared at me for a moment before shaking his head. "I am not sure, Your Highness."

Why did Maripos give such an ambiguous answer?

I was genuinely curious now, but people often say that curiosity can lead to danger. There's a saying, 'Curiosity killed the cat,' and after experiencing two horrifying incidents, I didn't want to get involved in anything life-threatening again. I chose to keep my mouth shut and suppress my curiosity.

On this journey, Halilintar did not ride alongside my carriage. He stayed ahead, accompanied by Commander Kaika. Captain Fang was the one riding beside my carriage.

Why was Halilintar acting so distant? He left without saying anything this morning, and upon returning, he treated me like this. What had I done to make him behave this way?

"Do you wish to talk about it, Your Highness?" Captain Fang asked.

Perhaps he pitied me for being so quiet, as I usually had plenty of stories to share during our travels.

I gave him a small smile. "No, I have nothing to say."

I saw Captain Fang nod, say something to the soldier behind him, and then guide his horse somewhere—I didn’t know where. I was truly in a foul mood and had no intention of observing others. Maripos had tried to lift my spirits by suggesting we read a book together, but I wasn't in the mood for anything. I just wanted to lie down and wrap myself in a blanket.

Then, I heard a knock on the side of the carriage. Maripos pulled back the curtain, which I hadn’t even noticed he'd drawn, revealing Captain Fang, who looked very serious.

"What is it?" I heard Maripos ask.

At that moment, I saw Captain Fang extend his hand. He was holding a small bouquet of wildflowers, neatly wrapped in a simple white handkerchief.

Oh!

I quickly moved closer to the window, extending my hand out, and let Captain Fang place the flowers in my hand. I recognized some of them—the yarrow flower and blue cornflowers—I had asked Count Balakung about them at his residence. These were the same flowers Captain Fang had given me when I released Blue.

"I picked these flowers for you. I hope you like them, Your Highness," Captain Fang said.

I felt my lips curl into a smile. I chuckled slightly at Captain Fang’s gesture. He had given me flowers again, and his expression was just as stoic as before. Fortunately, he didn’t seem offended by my reaction. I smiled at him and thanked him, "Yes, I love them very much. Thank you, Captain."

I might have seemed like a girl who had just received flowers from her crush, but I didn’t care. Captain Fang gave me these flowers to cheer me up. It wasn’t the flowers that made me happy—it was the effort Captain Fang had made for me. The fact that he thought I was sad and decided to cheer me up truly lifted my spirits. He was genuinely a sweet young man, even though his demeanor sometimes resembled that of a walking block of ice.

Compared to before, when he first gave me flowers—he had merely placed them in my hand. Now, he carefully wrapped them in a handkerchief, likely noticing me do the same. This also proved that Captain Fang cared about me, despite his seemingly indifferent attitude.

I was glad to have another friend besides Maripos in this world.

Chapter Text

Boboiboy Fanfiction

©  Boboiboy | Animonsta Studio

A/N: The entire story is purely fictional, and the author does not profit from writing this story. If there are any similarities in ideas, character names, or locations, they are purely coincidental.

≫ ──── ≪•◦ ❈ ◦•≫ ──── ≪

We are getting closer to the Capital. Judging from the map Maripos brought, there are only three cities left before we reach the Capital. It will take two days, Maripos said, if we keep moving and only stop to rest during the day and night.

Today, we finally arrived in Tarín. This is a city I had always wanted to explore when I first left the palace. But now, I have no enthusiasm at all. It's true that my mood has improved thanks to Captain Fang and Maripos, but I still feel unmotivated. Halilintar had promised to take me around this city. He promised to take me to the most famous bookstore in town, but now his attitude toward me seems so distant. It's like he's trying to avoid me.

I still don’t know what I did wrong to make him act this way.

"Your Highness, don’t you want to step out of the carriage?"

I fiddled with the flower Captain Fang had given me earlier, not bothering to look at Maripos, who seemed to be trying to persuade me to leave the carriage. "No. Just let me know if we’re continuing the journey or staying in this city for the night."

I heard Maripos sigh. He might choose to give up this time. He should, because I’ve decided to be stubborn today.

"Fang is standing by the door if you change your mind," Maripos said before stepping out of the carriage. I paid him no attention at all; my focus was entirely on the flower in my hand.

I tried to think about something else. Like, how did Captain Fang find these flowers? Did he just pick any flowers he saw, or did he search for ones that suited me?

Captain Fang is quite the romantic, isn't he? I never would have guessed that someone as expressionless as him could have a romantic side. If he ever falls in love someday, I’m sure he’ll be even more romantic.

What about Maripos? Maybe he’d be someone overly protective, or perhaps he’d be very laid-back with his partner?

The thought amused me.

Yes, whoever ends up with them will be very lucky.

My daydream was interrupted by a knock on the carriage door. Ah, that must be Captain Fang. Maripos probably sent him to persuade me again after a while. Typical Maripos.

"I'm not in the mood to go out, Captain."

There were no more knocks after that. I picked up the book Maripos had left behind, trying to find the last page I had read. I think I got to the middle of the book—what page was that again?

"Is the book so interesting that you’ve forgotten about me?"

I will deny that I screamed like a girl. No, it wasn’t a scream. It was purely me being startled and shouting like any normal man would.

Standing at the open carriage door was Halilintar, grinning as usual when he teased me. I snorted at the sight of him, uninterested in whatever he wanted to do or talk about. He was the one who ignored me first, so it’s not my fault if I ignore him too, right? Better to focus on my book. Now, where was I? Still trying to find the last page I read, I think.

I was genuinely shocked when the book I had been holding was suddenly taken away. I hadn’t even realized he had entered the carriage and was now standing right in front of me!

"Let’s go for a walk, Taufan."

How dare Halilintar invite me for a walk after what happened in Fontis City! Moreover, how dare he act like nothing had happened before this! Halilintar, you’re shameless. Hmph! I’m still mad at you for acting cold and not explaining anything to me.

When I felt a pat on my head, I looked up and saw Halilintar giving me a small smile. "Let’s go for a walk, Taufan."

For some reason, I couldn’t refuse him like before. Halilintar’s smile as he said that... it made my heart ache. I didn’t know why, but I knew I didn’t want to see him like that. I’d rather see him grinning mischievously after teasing me than smiling so sadly like this.

Is all of this because of the original Taufan’s feelings?

It’s not the first or second time I’ve felt emotions from him. The remnants of his consciousness that still linger in this body sometimes influence me. For instance, when I first met Halilintar, I felt so sad, angry, scared, and happy all at the same time. It has greatly affected my decisions. Another example is when I met Duri. The despair and deep sorrow I felt when I looked into his green eyes were truly tormenting. I couldn’t even stand on my own two feet when I first met that boy; it felt like seeing a ghost from a painful past. Then there were memories of Halilintar and the original Taufan as children, which made me feel as though I was being choked and on the brink of death.

I suspect that the remnants of Taufan’s consciousness hold such complex emotions that I can only feel them in certain moments. As for Taufan’s memories, I think there needs to be a trigger to access them. Like when Halilintar kept repeating the phrase, "Don’t worry, Taufan. Brother is here," which I suspect was the trigger for the memory of their past promise to resurface.

Taufan is quite a complex character, it turns out. At first, when I entered his body, I thought he was just an unimportant side character, merely a prince discarded by his kingdom.

Yes, from the beginning, he was never ordinary, was he?

He, a discarded prince, managed to survive until the end of the novel. Meanwhile, Halilintar, the protagonist destined to be crowned king, ended up dying at the end.

Ah, I should have read that cursed novel so I wouldn't be so clueless about its contents.

"Don't daydream, Taufan."

Oh, right. I should be giving Halilintar an answer.

"Alright. But just for a while."

Halilintar's smile grew wider as he pulled me out of the carriage. I didn’t understand why he was in such a rush; I just followed him without saying anything. Once outside the carriage, I didn’t see Captain Fang. Even though Maripos said the young man would be waiting at the carriage door. Did Halilintar chase him away? It’s no secret that Halilintar seems to despise my personal guard. That’s because I’ve gone against him twice to defend my guard, who was about to be dismissed without any wrongdoing. Turns out Halilintar is still such a child.

"Where do you want to go?"

"I don’t know."

"Think about it first. Wait here for me."

After saying that, Halilintar ran off somewhere, leaving me standing in front of the carriage to decide where I wanted to go.

The Tarín City is a big city. According to Maripos, it’s one of the seven major cities in Ignisia. I still don’t quite understand the layout of this city, but I know many merchants come here. Perhaps the forest full of magical creatures east of the city—thank goodness we didn’t pass through there—is a factor that draws people here. Maripos and Captain Fang said parts of magical creatures are very valuable. For example, a creature called Libélula, which resembles a dragonfly from my world but emits light like a firefly and has a much smaller body than the dragonflies I know. According to books, these creatures are usually bred to be decorative lamps in wealthy homes—poor creatures. Their wings are also useful in various potions—I’m not very knowledgeable about this. However, Libélula caught in the wild are much more expensive than those bred in captivity.

A bustling city like this must have interesting places to visit. Too bad I didn’t ask Maripos about them earlier, as I was angry at Halilintar and had no intention of exploring the city. It would be a shame to only visit the market and library when there’s so much to see in a city like this.

"Why do I have to come too?!"

That shout startled me. I saw Ace, who looked angry, being dragged by Halilintar. Halilintar glared at him but said nothing. When Halilintar turned to me, he smiled warmly, "So, have you decided where you want to go?"

My eyes were still on Ace, who seemed reluctant to be here with us. "Um... I’m still unsure. Do you have any suggestions, Your Highness?"

"I promised to take you to the best bookstore in this city. How about we start there?"

"Hm? Ah... yes, alright."

I kept watching Halilintar and Ace. Halilintar was still holding Ace’s arm, seemingly to prevent the teenager from running away. Meanwhile, Ace kept grumbling as they walked. They looked similar for some reason, even though their faces were very different. I didn’t know why, but I felt somewhat familiar with Ace.

Who is this teenager?

He appeared out of nowhere and was attacked by someone who seemed very dangerous. Then Halilintar seemed to know him very well, although their relationship didn’t seem good. Even so, the way Halilintar treated Ace was very different from how he treated Captain Fang—whom he disliked intensely.

With Ace, Halilintar didn’t talk much, but he didn’t seem to hate him. He just acted like an annoyed older brother dealing with a mischievous younger sibling. Whereas with Captain Fang, he truly despised the young man who was the same age as him. Could this be because of the age difference between Captain Fang and Ace? It didn’t seem like it. There must be a logical reason behind Halilintar’s behavior; unfortunately, I haven’t found it yet.

Let’s focus on the present situation. The bookstore we arrived at wasn’t as big as the one in Fontis City. I was genuinely confused when I saw the small building that looked centuries old. Halilintar said this bookstore was the best in Tarín City. It had a wide variety of books and, more importantly, many first-edition manuscripts that couldn’t be found elsewhere. Although I was a bit skeptical at first, once I entered the place, I understood why this small, old-looking building was considered the best bookstore in Tarín City.

From the outside, it might look like a small, outdated building, but the interior was incredibly spacious. Books filled every corner, from left to right, top to bottom. The ceiling also seemed very high, painted in a dark blue to mimic the night sky. Many glowing crystals served as stars, comets, and various celestial objects. Halilintar said all of it was created using magic to make it as realistic as possible. The room’s vastness was also achieved through magic, allowing it to hold far more books than what was apparent from the outside.

There is a spiral wooden staircase in the middle of the room that connects to every level of the bookshelves. The lighting in the store comes from glowing crystals placed on each bookshelf. On one of the walls, right above the cashier’s desk, there is a round clock that looks very old and antique but still functions perfectly. I noticed that the books in this store are organized by their publication year, with the oldest ones on the topmost level and the newest ones on the lowest level. After that, they are further categorized by subject and then arranged alphabetically by title.

This place is far too grand for a bookstore. Even the library in the Main Palace isn’t as majestic as this. I wonder how many books this bookstore has and how many employees work here.

I’m not a bookworm—the reason I read so many books is simply that it’s the only source of entertainment for me in this world—but I truly love this place. A bookstore named Lucky Bookstore truly deserves the title of the best bookstore.

I quickly forgot my surroundings and began exploring the bookstore with great curiosity. This place is vastly different from the bookstores I’ve visited in Fontis City. There are so many kinds of books here! I went to the topmost level first, looking at the old books that are far older than Taufan. I carefully touched them, feeling the papers in my hands. Since when did I grow so fond of books?

What an extraordinary place.

If my youngest brother came to this place, I’m sure they wouldn’t want to leave. Ah, I miss him. I wish I could share all of this with him.

I shook my head to dispel my sadness. There’s no point in whining like that; I can’t go home yet. Even so, I made a promise in my heart to visit a bookstore with him once I return to my original world.

I walked up and down the stairs tirelessly, observing each shelf one by one. I admired every book I saw until I lost track of time. This place is utterly intoxicating.

An employee approached me, and we talked about many things regarding the books I saw and admired. Her knowledge was extensive, perhaps due to her job or her love for books. She gave me some interesting recommendations, helped me carry the books I chose, and explained many things to me.

When I finished browsing and selecting books, I realized I had been ignoring Halilintar and Ace all this time. I looked for them and found Ace asleep on one of the sofas near the cashier’s desk—I hadn’t even noticed the sofa’s presence—while Halilintar sat beside him, reading a book.

He closed the book as soon as he saw me approaching them, a bemused smile on his face as I apologized for losing track of time. It was similar to what he did when we visited the bookstore in Fontis City before.

Halilintar then called an employee, said something about shipping and other matters, and pulled out a round object that seemed to be made of gold with embossed symbols on it, resembling a badge. He placed it in the employee’s hand, allowing him to run to the cashier’s desk and write something on a piece of paper.

“What’s that?”

“A golden plaque bearing the royal emblem.”

“Um... can that pay for the books I bought?”

Halilintar laughed. “More or less, but that’s not exactly how it works. It’s a guarantee that the royal family will pay for the purchased goods. The bill for the items is sent to the royal treasury, and the treasury issues payment accordingly.”

Oh, the concept is similar to a credit card.

“What if someone counterfeits it to make the royal family pay?”

“They can’t. There’s a special magic used in its creation, so it’s impossible to forge. Moreover, only members of the royal family can possess it. If someone else has it, they’d most likely be accused of theft.”

“Can I have one too?”

At that moment, Halilintar smiled regretfully, as if apologizing to me. “Unfortunately, no.”

I fell silent, carefully considering Halilintar’s answer. Ah, of course. I had asked a very foolish question. Taufan is a ‘discarded’ prince, living in the Sunset Palace, where concubines and queens who have lost the King’s favor are exiled. How could he possibly be allowed to hold a golden plaque like Halilintar?

“However, our younger brothers don’t have one either,” Halilintar might have said that to comfort me. I just nodded. I didn’t really care about financial matters, to be honest. Maripos said that the finances in the Sunset Palace were always sufficient because Halilintar managed the funds allocated to my palace. Moreover, Maripos was the one handling the finances in the palace, and he was an honest and meticulous person. For me, a life where I could relax without having to worry about money was a life I greatly desired. So, I didn’t mind not having the golden plaque.

Not long after, the employee returned and handed the golden plaque back to Halilintar. He also mentioned that the books purchased would soon be delivered to the address Halilintar had provided.

“Where to next?” I asked Halilintar. The young man didn’t answer me immediately; he woke Ace—doing so gently, unlike how he handled Ace earlier—and allowed the teenager to gather his awareness.

“Where else would you like to go?”

“I don’t really know much about this city. I think it’s better to let Your Highness decide.”

I saw Halilintar nod, now holding Ace’s hand—not his arm as he had earlier—and we left Lucky Bookstore, accompanied by warm goodbyes from the bookstore staff. Ace still looked sleepy but walked at the same pace as Halilintar. From the way he walked, I could tell that Ace wasn’t an ordinary teenager. He walked like a noble who had received education about it his entire life. Compared to Halilintar, he still seemed a bit careless, but there was something about the teenager that would remind you of a nobleman.

Who is this child, really?

"Your Highness... I've been curious about something. Would Your Highness answer me if I asked?"

"And what is it you wish to ask?"

"Who is he?" I pointed at Ace.

Both Halilintar and Ace stopped. They both looked at me and then exchanged glances. It was as if they were communicating telepathically. I waited patiently for an answer to my question.

"Can I get out of this without answering?" That was Halilintar's response after a long silence.

I shrugged. "It is Your Highness's right to answer. I cannot force you."

Halilintar sighed, patting Ace on the shoulder before saying, "He’s a relative. That’s all I can tell you. If you want to know more, ask him. But don’t force him to answer."

Because of Halilintar’s words, I shifted my gaze to Ace. The teenager turned his face away as soon as I looked at him, pouting as if he didn’t want to say anything to me. I wanted so badly to press him for an answer, but Halilintar had told me not to force him.

If he’s a relative, from which side? And why does he seem to have a strained relationship with Halilintar? And why does he have to come with us on our journey back to the palace? It feels like my questions are only multiplying rather than decreasing.

We walked in silence for a while until I noticed there were more people now than before. Halilintar said we were heading to the town square to watch a performance on the final day of the Kite Festival.

Oh, I had forgotten about the festival.

The reason I left the palace in the first place was to attend the ceremony marking the start of the Kite Festival. It must have slipped my mind after spending time relaxing at the Wind Goddess Temple and the traumatic experience with the bandits.

I don’t know when the festival began or how long it lasts, but today is its final day. Halilintar said the festival in the capital is much grander than in Tarín City, but I’m not particularly curious about it. Being a prince cast aside by his own kingdom isn’t enjoyable, and going to a crowded place with my status feels like courting disaster. I recall how the villagers of Thaya pointed at the carriage I was riding in and approached it. There must be even more people in the capital who hate Taufan and might want to harm him.

So yeah, I’m not very interested in this festival.

However, Ace looked incredibly excited when Halilintar mentioned the festival. Even though I was still curious about the boy and slightly annoyed that he didn’t answer my question properly, I thought that after the attack he endured in Fontis City, Ace deserved to enjoy his time in Tarín City, just as I had in the bookstore earlier.

The Kite Festival, as the name suggests, featured countless kites flying in the air, even though the sun was nearly setting. Kites of various sizes, shapes, and colors. I even saw someone flying a fish-shaped kite earlier! There were also kites shaped like birds, butterflies, or just standard ones. There were so many people, countless stalls selling all sorts of goods, various games, and performances to enliven the festival. It was so similar to festivals in my original world!

Perhaps because Tarín City is a large city with a diverse population and beliefs, the festival could be held so grandly. In Fontis City, the Kite Festival wasn’t held because the majority of the population there are followers of Vaser. Meanwhile, in Count Balakung’s territory, most of the residents are followers of Gevix.

Ace darted around to every stall he found interesting—I didn’t expect Halilintar to let him go—even trying to fly a kite. I helped him by providing a gentle breeze so his kite could soar on the first try.

Watching Ace excitedly trying different games reminded me of my younger brothers when they were little when the distance between us hadn’t yet formed.

"Don’t you want to join in?"

I didn’t take my eyes off Ace, who was still thrilled about successfully flying his kite. "Probably not. I’m a bit tired. What about Your Highness? Don’t you want to join?"

"Maybe another time."

Halilintar’s response was far from satisfying, but I chose not to make an issue of it. We stood side by side, watching Ace as he tried to keep his kite flying. He was now competing with several kid who seemed to be his age to see whose kite could fly the highest.

No, I didn’t send wind to Ace’s kite to make it fly higher than the others. I really didn’t.

The sun had set by the time Ace finished playing—more accurately, was forced to stop by Halilintar. Ace still looked enthusiastic, tugging on Halilintar’s hand and whining to be allowed to play another game. Halilintar didn’t let him play another game but bought him a kite. He also managed to get Ace to sit quietly after buying him some candy.

Even though I had seen how Ace fought against adults, he was still a child. His age was probably around 12. He fell asleep when bored waiting for me to pick out books, got excited when he saw many games, competed with kids his age, and now sat contentedly eating his candy.

"Did you have fun today?"

I heard Halilintar ask Ace. I saw the two of them sitting quite close together, with Ace still holding Halilintar’s hand, even though he struggled to hold his food and kite with just one hand.

“Pretty happy.”

“That’s good to hear.”

They were very close. Their relationship had to be more than just relatives. But I really couldn’t figure out who Ace truly was. I had briefly guessed that he might be one of the princes I hadn’t met yet. However, I dismissed that guess because Ace didn’t look anything like Halilintar or Duri. He also wore very simple clothing, not silk like what I was wearing. His demeanor was strange too—he seemed both noble and commoner at the same time.

Maybe he was mentioned in the novel, but my brother didn’t tell me anything about him. For the umpteenth time, I regretted not reading that damn novel.

My focus on cursing the novel I didn’t read was broken when fireworks of various colors exploded in the night sky.

Oh.

I didn’t expect to see a fireworks display in this world.

There were various colors of fireworks bursting in the sky, and they even formed shapes before fading away. I was truly amazed by the fireworks in this world. They were so beautiful and mesmerizing.

Yeah, I guess all the trials I faced on this journey were slightly worth it now.

Chapter Text

Boboiboy Fanfiction

©  Boboiboy | Animonsta Studio

A/N: The entire story is purely fictional, and the author does not profit from writing this story. If there are any similarities in ideas, character names, or locations, they are purely coincidental.

≫ ──── ≪•◦ ❈ ◦•≫ ──── ≪

Finally, after a month away from the palace, I returned to the place I called home until I could return to my own world. Passing the Main Palace, many servants stood to welcome Halilintar—clearly not me. I merely glanced out from the carriage as Halilintar dismounted his horse with Ace. He handed Ace over to a woman dressed in a dark green gown, her gray hair a sign of her advancing age. Ace, the rebellious teenager who had been defiant all this time, looked so subdued when Halilintar handed him over to the woman. He even bowed his head, a stark contrast to the Ace I often saw holding his chin high with confidence.

I saw Halilintar say something to the woman in the dark green gown. She bowed to him, seemingly receiving an order. Then I saw Halilintar kneel in front of Ace. He placed his hands on Ace’s shoulders, seemingly saying something, and then embraced him. Ace did not return the hug, but I noticed his hand twitch as if to embrace Halilintar back. However, for some reason, he didn’t follow through.

Halilintar then stood, said a few more things to some of the servants there, and remained in place until the woman in the dark green gown and Ace entered the palace. He then mounted his horse again and followed my entourage to the Sunset Palace.

At this point, I was no longer surprised if Halilintar insisted on escorting me to my room. In fact, I’d be surprised if he didn’t.

The Sunset Palace was just as I remembered it when I left. Perhaps with the slight exception of the flowers in the garden, which seemed to have been replaced with new ones.

Papileon and several other servants came to greet me. They looked genuinely happy to see me step out of the carriage, some even in tears. I asked Papileon why they all looked like that. Her answer truly surprised me.

“We were so worried when we heard you were attacked by bandits, Your Highness. The news we received was that you were injured and unconscious. Seeing you standing before us like this, healthy and well, we are truly relieved.”

The servants standing behind Papileon nodded in agreement with her words. I felt deeply touched by their concern for me. How many times have I said that Taufan is truly fortunate to have people like them around him?

Those who had been waiting for me quickly helped the two servants who had traveled with me and the guards unload the belongings I had brought back. I no longer paid attention to them, knowing they would perform their duties well without my supervision.

Halilintar indeed escorted me to my room, though he didn’t linger as long as usual. He simply ensured I was safely inside before bidding me farewell. Of course, not without a slew of advice to rest and not stay up too late—I certainly couldn’t promise that. After ruffling my hair, Halilintar left. I didn’t see him off because he didn’t want me to. I could only watch from my balcony as Halilintar, along with Commander Kaika and his troops, departed from the Sunset Palace.

The journey I had experienced over the past month had truly been remarkable in its own way. Getting lost in the forest and trapped within some kind of barrier, attending the Layangara Ceremony and staying at the Wind Goddess Temple for a week, being attacked by bandits and nearly dying on the way back, meeting the peculiar but kind Count Balakung, going on outings with Halilintar and meeting Ace and Lilia, visiting a magical bookstore in the Tarín City with Halilintar and Ace, then attending the Kite Festival in that city, and now returning to the Sunset Palace, the place where it all began.

This journey was truly something.

But above all, I missed the peace of the Sunset Palace. It felt good to be back here.

...

A week has passed since I returned to the palace. Halilintar hasn’t visited me during that time. Based on what I heard from Duri, Halilintar has been busy with something. Many people have come to meet him as well. Duri, who eavesdropped on their conversations, said that Halilintar’s busyness is related to the bandits who attacked me.

Ah, right.

At that time, Halilintar said he would investigate the bandit attack once he returned to the palace. It turns out he’s actually doing it. Although I’m also curious about the matter, sometimes knowing too much isn’t a good thing.

I haven’t given the sword tassel to Halilintar yet. I’ll do it later. I plan to give it along with some handmade biscuits as a token of my gratitude for everything he’s done for me.

As for Duri, I’ve already given him his souvenir. When he came to the Sunset Palace to demand cakes since I hadn’t baked for him in a month, I immediately gave it to him. This made him ramble on about how thoughtful I was and how much he loved the gift I gave him. Even though it was just a cheap souvenir from the market that I didn’t even buy with my own money.

The books Halilintar bought for me in Tarín City arrived three days ago. I was absolutely thrilled when they arrived. It felt like the joy of receiving an online order after waiting for days.

Like my days before heading to the Wind Goddess’ Temple, I spent my time training my body, followed by reading or painting. Captain Fang has increased the intensity of my training. Now, in addition to running, push-ups and sit-ups have been added to my regimen. He said that since my physical condition has improved significantly, my training should be balanced. I honestly don’t complain, even though Captain Fang has become stricter during training. Maripos is still the same, worrying about everything, especially when Captain Fang explained the additional training regimen. However, he didn’t protest Captain Fang’s decision—which I’m grateful for.

Slowly but surely, I’ve started to feel that Taufan’s body is improving. I no longer struggle to run a lap, I no longer vomit or faint from exhaustion, and when I try to use Taufan’s power, I don’t pass out or cough up blood. Even Theron was amazed during my check-up, saying that I’m starting to recover. I truly see hope that this body can be rehabilitated. Maybe not as healthy as it once was, but no longer as weak as it used to be.

Now I want to try something new since my body is in much better shape.

“Captain, can you teach me swordsmanship?”

“I can, Your Highness. However, you will need permission from Maripos and Prince Halilintar.”

Ugh. Of course, I’d have to go through those two first. Convincing them is going to be troublesome. They have too many concerns about Taufan’s health. But that doesn’t mean I’ll give up on my decision to learn swordsmanship.

The recent bandit attack made me realize how dangerous this world is. I don’t want to just lament when people get hurt protecting me. I dislike that feeling of helplessness. I want to do something. At the very least, I want to protect myself so I’m not a burden to others. Besides, I’ve always been curious about swordsmanship after reading about it in novels or comics. Is it similar to fencing or kendo from my world? Or is it like secret ninja techniques?

I’ll find out once I start learning. For now, I have to convince Maripos first.

Convincing Maripos was relatively easy. He was fussy at first, but he quickly gave in if you looked at him with pleading eyes. That’s exactly what I did. I let Maripos ramble on about my safety and health while continuing to give him my best pleading look. After a while, he finally chose to relent. I cheered inwardly but hugged him and thanked him to console him. As a bonus, I got a loving pat from Maripos and sore cheeks from his pinches.

Now, it’s time to write a letter to convince Halilintar.

My letter was fairly simple. It started with a formal greeting, followed by asking about his well-being as a bit of small talk. I also shared my daily activities with him. After that, I stated the purpose of my letter and ended it with a closing remark.

I know a letter alone won’t be enough to convince Halilintar, but it’ll make him come to the Sunset Palace, and I can persuade him then.

I guessed correctly because that night, Halilintar actually came to the Sunset Palace. His expression clearly showed that he wasn’t pleased with the letter I sent. I had already prepared myself to receive a long lecture from Halilintar since sending that letter. I had even prepared arguments to convince him. He’d definitely say something about my health and things like that.

“Why didn’t you ask me to teach you, Taufan? I’m known as the best swordsman in Ignisia!”

Eh? What?

Wait a minute.

I hadn’t anticipated this at all. I didn’t expect him to come all the way here just to protest why I didn’t ask him to train me. Halilintar kept rambling about how he was the best choice if I wanted to learn swordsmanship, while I was still trying to process why he wasn’t scolding me for wanting to learn swordsmanship. I finally found my voice to stop Halilintar’s seemingly endless rant.

“Wait a moment, Your Highness. So you’re upset because I asked Captain Fang to train me instead of you?”

Halilintar’s expression darkened even more; he clearly harbored a strong dislike for Captain Fang. I’m sorry, Captain, you’ve become the target of Halilintar’s ire because of me. Ah, I’ll have to give something to my captain to make up for it.

"You should have asked me to teach you, Taufan. You've always been like this. Since we were young, you refused to learn swordsmanship with me, claiming your powers alone were enough to protect you. Then, when you finally decided to learn, you asked someone else instead of me. Is my title as the best swordsman in Ignisia not good enough for you?"

What is this? Why does it feel like I'm being scolded by a possessive boyfriend?

How should I deal with Halilintar when he's like this? If he’s angry because he’s worried about my health, I could assure him that I’ve recovered. If he’s saying I’m safe with all the guards stationed around me, I could tell him about the time when those bandits overpowered Maripos and I couldn’t do anything.

But this… I really don’t know how to respond.

"Um... Your Highness," I began hesitantly. What else should I say? Halilintar had already started glaring at me the moment I opened my mouth to speak. Has he always been this intimidating? Maybe I'm just unlucky. "I... I thought Your Highness wouldn’t approve of me learning swordsmanship."

"Why wouldn’t I approve? It’s one of the skills you should have learned as a prince from a young age," I pretended the crystal chandelier hanging from the ceiling was far more interesting than Halilintar’s words as he emphasized the word 'you.' It wasn’t me who didn’t want to learn swordsmanship as a child, thank you very much. That was the original Taufan. "And it’s the one thing where I’m more talented than you. Do you think I’d be angry to find out my little brother is learning it?"

"Um... yes?"

I spent all this time worrying that you wouldn’t approve! How unfortunate that all the words I had carefully prepared to face him vanished, without having the chance to use it.

Halilintar seemed like he was about to say something, but he closed his mouth and shook his head. He looked both sad and guilty. I didn’t understand that expression. He had that look far too often. I knew there must have been something that happened between Halilintar and the original Taufan in the past. Maybe that’s why Halilintar spoiled Taufan so much. Why couldn’t I get the original Taufan’s memories like the protagonists in transmigration novels?! Where’s the fairness in that?

"I didn’t ask Your Highness to teach me because Your Highness must have a lot of work to do."

"You think all of that is more important than you?"

Halilintar, I’m truly touched by how you prioritize me above everything else, but that’s not a good thing. Weren’t you the one who said that a good king is someone who prioritizes their people above family, lovers, and friends? How can you become a good king if you’re like this?

"I deeply appreciate Your Highness’s kindness in prioritizing me, but that’s not the right thing to do. Your Highness is the prince of this kingdom, the first prince of Ignisia. Even though Your Highness isn’t the Crown Prince, I know many people out there hope that you will become the King of Ignisia one day."

I watched as Halilintar’s expression slowly changed. His previously stubborn look now seemed as if he had realized something important. Even so, I could see the pain in his eyes. He was probably hurt because I rejected him, and I felt terrible about it. But my goal is to make him a king. If I make him appear weak as a candidate for the next king, how can I ever return to my own world?

"I want to learn swordsmanship just to protect myself. It’s not like I want to become the best or anything."

"I can assign more guards to your palace. You’ll be safe, Taufan."

I shook my head. "Your Highness, when I was attacked by those bandits, I felt something other than fear. I was angry at myself for only being able to tremble and hide while others got hurt because of me. When Maripos fell, I truly didn’t know what to do. I had a sword in my hand, but I didn’t know how to use it. They hit me, and I couldn’t fight back. I was completely helpless when they dragged me away. I felt utterly hopeless when they said they were going to kill Maripos, and I couldn’t do anything. I don’t want to be that weak anymore. At the very least, I want to be able to protect myself without sacrificing others."

Halilintar didn’t say anything. Instead, he held my hand and bowed his head. It was as if he was apologizing for the misfortunes that had befallen me, even though none of it was his fault. I also felt drops of water fall onto my hand—Halilintar might be crying after hearing my story. How many times have I made this young man cry? I feel like a jerk who keeps making women cry.

"Taufan… I’m sorry."

Why does Halilintar keep apologizing? None of the misfortunes that happened to me are his fault.

"I'm sorry."

I was utterly confused, but all I could do was try to comfort Halilintar. This time, he cried much longer, making me feel a sense of déjà vu. Back at Count Balakung's residence, I was the one crying, and he was the one comforting me. Now, our roles were reversed. Even so, the reason for Halilintar's tears remained unclear to me. He refused to talk, and I didn't know what to say.

Today's events were truly unique. Halilintar, who had initially come to scold me, ended up crying. If anyone else had witnessed this, they would probably say I was a cruel person for making the First Prince of Ignisia cry. That would be a terrible rumor, and I was grateful we were in the Sunset Palace at the moment.

Halilintar eventually calmed down after much effort on my part. He leaned on me—just as I would do every time I finished crying near him—his nose red and his eyes swollen. I found it amusing to see someone who always stood tall and proud now looking like a child who had just been scolded.

"I still can't accept that you chose someone else to teach you swordsmanship and not me."

Are we about to enter another emotional loop?

"Your Highness—"

"Let me speak, Taufan." Halilintar's voice was serious and firm. Even though he had just finished crying, how could he make himself sound so authoritative? Was this one of the effects of a protagonist's halo?

"But as you said, I am the First Prince of Ignisia. Your current status, though I despise it because I can't do anything about it, is far lower than mine. I would only cause more trouble for you if people knew I was teaching you swordsmanship."

I simply listened as Halilintar continued speaking. What he said was true. As a prince "discarded" by his kingdom, Taufan had been living in the shadows for the past two years. He didn't participate in any social activities like most nobles. He had long stopped showing his face in public and declined every invitation sent to him. In the archives, it was stated that he had shut himself off from the outside world, truly like someone exiled by society.

If word got out that he was being taught swordsmanship by Halilintar, what kind of rumors would spread? Most likely, none of them would be good. I could even guess that some would think I intended to join the succession battle. Just imagining it gave me a headache.

"Even though it feels heavy, I will agree to you learning swordsmanship with the person you chose. But tell me why you chose him and didn't ask me to find the best teacher for you. I could even bring in my former teacher to teach you if you asked."

"As I said, Your Highness, I just want the ability to protect myself. I think Captain Fang is enough for me. Moreover, he's the one who's been training me all this time, so he must know my condition well."

"I'm still not satisfied, but I'll let it go. Just tell me if you want to change teacher."

I could only give a dry laugh at Halilintar's words. In my heart, I knew I would never replace Captain Fang with anyone else. Well, at least I managed to get Halilintar's permission. With this, I could start learning swordsmanship, having secured approval from both Maripos and Halilintar.

I informed Captain Fang about this, and he said the training would start next week once he finished organizing the schedule and methods to train me. The issue of swordsmanship was resolved; now, all that remained was Taufan's powers.

I knew I shouldn't be greedy, but I couldn't help it. Seeing the whirl wind mark on my body becoming increasingly clear made me want to keep using Taufan's powers. I wanted to be able to control his powers. I didn't want his abilities to go to waste.

Taufan was a genius, the youngest wielder of wind powers to awaken the final stage of his abilities. He shouldn't stop there; he should develop his powers further. The strength within him was immense, and it would be a shame to let it go to waste. Besides, I knew his powers would be useful someday.

But who could teach me?

I could ask Aarav for help, but she must be busy. I couldn't force her to leave the Temple and come to the Kingdom just to teach me. She was the High Priestess, and I was just a discarded Prince. What about Miss Ying? She also had wind powers, didn't she? Ah, but she was so terrified the last time we met. If I asked her to teach me, she would probably faint from fear. I also considered Marchioness Kuputeri, but I had to cross her off the list. She didn't even respond to the King's summons, so how could she possibly respond to mine?

This made me wonder—could a spirit animal teach someone? They were manifestations of the gods' powers in the form of animal spirits. If Maripos's guess about the wings mark on my back was correct, did that mean I had formed a bond with a spirit animal? But how could I summon them? Was this information in any books?

I asked Maripos to fetch all the books in the Sunset Palace library about spirit animals. One of them had to discuss how to summon a spirit animal or at least explain the mark on my back.

When Maripos came back with the books, his expression said, "I know what you're planning, Your Highness," and it wasn't an expression I liked. But I wouldn't comment on it for now.

Some books did mention that when a person formed a bond with a spirit animal, a mark would appear on their body to represent that animal. For example, Gempa was said to have a bear claw mark on his arm and had a golden bear as his spirit animal. Hmm... since the mark on my back was a pair of wings, did that mean my spirit animal was a bird?

In a book titled "Things You Need to Know About Spirit Animals," it was explained that to summon a spirit animal, one must call their name. Wait! I didn't even know if I had formed a bond with a spirit animal—how could I possibly know their name?!

Why is it that whenever I get something so incredible, I also have to deal with such troublesome things like this?

The book doesn't explain whether a spirit animal can choose you without a test and without your knowledge. It only states that if you pass the test given by the spirit animal, they will tell you their name, thus forming a contract, and you'll receive a mark representing your bond on your body.

Damn. Just my luck.

And why did I suddenly get a pair of wings as a mark on my body?

Wait. Why am I only realizing this now?

The mark on my back is a pair of blue bird wings. The only blue bird I know is Blue. It also appeared after that whirlwind disappeared and helped me find the direction to Count Balakung's territory. However, when I regained consciousness, it was gone. At first, I thought it might have returned to the forest. Thinking about it now, it feels a bit odd. When we were at the Wind Goddess Temple, Blue stayed by my side even though the windows were wide open. It never flew beyond my sight and always stuck close to me. Even when I released it, it only flew away after I said goodbye to it. That bird is too smart to be just an ordinary bird!

Could it be that Blue is the spirit animal that formed a bond with me?

There’s always a possibility that it’s not, but let’s find out. I have nothing to lose anyway.

They said I need to call out the spirit animal’s name, right? I don’t know Blue’s real name; it only chirped at me, and I don’t speak bird language. The only name I know is the one I gave.

That should be fine, right?

Alright, let’s give it a try!

“Um... Blue...?”

I waited, but nothing happened. Maybe I got the tone wrong?

“Blue.”

Still, nothing happened.

“Blue.”

I tried raising my voice a little, but still, nothing.

“Blue.”

This time, I tried saying it softer than before, yet still, nothing happened. What went wrong?

I kept trying to call Blue with various tones. High, low, soft, loud, gentle, harsh—every way I knew until my throat hurt. Still, nothing happened. Blue didn’t appear before me.

Alright, so the name I gave isn’t enough to summon it.

Should I try guessing its real name?

No. That would be an endless task. Maybe I should just give up.

“Tch, sometimes you really lack fighting spirit, huh.”

A voice suddenly echoed, making me jump in shock. I scanned my surroundings warily. There was no one in the room except me. Maripos had already left after delivering the books. Was I hallucinating or something? Or could there be a ghost in this room?!

My hair stood on end, and my heart pounded rapidly. My hands felt cold from fear.

“Ma-Maripos.”

My voice came out as a squeak. No way anyone outside could hear me.

“You’re so pathetic. Be grateful that I like you so much.”

The voice spoke again. This time, it sounded annoyed. Did I somehow manage to upset a ghost? What should I do? No one ever taught me how to deal with an angry ghost!

"Say Vayuna."

Should I follow its instruction? If I don’t, will it get even angrier? Maripos, where are you when I’m being tormented by a ghost like this?

“Va-Vayuna…”

“Louder and with more conviction!”

I’m scared. I’m really scared. This ghost is so demanding. Maybe this is karma for always teasing my brother for being afraid of ghosts. Now, I’m the one being haunted by a pushy ghost.

“Vayuna!”

As soon as I finished saying what the ghost commanded, a blinding blue light appeared before me. I had to close my eyes because of how dazzling it was. In my heart, I wondered if the ghost was revealing itself. But is this really how ghosts appear? It’s so different from the horror movies I used to watch in my world.

After the blinding light faded, I hesitantly opened my eyes to look around. Please don’t let the ghost jump in front of my face.

But instead of a terrifying ghost, what I saw was a small figure resembling a five-year-old child. Even so, I knew it wasn’t human. She had metallic blue wings that shimmered under the sunlight streaming through the window. She wore a white chiton[1], and there was a yellow flower in her hair. Her hair was silver—like Maripos’s—and her eyes were a deep blue, resembling sapphires. Even though her form was different, I knew exactly who was standing before me.

[1] A chiton is a type of tunic fastened at the shoulders, worn by men and women in Ancient Greece and Rome.

“Blue…?”

I was absolutely certain the figure in front of me was Blue! I had stared into those eyes long enough to remember them well.

The figure smiled brightly and waved, “Hello! I’m so glad I can finally talk to you, Taufan.”

Chapter Text

Boboiboy Fanfiction

©  Boboiboy | Animonsta Studio

A/N: The entire story is purely fictional, and the author does not profit from writing this story. If there are any similarities in ideas, character names, or locations, they are purely coincidental.

≫ ──── ≪•◦ ❈ ◦•≫ ──── ≪

Blue… or should I call her Vayuna, is truly a spirit animal—or spirit person, I’m not sure which one to say. Also, yes, she made a contract with me without my knowledge. How did that happen? I was just about to ask her.

“But how did you do that? I wouldn’t even know about the mark on my back if no one had told me.”

“You were in a desperate situation at the time. Did you expect me to have a casual chat with you to form a contract?”

A desperate situation? When exactly was that? Is she talking about when I was attacked by those bandits? Maybe it was when Maripos was about to be killed, and I couldn’t do anything to stop it.

“Ah! So that was you!”

Blue—no, I mean Vayuna—smiled proudly. Her wings flapped as if to emphasize how amazing she was. I was still confused about everything that had happened so far. I didn’t think my brain could process it all properly.

“But… I thought spirit animals had to test humans before choosing them?”

“They do, and you passed. That’s why I could make a contract with you.”

Wait a second. I passed her test? What test? What is she talking about? Why didn’t I realize I was being tested?

“When? I don’t remember taking any test from you.”

Vayuna hopped around my room in small jumps. She ended up bouncing on my bed while I waited patiently for her answer. Her behavior wasn’t much different from a child’s. Cute.

“Before you climbed Mount Vintara and when you freed me before leaving Mount Vintara.”

Before climbing Mount Vintara? Wait, does she mean when I was trapped in that strange barrier? So that was Vayuna testing me? I thought it was the work of a djinn! Does that mean djinn don’t exist in this world?

But why did she choose me? The body I inhabit now is so weak. Didn’t she see for herself how I nearly died using windstep?

“Why did you choose me?”

Vayuna stopped bouncing. She now stood on the bed, her eyes staring at me so intensely that it made me nervous. She tilted her head to the left and right, a gesture she also made in her bird form.

“Do you still not understand the test?”

“Huh?”

Vayuna shook her head. She sat on my bed, crossing her arms with a serious expression. Her wings flapped a few times, scattering blue feathers around my room.

“When you tried so hard to escape that barrier, even knowing your body was too weak to handle your powers—that was the first test. It was to see whether you would persevere or give up, to determine if your resolve could be stopped by the limitations of your body or if you would surrender. Then, when you chose to take me with you instead of leaving me behind—that was the second test, to assess your compassion for other living beings.”

So, I had passed the tests given by a spirit animal without even realizing it?!

“Most people I call only pass the first test.”

The first test was escaping the barrier she created. Maripos had said that similar cases to mine had happened before—people disappearing and then reappearing from the sky, though the last case was 20 years ago. That’s why the Priests of the Wind Goddess Temple found nothing when they searched the forest. How could they find a barrier that only appeared when a spirit animal wanted to test someone?

From Vayuna’s explanation, I understood why most people only passed her first test. They were trying to save themselves; how could they care about an injured bird?

“There were a few people who passed the second test like you, but they all failed the third.”

“What’s the third test?”

“Letting me go.”

I blinked. I stared at Vayuna, trying to process her words. How could no one pass such a simple test?

“Didn’t you feel it? How I charmed you with my songs and my actions?”

“Eh? So that was part of the test?!”

I couldn’t believe it! I thought Vayuna did that to thank me for taking her out and helping her.

“Before you, the people I tested were enchanted by my songs and my presence. I wanted to see if they understood the meaning of freedom. The wind, as you know, is something free. It must not be confined to one place, and neither should a bird.”

“You mean… my actions—letting you go before returning to the Palace and saying I had no right to take away your freedom—made me worthy of passing your test?”

Vayuna nodded. “Yes. And the people before you, enchanted by my songs and because I always stayed by their side, they wanted to make me their pet.”

All the actions I took without realizing it had truly made Vayuna choose me as her human? What kind of plot twist is this? I just helped a bird, and now I have a creature with powers nearly equal to a god? Moreover, Vayuna can take on a humanoid form. In the book “Things You Should Know About Spirit Animals,” it mentions that only very powerful spirit animals can manifest a humanoid form, like Vayuna is doing now.

Oak has a clear, tangible form; his body is also massive, and he looks incredibly strong. I wouldn’t doubt that Oak could also take on a humanoid form. Especially since he traveled all the way from the far eastern border to Ignisia’s Capital to deliver herbs to me, and none of the herbs were damaged despite the long journey. Can you imagine how much effort Oak put into protecting those herbs? So, it’s certain that Oak is very powerful.

But I never expected to be bound to a spirit animal as strong as Vayuna. If her claims are true, she must have created that whirlwind that killed the bandits. My goodness. That whirlwind was so powerful it shredded the bandits’ bodies.

What did Halilintar say about it? Wind Blade?

Wait a minute. Halilintar said the original Taufan used it once, though he didn’t mention when or why. Does that mean the original Taufan was that strong?! Someone who was initially so powerful suddenly becoming weak is getting more suspicious to me. I need to investigate this further.

"I still can't believe you chose me. By the way, thank you for saving me and Maripos."

Vayuna, now sitting on my bed, looked at me in confusion. She tilted her head to the right and then to the left. Her dark blue irises stared at me so intensely that it made me nervous without realizing it.

"What are you talking about? At that time, I only strengthened the power you already had and helped ease its side effects."

Now it was my turn to be confused. What did she mean by that? She only strengthened the power I already had? Was she implying that the whirlwind was my doing?! That it was me and Vayuna only made it much stronger?!

"That wasn’t you who created the whirlwind back then?!"

"Pffft! If I had done it, the forest would’ve been leveled. That was all you; I just made it much stronger and prevented your body from suffering the side effects."

"But how could I create something like that?!"

Vayuna just gave me a tired expression. She looked like a parent talking to their foolish child. I was genuinely offended at this moment. I didn’t know how old Vayuna was—clearly older than me and any other human I knew—but she took the form of a five-year-old child! How would you feel being looked at like that by a little kid?

"Are you not aware that the power within your body is so strong? A small whirlwind like that is easy for you to do with your current strength. If you develop your power, you might be able to destroy an entire nation with ease."

My head felt like it was going to explode with the new information I had just received. Of course, I knew the original Taufan was incredibly strong. He had awakened the final stage of his power at the age of 11! Also, Duri said Taufan always won when fighting Halilintar. Let’s not forget that Halilintar recently stated that of all things, he would only win in swordsmanship compared to Taufan.

The first time I tried using Taufan's power, I felt it myself. The power within Taufan's body was immense, like a raging storm that would destroy everything around it. That’s why I nearly died when I first tried his power without understanding how to control it. He had such immense power, yet the body containing it was so weak. The issue of his body suddenly becoming weak remains unresolved, and now I have to face the fact that I possess the power to destroy a nation?! I need to sit down and think this through carefully.

"Even so, I don’t know how to do it."

Once again, Vayuna looked tired talking to me. I’ll refrain from feeling offended this time.

"No, you really don’t know. But you feel it."

"What do you mean?"

"Your power is connected to your emotions. If you feel very intense emotions, like fear or anger, your power will take over your mind and body. Your power will control you. That’s why I made a contract with you without notice, so I could help you control it and reduce its side effects on you."

"Then… will you still control it for me?"

"For now, yes. You’re still too weak, and your control is severely lacking. But I can’t keep doing that forever. You have to learn to control your power so it doesn’t control you anymore."

Of course, I wouldn’t be able to control Taufan’s power properly! What do you expect from me? I come from Earth, where powers like this don’t exist! If they did, maybe I’d be the Avatar.

Even so, since I’m now in Taufan’s body, it’s a good idea for me to learn how to control his power. Isn’t that the reason I summoned a spirit animal in the first place? Because I wanted to learn how to control Taufan’s power. So I wouldn’t become powerless again like that night. I want to be able to protect myself without sacrificing others.

"Um… can you… teach me how to do it?"

Once again, Vayuna flapped her wings with confidence, the smile on her face might seem arrogant, but to me, it looked quite adorable.

"Of course! Are you underestimating me? I am Vayuna! The right hand of the Wind Goddess, Vint."

That’s another shocking revelation among today’s shocking news, but I don’t think I can be surprised anymore after all the surprises I’ve experienced today. I never imagined I’d have a connection with a spirit animal who is the right hand of the Goddess. Can this be considered a blessing or a delayed misfortune? I don’t know.

I made an agreement with Vayuna. She would train me every day until I could control Taufan’s power better. She also promised to always stay by my side and protect me. In return, I must use the power given by Vint as best as I can. I’m also forbidden from misusing this power because if I do, Vint will take it away from me—just like she did to one of Ignisia’s princesses 50 years ago.

Vayuna explained many things to me about spirit animals. Spirit animals are formed from the excessive power of the gods. Because they come directly from the gods, they are considered manifestations of the gods' powers. They can choose to live in the human world and assist humans blessed by the gods, or stay with the gods as subordinates. According to Vayuna, she is the first spirit animal of Vint, and before this, she chose to stay with Vint. Only 100 years ago did she decide to live in the human world and help humans blessed by Vint. Unfortunately, during that time, no one passed her test.

As she said, I am the first human to pass her test. I can say that I am the first human to form a contract with Vayuna—even though I did all of that without knowing I was being tested.

Although Vayuna is the strongest spirit animal owned by Vint, she cannot fully use her powers. One of the reasons is that she is bound to me, who has a weak body. I must first improve my physical condition if I want Vayuna to regain her powers.

Vayuna also explained the things she can and cannot do. For instance, with her current power, only I can see her humanoid form, while others will see her as a blue bird—Blue. They also cannot hear Vayuna's voice when she speaks to me and will only hear it as bird chirping. Additionally, with our bond, it means my abilities will increase. I can’t wait to try them.

Clearly, Vayuna's existence cannot be hidden—nor do I intend to hide it. Maripos was the first person I told about Vayuna. He didn’t seem surprised, especially since he was the one who first noticed the mark on my back and guessed that I had formed a bond with a spirit animal. He only asked how I managed to form a bond with a spirit animal. I told him everything I knew, starting from when I was trapped in some sort of barrier that turned out to be Vayuna’s test, to the bandit attack we faced. However, I didn’t tell him about the whirlwind I created that sliced the bandits into pieces—I pretended it was Vayuna’s doing.

Maripos easily accepted all the information I gave him. He already had basic knowledge about spirit animals, not to mention he had guessed from the start that the mark on my back was a spirit animal mark. So, he didn’t make a fuss about it.

The next person to know was Captain Fang. Initially, I didn’t intend to tell him, but he recognized Vayuna as Blue. After all, Captain Fang was the second person who spent the most time with me. While at the Wind Goddess Temple, Captain Fang would follow me wherever I went to guard me. He spent hours with me; it was impossible for him not to recognize Blue, who was always by my side while at the Wind Goddess Temple.

"As far as I recall, you had released that bird, Your Highness."

"Uh... yes... at first. But it came back."

"It traveled a very long way to return to you."

That’s not wrong, but I didn’t know how to respond. I looked at Vayuna, in her bird form, flying around Captain Fang’s head. She chirped happily before finally perching on Captain Fang’s shoulder.

"He’s an interesting human. Taufan, I like him."

Seeing Vayuna chirp happily near Captain Fang’s ear but hearing her voice in my head made me feel conflicted. Maybe I just wasn’t used to having a voice speaking directly in my head. It felt strange. Even so, I knew I had to get used to all of this.

"Are you alright, Your Highness? You look uncomfortable."

"No, I’m fine. Maybe just a bit tired from staying up late reading books last night."

Captain Fang simply nodded. I was glad he wasn’t like Maripos, who would bombard me with a barrage of questions. Vayuna was still perched comfortably on Captain Fang’s shoulder. I saw Captain Fang occasionally reach out his hand to stroke Vayuna’s head. The blue bird was very affectionate towards Captain Fang. She was the same with Maripos. But wait! Don’t spirit animals usually mimic their human’s traits?! Am I that clingy to the people around me?!

Ugh. I do tend to do that with Maripos and Halilintar, but I didn’t expect Vayuna to make it seem like I was also very clingy to Captain Fang.

"Your Highness, this is for you."

Captain Fang surprised me once again by handing me a stalk of blue cornflower. I didn’t know where he had kept the flower earlier, but it looked slightly wilted.

"Eh? Why all of a sudden? I’m not sad, Captain."

Captain Fang tilted his head, and Vayuna, perched on his shoulder, did the same. Should I laugh at the two of them?

"But you’ve seemed uncomfortable since yesterday."

That’s because I’m still not used to having a voice speaking directly in my head or seeing a childlike figure with wings jumping around my room. But Captain Fang, you are such a thoughtful person, and I’m grateful for that once again.

I didn’t say anything else, simply accepting the flower from Captain Fang. I wondered where he found this flower.  

“Thank you so much, Captain. I like it.”  

Captain Fang gave a small smile, seemingly pleased that I liked his gift. The flower he had given me before, I asked Maripos to dry them and turn them into bookmarks—considering how many books I own and read. This time, perhaps I could put the flowers in a vase to decorate my room.

“Captain, where did you get this flower?”  

“I found it growing around the backyard, near where the maids wash clothes. Do you not like it, Your Highness?”  

“No, on the contrary, I love this flower.”  

“I see, Your Highness.”  

Captain Fang was hard to read because his face was always expressionless. Sometimes he would smile or laugh, but those moments were rare and far between. Most of the time, his face was void of any expression. Like now, he was looking at me again with his blank expression and eyes that seemed devoid of emotion. Even though Vayuna kept chirping on his shoulder, Captain Fang’s face didn’t change at all.  

“Your Highness, I don’t mean to be disrespectful, but is this bird your spirit animal?”  

“Eh? How did you know?”  

“I overheard your conversation with Maripos while you were at the bathhouse in Karina City. I also noticed Maripos taking books about spirit animals from the library a few days ago. Seeing this bird with you, I simply deduced it.”  

Captain Fang was very sharp. No wonder he became a Captain in the Sunset Palace at such a young age.  

“You’re right, Captain. This is my spirit animal, and her name is Vayuna.”  

Unlike Maripos, who asked me quite a lot of questions, Captain Fang simply stayed silent. He didn’t ask me to explain how I could have a spirit animal when my abilities didn’t seem particularly strong. Captain Fang always accepted everything around me with ease. Perhaps his principle was not to question his master.  

“Congratulations, Your Highness. Having a spirit animal at your age is an extraordinary achievement.”  

Captain Fang bowed to me. At that moment, Vayuna flew from his shoulder and started circling my head. She chirped happily, saying that Captain Fang was quite remarkable to recognize her greatness. Although Captain Fang was actually praising me, I wouldn’t tell that to Vayuna.  

The third person to know was Halilintar. I wrote him a letter, saying there was something I wanted to discuss. He came the same day I sent my letter. He was always quick when it came to Taufan.  

“Taufan… what’s with the bird on your head?”  

“Ah… this is what I wanted to talk to you about, Your Majesty.”  

Halilintar squinted, scrutinizing Vayuna closely. Despite being stared at like that, I could hear Vayuna’s cheerful chirping. Ever since Halilintar entered the room, Vayuna hadn’t stopped singing. She was excited to see Halilintar—even though this was their first meeting—perhaps because she and I were now bonded, so she could sense the humans I liked. Halilintar was one of them.  

“Don’t tell me you want to keep that bird? Taufan, I’ve allowed you to do many things, and you’ve repeatedly endangered yourself to the point where it feels like my heart will explode. I care about you; I’d give you the world if that’s what you wanted, but I won’t allow you to keep animals. No matter what they are, they could bring diseases to you!”  

Halilintar kept rambling about the dangers I could face if I kept animals carelessly. He was being overly dramatic, in my opinion, but perhaps he had his reasons for being so fussy.  

I just let Halilintar continue his rant, occasionally nodding while stifling a laugh.  

“Your Majesty, don’t you notice something different about her?” I pointed to Vayuna, still perched on my head—if you’re wondering whether I’m worried she might poop on my hair, I did worry at first, but Vayuna pecked me hard and said she wasn’t a bird and refused to be compared to one. Even though she took the form of a bird.  

Halilintar approached me, his eyes still focused on Vayuna. Then I saw realization flash in his eyes. My smile widened at the change in his expression.  

“Don’t tell me…”  

“Yes! This is my spirit animal, Vayuna.”  

At that moment, Halilintar looked like he was about to faint. I knew this was shocking news; when I first found out, I wanted to faint too. But I thought Halilintar’s mental strength was much greater than mine—turns out, it was the same.  

"How did you get it? I don't doubt your abilities, but how did you get it?"

"Um... honestly, I'm not quite sure myself."

"Taufan, there’s a reason why only a few people can have spirit animals. Most of them end up crippled or dead after undergoing the tests given by the spirits. Gempa was buried hundreds of meters underground to obtain Oak."

Oh, that's something I didn’t know. Of course, I knew that to obtain Oak, Gempa had to go through a test, just like I did. I just didn’t expect the test to involve being buried underground. Halilintar must have been terrified at that time. If I told Halilintar that Vayuna’s test for me involved falling from the sky, I wonder how he would react.

"Um... the test was quite simple! When I got lost in the forest at the foot of Mount Vintara, it turned out I was being tested."

Halilintar raised an eyebrow, looking unimpressed by my words. I couldn’t tell him that I fell from the sky covered in blood. No. Absolutely not. Halilintar would become hysterical if he knew!

"Vayuna said her test was to see if I would persist in finding my way out, if I cared enough to help other living beings besides myself, and finally, if I could free her even though my heart wanted to keep her."

Halilintar looked unconvinced by my explanation, as if I was just lying to him. But I was telling the truth. Sure, I simplified Vayuna's explanation of the test, but wasn’t I being honest?

"Is that really all there was to it?"

"Yes, although the test was simple, it turns out I’m the first person to pass."

I hoped Halilintar didn’t notice my awkwardness. He was still staring at Vayuna sharply, but he seemed to be deep in thought. Shortly after, Halilintar sighed and gave a resigned smile.

"I can’t do anything about this. Spirit animals choose the humans they like, and if she likes you, there must be a reason. I can’t interfere."

Whether Vayuna could sense my mood or she simply adored Halilintar, after he said that, Vayuna chirped even louder—in my head, she was even shouting joyfully, praising Halilintar. Vayuna flew off my head and began circling Halilintar. He extended his hand, letting Vayuna perch on his finger. I could truly feel how happy Vayuna was to be that close to Halilintar.

"But you must keep her a secret from others."

"Why?"

"Having a spirit animal before the age of 20 is extremely rare. It only means you have enough power to pass the spirit's test. Ignisia is a kingdom that values power; people will think you’ve regained your power and want to participate in the succession battle."

Ah! How could I forget that?! The reason Taufan was cast aside was because he could no longer use his power, showing no potential to become stronger despite being the only one to reach the final stage of his abilities. He became paranoid and often lost control. Over the past two years, his body had grown weaker, and people thought he would die young. If they knew I had a spirit animal, they might think I wanted to join the fight for the throne, which would mean even more assassination attempts on me.

"If you do want to join the succession battle, I won’t stop you. On the contrary, I’ll gladly restore your position and do everything to support you," I was shocked to hear Halilintar’s words, but he didn’t care about my surprise. He continued speaking as if it wasn’t an important matter, "However, the fight for the throne is not a beautiful thing. Many dangers will come your way once you step into the battle, and you won’t be able to leave easily. It’s like stepping onto a battlefield. Without proper preparation, you might not return safely."

"As much as possible, I want to keep you safe without you getting involved in all of this. And even though you might hate me, I don’t want you to return to the Main Palace. It’s better if you stay at the Sunset Palace."

I truly didn’t expect Halilintar to have such thoughts. If others heard this, they might think Halilintar was afraid I’d oppose him. But at the beginning, Halilintar had said he was willing to give up his position if I wanted to join the fight for the throne. I also knew how much the original Taufan trusted Halilintar, no matter what decision he made. Halilintar only wanted to protect Taufan, his most beloved brother, and if placing him far from others was the only thing he could do, perhaps that’s what he would do.

Living in the Sunset Palace would make me less appealing to others. They would only think of me as a prince who had lost his power, nothing special anymore. The only thing that might interest them was Halilintar’s affection for Taufan. But people would merely see me as Halilintar’s plaything. As the beloved younger brother of Ignisia’s First Prince. Though the status of a discarded prince was far from pleasant, I preferred to remain as such because it meant others wouldn’t see me as a threat.

My goal was to make Halilintar king so I could return to my world, not to get involved in a succession battle that might kill me.

"Even though I really dislike your status and how people view you, here, in the Sunset Palace, you’re safe. They’ll only see you as Prince Halilintar’s beloved younger brother. At least I can protect you with my current power. But if you want to return to the Main Palace and join the succession battle, my strength won’t be enough to protect you."

Halilintar’s explanation made sense. The comfortable life I had in this palace was also thanks to Halilintar, and no one dared to object. They probably thought everything Halilintar did was because he loved Taufan so much. However, if I decided to join the fight for the throne, Halilintar would become my rival. It would be strange if he continued to show excessive affection for me.

"After obtaining Oak, public attention increasingly focused on Gempa. But before things got too overwhelming, Gempa announced that he didn’t want to be involved in the succession battle and left to explore the kingdom to help anyone in need."

I understood what Halilintar was trying to convey. He said that having Oak brought Gempa immense public attention, but he managed to quell it by announcing he didn’t want to participate in the succession battle. If people also found out I had a spirit animal, it would likely restore Taufan’s status as a prince and allow me to live with the other princes again. But there would be a price to pay for that.

People will think that I intend to participate in the fight for the throne and place too much hope in me. They did so when Taufan managed to reach the final stage of his power and then abandoned him when he couldn’t meet their expectations. This time, how far will they go if I fail to meet their expectations? Not to mention, I have to deal with people from the factions of the Fourth and Seventh Princes. Although Halilintar may not oppose me, his supporters might not feel the same. I remain untouchable because they know Taufan is Halilintar's beloved younger brother. However, if I become his rival, I have no idea what they might do to me.

"That's why I ask you to keep the existence of your spirit animal a secret."

"I understand, I will keep it hidden."

"I'm sorry, Taufan. I still don’t have enough power to protect you from everything."

How ridiculous. Even if Halilintar became the most powerful person in this world, he wouldn’t be able to protect Taufan forever. Moreover, he himself will die at the end of the novel.

"Your Highness, you are still human. There’s a limit to how much a human can do. Also, as Your Highness said, I am safe here."

The smile on Halilintar's face still looked sad and full of guilt. Seeing him carrying everything alone made my heart ache. Even though he’s not my real brother, I still see him as my brother. I want to help him, comfort him, and accompany him. Watching Halilintar blame himself for not being strong enough is excruciating. I’m sure the original Taufan never minded, just as I don’t.

"You’re right."

To divert Halilintar’s attention, I began to change the topic. I asked about his busy schedule. Halilintar’s answer wasn’t very satisfying—he only said he was busy here and there as a prince—but he did complain to me about Gempa, who still refused to reply to his letters, and about Blaze, the Fourth Prince, who was increasingly skipping training. Being the eldest brother is truly tough.

He also grumbled about a case involving a noble in Tarín who was poisoned by someone working in their household. There’s so much Halilintar has to handle.

“Oh! Before I forget, I have something for you, Your Highness.”

Luckily, I remembered the sword tassel I hadn’t given to Halilintar yet. I originally planned to give it along with some homemade biscuits, but I didn’t have the chance to make them, and this seemed like the perfect moment to give it. Let’s consider it a gift to cheer Halilintar up.

Halilintar looked confused as I got up from my seat. He even glanced at Vayuna—perhaps trying to find answers—who was still in his hands. I rummaged through the drawer of my bedside table to find the item. Maripos had placed it in a small black box, saying it would be easy to find. He was right—I found it in the bottom drawer. A pitch-black wooden box—whether the wood was naturally black or painted, I wasn’t sure—with very intricate carvings. The box looked so luxurious, even though its contents were cheap trinkets—hopefully, Halilintar wouldn’t mind.

I returned to where Halilintar was waiting and handed him the box. “This is for you, Your Highness.”

“Oh? You prepared a gift for me?” Halilintar said as he took the box.

“Um!” I nodded enthusiastically but then felt embarrassed because the item in the box was actually bought with Halilintar’s money. “Well… can it even be considered a gift? It was bought with Your Highness’s money.”

The gentle smile on Halilintar’s face reassured me slightly. He didn’t say anything, only opened the box I gave him and took out the red sword tassel inside. Just like Maripos when I gave him the brooch, Halilintar went silent and stared at the tassel with a serious expression. Not long after, he looked at me with teary eyes and said, “Thank you, Taufan. This means a lot. I’ll tie it to my sword.”

Was he really that happy to receive a cheap sword tassel? His mindset and Maripos’s are a bit odd. Duri is the same way too.

Chapter Text

Boboiboy Fanfiction

©  Boboiboy | Animonsta Studio

A/N: The entire story is purely fictional, and the author does not profit from writing this story. If there are any similarities in ideas, character names, or locations, they are purely coincidental.

≫ ──── ≪•◦ ❈ ◦•≫ ──── ≪

Sword training with Captain Fang is hell! He has absolutely no mercy in training me. He taught me basic stances and made me hold them for a full hour. Then he had me swing the sword up and down repeatedly. If my swing was too high or too low, he would make me start all over again. It was pure torture.

My body ached terribly after training. I couldn’t even lift a spoon during dinner and had to be fed by Maripos, even going to bed much earlier than usual. The next day, Captain Fang was just as ruthless. He made me do the same exercises as the day before.

I know learning swordsmanship is never easy, but I didn’t expect it to be this hard.

If Halilintar were the one training me, would he be as harsh as Captain Fang?

"Perhaps it would be best if you stopped, Your Highness," Maripos said the same thing for the umpteenth time. He was now massaging my arms after the intense training given by Captain Fang. It had been a week since I started learning swordsmanship, and during that time, Maripos had been trying to convince me to quit. He considered learning swordsmanship is dangerous and had even scolded Captain Fang on the first day of training—even though he had already given me permission to train.

"Maripos, haven’t I explained why I want to learn swordsmanship?"

"I know, Your Highness. But I still feel it would be better if you didn’t. Instead, I will train as hard as I can to protect you better."

I waved my hand dismissively. "I also want to be able to protect myself, and maybe one day, I can protect you too."

"Your Highness... I only wish for you to grow well and stay healthy. You don’t need to worry about me."

Maripos is someone who cares so little about himself as long as Taufan is fine. I recalled how he fought with all his might to protect me, even when his body could barely stand. Why would he go to such lengths just for Taufan?

That night, I truly thought I was going to lose Maripos. As I carried him to seek help, I could feel his breaths gradually weakening. I was terrified. I thought I was walking too slowly, that I wouldn’t reach the town he mentioned in time, that I wouldn’t be able to save him. I remember holding back tears the entire way, trying to stay strong.

I don’t want Maripos to keep living like that. But I know I can’t convince him to act otherwise. That’s why I want to learn swordsmanship. I want to be able to protect myself without Maripos having to sacrifice himself.

"No, I want Maripos to always be with me. So I must grow stronger to protect Maripos too."

Maripos gazed at me with such soft eyes, smiling warmly. Like an older brother looking at their younger brother. Like the way Halilintar looks at me.

Maripos, you need to understand your worth to me. You, Halilintar, Captain Fang, Duri, and the workers at the Sunset Palace are all precious to me. How could I bear to lose any of you? You are my friends and family.

"Oh, Maripos, I have a question."

"What would you like to ask, Your Highness?"

"When the bandits attacked, the red-haired man called Kaldar referred to me as ‘Prince Halilintar’s beloved flower.’ Then, in Fontis City, the person who attacked me said something similar. Why am I called Halilintar’s flower?"

Maripos had a confused expression, as if he wanted to laugh and pity me at the same time. Such a unique expression!

"Well... I’m not sure how to explain it to you."

"Why?"

"The title ‘Prince Halilintar’s Beloved Flower’ first appeared a year ago."

A year ago? That means I hadn’t yet entered Taufan’s body, and it was still the original Taufan’s soul inhabiting it.

"It all started when Prince Halilintar found a beautiful blue flower at a noble's house during a ball. Prince Halilintar wanted to know the name of the flower, so he asked the noble right in front of the guests, saying he wanted to give the same flower as a gift to you. After learning its name, Prince Halilintar immediately left the ball to find the flower in question. He kept doing this every time he came across beautiful flowers when invited to the homes of nobles. He even hired many people to create a flower garden in this palace for you. Because Prince Halilintar kept looking for flowers for you, that’s why you earned the title 'Prince Halilintar's Beloved Flower' or 'Ignisia's Fragile Flower,' and the Sunset Palace became your greenhouse. It seems that title has become quite popular."

"Why did Halilintar do that? He makes me sound like a girl!"

Maripos laughed, "Prince Halilintar didn’t mean it that way, Your Highness. A year ago, you became more withdrawn and often locked yourself in your room, even refusing to speak with Prince Halilintar. This left him with no choice but to visit only after you had fallen asleep. Even so, you would always come out of your room to admire the flowers in the garden, and the flowers Prince Halilintar brought were your favorites. I still remember how you asked me to dry the first flower Prince Halilintar gave you. Just like you asked me to do with the flowers Fang gave you."

So that's why the garden at the Sunset Palace is always full of flowers? I did notice from the beginning that the garden in the Sunset Palace was filled with flowering plants. The flowers planted there were diverse and all well cared for. I thought it was just a normal thing for a palace, but it’s quite strange that a palace used to exile concubines and queens who had lost the king's favor would look so beautiful. Apparently, all of that was done by Halilintar for Taufan. He probably thought flowers could cheer up Taufan, who was exiled to this palace.

Oh! So that’s why Duri told Captain Fang that I could be cheered up with flowers. He must have seen Halilintar's actions of constantly searching for flowers for Taufan and concluded that Taufan really liked flowers.

Perhaps their opinion about Taufan liking flowers isn't wrong. Most of the paintings created by the original Taufan are of flowers. The majority of them have the garden of the Sunset Palace as their background. I also found several books about planting and caring for flowers in the Sunset Palace library that seemed to have been read multiple times.

Hmm... no wonder he was nicknamed 'Prince Halilintar's Beloved Flower.' But I still hate that nickname. It sounds too feminine. Couldn’t they have chosen a cooler nickname? Like 'Prince Halilintar's Gem,' that sounds much better. Especially since Taufan's eyes sparkle like gems.

Hah, people in this world really lack creativity in naming things.

...

Sword training with Captain Fang is still as tough as it was at the beginning, but I’m starting to get used to it now. It’s still exhausting to swing a sword from top to bottom, but the number of mistakes I make has decreased compared to before. Captain Fang even praised me for it.

This time, he taught me how to swing a sword from left to right. As before, I was asked to repeat the movement over and over until it was ingrained in my muscles. Maybe that’s why they teach swordsmanship from childhood. A child’s body is much more flexible and easier to shape compared to starting as a teenager.

But that’s no reason for me to give up. Whether it’s a child’s body or a teenager’s, I’ll make it capable. I’ve managed to adapt to this world with a body so weak it could be blown away by the wind, survived a bandit attack and the assault on Fontis City, and passed the tests given by the spirit animal purely because of my determination. I’ll succeed in swordsmanship too.

In the morning, I train with Captain Fang; in the afternoon, I rest while painting or playing with Duri; in the evening, I have tea while enjoying the blooming flowers in the garden; and at night, I receive training from Vayuna to control my powers. Such a busy routine. Yet somehow, I enjoy having this kind of busyness.

Maybe it’s because before entering this world, I was used to having a packed schedule, so having a routine again reminds me of my previous life.

"I think that's enough training for today, Your Highness. You’ve made significant progress over the past two weeks. As your teacher, I’m very pleased with your improvement."

"Thank you, Captain!"

Captain Fang gave a small smile. He took the wooden sword I used for training and said I could rest now. As I was wiping off my sweat and wondering whether I should repeat a few of the moves Captain Fang had just taught me, I saw Maripos walking toward me. His expression didn’t look good; he seemed upset about something or someone. I remembered he left in the middle of my training, whereas he usually stayed until I finished. What happened?

"Your Highness, you have a guest waiting for you."

A guest? Who? The only people who regularly visit me are Halilintar and Duri. Neither of them ever hesitates to see me. They only need to ask where I am and will come right to me. Also, Maripos wouldn’t look this annoyed if it were one of them.

I really couldn’t think of anyone. As far as I know, Taufan doesn’t have any friends—pathetic. Someone who always shuts himself away and avoids social gatherings, how could he have friends? Nobles don’t take him seriously either because of his current status. So who could this guest be?

Though confused, I had no intention of keeping my guest waiting. I asked Maripos to help me clean up and prepare. During this, I heard Maripos muttering things about shamelessness and so on. Maripos seemed to dislike this guest.

Who could it be?

The mysterious guest was waiting in the reception room prepared in this palace—a room I had never used before. Maripos and Captain Fang accompanied me there. Maripos still looked as annoyed as before; in fact, the closer we got to the room, the sourer his expression became. Was this guest really that irritating to make Maripos so upset?

I found out the answer as soon as I entered the room. Inside, there were two people sitting and waiting for my arrival. One of them I recognized, while the other I didn’t.

The person was Pavan Morgan, a young, arrogant noble who had pushed me down the stairs and nearly caused his family to be sold as slaves. Oh, no wonder Maripos was so upset.

What is he doing in my palace?

As soon as I arrived, the young man sitting beside Pavan nudged him and quickly stood up. He bowed toward me and said, "Greetings to His Highness, the Second Prince, Prince Taufan."

Pavan followed suit, bowing as well. To say I was surprised would be an understatement—I was utterly stunned, unable to find the words to respond. My memory of Pavan Morgan was fixed on an arrogant figure with too much audacity—or foolishness—that he dared to push me down the stairs. He was a selfish, conceited teenager who looked down on Taufan because of his family’s background as one of Halilintar’s supporters. Seeing him willingly bow to me now was truly astonishing.

If I recall correctly, we had met briefly at the Wind Goddess Temple. At that time, he always avoided looking at me. He also didn’t join in the laughter when the young nobles mocked me after Lonan insulted me.

But all of that wasn’t enough to explain why he was at the Sunset Palace now.

"Your Highness."

I heard Maripos whisper to me, pointing at Pavan and the other young man who were still bowing toward me. Oh, right. I must have been too shocked to say anything.

"Please, raise your heads."

As soon as I said this, both of them straightened up. Pavan still avoided looking at me, while the young man beside him smiled warmly at me. Their faces were somewhat similar, but the young man appeared much friendlier and seemed like a kind person. His face was round, and his body was large, yet his smile was pleasant to see.

I returned his smile and approached the spot where they had been sitting. Once I sat down in front of them, I gestured with my hand, indicating they could sit as well.

"What can I do for you both?" I asked once they were seated.

The young man beside Pavan cleared his throat. "Allow me to introduce myself first, Your Highness."

"My name is Gopal, Gopal Kumar," he began. "I am Pavan’s cousin on his mother’s side."

Ah, so they were relatives. No wonder they looked alike. But I didn’t recall any noble family with the surname Kumar. The name also sounded unique to me, so I should have remembered if I had read about his family before. Perhaps he was overlooked in the list Maripos had provided.

"I have heard about what my cousin did to you. I am deeply sorry and ashamed because of it."

I shouldn’t believe his words—he was Pavan’s cousin! The one who pushed me down the stairs. Yet, somehow, I knew he was sincere when he said this.

"Even though our family committed a crime against you, you still graciously saved us."

I was confused at this part at first, but then I realized he was referring to the punishment Halilintar was about to impose on Pavan’s family: selling them into slavery and imprisoning Pavan for life. Their assets would also be confiscated by the kingdom. Of course, if it weren’t for me pleading with Halilintar for three full days, the Morgan family would have ended up as slaves somewhere by now. Let’s not forget the extra two days I spent preventing Halilintar from executing Pavan outright. Ah, remembering it all again makes me feel sad.

"How did you know it was me who did it?"

"Your Highness, I am aware of the laws in this land. There is no way Pavan, who insulted and hurt you, could have escaped so easily. You are a member of the royal family. Moreover, I also know you are the 'Beloved Flower of Prince Halilintar,'" Ugh! That nickname again. It irritates me more and more every time I hear it. "Prince Halilintar’s affection for you is no secret. I know that only you could convince him not to punish our family. Otherwise, Prince Halilintar might have already come to take Pavan’s head."

I didn’t expect Gopal to say all of that so easily. This involved his own cousin. Wouldn’t he feel sad if Halilintar had beheaded Pavan? I glanced at Pavan, who was now lowering his head even more. Both his hands were clenched on his knees, but his expression was unreadable.

Was he angry, upset, or embarrassed? I couldn’t tell.

"Because of your generosity, our family is still here today. Although it is very late, please allow me, on behalf of our family, to express our gratitude and apologies. We apologize for our family’s insolence toward you, and we thank you deeply for saving us."

Gopal bowed his head as he said this. I glanced at Pavan, who followed Gopal’s gesture.

Gopal, if I had to describe him, was likely a young man in his early twenties. He was tall and stout, yet he exuded the aura of a kind person, and his smile was warm. He was also very polite to me, a stark contrast to Pavan when we first met.

"I no longer hold onto what happened—it’s all in the past."

"You are so generous, Your Highness."

I don’t think of myself as a generous person. It’s true that I have a conscience that’s too soft compared to others in this world, but what do you expect from a young man who comes from a peaceful world? Even so, I know I’m not a generous person. I can consider Pavan’s offense back then as an accident because I was indeed standing at the edge of the stairs, but if he does the same thing again in the future, I’ll let Halilintar punish him according to the law. Even if it means Halilintar will take his head.

"I know this is not much, but I hope you are willing to accept it."

At that moment, Gopal placed a medium-sized wooden box on the table. The box looked quite luxurious with carvings and a bright blue color. When he opened it, inside was a blood-red gemstone the size of an adult’s palm. The gem sparkled and emitted a red glow that looked both intimidating and mesmerizing. Oh, the gem looked very much like Halilintar’s eyes. Sometimes intimidating, sometimes mesmerizing. Wow, in this place, you can find a gem that big and give it to someone just like that? How much would this thing cost in my world? It must be incredibly expensive.

"This is a Blood Ruby[1], which is very rare and the finest we have. You must already know, this ruby can enhance the wearer’s strength and provides a protective effect that others won’t even notice."

[1] Blood Ruby is a ruby with a striking blood-red color. It is said that the ruby is formed from dragon blood. It has the effect of enhancing the wearer’s strength and providing protection against almost any attack.

No. I just found out about all of that. But I didn’t say it out loud; I just smiled to cover my ignorance. Gopal continued talking about the gem, explaining every benefit it had. Oh, he sounded like a salesman pitching his product.

"Is it expensive?" I asked, cutting off Gopal’s explanation.

"Pardon? Ah, yes, the price of this gem is very high. If I were to compare it, it might be equivalent to a mansion in the capital."

I was grateful I wasn’t drinking at the time because I might have spit it out at Gopal and Pavan sitting in front of me. I don’t know much about the financial system in this world because I haven’t had the chance to compare it, but I know they use coins ranging from iron to platinum. The highest is platinum coins, and the lowest is iron coins. Judging from Maripos’ statement that 1 gold coin is enough to support a small family of three for a month, I’ll assume 1 gold coin is equivalent to 3 to 4 million[2] in my world.

[2] As a note, I’m using rupiah in this context. I don’t know much about the financial systems of other countries, so I’m using what I know.

If the item in front of me is worth a mansion in the capital, that can only mean it’s worth hundreds of gold coins, which means billions in my world. Goodness! Suddenly, I was scared just looking at it; the price seemed utterly outrageous!

Can you really give something like this to someone so easily?!

"I know the price is very low; you might feel this item is too cheap."

No! Not at all! I actually feel the price is absurdly high! Are there gems this expensive in my world too?

"However, I’m not lying when I say this is the best we have." When he said that, Gopal looked desperate. Maybe he really thought I didn’t want to accept the gem because I considered it too cheap. When in fact, it’s the opposite—I’m afraid to accept it because it’s too expensive!

"This… Young Master Gopal, there’s no need to go to such lengths. As I said, I no longer hold a grudge about that incident."

Even so, Gopal’s expression only worsened. He truly looked desperate, as if his life depended on whether I accepted the gem or not. Was he being threatened to do this? Is there something about this gem? Maybe something meant to harm Taufan?

"Vayuna, can you check this gem for me? Is there some kind of magic or something inside it?"

"Of course! Leave it to me, the great Vayuna!"

One of Vayuna’s abilities is detecting magic around her. I’ve tested it once and found that most of the items in Taufan’s room—though they looked simple and ordinary—contained magic to protect his body. I know that’s Halilintar’s doing; he’s done everything he can to heal Taufan.

"Hmm… this item does contain magic, but I don’t sense anything dangerous from it. It’s natural magic that should be inside it."

"You mean this item is genuine and hasn’t been tampered with?"

"Yes."

If so, why does Gopal look so desperate when I refuse it? Does he have something he wants to say but doesn’t dare to if I don’t take the gem from him?

"Young Master Gopal, is there something else you wish to convey to me besides an apology and gratitude?"

At that moment, I saw Gopal’s eyes widen, and a shocked expression crossed his face—it turns out he did have something else to say! But then he managed to regain his composure and smiled resignedly, "I knew I wouldn’t be able to fool you, Your Highness. The rumors about your brilliance are true."

No, I was just guessing.

"You’re right, Your Highness. I do have something else I wish to convey to you."

I waited for Gopal to speak. This must be something very important to make him look so desperate.

"I would like to ask for your help."

Me? What kind of help could I possibly give him? Doesn't he know that I am a prince cast away by my own kingdom? I hold no power at all! If anyone needs help, it's me!

"Me?"

"Only you can help me, Your Highness. I beg you!"

Gopal bowed his head again, this time even lower than before. Perhaps if I refused him, he would prostrate himself on the floor before me.

"I can't promise to help, you know my situation. But I'll listen to your request."

"Thank you so much, Your Highness!" Gopal exclaimed, hope gleaming in his eyes.

"I would like to ask for your help to save someone."

Has this young man gone mad?! Doesn't he know the reason Taufan was cast out of his kingdom is that he can no longer use his powers?! Not to mention his frail body that might perish if caught in a strong wind. Even with my spirit animal now, overall, I am still utterly useless. How could he ask me to save someone? It would make more sense if he asked Halilintar to do it. He is the best swordsman in Ignisia and a highly respected First Prince.

"He is a good friend of mine. He has committed no crime, but he was arrested by the royal guards."

"What do you mean? Are you trying to say the royal guards made a mistake in their arrest?"

"I wouldn't dare, Your Highness. Please allow me to explain. My friend works in the house of a noble in Tarín. He hasn’t been there long, just three months. The noble he served was poisoned, and the culprit has yet to be found. The royal guards arrested all the servants who worked in the noble’s house. Among them, the cook’s assistant—my friend—was also taken."

I understand his feelings. Gopal must be convinced that his friend is innocent but was arrested simply because of his employment in that household.

Even so, what can I do for him? I am merely a prince in name, holding no power whatsoever. Only the people in the Sunset Palace still treat me as their prince and are willing to listen to me. Outside this place, I have no authority. There’s no way the Royal Guards would heed the words of a prince cast away by his own kingdom.

"Young Master Gopal, I’m sure you know my situation. I have no authority under my name. I cannot help you free your friend."

I know I am cruel, crushing the only hope he has. But I don’t want to promise something I cannot deliver.

"Your Highness, I beg you!"

Even though Gopal’s voice sounded so desperate, and his eyes reflected frustration mixed with sorrow, I couldn’t do anything. What he was asking of me was an impossible task. How could anyone expect a frail prince to save someone detained by the Royal Guards? And as I’ve said countless times, I am just a powerless prince.

"I truly regret this, but I cannot help you."

"Please, Your Highness!"

Once again, Gopal cried out. I felt pity for him, but what could I do? I glanced at Maripos, intending to instruct him to escort them out of the Sunset Palace, as I believed there was nothing more to discuss. But Gopal’s next action shocked me. He suddenly rose and knelt before me.

"I beg you, Your Highness! Please help him! He is a dear friend of mine! I will do anything, Your Highness! Anything! I beg you, please save him!" he cried as he prostrated himself before me.

"Young Master Gopal! Please, don’t do this!"

I never expected him to go this far. How much does his friend mean to him that he would kneel before someone else like this?

I tried to help him stand, but he refused. He remained prostrate, pleading with me. Gopal, my heart is weak—why are you making this even harder for me? I glanced at Pavan, signaling him to help his brother up. But when I looked at him, Pavan flinched as if I were the most terrifying person. I chose to ignore that for now and signaled him again to help Gopal stand, and he finally complied. Pavan moved, placing his hands on Gopal’s shoulders and urging him to rise.

"I beg you, Your Highness... You are my only hope..."

I could hear the tremor in Gopal's voice; the young man was crying. Oh, for heaven's sake, after making Halilintar cry countless times, now I’ve made another person cry on our first meeting. I truly feel like a terrible person.

"Young Master Gopal, what exactly do you want me to do?" I said, defeated. My overly kind conscience will surely be my downfall someday.

Hearing my words, Gopal immediately straightened up and looked at me with hope shining in his eyes. "Please, I beg you to persuade Prince Halilintar to release my friend."

Halilintar?

Why was Halilintar suddenly brought into this conversation?

"Why should I persuade Prince Halilintar?"

"You are the only person Prince Halilintar will listen to. Just like when you asked the Prince to spare Pavan and our family."

Does he think that just because Taufan is Halilintar’s beloved younger brother, I can do anything? It took me five days to persuade Halilintar to let Pavan’s head remain on his shoulders!

"I still don’t understand why I need to persuade Prince Halilintar to save your friend, Young Master Gopal."

"This is a case being handled by Prince Halilintar."

A case being handled by Halilintar? Wait, I remember something. Didn’t Halilintar mention this before? He said he was handling a case involving a nobleman in Tarín who was poisoned by someone working in his household. So that’s why Gopal came to me. He knows Halilintar is in charge of the case, and he also knows about the incident caused by Pavan and how his cousin is still alive because of me.

Ah, is life as Halilintar’s beloved younger brother always this difficult?

Chapter Text

Boboiboy Fanfiction

©  Boboiboy | Animonsta Studio

A/N: The entire story is purely fictional, and the author does not profit from writing this story. If there are any similarities in ideas, character names, or locations, they are purely coincidental.

≫ ──── ≪•◦ ❈ ◦•≫ ──── ≪

Gopal's friend is named Qually. He is a year younger than Gopal, but they became good friends because they share many similarities. Qually's parents work in Gopal's family shop, so they have known each other for a long time. Three months ago, Qually was hired as an assistant chef in a noble's household in the Tarín. However, after the poisoning incident, Qually was arrested and imprisoned as one of the suspects. Even so, Gopal insists that his friend is innocent. Gopal says that his friend is an honest and kind-hearted person. Moreover, Qually, who loves cooking so much, would never poison food.  

"The Royal Guards are competent in carrying out their duties. I'm sure your friend will be freed once they find the real culprit. Besides, you mentioned that Prince Halilintar is handling the case. There's no way Prince Halilintar would let an innocent person be imprisoned."  

Gopal's expression hardened. He might no longer trust the Royal Guards who had arrested his good friend, and he might doubt that Halilintar would have time to care about his friend. "I am certain my friend is innocent, Your Highness. I do not doubt the Royal Guards or Prince Halilintar. However, I feel that someone is trying to frame my friend."  

"Why do you think that?"  

"Before I came to see you, I tried everything I could to prove my friend's innocence. I bought information from a well-known informant. He said that proving my friend's innocence would be difficult. This is because my friend is said to have a motive for committing the act."  

"What kind of motive?"  

"It was said that the noble did not treat him well during his employment. That makes him a plausible suspect, especially since he was the one who prepared the food before the noble was poisoned. Even so, I believe my friend would never do such a vile thing just for that reason. He would never tarnish what he has worked so hard for, Your Highness!"  

Why does everything have to be so troublesome?  

I just want to figure out how to make Halilintar king, so I can return to my world. Why do I have to get involved in this?  

I've already caused Halilintar so much trouble, and he has countless issues to deal with every day. How could I bear to add more problems for him? Even so, I couldn't bring myself to turn away Gopal, who was so desperate. He only wanted to save his friend, not caring about himself as he came to plead with me.  

Even though he knew his younger brother had made a fatal mistake against Halilintar.  

Reluctantly, my overly soft conscience pitied him and wanted to help. I thought, there was no harm in helping Gopal. He and Pavan are cousins. As far as I know, Pavan's family supports Halilintar, but recently they have been ostracized because of Pavan's actions, which have earned Halilintar's ire. I was worried they might turn their support to another prince. Maybe if I helped Gopal, it would make his family indebted to me, and I could ask them to continue supporting Halilintar.  

"Young Master Gopal, regarding this matter, I cannot promise you anything. But I will try to speak with Prince Halilintar."  

"I am already very grateful that you are willing to speak to Prince Halilintar. Thank you so much, Your Highness!" Once again, Gopal bowed to me. I tried to stop him, but it was no use.  

After thanking me countless times, Gopal and Pavan finally left. I sighed in exhaustion as the two of them exited the room. I instructed a guard to escort them out of the Sunset Palace. I hoped they wouldn’t return anytime soon because I would be overwhelmed.  

"You didn’t have to accept his request, Your Highness," said Maripos as he poured me a fresh cup of tea.  

"True, I didn’t. But I wouldn’t feel at peace if I turned him down. At the very least, I’ll try to talk to Halilintar."  

"What will you say to Prince Halilintar? I doubt he would release someone suspected of a crime, even if you asked him to."  

"I know that. I’ll only ask him to reopen the investigation on Qually. Hopefully, he truly is innocent, as Young Master Gopal claims, and perhaps this way, the real culprit will be caught."  

I added more sugar cubes to my tea. "I need your help, Maripos. Can you look into Qually’s background? At the very least, I need to know if what Young Master Gopal said is true or not. Then I’ll talk to Halilintar."  

"I will do as you command, Your Highness," said Maripos before leaving the room.  

Now I had to think about how to approach Halilintar. What should I say to him to make him listen to me? He wouldn’t be pleased to know I met with Pavan, nor would he be happy to hear I agreed to help Pavan’s cousin. But I couldn’t just break my word to Gopal. I had promised him I would speak to Halilintar.  

What excuse should I give Halilintar? Why should I ask him to reopen the investigation into Qually when I’ve never even met him? Ugh, why does my brain decide to stop working at times like this? Maybe I should take a walk in the garden to clear my head.  

I called Captain Fang, who had been waiting outside the room and asked him to accompany me on a brief walk.  

For a moment, I could hear Vayuna cheering excitedly in my head at the idea of being outside. Of course, she would be thrilled to be outdoors—after all, she takes the form of a bird, even if she refuses to be called one.  

Walking in the garden with Vayuna and Captain Fang reminded me of the Temple of the Wind Goddess. When the three of us also strolled through the garden because Maripos was busy with many things. Ah, I already miss that peaceful place.  

"Your Highness, you seem to be deep in thought. Is there anything I can help you with?"  

My captain is indeed a lovely and understanding person. I looked at Captain Fang with a grateful gaze, but as always, Captain Fang showed no expression. He truly is immune to my antics.  

"This isn't such an important matter, Captain. You don't need to worry." I said so, but honestly, my head felt like it would explode from thinking about how to talk to Halilintar.

"Is this about your meeting with Young Master Morgan today?"

"More or less. But it's about Young Master Gopal."

"Young Master Gopal?"

"The young man who came with Pavan Morgan."

Captain Fang didn't say anything. I only glanced at him from the corner of my eye before returning my gaze to the garden. The flowers in the garden would soon bloom, and the view would be stunning because of it. Maybe when all the flowers in the garden have bloomed, I'll clear my schedule to paint the scenery.

"Did they do anything unusual, Your Highness?"

"Not really. Except for them coming to apologize, everything else seemed normal to me."

"Then why do you look so troubled right now, Your Highness?"

"Young Master Gopal asked for my help to save his friend. I promised him I would talk to Halilintar about it."

Captain Fang, once again, was silent. He must have been thinking about what I said. That young man thinks a lot—hopefully, he won't get gray hair at a young age because of it.

"I don't think Prince Halilintar will help you this time, Your Highness."

Captain Fang, even if you hadn't told me, I already knew that. I know there's no way Halilintar would agree to my request, especially considering how much he despises Pavan and his family right now. I also know Halilintar will think I'm foolish for wanting to help them.

"I know that too, Captain," I said despondently.

"Does this make you sad, Your Highness?"

This time, I didn't answer Captain Fang's question. I let my focus rest on Vayuna, who was flying around some flowers while singing joyfully in my mind. After a while, I started wishing I could become a bird. Living like Vayuna must be delightful—just chirping and flying wherever you want.

"Your Highness."

"Hm?"

Even so, Captain Fang didn't say anything. I shifted my gaze from Vayuna and turned to Captain Fang. The young man stood a step away from me but said nothing. I was just about to ask him what he wanted when Captain Fang handed me a purple flower.

I was no longer surprised by his behavior. Every time he felt I was sad or burdened by something, he would pick a flower and give it to me. Funnily enough, right now, we were in a garden full of flowers, but the flower Captain Fang gave me was a wildflower that probably escaped the gardeners' notice. He always gave me wildflowers, never the well-tended ones in the garden. Whether it was because he didn't want to ruin the gardeners' hard work or because he had his own reasons for giving me wildflowers, I didn't know.

I took the flower from Captain Fang's hand, staring at it for a long time as I tried to recall the name of the flower he gave me. Unfortunately, I couldn't remember its name. Maybe I should ask Maripos to find a book about wildflowers so I could learn the names of the flowers Captain Fang gave me.

"Thank you, Captain."

"Do you like it, Prince?"

"I do," I said. I saw the corners of Captain Fang's lips curl slightly upward, forming a faint smile. He was an amusing young man.

"Captain, do you know about the case of the noble in Tarín who was poisoned?"

"Yes, Your Highness. I'm aware of the case. According to the rumors, one of the workers in the noble's household held a grudge against him and poisoned him. Even so, the people of Tarín City celebrated the incident."

"Why?"

"The noble who was poisoned was Young Master Beruth, the youngest son of Baron Kalns. He was notorious as a drunkard, a womanizer, and a gambler. He was also known to be cruel to those of lower status. There was even a rumor that he beat a maid to death just because she spilled water on his shoes. However, the rumor quickly disappeared, and no one knew the truth. That's why the people of Tarín City celebrated when he was poisoned. Even so, he remains a noble."

I understood Captain Fang's point very well. Although that scoundrel deserved what he got, his status as a noble remained, and the person who poisoned him was just a commoner. In a world where power speaks, people like him would easily get away with things. This place isn't much different from my original world.

"So, what about him? Is he still alive after being poisoned?"

"Yes."

When he said that, I could see the expression on Captain Fang's face change to one of disgust. Perhaps he thought Beruth deserved to die after all the sins he committed. I wouldn't comment on that.

Hearing Captain Fang's explanation and comparing it to what Gopal said earlier, I understood that the noble who was poisoned was indeed a scoundrel who would have many enemies. There were plenty of people who held grudges against him, so it wasn't surprising that Halilintar had to arrest all the workers in his residence. There were too many potential suspects to identify.

Why did Qually choose to work in that noble's house when he knew its reputation was so terrible?

Ugh. I still couldn't come up with a reason to convince Halilintar why he should help Qually. Moreover, if I asked him to focus on Qually's investigation, wouldn't it hinder the overall investigation? Halilintar would only get busier.

Too bad I don't have the power to gather useful information. I've been stuck in the Sunset Palace all this time, and I don't have any memories from the original Taufan. So, to help Qually, I can only rely on the information that Maripos will bring later.

Being useless is really frustrating.

I wiped away imaginary tears and returned my gaze to Vayuna.

Beruth, huh? I should start investigating that person first. Maybe by doing so, I can help to free Qually. But who can I ask to investigate him? Maripos is currently not in the Sunset Palace because I asked him to investigate Qually's background. I’m not very close to the other servants in the palace, even though they are all kind people. Should I just ask Captain Fang for help?

I glanced at Captain Fang briefly. The young man was still standing in his spot, unmoving and silent. I wondered a little about how he could do that.

"Captain, do you think you can gather detailed information about Young Master Beruth for me?"

"You can leave it to me, Your Highness."

"Oh, and don’t forget about the rumor regarding the maid who was beaten to death. If possible, please find out as much detail as you can."

"I will do as you command, Your Highness."

I gave a small nod, not sure if Captain Fang noticed it. Alright, the matter of Beruth is settled for now. I’ll wait for the results of Captain Fang’s and Maripos’s investigations, and then I’ll decide my next steps.

...

Maripos’s investigation was much faster than Captain Fang’s. He only needed two days to find detailed information about Qually. Perhaps because Qually wasn’t someone who caused much trouble, it was easy to uncover information about him.

Now, I was listening to Maripos’s report about Qually.

He is an only child, and as Gopal mentioned, his parents work in a shop owned by Gopal’s family. Since he was young, he had been helping his parents in the shop, which allowed him to become close to Gopal, the shop owner’s son. The two grew up together and were as inseparable as brothers. It’s also known that they share the same hobby: cooking. In their teenage years, they often participated in cooking competitions together.

However, because Gopal had to take over his parents’ shop, he couldn’t focus much on developing his cooking talent. Unlike Gopal, Qually deeply loved cooking. He aspired to become a chef one day. He learned from an old chef who used to be the head chef at Baron Kalns’s residence. The old chef wrote him a recommendation letter, which allowed Qually to work at Baron Kalns’s household. Unfortunately, after only three months of working there, he was arrested for allegedly poisoning Baron Kalns’s youngest son, Beruth Kalns.

I couldn’t find anything that could make Qually a suspect in this case. Based on Maripos’s report, he seems to be a kind young man. His interactions with Beruth were also minimal compared to the other servants. So why was he also arrested and accused of having a motive to poison Beruth?

"Young Master Gopal said that Qually was treated poorly by Young Master Beruth, which became his motive for poisoning him. But does this make sense to you, Maripos?"

"I also find it odd, Your Highness. No wonder Young Master Gopal said that his friend is being framed. Based on my investigation, Qually did receive punishment from Young Master Beruth, but it was only once because the cake he served wasn’t sweet enough. Moreover, the punishment he received was just a salary deduction. This reason alone isn’t enough for him to poison Young Master Beruth."

"Exactly. Especially since Qually seems like a good person who wouldn’t hold a grudge even if his salary was cut. He seems like a hard worker, and on top of that, he’s friends with Young Master Gopal, who owns a famous shop in Tarín City. It’s unlikely that he would poison his master over something so trivial."

Maripos nodded in agreement with my words. If that’s the case, it’s no wonder Gopal thinks someone is trying to frame his friend. He clearly knows his best friend well and believes that his friend wouldn’t harm anyone over a minor issue. Especially since Gopal said that Qually loves cooking, it’s unlikely he would tarnish something he loves for a petty complaint.

But who would frame someone as kind as Qually? Could it be another servant working at Baron Kalns’s residence? That’s possible, but why?

Two days later, Captain Fang came to report his findings to me.

Beruth Kalns, the youngest son of Baron Kalns.

When I first heard about him, I thought he was a moody teenager spoiled by his parents. It turns out he’s a 27-year-old man still hiding under his parents’ wings. He has two older brothers and one older sister. His eldest sister is a strong-willed woman married to an honorable knight from a neighboring kingdom. His first brother, the heir to Baron Kalns, works at the palace. Although he doesn’t hold a high position, he is part of the circle that frequently interacts with the Prime Minister. Meanwhile, his second brother serves in the royal army under Commander Kaika’s command.

No wonder that even at the age of 27, Beruth Kalns remains a spoiled child. Despite this, his family is merely nobility without any land. They don’t have their territory. That’s why they live in Tarín City, even though the city has its ruler, Count Fitz.

Back to Beruth. As the youngest child, his life was far from difficult. He was spoiled by his parents and older siblings. This is what made his character so despicable. He was an alcoholic, a frequent visitor to gambling houses, often caused trouble, and was harsh to those weaker than him, yet cowered before those much stronger. I’m sure if he met Halilintar, he’d wet his pants just from being stared down by Halilintar’s piercing red eyes.

He often beat his servants, insulted them, fired them on a whim, and so many other actions that gave me a headache just hearing about them.

He was a complete scoundrel.

"And what about the case of the maid? Did he really beat her to death?"

"I have had some difficulty finding information about this, Your Highness. Those who know about it are now in prison due to the poisoning case, and I can not just enter the prison as I please. However, I managed to find out the identity of the maid. Her name was Sofia, and she would be 19 years old if she were still alive today."

"When did this incident happen?"

"About three years ago, Your Highness."

Three years ago… That would mean Sofia was only 16 years old! Beruth, you bastard! How could you beat a girl—especially a teenager—to death?! I truly felt no sympathy for that scoundrel being poisoned. If anything, he deserved it.

"Can you tell me what you’ve found?"

Captain Fang nodded. He pulled a scroll from his coat pocket and unrolled it. It was likely his notes on this case.

"Sofia was an orphan who started working at Baron Kalns’ residence at the age of 15. A year later, it was said that she left her job. However, no one knows where she went or where she is now. Around the same time, rumors spread that Young Master Beruth had just beaten a maid to death. Many suspected the maid was Sofia, but the rumors about her quickly disappeared. I suspect they silenced anyone who knew the truth."

For some reason, I felt that Sofia’s case was connected to the current poisoning case. There’s a possibility that someone is seeking revenge against Beruth by infiltrating his residence and poisoning him.

"Does Qually have any connection to Sofia?"

"Not that I know of, Your Highness. Qually was born and raised in Tarín City, while Sofia was born in Fontis City. She went to Tarín City following a friend from the same orphanage."

If they didn’t know each other, then there’s no reason for Qually to poison Beruth as an act of revenge.

"And what about her friend?"

"I do not know, Your Highness. I failed to obtain any information about her or her current whereabouts. However, the townspeople who remember Sofia said her friend returned to their hometown once Sofia got a job at Baron Kalns’ residence."

What a complicated matter. But now I’m sure that Qually is a good person and is innocent in this case. I’ll help Gopal speak to Halilintar about his friend. It’s truly unfortunate that such a kind-hearted young man is being accused of a crime he didn’t commit.

"Summon Maripos and ask him to bring paper and ink. I need to write a letter to Prince Halilintar."

"Yes, Your Highness."

With that, Captain Fang left my chamber. Shortly after, Maripos entered, carrying a stack of papers along with a quill and ink. He placed them neatly on the desk in front of me, his expression full of questions, likely wondering what I intended to write to Halilintar.

"Have you made a decision, Your Highness?"

"Yes. I know Qually is a good person, just as Young Master Gopal said. I will speak to Halilintar about him."

"What will you say to Prince Halilintar?"

"Honestly, I’m still thinking about that, but I’m sure I’ll come up with something when I meet him."

Maripos merely nodded. From the corner of my eye, I saw him busy himself tidying up my room while I began writing the letter to Halilintar. The contents of the letter were simple, as usual—greetings, light pleasantries, and then asking if I could meet him. Once the ink dried, I handed the letter to Maripos to be placed in an envelope and sealed.

Maripos handled everything swiftly and neatly; he was a true professional! No one could match Maripos in his work.

I received a reply to my letter by midday. It wasn’t in the form of another letter, nor did Halilintar come to the Sunset Palace himself. Instead, it was Commander Kaika who arrived with the luxurious carriage I had used during my journey to the Wind Goddess Temple. He came with six other soldiers, all in gleaming full armor with swords at their waists, and they rode horses that looked far too large and muscular. Unintentionally, I recalled my unpleasant experience of horseback riding with Halilintar.

Their arrival caused a stir in the entire Sunset Palace. The servants thought I was going away again and panicked because they hadn’t prepared anything. Maripos was confused, and Captain Fang looked displeased to see Commander Kaika again. As for me, I had no idea what to do.

At the time, I was enjoying myself painting by the lake—a rare activity now due to my busy schedule—when Papileon came running toward me. He announced Commander Kaika’s arrival and asked where I was going while requesting Maripos to give instructions on what needed to be prepared. Honestly, Maripos was so confused that he didn’t know what to say.

I asked Papileon to pack up my painting supplies, and along with Maripos and Captain Fang, I went to meet Commander Kaika, who was said to be waiting.

I found the man sitting atop his horse in the courtyard of the Sunset Palace, accompanied by the luxurious carriage and his soldiers—I recognized their faces; they had accompanied me on the journey to the Wind Goddess Temple.

As soon as he saw me, Commander Kaika dismounted his horse and approached me. He knelt on the ground, bowing his head, with one elbow resting on his knee—a pose I had only ever seen in royal-themed comics.

"My greetings to the Second Prince of Ignisia, Prince Taufan."

I was utterly confused at this moment. I glanced at Maripos, who still looked bewildered, and then at Captain Fang, who seemed a bit annoyed by Commander Kaika’s presence. What on earth was going on?

The first time I met Commander Kaika, let alone giving me such respect like this, he didn’t even greet me. He only saluted Halilintar, who was present at the time to send me off. Then, when we returned to the Palace, Commander Kaika merely bowed slightly to me before leaving with his troops.

What happened to this man that he’s now acting so respectfully toward me? Did Halilintar scold him or something?

"Why are you here, Commander?"

Commander Kaika was still kneeling before me, perhaps because I hadn’t yet told him to stand. "I was ordered by His Highness Prince Halilintar to escort you."

"Escort me? But to where?"

"His Highness Prince Halilintar has tasked me with ensuring your safe journey to the Main Palace."

"Huh? But why?"

"His Highness Prince Halilintar did not inform me of his reasons. He only said to pick you up and escort you from the Sunset Palace and during your stay at the Main Palace."

What is Halilintar thinking? Is this because of my letter asking to meet with him? He could’ve just sent a reply saying he’s busy and can’t meet me. I’d understand and wouldn’t demand his presence. Why go as far as sending Commander Kaika?

"Did he make sure you’d actually bring me back with you?"

"..." Commander Kaika remained silent. I couldn’t discern his expression since he still had his head bowed, but I’ll take his silence as a ‘yes.’

"I’ll take that as a yes." Oh, Halilintar. What is going on in your mind? Never mind, I don’t feel like figuring it out. Trying to guess Halilintar’s thoughts is always a hassle.

"Then stand up, Commander. I’ll go get ready first."

Commander Kaika stood up as I instructed. As I turned to head back into the Sunset Palace to prepare, I noticed him bowing toward me again before mounting his horse.

I’m still curious about what caused this change, but whatever.

As usual, Maripos helped me get ready. He chose an outfit that looked far more luxurious than what I usually wore—and far more uncomfortable. I protested about his choice, but Maripos always had answers that were too reasonable for me to refute. Like this time, he argued that since I’d be going to the Main Palace at Halilintar’s direct invitation, there was a chance I’d meet other nobles. I had to look my best so they wouldn’t look down on me even more. He said a person’s appearance determines how they’ll be treated.

I didn’t argue with him because, well, I thought he had a point. Someone dressed neatly and cleanly is treated much better than someone who looks messy and dirty.

When I returned to where Commander Kaika was waiting, the man quickly dismounted from his horse. This time, his soldiers did the same. Commander Kaika bowed to me, and his subordinates followed suit.

"We will escort you safely to the Main Palace, Your Highness."

I smiled awkwardly, waving my hand and telling them to stand straight. I don’t think I’ll ever get used to this.

Commander Kaika opened the carriage door for me. He then extended his hand toward me, leaving me puzzled.

"I will assist you in boarding the carriage, Your Highness," Commander Kaika explained.

I didn’t immediately take his hand. Instead, I glanced at Maripos and Captain Fang—the two people who usually did this for me. They stood a step behind me, and Maripos signaled for me to accept Commander Kaika’s hand. So, I did as Maripos suggested.

The carriage was just as I remembered it. Perhaps the seats were now softer and more comfortable. Maripos entered shortly after me, and then the carriage door was gently closed by Commander Kaika. I peeked out the window as the man mounted his horse again.

The carriage began to move, and I saw Captain Fang following us on his horse.

This is my second time going to the Main Palace. Remembering what happened to me the first time I visited that place, I couldn’t help but feel a little scared. Will I be pushed down the stairs again by some moody teenager?

Hopefully not.

Chapter Text

Chapter Text

Boboiboy Fanfiction

©  Boboiboy | Animonsta Studio

A/N: The entire story is purely fictional, and the author does not profit from writing this story. If there are any similarities in ideas, character names, or locations, they are purely coincidental.

≫ ──── ≪•◦ ❈ ◦•≫ ──── ≪

"Brother, why are you so determined to prove we didn’t do it?"

Indeed, why was he so determined to believe in the young man before him? Why couldn’t he hate and blame them like everyone else did? Why did he still try to prove their innocence?

"Because I’m your brother and I will always believe in you."

The young man gave a weak smile. His body had grown thinner, and his skin had become far paler over time. He looked unwell, even though he had never had any health problems before. Being behind bars for almost two months had clearly changed a lot about him.

The young man reached out his hand through the iron bars that separated them. All he could do was hold that hand—his younger brother’s hand, now looking like skin stretched over bone.

"I’m glad to have you, brother." The young man’s silver eyes gleamed as he spoke. All he could do was hold that hand tightly, silently vowing to do whatever it took to save them.

...

"...CE! ...INCE! PRINCE!"

I snapped back to reality when I heard the shouting voice. I saw Maripos, looking frightened and worried in front of me. He reached out his hand and touched my head. I winced in pain at his touch. I looked down—the kid was still in my arms. His body was trembling violently, perhaps out of fear or for some other reason.

I decided not to dwell on what I had just seen earlier and instead focused on the child in my arms.

"Are you hurt?"

The kid—or should I call him Prince Solar—looked at me briefly. Then he lowered his head and shook it slowly. I stroked his hair to calm him down; his body was still trembling. The experience of falling from a great height was not a pleasant one. I knew because I had experienced it twice before.

"It’s okay. You’re safe now," I whispered to him. I hoped he wouldn’t mind me touching him like this. He was the youngest prince and Duri’s twin brother. He was also a remarkably clever prince and would later become Halilintar’s rival in the future.

Maripos hovered around me to make sure I was okay. I chuckled softly but was immediately scolded by Maripos, who said there was nothing funny about the situation. Yet, it was amusing to see him so panicked like this. He reminded me of a mother hen protecting its chicks. Oh, that mother hen belonged to my second youngest brother. I wonder how it’s doing—whether it’s still alive or has been made into chicken stew.

I was grateful that the training I had undergone with Captain Fang was starting to pay off. My stamina and physical endurance had improved significantly. If my body were still the same as when I first entered it, I might have died just from being buried under books.

Maripos took Solar from my arms, patting Solar’s back gently but glaring at me as if promising a long lecture about this incident. Ah, my ears wouldn’t survive his scolding. Not to mention Halilintar, who would surely give me a lengthy reprimand about this. Even Vayuna, in my head, was shouting at how foolish I was for using my own body when I could have used the wind power she had taught me.

But it wasn’t my intention to throw myself to save Solar. Some other force had taken control of this body the moment it realized Solar was in danger. My strongest suspicion was the lingering consciousness of the original Taufan within this body.

Commander Kaika lifted me from where I was still sitting on the floor. I didn’t protest, even though I was now being carried like a girl. My head hurt terribly, as did my body. And it seemed I had just sprained my left ankle. The pain was excruciating.

Hah, I only came to the library to read, so why did I end up in such a disaster? It seemed the Main Palace was a place I needed to avoid.

"Commander, I think I’m going to faint."

I couldn’t see Commander Kaika’s expression, but he seemed to panic because his pace became quicker. I guessed he was running.

I wasn’t exaggerating. My head hurt, my stomach churned, and my vision grew blurrier by the second. Even my ears started ringing loudly, though I was sure it was Maripos calling my name.

Before I completely succumbed to darkness, I heard someone shouting my name and felt a warm embrace that made me feel safe.

...

When I opened my eyes, I somehow felt déjà vu, waking up in an unfamiliar room. I tried to move, but a sudden wave of pain overwhelmed me. It felt like I had been hit by a truck, leaving my body shattered. I tried to recall what had happened to leave me in such pain.

I remembered going to the Main Palace because Halilintar had call me, then what? Ah… I also cried in Halilintar’s arms. Such an embarrassing memory. After that… I think I went to the library. But why did my body hurt so much if I only went to the library?

"You’re awake?"

I turned toward the source of the voice. It was Halilintar, sitting beside the bed with his chin resting on his hand.

"Your Highness..."

Halilintar sighed, reaching out to stroke my hair. "Why do you always make me worry, Taufan?"

"Sorry..."

"It’s okay. Does it still hurt?"

"Uh… my whole body hurts."

At that moment, Halilintar smiled so widely that I knew I was in trouble.

"Of course your body hurts. You were hit by many heavy, hard books. Your body also slammed into the shelf so hard it left bruises. Let’s not forget that a thick book fell on your head, causing a concussion. There’s no way you could’ve walked away from that with just a scratch." While explaining my condition, Halilintar kept smiling. It sent shivers down my spine.

Maripos! Where are you? Please save me!

"At this rate, you’re making me want to tie you up in your room so you can’t go out and put yourself in danger."

He wasn’t seriously considering that, was he? There was no way he’d actually think of doing that, right?

"Rest. I’ll call the doctor to check on you again."

I wasn’t going to argue with Halilintar. He was stubborn, and I didn’t have the energy to persuade him right now.

"Your Highness… what about Prince Solar?"

Halilintar’s expression turned complicated when I mentioned Solar. It was similar to the look he gave when I asked about Ace. I still didn’t understand why he showed such an expression. However, not long after, Halilintar smiled at me.

"He’s fine. He’ll come to see you soon, so just rest for now."

I was reluctant to believe Halilintar’s words. There was no way a 9-year-old kid who had just fallen from a great height and been buried under heavy books could be fine. If he wasn’t physically injured, he must have been shaken by the whole ordeal. Even so, the aura Halilintar exuded seemed to emphasize that I shouldn’t ask further and should simply comply with his words. The relationships between these princes were truly complicated.

After Halilintar left, Maripos burst into the room. He still looked panicked, even though I had already told him not to worry. He asked about my condition, then started lecturing me for being careless, and then asked about my condition again.

I managed to calm Maripos down after much effort. He finally sat in the chair that Halilintar had just vacated. Now, the young man was peeling an apple—at my request, so he would stop bothering me.

I had already asked Maripos to explain what happened after I fainted and how long I had been unconscious. He said they met Halilintar on the way, and he immediately took me from Commander Kaika. Oh, he must have been the one calling my name, and that warm hug was from him too. Hmm, I can guess as much.

The place where I am now is the room Halilintar usually stays in when he can’t return to the Sunrise Palace. Let’s just say this is his room in the Main Palace.

This isn’t the Crown Prince’s room, just an ordinary guest room transformed into a prince’s chamber. But this place is still far more luxurious than Taufan's room in the Sunset Palace. I wonder how grand Halilintar’s room in the Sunrise Palace is and what the Crown Prince’s chamber looks like. The clothes I’m wearing now belong to Halilintar—no wonder they feel so big on my skinny frame.

Maripos also said that I had been unconscious for a full day. During that time, Duri came and helped heal the wounds on my body. He couldn’t heal everything like the healers at Count Balakung’s residence due to lack of experience, but I’m sure without him, I would be in much more pain.

I also asked him about Solar, but Maripos said he handed Solar over to the Royal Doctor for examination. After that, he didn’t receive any further updates about the Seventh Prince until I woke up. Perhaps information about him is only shared with Halilintar. After all, Maripos is Taufan's personal servant, not Solar’s. He doesn’t need to know about other princes’ conditions.

I looked at my right hand, wrapped in bandages. I don’t remember hurting my hand. Perhaps I hurt it when I caught Solar as he fell down the stairs. My head feels wrapped in something, and when I touch it, I realize it’s a bandage wrapped around my head. Do I have an open wound on my head? I thought I was only hit by books and suffered a mild concussion. Honestly, my whole body still feels painful. I hope I don’t have to endure this pain much longer.

“I’ll ask Doctor Kién to prepare a pain-killer potion.” Perhaps Maripos noticed me wincing in pain, which is why he said he would request the potion. I agreed with him; my body felt extremely sore, and I couldn’t bear it any longer.

A beautiful blonde-haired woman entered to examine me. Maripos called her ‘Doctor Kién,’ so I assumed she was the one treating me.

She’s a terrifying woman despite her beautiful face. Her eyes glared at me sharply as if I had committed a grave mistake.

What did I do wrong? I’ve just been lying here quietly.

“She probably thinks you’re stupid for being hit by books.”

Vayuna isn’t helping at all. She keeps mocking me since I woke up, calling me stupid for not using the power I have. Honestly, I’d admit that too, but let me reiterate, my body felt out of control at that moment. Seeing Solar fall down the stairs, my body moved on its own to save him.

I tried to retort to Vayuna by blaming her for not helping me, but she scolded me instead. She said I shouldn’t rely too much on her power because there would come a time when she couldn’t assist me, and I’d have to depend on myself. I couldn’t argue with her because she was right.

Why are so many people scolding me today? I’ve just woken up, and my body feels so sore.

By midday, as I was struggling to eat the lunch Maripos brought me, Halilintar came again. This time, he was accompanied by two boys who looked similar to each other. The difference between them might be their clothes and eye color. Both of them were holding Halilintar’s hands. One looked confident, while the other hid behind Halilintar’s body.

“Brother! I’m so glad you’re awake!”

I just smiled at him, unsure of how to respond. Duri let go of Halilintar’s hand, walked toward me, and sat in front of me. His green eyes sparkled with the usual gleam I saw when he forced me to bake cakes. He’s not going to make me do that now, is he? My body still hurts so much I couldn’t even walk to this table without Maripos’s help!

I glanced at Halilintar, who was now massaging his temples.

“Duri, that’s not how you greet your brother.” Halilintar scolded him. He might have let Duri act as he pleased if we were in the Sunset Palace, but now we’re in the Main Palace, and the door to the room isn’t closed. Guards and servants outside could easily hear our conversation and spread unfavorable rumors. Even so, Duri is just a 9-year-old child. He’s also Taufan's younger brother, and his current status is still far higher than mine. I should be the one greeting them, but as soon as they entered the room, Halilintar’s gaze warned me to stay seated.

“It’s okay, Your Highness.”

Halilintar didn’t pursue the matter further. Perhaps because I didn’t make an issue of it. I shifted my gaze to the boy still hiding behind Halilintar’s body while clutching the First Prince of Ignisia’s hand. Noticing my gaze, Halilintar pulled the boy out of hiding and said, “Solar, greet your brother.”

The Seventh Prince of Ignisia, Prince Solar, looked scare. He didn’t even dare to meet my eyes. His hands fidgeted nervously, and his mouth kept opening and closing.

“Solar.” Halilintar spoke again. This time his voice was sharp and full of warning.

Ugh, Halilintar’s voice sounded intimidating. Even I flinched a little upon hearing it, let alone Solar, who is only 9 years old. He trembled as soon as he heard the warning tone in his eldest brother’s voice. His eyes welled up with tears, seemingly about to cry.

Oh, poor child.

“Your Highness... please don’t be harsh on him...”

I couldn’t bear to see someone as young as Solar trembling in fear. Perhaps he was being scolded by Halilintar for putting me in this condition, though it wasn’t his fault at all. Maybe that’s why he’s so scared now. He must be afraid I’d scold him or that Halilintar would get angry at him again.

Strangely, Duri, Solar’s twin brother, was busy stealing potato pieces from my plate. He seemed unaffected by Halilintar’s voice or the fact that his twin brother was trembling like a newborn deer.

This child is truly peculiar.

I slid my plate toward him, letting Duri eat my lunch, which I’d only taken one bite of. Is he really a prince? He doesn’t care if the food has already been eaten? I’ll think about that later; for now, it’s better to focus on Halilintar and Solar.

“Solar, remember what I told you before we came here?”

I saw Solar nod frantically. He was genuinely terrified at this point. Goodness, did Halilintar force him to come? He shouldn’t have done that to Solar. Solar is just a child, and he also experienced a terrifying event yesterday. Falling down the stairs and being buried under heavy books isn’t something anyone would want to endure. Solar’s small body must have been hurt by the incident.

“Your Highness, please don’t force him—”

“I-I... I greet the Second Prince of Ignisia, Prince Taufan!” Solar suddenly exclaimed. He bowed deeply to me, too low for a prince with a status higher than mine.

I was stunned by the sudden greeting.

“Good.”

I quickly shifted my gaze to Halilintar. The young man smiled and affectionately ruffled Solar’s hair. Meanwhile, Solar looked overjoyed at that. His cheeks flushed, and his silver eyes sparkled upon hearing Halilintar’s praise. Wait, why do I feel like I’ve misunderstood what’s happening here?

I thought Solar was afraid of Halilintar earlier, and I thought Halilintar was angry with him and forcing him to apologize to me. Was Solar just nervous about how to greet me?

"Isn't there something you'd like to say to your second brother?"

"Uh-uh..."

Solar looked restless again. Now I knew he wasn't afraid of being scolded by Halilintar but was just nervous. He looked adorable to me, not pitiful. He was the youngest prince, the same age as Duri. In short, he was just a cute little boy.

"Uh... B-brother... I'm sorry for causing you to get hurt."

Oh! He looked even more adorable as he said it. His flushed face and fidgety movements reminded me of my youngest brother, who always got shy when asking me for something. Ah, he used to be such a sweet little brother. Why did he turn so feisty when he entered high school?

"And... and thank you so much for saving me!" Solar practically shouted the last part. His voice was so high-pitched it made Duri glance over and snort, as if mocking his twin brother. I saw Solar shoot a sharp look at his twin, then leap back behind Halilintar to hide. He peeked out shyly from behind Halilintar's figure, making me smile fondly at him. He was so cute! I wanted to pinch those adorable cheeks!

Compared to before, I now saw Halilintar smile faintly. He seemed proud of his youngest brother.

"Forgive his behavior; he's been crying nonstop since last night, worrying about you."

"Brother!"

It seemed Halilintar was the kind of elder brother who loved teasing his younger siblings. I noticed Solar's face flush, and he hid himself even more from my view. His small hands, covered in white gloves, clutched Halilintar's clothes tightly.

"It's no problem, Your Highness. I'm just glad Prince Solar is safe and sound."

"Are you feeling better now?"

"My body still hurts a lot, but Doctor Kién has given me some pain-killer. The pain is manageable," I said while moving my right arm to test how much pain I felt.

At that moment, Halilintar, Duri, and Solar looked at me with the same expression. They seemed sad, even though I had just said I was fine. Did they not believe me?

I wanted to change the subject, but I didn’t know what to say. Then I noticed Halilintar’s gaze fall on my plate of food, which Duri had taken. He smiled faintly and said, “Shall I ask Maripos to bring you something else to eat?”

“No. I don’t think I can eat. My stomach has been queasy for a while now. I might throw up if I eat anything.”

My words only made a worried expression appear on Halilintar's face again, "Should I call Doctor Kién to check on you?"

"No need. It might just be a side effect of a concussion. Resting for a while should make it better."

Halilintar's concern hasn't faded, and now even Solar looks increasingly worried. Oh no, did I make the youngest sad?

“The name might sound scary, but it’s not dangerous,” I said, trying to reassure Solar. But it seemed I only managed to irritate Halilintar. Luckily, he didn’t say anything. Though I was sure he wanted to scold me for saying that. Perhaps he held himself back because there were two of his younger brothers in the room.

“Is Prince Solar all right? Yesterday, you fell from quite a high staircase. You must be hurt too.”

Solar looked at me hesitantly, then glanced at Halilintar as if asking his eldest brother to answer for him. Halilintar only gave him his usual flat stare in return.

“Um... just a few scrapes and bruises,” Solar replied. His voice was so small, and he clung even closer to Halilintar. Was Solar the shy type of child? He turned out to be different from my youngest brother, who was overly confident.

“Have the wounds been treated?”

“...Yes. Duri and Doctor Kién already treated me.”

Ah, how cute. Duri and Solar were the youngest among the seven princes, and they were both absolutely adorable. I wished I could spend more time with the two of them.

I kept trying to get Solar to talk. He was shy at first, but once he started feeling comfortable, he slowly came out of his “hiding place”—Halilintar’s body—and eventually sat with me and Duri. Halilintar also sat with us, having instructed the servants to prepare tea and snacks, which we enjoyed together.

Prince Solar turned out to be not so different from my youngest brother. Both loved learning and reading books. Also, for some reason, I felt Solar always looked at me with sparkling eyes. I didn’t understand what that gaze meant, but it seemed like a good thing.

Halilintar allowed the two children to stay in his room until evening, then instructed them to return to the Sunrise Palace. Duri complained about this, but Solar obeyed his eldest brother’s orders. Though he didn’t seem to want to leave the Sunrise Palace like Duri, he still bowed to Halilintar and me as a farewell gesture. He appeared to be an independent child who followed his brother’s commands. He even managed to convince Duri to stop whining and leave with him. What a good kid.

I glanced out the open window; the sun had started to set, and the day would soon come to an end. It seemed I should also hurry back to the Sunset Palace. I was just about to call for Maripos when Halilintar spoke.

“I’ve ordered the Royal Guard to reopen the investigation into Qually. They’ll begin interrogation sessions once the reinvestigation is complete.”

That was good news. I hoped they could find strong enough evidence to prove Qually’s innocence and free him. Hopefully, they could also find the real culprit. Moreover, I wished that if Sofia’s case was true, she could get the justice she deserved. I hoped Halilintar would punish that scoundrel Beruth once he learned the truth about Sofia’s disappearance.

I hoped there would be no more cases like Sofia’s—though I doubted such things would stop anytime soon.

“Taufan.”

“Yes, Your Highness?”

“You shouldn’t have risked yourself like that to save Solar.”

What? What was Halilintar saying? Was he suggesting I should have just stood by and watched a child fall down the stairs? Wasn’t Solar his brother too? No matter how much he cared for Taufan, he shouldn’t have said that! If my body hadn’t moved to catch Solar at that moment, that kid would have been hurt now. He might have even broken some bones, considering the height of the stairs he climbed.

"Don't misunderstand me. I also don't want Solar to get hurt; he is my brother, and I just want all of you—my brothers—to always be safe. However, Solar can take care of himself. This isn't the first time he's fallen off the library stairs."

Not the first time? That kid has fallen off the stairs multiple times?! How can Halilintar be so calm about this?!

"Solar has good reflexes. If he falls, he can twist his body to adjust his landing and minimize the impact. He and Duri have been climbing high places since they were little, and they know how to save themselves if they fall."

Uh... so what Halilintar means is... Solar could save himself that time? Did I do something pointless, then? I don't know if what I'm feeling right now is embarrassment, disappointment, or something else. Even so, I must clarify that I didn't throw myself recklessly to save Solar. My body moved on its own when I saw that kid falling. I'm convinced it was the residual consciousness of the original Taufan in this body. Seeing his brother in danger made him want to save him. Perhaps his strong desire to ensure his brother's safety allowed him to take control of his body again, even though my soul is now the one inside it. After all, the original Taufan was like that—he loved his brothers deeply. That must be etched deep within his body.

"Um... let's just say it was an instinct as an older brother, Your Highness. I'm sure you would do the same for your brothers." I said as an excuse.

Halilintar seemed to sigh. He extended his hand and touched my right wrist, which was wrapped in bandages. "You're right. I would do anything for all of you. Especially for you, Taufan. So, please, don't put yourself in danger again."

I wanted to promise Halilintar that, but it seems danger loves Taufan too much and always appears wherever I go. In the end, I could only tell Halilintar not to worry because I would try my best to take care of myself. After all, I have Maripos and Captain Fang who always by my side, not to mention that I now have Vayuna too.

"What do you think of Solar?"

"He's a good child. Adorable like Prince Duri and smart."

"He'll be thrilled if he hears you praise him like that."

I was a bit confused by Halilintar's words. Why would Solar be thrilled to know I praised him? Weren't he and Taufan not close? Besides, when Taufan was exiled to the Sunset Palace, Solar was only seven years old. Not to mention, when Taufan started becoming paranoid and distancing himself from his brothers, Solar was only four. Shouldn't he feel scared or estranged from Taufan?

Even Duri, who often visited the Sunset Palace, initially didn't want to talk to me. He also seemed constantly on guard whenever I tried to approach him. That attitude made sense, considering Taufan's power often went out of control and hurt those around him.

"Why?"

Halilintar smiled fondly. "Solar... has always admired you."

"Really?"

"Yes. You're his idol. He wants to be just like you."

"Even so, I have nothing to be proud of now. Shouldn't Prince Solar know that too?"

I don't understand why Solar could admire Taufan. I admit he was a good prince, judging by how the servants treat me. I also know he was remarkable, considering he reached the final stage of his power at eleven years old. But all of that doesn't seem enough for Solar to idolize Taufan. He was forgotten by his kingdom, deemed unworthy of being their prince, exiled from his brothers to the Sunset Palace, and looked down upon by people far below his status.

"Taufan, no matter what has happened, in Solar's eyes, you're still the best. You attended more classes than any of us as a child and always received praise from your mentors. Father often took you along for diplomatic visits to neighboring kingdoms. Not to mention your achievements in other areas. Even now, you're showing me things I didn't notice when handling this case. You're an incredible person, Taufan. Both then and now, you're someone worthy of admiration. I've always admired you too. So, please, don't belittle yourself like that."

Even if Halilintar was talking about the original Taufan and not me, I still felt moved to hear him say that.

I hope the original Taufan can hear these words. I hope he knows how much he is loved by his brothers. I hope he knows that Halilintar would do anything for him, that Gempa is willing to travel far and wide to find a way to heal him, that Duri loves him so much that he treasures anything Taufan gives him, and that Solar still sees him as a great figure and idolizes him. I hope he knows how much he means to his brothers.

"Thank you, Your Highness. That means a lot."

Halilintar smiled at me, reaching out to ruffle my hair. Then, he stood up and said he had things to take care of. He was probably still trying to finish the pile of paperwork on his desk. It was massive the last time I saw it—there's no way he could finish it all in just one day.

"I think I should return to the Sunset Palace."

"No. I still don't feel comfortable sending you back in this condition."

"But—"

"No buts. I'll come back tonight, and we can read books together if you'd like. I've already asked Maripos to fetch the books you usually read."

Halilintar, when he's like this, is impossible to argue with. Besides, my body still feels sore. I doubt a carriage ride would be comfortable in my current condition. So, I could only comply.

Halilintar carried me to the bed—I had told him he only needed to help me walk, but he refused. He also made sure Maripos was in the room before he finally left. I was at a loss for words to deal with him.

...

"Is there anything else you need, Your Highness?"

"No. Thank you for today, Maripos."

"I'll leave you to rest. Good night, Your Highness."

Maripos turned off the lights—yes, lights. It turns out the Main Palace has lights powered by magical crystals—leaving the room dark. Even so, he left one candle lit and placed it on the nightstand, knowing I would read before bed.

"Good night, Maripos. Sweet dreams."

"You too, Your Highness."

Then I heard the door open and close. Maripos had left, and I was alone in Halilintar's room. Halilintar said he would return soon, but it seemed like it would take a while. He must be very busy. I hope he doesn't overwork himself to the point of getting sick. I can't imagine how panicked this kingdom would be if their First Prince fell ill from exhaustion.

I picked up the book Maripos had brought earlier. It was one of the novels Halilintar had bought from Lucky Bookstore, recommended directly by one of the staff there. The story was truly captivating and refreshing for me. It was about a village girl who loved reading books and a hunter who lived alone in the forest. So sweet and adorable!

Actually, I've never liked romance stories without some adventure or fantasy elements, but this story really caught my attention since the staff at Lucky Bookstore told me about it!

I mean, I'm so used to stories about princesses and princes, village girls and princes, Northern Dukes and poor girls—ugh, those kinds of stories are so cliché! I need something fresh and fun. This story, for example!

They’re not nobles, they're not involved in noble intrigues, and it’s just a sweet love story that makes me kick my feet like a girl in love. I really like them! Even when reading it with Maripos, I saw him smiling and chuckling too! The author deserves applause! Maybe I should look for more works by this author.

I was completely engrossed in the story I was reading, so hearing a sound from the balcony startled me greatly.

Who could it be?

Was it Halilintar?

But why use the balcony?

Or... could it be an assassin like the ones I read about in novels and comics?!

I jumped off the bed as quietly as possible and tried to hide in the shadows. I searched the room for something I could use as a weapon. The only thing available was the book I had been reading. I wasn’t sure I could fend off an assassin with a book.

“Vayuna.”

“I know. There are two people, but you don’t need to worry.”

Why would Vayuna tell me not to worry? She just said there are two people! Two people trying to enter the First Prince’s room through the balcony!

“Because they won’t harm you.”

What does she mean? Are these people too weak or something?

Even though Vayuna said the two people on the balcony weren’t dangerous, I couldn’t stay calm. I’d already faced bandits who tried to sell me and a mysterious attacker who kept coming after me even though I didn’t know them. Not to mention the fact that the original Taufan had survived an assassination attempt before I entered his body. How could I possibly stay calm with all that?!

But it seemed like Vayuna didn’t understand the anxiety and fear I was feeling because that annoying bird summoned a strong gust of wind that blew the balcony door open.

“Vayuna!”

“I told you there’s no need to worry. Don’t you trust me?”

If I admitted it, Vayuna would definitely peck me hard. I decided not to tell her. Although the snort I heard in my head indicated she already knew my answer.

I waited anxiously for the two people to reveal themselves—I was still hiding and clutching the book in my hand as an emergency weapon. After what felt like forever—probably about a minute—a voice called out, “Brother? Are you asleep?”

“Prince Duri?”

What is that child doing here? Especially at this time of night!

Knowing the identity of one of them made me breathe a sigh of relief. Though I was still confused about why he was here. I stepped out of my hiding spot, grabbed a candle from the nightstand, and limped toward the balcony—I hadn’t realized how much my legs still hurt from jumping off the bed! There, standing hand in hand, were two small children in nightgowns: Duri and Solar.

Just seeing them made my head throb.

“Your Highnesses, may I know why you’re here and not in your beds?”

Both Duri and Solar wore guilty expressions. They clutched their nightgowns until they wrinkled, bowing their heads and avoiding my gaze. I could only sigh and tell them to come inside. I walked to the edge of the balcony, noticing the vines wrapped around the railings. They must have used those to climb up. Halilintar was right; they often climbed to high places.

I returned to the room, closed the balcony door, and looked at the two kids standing in the middle of the room, still looking as guilty as ever. I couldn’t bring myself to be angry at them; they were too adorable. Besides, there must have been a reason they dared to come here, knowing Halilintar would be upset.

“Did something happen, Your Highnesses?”

They glanced at each other, perhaps deciding who would explain. After a moment, Duri spoke up. “We... we couldn’t sleep. Solar kept having nightmares, and so did I.”

“Then why come to the Main Palace? And why climb up here?”

“Um... Brother Blaze and Brother Ice don’t like being disturbed at night. Usually... Brother Halilintar would sleep with us, but he hasn’t returned to the Sunrise Palace for a month.”

Ah... I see. They must have come to the Main Palace looking for Halilintar, but Halilintar was still busy with whatever he was doing in his study. The truth was, they were still just children. It was only natural for them to have nightmares and seek comfort from someone they trusted, like Halilintar. They no longer had their parents, so they could only rely on their eldest brother. Poor kids.

I placed the candle on the floor, told them to come closer, and knelt before them to match their height—I ignored the throbbing pain in my leg. I stroked their hair to assure them I wasn’t angry and that I was willing to stay with them.

“Prince Halilintar is still busy right now, but he’ll be back soon. How about you climb into bed? I’ll stay with you instead.”

The two of them exchanged glances again, silently communicating. Then they nodded and climbed into bed as I suggested. Seeing them settle comfortably in bed, I picked up the candle from the floor and walked to the bedside table, placing the still-lit candle back on it.

“Would you like some warm milk? It might help you sleep better.”

"Um! I want it!" Duri exclaimed. The candlelight wasn't bright enough for me to see his face, but I knew what expression Duri was showing.

"What about Prince Solar? Does the Prince want some too?"

Solar didn't answer immediately as Duri did, I wonder what he was thinking.

"No. I'm fine." Even though he said that, his voice sounded uncertain. It was as if he wanted it but was holding himself back. Why?

"Don't be like that. The Prince is still growing, and you need calcium to make your bones strong."

"Calcium? What's that?"

Oh, I unknowingly used a term from my world. How should I explain this to them? Do they even know what's in milk? Uh, this is difficult when you don't fully understand the world you're living in.

"Well... it's one of the contents in milk. It's beneficial for strengthening bones and teeth."

"Will drinking milk make me stronger?"

"Eh? Not exactly, but it's healthy. Your age is a growth stage and you need it to grow well."

Solar nodded, whether he understood my explanation or not. I was also confused about how to explain it. At least he said he wanted warm milk too.

I asked the guard standing by the door to inform Maripos to bring two glasses of warm milk. Honestly, I felt bad disturbing the young man’s rest, but he was the only one I could trust in the Main Palace right now. I wasn't sure if the servants in the Main Palace would serve me well. As a return favor, when we go back to the Sunset Palace later, I’ll let Maripos rest longer.

While waiting for Maripos with the warm milk, I sat on the chair beside the bed and resumed reading the book I had been reading before Duri and Solar arrived. I was so absorbed in admiring the hunter who was so sweet to the girl he loved when I was startled by a voice, "Big brother, what are you reading?"

Duri stared at me with curiosity. Oh, they must be bored since they've been quiet for so long. I closed my book, "Just a story. Aren't you feeling sleepy yet, Your Highness?"

Duri shook his head, "Is the story good? I want to read it too!"

"Ah... unfortunately, this book isn't suitable for you to read, Your Highness."

"Why?"

"Because you're not old enough. Wait a few more years, and then you'll be able to read it."

Though he pouted, Duri didn't insist on reading my book. Thank goodness. There's no way I would let a little child read a story like this. Even though there are no adult scenes, there are parts that refer to it. I might tarnish the innocence of a child.

"Then, can you read us a bedtime story?"

"Does Prince Halilintar often do that?"

Duri shook his head, "No. But Mother used to do it."

Ah, right, these two children lost their parents at such a young age. They lost their mother when they were only 4 and their father when they were 7. Not to mention they had to get caught up in the power-hungry schemes of adults. How unfortunate that they didn’t have a happy childhood.

"Of course, what story would you like to hear?"

"Um... Solar, do you remember the story Mother used to read to us?"

Solar, who had been silent all this time, now joined the conversation. His voice sounded calm, as if he was trying to act mature and hide his excitement. He seemed to be suppressing his joy, unlike Duri who showed it clearly.

"I remember the story about the singing blanket."

Oh my, what kind of story is that? Is that a children's fairy tale in this world? But I don't know any children's fairy tales from this world! I only know stories from my own world. Would they mind if I just told them those?

"Eh... I don't remember that story, Your Highness," at that moment, through the dim light from the candle on the nightstand, I saw the disappointed expression on Solar's face, which he tried to hide. It seemed he really liked that story, but unfortunately, I had no idea.

"However, I know many other interesting stories. How about that?"

"Yes! A new story is always welcome, right Solar?"

"Yes."

Again, Solar seemed to be trying to hide his excitement. But in his eyes, the same joy as Duri's was clearly visible. Why does this child keep trying to act mature? Just this afternoon, he looked childish when he was with Halilintar.

I was about to ask when a knock on the door was heard, followed by Maripos's voice. I told him to come in. He was still wearing his uniform and carrying a tray with two glasses of milk on it. Maripos didn't seem surprised to find Duri and Solar in the bed; he probably guessed when he was asked to bring two glasses of milk. However, his gaze at me didn't look pleasant. He must be upset that I wasn't asleep yet.

I am not wrong here, Maripos. It wasn’t me who invited these two children. They invited themselves.

Maripos replaced the lit candle with a new one. He must have guessed that we wouldn’t go to sleep right after the two young princes finished their milk.

“Thank you very much, Maripos. You can go back now, and I apologize for troubling you.”

“It is my duty to serve you, Your Highness.”

After Maripos left, I made sure the two kids finished their milk and instructed them not to lie down immediately after drinking it. Fortunately, they obeyed. However, they were already demanding that I tell them a story right away. I could only sigh at their impatience.

“The story I’m going to tell is called ‘Kisah Dua Anak Raja.’ It’s about a king who lost his child.”

“Why are you telling a sad story, Brother?”

I chuckled at Duri’s comment, “This isn’t a sad story, Your Highness. How about you listen first and then decide whether this story is sad or not?”

Duri simply nodded. I smiled at him and continued the story, “Once upon a time, in the Kingdom of Sanggabuana, there lived a king named Sabda Alam. At that time, the king and queen were very happy because they were blessed with twin sons.”

“Oh! Just like me and Solar!”

“Yes, just like you and Prince Solar.”

I continued my story, trying my best to imitate the characters in the tale to satisfy this two kids. Duri laughed when I told the part about Cungkring who dreamed of becoming a king’s son. They were annoyed when they heard about Prince Dwipa’s incompetence because he was too spoiled. They were also surprised when they found out that the rebellion was actually led by the king’s own advisor. Solar was very impressed when I told the part about Eka answering King Sabda Alam’s question with wisdom and correctness. In the end, when the king finally recognized Eka as his lost son, Duri and Solar cheered with joy.

“I’m glad the king could recognize Eka,” Duri said while yawning. I adjusted the blanket covering them and gently rubbed Duri’s hair, “Every parent will always recognize their child, even if they’ve been apart for a long time. It’s love that gives them that strength.”

“What about siblings? Will you recognize us even if we’re apart for a long time?” This time, it was the youngest who asked the question.

I wasn’t sure how to answer that, but I thought the original Taufan would definitely recognize his brothers, no matter how long they were apart. Because even his body reacted when he saw Solar fall down the stairs.

“Yes, I’m sure I would recognize you, Your Highness, no matter how long we’ve been apart.”

Solar merely mumbled. He had already closed his eyes, just like Duri, who had already drifted into the world of dreams.

Chapter Text

Boboiboy Fanfiction

©  Boboiboy | Animonsta Studio

A/N: The entire story is purely fictional, and the author does not profit from writing this story. If there are any similarities in ideas, character names, or locations, they are purely coincidental.

≫ ──── ≪•◦ ❈ ◦•≫ ──── ≪

I finally returned to the Sunset Palace after Halilintar kept me in the Main Palace for two days. He refused to let me leave until doctor Kién confirmed that I was completely fine. Even though my bruises had faded and my leg no longer hurt thanks to Duri’s help.

The journey back to the Sunset Palace was much more chaotic than when I went to the Main Palace. Halilintar assigned even more soldiers than before to escort me. No matter what I said, he wouldn’t listen. In the end, I could only surrender to his stubbornness. And don’t even ask—he punished Commander Kaika for failing to protect me. Once again, I had to beg him to stop punishing people whenever I got hurt because of my own mistakes.

Anyway, Duri and Solar visited me often while I was in the Main Palace. And after that night when I found them on Halilintar’s balcony, they came back again to hear more stories from me. Their excuse was that they were having trouble sleeping, though I knew it was just a reason to sneak into their eldest brother’s room.

Halilintar did scold them for sneaking out of the Sunrise Palace, but he still allowed them to come. He truly loves his younger brothers. It’s amazing he hasn’t gone bald yet with all the pressure he’s under and the ridiculous antics of his brothers—including me, who always gives him a headache.

Well, in the end, I’m happy to be back in the Sunset Palace. Away from the noise and the threats to my life.

Now that I have time to myself, I can finally think about a lot of things. One of them is what I saw when I first looked into Solar’s eyes.

It was like a faint memory of something that happened years ago. But even though it felt so distant, I knew for certain that the silver-eyed young man was Solar. And if my guess was correct, all of this came from the original Taufan’s memories. Which only made me even more confused.

If that young man was Solar and the memory belonged to the original Taufan, how could that be possible? The Solar in that memory was a young man in his twenties, looking frail and thin, while the Solar I know now is a nine-year-old child who hides behind his eldest brother.

Was that a vision of the future? Could Taufan see the future? Was that the fate waiting for Solar?

Or… could it be that the original Taufan had actually been reborn, and somehow, I ended up in his body? I mean, that would explain the fragments of his memories I saw. But it still wouldn’t explain why I ended up in his body.

If he really was reborn—like in so many novels and comics I’ve read—then why isn’t his soul the one occupying this body? Why is it my soul, a random art student who knows nothing about this world?!

“Vayuna, is it possible for someone to go back in time?” I asked hesitantly.

“Of course not. Messing with time is impossible for humans. The price of tampering with time would be too great. It could erase your entire existence.”

Vayuna said it was impossible, but why do I still believe that the original Taufan actually went back in time? Maybe the reason his soul is no longer here is because of the price Vayuna mentioned. And maybe before he completely disappeared, he—somehow—did something that brought my soul into his body, so that he wouldn’t entirely vanish from his brothers’ lives.

Of course, there’s also the possibility that the original Taufan could see the future. After all, this is a world where a bird can talk and transform into an annoying five-year-old kid, where a giant golden bear acts like a spoiled kitten, where gods and goddesses grant humans their blessings, and where little kid love to climb vines. Compared to all of that, seeing the future seems like a minor thing.

ARGH!

This was just a novel my brother told me about, so why did I end up in this world, dealing with constant headaches?!

I could only sigh and stare at the ceiling. There was no point in overthinking it. I had no way to prove my theories. It was better to focus on my original goal—making Halilintar the King and returning to my world. But before that, I needed to find out who summoned me here and why.

The only one I could think of who might have the answers was Vint. But until now, I had no idea how to meet her. She was a goddess, which meant her existence was probably equivalent to God in my world.

Even so, didn’t Aarav say that Vint once appeared before the High Priest before her? That meant there was a chance for me to meet her. The problem was, I had no idea how.

Was there a way for me to see her?

Oh! If I remember correctly, Vayuna said she was Vint’s right hand and had lived with her all this time, right? Maybe she knew how I could meet her!

“Vayuna, do you think I can meet Vint?”

“Why are you asking?”

“There’s something really important I need to ask her.”

“I don’t know. There are limits between gods and humans. Gods can’t just meet humans whenever they want, and humans can’t demand an audience with gods as they please.”

“So that means I can’t meet her?”

I felt so disappointed hearing Vayuna’s explanation. I had hoped that having her—who claimed to be Vint’s right hand—would finally allow me to meet the goddess and learn why I was brought to this world and how I could return home.

It seemed like I would have to find the answers myself.

"Not really. I can ask the Goddess."

"Really?"

"Yes, but that means I have to leave your side. And when I say leave your side, I truly won’t appear even if you call for me."

Hearing Vayuna’s voice, I knew what she meant. She was saying that if she left to ask Vint, I would be without her protection. Any danger that arose while she was gone, I would have to face on my own. She wouldn’t be able to help me like she did when the bandits approached me, nor could she create a shield like when Ace’s fireball flew toward me and Lilia in Fontis City. I would be back to how I was before forming a bond with her.  

But that didn’t matter.  

After all, what could possibly endanger me?  

I would only spend my time in my room, by the lake, or in the garden. Maripos and Captain Fang would be there to guard me. I would be fine even without Vayuna. Meeting Vint was far more important right now.  

“I ask for your help then, Vayuna. There’s something important I must ask Vint.”  

Vayuna didn’t answer right away. Maybe she was thinking it over.  

“Is it that important?”  

“Yes, it’s a matter of life and death.”  

I wasn’t lying, don’t think I was exaggerating. I truly needed to know how I entered this world and why. I also needed to know how to leave. Should I wait and let the story play out until the end—even though I had already caused so many changes—or should I stick to my original goal, ensuring that Halilintar becomes king and survives his coronation day? I knew I would face even greater dangers in the future because of it.  

“You’re being dramatic, Taufan. But I’ll ask the Goddess for you.”  

“Thank you so much, Vayuna. You can always be relied on.”  

I could hear Vayuna scoff in my head. Her attitude only made me laugh unconsciously. Maybe I would feel a little lonely with Vayuna gone since there would be no one making noise in my head, but I could handle the peaceful silence for a while.  

Vayuna must have left at night because I didn’t hear her cheerful chirping when Maripos came to help me bathe and bring my dinner. I also didn’t hear her urging me to keep practicing my power control.  

Tch, that rude little bird. Leaving without even saying goodbye.  

Even so, I hoped Vayuna would return soon, and I hoped she would bring good news when she did.  

...  

It had been two days since Vayuna left—I didn’t know where she went—to speak with Vint, and I was left with no one to entertain me during my free time.  

Halilintar hadn’t updated me on the Qually case, Duri hadn’t visited because he was busy with his studies, and the same went for Solar—even though he had never visited the Sunset Palace before. I had resumed sword training with Captain Fang, but he said my training time had to be reduced until I was fully recovered—even though I was already fine.  

I wasn’t in the mood to read, and Maripos was busy in the kitchen overseeing the cooks preparing my lunch. Captain Fang stood silently behind me without any intention of speaking. I had tried engaging him in conversation about various topics, but Captain Fang was not an entertaining conversationalist. He was a great listener, unfortunately, he rarely contributed to the conversation, leaving me feeling bored. Ah, what a dull day.  

In the midst of my boredom, Papileon suddenly appeared and informed me that Halilintar had come to see me.  

I was utterly shocked. I thought Halilintar was too busy to go anywhere. When I was about to return to the Sunset Palace, Halilintar could only escort me to the Main Palace gate—he also helped me into the carriage. He looked deeply regretful that he couldn’t accompany me back to the Sunset Palace and seemed to want to come along, but the pile of paperwork in his office prevented him from doing so.  

Hearing that he had come to visit now was truly surprising. Even so, I was happy about it. It meant I finally had someone to talk to.  

I ran out of my room, nearly tumbling down the stairs again due to my carelessness—fortunately, I managed to regain my balance before falling—and met Halilintar, who seemed to be on his way to see me.  

“Don’t run, Taufan. You might fall.”  

“Ahaha… I’m just really happy to hear that Your Highness has come.”  

One of Halilintar’s eyebrows lifted. “Oh? So you finally admit that you miss your brother?”  

“Nope~”  

Halilintar only laughed, making me laugh along with him. He must be used to my antics by now.  

“What brings Your Highness here today? I thought you were still very busy.”  

“I am, but there’s something I need to talk to you about.”  

This time, Halilintar’s expression became much more serious. I knew this wasn’t a conversation to have in front of others, so I invited him to my room. I asked one of the servants with us to prepare tea and snacks—I suspected this would be a long discussion—and also asked Captain Fang to stand guard outside my door.  

“So, what is it that Your Highness wants to discuss with me?” I asked once the servant who brought the tea and snacks had left the room.  

Halilintar didn’t answer immediately. He opened the sugar jar and dropped two sugar cubes into his tea, stirring it slowly. He really knew how to make me restless with curiosity. I wanted so badly to strangle Halilintar and force him to speak—but I only did that in my imagination.  

“About the maid you mentioned.”  

“Oh! Sofia? Did Your Highness find any clues about her?”  

Halilintar nodded, then shook his head again. What was that supposed to mean?  

“Sofia was an orphan who worked at Baron Kalns’ residence for a year before suddenly disappearing, correct?”  

“Uh… yes.”  

Why was Halilintar asking that? He should already know if he had been investigating Sofia.  

“She came from Fontis City with her friend to Tarín City when she was 14 years old, got accepted to work at Baron Kalns’ residence at 15, and disappeared at 16.”  

I could only nod as Halilintar explained about Sofia. I didn’t know the details because Captain Fang had only given me a summary of his investigation. I only knew that Sofia disappeared—or was killed—when she was 16, and I suspected that Beruth was the culprit.  

“I have checked Sofia’s background, including the orphanage where she was raised and her previous house in Tarín. Baron Kalns’ residence is also under further investigation to find more evidence.”  

More evidence?

Did Halilintar manage to find the evidence for the reason Sofia disappeared?

"Taufan, do you know that Baron Kalns' residence is quite close to the forest?"

"Huh? I didn't know about that. I didn't investigate his residence, Your Highness. Is something wrong?"

"The forest is filled with wild animals, though it is not a magical forest like in the eastern part of Tarín City, it is still a forest full of wild beasts."

What is Halilintar trying to say? Why is he suddenly talking about the forest and the animals in it? Weren't we just discussing Sofia? What connection does Sofia have with this forest? Could it be that Sofia is not dead but alive in that forest, held captive by Beruth and his family?

"What do you think would happen if a dying person were left there?"

"Huh? Isn't it obvious they would die? They're dying and left in a forest full of wild animals, how could they possibly survive?"

Halilintar smiled slightly at me, but his grip on his teacup tightened. I still didn't know what was wrong. I tried to think again about what Halilintar had just said and what Captain Fang had investigated. At that moment, I realized why Halilintar had seemed so tense all along.

Wasn't it said that Beruth beat a servant to death? I suspected that the servant was Sofia, because after she disappeared, this rumor started to spread. Oh my God. What is Halilintar implying, that Sofia was dumped there?! While she was still alive?!

Beruth is a damn bastard! Oh my God, I am at a loss for words for that bastard.

Let me try to piece together the events. Sofia, so young and unable to resist her master, was beaten to the brink of death and then thrown into the forest to either die from her wounds or become prey to the wild animals. Meanwhile, the bastard who did this to her is enjoying his life, drinking, gambling, and playing with women.

Poor Sofia, her soul may never rest peacefully.

Oh, Sofia, even though I don't know you, I will make sure that bastard Beruth gets the punishment he deserves for making you suffer like this!

"Since you seem to understand, I will continue our conversation."

I refocused on Halilintar, wondering how he could still drink his tea while talking about this. The tea and the cakes on the table suddenly didn’t seem appetizing as I thought about the misfortune that had befallen poor Sofia.

"The Royal Guards searching around that forest found some bones believed to be human. From their size, they seem to belong to a young person. The Royal Guards are still trying to find more bones, and I’ve directed another investigation team to examine those bones."

No human, especially a teenager, deserves something like this. Sofia was just a poor, young girl trying to survive. Unfortunately, fate was so cruel to her, and this is how she ended up. I truly hope she can find peace—though I doubt it—after her death.

"They also found this near the location where the bones were discovered." Halilintar placed a simple necklace that looked dirty, covered in dirt, on the table. Despite this, the pink gemstone on the necklace still caught the light and gleamed.

This might belong to Sofia. That poor girl must have loved it. I hope that after this case is over, Halilintar will give her a proper burial. Oh, I feel like crying for her.

"I now understand why you think Sofia is connected to this case, because, after thinking about it, it’s very likely that someone wants to take revenge on Beruth for Sofia’s death."

"Yes, I also thought the same, Your Highness. I think it might be her friend who came to Tarín City with her."

But Halilintar shook his head, "It’s impossible for her friend to have done that. Unless she turned into a ghost and strangled Beruth to death."

"What... what do you mean, Your Majesty?"

"Her friend also died 3 months after Sofia was reported missing, falling into a ravine—suspected of committing suicide."

She must not have been able to accept the fact that her friend was declared missing—actually dead. Once again, I feel strange about this.

They were just poor children, unable to do anything against someone stronger than them. I hope their next lives will be far better than this one.

"The interrogation session will start today. But we will only focus on finding the person who poisoned Beruth."

"But what about—"

Halilintar raised his right hand, signaling for me to be silent. I closed my mouth, realizing that Halilintar’s expression looked so serious.

"I understand your feelings, Taufan, but from the beginning, this investigation has been about finding the person who poisoned Beruth. You know Beruth has many enemies, and there’s also a possibility this case isn’t connected to Sofia’s case. However, I will not turn a blind eye to Sofia’s case. Once this case is resolved, I will form a new investigative team to look into Sofia’s case."

I could only nod at Halilintar’s explanation. He was right, from the beginning, Halilintar’s task was to uncover who poisoned Beruth, that bastard. He wouldn’t even have known about Sofia if I hadn’t told him. Then, I, at first, was just trying to help Qually clear his false accusation. I had forgotten my original purpose for getting involved in this investigation because of my sympathy for Sofia. Ah, my overly soft conscience.

I was sad because I couldn’t help Sofia receive justice immediately, but Halilintar had said he would investigate Sofia’s case once the person who poisoned Beruth was found. As much as I think Beruth deserved what he got, finding the person who poisoned him is important. That way, Qually could also be freed from the accusations.

"Em... by the way, why did Your Highness come here? Isn’t the interrogation starting today? I thought Your Highness should be there... is it alright for you to be here instead?"

"Oh, I do need to be there."

Then why are you here?! Drinking tea and eating snacks with me when you have an important task right now!

"I came to pick you up, Taufan."

"Me? Why and where to?"

Halilintar smiled warmly, "To the prison."

Hah?

WHAT?!

...

Halilintar really knows how to make me panic. I thought he was going to capture me and throw me into prison. I had already come up with various reasons for why I might be arrested and how I could escape. I even considered jumping out of the window to run away from him.

Thankfully, before I actually did something that foolish, Halilintar explained that he just wanted me to witness today's interrogation session. He said I might be able to find something that he hadn’t noticed.

The interrogation took place in the underground prison of the Main Palace. According to Halilintar, the underground prison in the Main Palace was specifically for criminals involved in medium to serious crimes, such as murder, rape, or drug trafficking. For smaller crimes like theft, fighting, or assault that didn’t lead to death, the local leaders in the area where the crime occurred usually handled them.

As for criminals labeled as National Threats, such as those guilty of treason, terrorism, or rebellion, they are imprisoned elsewhere. A place far from the Capital, with multiple layers of security. It made me think of Azkaban from the Harry Potter series.

But some criminals are imprisoned in the Main Palace. The main reason is that they receive the death penalty as soon as they are captured. They are categorized as unforgivable criminals.

The prison in the Main Palace also places criminals according to the severity of their crimes. The farther you go, the more serious the crimes of the prisoners are.

This was my first time entering a prison, whether in my world or this one. I really didn’t like the atmosphere. It was dark, lit only by torchlight, cold, damp, and smelled unpleasant. The people behind the bars stared at me with various emotions. Some seemed indifferent, others yelled angrily as Halilintar and I passed their cells—even some looked like they wanted to pounce on us if the bars weren't in the way, while others appeared scared, and some glared at us with hatred.

I instinctively pressed closer to Halilintar. He held my hand as if reassuring me that I didn’t need to worry because he was by my side. Unfortunately, I still couldn’t feel calm. Not with all the stares and the screams of hatred echoing through this dark and terrifying corridor.

“Are you scared?” 

“A little...?”

Liar! I was so scared! I was shaking from head to toe! If Halilintar hadn’t been holding my hand and guiding me, I probably would’ve frozen in fear the moment I stepped into this prison.

When Halilintar looked at me, I saw his eyes glowing—really glowing! His red eyes stood out in this dimly lit place. I didn’t know why, but it seemed like Halilintar stamped his foot because I heard a loud echo. Along with that, red lightning pillars appeared in front of each cell. The place, which had been dark, was now illuminated by an eerie red light that, strangely enough, didn’t hurt my eyes. The screams of the prisoners had turned into a faint buzzing sound from the electricity flowing through those pillars.

It was still a terrifying place, but I felt much calmer now.

“Don’t be scared, Taufan. I’m here. I’ll protect you.”

I just nodded at his words. He was still holding my hand and led me to a special room in the prison. He said it was the interrogation room. In the room, three people were wearing all black. On their chests were badges shaped like four-pointed stars in red.

“These are the people who will conduct the interrogation today,” Halilintar said, but he didn’t explain further and didn’t intend to introduce them to me. Well, I guess that’s for the best. These three people looked intimidating and dangerous. I didn’t want to get to know them.

Then Halilintar guided me to sit with him in another room inside that room. This room had a large window that allowed us to see into the previous room, but the people in that room couldn’t see into this one. It really felt like an interrogation room from the movies. This room was also equipped with magic tools that allowed us to hear the conversation from the other room, but the people in the other room couldn’t hear us.

I had to commend whoever designed this interrogation room.

While I was still admiring the interrogation room, a guard brought in a man who looked to be in his mid-40s. At that moment, Halilintar gave me a signal that the interrogation was about to begin.

Alright, now it’s time to focus.

Chapter Text

Boboiboy Fanfiction

©  Boboiboy | Animonsta Studio

A/N: The entire story is purely fictional, and the author does not profit from writing this story. If there are any similarities in ideas, character names, or locations, they are purely coincidental.

≫ ──── ≪•◦ ❈ ◦•≫ ──── ≪

Interrogating people can take an entire day and hurt your head from too much thinking. I admit that the three people conducting the interrogation are professionals in their field, but the people being interrogated are also very stubborn. Maybe because they feel they didn't commit the crime they're accused of. I can't blame them for that.

"What do you think, Taufan? Is there anything suspicious about any of them?"

"I didn't find anything suspicious. They all acknowledge that Young Master Beruth isn't a good young master—in fact, he's really awful. Most of them have barely interacted with him but know how terrible he is. Even so, their statements are still not enough for me to determine who did it."

Halilintar didn't say anything. He ruffled my hair and said I could rest. I just shrugged and relaxed a bit in my chair. There's still one more person they have to interrogate, but I can no longer force my brain to pay attention to what they're going to say. My butt hurts from sitting all day.

Why does it have to be this difficult just to find someone who poisoned that bastard Beruth?

There are 15 servants working at Baron Kalns' residence: a head butler, a maid for the Baron's wife, 4 housekeepers, 3 cooks—including Qually, a kitchen helper, 2 table servants, 2 gardeners, and a stable hand.

Of those 15 people, the ones who interact most often with Beruth are the head butler, the 4 housekeepers, and the 2 table servants who serve the food. Other than them, the other servants only work in their respective areas.

If we were to suspect someone, surely the two table servants responsible for serving food are the most suspicious. However, these two are also tasked with tasting the food before it's served to ensure there's no poison. If they did poison Beruth, wouldn't that mean they knew they would consume the poison before Beruth? Moreover, the food only reaches their hands once it's delivered to the dining room.

Also, Halilintar once mentioned that no poison was found in Beruth's leftover food. How could this person have poisoned Beruth without causing the two table servants to be poisoned when tasting the food?

The perpetrator is clever.

Maybe I should have majored in law in my world or joined the police force; that way, I'd have some knowledge to uncover who the culprit is. It's pitiful when an art student like me has to play detective and solve a case.

"Today's interrogation is over; we'll continue another day," said Halilintar. Hearing his words, I realized that the last person had finished being interrogated. Gosh, I didn't hear anything they said. Glancing at Halilintar, from his expression, I knew he wasn't satisfied with today's interrogation results.

I didn't know what to say to comfort him, so I decided to remain silent. Halilintar guided me out; the three people in black bowed to Halilintar and said they would arrange another interrogation session.

I hope I don't have to participate in another interrogation session. Entering the prison once is enough; I can't handle doing it again.

How can Halilintar have such a strong mentality to face the heavy pressure in this place?

Leaving the interrogation room, Halilintar held my hand again and created a lightning pillar as before. I'm grateful for his action, though I feel a bit sorry for the prisoners who are frightened seeing a lightning pillar appear in front of their cells.

I asked Halilintar to allow me to speak briefly with Qually. I want him to know that his best friend out there is fighting hard to free him. He needs to know that he hasn't been abandoned, that someone out there cares deeply for him.

Although Halilintar initially objected, he finally gave me permission after I persuaded him. The advantage of being his beloved younger brother. I could have flipped my hair with pride—if only it were long.

Halilintar took me to a cell that might be the one holding Qually. He removed the lightning pillar from in front of the cell, allowing me to see the prisoner behind the bars.

The cell was occupied by two young men. I recognized both because they were interrogated when my brain could still pay proper attention. The small and slightly chubby young man was Qually, Gopal's friend. Meanwhile, the other young man, who was tall, muscular, and had brown skin, was Vyk; he worked as a stable hand at Baron Kalns' residence.

Upon seeing me and Halilintar, both became trembling with fear. However, they didn't forget to greet Halilintar, who is the First Prince of this kingdom. Both prostrated and offered their greetings to Halilintar. Unfortunately, Halilintar didn't seem satisfied; in fact, he looked very annoyed. He didn't immediately tell them to rise from their prostration.

I nudged him to let him know he should tell them to stand, but Halilintar refused.

"They didn't greet you," Halilintar hissed.

"I don't mind that, Your Highness."

"But I mind."

Halilintar made me shake my head. Typical.

I crouched in front of the cell of the two young men. "You can stand up now."  

They both looked hesitant, but they still did as I said. They still seemed terrified, even trembling and refusing to look in my direction. More or less, I could guess what was happening. Halilintar was surely staring at them with his terrifying gaze. His behavior sometimes reminded me of a fierce dog watching over its master from danger.

"You're Qually, right? Do you know someone named Gopal Kumar?"

Qually seemed very surprised when I mentioned Gopal's name; he looked at me hesitantly, glancing several times at Halilintar before answering, "Yes."

"He didn't do anything, Your Highness! He has nothing to do with all this! Please don't arrest him!" Qually exclaimed. He looked at Halilintar with fear and worry, and his voice sounded so desperate to convince Halilintar that his friend was innocent.

Wow, the one outside is trying every way to free his friend, while the one inside is striving to keep his friend from experiencing his suffering. Their friendship is truly enviable. 

"Please calm down, Qually. My name is Taufan, and your friend came to me. He wants me to help him save you."

As soon as I mentioned my name, both people inside the cell flinched, and immediately, they bowed down and greeted me with reverence. I was so surprised that I nearly fell backward if not for Halilintar holding me steady.

"Thank you."

Halilintar responded with just a smile and continued standing behind me, allowing me to lean on his legs—he even let me sit on his feet! Hmm, this reminded me of my childhood when I often did the same with my father.

I refocused on Qually. "As I said before, your friend, Young Master Gopal, came to see me to help save you."

"He... did that?"

"Yes, you have a good friend," I glanced at Vyk, who had been silent the whole time, then looked back at Qually, "However, I can't release you immediately. I don’t have the authority to do that, and we still need to find the real culprit. I hope you don't mind staying here for a few more days."

At that moment, both people in the cell simultaneously glanced at Halilintar. They knew well who had the authority to imprison them and who had the authority to release them.

"No problem, Your Highness. I know I did nothing wrong, and I will cooperate to avoid obstructing the investigation."

Qually really was a kind and understanding young man.

"Once your innocence is proven, you will be released immediately," Halilintar said. He surprised not only me but also the two people inside the cell. The three of us stared at him to make sure he wasn’t lying—in my case, I had to look up to see him.

Halilintar ruffled my hair, making it hard for me to see his expression clearly, especially since the prison’s lighting was so dim. But I could guess what kind of expression he had. He was probably smiling warmly at me. Ah, he was such a good brother.

"Alright, it's time for me to go back," I said. Halilintar helped me stand up and even brushed the dust off my pants.

I waved at the two young men in the cell, and both looked a little hesitant to wave back.

Oh, how foolish of me.

I acted like someone leaving a friend’s house when, in reality, these two young men were locked in a cell for something they might not have done. Awkwardly, I cleared my throat and simply nodded at them.

Qually thanked me—which I didn’t understand because I hadn’t done anything for him—before Halilintar and I left.

Once out of the prison, I stretched my stiff body from sitting all day. What a tiring day, even though all I did was sit and listen to their confessions. Ugh, and now I have to sit in the carriage again to return to the Sunset Palace. I hope Maripos is willing to give me a massage after this; my body feels sore.

Of course, Halilintar accompanied me back to the Sunset Palace—he was the reason I was in the prison instead of in bed—though we had to argue first. Halilintar said it would be better for me to stay in the Main Palace for the night, saying I could sleep in his room again. But I refused. I had already gotten into trouble twice just by going to the Main Palace; if I got into trouble there a third time, I’d have to say the Main Palace hated me.

So, yes, after our silly argument, we were now in the carriage heading to the Sunset Palace.

The journey to the Sunset Palace was filled with silence. I was too tired and didn’t know what to say, while Halilintar was lost in his thoughts. Maybe he was thinking about the case he had to handle. I wondered why he had to handle this case.

I mean, he was the First Prince of the Ignisia, while Beruth was just the son of a Baron without any territory. I had tried to find out about Baron Kalns’ family, wondering if they had significant influence that could draw Halilintar’s attention to their case. But they were just ordinary nobles with no real power.

The first son working in the palace didn’t hold a high position, and the second son in the royal army didn’t have a high rank either.

Did they have powerful supporters?

I’d have to ask Maripos later.

"How are Prince Duri and Prince Solar?" I asked, trying to break the silence in the carriage.

"Hm? They’re fine, why do you ask?"

I just shrugged—even though Halilintar probably couldn’t see it because it was so dark in the carriage.

"Just curious. I heard that Prince Duri has been very busy with his studies. Is Prince Solar as busy as Prince Duri?"

"Yes. He might be busier than Duri. Solar loves learning—or is obsessed," Halilintar said the last part quietly, but I heard it clearly because it was just the two of us in the carriage, "Especially after meeting you a few days ago, he’s become even more diligent in his studies. I have to go back and forth between the Main Palace and the Sunrise Palace to make sure he doesn’t overdo it."

Wow, little Solar in this world was the same as my youngest brother. He also often stayed up late for various reasons, whether for his experiments or because he was learning something that caught his attention.

No wonder Halilintar looked more exhausted than the last time I saw him. Gosh, being the eldest is never easy.

"If that’s the case, why don’t you rest, Your Highness? Why did you insist on taking me back? I can go back on my own without needing an escort, Your Highness."

"No. I have to make sure you’re safe throughout the journey. Besides, I’m the one who brought you to the interrogation session. Maripos would scold me if I let you go back alone." There was an amused tone in Halilintar’s voice when he said the last part.

I just snorted. It was true that Maripos cared for Taufan so much that he would fight anyone for him—even Halilintar, the First Prince who would become King in the future. Maripos once scolded Halilintar just because he thought Halilintar had made things difficult for me. He also blamed Halilintar for visiting me when I was resting.

With how protective Maripos was of Taufan, it wouldn’t be wrong to call him a mother hen. Mother Hen Maripos. Hah! Maripos would pinch my cheeks if I ever said that in front of him.

As we approached the Sunset Palace, I could see lights at the palace gate, as if someone was standing there holding a lantern. The closer we got, the clearer the view became. It really was someone standing at the gate holding a lantern.

The silver hair that wasn't so visible before, now shone clearly in my eyes. It gleamed with a silvery glow loke the moon shining tonight. Of course, Maripos would stand at the gate waiting for my return. There was no way he could be at ease while I wasn't in my room sleeping at this hour.

Halilintar instructed the coachman to stop at the gate, opened the carriage door, and let Maripos step inside. Maripos greeted Halilintar—a gesture that felt merely formal—then sat beside me.

I wasn't sure how long Maripos had been standing at the gate, but his cold skin hinted that he had been outside for quite some time. I shifted closer to Maripos, seeking comfort while trying to warm him. Maripos wrapped an arm around me, half-embracing me. Ah, the fatigue in my body intensified as I leaned on Maripos. I want to complain to him about everything that happened today, but I held back since Halilintar was still in the carriage with us.

Though faint, I could hear Halilintar's huff. I chose to ignore it. Once we arrived at the Sunset Palace, Maripos let go of his hold on me—reluctanly, I must say. He opened the carriage door and helped me down.

"I can't stay long tonight. I'm sorry, Taufan." Halilintar said before I stepped out.

Whether he could see it or not in the dim light, I smiled at him and replied, "It's alright, Your Highness. I hope you get enough rest tonight. Please don't push yourself, Your Highness."

"I won't push myself."

Though Halilintar said so, I didn't believe him. He would likely stay up all night, and who know if he'd get any sleep. Oh dear, I hope that young man doesn't overburden himself.

After bidding farewell, Halilintar instructed the coachman to return to the Main Palace.

...

"Will you not attend today’s interrogation session? I heard that Prince Halilintar is conducting another interrogation today," Maripos asked while pouring tea for me.

"No, Halilintar didn’t come to inform me. Also, that prison is a terrifying place, Maripos. I tremble in fear whenever I enter it."

Maripos only chuckled softly, then handed me a cup of hot tea. He also placed a plate of cookies that I had baked today on the table in front of me. Yes, these were the leftovers from the batch I made for Duri and Solar. They hadn’t come to ask for them, but I had taken the initiative to send them over. Especially since, in one of his letters, Duri had whined about struggling with his studies.

I hoped that by making cookies for them, they would feel more encouraged. After all, they were still children. They needed a balance between playing and studying.

"Have you been able to guess who poisoned Baron Kalns' son, Your Highness?"

"Not yet. Honestly, I’m not surprised that Halilintar arrested all the servants in that household. I mean, nearly all of them hated Beruth—and he deserved to be hated—they also didn’t seem concerned about their Young Master’s condition. Only the Head Butler asked about Beruth’s condition during the interrogation. Maybe because he had been serving Baron Kalns long before Beruth was born."

"Ah, he might have developed affection for him after serving him since childhood."

I nodded. He was the old man who was interrogated first. I remember when he was brought into the interrogation room, the first thing he asked was about Beruth’s condition. When told that Beruth was still alive, though it would take time for him to recover, the old man looked relieved for a moment before his expression changed to guilt and sadness. It was an odd expression, really, but I didn’t know what it meant. It was extraordinary that he still cared about Beruth.

Beruth was a scoundrel—many people wanted him dead. But because he was poisoned in his own home, especially while eating, the servants became the prime suspects. And worse, the culprit even went as far as framing Qually. If I hadn’t asked Halilintar to reinvestigate Qually, he might have already been sentenced for a crime he didn’t commit.

Qually should be grateful to have a friend like Gopal, who was willing to plead with others for help. Oh, right. I haven’t given Gopal any updates yet. I must write him a letter and inform him about Qually’s situation. He must be eager to know whether his friend is safe or not.

I’ll write to him as soon as I return to my room.

My thoughts then drifted to Sofia, the poor girl whose soul might never find peace. Like Halilintar said, there was a strong possibility that Sofia's case was unrelated to Beruth's, but I truly believed there was a connection between the two. Unfortunately, we still lacked the evidence to prove it.

Sofia’s friend, whom I initially suspected to be the one who poisoned Beruth out of revenge, had actually already passed away—committing suicide. I had also tried to find out more about the people close to Sofia, but my search yielded nothing. Sofia was an orphan. Ever since she started working at Baron Kalns' residence, she never took a single day off because there was no one for her to visit. It could be said that she worked for a full year until she disappeared—murdered.  

Ah, my head hurts just thinking about it.  

Two different cases that seemed unrelated. Let’s not dwell on it for now.  

I spent quite some time at the gazebo, gazing at the garden and enjoying my tea before finally returning to my room. I asked Maripos to fetch some paper, ink, and a quill so I could write a letter to Gopal before I forgot.  

While waiting for Maripos to return, I lay on my bed and resumed reading a book I had set aside for the past few days. At that moment, I once again noticed the Blood Ruby that Gopal had given me when we first met.  

That object still looked terrifying to me. Not just because of its deep red color, resembling blood, and the eerie glow it emitted at night—well, fine, that part scared me too—but mainly because I remembered its exorbitant price.  

In my original world, I came from a modest family. Not rich, but not poor either. Even so, my family was quite large. We had seven children, and it wasn’t easy to provide for all of us, especially as everything became increasingly expensive. Not to mention, my father was the only one working to support us. Perhaps that was why my older brother, Halilintar, decided not to go to college and instead went straight to work after graduating high school.  

At first, I also decided not to go to college because I knew it would require a lot of money. But both Halilintar and my father told me it was fine if I wanted to continue my education. I was even given the freedom to choose any major I desired. Halilintar always told me not to worry—he would take care of everything. I just needed to focus on my studies. My father said the same thing. He assured me that he was still strong enough to support my education and that of my younger brothers.  

Despite feeling guilty about burdening my father and Halilintar, deep down, I wanted to pursue the field I loved. That’s why I worked tirelessly to secure scholarships and save as much as possible during my studies. I rented a small, cramped boarding room because it was much cheaper, survived almost every month on instant noodles, and only used the money they sent me when absolutely necessary.  

I never owned anything expensive. Most of my belongings were hand-me-downs from my father or Halilintar—like the laptop I used or most of my college clothes. The only thing I considered a luxury was my favorite pair of sneakers, which I bought after months of saving because I wanted them so badly.  

They cost a little over five hundred thousand rupiahs[1], and to me, that already felt extravagant.  

[1] Once again, I am using rupiah as a reference.  

But in this place, I had effortlessly received a gemstone worth billions from someone. Truly, money can sometimes be a terrifying thing.  

Glancing again at the Blood Ruby, I pondered what I should do with it. Should I keep it or sell it? Its high value would bring me an enormous sum of money. However, I was never greedy for wealth, especially now that I lived surrounded by riches—though not much for a prince—it was still enough to fulfill my desires. Not to mention Halilintar, who never hesitated to spend money on his beloved younger brother.  

So, perhaps I would keep the gem while figuring out what to do with it.  

Maybe I could turn it into jewelry? A necklace, a brooch, or a ring. There were many possibilities, considering the ruby’s size. I wasn’t a fan of jewelry, but I could give it to some people as gifts. Didn’t Gopal say that the ruby had protective properties for its wearer? That would make it a perfect gift for the people important to me.  

I would ask Maripos or Captain Fang to find a craftsman for me.  

When Maripos returned with the paper and ink I had requested, I began writing a letter to Gopal. I informed him about Qually’s condition based on what I had seen in prison. I also relayed Qually’s statements during his interrogation and assured Gopal that I would continue to help until Qually was declared innocent.  

Once finished, I handed the letter to Maripos to be sealed and delivered.  

I hoped Halilintar would find the culprit soon so I could send good news to Gopal.  

I glanced again at the ruby that Maripos had placed on the nightstand, feeling a shiver run down my spine as I remembered its value. In this world, it was worth billions in my own currency. But if this gemstone existed in my original world, would it be even more expensive? Could it reach trillions?  

I recalled watching a short video on a social media platform about the most expensive gemstones in the world. If I remembered correctly, it was a necklace with a blue diamond that was worth trillions. I wondered if this ruby would have a similar price or be even more valuable in my world.

If only I could take this gem back to my original world, I would definitely become a billionaire!  

Ah, no. No. I must not entertain such greedy thoughts. Nothing good ever comes from excessive wealth. Besides, my life in my original world—though far from luxurious—was a good life. I had loving parents and brothers whom I deeply wished to see again, even if our relationship was not the best. No amount of money could ever make me trade that kind of life.  

"Have you decided what you will do with the ruby, Your Highness?"  

Maripos' voice broke my train of thought, and I turned to look at him. In his hands was the letter I had given him earlier, now placed inside an envelope, sealed with wax, and stamped with Taufan's seal. Maripos was truly professional in his work. I was so grateful to have him by my side. I nodded to myself.  

"Um... I was thinking of making jewelry. Several pieces of jewelry. Considering its size, I'm sure it could produce multiple pieces, right?"  

"Of course, Your Highness. What kind of jewelry do you desire?"  

"Something like a necklace, bracelet, or maybe a ring. Yes, something like that."  

"Would you like me to find a craftsman to make them for you? Or do you already have someone in mind for the job?"  

"Please find me a skilled craftsman who can make fine jewelry."  

Maripos bowed. "I will carry out your orders, Your Highness."  

With that, Maripos left my room, carrying the letter addressed to Gopal and the order to find a craftsman.  

I picked up the book I had been reading earlier, but unfortunately, I couldn't concentrate. My mind kept drifting to the case that Halilintar was currently handling. I had forgotten to ask Maripos about Baron Kalns' family—I would ask him when he returned—so I still didn't understand why Halilintar had to deal with the affairs of a baron who didn't even have a territory.  

I tried to recall the statements of the servants who were interrogated yesterday. All their statements seemed ordinary. They detailed what they did before, during, and after the incident.  

The Head Butler stated that he was in the Baron’s room because the Baron had summoned him. Two out of the four housekeepers responsible for cleaning the residence confirmed that they saw the Head Butler entering the Baron’s room. Later, he and the Baron went into the dining room together, and he stood behind the Baron throughout the meal. He was also the one who ran out to call the doctor as soon as Beruth started convulsing from the poison he had consumed.  

The Baron’s wife’s maid, of course, was always by her side. It was said that the Baroness was quite obsessed with beauty, so she would spend a significant amount of time doing her makeup—even if it was just for a family meal.  

Then there were the four housekeepers. The two who saw the Head Butler enter the Baron’s room claimed they were busy cleaning the residence at the time. Their locations were far from the kitchen or dining room, so slipping poison into Beruth’s food would have been impossible for them. The other two were the ones who brought the food to the dining room. They had the opportunity to poison the meal. However, they had been thoroughly searched and investigated. No evidence was found on them—they were clean. During the interrogation, they also remained calm while giving their statements. Unless they were extremely skilled liars, I would say they were telling the truth.  

The three cooks who prepared the food gave similar statements. They had been busy in the kitchen since morning. The Head Chef never left the kitchen the entire morning, as he was the one cooking all the dishes. Meanwhile, the second cook stayed by his side, assisting him in preparing the meals. Only Qually would occasionally leave the kitchen—to go to the storage room where ingredients were kept and retrieve what the Head Chef needed. Qually might have poisoned the ingredients he brought back. However, if that were the case, the entire household would have been poisoned. But in this case, only Beruth was affected.  

Then, the two table servants stated that they had been in the dining room before the incident, busy setting the table before the Baron and his family arrived. During the meal, they simply stood at their designated positions, observing if any of the family's wine glasses were empty or if they needed anything else. As I had mentioned before, they also tasted the food right before serving it to ensure it was neither poisoned nor unpalatable. Could they have slipped poison into Beruth’s food after tasting it? If so, their hands must have been incredibly quick to do it in front of so many people. Perhaps they were trained assassins sent to infiltrate Baron Kalns’ residence. Ah, I’ve been reading too many comics and novels. But still, isn’t that a possibility?  

Then there were the two gardeners, who stated they had been working in the garden since morning. At the time of the incident, they were cleaning their tools. They didn’t even know Beruth had been poisoned until the doctor arrived. So, no, they were not suspects. Besides, they admitted to rarely interacting with Beruth while working at the Baron’s estate, even though they had been employed there for years. Perhaps it was because their job was only to tend to the garden, and Beruth wasn’t someone who spent much time there.  

And then there was Vyk, the stableman. He claimed he was always in the stables, tending to the horses. He even slept there with them! At first, I thought it was because the Baron hadn’t given him a room, but he said he simply preferred sleeping with the horses so he could care for them better. How strange.

The last one was the kitchen helper, but I didn’t hear her statements because she was the last person to be interrogated, and by then, my brain was already overwhelmed with the statements of the fourteen people before her. Even so, I more or less knew what the kitchen helper's duties were. If I was correct, they were responsible for cleaning the cooking utensils used by the chefs, as well as cleaning the kitchen after it was used. So yes, their workload was heavy. However, they wouldn’t touch the food or ingredients that would be used—only the chefs were allowed to do that.  

Ah, all of this is giving me a headache.  

I should just leave everything to Halilintar and the Royal Guard. They are professionals; they know what to do. Unlike me, who has no experience at all. Although, honestly, I feel a little sad that I can’t help.  

…  

Vayuna still hasn’t returned. It has been a week since she left, and now I miss that annoying bird who always shouted in my head. I miss hearing her happy chirps whenever she sees Maripos or Captain Fang. I miss having her as my conversation partner whenever Maripos was away. Ah, I never realized how lonely it would be without Vayuna.  

Where exactly is the Wind Goddess’s place? Is it so far away that Vayuna has been gone for this long? When will she come back?  

I can only lie on my bed, waiting for Maripos to return with my lunch. Outside, heavy rain is pouring down, preventing me from sitting in the garden to admire the blooming flowers. What a shame.  

Ah, it’s so quiet without Vayuna always fussing over me.  

I roll around on my bed, messing up the neatly made sheets that Papileon had tidied up this morning—even knocking a pillow onto the floor because of my antics. I promise I’ll fix it later after I’m done rolling around.  

I’m so bored. Why doesn’t this place have technological advancements like television or at least a radio? I’m tired of just reading books or painting. There’s not much to do on rainy days like this either. Eventually, I stop rolling around because I feel dizzy, so I just stare at my hands while counting the books I have yet to finish reading. That’s when my gaze falls on the ruby still sitting on my bedside table.  

Has Maripos found a craftsman as I requested? I’ve already thought about the necklace I want to make. Something simple, like the necklace Halilintar showed me, might be nice.  Necklace...

Huh?  

Wait.  

Wait a minute.  

I think I just realized something I hadn’t noticed before.  

The necklace that Halilintar showed at that time was suspected to belong to Sofia. A necklace so simple. Its chain was probably made of cheap iron since it was already rusted when Halilintar showed it to me. But the chain wasn’t the important part—the important part was the pink gemstone on the necklace. A pink gemstone that, despite being covered in dirt, still reflected light.  

I had seen a similar gemstone when I followed Halilintar to the prison.  

Oh my god.  

Sofia’s case and this case are connected.  

Even though I still don’t know how the culprit poisoned Beruth, I now know their identity. At least, I think I do.  

I quickly got up from my bed, wincing slightly at how messy it had become. I’ll apologize to Papileon later—right now, there’s something far more important.  

I hurried to call Captain Fang, instructing him to tell Maripos to prepare a carriage to the Main Palace immediately.  

I hope Halilintar isn’t too busy right now.  

Chapter Text

Boboiboy Fanfiction

©  Boboiboy | Animonsta Studio

A/N: The entire story is purely fictional, and the author does not profit from writing this story. If there are any similarities in ideas, character names, or locations, they are purely coincidental.

≫ ──── ≪•◦ ❈ ◦•≫ ──── ≪

I hate visiting the place where I nearly died twice, but I'll put that aside for now. The journey to the Main Palace was filled with silence. Maripos did ask what I intended to do there, but once I explained that I needed to see Halilintar regarding the Beruth case, he fell silent and did as I requested.  

As soon as we arrived at the Main Palace, I hurriedly stepped out of the carriage, ignoring Maripos, who shouted that I shouldn’t be running around in the rain like this. I'm sorry, Maripos, but I really can't wait right now. I feel like I must meet Halilintar immediately.  

Although the Main Palace is vast and confusing to me, fortunately, Halilintar’s room is easy to find. Also, when Halilintar forced me to stay at the Main Palace, I often went to his room out of boredom, so I remember the way to his office somewhat.  

I ignored the servants who stared at me with various expressions—and slightly regretted dirtying the gleaming marble floor with mud and water from my clothes. I also ignored Maripos, who was running after me while scolding me.  

Upon reaching Halilintar’s office, I was stopped by two guards. They crossed their swords in front of the door, blocking my way.  

"Prince Halilintar is not expecting any guests at this time. Please leave," one of them said.  

Oh, come on, why now?  

"Can you tell him that Taufan wishes to see him? I have something important to discuss with Prince Halilintar," I said.  

But they remained firm in their stance, repeating the same words, insisting that Halilintar was not expecting guests. I know Halilintar is very busy, but why would he refuse visitors at a time like this?  

I kept pressing the two guards to let me in. I was starting to feel cold in my wet clothes, and I was tired of standing, but they still wouldn't allow me to enter.  

Now I started to wonder if they were denying me entry because Halilintar truly didn’t want visitors or because they were looking down on me.  

Halilintar’s treatment of me had made me forget that the body I now inhabit belongs to Taufan, a prince discarded by his own kingdom. Every sign of respect given to me by the servants and guards during my previous visits was only because Halilintar had ordered them to do so. Not to mention that Commander Kaika, Halilintar’s most trusted knight, was always by my side under his command.  

Now, it was just me and Maripos—two people without any power—so of course, they wouldn’t take me seriously.  

"Please, just inform Prince Halilintar that I wish to see him. It won’t take long. I promise I’ll leave immediately afterward," I pleaded with them. Why were they being so stubborn? Did they look down on Taufan so much that they refused to acknowledge me?  

One of them clicked his tongue, his expression clearly showing how annoyed he was with me for not leaving. Before I could say anything else, Maripos stepped forward and stood in front of me. I caught a glimpse of his expression—it was as if he was ready to kill someone.  

Um... why does Maripos’ aura suddenly feel so unsettling? Even standing behind him, I felt nervous. Maripos didn’t say a word; he simply stood in front of me, staring straight at the two guards.  

Yet, the guards looked uneasy. One of them—the one who had clicked his tongue earlier—looked as if Maripos had just insulted him and his entire family. His face quickly turned red—he reminded me of a cooked crustacean.  

"You have been disrespectful to Prince Taufan. His Highness merely asked you to inform Prince Halilintar that he wished to see him, but you kept refusing. If Prince Halilintar truly doesn’t want visitors, you should at least inform him that Prince Taufan is here. Yet, you continue to reject him disrespectfully," Maripos said.  

I admired how Maripos’ voice remained calm even in this situation. He reminded me of that night when he protected me from those bandits. Always doing whatever it takes to protect his beloved prince, huh?  

Unfortunately, the two guards in front of us didn’t share my sentiments. Their expressions worsened by the second. One of them—the one who had clicked his tongue at me—glared at Maripos with hostility.  

"You! How dare a slave like you speak to me like that!" the man shouted, raising his sword at Maripos, who remained standing calmly in front of me.  

What?! How dare he call Maripos that?! I might stay quiet if they only looked down on me—I don’t really care—but insulting Maripos was a whole different matter.  

"Bastard! How dare you insult Maripos, you scum!!" I shouted.  

I pulled Maripos back as I yelled those words, and at that moment, the door that had been closed suddenly swung open from the inside. The atmosphere instantly became silent. None of us dared to move or say a word.  

Halilintar, looking disheveled and exhausted, stood at the doorway. He seemed surprised, while I felt embarrassed for shouting like that. But that bastard who insulted Maripos deserved it. If I were as strong as Halilintar, I would’ve slapped his face so hard that even his own mother wouldn’t recognize him.  

I heard a cough and felt a light pinch on my arm from Maripos. That’s when I realized what I should be doing.  

I quickly bowed to Halilintar, and Maripos, now standing behind me, did the same.  

"Greetings, Your Highness, Prin—Ah!"  

I was utterly shocked when Halilintar was suddenly right in front of me—he moved so fast—and gripped my shoulders tightly. It hurt a little because he was squeezing me quite hard. Why? Was he angry because I used foul language just now?  

"Your High—"  

"Why are you soaking wet?! You’re freezing! Get inside now. You’ll catch a cold like this," Halilintar spoke rapidly. Then he turned to the two guards, who had been standing frozen ever since he appeared.  

"Call Taran immediately. Tell him to bring a blanket, dry clothes, and prepare some hot tea. Also, ask him to summon Doctor Kién to my room."  

I blinked several times, unsure of what to say. Halilintar had rendered me speechless. As he pushed me inside his room, I simply followed in silence. I wasn’t surprised by Halilintar’s behavior, but the situation I was in was confusing. Just moments ago, I was ready to fight those two guards for insulting Maripos, and now I was being ushered into Halilintar’s room with him acting overly concerned.  

Before Halilintar closed the door, I heard him say, "Pack your things and leave for the Western Border tonight. If you try to run away, I will personally hunt you down."  

Honestly, his low, menacing tone made my skin crawl. It almost felt like he was threatening me instead, and I could only imagine what would happen to those two guards. The aura of a protagonist truly is different!  

Once the door shut, Halilintar quickly approached me. His expression was filled with concern as he looked me up and down. He reached out, touching my face, and without thinking, I leaned into his touch. Halilintar’s hands were warm.

"Why are you so wet? Were you running in the rain?"  

Eh? Um… how should I answer that?  

I heard a throat clearing. "Yes, Your Highness. Prince Taufan jumped out of the carriage as soon as we arrived. He didn’t even wait for me to get an umbrella to cover him."  

Maripos! How could you betray me like this?  

I threw a resentful glare at Maripos, but the young man simply averted his gaze without a hint of guilt. Maripos had betrayed me!  

"Taufan."  

Uh, why does Halilintar’s voice sound so scary? His expression too. I feel a chill run down my spine, and my legs start trembling. My stomach twists with tension and nervousness. The air now feels colder than before.  

God, maybe I should’ve just sent a letter instead of coming here in person. No, no. I want to explain what I’ve just realized directly to Halilintar, not through a letter. Besides, writing and sending a letter would take time, not to mention waiting for a response and all that.  

"Um… I have something to tell you, Your Highness. It’s about the Beruth case."  

"What could be so important that you ran in the rain without caring for your health?"  

"It—" Just as I was about to answer, Halilintar cut me off, "You should’ve just sent me a letter, and I would’ve come to you. Why did you trouble yourself like this? You’re soaked from head to toe! Your skin is freezing, and you’re shivering like a fawn. What if you get sick because of this, Taufan?"  

Does Halilintar always overreact like this? I mean, yes, I am cold and shivering a little because of it, but I’m not as soaked as Halilintar claims. Look, I’m not even dripping anymore; I already used a bit of power to dry my clothes.  

I reached for Halilintar’s hand, which was still on my face, and the crease on his forehead deepened as soon as I touched him. Uh, maybe it’s because my cold hands were in contact with his warm skin.  

"I’m fine, Your Highness. Besides, about the Beruth case, I think I know who the culprit is."  

"Really?"  

"More or less, there’s someone I suspect."  

"Who is it? And why?"  

I was just about to explain to Halilintar when a knock interrupted our conversation. Taran’s voice came from behind the door, saying that he had brought what Halilintar had ordered. Halilintar said, "Enter," and Maripos opened the door for the old man.  

Taran walked in, pushing a trolley, while two maids followed him into the room. One carried a thick and comfortable-looking blanket, while the other held a set of neatly folded, fragrant clothes.  

Oh, why does looking at these things make the cold I’m feeling even worse? Maybe because I’ve now been offered warmth, and I no longer need to endure the cold.

My nose tickled. I let go of Halilintar’s hand and rubbed my nose gently, but the itchiness remained.  

"Doctor Kién has been summoned as per your orders, Your Highness. She should be here soon."  

Halilintar simply nodded at Taran’s words before turning back to me with a serious expression. "Change your clothes, Taufan. Use that room to change."  

Halilintar pointed to a door beside the row of bookshelves. Ever since I first entered his office, I had always been curious about what was behind that door, but I never asked. Now is my chance to see what kind of room it actually is.  

I saw the maid carrying the clothes hand them to Maripos. I gave Halilintar a slight nod before walking toward the door he had pointed to. Maripos followed me silently.  

I opened the door without any difficulty. At first, it was dark inside, but the moment I stepped into the room, it was instantly illuminated by a warm yellow light, allowing me to see the interior clearly.  

The room isn’t large—probably the same size as my rented room in my original world. Of course, this room looks far more luxurious than mine. I mean, this one doesn’t have a leaking ceiling or moldy walls.  

The lighting in the room comes from crystals embedded in the walls and a single hanging lamp from the ceiling. There are two large bookshelves filling the room, a single cozy-looking armchair, and a small round table beside it. This looks like a private reading room. Maybe it really is Halilintar’s private reading room.  

"Your Highness, allow me to assist you in changing your clothes."  

Oh, right. I’m here to change my clothes. I didn’t even realize that Maripos had already closed the door, probably because I was too engrossed in looking around. I’m quite surprised that Halilintar has a private reading room—I thought he was the type who disliked reading and preferred sword training.  

Changing from damp clothes into dry ones is an amazing feeling. The silk-like fabric of the new clothes replaces my wet attire. The size is a little too big on me—it must belong to Halilintar—but not overly loose. The pants, however, fit me somehow, thanks to Maripos. It would be extremely embarrassing if they fell down in front of everyone. I’d be labeled a pervert if that happened!  

"Thank—Achoo!"  

My nose is so itchy, and I’m starting to feel congested. How did I catch a cold so quickly? I wasn’t even in the rain for hours, just less than five minutes! Even with the blessing of a Goddess and a regular hellish training routine with Captain Fang, this body is still so weak! Catching a cold just because of a little rain for less than five minutes!

Maripos quickly opened the door, holding my hand and guiding me out as if I couldn’t walk properly. I didn’t protest this time since I was too busy rubbing my itchy nose. I also wasn’t too aware that he led me to the sofa and wrapped the blanket, brought earlier by one of the maids, around me. A warm cup of tea with a fragrant aroma was already in my hand—I could still catch a hint of the scent even though my nose was a bit stuffy. Drinking warm tea while being wrapped in a cozy blanket.  

So comfortable.  

I could fall asleep with all this comfort. But I reminded myself again of the reason I came here. I placed my teacup on the table and looked at Halilintar, who had already sat across from me. He looked slightly amused, probably because of how ridiculous I appeared right now. But let’s not focus on that at the moment.  

“So, regarding the Beruth case,” I started, noticing how Halilintar’s expression gradually became serious. “As I mentioned, I think I might know who the culprit is.”  

“And that person is?”  

“Does Your Highness remember the necklace found in the forest near Baron Kalns’ estate? The one with the pink gemstone pendant?” Halilintar only nodded, waiting for me to continue my explanation. “That necklace, suspected to belong to Sofia, was found in the forest along with a human skeleton. Today, I remembered that I had seen a similar gemstone in the prison when I attended the first interrogation session.”  

“On whom? Everyone was searched before entering the prison, and we didn’t find anyone wearing such an accessory.”  

“I don’t know how he hid it, but I’m sure of my memory. The gemstone on Sofia’s necklace isn’t something easy to forget, especially since it still reflected light even when covered in dirt. I distinctly remember seeing that same glimmer while I was in the prison.”  

“Where exactly did you see that glimmer?”  

I sneezed again, earning concerned looks from both Halilintar and Maripos. I felt like they were overly protective of Taufan.  

Ignoring their worried gazes, I continued my explanation. “Do you remember when I said I wanted to speak with Qually?”  

Halilintar simply nodded. I took that as a sign to keep talking. “I saw it right inside Qually’s cell.”  

“Wait, are you saying Qually is the culprit?”  

I frantically shook my head. I had worked so hard to get Qually out, and now I was going to throw him into an even deeper pit? Did Halilintar really think I would do that? No way!  

“Not him, but someone else who was with him.”  

“The stable keeper?”  

“Yes. When he and Qually bowed to me, I’m sure I saw a similar gemstone on his wrist.”  

“Even so, Sofia was a poor girl—not to be disrespectful—but the gemstone she wore could have been worn by other girls out there.”  

How should I explain this to Halilintar? I knew that was a possibility too—that Vyk and Sofia could have bought from the same vendor or something like that. But I was certain the gemstone I saw on Vyk’s wrist was the same one from Sofia’s necklace. It was like they were a matching set.  

Ah, whatever. I’ll just say what I know.  

“Let’s just say it’s my intuition, Your Highness. But I’m confident that these two gemstones are connected.”  

Right after saying that, I sneezed multiple times, making both Maripos and Halilintar even more worried. Halilintar even insisted that we stop our discussion and told me to rest instead of focusing on this matter. However, I refused—if we kept delaying this, wouldn’t that mean Qually and other innocent people would have to stay in prison even longer?  

So, after a bit of back-and-forth between me and Halilintar, with Maripos siding with him, I emerged victorious—on the condition that I would rest after I finished explaining everything I knew. Maripos also started wrapping me tighter with the blanket.  

“To be honest, I’m still unsure of my own theory, but I think this might help with Your Highness’ investigation. I’m sure the Beruth's case is connected to Sofia’s case. It makes sense when you think about it, doesn’t it? I don’t know what Sofia was to Vyk—she could have been someone he saw as a sister or even a lover. I also didn’t examine Sofia’s necklace in detail.”  

“Then why are you so sure that Vyk is the one who poisoned Beruth?”  

I shook my head again. Halilintar was mistaken—I never said Vyk was the one who poisoned Beruth. He was a stable keeper, and his interaction with Beruth was only when the young master wanted to ride a horse. From what I learned during Vyk’s interrogation, Beruth rarely went horseback riding. Of course, Vyk could have been lying about that, but I had a feeling he was telling the truth. This was supported by the statements from other servants. They said that Beruth was lazy—he didn’t even want to train with a sword because he found it exhausting and always used a carriage whenever he traveled. That was enough to tell me that Vyk was being honest.  

The likelihood of Vyk poisoning Beruth directly was very low. My suspicion was that he had someone else helping him. Unfortunately, for this part, I was still completely clueless.  

I had been thinking about this the whole way to the Main Palace, but I still hadn’t found an answer.  

“My theory is that Vyk is the mastermind, and the person who poisoned Beruth is his accomplice. Who and how—I still don’t know.”

We fell silent for a moment. Halilintar was lost in his thoughts, while I struggled to stay awake. Was there something wrong with my tea? Why did I feel drowsy from time to time? I glanced at Maripos, who simply asked if I needed anything. I shook my head and shifted my gaze back to Halilintar, who still looked so serious.

"The information you've given is quite important. I'll have the guards check on them again and make sure of everything they have on them," Halilintar said after a while.

"Don't!" I exclaimed.

Halilintar raised an eyebrow, looking confused by my words. "Why?"

"They'll likely become suspicious if you act as though you already know the culprit."

"Taufan, they're in prison," Halilintar spoke as if he was pointing out that the sky was blue. "They must know that sooner or later, I'll uncover the real perpetrator."

"I know that too. What I mean is, they'll likely lie or hide information that could otherwise be revealed without them realizing it. One example is the gemstone on Vyk’s wrist. He might have thought no one would notice it. So, he acted completely casual, even when we visited his cell. He didn't seem like he was trying to hide the gemstone at all. Especially considering the possibility that the number of culprits isn’t just one."

Halilintar considered my explanation for a moment before sighing in resignation and giving me a tired smile. He said he would keep this information to himself until he gathered more evidence. I was glad he was willing to listen to me. I have to say it once again—there are benefits to being the beloved younger brother of the main character.

Just as I was about to say something else, a knock on the door sounded, followed by the voice of a woman I recognized as Doctor Kién. Halilintar permitted her to enter, and soon, the door to the room opened. Doctor Kién walked in confidently. Her long blonde hair was tied in a high ponytail, with bangs framing her face. She was a mesmerizing woman, believe me—she was incredibly beautiful. But she was also incredibly fierce! I remember how often she would glare at me whenever she treated me. A terrifying woman.

Doctor Kién bowed to Halilintar first, then glanced at me, who had now become a human burrito—thanks to Maripos—before bowing to me as well.

"You called for me, Your Highness?"

"Yes, please check on Taufan. He must have caught a cold from the rain."

Doctor Kién glanced at me again, gave a short nod, and walked toward me. I unwrapped the blanket around me, making it easier for her to examine me. She stopped beside me, placed her bag next to me, and when she opened it, I saw various strange tools inside. Then, Doctor Kién knelt beside me, extended her hand, and said, "May I check your pulse, Your Highness?"

I nodded and offered her my hand, allowing her to begin her work. I figured it was best to let Doctor Kién do her job in peace, so I turned my gaze toward Halilintar instead. The young man was massaging his temple, his brows furrowed deeply. It seemed like he was having a headache. I hoped it was only because of the information I had shared and not because he was sick. The bags under Halilintar's eyes were darker than the last time I saw him. How long had it been since he last slept? What duties was he handling besides the Beruth's case?

Oh, he needs sleep. I have to make him sleep!

How do I do that? I could persuade Halilintar, or I could force him.

My thoughts of plotting against Halilintar were cut short when Doctor Kién spoke again. "Yes, you’re right. Prince Taufan has mild flu symptoms. If treated immediately, he should recover quickly. As for his medication, I only recommend drinking a decoction of luya [1] with a bit of honey. This will help clear his blocked respiratory tract. Considering that Prince Taufan has already consumed a lot of strong medicine, I don’t want to add more to his system."

[1] Luya is the Tagalog word for ginger, but let’s just assume it's a plant similar to ginger but not exactly ginger.

"Thank goodness," Halilintar sighed in relief. "Thank you for your hard work, Doctor Kién."

Doctor Kién only nodded. She closed her bag—I had no idea what tools she had taken out during the examination since I wasn't paying attention—then turned her gaze to Halilintar. This time, her eyes sharpened, just like the way she used to look at me when she first treated me. I thought she only acted this way toward me, but it turns out she could do it to Halilintar as well.

"On the other hand, Your Highness, I believe your condition is far more concerning right now. You look like you could faint at any moment."

I nodded in agreement. This woman was absolutely right—Halilintar looked terrible! He was as pale as a corpse, and his eyes were dark like a panda’s! He could fall ill if he kept pushing himself to work without rest. However, Halilintar seemed indifferent to his condition. The young man waved a hand at Doctor Kién, as if telling the blonde woman not to worry about him.

I saw Doctor Kién sigh tiredly—she must have told Halilintar the same thing many times before, only to be ignored.

Doctor Kién didn’t say anything else to force Halilintar to rest. She simply asked if there was anything else he needed from her, then left once Halilintar said there was nothing more. Halilintar then instructed Maripos to inform Taran to prepare the luya decoction for me immediately. He said not to let my flu worsen.

Why was Halilintar always overly worried about Taufan? I had seen him interact with Duri and Solar. He wasn’t this concerned about his two youngest brothers. Could it be because Taufan was his favorite younger brother?

I chose to push all of that to the back of my mind for now. I considered it not an urgent matter that I needed to know immediately. What I did know was that I was incredibly sleepy at the moment and just wanted to sleep.  

"Do you want to sleep, Taufan?"  

I only responded with a mumble. It was becoming increasingly difficult to stay conscious. My eyes felt like they could close at any moment. I was sure that the moment my head touched the pillow, I would fall asleep instantly!  

"Sleeping on the sofa will hurt your back. Wait for Maripos to arrive, he will escort you to my room."  

"No, I'm already sleepy," I said stubbornly. I lay down on the sofa, hugging the blanket I had been using earlier, and closed my eyes. A high-quality sofa was clearly different from the ones I knew. It even felt incredibly comfortable to lie on!  

"Your Highness should sleep as well."  

"Yes, I will sleep after this."  

Halilintar was lying. He definitely wasn’t going to sleep. That’s why I felt the need to play my best card—even though it was extremely embarrassing.  

"Brother... do you really not want to sleep? It still feels cold with just a blanket," I said, trying to sound as pitiful as possible. I even gave him a pleading look.  

"Taufan, there isn't enough space for both of us on that sofa."  

"My body isn't that big, so there will be enough space. Brother... don't you want to sleep with me?"  

Aaahh!! So embarrassing! Absolutely humiliating. I mean, I often asked Maripos to sleep with me when I didn't want to be left alone, but that was Maripos. A young man who had seen all my ridiculous antics nearly 24/7. Meanwhile, this was Halilintar, whom I had been seeing less and less lately. So embarrassing, really embarrassing.  

Even so, I heard the sound of fabric shifting and then footsteps approaching me. I felt my body being gently moved aside, and then Halilintar lay down beside me in a sideways position. I did the same to give him more space. He used his arm as a pillow and somehow managed to cover both of us with my blanket. Halilintar hugged me and told me that I should sleep now.  

Listening to the rhythm of his heartbeat, I slowly closed my eyes. Before I was completely swallowed by the world of dreams, memories of my childhood surfaced. When Halilintar, my brother, hugged me and Gempa, who was scared when the lights went out during a storm. Ah, I missed my brothers even more.  

...  

"Let me help you handle this case."  

Halilintar, who was sipping his tea at that moment, paused and looked at me. He placed his teacup back on the table and then asked, "Aren't you already doing that, Taufan?"  

"Yes, but all I've been doing is providing information and then going back to relaxing. On the other hand, you're working until you stay up late all the time," I narrowed my eyes when Halilintar looked like he wanted to deny it, "Let me help you more. Didn't I already tell you not to hesitate to ask for my help?"  

"I don't want to trouble you."  

A cliché excuse. I couldn't believe Halilintar was saying that. If he really didn't want to trouble me, he should have refused me from the start. Of course, if he had done that, I would have made a fuss. But what I meant was, he had already let me be involved, so why was he only now saying he didn’t want to trouble me?  

"What kind of help would you provide if I allowed you?"  

"I want to ask the prisoners some questions."  

"Why not leave it to the interrogation team?"  

"No. If the interrogation team asks them, they will definitely be more cautious and refuse to answer honestly."  

Halilintar sighed. He gave me a tired smile—I knew he had lost even before we began a battle of stubbornness. If someone told me that Taufan had Halilintar wrapped around his little finger, I would believe it without hesitation! I mean, just look at him! He believed everything I said and did whatever I asked. I wondered what Taufan had done in the past to make Halilintar like this.  

"Alright, I'll write a notice to the interrogation team that you're allowed to conduct the interrogation on your own without them. Since this is a bit sudden, for now, just use my badge to enter the prison." Halilintar handed me a flat, round metal object with an engraving of chains and a bird. I had seen a similar emblem at the Main Palace’s prison. Maybe it was the insignia for the Ignisia prison.  

"Ah, if you also need assistance with the investigation, go to Kaika. He will help you with that."  

I didn't expect him to go as far as letting me borrow Commander Kaika for this. As far as I knew, Commander Kaika was the leader of the Royal Guards, which was said to be an elite force. A unit deployed to protect the kingdom from dangerous enemies, to go to war with the king, to handle deadly monsters at the borders, and many other things. Captain Fang once said that being admitted into Commander Kaika’s Royal Guards unit meant you were one step closer to becoming an honorable knight. I didn't fully understand, but that had to be impressive, right?  

I requested all the information Halilintar had on the case. He handed me a stack of papers while smiling, as if telling me that I had asked for all this, so I had no right to complain. I felt a chill seeing that pile of documents. I wished I could turn all those papers into a PDF file so I could read them on my phone—unfortunately, there was no such thing in this world. I guess this was why people worshipped technological advancements.  

So, after I pushed Halilintar back to his room to get more rest, I—or rather, Maripos—carried the stack of papers to the library. There, I began reading through each and every record on the Beruth's case, searching for even the tiniest clue. Playing detective was sometimes fun, but when it got like this, it was no longer enjoyable. 

Maripos helped me—of course, I would drag Maripos into suffering alongside me. We sat for hours in the library, reading page after page of documents in search of something.

What I gathered after rereading several papers was that Beruth, who was having dinner with his family—his father, mother, and older sister—suddenly let out a choking sound and began convulsing. Not long after, his skin turned blue due to difficulty breathing. He survived because the doctor who arrived knew how to treat him correctly.

What kind of poison was used remained a question. In these documents, they suspected three different types of poison, as all three had the same effects. The symptoms they caused were identical to each other. The differences were so difficult to detect, but fortunately, all three poisons shared the same antidote. Except, one of them required a higher dose of the antidote than the other two. Luckily—or unluckily—Beruth was not poisoned with that one, considering the doctor who treated him said he only carried a small dose of the antidote, far less than what that particular poison required.

So, that left only the two other poisons. Ah, what a shame they couldn’t find any trace of the poison in Beruth’s food. If they had, they could have determined much faster which poison had been used. There was also no way to examine the contents of someone's stomach in this world, huh? Where is technological advancement when you need it?

"What are you doing, brother?"

A child suddenly appeared, startling me.

No, I did not scream like a little girl. You misheard.

"Hello to you too, Prince Solar," I said with a smile. No, I was not trying to cover up the fact that I screamed.

Chapter Text

Boboiboy Fanfiction

© Boboiboy | Animonsta Studio

A/N: The entire story is purely fictional, and the author does not profit from writing this story. If there are any similarities in ideas, character names, or locations, they are purely coincidental.

≫ ──── ≪•◦ ❈ ◦•≫ ──── ≪

Actually, I hadn’t intended to involve Solar in this matter. However, the child looked extremely curious when he found Maripos and me in the library—if I must add, we must have looked quite pathetic, especially with all the scattered papers around us.

And so, now there was an additional nine-year-old reading through the pile of papers with us. Occasionally, he would mumble something about difficult language and terms he didn’t understand. At those times, I would explain some of the words that were too complex for a nine-year-old—with Maripos’s help, of course.

"Do you already know who did it?"

Hearing Solar's question, I felt a little uneasy. What I told Halilintar had to remain a secret until I was sure. Only Halilintar, Maripos, and I knew about it. Halilintar had promised not to tell anyone until we had more evidence. So I figured I couldn't tell Solar. No matter how adorable he looked sitting beside me, holding a piece of paper. No, I couldn’t leak information to Solar—it would likely lead to rumors spreading. But I also didn’t want to lie to him. Could you look into those shimmering silver eyes and tell a lie? No, I refused to be the jerk who would do that.

"For now, we have a suspect. However, due to a lack of evidence, we’ve chosen to keep it a secret for the time being."

Solar seemed a little dissatisfied that I wasn’t giving more information, but he understood that some things were meant for him to hear and some weren’t. So, he decided to return to the paper in his hands. I glanced at it briefly—it was about the suspected poison used by the culprit. Ah, the page I was reading before Solar startled me.

Suddenly, Solar placed the paper in his hands onto the table, jumped down from his chair, and walked away to who-knows-where. I thought he was bored and wanted to return to the Prince’s Palace or do something else, but soon he returned with a rather thick book. I quickly approached him, taking the book from his hands and holding his hand as we returned to our seats.

Solar sat down again and asked for the book back. I didn’t really understand, but I handed it to him anyway. I couldn’t see the title clearly; the book had a dark green cover with illustrations of roots sprawling across it. Solar must have read this book multiple times, judging by how he didn’t need to look at the table of contents and went straight to the page he was looking for.

He stopped on a page displaying a clustered purple flower. It looked similar to a pea flower—was it related to the pea family? The plant was called Lucerna[1].

Solar looked very serious as he read the description of the Lucerna flower. Then, he suddenly stopped at the last line of the third paragraph and exclaimed, "Ah! This!"

"What about that flower?" I asked.

"This is the poison that was used," Solar replied confidently, lifting his chin high as if daring someone to contradict him.

"How do you know?"

Solar didn’t answer immediately. Instead, he began searching through the scattered papers on the table before grabbing one. He placed it in the middle of the table, giving Maripos and me full access to read its contents. It was a medical report from the doctor regarding Beruth’s condition. Solar then pointed to the last sentence of the report.

'...the tongue is blue with black spots. There is a red rash under the lower lip.'

Solar began explaining, "These symptoms only occur when poisoned by Lucerna pods. The other two suspected poisons might also cause a blue tongue, but not the black spots and the red rash."

I took the book Solar had been reading and carefully read the explanation—twice, to ensure I didn’t miss anything. "How do you know? This book doesn’t mention that."

"It doesn’t, because not many people know about it yet."

"Then how do you know, Your Highness?"

This time, Solar didn’t sound as confident as before. In fact, he looked hesitant. He tightly gripped the sleeve of his clothes—so much that I almost thought he would tear his own garment if he kept going. I placed my hand on his, asking if something was wrong with my question. Solar averted his gaze from me, his face turning red rapidly. Did I… make him angry? Maybe I shouldn’t have touched him?

I had just started lifting my hand when his small hands caught mine. He looked at me with eyes that sparkled brightly—just like Duri’s whenever I gave him cake.

"Do you really want to hear my explanation? Do you really want to hear it?"

"Eh? Um… yes, of course."

I had no idea what was happening, but I heard Maripos stifle a quiet laugh. When I looked at him, he quickly averted his gaze.

Maripos, you won’t be getting any sleep tonight, just wait!

I looked at Solar again and gave the boy a reassuring smile.

“Duri has a large greenhouse at the Sunrise Palace. In that greenhouse, there are Lucerna plants, and we studied them together. From the various records about this plant, it is said that the poisonous part is its pods. I knew that Lucerna pod poison had the same effects as the other two poisons. But then I thought, do they really have exactly the same effects? That’s impossible, isn’t it? They come from different sources—how could they produce identical effects? So, I dug deeper into the records about this plant. I found that one similarity was that this poison causes rashes on the skin it touches. If consumed, the tongue turns blue and develops black spots. Based on the report about this man’s condition, he has the exact symptoms I just mentioned.”

Wow… I was speechless. I truly didn’t know what to say. Was this child really only nine years old? I knew children had a strong sense of curiosity, but Solar took it to a whole different level. He saw something, became curious, and sought answers. But he wasn’t satisfied with just that—he kept searching for more until he found what he was looking for.

He… was truly extraordinary! I understood why he had so many supporters. With his intelligence, it was only natural for people to see him as a suitable candidate for the throne. Even so, I didn’t think Solar’s intelligence was suited for being a king. He was much better suited to being a researcher. That intense curiosity and the drive to uncover more and more—how did this child end up fighting against his two brothers for the throne instead?

“Um… Are you bored with my explanation?” Solar’s voice brought me back to reality. I blinked a few times, looking at Solar, who had his head lowered in disappointment. Oh no! I made the youngest one sad.

“No, no. On the contrary, that was a fascinating explanation. I’m truly impressed that Your Highness was able to notice such a small difference. That's clever.” Without thinking, I patted Solar’s head while praising him. Maybe because I often did it to Duri, I was used to patting children’s heads.

Solar tensed up when I touched his head but then smiled happily. So, I figured it was fine to do it.

“Hmm… This Lucerna plant is similar to Medika[2], which is used as livestock feed,” Maripos commented. He was holding the book Solar had picked earlier. I didn’t know what Medika was, but maybe it was a plant similar to Lucerna.

“That’s because Lucerna's other name is Medika. Medika is the more commonly known name among ordinary people, and the plant is indeed used as livestock feed,” Solar explained.

“Oh, no wonder it seemed familiar. Since the pods of this plant are poisonous, they’re usually separated before feeding it to livestock. Or, to avoid the hassle, the plant is harvested before it produces pods.”

“Wow… Maripos, you sure know a lot.”

Maripos smiled at me. “I was a stable keeper before this, Your Highness. This is basic knowledge for me.”

Maripos was a stable keeper? I didn’t know that! I thought he had been a servant from the start. Now I was even more curious about his background. He had exceptional combat skills, he was knowledgeable about many things, and if I recalled correctly, a bandit once called him The Silver Wolf when we were attacked. And now he was saying he used to be a stable keeper before becoming a servant.

The original Taufan was already a complicated character, and now the people around him also had unusual backgrounds. What else was going to surprise me?

I set that thought aside and focused on the case. The sooner this was solved, the sooner Qually could be released from prison.

I asked Maripos to bring ink and fresh paper so we could record our findings. We worked late into the evening, stopping only when Solar yawned several times. He must have been exhausted.

With that, I decided to end our work for the day. I helped Maripos tidy up the scattered papers, sorting them by topic to make them easier to organize. Once everything was done, I carried Solar, who had fallen asleep, while Maripos took the papers we had worked on out of the library.

I had to return to the Sunset Palace, but first, I needed to take Solar back to the Sunrise Palace—a place I had never been to since entering Taufan’s body. I wasn’t sure if I would be welcome there. I mean, that was where the princes lived. While I was eager to meet Blaze and Ice—the two princes I had yet to encounter, unlike Gempa, who was nowhere to be found—I was also worried about the rejection I might face. I didn’t care about the servants or the guards, but those two princes undoubtedly had the exact same faces as my brothers in my original world. Could I handle rejection from them?

Lost in my dilemma, I ran into Halilintar. He was walking with Commander Kaika and Taran following behind him. Halilintar looked surprised to see us. He quickly approached me and took Solar from my arms.

"Let me carry him, Taufan. Don’t tire yourself out."

I was a little offended, honestly, but I chose not to say anything to avoid unnecessary conflict.

"Are you going back?"

"Yes, I’ll continue working on it at the Sunset Palace." I gestured toward the stack of papers Maripos was carrying.

Halilintar only nodded. He glanced at Solar, who was sleeping soundly, then said to me, "Forgive me for not escorting you back, Taufan. I have to take Solar home."

"It’s not a problem, Your Highness. Besides, you should rest as well. Please don’t overwork yourself again."

Halilintar laughed. I was sure that if he weren’t carrying Solar, he would have ruffled my hair while laughing.

"Of course, of course. I’ll rest tonight."

I still didn’t believe him, but I was too exhausted to argue. I simply nodded at him. Halilintar then instructed Commander Kaika to escort me to the Sunset Palace—just Commander Kaika, as I had asked him to stop sending an entire unit to accompany me. After that, we parted ways. Halilintar left with Solar and Taran, while I walked with Maripos and Commander Kaika.

Once my hands were free, I took some of the papers from Maripos so he wouldn’t be too burdened. Goodness, I was utterly exhausted today. I just wanted to reach the Sunset Palace as soon as possible and sleep.

It seemed that I fell asleep on the way because when I woke up, I was already in my room, and the sun was shining. Who did I trouble last night by making them carry me to my bed? Let’s just forget about that for now.

I went through my morning routine as usual. Sword training with Captain Fang—which had become even more intense lately—taking a short break, then bathing and enjoying my breakfast… or maybe it was already lunch. Normally, I would relax in the garden or paint by the lake afterward, but right now, I had something more important to do: solving this case!

So here I was, in the Sunset Palace’s library, surrounded by scattered papers and open books. As before, Maripos was assisting me. Thanks to Solar’s help yesterday, we had identified the poison used by the culprit, and based on Maripos’ statement that this poison was found in plants used as livestock feed, my suspicion of Vyk being one of the culprits grew stronger.

However, as I told Halilintar, Vyk didn’t poison Beruth directly. How could a stable keeper poison a nobleman’s meal? He must have had help from another servant—either a table server or someone who delivered the food.

"Maripos, what do you think?"

"I’m not sure, Your Highness. We’ve identified the poison and have a suspect, but we still can’t figure out how the crime was carried out."

Ugh… I really wish this world had surveillance cameras. It would make catching the culprit so much easier. But what am I expecting from a world where technology is still underdeveloped?

Thinking about it again, if the poison came from the Lucerna or Medika plant, which is well-known as livestock feed, why did they go out of their way to frame Qually by planting a poison bottle in his room?

Qually is a chef assistant! What would he be doing with livestock feed? Was he cooking for the horses or something? Ridiculous.

Or… what if the poison in the bottle was different from the one Beruth consumed? Weren’t there three types of poison that caused the same effects, making it difficult to determine which one had poisoned Beruth? If any traces of poison had been found in Beruth’s leftover food, it would have been immediately clear that the poison came from Medika pods, which would have put Vyk under suspicion right away. But since no poison was found in Beruth’s leftover food, they couldn’t determine exactly which poison was used, leading to suspicion and the arrest of all the servants in Baron Kalns' residence.

I shuffled through the papers on the table, trying to find the notes regarding the poison found in Qually’s room. According to the notes, the poison was also derived from a plant—Ilex.

"Maripos, do we have the same book that Solar was reading here?"

Maripos nodded, stood up from his seat, and walked toward one of the bookshelves that I knew held books about plants. While waiting for him to find the book, I reread the notes carefully. They found an empty poison bottle, as if it had been used but not yet discarded. Its location was also suspicious—it was found under Qually’s bed. If I were the one poisoning Beruth, I wouldn’t leave evidence in such an obvious place. I would do my best to hide it. I could bury it in the backyard, throw it somewhere no one would ever go, or try my hardest to get rid of it completely.

It was obvious they were framing Qually. They wanted that poison bottle to be found, making Qually look guilty. That poor young man.

Maripos finally returned with a thick, dark green book—the exact same one Solar had taken yesterday. It seemed this library was quite well-stocked.

He handed the book to me, and I quickly searched for the section discussing the Ilex plant. I found it a few pages before the Lucerna section. The book stated that it was a plant containing a highly dangerous toxin—similar to Lucerna. However, unlike Lucerna, which was used as livestock feed, the Ilex plant bore bright red berries that were commonly consumed by humans. And that was the poisonous part. But of course, it couldn’t be eaten carelessly. The plant had to be processed first, and only a handful of people could do so. Most of those capable of processing it were experienced chefs.

The head chef at Baron Kalns’ residence was said to be one of those who could prepare Ilex berries. But why didn’t they frame the head chef instead of Qually? Perhaps because they saw Qually as an easier target compared to the head chef, who had worked there for a long time and was skilled at preparing Ilex. As an assistant chef, Qually wouldn’t necessarily know how to process Ilex correctly or remove its toxicity. Moreover, Ilex was a human food ingredient, shifting suspicion from the stable keeper to the kitchen staff.

Hmm… who else had access to Qually’s room to plant that poison bottle besides Qually himself? Could it have been one of the four servants? Didn’t two of them say they were cleaning Baron Kalns’ residence when the incident happened? They never said they worked together—they only mentioned that they were cleaning the residence and saw the head butler enter Baron Kalns' study.

Oh, no. I had unconsciously assumed they were together and taken their words as the truth, especially since they had been interrogated separately. But now I realized that one of them must have been lying. They might have indeed been cleaning the residence and seen the head butler entering the study, but they could have done so from different angles. One might have caught a glimpse of the butler passing by, while the other might have seen it clearly because they were cleaning that specific area. The point was—they weren’t working together, meaning one of them had the opportunity to slip the poison bottle into Qually’s room while he was busy in the kitchen.

So, Vyk was the mastermind. He was most likely the one who supplied the poison and may have planned everything. His motive was still unclear—I suspected revenge for Sofia. Then there was one of the four servants, who planted the empty poison bottle in Qually’s room to make him look guilty. The only thing left to figure out was who had administered the poison to Beruth. I still didn’t know how they had done it without leaving traces of poison in Beruth’s food.

I flipped through the book absentmindedly, rereading the section on Lucerna. This book described the plant in detail, though it didn’t mention the symptoms Solar had pointed out. Perhaps people had overlooked them because they were subtle. According to the records, the black spots on Beruth’s tongue were no larger than grains of sand and not very numerous. Perhaps they were blackened papillae due to the poison. It was also noted that Beruth had a rash beneath his lip, which looked more like skin that had been rubbed too often.

Hmm… rubbed, huh…

Solar had said that the poison caused rashes when it came into contact with the skin. Beruth had a rash beneath his lip, which meant the poison had touched his skin either before or after he ingested it. I asked Maripos how quickly Medika pod poison reacted, and he said it was quite fast. If ingested, symptoms would appear within a minute. If it made contact with the skin, a rash would form within thirty seconds—starting as an itch before turning into a stinging sensation, like being pricked by tiny needles.

Such a short reaction time. So, if the poison had touched the skin below Beruth’s lip first and then he consumed it afterward, the skin reaction would have been overlooked because the internal poisoning acted so quickly. The pain from his skin would have been masked by the greater pain caused by the ingested poison.

What could have touched the area beneath Beruth’s lip? Could the poison have been in his drink? But how exactly would he drink in a way that caused it to touch beneath his lip? He was still a noble, wasn’t he? Surely he had been taught proper etiquette, right? Or did he drink like a barbarian?

Even so, it was stated that no poison was found in Beruth’s food or drink. So, no, the poison wasn’t in his drink. Could it have been on the glass? But really, who drinks in a way that makes the glass touch beneath their lip? Could it have been on his utensils?

I recalled Duri’s habit of always biting his spoon before eating a cake; could it be that Beruth had a habit of tapping his utensils against the area below his lips? It sounds absurd and far-fetched, but it’s possible, isn’t it?

I mean, the perpetrator coated Beruth’s utensils with poison, but they didn’t know about his small habit of tapping them against his skin, causing the poison to touch the area below his lips and leaving a rash. This would explain why no poison was found in Beruth’s leftover food and why no one else was poisoned except for him.

The main issue now is… who? Who had access to the noble family’s utensils without being suspected of tampering with them? Who could coat them with poison without drawing suspicion?

I shared my thoughts with Maripos. He said my speculation made sense.

"If I may, Your Highness, I believe it was a kitchen servant."

"Huh? Why?"

"The kitchen servants are responsible for washing the cooking and dining utensils after use. They can touch them without suspicion. They could have switched the utensils for various reasons, such as cleanliness or preference of their master. No one would suspect them. However, such a risky action could go wrong without a partner. You suspect that one of the servants conspired with Vyk, but I believe it’s more than that. The servant who delivered the food and set the table—one of them must have ensured that Beruth received the poisoned utensils."

Maripos was right. I had already suspected that there was more than one culprit, so I shouldn’t be surprised if all the servants were actually conspiring to poison Beruth. I mean, he was a scoundrel, and he deserved it.

Now we could focus our investigation with this knowledge. I wrote down everything we knew and drafted a letter to Halilintar, asking him to have the Royal Guards focus on searching for the poisoned utensil. I was certain it had been disposed of before the arrests, likely swapped out while everyone was distracted by Beruth’s condition. I also wrote to Commander Kaika, requesting his help in investigating the backgrounds of our suspects. Maybe that way, we could uncover their motives for taking such a drastic action as poisoning a noble.

Maripos sealed both letters and hurried to send them out.

Now, I had to go to the prison to start questioning the detainees. Halilintar had given me permission to ask questions outside of interrogation sessions, and though I really didn’t want to enter that cold, terrifying prison without him, I had to do it.

Maripos was obviously coming with me, but this time, I also brought Captain Fang along. I felt much safer having both of them by my side.

The prison guards recognized me immediately when I stepped down from the carriage. They bowed in greeting but didn’t allow me to enter right away. Hm, that’s right. They shouldn’t just let anyone enter the prison carelessly.

I showed them the badge Halilintar had given me the other day. One of them straightened up and said he would escort me inside.

The prison was just as terrifying as when I first entered it. The screams of the prisoners, their wails and sobs, the stifling mix of hatred, fear, and anger that lingered even from behind the iron bars—oh, it was truly horrifying.

I clung to Maripos’ arm just to keep moving forward. Without Halilintar’s lightning pillars, the lighting in this place was terrible.

"Are you afraid, Your Highness?"

It was strange to hear that question again. I remembered Halilintar asking me the same thing the first time I came here. But this time, it wasn’t him—it was Captain Fang, walking ahead of us with a torch in his hand, given by the guard who had greeted us.

"Y-yeah… I don’t like this place. It’s scary."

Captain Fang glanced at me and Maripos, then turned his face away. For a moment, I could have sworn I saw his irises glow with a dark purple light, but I must have been mistaken. His irises were red—brighter than Halilintar’s.

Then, suddenly, we heard the prisoners screaming in unison, their voices echoing as if they had encountered a terrifying monster. Then—silence. Only silence.

I was startled. Why had everything gone quiet so suddenly? What just happened?

Even the guards with us seemed confused. This eerie silence only made me more afraid. I clung even closer to Maripos, who had been strangely quiet since we entered the prison. If anything, his body had been tense this whole time. Maybe Maripos was just as scared as I was but didn’t want to show it since I was already acting like a frightened kitten.

I told the guard that I wanted to speak with the prisoners. He led me to the interrogation room and asked which ones I wished to see. I explained who I needed to question, and he said he would bring them to me shortly.

Today, I only wanted to meet with two people. The first was Vyk—to confirm the gemstone I had seen before—and the second was the kitchen servant, to check their hands. If they were the one who had coated Beruth’s utensils with poison, they should also have a rash on their hands. Solar had explained that the rash caused by this poison could last for a month if exposed to a significant amount. I was sure that applying poison to the utensils required more than just a single drop.

I didn’t have to wait long. The guard returned with Vyk.

As soon as he saw me in the room, Vyk immediately recognized me and prepared to greet me, but I stopped him. I wasn’t here as a prince—I was here as someone seeking information.

"May I ask why you wanted to see me, Your Highness?"

I was a bit surprised. Vyk’s voice was much softer than I remembered. Maybe because his voice had been drowned out by Qually’s before, or maybe because he hadn’t said much apart from greetings when I visited Qually’s cell with Halilintar.

"Your voice is much softer than I remember," I commented.

Vyk cleared his throat. "Yes, my throat has been sore since yesterday. Maybe that’s why my voice sounds different."

I nodded. That was enough small talk. Now, let’s get to business.

"Vyk, do you know a girl named Sofia who used to work at Baron Kalns’ estate?"

I watched closely as Vyk’s body stiffened, if only for a moment. His expression remained neutral, unaffected.

"No, Your Highness. I only started working at Baron Kalns’ estate two years ago, and during my time there, I have never met this girl named Sofia."

I simply nodded. I knew he was lying. He knew Sofia—whatever their relationship was, I wasn’t sure, but I knew he knew her. That meant my guess about the gemstone he wore being connected to the one on Sofia’s necklace was correct.

I continued with a few questions about his daily routine. Though he looked confused, he still answered them. Then, I asked some questions related to the case so as not to raise his suspicions any further. They were the same questions the interrogation team had asked, and Vyk gave the same answers as he had before.

After that, I told him I was done with him, and he could return to his cell.

Two guards came and escorted Vyk back to his cell. Not long after, they returned with the kitchen servant. She looked much thinner than when I had first seen her during the interrogation. She seemed as if she hadn’t eaten for days and appeared weak.

Why did she look like this? Even Vyk and Qually still looked healthy despite being in prison.

I turned to Maripos, but he looked even more tense than before. It seemed like he couldn’t answer my question. Then, I looked at Captain Fang, who stepped closer and asked what he could do for me.

"Does this prison not feed its prisoners properly?" I whispered while observing the woman sitting before me.

Her hair was a mess, uncombed for days. Dark bags hung under her eyes, her cheeks were sunken from lack of fat, and her skin was as pale as a corpse. Ugh, she gave me chills.

Not to mention her clothes, which were filthy as if she had been rolling in the dirt, and the unpleasant odor coming from her.

Oh god, I felt like I was going to vomit.

I waved my hand, creating a small gust of wind to push away the foul smell before it reached me. If Vayuna returned, I would kiss that bird many times as thanks for teaching me such a useful skill.

"Ignisia’s prison is one of the better ones, Your Highness. Prisoners are still given two meals a day, consisting of bread and fresh vegetable soup—not spoiled food."

Oh, Captain Fang knew quite a lot. Had he worked as a prison guard before or something?

As if reading my mind, Captain Fang gave a small smile—so small, I must emphasize—and shook his head. "I studied this, Your Highness."

Ah, yes, of course. He was a guard; it made sense for him to learn about these things. I often studied topics unrelated to my own studies too.

I redirected my focus to the woman before me. I tried to question her, but she seemed to have lost her mind, laughing uncontrollably.

She raised both hands to cover her eyes as she cackled. That’s when I saw it—her hands were covered in red, painful-looking rashes. Not all over, just in certain areas, but it still looked painful.

Then, she suddenly screamed and pulled her hands away from her face.

I had no idea what was going on with her behavior. She was in no state to talk, so I asked the guards to return her to her cell.

Once it was just the three of us in the room, Maripos, who had been silent all this time, finally spoke.

"That is a side effect of Medika poison when exposed in excess."

"Oh? You mean it makes people go insane?"

"Not directly. But as I have mentioned before, Your Highness, the poison from Medika pods, when it comes into contact with the skin, causes rashes that make a person feel pain, as if being pricked by needles. The pain worsens upon contact with water. Perhaps that’s why she hasn’t washed herself like the other prisoners. The pain also occurs when touching anything, which might explain why she hasn’t been eating. Continuous pain like that can eventually drive a person to madness."

That made sense. She had been laughing so hard that tears streamed down her face, yet she screamed when her hands touched her skin.

So, she really did coat the utensils with poison, which resulted in her hands ending up like that.

How did she manage to hide her hands during the inspection? I was curious.

Oh my god, does this mean I confirmed two culprits in a single day? Wow, I was impressed with myself.

I should return to Sunset Palace and pamper myself for all my hard work. Of course, Maripos, Solar, and Captain Fang deserved a reward too for helping me.

We quickly left the prison—not only because I absolutely hated being there, but also because Maripos seemed increasingly uneasy.

I wanted to inform Halilintar immediately, but one of the prison guards, who happened to be friends with a member of the Royal Guard, mentioned that Halilintar had to escort a delegation from a neighboring kingdom out of Ignisia today.

Alright, I would just write him a letter once I arrived at Sunset Palace.

As the carriage I was riding in stopped in front of the palace, I let Maripos step down first. He extended his hand to help me out of the carriage, just as he always did. At first, it had been embarrassing because it made me feel like a lady, but now I understood that this was simply the duty of a personal servant. They were supposed to assist their master in getting down from a carriage, especially since their master might be wearing troublesome attire. So yes, I had gotten used to it.

I had only taken five steps away from the carriage when, all of a sudden, I was tackled by something massive and heavy, sending me crashing to the ground. My head struck small stones with a force that made it hurt terribly. I cried out in pain, but my scream was cut short by the creature looming over me.

A golden bear’s face was right in front of mine. It opened its mouth, revealing sharp and powerful teeth—teeth that could tear me apart in an instant.

I lost my voice. Suddenly, screaming felt like an impossible task.

I was on the verge of passing out from fear, but then I heard a familiar voice shout, "Oak! Get off my brother right now!"

Oak? Oak? Oak... ah, right—Gempa’s golden bear, Oak.

Please, someone explain to me why this bear was here and why it attacked me like this. I thought it liked me.

As soon as Oak moved away, a hysterical and frightened Maripos rushed to help me stand. He frantically dusted off my clothes while repeatedly asking if I was alright and if I was injured. Well, my head hurt a little—there was probably a wound. I would have to call Theron to check it.

I looked at the golden bear, who was now being scolded by a teenage boy. Ignoring the bear, I shifted my gaze to the boy who was still lecturing his companion.

He was taller than Taufan, with a sturdy and muscular build similar to Captain Fang. But his face—his face made me freeze. His irises were golden, or perhaps honey-colored.

The resemblance to Halilintar was unmistakable.

The only name that came to my mind was, "Gempa...?"

Hearing his name slip from my lips unconsciously, the teenager turned to look at me. He smiled.

"It's been a long time, Brother."

That familiar pain resurfaced in my chest—a deep, overwhelming regret.

Black spots began dancing in my vision. I barely managed to return his smile and greeting.

"Hello, Gempa."

After that, I remembered nothing but darkness.

Chapter Text

Boboiboy Fanfiction

©  Boboiboy | Animonsta Studio

A/N: The entire story is purely fictional, and the author does not profit from writing this story. If there are any similarities in ideas, character names, or locations, they are purely coincidental.

≫ ──── ≪•◦ ❈ ◦•≫ ──── ≪

"How is he?" he asked the doctor in front of him. The woman shook her head in response. "I have tried speaking with him, Your Highness. But what happened is too much for Prince Gempa to bear. I'm afraid I can only help this far."

Hearing the woman's words, his hands clenched into fists. What should he do now?

He nodded to the woman, permitting her to leave. After the doctor's departure, he paced back and forth, his mind restless with turmoil. His hands gripped his hair tightly, as if pulling at it could relieve his stress. What else could he do for his brother? What else could he do to protect them all?

"I can't do this, Father. I'm not as strong as you said I was. I let all of this happen. This is all my fault." he thought.

He could only cover his mouth to hold back the sobs that wanted to escape. His eyes burned with tears. He slid down onto the floor, leaning against the door behind him. What should he do now?

...

"Take all of this away! I don't want to see it!"

Once again, he could only stand silently in the corner of the room, watching as his once gentle brother transformed into someone filled with rage and cruelty. Throwing objects at the servants, shouting at them for every mistake, even striking them without hesitation. He could only watch in silence as his brother began to hurt himself.

There was nothing he could do. No matter what kind of great doctor he brought to help his brother, nothing worked.

When night fell, he sneaked into his brother's room again, thinking that his brother had fallen asleep after a day of outbursts. But in reality, his brother was still awake. He sat on the floor, leaning against his bed.

His eyes were empty, as if his soul had been stolen by a spirit thief. The strong and muscular body he once had was now frail and thin. Was this really his brother? The one who always greeted him with a gentle smile?

"Gempa..."

He called out, but there was no response. He decided to sit beside his brother. They sat in silence for the next few minutes until finally, his brother leaned against him.

"Did you visit them again?" His brother's voice was hoarse. A voice so different from what he remembered.

He answered with a nod. His brother began to laugh, but the sound was hollow and unpleasant. "Why do you still do it?"

"Because they are our brothers." He replied without hesitation.

"Hah! They are no longer the little brothers you remember. They have become just like the people who abandoned you! They have become greedy for power!"

At these words, he didn't know what to say. They had gone through this conversation countless times since the incident. Not once had his brother ever listened to the reasons he gave. It was better to stay silent than to say something that would cause his brother to erupt in anger again. Once more, they fell into silence. Perhaps this was for the best because every time they spoke, they only ended up arguing again.

He had no idea how long they sat in silence like this—maybe just a few minutes, or maybe hours had passed. It didn’t matter. He slowly moved his arm and wrapped it around his brother. His brother rested against his chest, quietly sobbing. He didn’t say anything about it; he simply let his brother cry. He gently stroked his brother’s hair, hoping it would be enough to soothe him.

"Please don't leave me too. You're all I have left now." His brother pleaded, gripping his clothes so tightly that the fabric wrinkled under his grasp.

He didn’t answer. He wanted to, but he couldn’t. He couldn’t promise something uncertain. He didn’t want to hurt his brother any further. Instead, he said something else—something he knew he could do.

"I promise I will fix everything. I promise I will make things right."

And he would keep his word. He would do whatever it took to make things right again. No matter how many years it took or what had to be sacrificed to achieve it, he would do it. Even if he had to sell his soul to the devil or kill someone in the process, he would do it without hesitation.

...

When I regained consciousness, it wasn’t the same as before. Usually, when I wake up from fainting, I can hear the voices around me, but people know to keep their voices low when they’re near me. But this time was different—the only thing I heard was angry shouting, loud enough to make my eardrums feel like they were about to burst. The back of my head ached slightly, as if someone had hit me with a hard object. It reminded me of when I was hit by heavy books while trying to help Solar.  

Did someone hit me with a book?  

"He could have been seriously injured, Gempa! What were you thinking, letting Oak pounce on him like that?! Have you forgotten how weak your brother’s body is?!"

Oh, okay, the one yelling must be Halilintar. His voice was loud and clear, even though he wasn’t in the room with me. I tried to recall what had happened before I fainted. I think we had just returned from the prison. Then, as I stepped down from the carriage, something knocked me over. That must be why my head hurt.  

Oh, right. Oak.  

That golden bear had tackled me with his huge body and knocked me to the ground. Thanks a lot, Oak. This is what I get for spoiling a two-meter-tall bear with biscuits—painful bruises on my head.  

But that wasn’t the reason I fainted. Not at all.  

I fainted for the same reason I did when I saw Duri and Solar’s eyes. It was because of that teenage boy. Because I looked into his golden irises, and Taufan’s overwhelming emotions took hold of me once again. Not to mention the strange vision I had afterward. Oh god, am I going to faint when I meet Blaze and Ice too? But I didn’t faint when I first met Halilintar. Although, to be fair, I did feel an odd sense of forgetting something important when I saw him for the first time.  

That boy was Gempa, Taufan’s first younger brother and the Third Prince—the one who was probably being scolded by Halilintar at this very moment. Poor kid. I’d like to help you, but your bear gave me a headache, so consider this payback.  

Speaking of which, what was Gempa doing here? I thought he was at the Eastern Border or off on one of his adventures. Did he come to visit Taufan? Did he come because of the letter I sent? Is he suspicious of me and wants to see if I’m truly his brother or not? Oh god, how should I act in front of him? He hasn’t seen Taufan in a year, so it should be fine if I just act like myself, right?  

I mean, people can change a lot in a year.  

By the time I snapped out of my thoughts, the shouting had died down. Now, it had turned into muffled conversation. Halilintar loved his brothers—there was no way he could stay mad at them for too long.  

Finally, my bedroom door opened. Halilintar walked in first. Seeing that I was awake, he quickly approached me, asking where I was hurt and whether he should call the doctor again. He even asked if he should summon Duri to help heal me. I answered his questions one by one patiently—if I didn’t, he would just keep asking, and that would be annoying—before telling him to calm down.  

I glanced at the teenage boy who entered after Halilintar. He approached me with a guilty expression.  

"Brother, I’m really sorry for Oak’s behavior. I didn’t expect him to pounce on you like that."  

"Ah, no. He didn’t attack me." He was more like an overexcited dog that wanted to play with someone he liked. Unfortunately, he forgot that he was a two-meter-tall bear weighing hundreds of kilos, and I was a fragile human who, in the past, would have fainted just from running for five minutes. Thankfully, I didn’t break anything.  

But it seemed Halilintar didn’t agree with me. He started scolding Gempa for not controlling his spirit animal properly, and somehow, I got dragged into it as well. I wasn’t sure why, but I was also being scolded by Halilintar. A rough day.  

…  

Sometimes, I feel a little grateful that Halilintar is a busy person. He had returned to the Main Palace, considering he still had other matters to attend to. At least my ears were spared from his endless nagging.  

If you’re wondering whether I told Halilintar about what I discovered in this case, yes, I did. That was after I managed to get him to stay quiet for a moment. I told him about the poison that was used, my speculation on how Beruth was poisoned, the people I suspected to be involved, and about the kitchen maid whose hands were covered in painful red rashes. Halilintar said to leave the rest of the investigation to him. I didn’t quite agree, but he insisted. He said I needed to rest after what had just happened to me. And after that, he scolded me and Gempa again. Even Oak, who wasn’t in the room, got scolded.  

Typical Halilintar. He’s like a nagging mother scolding her children.  

With Halilintar gone, I was now left alone with Gempa. I had no idea what to talk about with him. This was so awkward.  

Maybe I should ask how he’s been? Or ask about his travels? That should be fine, right?  

I opened my mouth, about to ask a question to start the conversation, but Gempa spoke first.  

"I… didn’t know you were helping Brother Halilintar solve cases."  

I didn’t know at first either, Gempa. I was only dragged into it because my soft heart couldn’t bear to see a young man crying while kneeling at my feet. It would be great if I could say that out loud, but I chose not to. I just smiled at Gempa and shrugged.  

Gempa sat on the edge of my bed, hesitating before reaching out his hand. After a moment, he touched mine. His hands were much bigger than Taufan’s, almost the same size as Halilintar’s—making me jealous. His hands were also rough, completely different from Taufan’s, which were once soft and smooth—well, that was before I started practicing swordsmanship. Now, my hands had calluses like a man’s.  

"Brother… you’ve changed a lot."  

Should I panic now? Should I?!  

Let’s just stay calm and act like I don’t know anything. Besides, I haven’t done anything wrong, so I shouldn’t panic.  

"Really?"  

"Yeah… I don’t know how to describe it… but you… feel like a different person."  

Okay, now I’m panicking. What should I do? Should I confess to him that I’m not Taufan, his brother, but just a lost soul somehow trapped in his body? Or should I pretend that nothing’s wrong?  

The first option was tempting, but I wasn’t sure if my head would still be attached to my neck if I said it. So, of course, I chose the second option.  

"What do you mean? I’ve always been myself."  

At that moment, Gempa had a doubtful expression on his face, but it quickly disappeared. He smiled and gently squeezed my hand.  

"Yeah, you’re right, Brother. You’ll always be my brother."  

I feel bad lying to you, Gempa, but keeping my head on my shoulders is my top priority right now. Let’s change the subject. I don’t know if I’ll be this lucky again if the conversation continues.  

"What are you doing here? I thought you were still at the Eastern Border."  

"I came back to attend Blaze and Ice’s birthday."  

Blaze and Ice’s birthday? Ah, so the Fourth and Fifth Princes will have their birthdays soon. Should I prepare a gift for them? Maybe I should ask Maripos.  

From there, the conversation flowed naturally. Gempa, perhaps because he had traveled to many places, had plenty of things to talk about. I didn’t feel bored at all while talking to him. He reminded me so much of my younger brother from my original world—kind and gentle. The way he spoke, the gestures he made when he talked excitedly, or the look in his eyes—it all reminded me of my little brother.

Yes, it's probably something like that.  

"Ah, yeah. That's how it was."  

"That's amazing! I'm glad you finally decided to attend the ceremony again."  

Actually, I went because I thought I could meet Vint. But not only did I fail to meet him, I nearly died after being attacked by bandits. At least I got Vayuna out of that journey, so I won’t complain too much.  

"How was your trip? I bet Brother Halilintar was really fussy about preparing everything, right?"  

I scoffed. Halilintar wasn’t just fussy—he was downright insufferable. Not to mention, Maripos was just as annoying as he was. They were overly worried about Taufan’s condition—which, I admit, was really bad at the time—that they wouldn't stop fussing about what needed to be brought or prepared. And on top of that, Halilintar even sent Commander Kaika along with the elite members of the Royal Guard just to escort me to the Wind Goddess Temple.  

"He sent eleven elite Royal Guards, including Commander Kaika."  

"Ah, classic Brother Halilintar. He’s becoming even more protective of you, brother."  

I know that, Gempa. I know. I’m the one experiencing Halilintar’s excessive protectiveness firsthand. It’s so over-the-top that I sometimes wonder what caused all this. What happened between Halilintar and Taufan in the past to make Halilintar act like this toward him? I know he’s a loving older brother to all his younger brothers. He lets Duri sit on his lap while he works, he holds Solar’s hand or carries him around when I see them together, and earlier, before leaving for the Main Palace, he hugged Gempa and ruffled his hair. All the affection he shows to his other brothers seems normal. But why is it different with Taufan?  

And on top of that, he always gives in to whatever Taufan says. There’s no way this is just because Taufan was his first younger brother. He could barely even play properly with Halilintar when Gempa was born. Taufan and Gempa are only a year apart! But they’re treated so differently by him.  

Ugh, why didn’t you leave me your memories, Taufan?  

"Brother, are you okay?"  

"Um? Yeah, yeah, I’m fine. Sorry, I got a little distracted."  

Gempa just smiled and gave my hand a gentle squeeze. Then, he stared at my hand for a while, rubbing my palm a few times before looking back up at me.  

"Your hands are a little rough. Have you been training in something?"  

"Yeah, I’ve been training in swordsmanship with Captain Fang."  

Gempa looked horrified when I mentioned sword training. He leaned in closer, his eyes scanning my body as if searching for something.  

"Why would you train in swordsmanship? Is your body even okay with all that?"  

I wonder just how weak Taufan was when Gempa first left on his journey. When I entered his body, his condition was awful. He couldn't get out of bed without help, he would almost always have nosebleeds or cough up blood every day, he fainted just from jogging for a few minutes, sometimes he had to be fed because he couldn’t even lift a spoon, and on the worst days, he couldn't get up at all. If he was already in such a terrible state when Gempa left, then it’s no wonder he’s so shocked to hear that I’ve been training in swordsmanship.  

"I’m fine, don’t worry. These past few months, I’ve been training my body so I don’t burden people too much. Though I’m still weaker than the average person, my health has improved."  

Gempa’s expression was complicated. I couldn’t quite understand the emotions behind it, but not once did he let go of my hand. In fact, he held onto it even tighter, as if afraid I would disappear. He opened his mouth to say something, but nothing came out. Maybe he didn’t know what to say. In the end, he didn’t say a single word and just started crying.  

What’s happening?! Oh god! Did I make him cry?  

We only just met today, and I already made him cry?! Do I have a talent for making Taufan’s brothers cry like this? How many times have I made Halilintar cry? And now I made his brother—whom I only just met today—cry too!  

Good grief, does this make me a heartless jerk? Ouch, it stings.  

"Y-Your Highness… why are you crying?"  

Gempa shook his head. "Brother, call me Gempa. Please… say my name."  

Is this okay? Well, he’s the one asking, so it should be fine, right? And besides, it’s just the two of us in this room.  

"Gempa, why are you crying?"  

Instead of stopping, Gempa cried even harder. He scooted even closer, then let go of my hand and hugged me tightly while sobbing. I was completely at a loss.  

"Brother, I’ll do whatever you want. I… I swear I will, so please… please stay with me."  

Suddenly, a sharp pain pierced my head. It felt like something was stabbing into my brain. Then, in a flash, I saw a vision. I saw a weary-looking young man sobbing while hugging another young man. Then, the scene shifted—I saw the same young man kneeling on the ground, crying as he held the hand of the person standing in front of him. The image shifted once more—this time, he was crying in front of a black coffin, while the other young man stood behind him.  

The young man who was standing opened his mouth and said, "I promise I will make things right."

I was yanked back to reality by Gempa. His face was so close to mine, and his worried expression was clear as day.  

"Brother? Are you okay?"  

"Huh? Y-Yeah. I’m fine."  

What exactly did I just see? I really don’t understand. I didn’t recognize either of those two young men, but I felt like I should know who they were. Were they my friends from my original world? No, that doesn’t seem right. Could they be people that the real Taufan knew? That’s possible, I suppose. I’ve seen a lot of strange things ever since I ended up in his body.  

Let’s just forget about it for now.  

Gempa wiped his face, then smiled at me. "Brother, you probably need more rest. I should head back to the Prince’s Palace now."  

I simply nodded. Gempa should have gone back to the Prince’s Palace first, but instead, he came straight to see me as soon as he arrived in the capital. Even Halilintar scolded him for it earlier. Apparently, Halilintar hadn’t known that his second younger brother was arriving at the palace today. So, Gempa likes surprises, huh?  

"Can I come again, brother?"  

Why is he asking? I thought the princes were free to go wherever they pleased. Especially since the one living here was Taufan, the forsaken Second Prince of Ignisia. They don’t need permission to visit anytime they want. Even Duri sneaks into my room all the time without me noticing.

Maybe he was just asking for formality’s sake.  

"Yes, of course. You can come whenever you want, Your—I mean, Gempa." I changed the way I addressed him as Gempa furrowed his brows. Alright, I will only call you by your name because you told me to, and because it’s just the two of us in this room. If you tell me to call you that in public, I won’t do it. What would people say if they knew their beloved prince was being addressed so casually by someone like me?  

I was left alone once Gempa returned to the Sunrise Palace. Maripos was monitoring the cooks in the kitchen—it seemed that dinner time was approaching. At times like this, I missed the noisy presence of Vayuna. Why was that bird taking so long? Could it be that she ran away again? If so, then she was an unfaithful bird.  

Oh right, Gempa mentioned that he had returned to the capital to attend Blaze and Ice’s birthday party. Could I attend the event as well? Or perhaps I wasn’t welcome because, well… status and all that. If it was a party, then there would be a lot of people, right? The nobles would surely attend to build connections with one of the royal candidates. Moreover, Blaze was still a teenager, and people would think he was easily influenced. Compared to Blaze, I found myself thinking more about Ice.  

He and his twin were complete opposites. People hated him. I didn’t really know why—apparently, it was because he was blessed by Vaser, the God of Water, who was once Ignis’s enemy. But I remember my younger brother being furious when he told me about the rejection Ice faced from the nobles. No one wanted to be near him; they always excluded him, and for some reason, people feared him. Unlike Taufan, who was abandoned after becoming the way he is now, Ice had been treated that way since childhood. Of course, while the King and Queen were still alive, the treatment Ice received wasn’t as extreme. But when both of them passed away, he started being completely ostracized.  

He still lived in the Prince’s Palace like the other princes. He also received the same education as them. But his status was more or less the same as Taufan’s—maybe even worse.  

In this palace, I had Maripos, Captain Fang, Papileon, and other loyal servants and guards. But Ice was different; he didn’t have the luxury of such companionship. The only person he had was Blaze. And even that wouldn’t last long—Blaze would eventually be taken away from him too. If I remembered correctly, on their upcoming birthday, Blaze would reach a new stage of his power, making him appear even stronger and further solidifying his position as one of the royal candidates. Ice would be separated from him because their opposing elements were believed to hinder Blaze’s development. A poor teenager.  

Halilintar rarely spoke about his two younger brothers. He once told me that his relationship with Blaze and Ice had become more complicated ever since Taufan moved to the Sunset Palace. He said that Taufan was the one who connected them all. Now that he was no longer in the Prince’s Palace, their relationship had become awkward.  

I didn’t know what to do. I understood why his relationship with Blaze was strained—they were rivals for the throne. But what about Ice? Ice wasn’t even involved in the succession battle, so why was his relationship with Halilintar also awkward?  

I felt sorry for Ice, but what could I do? It wasn’t like I could just march into the Prince’s Palace and invite him to hang out. If I did that, I might end up getting punished. Setting foot in the Main Palace was easier because Halilintar spent most of his time there. But the Prince’s Palace was different. Not only was it the residence of the princes, but it was also where Taufan used to live. It would be highly suspicious if I wandered around unfamiliar territory and got lost. I also didn’t know what kind of relationship Taufan had with his two younger brothers.  

Sigh, I hoped that with Gempa’s return, Ice would at least have another friend besides Blaze.  

Perhaps it would be good to think about what gift I should give them. Even if I couldn’t attend their birthday party, as someone inhabiting their older brother’s body, I should still give them presents. What did teenagers in this world like? Were Blaze and Ice similar to my younger brothers?  

I mean, Halilintar, Gempa, Duri, and Solar in this world had personalities similar to my own brothers. There were some differences, of course, but overall, they were alike. So it wouldn’t be wrong to assume that Blaze and Ice also had similar traits and interests, right?  

Let’s see… my second youngest brother was loud and energetic. He liked playing ball or engaging in other sports. Meanwhile, my third youngest brother was quiet and preferred sleeping over any kind of activity. Hmm… if they were similar, what should I give them? I was sure Blaze in this world probably enjoyed training, but I had no knowledge of that field. I had only recently started sword training with Captain Fang, and even then, I was just using a wooden sword he chose for me. And Ice… what kind of gift suited a prince who loved lazing around?  

It was surprisingly difficult to choose a gift.  

…  

Two days later, Halilintar came to see me. He said he was closing the case. Apparently, two maids had confessed after another round of interrogation. Halilintar kept the details secret from me, saying I shouldn’t know since they had used a different team for this interrogation. In fact, he mentioned that it was conducted in a different location. I was confused as to why it was so secretive, but Gempa told me that it was best if I didn’t dig deeper into the matter.  

As I suspected, Vyk was the mastermind behind the case. He had persuaded Mari and Tina—the two maids—to help him poison Beruth. Meanwhile, Ellie—the kitchen servant—had willingly participated without needing to be convinced. Vyk refused to confess, even though his accomplices had. He was quite stubborn. As for Ellie, she had lost her sanity due to the pain she suffered—poor woman.  

According to their confessions, Vyk, as the mastermind, had prepared the poison himself by extracting it from Lucerna pods. He had experience in this field. Meanwhile, he had purchased the Ilex berry poison from the black market. They had been planning to poison Beruth for a year and only executed it once all preparations were complete.  

At first, they had no intention of framing Qually, but three months ago, when Qually started working at Baron Kalns’ residence, they decided to pin the blame on him. Since he was a new worker they didn’t know, he was the perfect scapegoat—cruel.  

The sequence of events—just as I had suspected—was as follows:  

The night before the incident, Ellie, who was cleaning the kitchen utensils, coated a fork with poison. She knew that the next day, the cook would prepare steak for lunch because she had overheard a conversation between the cook and the butler. She set the poisoned fork aside to keep it separate. She also boiled water under the pretense of cleaning stubborn stains from the pots. Then, she burned her own hand with the hot water to cover up the red rash caused by touching the Lucerna poison. That was horrifying to hear. This also allowed her to pass the initial inspection—unfortunately for her, while her burn healed, the rash did not, and it ultimately drove her insane.  

The next day, Tina placed the empty poison bottle in Qually’s room and deliberately passed through the hallway where Xyla was cleaning, ensuring she had an alibi. 

Mari, who served the food, made sure Beruth received the poisoned fork. Then, when panic ensued, she swapped it with a clean one and handed the poisoned fork to Vyk, who later hid it in a haystack.  

Their plan was well-organized, and they might have gotten away with it if Gopal hadn’t pleaded with me to help clear Qually’s name. They had failed to account for unexpected variables—Gopal and me.  

Now that Beruth’s case was resolved, I hoped we could move on to investigating Sofia. That poor girl deserved justice—I had promised her that.

Before boarding the carriage, Commander Kaika handed me several sheets of paper.  

"This is what you asked me to investigate a few days ago, Your Highness."  

Oh? I did ask him to look into the backgrounds of the people I suspected, but why is he giving this to me? I thought I had instructed him to hand it over to Halilintar once he was done investigating them.  

"I believe you also have the right to know, Your Highness. After all, this case was resolved thanks to your help."  

Commander Kaika was exaggerating. I didn’t do anything. Besides, I had help from Maripos and Solar in figuring everything out. It didn’t feel right to accept such praise. But just as I was about to deny it, Maripos cut me off and said that I was indeed amazing. Ugh, why would you do that, Maripos?  

I barely had time to take the sheets from Commander Kaika's hands before Maripos pushed me into the carriage. What’s with this guy? Ah, whatever. Maripos is sometimes unpredictable.  

I read the papers given to me by Commander Kaika on the way to the prison. The first one was about Vyk. He seemed to be from another kingdom since there was so little information about him. He appeared in Ignisia two and a half years ago. He first showed up in Fontis City as a mercenary, then entered Tarín City while escorting some fabric merchants. After that, for some reason, he applied for a job at Baron Kalns' residence. There were no records of him knowing Sofia, which made him even more suspicious. But I was sure I saw him tense up when Sofia’s name was mentioned. I was certain he knew Sofia, and that she was the reason behind all of this. So why was there no record of it? There was no way Commander Kaika was sloppy in his investigation. The proof was that the other three had complete background information.  

Next were Tina and Mari. Both grew up in Tarín City and had known each other since childhood because they were close in age. Tina was two years older than Mari, but they were close. Tina had been working at Baron Kalns’ residence since she was 14, and now she was 23. That meant she had been working there for about nine years.  

From her background, Tina wasn’t rich, but she also wasn’t so poor that she had to work at a young age. She had parents and an older brother who was five years older than her. Even so, she didn’t have an easy life. Her father died early due to illness, while her mother was too weak to work. Tina’s older brother took over as the breadwinner, but misfortune struck him as well.  

He was crippled by Beruth—oh my god.  

Tina’s older brother worked at a bar that Beruth, that arrogant young noble, often visited. That bastard got drunk and caused a commotion. Tina’s brother only tried to stop a fight from breaking out, but Beruth, that piece of trash, beat him up along with his friends. They broke his left leg and arm. Tina’s family, already struggling with money, couldn’t afford the best treatment for her brother. As a result, he became disabled and struggled to find work. In the end, Tina had to work to support her family. And guess what the irony was—she ended up working in the house of the very person who crippled her brother. I wasn’t surprised at all that she held a grudge against Beruth.  

Then there was Mari. She was an orphan who grew up in a small orphanage in Tarín. She had worked hard since childhood because she had no one to rely on. Like Tina, a major disaster in her life was caused by that bastard Beruth. That man—who I truly wanted to call a beast—forced the orphanage caretaker to sleep with him.  

The orphanage caretaker at the time was a young widow whose husband had been killed by bandits. She was said to be exceptionally beautiful, captivating many men. And of course, Beruth, that disgusting bastard, was interested in her. She kept refusing him, so Beruth—this monstrous scum—used his noble status to evict them all from the land where the orphanage stood.  

This left many of the orphanage children homeless. The caretaker didn’t have enough money to take care of them all. The older children had to survive on their own. One of them was Mari. She had the same cruel irony as Tina—she ended up working at Baron Kalns’ residence.  

Neither Tina nor Mari had any choice but to work at Baron Kalns’ residence to survive. They had to suppress their hatred and resentment while working there. The arrival of Vyk and his plan to poison Beruth was the opportunity they had been waiting for to take their revenge.  

Then there was Ellie. She was from another city, quite far from Tarín. She came to Tarín with her husband to seek a better life. Their lives weren’t easy at first, but Ellie’s husband was a smart man. He bought land with his money and turned it into farmland to grow vegetables to sell at the market.  

One day, Ellie’s husband saved a young girl from being assaulted by a man. That man was Beruth. Humiliated by Ellie’s husband, Beruth plotted revenge. He and his friends ganged up on him and cut off one of his hands—just how many crimes has this bastard committed? Why hasn’t he been executed yet?  

Ellie’s husband didn’t die right away, but the incident left him severely traumatized, and his wound never healed properly. It got infected, and he died in agony. Unlike Tina and Mari, Ellie joined Baron Kalns’ household purely to seek revenge for her husband’s death. She willingly involved herself in Vyk’s plan.  

Reading all this truly shook me. My emotions churned with anger and hatred toward Beruth for everything he had done to them. I felt sick just thinking about that man, who was still sleeping soundly in his luxurious room while these people had suffered the worst moments of their lives. I needed Maripos’ help to calm myself down. Otherwise, I might unconsciously create another whirlwind and shred innocent people to pieces.  

As Vayuna said, my emotions are connected to my power. Maripos looked extremely panicked when a whirlwind slowly began forming around me inside the carriage. I need to learn to control my emotions better. Also, I should never meet Beruth—because if I do, I might let myself create what Halilintar calls a wind blade and slice that bastard into a pile of minced meat and blood.

Chapter Text

Boboiboy Fanfiction

©  Boboiboy | Animonsta Studio

A/N: The entire story is purely fictional, and the author does not profit from writing this story. If there are any similarities in ideas, character names, or locations, they are purely coincidental.

≫ ──── ≪•◦ ❈ ◦•≫ ──── ≪

I met Gopal in front of the Main Palace gate. This time, he came alone—Pavan was not with him. I had written him a letter when Halilintar informed me about the closure of this case. He deserved to know that the friend he fought for had finally gained his freedom. Unfortunately, Gopal was not allowed to enter the palace as he was deemed to have no official business there. Though it was frustrating, I more or less understood why he couldn’t get in. Unlike Pavan, whose father was a Count, Gopal’s parents were not nobles. They were merely wealthy merchants from the Tarín City. Naturally, their treatment was different from that of Pavan, who was of noble birth.

So, I told the guards that Gopal was with me. I let him ride the carriage with me. He seemed a bit awkward and hesitant to speak. Perhaps he was just nervous about meeting his best friend again. I understood—he must have missed Qually.

Halilintar was already waiting for me at the Main Palace. He was the one who helped me down from the carriage, glancing briefly at Gopal, who was still inside, but saying nothing. Halilintar walked beside me as we headed to the prison. He looked as if he wanted to summon a lightning pillar again, but I stopped him this time. There were many people accompanying us; I wasn’t as scared as before, so I thought it best for him not to waste his energy.

Halilintar ordered the prison guards to release the detained servants. The four suspects had been moved to another cell yesterday, so there would be no mistakes in freeing them. The servants looked relieved as they finally stepped out from behind the iron bars that had held them for so long.

Without waiting for Halilintar to say anything, Gopal rushed toward Qually, his best friend. He shouted, “My dear friend!” and embraced Qually tightly.

Both of them started crying after that—I couldn't even begin to describe their emotions. Surely, it was a mix of joy, relief, and longing. I was glad they could finally reunite.

"Your Highness, do you remember what I asked for before?" I asked Halilintar.

"Yes, but is it really necessary? What else do you want to ask them? They have already confessed to their crimes and explained their reasons."

"There are some things I need to confirm—let’s just say, to satisfy my curiosity."

Halilintar sighed, nodding as a sign that I could do as I wished. He led me deeper into the prison, where Vyk, Tina, and Mari had been relocated. Ellie was not in the same prison due to her mental condition.

I stopped in front of Tina and Mari’s cell. Both of them were sitting on the prison floor, looking quite miserable. Even in the dim prison light, I could tell they looked drastically different from the last time I saw them during the first interrogation. Had they… been tortured to confess? How could I forget that this world I had come to was not a modern world where human rights were upheld, even for prisoners? Was this why Halilintar refused to tell me how they obtained the confessions? Was this also why Gempa forbade me from digging deeper?

Oh… the first interrogation must have been conducted more gently because I was present.

I reached into my pocket, pulled out a small bottle of medicine—once again, Maripos always made sure I carried one just in case—and placed it inside their cell through the iron bars. I heard Halilintar scoff. When I glanced at him, he simply shook his head without saying a word. I looked back at the two women in the cell, feeling sorry for them. They were still so young, yet trapped in here. Unfortunately, there was nothing I could do to free them, but just like Sofia, I could at least promise to ensure that Beruth rotted in prison for the crimes he committed against them.

I cleared my throat. The two women looked at me with wary eyes. I gave them my best smile.

“This is medicine. Use it to heal your wounds.”

“Are you pitying us now?” Tina hissed.

Her gaze was filled with hatred. I was willing to accept that look. If I were in her position—facing the sibling of the man who had imprisoned me—I, too, would glare at them with the same resentment. Especially if I was in such a wretched state while they stood before me, still dressed neatly and free. So yes, I had no complaints about the look of contempt or the hateful words they threw at me.

Unfortunately, Halilintar thought differently. Sparks of red lightning crackled in his hands, a terrifying sight.

“Your Highness, please stay calm. I can handle this.”

Halilintar didn’t look convinced, but the lightning disappeared, and that was enough for me. I turned my attention back to Tina and Mari.

“I’ll be honest. Yes, I pity you.”

Tina spat on the ground. “Why?! Because you just helped save that pig’s life?! Because you’re a noble, just like him, who has made the lives of commoners like us even more miserable?! Because you see our desperate attempts to seek justice as pathetic?!”

Mari held Tina’s hand. “Tina…”

“Be quiet, Mari. It has come to this—why should we be afraid anymore?! These nobles are nothing but bloodsucking leeches who make commoners like us suffer! They always see themselves as superior to us! And these princes… they’re no different! Especially you, Fragile Flower of Ignisia. Your sheltered life inside a greenhouse could never understand our suffering!”

Without even turning around, I knew Halilintar was furious at this moment. I simply extended my hand to stop him from striking Tina with his lightning. I told him that I wouldn’t blame Tina for holding hatred toward me, even if I had never personally wronged her. Her life had been ruined by that bastard named Beruth—a noble. How could anyone expect her to like me, the Second Prince of Ignisia? Not to mention the fact that Halilintar was the one who captured her, and I was the one who exposed her crimes.

“First, please don’t call me a flower—it sounds too feminine, and I don’t like it. Second, I sincerely regret what happened to you in the past. No one deserves a fate like yours,” Tina’s expression remained unchanged, her gaze still filled with hatred, while Mari seemed to start paying attention to me. I continued, “No matter how much I express my regret over what happened to you, I cannot return what was taken from you. I cannot change the past.”

“The reason you are here is to take responsibility for your own actions.”

I raised my hand when Tina looked like she was about to interrupt.

“Of course, I know it’s unfair that Beruth is still free despite committing so many crimes—not just against you but against others as well. However, I swear on my name, Taufan von Ignisia, that I will make sure he experiences the same suffering you have endured. I will do everything in my power to put him in prison, in a cell far deeper and darker than yours.”

Tina shook her head. “No. No way. You’re lying. You’re lying! You nobles only know how to deceive people with your sweet words!”

I gave a bitter smile. My words must have sounded like empty promises, but I wasn’t lying. Taufan was not a favored prince in Ignisia, nor did he hold any real authority in this kingdom. However, he had the full support of Halilintar—someone who wielded significant power over the kingdom. While it might seem like I was using Halilintar—which, to be honest, I was—I was doing it for the right reasons, so please don’t hate me.

“Words are meaningless without action. I won’t force you to believe me.”

There was doubt in Tina and Mari’s eyes. It wasn’t their fault for doubting me. I wouldn’t offer sweet words to make them trust me. Instead, I shifted the conversation to something that had been bothering me for a long time—something that had caught my attention ever since I got involved in this case.

Sofia’s disappearance.

“Do either of you know what happened to Sofia?”

Both of them looked shocked. They exchanged glances as if communicating through their eyes. I waited patiently for one of them to speak. This time, it was Mari who broke the silence.

“I… don’t know much about the details, Your Highness. But I do know a few things.”

Huh? I was surprised she was still being polite to me, considering how aggressive Tina had been from the start. Mari seemed like someone who was too kind for her own good.

“Can you share what you know with me?”

Mari nodded. “I… overheard Young Master Beruth speaking with his friends. One of his friends was interested in Sofia. He asked Beruth to give Sofia to him and even offered a valuable gemstone as payment.”

Wasn’t that the same as human trafficking?! The laws in Ignisia clearly prohibited human trafficking in any form! How could they do it so freely?! This kingdom was a mess.

“What happened next?”

“I’m not sure. But one day, I saw Sofia being called by Young Master Beruth. Not long after, I heard her scream. None of us dared to check on her. We were afraid we’d end up like Sofia. We could only hold ourselves back and listen to her cry and scream. The next day, Sofia was gone from the Baron’s estate. When Lady Margaret asked, Young Master Beruth said he had fired Sofia because she spilled tea on his shoes.”

What did that bastard do to her?! What happened to that poor girl who was only sixteen at the time? Did they… assault her? Did they torture her because she refused? Did they beat her until she was barely alive and then abandon her in the forest? I couldn’t even begin to imagine the kind of hell Sofia had gone through. Just thinking about it was horrifying. And to make it worse, she was left to die slowly in a forest filled with wild animals.

What creature could be more monstrous than humans themselves?

“Is there anything else you know?”

Mari shook her head. Maybe it was better if she didn’t know the full story. It was too cruel to imagine knowing all the details and having to carry that burden alone. Just hearing about it made my skin crawl—I couldn’t even begin to comprehend what Sofia had suffered.

“Alright. Thank you for your time. And please don’t worry about your family. I have ensured that they will be taken care of until you are released.”

I hoped my words were enough to ease their worries about their families. And yes, I was telling the truth. I had used the money Halilintar gave me as ‘pocket money’ to help support Tina and Mari’s families—in Mari’s case, a teenager who had left the orphanage with her. It wasn’t much, but at the very least, it was enough to make sure their families wouldn’t starve because they had lost their main providers.

Then, I asked Halilintar to take me to the cell where Vyk was being held. His cell was farther away than Tina and Mari’s, probably because he was the mastermind behind this incident.  

"Hello, Vyk, we meet again."  

Vyk nodded at me. He remained silent—unlike Tina, who was aggressive, or Mari, who glared at me in anger the moment I appeared. In fact, if I had to say, he looked eerily calm. As if he had expected everything that had happened, including me coming to see him.  

I observed Vyk carefully. He was just like Tina and Mari, covered in wounds. But according to what I had heard from Halilintar, he hadn’t said a word. That meant he had kept his mouth shut despite being tortured. What was so important that he would endure torture rather than speak? Would he even answer my questions?  

Vyk’s gaze shifted away from me and landed on Halilintar. His eyes remained as calm as before, but his expression turned much more serious. Did he not want Halilintar to hear our conversation? That seemed likely.  

I asked Halilintar if he could step away for a while, just far enough that he wouldn’t hear us but not so far that I would be completely alone with Vyk. Halilintar agreed—after a brief debate, of course. Once I made sure Halilintar had moved away, I sat down on the floor in front of Vyk’s cell—I was tired of standing!  

From my pocket, I pulled out the necklace that had helped me uncover all of this. A necklace that I was certain belonged to Sofia. Vyk’s eyes widened the moment he saw it, and he lunged at me, trying to grab it, only to be stopped by the iron bars. I silently thanked Captain Fang for his hellish training—I managed to dodge Vyk’s outstretched hands before he could snatch the necklace from me.  

"Where did you get that?" Vyk hissed at me. The calmness that had surrounded him moments ago had vanished, replaced by fury and hatred. Ah… why did he look so terrifying? I want to hide behind Halilintar because of it.  

I brought the necklace closer to Vyk, and he immediately snatched it from my hand. So quick.  

"I’ll take that as confirmation that you know the owner of this necklace."  

Vyk glared at me, his eyes filled with an intensity that made it seem like he wanted to bore a hole through my skull with his stare alone. But I forced myself to remain calm. Not only because I didn’t want to appear pathetic in front of him, but also because I didn’t want him to be executed on the spot for scaring Halilintar’s beloved younger brother. Even now, I could feel Halilintar’s gaze on us. If he sensed I was in danger, I was sure he would rush over and cut Vyk down.  

"Where did you get this?" Vyk repeated his question.  

I had to clear my throat to make sure my voice didn’t come out as a squeak—that would be truly embarrassing—before looking him in the eye. "The Royal Guards found it in the forest near Baron Kalns' estate."  

"The forest?"  

"Vyk... I know you knew Sofia. I don’t know what your relationship with her was, but I know you did all of this to avenge her against Beruth. I’m here to help you. I also want Sofia to receive justice so her soul can rest in peace," I said. I hoped my words were enough to persuade Vyk to talk. I desperately needed him to tell me the truth—because right now, my curiosity was killing me, and I wouldn’t be able to sleep without answers!  

At first, Vyk said nothing. He stared at the necklace in his hands with a look of sorrow and longing. A gaze that, somehow, felt familiar to me, though I couldn’t quite place why. Then, Vyk let out a deep sigh and turned his eyes back to me.  

"My name is Vyki… and… you are right, Your Highness. I knew Sofia. In fact, I knew her very well."  

"Oh? But Sofia disappeared three years ago, and you only entered Tarín two and a half years ago. How did you meet her?"  

Vyk laughed. "I grew up with her, Your Highness."  

That… was shocking news. Was Vyk one of Sofia’s friends from the orphanage? I hadn’t expected one of her childhood friends to come all this way to avenge her. But then why was Commander Kaika’s investigation on Vyk so incomplete? If he had grown up with Sofia, that meant he had lived in the same orphanage she had—located in Fontis City, one of Ignisia’s territories. How could there be so little information about him?  

"Judging by your face, I can tell you’re confused. But if you’ve learned about Sofia and the fact that you found this necklace, I’ll assume you’ve done your research on her," Vyk said.  

I hesitantly nodded.  

"You must have been told that Sofia entered Tarín with a friend, but that friend left once she was accepted to work at Baron Kalns' estate."  

Once again, I nodded. Why was he suddenly bringing this up? That friend of Sofia’s had already died by suicide. She jumped off a cliff after finding out about Sofia’s disappearance.  

"I was the friend who came with her."  

Eh? Eh?  

Wait a minute.  

I looked at Vyk again, studying him from head to toe. I was certain Sofia’s friend had been a girl, yet the Vyk standing before me was a muscular young man with tanned skin. Had he changed his gender, or what?!

Vyk chuckled softly, “I understand your confusion. But it is the truth. I was the one who brought Sofia to Tarín City. I was the one who led her to the city that killed her.”

I could hear guilt, hatred, and disgust in Vyk’s voice. He might be angry and resentful towards Beruth and the people who made Sofia suffer, but I knew he also despised himself. He was probably thinking that if he hadn’t brought Sofia to Tarín City, then she would still be alive today.

Why did that feeling seem so familiar to me? I didn’t recall ever causing the death of someone I cared about. My life in my original world was far from conflicts involving death like this. My biggest regret so far was not trying to build a good relationship with my biological siblings. Then why did this self-loathing feel so familiar? Could this be another remnant of the original Taufan’s emotions? What had happened to make him feel this way?

“The information I received stated that Sofia’s friend was a woman and that she returned to Fontis City after Sofia was accepted to work at Baron Kalns’ estate. Then, upon hearing the news about Sofia, she jumped off a cliff to take her own life. How can you be Sofia’s friend?”

Vyk snorted. “Since childhood, I’ve always had a sturdier body compared to other women. Maybe because I was the oldest in the orphanage, I did a lot of the boys’ tasks, which made my muscles develop like this. I was often mistaken for a man because of my physique. I came to Tarín City with Sofia to try our luck. Tarín City is wealthy, full of merchants from all over who come to trade. There is also a forest filled with rare magical beasts that can bring in a lot of money. My goal was to earn enough to help our orphanage.”

Oh my god, she’s really a woman! Learning this fact, I averted my gaze from her, choosing instead to stare at the bricks behind her head rather than at her. I had assumed her firm chest was muscle-built from heavy training, but it turned out to be her breasts, and I had been staring at them! How rude of me!

Ahem. Let’s focus on what she said and forget about her chest muscles.

“But why did you leave Tarín City and Sofia behind?”

“Hunting magical beasts is difficult, Your Highness. The small, tame ones don’t bring in much money, while the ones that do are too dangerous for inexperienced people like us. Sofia felt it would be better to work at a noble’s estate since the pay was more stable. I agreed with her suggestion, not knowing what kind of monster lurked behind that luxurious house. After Sofia was accepted for the job, I felt guilty for not being able to do anything, so I decided to return to the orphanage and help in whatever way I could.”

I nodded. So their original plan was to become magical beast hunters, but since it was too difficult, they chose to change professions.

“Sofia used to send me letters, telling me about her job. Every letter only said that she was doing well—there was not a single complaint. If she had even once complained about that place, I would have come and taken her back. I would have brought her home to Fontis City. Then, one day, I received a letter from Sofia, and it was strange. She said she was scared and that she might never be able to return to us. I panicked and rushed to Tarín City to find her. I was chased away from the Baron’s estate before I could get any news about her, but someone from the estate told me what had happened to Sofia. At that moment, I felt utterly hopeless. I was furious, full of hatred, and wanted revenge, but I had no power to take it. He was a noble—he had strength that I didn’t. I thought… it would be better if I just followed after Sofia.”

I couldn’t imagine what Vyk felt when she heard the news about Sofia. She must have been devastated upon learning that her friend had suffered such a terrible fate. Her despair drove her to attempt suicide by jumping off a cliff, yet somehow, she had survived and ended up here.

“I was saved by a mysterious woman. She said that this wasn’t what my friend would have wanted—that I should avenge Sofia, not give up. With her help, I changed my appearance and disguised myself as a man. From that moment, I started planning my revenge. I became a mercenary, deliberately taking escort missions for merchants heading to Tarín City, looking for a chance to infiltrate Baron Kalns’ estate. After that… well, you already know the rest, Your Highness.”

Who was the mysterious woman who saved Vyk? Did she know what happened to Sofia? Was she one of the servants in Baron Kalns’ estate? Ugh! The more I thought about it, the more my head hurt. I decided not to dwell on it—after all, it might not be important. Besides, I didn’t recall my brother ever mentioning anything about a mysterious woman.

“You must hate me for ruining the plan you worked so hard to create.”

Vyk actually laughed at my words. She laughed as if I had just told her a joke. She even held her stomach, as if what I said was the funniest thing ever. I didn’t understand—what was so funny about what I said?

“Not at all, Your Highness. Maybe at first, I was angry at you and Prince Halilintar. You arrested us just because that bastard Beruth was poisoned, but when Sofia or others suffered because of him, you did nothing. However, I don’t hate you for ruining my plan. In fact, I’m grateful you did.”

“Huh? Why?”

“I almost framed a kind-hearted young man like Qually. I nearly destroyed his future because of my desire for revenge. But thanks to you, Qually didn’t have to bear the guilt of a crime he didn’t commit. Thank you, Your Highness.”

I was utterly shocked, especially when Vyk knelt before me—just like Gopal had done before. Fortunately, she didn’t stay that way for long. She smiled, looking relieved, though still carrying sadness—perhaps from thinking about Sofia.

“You… are like the mighty heroes in the stories Sofia used to read when she was little.”

Okay, that was a bit much, but I wasn’t going to reject the compliment. I stood up, dusting off my pants—hopefully, they weren’t too dirty. Damn it, these were white pants, and Maripos was going to kill me if he saw them dirty! Before I forgot, I handed Vyk the same medicine bottle I had given to Tina and Mari.

“I truly regret what happened to Sofia. And I’m sorry that we couldn’t do anything for her. I will make sure that Beruth gets the punishment he deserves. He will rot in prison for the rest of his life. I will make sure he suffers just as he has made you and so many others suffer.”

Vyk nodded, "Thank you, Your Highness."

After that, I also told Vyk that she didn’t have to worry about her orphanage. One of Halilintar’s supporters, who happened to be a noble living in Fontis City, had agreed to sponsor the orphanage—I knew he was doing it to curry favor from Halilintar, but as long as he followed through with his promise, I didn’t mind.

I approached Halilintar, who greeted me with a smile and held my hand as we exited the cold and dreadful prison. I squinted as soon as I stepped outside—the difference in brightness between the prison and the outside world was too stark. But this was the light that every prisoner longed for. The warm and dazzling sunlight.

Speaking of the sun, I wanted to hurry back to the Sunset Palace now. However, my steps were halted by Gopal and Qually. Gopal had his arm around Qually, like an older brother embracing his beloved younger brother. That made sense—Gopal was a year older than Qually, so he probably saw Qually as his little brother. After all, they had grown up together since childhood. Perhaps that was why he was willing to do anything to secure Qually’s release.

Maybe Vyk and Sofia were the same. They were like sisters, and Vyk cherished Sofia as if she were her own younger sister. That was why she was willing to do anything to avenge Sofia against Beruth, who had taken her sister from her.

"Your Highness."

I refocused my attention on the two young men in front of me. They bowed, greeting Halilintar first before turning to me. Shortly after, they both knelt and prostrated themselves before me. Good grief! Why do these people love prostrating so much?!

I tried to make them stand up, but they wouldn’t budge. Halilintar also just stood there, not helping me at all.

"Your Highness, it is only thanks to your kindness that I can reunite with my dear friend! I will never forget your grace," Gopal declared.

"Gopal is right, Your Highness. I, Qually, am in your debt."

What are these two even talking about?! You’d better stand up now! People are starting to stare at me! They’re probably going to spread rumors that I enjoy making people bow before me! Aaargh!!

At last, after what felt like a futile struggle, the two young men agreed to stand and speak with me normally. I let out a sigh of relief, silently thanking Commander Kaika and Captain Fang for helping me get them on their feet.

"I will do anything to repay your kindness, Your Highness. If there is anything you desire that I can obtain, just say the word," Gopal offered.

At first, I wanted to refuse his offer. After all, he had already given me the Blood Ruby, which was incredibly expensive—why was he still willing to give me something else? But then, I remembered that Blaze and Ice’s birthday was coming up. I still hadn’t chosen gifts for them, and their birthday was only two weeks away. Gopal was the son of a merchant and owned a fairly large shop in Tarín City. He probably had something suitable for both of them.

"Actually, there is something I’d like to ask of you, Young Master Gopal. I will write you a letter once I return to my palace."

"I will eagerly await your letter, Your Highness." Gopal bowed respectfully. We exchanged a few more words, such as what Qually planned to do now—whether he would return to Baron Kalns’ residence or not. Qually said he would not return; instead, he would work on honing his cooking skills again. That was for the best, as I was certain that Baron Kalns and his family would soon face punishment.

After that, I bid them farewell and approached Maripos and Gempa, who were already waiting for me. Halilintar said he still had to speak with the prison warden, so he couldn’t escort me back. However, he had entrusted the task to Gempa and Commander Kaika. I was too tired to argue with him, so I simply agreed. Just as I was about to board the carriage, an old man approached me. He was the Head Butler of Baron Kalns’ estate. Why was he coming to me?

The old man bowed deeply, greeting me, then straightened up when I instructed him to do so.

"Is there something you need from me?" I asked.

"I... I simply want to thank you, Your Highness."

At first, I thought he wanted to thank me because he believed I was the one who freed him. But that wasn’t the case. He was grateful because I had done something about Sofia’s case. I was surprised he knew about it, but then he explained that he had originally intended to report Sofia’s case to me through Maripos. However, Maripos had told him that I was already aware of it and was determined to uncover the truth.

"What was your relationship with Sofia?" I asked.

"She was like a granddaughter to me, Your Highness. I never married because I devoted my life to serving the Baron’s family. My parents passed away long ago, and my siblings live far away. I never used my days off to visit my family. Then I noticed that Sofia was doing the same. She had no family to visit. Sharing the same fate, I chose to spend my free time with her. I loved her as if she were my own granddaughter."

I furrowed my brows at his explanation. If he truly cared about Sofia, why did he stay silent when those terrible things happened to her? Why didn’t he expose Beruth’s crimes?

"I understand what you’re thinking, Your Highness. I am an old coward. I was too afraid of what would happen to me to do anything. I will not make excuses, Your Highness. But I knew I had to do something to atone for my inaction. That is why I spread rumors about Young Master Beruth killing his servant—though the rumors were quickly silenced. And when Vyk came looking for Sofia, I told her everything I knew. I knew from the start that Vyk was Sofia’s friend, and I knew from the start that she planned to take revenge. I knew that what I did was a betrayal of my master, but this old man’s heart could not bear to see any more innocent people suffer."

"So that’s why you kept quiet even though you knew about Vyk and the others’ plan. You pretended nothing was happening even when they plotted to poison Beruth."

The old man nodded. I couldn’t blame him for his choices. If I were in his position, maybe I would have done the same. He must have been torn between his loyalty and his conscience.

Ah, human lives are never simple, are they?

Chapter Text

Boboiboy Fanfiction

©  Boboiboy | Animonsta Studio

A/N: The entire story is purely fictional, and the author does not profit from writing this story. If there are any similarities in ideas, character names, or locations, they are purely coincidental.

≫ ──── ≪•◦ ❈ ◦•≫ ──── ≪

Sofia's case was easier to resolve compared to Beruth. Almost all the servants working in Baron Kalns' residence were willing to testify, and many people who had been harmed by Beruth came forward to report his crimes, allowing the case to be processed more quickly. It only took a week for Halilintar and the Royal Guard to uncover everything. Beruth was eventually arrested, the assets of Baron Kalns' family were confiscated as they were deemed to have harbored and aided a criminal, his two older brothers were dismissed from their jobs, and his older sister fled to the kingdom where her husband was from. Of course, Beruth’s friends were not spared from all of this either. They were also arrested and tried for their crimes—the Royal Guard was truly deployed to capture them all.  

Baron Kalns’ life was destroyed in just a week. Wow… the power Halilintar wielded to make that happen is truly terrifying.  

I now understand why Halilintar handled Beruth’s case—Halilintar himself told me. The uncle of Baron Kalns' wife was one of the supporters of the Fourth Prince and a rather influential person in the Capital. He was the one who proposed that Halilintar take on the case. Initially, Halilintar intended to refuse, but he was pressured into accepting it. If he refused, he would have been harshly criticized. Rumors would have spread that he did not care about the nobility, which would have affected the support he had in the fight for the throne.  

Nobles are indeed cunning.  

Ah, this case also had an impact on Count Fitz. He was deemed negligent in managing his territory because he allowed Beruth’s chaos to continue unchecked. The Prime Minister demoted his title to Viscount, and the Tarin City was given to another noble. I don’t know who, but as far as I know, that noble holds the title of Marquess. Let’s hope he can manage the territory properly.  

Speaking of which, I didn’t expect this case to attract the attention of the Prime Minister, whom I’ve never met. Perhaps the scale of destruction had simply become too great, especially with Halilintar, the First Prince, handling the matter.  

When Halilintar told me that Sofia’s case was resolved, I went to the prison to visit Vyk. I explained to her what had happened to the people who had taken her sister from her. Vyk cried, but there was a smile on her face. Perhaps she felt relieved that Sofia’s vengeance had finally been fulfilled. She thanked me again, even though I had done nothing but spend my time at the Sunset Palace.  

I also told Tina and Mari about Beruth’s fate. Tina burst into laughter while hurling a colorful barrage of insults at Beruth—Gempa covered my ears the moment she started cursing—while Mari sincerely thanked us. Unfortunately, Ellie passed away a few days before the case was resolved. Although her hand was easily treated, the same could not be said for her mind. She banged her head against the prison wall until she died. I was saddened to hear that—she had suffered until the very end, just like her husband. I asked Halilintar to have her buried beside her husband. At the very least, she deserved that much.  

The remains that were found in the forest near Baron Kalns' former residence belonged to Sofia. She was finally given a proper burial—not just discarded in the forest—according to the traditions of the people of Ignisia. There was no formal ceremony—after all, she had no family to lead one—but we were able to bring in a priest from the Temple of the God Water to pray for her. Hopefully, she can rest in peace after this. If reincarnation is real, I hope she is reborn into a much better life.

...

A week before Blaze and Ice’s birthday, I was in a complete panic because I still hadn’t found the perfect gift for them.

After sending a letter to Gopal last week, he came to the Sunset Palace, bringing all his finest goods that he deemed suitable as birthday gifts. Even so, I couldn’t find anything that felt right to give them. It seemed like they would receive similar gifts from other nobles.

I had asked Maripos—Taufan had never attended his brothers' birthday parties since he was "cast away" to the Sunset Palace, but he always sent them gifts. He personally chose each gift and wrapped them himself. So yeah, Maripos had no idea what kind of gifts Taufan had given his brothers. He was only responsible for delivering them once they were wrapped.

Taufan, why do you have to make everything so complicated for me?

I lay on my bed, a distressed starfish, when Maripos entered the room carrying a black box. He stood beside my bed, clearing his throat to get my attention. I lazily waved my hand, signaling that I was paying attention—I had already noticed him when he entered.

"Your Highness, your order has been completed."

Order? What order? I didn’t remember ordering anything.

"The Blood Ruby you requested to be made into jewelry has been finished, Your Highness."

Oh, right. I had asked Maripos to find a craftsman to work on it. It seemed that in the midst of my busy efforts to solve Beruth’s case, I had met with the craftsman and explained how I wanted the jewelry to be made. Apparently, it was finished now.

"Would you like to see it now, Your Highness?"

"Yes." I sat up from my bed, stopping my imitation of a sad starfish, and moved to sit at the edge. Maripos stepped closer and opened the black box in his hands. Inside the box, there was an assortment of jewelry made from the ruby. I had requested that all the pieces be kept simple and set in silver, not gold. Aside from the cost, the result also didn’t look too extravagant or flashy.

I picked up a necklace from the box, examined it briefly, and nodded. I was satisfied with the result. The craftsman Maripos chose was indeed excellent.

"Will you be gifting these to Prince Blaze and Ice?"

"N—"

Wait a second! That’s right! I had no idea what kind of gifts Taufan had given his brothers, but this should be enough, right? The ruby used in these pieces was a Blood Ruby, which was incredibly valuable, so I wouldn’t be accused of giving a cheap gift. Not to mention, Blood Rubies were known to have protective properties for their wearers. I somewhat hoped these two princes were like Halilintar and Duri, who appreciated my gifts. Halilintar still used the sword tassel I had given him, and Duri always got excited whenever I brought him cakes. I just hoped, at the very least, that the two of them would value a gift from their sibling.

"Yes, I do plan on giving these to my brothers." I wasn’t completely lying—I did intend to give one to Halilintar and the others as well. I admit, I hadn’t originally counted Blaze and Ice, but please forgive me—I didn’t even know they had a birthday coming up, and I had never met them before.

"I understand, Your Highness. I will bring a box and ribbon so you can wrap them."

Thankfully, this gift problem was finally solved. I thought it would stress me out for a few more days. Well, I still had to wrap them and have Maripos send them before their birthday, so it wasn’t completely done yet.

Maripos handed me everything I needed and left my room right after—very unusual, but I figured it had something to do with the real Taufan. Maripos had mentioned that Taufan personally chose and wrapped the gifts for his brothers. He never even knew what the gifts were, as his only job was to deliver them. Why was Taufan so secretive about this?

Oh well, only he knew the answer.

I picked two necklaces that looked similar to each other for Blaze and Ice. Hopefully, they weren’t the kind of princes who prioritized luxury over function.

As I tied the ribbon, I realized Maripos hadn’t given me scissors to cut it. I wanted to call him back, but then I remembered seeing a pair of scissors in one of the bedside table drawers. It was better not to bother Maripos over something so trivial.

I opened the top drawer—nothing. I opened the middle drawer—still nothing. I found them in the bottom drawer, but as I grabbed them, I noticed something odd about the drawer. The back of the drawer had an uneven section. It was subtle and easy to ignore—I had overlooked it many times. But this time, I couldn’t.

I touched the section, and at first, nothing happened. But then I heard the sound of something falling—a metal object. I looked down and picked it up. It was a coin-sized item bearing the emblem of Ignisia. It was bronze in color, possibly made of copper or something similar.

Could this be Ignisian money? I had never seen all the different types of money used in Ignisia—so far, I had only encountered gold and platinum coins, both of which had different sizes but bore the same emblem as this one.

But if this was money, why was it hidden? It was just a copper coin! Not a high-value platinum coin. Did it contain some sort of secret? Or was there something special about it? Ah, whatever. I had no idea. I should just finish wrapping the gifts.

Not knowing how to put the object back properly, I decided to tuck it back into the drawer, slightly concealing it—just in case it was something important. At least this room had never been broken into by thieves, so I wasn’t too worried.

The gifts for the two princes were finally wrapped. Now, I just had to hand them to Maripos. I was a bit curious—did those two teenagers actually appreciate gifts from their siblings, including Taufan? Or had their strained relationship made them resentful of gifts from their family?

Sigh… I wouldn’t find out today.

In the evening, Gempa visited as usual. He had been visiting every day since his return to the Capital. When I asked if he had anything else to do, he said something that left me both stunned and a little embarrassed.

He said, "Is there anything more important than spending time with you, Brother? I’ve been away from home for an entire year. Now that I’m back, wouldn’t it be better to spend my time with the people I love?"

Ah, he really was a good younger brother. I missed my brothers—how were they doing in my original world?

"Oh, right. Today, I’m not just here to visit you. I also wanted to give you this," Gempa said as he handed me an envelope.

The envelope was sealed with the Royal Seal, meaning its contents had to be something official. This wasn’t a letter from Halilintar—besides, the envelope was different from the ones he usually used.

I carefully opened the envelope. Inside was a piece of paper—an invitation to Blaze and Ice’s birthday party. A ball to celebrate the 14th birthday of the Fourth and Fifth Princes of Ignisia, to be held at the Main Palace.

"I know you always refuse to attend for some reason, but since you attended the Layangara Ceremony this year, I thought maybe you’d consider coming to our younger brothers’ birthday party. Especially since they’ll be turning 14 and will be able to participate in the Winter Hunt this year."

The Winter Hunt? What’s that? I’d have to find out later. For now, I should just pretend I understood.

"I... will think about it."

"Thank you, brother. I'm sure Blaze and Ice will be happy with your presence."  

Actually, I had doubts. A lot of doubts. Among the six princes, only those two were the ones I had never met. I felt both the urge to attend and the reluctance to go to their birthday celebration. First, I hated the crowds that came with parties. A party meant a lot of people attending. On top of that, everyone would surely pay attention to me if I attended. Just thinking about it gave me a headache. Second, I had no idea how to behave among the nobles, who were like wild beasts. Third, I worried that I might faint when meeting Blaze and Ice. And lastly, I didn’t know how those two teenagers would act toward me.  

On the other hand, I wanted to meet them. I wanted to see for myself who the Fourth and Fifth Princes of Ignisia were. I also wanted to experience a ball—something I had only read about in novels or comics. I didn’t know how to dance, but I just wanted to see it. Ah, what a dilemma.  

"Brother, isn't this a wildflower?"  

While I was deep in my dilemma, Gempa suddenly diverted my attention to the dried flower I used as a bookmark. It was one of the many flowers that Maripos had turned into bookmarks, and it was my favorite. This was the flower that Captain Fang had given me when I was trying to adapt to Vayuna. It was much larger than the other flowers he had given me, and its stem remained intact. After being turned into a bookmark, it looked even more appealing.  

"Yes. I received quite a lot of flowers and didn’t know what to do with them. So I asked Maripos to make them into bookmarks," I said, laughing softly. I probably sounded like a girl right now, but hey, men are allowed to appreciate flowers too, okay?  

"Ah... so you're interested in wildflowers now?"  

"Sort of. Many wildflowers are beautiful even without being cared for. For example, this cornflower—it grew near the place where the servants do the laundry." I picked up one of the books nearby and started searching for another bookmark. When I found it, I showed it to him. "Or this purple flower, which I don’t know the name of. Aren't they beautiful? They have both strength and beauty, growing without the help of humans."  

I grabbed another book close to me. The bookmark inside was also made of flowers, but this one wasn’t from the flowers Captain Fang had given me. This was a bookmark that had already been here before I entered Taufan’s body. So this was a flower that Halilintar had given to Taufan.  

"This one is a delphinium."  

"I saw that flower in the garden. Is it considered a wildflower?"  

"No, this one was given to me by Prince Halilintar. It was deliberately planted in the garden because I liked it."  

Gempa nodded. He took the three bookmarks I had shown him and carefully examined them.  

"I understand what you mean, brother."  

"Really?"  

"Yes. No matter where these flowers grow—whether they are wildflowers or cultivated ones—they all bloom beautifully. Even so, I still don’t quite grasp the deeper meaning you're trying to convey. Forgive my lack of understanding."  

What? I wasn’t trying to imply anything! I was simply showing Gempa Maripos' beautiful craftsmanship while admiring the flowers I had received! Why did he misunderstand it like this?  

I tried to explain to Gempa that I had no hidden meaning behind showing him those flowers, but Gempa was quite stubborn once he believed in something. Since I felt like I wouldn’t win an argument with him, I decided to just let him continue with his misunderstanding. At least it wasn’t a major misunderstanding. It wouldn’t hurt anyone.  

...  

I finally decided to attend Blaze and Ice’s birthday party. It took me a lot of consideration, making it difficult to decide, but in the end, I knew I couldn't keep hiding away in this place. I wanted to return to my world, and if I wanted to make that happen, I had to ensure Halilintar became king and survived his coronation day. To make him a king, I knew I couldn’t do it alone. I needed connections.  

I knew Halilintar had a strong and large faction supporting him. The First Prince’s faction was not to be underestimated. It consisted of high-ranking nobles with prestigious titles. On top of that, their influence wasn’t limited to just the capital. However, the Fourth and Seventh Princes also had equally strong supporters. Right now, it wasn’t too obvious, but in six years—when the original timeline of the novel began—the true extent of each prince’s faction would become clear.  

My goal now was to build as many connections as possible to support Halilintar in becoming king. The more support he had, the stronger his position would be in inheriting the throne.  

What confused me now was how I could build connections with people who looked down on Taufan. I mean, it was said that almost the entire kingdom no longer considered Taufan as one of their princes. And as far as I knew, nobles were narrow-minded people who only cared about status. Why would they want to associate with a prince who had nothing left?  

But were all the nobles at the party my targets? Of course not. I might not have read the novel myself, but I knew some of the key characters in it who played an important role in Halilintar’s rise to the throne of Ignisia.

The person I was talking about was Duchess Satriantar. She was the only woman in the Ignisia who held the title of Duchess without having to marry a Duke. Specifically, the title was inherited from her father. It wasn’t because she had no male siblings or anything like that—she obtained the title because she had proven herself worthy. She was a strong, charismatic woman, and more importantly, she had been the mentor of the late King. In her youth, she had also led the Royal Guard.  

She was a highly respected woman, and nobles would flock to establish a connection with her or at least stay on her good side. However, no matter what they offered, she always refused them. At first, she was like Count Balakung—neutral in the fight for the throne—but later, she would become Halilintar’s greatest supporter.  

I didn’t know what Halilintar had done to change her mind. Even if I knew, there was no guarantee that I could do the same thing he did. For now, I just wanted to ensure I had a good relationship with her. I wanted to make sure she remembered my existence while I figured out what could possibly satisfy such a remarkable woman.  

Come to think of it, were there any other nobles as important as Duchess Satriantar? Her granddaughter, Lady Kira’na, was also an extraordinary woman. Unfortunately, she didn’t hold as much influence as her grandmother. But there was no harm in trying to befriend such an incredible person. Besides, she and Halilintar were blessed by the same Goddess. I heard she was quite skilled with a sword as well. Did Halilintar know her well? I wanted to understand the dynamics of their relationship.  

Aside from those two, the only other names that came to mind were Count Balakung and Marchioness Kuputeri. Unfortunately, both of them would likely be difficult to win over as Halilintar’s supporters.  

First, Count Balakung was a noble who preferred neutrality. He also favored peace over conflict, so he would avoid trouble as much as possible—while I, on the other hand, wanted to stir things up.  

Second, Marchioness Kuputeri, whom I had never met even once. This woman seemed to have cut ties with the royal court ever since her best friend, the late Queen, passed away. She hadn’t done anything to help her friend’s son either. So, I doubted I could easily get her on my side.  

However, she did have an adopted daughter who was only a year younger than me. Lady Ying—the girl who had taken my place in flying the wind chimes. It would be good if I could befriend her, but before that, I had to make sure she stopped running away from me. How should I do that?  

I would think about it later. For now, it was better to focus on calming down Maripos, who was panicking.  

The moment I told him I was going to attend Blaze and Ice’s birthday party, he started to panic. He rambled about all the preparations that had to be made and how little time we had. He even ordered the servants to contact tailors, shoemakers, jewelers, and more—despite it being the middle of the night!  

I told Maripos that I didn’t mind not wearing new clothes—after all, all of Taufan’s outfits still looked as good as new, as if they had been bought just yesterday.  

But Maripos scolded me. He said those clothes were already two years old or more. Apparently, after moving to the Sunset Palace, Taufan had refused to buy new clothes. The first reason was that he didn’t want to meet strangers who would take his measurements. The second reason was that he didn’t want to attract attention from the outside world.  

So, he hadn’t acquired a single new outfit. Most of his clothes had been altered multiple times, resized to fit his body as he grew thinner over time.  

I had no choice but to surrender as various craftsmen arrived one by one, presenting samples of their work for me to choose from.  

I ordered just one item from each of them. Even though the funds Halilintar provided for the Sunset Palace were substantial, I chose not to be wasteful. That money wasn’t just for me—it was needed for many other expenses in the palace. The wages of the servants, food supplies, replacing damaged equipment, and maintaining the garden—all of it required a significant amount of money.  

On top of that, I had recently declared that I would take care of Tina and Mari’s family. Their expenses would also come from the same budget.  

If I became wasteful, what would happen to my people?  

Even now, I already felt extravagant just by purchasing these clothes and accessories.

...

Blaze and Ice’s birthday had finally arrived.  

Maripos had been busy since morning, preparing everything I was going to wear—even though the ball wasn’t until the evening. To avoid his overenthusiastic behavior, I escaped to the palace’s backyard, where the servants usually did the laundry.  

This was the first time I had visited this place since entering Taufan’s body. I didn’t expect the view to be quite beautiful. There was a well—perhaps the servants drew water from it for washing—and around the well, blue flowers grew, the same ones Captain Fang had once given me. The backyard of the Sunset Palace was quite spacious—not as large as the front yard—but several fruit trees were planted there. Oh! The apple tree was bearing an abundance of fruit!  

I could climb it to pick some fruit while also hiding from Maripos.  

I took off my shoes and socks, hiding them a little so my location wouldn’t be easily discovered, then climbed the apple tree. It was huge, unlike any apple tree I knew from my world. But why would I care? I had climbed trees like this often as a child—this was no problem for me.  

The apples were a rich, ripe red, looking incredibly delicious. Their color slightly reminded me of the Snow White fairy tale. Didn’t she die after eating a poisoned apple given to her by the witch?  

I picked one of the reddest and largest apples I could find. After rubbing it against my clothes, I sat on a sturdy, thick branch and started eating the fruit while observing my surroundings. If only I had brought a book, I could read up here. The gentle breeze was so soothing that I felt like taking a nap. Maybe I would do that—after picking a few more apples to snack on.  

The apple was incredibly sweet, though it didn’t taste exactly like the apples I knew from my world. It did have an apple-like flavor, but there was something else—a taste I couldn’t quite identify. It felt like a blend of two different fruits. Well, that didn’t bother me because it was delicious.  

Why had no one ever given me this fruit before, despite the tree being this abundant?  

I started thinking about what kinds of desserts I could make with these apples. I had never tried making apple pie, but it seemed to be a popular recipe for apple-based dishes. Candied apples and apple cider were also quite well-known. Should I ask the head chef about possible recipes?  

Oh! Maybe I could also ask Qually. Gopal had spoken very highly of his friend’s cooking the last time we met.  

I would contact both of them later and ask them to teach me.  

I had no idea how long I had spent in the tree, but I had already eaten about three apples and watched several birds come and go. I even found a fascinating caterpillar. I wasn’t an insect expert, but I was certain this caterpillar didn’t exist in my original world! I mean, was there any caterpillar on Earth with a metallic purple color? Not to mention its segmented body, which looked like it was covered in armor. Such an intriguing creature!  

I wondered what it would turn into—would it become a butterfly or something else entirely?  

This world was truly filled with fascinating creatures and plants.  

I was just about to grab my fourth apple when I suddenly heard a voice from below the tree.  

“Taufan, I think it’s time for you to come down and give your servant some peace of mind.”  

I nearly slipped upon hearing that voice!  

I absolutely did not expect Halilintar to be the one to find me—especially when I was hiding from Maripos. I shifted from one branch to another and peeked down. Halilintar stood right below the tree, looking up at me with that amused smile he always had whenever I did something ridiculous.  

“Your Majesty! What are you doing here? And how did you find me?”  

Halilintar chuckled. “You’re always terrible at hiding. I found you easily.”  

I rolled my eyes at his remark. Of course, he found me easily—I wasn’t even trying to hide from him, just from Maripos.  

“Come down, or we’ll be late.”  

Honestly, I still wanted to stay in the tree, but I knew Halilintar would do something if I refused to come down. Besides, I felt bad for Maripos, who was probably running around frantically looking for me. I decided to climb down from the tree I had been sitting in for hours—though not before grabbing another apple.  

Halilintar laughed as I bit into the apple while putting my shoes back on. He ruffled my hair, messing it up.  

“Maripos has been in a complete panic since he couldn’t find you. You know, when I arrived, he was trying to look for you inside a flower vase. Why are you tormenting your servant like this?”  

“I wasn’t trying to tease him; I was just trying to hide from him. He’s been a handful since morning.”  

Halilintar nodded. He reached out and effortlessly plucked an apple from the tree—if it were me, I would have had to jump up and down to reach it.  

There was a brief pause as Halilintar stared at the apple in his hand. I was observant enough to notice his expression shift, even if only for a second. It was as if he had realized something, but then quickly masked it. Though I was curious, I chose not to ask him about it.  

“You might want to prepare your ears. Maripos is going to scold you.”  

Ugh, no doubt. Maripos was going to lecture me like a mother scolding her child for coming home late. Ah, my poor ears.  

“Why is Your Highness here?”  

“Hm? Am I not allowed to be here?”  

“That’s not what I meant. But shouldn’t Your Highness be at the Main Palace right now?”  

Halilintar smiled. “I came to pick you up, Taufan. We’re going to the Main Palace together.”  

Why did Halilintar always go out of his way like this? I could go to the Main Palace on my own.  

Oh well, I never understood Halilintar’s way of thinking anyway.

I met Maripos on my way to my room. As soon as he saw me, he quickly ran toward me, grabbed my shoulders, and started inspecting me to make sure I wasn't injured. He completely ignored Halilintar, while he just stood there watching, eating his apple. He didn't seem to mind Maripos' behavior—he was probably used to it by now.

Maripos then dragged me to my room, calling for multiple servants to help me get ready. Before I could protest, I was already being bathed. As usual, Maripos helped me dress, but this time he also styled my hair. He combed it back and applied gel to keep it neat.

He also pinned a brooch with a blue gemstone onto my outfit and ensured that my attire was perfectly in place. My appearance now resembled that of a prince from a royal-themed movie. With my body filling out and looking much healthier, the reflection in the mirror showed a handsome and charming young man. If I didn’t know better, I’d think I was the protagonist of this novel.

Not only could Taufan look beautiful, but he could also appear this handsome. Truly, clothes can transform a man.

Maripos was even moved by his work—I saw him wiping the corners of his eyes!

Alright, I guess I'm ready for the ball tonight.

It felt like I was Cinderella, and Maripos was my fairy godmother. I chuckled at the thought. Halilintar asked me what was so funny, but I didn’t explain. He wouldn’t understand even if I did.

Halilintar helped me into the carriage before getting in himself. Meanwhile, Maripos sat beside the coachman this time. I assumed he did that because we were heading to a place where nobles would be gathered.

On the way to the Main Palace, I told Halilintar about the purple caterpillar I had found earlier.

He smiled at my story, saying that I had discovered an interesting creature. He also asked if I wanted one, which I immediately refused—I had no intention of keeping a caterpillar as a pet. Observing them was fascinating, but raising them was not something I wanted to do.

As we entered the Main Palace grounds, I saw many other carriages—some large, some medium-sized, and others small. They came in various colors, each bearing the emblem of its respective family to signify their identity.

Upon reaching the Main Palace courtyard, I was stunned by the sheer number of guests. I knew it was the twin princes' birthday, but were this many guests really expected? Surely, even they didn’t know all these people. Just how big was the ballroom to accommodate this many attendees?

Unlike the other carriages that stopped further away to let the nobles out, our carriage stopped right at the base of the staircase leading to the palace entrance. I didn’t need to peek outside to know that we had become the center of attention.

People must have been wondering who had the audacity to be so arrogant as to stop here. Moreover, our carriage bore no emblem, so they wouldn’t be able to guess who was inside until we stepped out.

The ball hadn’t even started yet, and I was already beginning to hate it.

Maripos opened the carriage door. Halilintar stepped out first, then extended his hand inside to help me down. I could feel the weight of countless stares on me as I emerged from the carriage. All I could do was ignore them, even though I really just wanted to run away. The scrutiny was unbearable.

Strangely, Halilintar didn’t head straight for the ballroom. Instead, he led me to a room that resembled the waiting lounge at the Sunset Palace. He sat on one of the sofas and asked a passing servant to prepare tea for us. I was utterly confused.

Why weren’t we going directly to the ball? Wasn’t it about to start? Wouldn’t we be late?

“Aren’t we going to be late?” I asked.

“No,” Halilintar answered calmly as he sipped his tea.

Honestly, I didn’t understand at all. I turned to Maripos, who stood behind me, but he gave me no answer. Was something wrong? Did Halilintar not want to attend his younger brothers’ birthday? But why bring me along, then? We had already drawn so much attention upon our arrival—wasn’t it odd that we weren’t in the ballroom yet?

About thirty minutes later, Halilintar stood up. He adjusted his attire slightly before smiling at me. “Let’s go, Taufan.”

Still bewildered, I followed him. The entire way, I kept wondering what exactly Halilintar was planning.

We arrived in front of a massive door. It was reddish-brown, with intricate carvings of flames adorning its edges. The color matched the door itself, making it subtly mesmerizing in its own way.

The two guards stationed there immediately bowed in respect upon seeing us before pushing open the enormous doors.

The sight that greeted us was a grand ballroom filled with countless nobles, all engaged in their activities, unaware of our presence. Then, I saw Halilintar approach a man and whisper something to him. The man nodded and made a gesture, seemingly granting permission for Halilintar to proceed.

I had no idea what he whispered—I simply followed Halilintar.

Then, I heard a loud announcement:

“His Highness, First Prince of Ignisia, Halilintar von Ignisia, and His Highness, Second Prince of Ignisia, Taufan von Ignisia, have arrived at the ballroom!”

As soon as the announcement ended, the room fell silent. Everyone turned toward us, their gazes fixed upon us.

Unlike Halilintar, who remained composed and confident, I felt a strong urge to disappear under their scrutinizing eyes. My heart pounded, my stomach twisted uncomfortably, and my hands began to sweat.

“Taufan, don’t worry. I’m here,” Halilintar reassured me.

I took a deep breath.

Alright. I can get through this.

Chapter Text

Boboiboy Fanfiction

©  Boboiboy | Animonsta Studio

A/N: The entire story is purely fictional, and the author does not profit from writing this story. If there are any similarities in ideas, character names, or locations, they are purely coincidental.

≫ ──── ≪•◦ ❈ ◦•≫ ──── ≪

I can't do this!

After the man announced Halilintar’s and my arrival, the room fell silent, and all attention turned to us. At that moment, I desperately wanted to hide. Anywhere would do—even if someone came and pushed me into a hole, I wouldn't protest, as long as I no longer had to endure those stares.

Unlike me, Halilintar seemed completely accustomed to all the attention. I shouldn’t even be surprised anymore—how many banquets has he attended so far? And, of course, as a prince, he naturally draws more attention than others.

I’m sure Taufan used to be like that, too.

This may be what Taufan always felt whenever he became the center of attention after the incident five years ago. He must have felt nervous being among these people, especially with them scrutinizing his every move. Anything he did could turn into a new rumor, further tarnishing his name. A teenage boy had to face all of that alone—no wonder Taufan distanced himself from people.

Right now, all I want to do is return to the Sunset Palace, lie on my bed, and read a book with Maripos.

After the brief silence, the room was once again filled with noise. The nobles eagerly sought Halilintar’s attention, trying to build connections with the prince who was currently the strongest candidate for the throne. They had completely forgotten that this banquet was meant to celebrate Blaze and Ice’s birthdays.

I watched as Halilintar casually grabbed a glass from a tray carried by a servant. He also took a spoon from a nearby table and raised the glass. Then, he struck the glass with the spoon, producing a clinking sound that immediately drawing the nobles' attention. Once he was sure that all eyes were on him, Halilintar smiled confidently and began his speech.

He spoke fluently, each word clear to the ear, and he conveyed his message directly—that tonight was a celebration for his two brothers, and he hoped everyone would remember that the true stars of this event were Blaze and Ice, not himself. After that, he officially declared the banquet had begun.

My main reason for attending this banquet was to meet Duchess Satriantar, but I was starting to feel like that wouldn’t be possible. Not with this many people at the party, and especially since I had never met her before. What a shame.

Since Halilintar was now surrounded by a crowd, I decided to distance myself. I stood in the corner of the room, conveniently near the dining table. While waiting for Halilintar to finish dealing with the people trying to curry his favor—who knows when that would be—I focused on making a very important decision: should I try the chocolate cake or the tempting blueberry pie?

The blueberry pie seemed like the right choice. I had never had one in my world, but I had eaten it several times in this one. It always tasted delicious. But then again, the chocolate cake looked incredibly tempting. It had been so long since I last had chocolate cake. But would the chocolate here taste the same as in my world? Would it be bitter or sweet?

Such a difficult decision!

"Your Highness."

I nearly dropped my plate—thankfully, I didn’t. Who in the world decided to startle me while I was in the middle of making such an important choice?!

I turned around and found a tan-skinned young man standing right behind me. Instinctively, my eyes narrowed at him, and he flinched slightly. I simply sighed, picked up the blueberry pie—blueberry pie won the contest—and then faced him.

"How can I help you, Young Master Pavan?" I asked with a smile.

Pavan looked awkward as he stood before me. He was nothing like the confident person I had first met. Back then, he carried himself with such arrogance, lifting his chin high while looking down on me. Even when standing before Captain Fang, who exuded an intimidating aura, he still held his head up with pride.

Now, he was just an awkward young man. His head was lowered, his eyes darting everywhere—everywhere except at me.

The last time we met, he had also seemed like this. But back then, I didn’t pay much attention to him. Most of my focus had been on Gopal, since he was the one who kept talking. Pavan, who had accompanied him, had merely been like an ornament.

"I... I wanted to personally apologize to you, Your Highness."

"Haven’t you already done that?"

"That time, it wasn’t me who offered the apology. I know I shouldn’t be doing this at a banquet, but I haven’t been able to approach you personally."

"Why is that?"

"Prince Halilintar has forbidden me from approaching you, Your Highness."

I wasn’t surprised. Not at all. Pavan probably managed to approach me now only because Halilintar was busy dealing with all those nobles.

"But how did you and Young Master Gopal meet me back then?"

"Um... we... used a disguise spell on me. We only removed it after entering your palace."

Is there something like that in this world? Wow, that's new knowledge for me. I'm curious about that disguise magic. Maybe I can ask Maripos about it later.

"Your Highness, I am truly sorry and ashamed of my past actions," said Pavan. He bowed to me, making me take a small step back in surprise. "What I did to you could be considered treason and deserving of the death penalty. Yet, with your mercy, you saved me and my family."

"As I told Young Master Gopal, the past is not something to dwell on."

When Pavan straightened his body, I saw a genuine smile on his face—one directed at me. Wow... he really has changed.

After that, Pavan accompanied me while I waited for Halilintar, who now seemed to be drowning in a human sea. I offered him a piece of pie, but Pavan said he preferred chocolate cake. Honestly, if he didn't act so annoying, he was quite a pleasant conversationalist. I also learned some things about noble society from him. He told me about an exhibition building that influential nobles in the capital often visit. There, they try to establish connections with other influential people or exchange information about what's happening among the nobility.

Ah, now I'm curious about that place.

Pavan also explained why he was so grateful to me. It turns out he has a younger sister, the same age as Gempa, and Pavan cares for her deeply. He said that initially, he didn't understand the consequences of his actions, but when his father explained that his sister could have been sold as a slave because of what he did, Pavan realized how terrible his actions towards me had been. He deeply regretted his behavior and tried to apologize to me in person, but apparently, Halilintar had forbidden Pavan and his family from approaching me.

His explanation made me realize how brave Gopal was to take a risk to save his friend.

After chatting with him for a while, Pavan decided to look for his sister, who had come with him to the party. He also mentioned that he hoped to build a good relationship with me. Although I slightly doubted his sincerity, I didn't refuse. After all, Count Morgan is one of Halilintar's supporters. With his son having a connection with me, it could help secure Halilintar's position in this competition.

At that moment, I had just picked up a drink offered by a servant while pondering whether my stomach could handle chocolate cake after eating two blueberry pies. Halilintar suddenly appeared and took the glass from my hand. He drank it without asking. I was stunned by his action.

"You shouldn't drink alcohol, Taufan. Remember your health."

Oh, I had accidentally picked an alcoholic drink. But did he really have to take it straight from my hand? He could have just told me what was in the glass. I wouldn't have drunk it if I had known.

Does every drink at this party contain alcohol? Ah, I was so thirsty after eating two pies, and I wanted something to drink. My dilemma about drinks was resolved when Halilintar called a servant and instructed them to bring me a non-alcoholic beverage. He then led me across the room, where I had seen Gempa chatting with some teenage girls. I'd wanted to approach him earlier, but there were so many people around. Plus, I felt like people would be watching me if I did.

Now that Halilintar was taking me over, I figured it was fine. Although yes, people started watching us as we moved. I pretended that their sharp gazes didn't exist. Even though my rapidly beating heart and sweaty hands couldn't lie. I was extremely nervous, and there was also the fear of being watched by so many eyes. I was afraid that if I made a mistake, these people would start yelling and blaming me.

I knew that fear wasn't mine—it belonged to Taufan. He had spent five years terrified of people's opinions of him. That fear still lingered in his body, even though the soul inside it was no longer his.

I must have been too caught up in my fear to realize what was happening around me. It wasn't until I felt a touch on my hand that I became aware of my surroundings. Gempa was in front of me, holding my hand with a worried expression. Halilintar looked just as concerned.

"Brother, are you sick? You look pale."

I just shook my head. I wanted to speak, to tell him I was fine, but I didn't trust my voice. It felt like something was holding me back from speaking. Maybe if I opened my mouth, all that would come out was a choked sound.

"Are you sure?" 

I nodded at Halilintar's question. Both he and Gempa still watched me with concern. I cleared my throat a few times to steady my voice, "Where are Prince Duri and Prince Solar?"

I hoped Halilintar and Gempa understood that I was trying to change the topic away from myself. Gempa, more perceptive than Halilintar, smiled softly. "They're over there, fighting over chocolate pudding."

Gempa pointed to one of the tables not far from us. I saw two young boys pushing each other at the table. They really reminded me of my younger brothers. It was so cute to see them fighting over pudding like that.

Now that I had met and spoken with Gempa, and had seen Duri and Solar, I wondered where the two princes who were the stars of today were.

Even when the party started, I couldn't find them at all. Were they hiding? Or maybe I was too focused on Halilintar and the dining table to notice them? I glanced around the room. I saw Pavan, who was now talking to a young girl—probably his sister—then I spotted Miss Ying, who stood alone in the corner of the room, much like I had earlier—though she seemed to be trying to blend into the shadows, while I had been eyeing the food on the table. I wanted to approach her, but I still didn’t know how to make her feel comfortable around me.

After scanning the large ballroom several times, I finally found two teenagers standing side by side. One was dressed in reddish-brown clothing, while the other wore deep blue. Both of them had similar faces, like two peas in a pod. The one in brown must be Blaze, while the one in blue had to be Ice.

At that moment, they were speaking with a blond-haired man. I didn't know who the blond man was because he had his back to me. He might be someone important, perhaps one of Blaze's supporters.

Wow... noble birthday parties are very different from the birthday parties I know. Here, people don't focus on the ones celebrating their birthdays—they're busy trying to forge connections with influential figures.

I must have been staring at them too long, as Blaze and Ice both looked in my direction. The blond man, noticing their gaze, turned around. I froze when I saw his face.

He was not a stranger to me. He was someone I knew very well. I grew up knowing him. He used to carry me around when I was little, gave me extra pocket money when my parents wouldn’t and bought me anything I wanted when my parents were teaching me to be frugal. He was like a second father to me. 

I thought only these princes had faces resembling people I knew in my world. But it turns out, it wasn’t just them. 

When that man smiled, I knew I wasn’t wrong in recognizing him. 

“Uncle Pian...” 

How many years had it been since I last saw him? 

Ever since I went to another city for college, I never returned to my hometown to save money. Besides, he had already moved to another city when I was in high school. I missed him just as much as I missed my parents and my brothers. I wanted to rush over and hug him. I wanted to pour out all my worries and troubles to him. 

I had already taken a step forward, my hand reaching out to him. But everything stopped when he spoke. 

“Prince Taufan, I’m glad to see you at this party.” 

Right. 

This wasn’t my Uncle Pian. He wasn’t the Uncle Pian I knew. This wasn’t my world. This wasn’t the world I know. 

My hand dropped limply to my side. I suddenly felt weak as the realization hit me—where I was and who was standing before me. 

“It’s an honor to meet you, Prime Minister,” Halilintar said. 

His words startled me. Did he say Prime Minister? Who? Where? I looked left and right, searching for whoever he meant, but I didn’t find anyone else. 

“Ah, it seems Prince Halilintar is still upset with me,” the man said. 

I blinked several times, trying to process the information and make sure my mind wasn’t playing tricks on me. Did Halilintar mean this man—this look-alike of my Uncle Pian—was the Prime Minister? The Prime Minister of Ignisia? The man who runs Ignisia’s government and keeps it from falling apart after the king’s death? 

I shouldn’t be surprised anymore. In my world, Uncle Pian and my father were very close, like brothers even though they didn’t share blood. Maybe this version of Uncle Pian was also close friends with the late king, Taufan’s father. 

Suddenly, I felt nauseous thinking about it. At first, I thought only the princes were made to resemble my brothers. But today, I met someone who looked exactly like my Uncle Pian. Don’t tell me the King and Queen here also looked like my parents. If they did, how was I supposed to face that? The King and Queen in this world had already passed away, while my parents were still alive and well back in my world. 

I probably wouldn’t be able to think about the King and Queen the same way anymore. Now, whenever I imagined them, I’d be picturing my own parents. Thinking of them dying young and leaving me and my brothers behind. It was painful. 

“It seems Prince Taufan is feeling unwell,” the Prime Minister said. 

“Taufan, are you sure you’re okay?” Halilintar asked. 

I didn’t know. I didn’t feel okay. I avoided looking at Halilintar or Gempa. I also didn’t want to look at Blaze and Ice, who now stood beside the Prime Minister. I was afraid if I looked into their eyes, I would be overwhelmed by Taufan’s memories and emotions. I wouldn’t be able to control myself in a moment like this. My heart already ached from my own feelings—I didn’t need to carry someone else’s pain too. 

I wanted to go home. 

I wanted to return to my world. 

I wanted to make sure my parents were okay. 

That they were still breathing and waiting for me to come home. 

“I’m sorry, but I’m not feeling well right now,” I said. 

I turned my gaze away from them, trying to find a quiet place to escape to. Usually, at parties like this, the main character would go to the balcony to be alone, right? But this ballroom was on the first floor, and there wouldn’t be a balcony here. I’d have to leave the room if I wanted to find a quiet spot. 

“I’ll take you to my room,” Halilintar offered. 

He was already holding me, looking ready to carry me if I showed any sign of weakness. I pushed him away, refusing his offer even though it was tempting. What he was doing would only draw more attention to us. I hated being the center of attention like this—being watched and observed like an animal in a zoo. It was uncomfortable and suffocating. 

Halilintar—of course—wasn’t happy about me refusing to rest in his room. But when Gempa said he would stay by my side during the ball and asked a servant to bring me a chair so I wouldn’t have to stand, Halilintar finally relented. 

Ah, I’m lucky to have Gempa. I would’ve hugged and kissed him if we weren’t in a room full of people right now. 

I still avoided looking at Blaze and Ice. I pretended they weren’t there. Even though I felt guilty for not looking at them or wishing them a happy birthday, I really didn’t want to face the emotional consequences of meeting their gaze.

When I looked into Gempa’s eyes for the first time, I fainted—especially after Oak made me fall hard to the ground. What would happen if I looked into the eyes of those two at the same time? I might end up fainting for days.  

Uncle Pian—or rather, the Prime Minister—tried to talk to me, but I didn’t dare respond. I was afraid I’d accidentally call him Uncle Pian like I always did with my real Uncle Pian. I needed time to adapt to the reality that even though he shared the same face, he wasn’t the man I knew.  

Fortunately, Halilintar seemed to hold a certain grudge against the Prime Minister, so he didn’t want him speaking to me either. Perhaps it was a childish grudge Halilintar held for constantly being assigned tasks by the Prime Minister. I knew Halilintar didn’t actually hate him—his tone was still warm and respectful when speaking to the man. He was just annoyed about being given troublesome duties, especially when most of them involved reading and signing endless documents. Halilintar despised such tedious work, so it was understandable that he felt irritated with the one assigning it to him.  

Every time he came to the Sunset Palace, I had to listen to his complaints and frustrations about the Prime Minister.  

Gempa stayed with me throughout the ball. Halilintar had been pulled away by a noble lady to dance—though I caught the displeasure on his face that he struggled to hide. Duri and Solar had caused a bit of a scene, fighting over who would get to dance with me. But Gempa gently explained that I wasn’t feeling well and couldn’t accompany them. Though they looked disappointed, they didn’t push the matter. Thankfully, they gave up quickly. Otherwise, I would’ve been dragged onto the dance floor, and I had no idea how to dance like these nobles!  

I doubted Taufan’s body even remembered the steps for dancing. When was the last time he attended such an event? It must’ve been a long time ago, right?  

While talking to Gempa, I constantly felt like someone was watching me. Unfortunately, I couldn’t figure out who it was. The guests eventually began ignoring me after realizing I wasn’t doing anything but talking to Gempa or eating cake. So, who was so interested in me that they kept staring? It even felt like they wanted to burn a hole through me with their gaze.  

But maybe it was just my imagination. After all, Gempa didn’t seem to notice anything. Either he wasn’t aware of it, or there really was nothing to notice. Better to just ignore it.  

As the night wore on, Duri and Solar left the party. They were only nine, and the later the party went, the wilder it would become. People were starting to get drunk—though no one had caused a scene yet—and both boys needed plenty of rest to grow. So, Gempa escorted them back to the Prince’s Palace.  

And me, you ask?  

Halilintar took me to the waiting room we had visited before heading to the ballroom. He told me to rest there for a while and said he would call Maripos to accompany me. He couldn’t stay because he still needed to supervise Blaze and Ice. I understood, so I didn’t ask him to stay.  

I lay down on the sofa, waiting for Maripos to arrive.  

Maripos could’ve been wandering anywhere. He wasn’t a noble and couldn’t enter the ballroom unless he was serving. I could’ve brought him inside, but it would’ve been troublesome. Bringing a servant into a place full of nobles would only invite disdain. I didn’t want Maripos to experience what I had today.  

I heard the door open, but I didn’t immediately get up, thinking it was Maripos. However, even after the door closed and I waited a while, Maripos didn’t say anything. Usually, he would’ve asked if I felt unwell and tried to ease my discomfort. But now, there was only silence, and that struck me as odd.  

I decided to sit up and turn towards the door—and what I saw wasn’t a silver-haired young man. It was a teenage boy with blue eyes and an aura as cold as ice.  

Oh god, could I be this unlucky?  

Not even a second passed after meeting his eyes, and I already felt waves of familiar emotions hitting me. The suffocating sensation, the guilt mixed with sadness, was overwhelming. My head throbbed as if something sharp was stabbing into it, my heart pounded erratically, and my vision began to blur. Black spots danced in front of me.  

But the worst part was—I wasn’t fainting.  

Unlike when I first met Duri or Gempa, this time, it felt like I was being forced to stay conscious.  

The boy stood still, his face blank, his gaze cold and empty. He looked at me as though I were a block of ice, and his aura was sharp and unrelenting. I felt like I was freezing, even though the weather outside was warm.  

I couldn’t breathe. My hands trembled—whether from the cold or something else, I didn’t know. Worst of all, I couldn’t tear my gaze away from his.  

His blue eyes shimmered with light, almost like when Halilintar used his power to summon lightning pillars in the prison.  

Was he using his power on me now? What kind of power?  

“Ugh!”  

It felt like my head was about to explode. I started seeing things—things I had never experienced. But they were blurry, unclear. I didn’t know what they were.  

Did I have to faint to understand them?  

I held my head, even pulling at the hair that Maripos had styled so carefully earlier, trying to ease the pain.  

Please, stop! I can’t take it anymore!

...

"I don't want to die... brother. I... don't want to die..." His voice sounded hoarse, filled with despair. He struggled to stay conscious, clutching tightly to the clothes of the young man holding him while crying. As if that young man could save him now.

But the young man holding him could do nothing.

He didn't know what to do.

He was powerless.

He couldn't stop what was happening.

"You won't die, I'll save you. I promise." The only thing he could do at that moment was lie to him.

"Why... why is brother still lying?"

Right, why was he still lying? Hadn't he promised to save them all? Why did he keep breaking his promises?

In the end, all he could do was cry while begging his little brother for forgiveness—

...

An explosion pulled me out of whatever had just happened. My head still throbbed painfully, and my body felt weak, but the explosion was alarming. It was too loud and too close for me to stay calm. I slowly stood up on shaky legs, almost falling but managing to support myself with the sofa. I had just managed to stand when a second explosion rang out.

I turned to look at the teenage boy in the room with me. He still looked as calm as before, showing no signs of worry despite the two consecutive explosions. I had also heard voices—screams, perhaps. Were we under attack? But by whom?

Should we leave this room? Or would it be safer to stay here until Halilintar or the Royal Guard arrived?

The third explosion echoed, this time farther away than the first two. Maybe it was best to stay here. Should we lock the door to make sure no one could enter? Ugh, why isn't Vayuna here with me right now? And Captain Fang, or even Maripos—none of them are here. It's making me more anxious by the second.

I glanced at the teenage boy again. He had been silent the whole time. Why? Didn't he hear the explosions and screams? How could he stay so calm with all this chaos happening?

"Prince Ice, it seems the situation outside is bad. Judging by the consecutive explosions, I suspect we are under attack. It might be best if we stay in this room until Prince Halilintar or the Royal Guard arrives," I said.

I still felt dizzy and weak, but I could endure it for now. I hoped this young man would help me block the entrance to prevent anyone from breaking in.

Ice didn't speak but nodded, indicating that he agreed with me. We began dragging some heavy furniture to barricade the door. I was still worried, but I tried to stay calm.

I invited Ice to hide in a corner of the room, concealed from the entrance. He stayed behind me while I positioned myself in front of him, holding a flower vase as a makeshift weapon. I didn't know if Ice could fight like Halilintar, but my instincts told me I had to protect him no matter what.

We stayed silent for a long time, anxiously waiting for what might come. When the screams died down and the explosions ceased, I thought the danger had passed. Still, I remained uneasy. My grip tightened around the vase. I tried to recall everything Captain Fang had taught me, both to calm myself and to prepare for the worst if anyone with bad intentions entered this room.

Suddenly, the door exploded—obliterating the barricade Ice and I had built.

My grip on the vase tightened even more. Behind me, Ice clung to my clothes, and I could feel his hands trembling. He must be scared, just like me. The same fear I had felt the night I encountered those bandits. But this time, it's different. This time, I would do something to protect Ice. I couldn't let him get hurt. I wouldn't!

Two figures dressed in black, their faces covered, entered soon after. They stepped into the room as if searching for something. I hoped they wouldn't notice us, but luck wasn't on my side. They found us almost immediately.

I still clutched the vase, ready to strike if they came too close. Of course, I doubted it would do any real damage, but it was worth trying.

The two figures approached us. The closer they got, the faster my heart pounded.

"I can't believe we found Ignisia's Delicate Flower here. Oh dear, we must have frightened you, haven't we?" one of them said.

Why that nickname again?!

"Who are you, and what do you want?" I demanded.

"We have no business with you. Our target is the young prince behind you."

What did they want with Ice? I felt his grip on my clothes tighten even more. I glanced at the door that had just been blown open. Why wasn't anyone coming to help us? Halilintar should know that I was still here. He should be rushing to save his beloved little brother.

Where was he?

Was something holding him back?

"What do you want from him?"

"Do you think we'd tell you just because you asked?"

Of course not! I was just trying to buy time. If that didn’t work, I’d pull Ice and jump out the window. This room was on the second floor, and I had noticed earlier that there were trees and flower bushes right beneath the window. I might break a few bones, but at least I wouldn’t die instantly. Also, if I could shield myself and Ice in time with my power, our injuries would be much lighter.

One of them moved, raising his sword and attacking us. Acting purely on reflex, I pulled Ice down and somehow managed to strike the attacker’s head with the flower vase in my hand. The vase shattered, but it gave me enough time to pull Ice away from our attacker.

In my heart, I thanked Captain Fang, who had relentlessly drilled me during our training. Because of that, I was able to dodge quickly. But I knew that wouldn’t be enough. These two were clearly well-trained, while I had only recently started learning swordsmanship. Maybe it was time to jump out the window.

While avoiding the attack earlier, I had deliberately pulled Ice closer to the window. Now, I just had to find the right moment to break it and jump.

"Damn it! Why are you always such a hassle?!" The one I had hit with the vase shouted.

I flinched a little at his furious tone, but I didn’t back down. Also, what did he mean by me always being a hassle? Had we met before?

"Your Highness, we're not here to hurt you. It’s best if you step aside now if you don’t want to get hurt," the other one, who had been silent until now, finally spoke.

I didn’t believe a word he said. Most likely, they were part of the group that had blown up the palace. And they were after Ice—a 14-year-old boy. I was sure that if I agreed to hand Ice over, they would kill me to keep me quiet.

It would be a lie if I said I wasn’t scared. I was terrified. Memories of the night I was chased by bandits resurfaced in my mind. I trembled with fear, but the tight grip on my clothes kept me standing tall, hiding my fear.

I didn’t even consider whether Ice could fight or not. All I could think about was that I had to protect this boy—no matter what happened.

Chapter Text

Boboiboy Fanfiction

©  Boboiboy | Animonsta Studio

A/N: The entire story is purely fictional, and the author does not profit from writing this story. If there are any similarities in ideas, character names, or locations, they are purely coincidental.

≫ ──── ≪•◦ ❈ ◦•≫ ──── ≪

Both of them, whom I called A and B, watched us warily. A, the one whose head I had struck earlier, stared at me sharply. His hand gripped his sword so tightly that if I made even the slightest wrong move, he would surely attack me. Meanwhile, B remained silent, watching us. He hadn't said anything since speaking earlier.  

I had no weapon in my hands, Vayuna wasn't here to help protect me, I had only been learning swordsmanship for the past few months, and I hadn't fully mastered Taufan's wind abilities. This was a completely one-sided fight. What should I do in this situation?  

Waiting for help would take too long, but I knew I couldn't face both of them alone. I took a step back, trying to keep my distance from them. However, my movement only made A leap forward to attack me and Ice. At that moment, my mind went blank, and I couldn't think of anything.  

I thought I was going to die. But then, I heard a whisper from behind me saying, "Ice wall[1]," and suddenly, an ice wall appeared in front of me, blocking A’s attack. 

[1] Ice Wall is a wall made of ice, commonly used to block attacks. The thickness of the ice wall depends on the person who creates it—the thicker the ice, the higher the level of difficulty required to form it.

There was no time to be surprised by the sudden appearance of the ice wall. I grabbed Ice, broke the window behind us, and jumped out. Gravity pulled us down. In that brief moment, I held Ice as tightly as I could and kept praying in my heart that we wouldn't die today.

"Windshield![2]"

[2] A windshield is a shield created by utilizing the surrounding wind. It is usually a swirling current of air that envelops the user's body, but Taufan chooses to combine it with the principle of Windstep, which involves compressing the air around him to form a solid shield.

A bluish light enveloped both me and Ice, just like when the fireball attacked me and Lilia in Fontis City before. The bluish light was a shield made of wind; it couldn't fully protect me and Ice, but at least it could reduce the impact of our fall.  

Our bodies hit the ground hard. The pain was so intense that I wanted to cry. Even after protecting myself with Windshield, it still hurt this much. What if I hadn't managed to summon it in time?  

There was no time to think about the pain now. I grabbed Ice again, pulling him to his feet, and we started running. A and B would definitely be chasing us. The most important thing right now was to hide from them while waiting for someone to save us.  

We were too slow. The two of them had already appeared and were chasing us. They were so fast that they blocked our path within moments.  

"Can you stop running and let us end this quickly?" B said.  

Oh, how I wished I could create wind blades like I did before. But I didn't know how to do it, nor did I know how to control it. Taufan’s power was too difficult to control—I had only recently started learning to control it from Vayuna. I had only grasped the basics. My swordsmanship was nothing to be proud of either. And worse, I had nothing to use as a weapon right now.  

"Hand over Prince Ice now, Your Highness."  

"Never!"  

"Why must you go this far, Your Highness? Wouldn't it be much better if you just gave him to us? He is a threat, even to you."  

I shook my head. Even though I didn’t know this Ice very well, I knew he wasn't a threat. Not just because I saw him as my younger brother, but because I knew that this teenager was not a danger. He was just like the real Taufan—just a boy shunned by the world for something he couldn’t control.  

Even if it was foolish to risk my life here for a boy I didn't know well, I knew I wouldn’t regret my decision.  

"You leave us no choice, Your Highness."  

The two of them got into attack positions. A gripped his sword tightly, while B seemed to be chanting something. I knew we had to fight while waiting for help. I hoped we could hold out long enough.  

Suddenly, I felt a cold presence from behind me. Just like before, I heard a whisper: "Ice spear[3]." Then, a series of spears made of ice surrounded us. The moment I heard a snap, one by one, the spears launched toward our enemies.  

[3] Ice Spear is a spear made of ice. Multiple spears can be created at once, depending on the user's ability.

It was a powerful attack to me, but they managed to deflect every single strike. They even launched a counterattack at us.  

One of them chanted something, and then something dark purple was thrown toward us. At that moment, I immediately formed a windshield like before, using more power this time. Whatever they had thrown at us, it was definitely a dangerous attack. I could see fine cracks forming on my shield as it struggled to withstand the impact.

The ice spears appeared again and started attacking relentlessly.

The two of them dodged and attacked us at the same time. I managed to deflect some of their strikes, but for those I couldn't, I blocked them with my shield, which was now in a rather dire state. I was running out of energy—I wouldn’t be able to hold out much longer. It seemed Ice was in the same condition. When I glanced at him, sweat was pouring down his face, and he was panting heavily.

Just like when my body had moved on its own to catch Solar when he fell, this time, my body acted on its own again. I grabbed one of the ice spears and used it to block an attack aimed at Ice. The ice spear shattered from the impact, but fortunately, Ice was unharmed. Another attack came flying toward us. I did my best to deflect it, but it seemed I was hit by a few of them. It hurt, but I could endure it. Ice also continued trying to fight back.

We wouldn’t be able to win like this. Both Ice and I were exhausted. Ice’s attacks were slowing down, and I knew my shield would soon break. The last thing I could think of to escape these two was to let Taufan’s power go out of control. Of course, that was incredibly dangerous and reckless, but I felt like I had no other choice.

Just as I decided to do it, a red lightning bolt struck down from the sky, hitting one of our attackers. Unfortunately, they managed to evade it, though not without getting injured. Then, in a flash of red, a shadow passed by Ice and me, followed by the sound of clashing metal moments later.

Standing in front of us was Halilintar. He held two swords, each glowing with a blazing red light. His entire body was surrounded by crackling red lightning. It was incredible—Halilintar was able to fight both of them at once.

"We have to go." Ice’s voice snapped me out of my thoughts.

Yes, we had to leave. We shouldn’t be caught in this battle any longer. Ice helped me walk toward a safe place. Along the way, we encountered several guards, as well as Maripos and Blaze.

"Prince!" Maripos called out. I moved away from Ice, allowing Maripos to catch me as I felt my legs giving out. I was completely exhausted and in pain. Even so, I smiled at Maripos. I was relieved to see him again. Truly relieved.

"Ice! Ice!" I turned my head to see Blaze holding his twin brother. Ice looked completely drained like me, but his condition seemed far worse than mine. Had he been injured without me noticing? Was it from the fall earlier?

With Maripos’s support, I quickly approached them. When I reached out to touch Ice, Blaze swatted my hand away and pulled his brother into a protective embrace. I heard Maripos gasp at his reaction.

"It’s okay, Maripos. Stay calm." I said, hoping he would let it go this time.

"Prince Blaze, please allow me to examine Prince Ice," I said, but I didn’t look at Blaze—I looked at Ice instead. I didn’t want to risk making eye contact with Blaze. I was in no condition for that, and I didn’t want to make things worse for myself.

Blaze continued holding onto his brother, but he no longer stopped me from touching Ice. His body was ice-cold. I turned to Maripos in concern. Maripos quickly knelt down, placing a hand on Ice’s neck to check his pulse.

"I believe Prince Ice has overexerted himself," Maripos said, then touched Ice’s forehead. "It would be best for him to be examined by a doctor immediately."

"Prince Blaze, I understand that you are worried about Prince Ice, but please follow my instructions. These two guards will escort you to the western wing of the Main Palace. That is the evacuation site where the doctors are treating the injured."

Blaze nodded at Maripos’s instructions. He lifted Ice and ran off with the two guards. I hoped they would be alright.

"Prince, you need to be examined as well."

"It’s fine. I’m okay. You should focus on the others. Have all the people been evacuated?"

Maripos’s expression did not look good, but he didn’t force me. Maybe he knew I would just be stubborn. He sighed, “Commander Kaika has already ordered the guards to search for victims and ensure they receive help. The Royal Guards has also been deployed to capture the perpetrators of today's attack.”

"Do you have any guesses about who is behind this attack?"

"Unfortunately, I do not know, Your Highness. But one thing is certain—someone was targeting Prince Blaze and Prince Ice."

"Why? Did they do something wrong?"

"I do not know, Your Highness. It could be that they are enemies from another kingdom or part of a certain organization."

How complicated.

Maripos helped me walk toward the western wing of the Main Palace. Several guards also accompanied us. On the way, I got a clear view of the palace’s condition. Parts of it were destroyed—surely from the explosions earlier. How many victims had this incident caused?

It was heartbreaking.

A celebration that turned into a tragedy.

The Western Wing of the Main Palace was not as large as the Eastern Wing—the place that had been attacked—but it was large enough to accommodate the victims. Many people lay on the floor, their clothes stained with blood and dust. The sight made me nauseous and horrified. Doctors, nurses, and servants ran in all directions, tending to the wounded.

Maripos helped me sit in a corner of the room. He wanted to call a doctor immediately to check on me, but I stopped him. There were others in greater need. I was just exhausted and had a few scrapes—nothing urgent. Although reluctant, Maripos followed my order. He went to fetch water and clean cloths to tend to my wounds. I didn’t stop him from doing that.

While waiting for Maripos, I observed my surroundings. That was when I saw her. Lady Ying, standing not far from where I was. Her gown was covered in dust, her hair was disheveled, and her makeup was ruined.

Though struggling a bit, I walked toward her.

"It has been a while, Lady Ying."

The girl flinched. She looked at me as if she were staring at someone about to attack her. I knew this whole experience wasn’t pleasant, but come on, why did she have to look at me like that?

"How are you, my lady? Have you been examined by a doctor?" I asked. I wasn’t going to give up yet. This was my chance to get close to her. Hopefully, through her, I could meet Marchioness Kuputeri.

Lady Ying seemed hesitant. She even took a step back, distancing herself from me—was I that frightening? Still, after seeing that I had no intention of backing down, she finally answered my question.

"U-uh... I-I'm f-fine, Y-Your Highness."

"I don’t think so, my lady. It would be best if you allowed a doctor to examine you."

Lady Ying looked like she wanted to protest, but I cut her off by calling over a passing servant. I asked them to assist in getting Lady Ying checked.

The servant gave Lady Ying an unfriendly look, but perhaps because I was the one requesting it, they helped her sit among the other patients and let a nurse tend to her.

I remained standing there to ensure Lady Ying received proper care. I even refused to leave when Maripos returned. He could only resign himself to cleaning my wounds.

"How is Ice?"

"Prince Ice has been examined by Doctor Kién, Your Highness. I received news that his condition is not critical; he just needs rest." Maripos explained.

"And what about the attackers? Have they all been captured? What about Prince Halilintar?"

"The last update I received was that Commander Kaika managed to capture them alive. They will be sent to prison and interrogated immediately. As for Prince Halilintar, I believe he will arrive here shortly."

"Oh? He’s already finished fighting those two?"

Maripos snorted, "You underestimate Prince Halilintar too much, Your Highness. He is Ignisia’s swordmaster and the best among them."

No, Maripos. I wasn’t underestimating Halilintar. I just knew that those two were tough opponents. Maybe it was because I lacked experience and strength in fighting them. But still, if Halilintar could defeat them so quickly, it meant he possessed power beyond others his age.

I recalled the red lightning that struck one of our attackers. That lightning had been incredibly strong and deadly. If I had been hit by it, I might have burned to death. Just thinking about it sent shivers down my spine.

If Halilintar was already this powerful at 18, how strong would he be in the future?

Hmm… he was really strong, but why did he die so easily at the end of the novel?

"Taufan!"

I didn’t even get the chance to turn toward the voice calling my name before I was suddenly trapped in a suffocating embrace. Why did Halilintar always squeeze me like this? I had to pat his back repeatedly to let him know I was struggling to breathe. He did release me, but then he began scanning me from head to toe, his eyes narrowing and his expression darkening from time to time.

"I should have killed them more painfully."

"Please, calm down, Your Highness. I’m fine. These wounds are from jumping out of a window."

"This is my fault. I shouldn’t have left you alone. I should have come to you sooner."

I shook my head. "It’s not your fault, Your Highness. Besides, I don’t think this is the right place to talk about it."

I glanced around the room. Although it was still as busy as before, more people were now paying attention to us. It must have been because of Halilintar’s presence. He was like a celebrity, drawing attention wherever he went.

Realizing my concern, Halilintar finally took note of our surroundings. He released an intimidating aura, making those who had been watching quickly look away. Such nosy people.

"How are Prince Blaze and Prince Ice? Have you seen them yet?"

"I was about to check on them now." Halilintar said, but why was he suddenly sliding his arm under my knees and back? Before I knew it, he had lifted me up. Reflexively, I clung to his arm, afraid of falling.

He only smiled at me before walking toward the busiest area of the room.

I was truly confused and didn’t understand the entirety of this situation. When I turned to Maripos, the young man merely shrugged indifferently. He didn’t care that his prince had just been practically kidnapped right before his eyes!  

"Why are you carrying me if you just want to check on them?"  

"Because..." Halilintar left his answer hanging, making me so frustrated that I wanted to smack his head, but I held back. "You also need to be checked, Taufan. You know I can never be at ease if you're left like this."  

Fair enough, but he shouldn’t have carried me like this in front of so many people!! I could still walk. Goodness, this was so embarrassing! People would start gossiping about how spoiled Prince Taufan was. They would mock me for making the First Prince of Ignisia carry me like a weak princess. I admit I am weak, but I am still a man who wants to protect his dignity. Halilintar, you bastard, I’ll get back at you one day.  

Once Halilintar put me down, I refused to look at him. He seemed to understand why I was upset, because he ruffled my hair just to annoy me further. Before I could protest, Halilintar diverted his attention from me.  

"Blaze, how is Ice’s condition?"  

Without realizing it, I turned to see Blaze standing right in front of us. He was looking at Halilintar with eyes that burned like embers, his fists clenched at his sides. I let out a choked sound when he shifted his gaze to me. I saw flames ignite in his clenched hands, and his sharp glare at me felt like he wanted to burn me to ashes.  

That familiar feeling surfaced again. But before I could process it, a powerful crack of lightning struck. The flash of light and its deafening sound caused many people to scream in shock. I was one of them.  

The atmosphere suddenly fell silent, an unpleasant chill filling the air. Everyone could feel the heavy tension between Blaze and Halilintar. It was so thick you could probably cut it with a knife. I felt nervous just standing near them. I wanted to run away, but my instincts told me that if I moved now, I might suffer even worse consequences.  

"Don't make me repeat myself, Blaze."  

Halilintar’s voice sounded so unfamiliar to me. All the warmth and affection I was used to hearing in his tone had completely vanished. Was his relationship with Blaze really this bad? Before the attack, they had at least been civil with each other.  

I knew I had to say something to ease the situation, but I had no idea what. I was also afraid of saying the wrong thing and making matters worse. At this moment, I missed Gempa’s sharp wit. He always knew exactly what to say. Gempa was probably at the Prince’s Palace, watching over Duri and Solar. There was no way he’d leave his youngest brothers unattended.  

I should’ve forced Maripos to take me back to the Sunset Palace instead.  

"Why do you suddenly care?"  

"What?"  

"Why do you suddenly care?! Why do you suddenly care about Ice’s condition?! Why now?! Is it just because of him?!" Blaze pointed at me. I was completely shocked to be dragged into this.  

"Blaze."  

A chill ran down my spine at Halilintar’s voice. His tone was low and full of warning. Not to mention the sharp glare in his eyes—it was like a dagger. If it weren’t Blaze standing in front of him, I wasn’t sure that person would still be alive.  

"You were never there for us. Never! You only care about him! You only saved Ice because he was with him at the time! If he weren’t with Ice, you would’ve abandoned Ice! Why do you only care about someone who has already been cast aside by this kingdom?!"  

"BLAZE!"  

Halilintar’s shout echoed alongside another lightning strike. This time, it was even stronger than before, shaking the very building we were in. If this wasn’t stopped soon, I feared people would get hurt—or worse, killed—just from being caught in the crossfire.  

"Your Highness."  

I reached out and grabbed Halilintar’s hand, trying to pull his attention back. But it seemed like his anger had already reached its peak; he wasn’t listening to me. I was scared he would end up hurting Blaze. And Blaze didn’t seem like he wanted to back down, either.  

My mind was in chaos—I couldn’t think of a single way to stop them. The people in the room were too terrified to interfere. Who would want to get involved in a fight between the First and Fourth Prince? I was just as scared as them, but I was more worried about them hurting each other. I didn’t know about Blaze, but I knew Halilintar would regret it if he injured his brother.  

"Enough."  

Uncle Pian—the Prime Minister—approached us, holding Ice’s hand. Ice still looked exhausted, but not as bad as before. Seeing Ice arrive, the tension in Blaze’s expression started to ease.  

"You two are acting disgracefully as princes. The palace is in turmoil after the attack, yet here you both are, fighting. There are many people here who are injured and afraid. As their princes, you should be reassuring them and ensuring their safety—not making them even more terrified."

Halilintar lowered his head upon hearing the Prime Minister's reprimand. On the other hand, Blaze lifted his chin as if challenging the Prime Minister. Why did that attitude seem so familiar? It felt like I had seen it somewhere before.

"Forgive me. I have acted childishly," Halilintar said.

"I'm not the one you should be apologizing to, Prince."

"You're right."

Halilintar then turned to the people who had been watching all along. He put on a smile—one that seemed fake, if you ask me—then bowed his body. "I truly regret causing a disturbance. Such behavior is unbefitting of me."

"And what about you, Prince Blaze? Do you have nothing to say?"

Blaze, unlike Halilintar, who quickly adjusted his demeanor, remained stubborn and refused to lower his head. However, when his gaze landed on Ice, he immediately looked down.

I noticed how his fists clenched tightly as he apologized, even though his teeth were grinding.

With the Prime Minister’s arrival, the situation became calmer and more under control. Halilintar and Blaze seemed eager to avoid each other, though they couldn’t, as Ice was now sitting beside me—placed there by the Prime Minister himself. I was sure the man did it on purpose.

"How are you feeling, Your Highness?" I asked Ice.

He looked surprised for a moment but then gave a small nod. It seemed Ice didn’t want to speak to me. Maybe he was just like Blaze, someone who deeply hated Taufan. My heart ached.

My attention was drawn away from him when Doctor Kién appeared to examine me. She clicked her tongue several times, making me nervous. I feared she would scold me again like last time. Fortunately, she didn’t. Though she did give me a sharp look whenever I moved. Why was this woman so terrifying?

Doctor Kién’s hands emitted a soft yellow light as she placed them over my chest.

"Hm?"

"Is there a problem? Is Taufan’s condition alright?"

Doctor Kién furrowed her brows. "Your Highness, I advise you to summon the High Priestess of the Wind Goddess Temple immediately. Prince Taufan’s condition is beyond my capabilities."

What? But I felt fine. I was tired and a little sore, but I was completely okay! I…

"Taufan!"

Why did Halilintar sound so panicked?

Ah, why did my vision suddenly blur? Was it because I was too exhausted and getting sleepy? Their voices turned into a ringing noise, matching my worsening sight. Also, why did it feel like something was trickling down my nose? I wasn’t sick.

I felt something rising from my throat. When I opened my mouth, I must have coughed up something, but I couldn’t quite recall it. All I could see now was darkness.

...

"Brother, how can I become like you?"

Hearing the question, he burst into laughter. He playfully pinched his little brother’s nose and smiled affectionately. "I’d rather you be yourself, little brother."

"But I’m not cool at all. Not like you, Brother."

"Being cool isn’t something you decide for yourself. I don’t think I’m cool, but you think I am. Doesn’t Ice already think you’re cool?"

"So that means I’m already cool?"

He chuckled, ruffling his brother’s hair. How innocent.

"Yeah. You’re my coolest little brother."

...

"What is this place? Why are we here?"

"I found this place yesterday and set up a protection spell around it. From now on, this will be our hideout whenever we come to this city."

Seeing the spark in his younger brother’s eyes, he knew his brother liked what he said. This place was messy and a bit eerie, but it was well hidden. Here, they wouldn’t have to worry about acting like princes. In this place, he could let his little brother grow freely, without restrictions.

...

"No! Brother! You can’t just leave! There must be a mistake! There’s no way you were cast out!"

His heart ached, seeing his little brother crying and struggling to reach him. But there was nothing he could do. He was afraid he would end up hurting others again—especially his brothers. This was for the best.

"Brother! Don’t leave me!" 

He could only deafen his ears and keep walking. It was okay. He was doing all this for them. Everything was for them.

"Brother!" 

...

"Why do you keep coming back here?" 

"Is it wrong for me to visit my little brother?"  

The young man scoffed. He even spat to the side, completely dismissing his words as nonsense. He wasn’t offended by the reaction—he deserved it. After all, everything that happened was his fault.  

"You’d better just leave. There’s nothing for you to see here. Besides, that’s what you’re best at, isn’t it? Leaving without saying anything."  

The young man's words made him lower his head in shame.  

He was right. He had left them before. He had thought everything he did was to protect them. He had never told them anything, letting them suffer.  

This was all his fault. All because of him.  

"I’m sorry," he said weakly, head still bowed, unable to meet the young man’s eyes. "But I will fix everything. I promise I will make things right."

...

When I opened my eyes, I felt the same sensation as when I first woke up in this world. My body was so weak, my head felt heavy, and I was in constant pain. It felt like I wanted to hit my head until I passed out just to stop feeling this pain. I couldn’t remember what had happened to put me in this condition.

Even trying to sit up was incredibly difficult. It felt like all the training I had undergone to strengthen my body had been for nothing. Why did it hurt so much? Had I somehow fallen off a cliff?

As I tried to recall the last thing that had happened to me, I heard a loud clattering sound.

Standing at the open doorway was Maripos. At his feet, a tray and a metal bowl had overturned. It seemed like the bowl had contained water, as I noticed a puddle forming around Maripos. Even his pants looked wet now.

"Your Highness..."

I weakly waved at Maripos, wanting to greet him. I didn’t expect him to suddenly run toward me and embrace me.

What was going on?

"Maripos?"

My voice was hoarse, and my throat ached. It felt like I hadn’t had a drink of water in days. But that wasn’t important right now.

What mattered was that Maripos was hugging me—and he was crying!

What had actually happened?!

It took me a while to calm Maripos down, as he kept sobbing and clinging to me. I even struggled to free myself from his grip. He was crying as if he were embracing a long-lost lover who had returned from the dead. When I finally managed to soothe him, his eyes were red and swollen. My body still ached, but I felt it was my duty to comfort Maripos.

I had never seen him cry like this before.

"There, there. Stop crying, Maripos."

"I'm just happy, Your Highness. You were unconscious for ten days, and even Doctor Kién and Doctor Theron didn’t know how to wake you up."

Wait.

Wait!

Ten days?

Ten days?!

I had been unconscious for ten whole days?!

How was I even alive without food or water for ten days?!

No, that wasn’t the main point.

The real question was—why had I been unconscious for ten days?!

What exactly had happened?!

Chapter Text

Boboiboy Fanfiction

©  Boboiboy | Animonsta Studio

A/N: The entire story is purely fictional, and the author does not profit from writing this story. If there are any similarities in ideas, character names, or locations, they are purely coincidental.

≫ ──── ≪•◦ ❈ ◦•≫ ──── ≪

I was completely unconscious for ten freaking days.  

I'm still in shock over this entire incident. I never thought I would sleep—or rather, be in a coma—for that long. Maripos said he was terrified that I wouldn’t wake up again. He even mentioned that Halilintar had called Aarav and Count Balakung to help wake me up, but neither of them could do anything.  

As I tried to process all the information I had received, Halilintar and Gempa suddenly appeared in my room. Both of them had dark circles under their eyes, and their eyes were red as if they had gone many nights without sleep.  

Wait.  

Don’t tell me they haven’t slept all this time?!  

Ugh. I feel so guilty.  

My guilt can wait for now because the two of them hugged me so tightly, as if they wanted to squeeze every bit of life out of me. My body was already aching, yet they clung to me like there was no tomorrow!  

"I was so scared, Taufan. I thought I was going to lose you again," Halilintar said.  

He held my hand so tightly. His hands were trembling, showing just how terrified he was at the thought of his brother dying. I don’t intend to die anytime soon, Halilintar. You can relax.  

Gempa didn’t say anything—he seemed content just hugging me at that moment.  

Ah, I didn’t even do anything, but why do I feel so guilty?  

Never mind. I’ll push aside my guilt for now. There are a few things I need to confirm.  

Maripos had explained what had happened. It wasn’t a very detailed explanation since he was just a servant. The information he could obtain was limited. That’s why I needed to ask Halilintar, who held the highest authority in Ignisia after the Prime Minister. He had to explain it to me—I would force him if he refused.  

"What happened? The people who attacked the palace that day—who were they, and what did they want?"  

I felt Gempa’s body tense up. He even tightened his embrace around me. It seemed that what had happened at the Main Palace still terrified him to this day. After all, he wasn’t at the Main Palace when the attack happened. I wasn’t sure when he received the information about my condition, but he must have been scared to death because of it.  

"We don’t know who they were either. Everyone we captured alive was found dead in their cells the next day. They all took poison hidden beneath their tongues. Their bodies were examined, but there were no markings or anything that could reveal their identities. We’ve already called in experts to handle the case. An attack that took place while the nobles were gathered—especially one that targeted the two princes—is considered a serious crime and an act of treason. We will use everything we have to find the perpetrators."  

I truly didn’t know what to say. I had thought that since Commander Kaika managed to capture some of them alive, we would at least learn who they were. But in the end, they took their own lives before they could be interrogated.  

Why didn’t I think of this? These were people who attacked the Main Palace during Blaze and Ice’s birthday party. They must have prepared themselves in case their plan failed. But then, what about the two princes who were the targets? Especially Ice, who fought alongside me.  

"How are Prince Blaze and Prince Ice? Are they alright?"  

I might have asked the wrong question. Halilintar tensed up the moment he heard his brothers’ names. He didn’t say anything—he just ruffled my hair and walked out of the room.  

What happened? Did something happen to them?  

"Gempa… what happened?" I asked the teenager who was still hugging me.  

Gempa didn’t answer right away. Instead, he buried his head in my neck and tightened his embrace. Why did it feel like both of them were trying to avoid answering my question?  

"Gempa?"  

"Brother… the atmosphere in the Sunrise Palace has gotten worse."  

"Why?"  

Gempa let out a deep sigh. He finally loosened his embrace around me—at last, I could breathe properly.

"Brother... I wasn't there when it happened. But when Blaze and Ice returned to the Sunrise Palace, they both looked terrified. They didn’t want to talk to me and just locked themselves in their rooms. Ice, especially—he's still locking himself in his room even now. Brother Halilintar also refused to explain anything when he came to the Sunrise Palace. He only checked on me and our two youngest brothers before returning to the Main Palace. Even so, I heard rumors spreading that Brother Halilintar and Blaze had a fight that night."  

I knew that Halilintar and Blaze had argued that night. Halilintar was so furious that the thunder wouldn't stop roaring. I remember clearly how loud the lightning strikes were before the Prime Minister intervened. If the Prime Minister hadn't arrived with Ice at that moment, I’m sure Halilintar and Blaze would have started fighting. I thought they had calmed themselves down by then. What could have frightened Blaze and Ice so much when they returned to the Sunrise Palace?  

"What kind of rumors?"  

Gempa bit his lower lip. He avoided my gaze. It was clear that he didn’t want to tell me what kind of rumors were spreading in the palace. But even if he refused to tell me, I could find out on my own.  

"People... they say... that you're the reason for the rift between Brother Halilintar and Blaze."  

Me? How am I involved in all of this?! All I’ve done for the past ten days is lie in bed!  

"That’s just nonsense from people who don’t know the truth. I’m angry, brother. So angry that they spread false rumors about you while you were fighting for your life. But there’s nothing I can do. Brother Halilintar and Blaze are growing more distant, Blaze’s uncontrollable anger, Brother Halilintar’s cold gaze toward Blaze, and so much more. I don’t know what to do, brother. I’m not sure I can do what you asked of me."  

This is the first time I’ve ever heard Gempa sound this hopeless. I’ve always seen him as mature and reliable. I’ve viewed him as Gempa, my younger brother, who has already stepped into adulthood. I also always thought he was strong simply because he had Oak as his spirit animal. I forgot that he’s still just a teenager. He’s only fifteen years old—he shouldn’t have to bear this kind of burden.  

Now, how do I comfort him?  

"Gempa," I gently touched his hand and gave him a small smile. "Everything will be okay. I’m here."  

I don’t know if my words comforted him or not, but after a brief silence, Gempa let out a small laugh. He held my hand in return. "Yeah. Everything will be okay. Thank you so much, brother."  

…

I asked Maripos to find out more about the rumors circulating in the Main Palace. I also requested Gopal’s help in gathering information about how the attack on the Main Palace was being reported to the public. I’m sure the entire kingdom of Ignisia knows about the attack by now, so I need more details on how the news is spreading.  

As for the rumors in the Main Palace, they revolve around the worsening relationship between Halilintar and Blaze. It’s said that Blaze hates his eldest brother and that Halilintar blames Blaze for my ten-day coma.  

Halilintar and Blaze’s relationship had already been strained ever since Taufan left for the Sunset Palace. Apparently, Blaze was quite close to Taufan, and his departure to the Sunset Palace created a rift between them. Not only that, but the relationships among all the princes gradually deteriorated after Taufan moved away. They became distant, though they still maintained their politeness as brothers.  

Things worsened when Halilintar issued a ban preventing anyone from visiting Taufan. None of their siblings were allowed to visit him at the Sunset Palace under the pretext of security.  

Perhaps, in Blaze’s eyes, Halilintar seemed to be trying to isolate Taufan from them. Rumor has it that Halilintar and Blaze had a serious argument about this. Then, Halilintar’s excessive concern for Taufan—at the expense of their other brothers—eventually led Blaze to resent Taufan. I suppose Blaze was angry at Halilintar for neglecting them in favor of Taufan. Over time, that anger was redirected toward Taufan, their estranged brother.  

And then there was the recent kidnapping incident involving Ice—which I just found out about now. Halilintar was supposed to be the one searching for Ice, but he chose to entrust the task to Commander Kaika and stay by my side instead. That happened when my condition suddenly worsened for no apparent reason.  

Now I understand why Blaze was so furious with me that night. Why he looked at me with such hatred, as if he wanted to burn me to ashes.  

To him, Halilintar must have seemed hypocritical for asking about Ice’s condition—especially since he did so while I was right there with them. I can’t tell what Blaze was thinking, but perhaps he was enraged at Halilintar for showing more concern for me—who seemed fine at the time—than for Ice, whose condition was quite dire.  

Even so, why is everyone blaming me for this? It’s not like I intended to cough up blood in front of everyone. It’s not like I meant to fall unconscious and end up in a coma for ten days! My only goal in attending that party was simple—I just wanted to establish connections with powerful nobles to support Halilintar. I never asked for people to attack the Main Palace.

All of this is really frustrating.  

"The only thing I did was sleep for ten days, and now my reputation has fallen even lower than I could have imagined. Amazing."  

I rubbed my face roughly, completely unsure of what to do now. Ever since I entered Taufan’s body, I never had any intention of clearing his name. When I formed a relationship with Vayuna, I knew that if I made it public, Taufan’s tarnished reputation could be restored. But I never wanted that. Besides, if Taufan really wanted his name cleared, I’m sure he could have done it himself without my help. So from the start, I only focused on making Halilintar king while struggling to survive in this fragile body that feels as weak as a twig. I just never expected Taufan’s reputation to worsen this much over a single banquet.  

I really should have just skipped the birthday party, like Taufan did.  

What’s done is done. I can’t turn back time to stop it from happening. It’s better to just accept it.  

"Your Highness, I’m sure Prince Halilintar and Prince Gempa will handle this matter. You don’t need to worry."  

I’m not exactly worried, just frustrated over something I have no control over. But I suppose it’s better not to say that out loud.  

I also asked Maripos about Blaze and Ice’s condition. According to him, neither of them suffered serious injuries—just exhaustion and a few scrapes from the attack. By now, their wounds have probably healed. But… Maripos couldn’t confirm if their mental state was intact after everything that happened. I doubt they’re okay.

Blaze has been taking his frustration out on his sparring partners more frequently, while Ice still refuses to leave his room.

I can understand Blaze, but I don’t understand Ice. Why does he keep isolating himself in his room? He’s such a mysterious child—it’s difficult to gather information about him.

When he appeared in the waiting room that time, it felt like I was facing a block of ice rather than a human. The aura around him was freezing, as if he had built a towering wall of ice to separate himself from everyone else. Maybe it was his way of protecting himself, considering how many people in the kingdom disliked him.  

Speaking of which, what was Ice even doing in the waiting room at that time?  

Did he want to see Halilintar? But Halilintar had already left before he entered, and he said he was going back to the ballroom to keep an eye on Blaze and Ice. Was he just looking for a place to rest? No, that doesn’t make sense. If he wanted to rest, why did he choose the same lounge I was in? Halilintar said there were several lounges available for nobles. Did he… come looking for me on purpose? Why?  

That kid barely said anything aside from chanting his technique—or whatever that was—and a simple sentence to wake me up when Halilintar was fighting those people. So why would he be looking for me? A shiver ran down my spine as I recalled his pale blue eyes, cold as the frozen poles. He truly lives up to his name.  

Who were those people, and why were they so determined to capture Ice? What did they want from him? Also, did Ice know them? He clung to my clothes so tightly when they appeared.  

Ugh, why do my problems keep piling up?  

Since the attack on the Main Palace happened while so many people were gathered there, the news spread rapidly. Based on the information Gopal provided me, certain groups have started inciting the public with false reports. If this isn’t contained soon, it could lead to chaos. There’s nothing I can do about this—I just hope Halilintar and the Prime Minister find a way to prevent the situation from spiraling out of control.  

"Your Highness, Doctor Theron has arrived."  

Maripos’s words cut through my train of thought. The young man opened the door for the elderly doctor, who was Taufan’s physician. I gave him a small wave and offered a friendly smile. He’s a kind man who has treated me like his own grandson. He has also remained loyal in caring for Taufan, even when it seemed like Taufan had lost the will to live.  

"Your Highness, I’m glad to see you looking much better."  

"My body still aches, especially my chest. But I’m much better now."  

Theron nodded. He began opening his bag and taking out various tools for the examination. Compared to Doctor Kién, who always looked like she wanted to eat me alive every time she checked on me, Theron was much more relaxed in doing his job. He even made lighthearted jokes to ease my tension. The difference between him and Doctor Kién was like night and day! Thank goodness he was Taufan’s personal doctor and not her.  

That woman is terrifying!  

"You’re in much better condition than before. The remnants of dark magic in your body are also gradually diminishing. High Priestess Aarav did an excellent job in purging the dark magic from your body."  

"Dark magic?"  

"Yes, Your Highness. The reason you fell into a coma and nearly died was because you were struck by dark magic. It’s truly fortunate that you held on until High Priestess Aarav arrived. Perhaps one of the reasons you survived was because Prince Halilintar managed to persuade the Prime Minister to open the teleportation gate to fetch Count Balakung and High Priestess Aarav immediately."  

Halilintar did that?  

What is the teleportation gate? That’s a portal used to transport someone from one location to another in an instant. However, due to its complex operation and the enormous costs required for its maintenance, it can’t be used freely. The teleportation gate is only activated in emergencies—such as during wartime to send reinforcements as quickly as possible. Even if you’re the king, you can’t use the teleportation gate carelessly.

Halilintar really did everything he could to save Taufan, huh?  

Ah, I also didn’t expect that I was actually attacked with dark magic.  

Aarav once explained to me that the blessings of the Gods and Goddesses are the highest form of power on this continent. The Gods and Goddesses are entities beyond human reach; they grant their blessings to chosen humans to aid mankind. Since these blessings come directly from the Gods and Goddesses, the powers bestowed upon their recipients are always accepted by nature. Take wind power, for example. Those blessed by the Goddess of Wind can easily control the wind around them to do whatever they wish.  

However, not all humans can receive blessings from the Gods and Goddesses. That is why magic came into existence.  

I don’t fully understand the concept of magic in this world, but essentially, magic is a power that any human can wield, even if they do not receive a blessing from the Gods and Goddesses. Magic users manipulate the elements around them to create something through the use of spells.  

Although similar, the two are fundamentally different. The blessings from the Gods and Goddesses require no spells or tools, whereas magic needs a medium for creation and channeling.  

Furthermore, magic is divided into regular magic and dark magic.  

Dark magic is extremely dangerous and goes against the natural order of the universe. It is a destructive force used for evil purposes. Most dark magic is obtained through the sacrifice of living beings, particularly humans. The worst example of this is necromancy.  

When I saw those two people, I only thought they were ordinary individuals seeking revenge or acting under orders to capture Ice—I never considered that they were dark magic users. They are incredibly dangerous. Perhaps the only reason I survived all of this is that those two were not experts in dark magic. If I had encountered true masters of dark magic, I’m certain Ice and I would be nothing more than names in history by now.  

Who exactly are they, and why are they after Ice?  

"High Priestess Aarav worked tirelessly to care for you while you were in a coma. She even returned to the Wind Goddess Temple to search for a way to wake you up. But fortunately, you have already regained consciousness, Your Highness."  

I suddenly felt guilty. I had troubled so many people and caused them so much worry. I hope I can do something to repay all the kindness they have shown me.  

"This is the prescription I recommend for your recovery, Your Highness. I have also written the same prescription to be given to Prince Halilintar," Theron said while handing a piece of paper to Maripos.  

"I hope you recover soon, Your Highness."  

Theron’s sincere words truly warmed my heart. Having someone who cares about you and wishes for your well-being is a comforting feeling. At the same time, I found myself thinking about Ice, who resides in the Sunrise Palace.  

His fate is somewhat similar to Taufan’s, but compared to Taufan, he is far more unfortunate. While Taufan is surrounded by people who care about him despite being exiled here, Ice lives in the Sunrise Palace, acting as if he doesn’t exist to avoid interacting with others. Halilintar is awkward around him, Duri and Solar are too afraid to approach him, and Gempa cannot always be by his side. He only has Blaze, but there’s not much Blaze can do.  

I wish I could visit the Sunrise Palace to check on him, but I know Halilintar would never allow me to leave until he’s sure I’m fully recovered. I’m also certain Halilintar would forbid me from meeting either of the middle twins, given how their relationship has worsened over time.  

For now, I should focus on recovering first. I really don’t want to live in pain anymore like before.  

...  

Vayuna has finally returned.  

After being gone for so long, that insolent bird has finally come back.  

I thought she had run away since there was no word from her for so long, but it turns out she remembered to return.  

What was the first thing she did when she saw me? She screeched loudly inside my head—as if she wanted to make my skull explode—demanding to know why I looked half-dead and had traces of dark magic in my body. She couldn’t stay quiet for long, making it difficult for me to explain my condition to her. I had to endure her piercing voice in my head for a full thirty minutes before she finally calmed down.  

It was absolute torture having her scream directly into my mind instead of using her mouth to speak. I couldn’t just cover my ears and pretend not to hear her. How unfortunate for me.  

Once she finally fell silent, I explained everything to Vayuna—about the attack on the Main Palace, the people who tried to kidnap Ice, and how I ended up being struck by dark magic and falling into a coma for ten whole days.  

"This is exactly why I told you I shouldn’t have left you! Look what happened to you while I was gone!! You’re so foolish that you couldn’t even protect yourself! I’m sure you were just slacking off while I wasn’t around and didn’t train your powers at all!"  

My head felt like it was going to burst from Vayuna’s loud voice. In her bird form, she kept circling me, pecking at me repeatedly while continuing to yell in my mind. Why is my spirit animal so noisy and cruel?!  

Gempa’s golden bear is calm and gentle—even though he’s terrifying—he’s still nice to hug.  

"Hey, I didn’t know this was going to happen! And I wasn’t slacking off. I trained diligently. Besides, why were you gone for so long?"  

"Tch, do you think entering the realm of the gods is easy? The realm of the gods is different from yours, humans. Entering it requires many conditions, not to mention the difference in time flow between that place and the human world."  

I don’t know if Vayuna was telling the truth or just making excuses to avoid blame. I chose not to argue with her about how long she took to return.  

Finally, Vayuna stopped pecking me and decided to shift into her humanoid form, sitting on my bed. His metallic blue wings flapped a few times, causing some feathers to fall onto my sheets.  

Sometimes, this bird really makes me want to pluck all her feathers out.

"What did you find after being gone for so long?"  

"The Goddess will speak to you."  

I was shocked to hear that. I never expected Vint would be willing to talk to me. I thought she would only send a message through Vayuna. But it turns out I can speak directly with Vint! This is a great opportunity! I can finally find out why I was sent to this world and by whom. I can also figure out how to return.  

"When? Where? How?"  

Vayuna snorted. I noticed a small movement in her wings, and my hands itched to touch them. Of course, I held myself back. Vayuna would scream at me if I touched her wings. She always said I ruined the feathers she spent all day grooming.  

"The Goddess said she will speak to you, so go to the temple for that."  

The temple? Do I have to travel to Mount Vintara again?  

Oh, dear!  

My previous journey to the Wind Goddess Temple wasn’t exactly pleasant. A week spent in a carriage or the forest, unable to bathe, eating animals hunted by soldiers. And on the way back, we took a longer route and were attacked by bandits. It was truly an unpleasant experience.  

"Can't it be somewhere else?"  

"Haven't I told you that divine entities are different from humans? Do you think just because they are gods, they can come and go as they please?"  

Um, yes? They’re gods, aren’t they? They have the power to bestow or take away blessings from humans. Didn’t history say that they once lived in the same world as humans? For example, Ignis and Vaser, who were constantly fighting and causing destruction everywhere. They even caused Ignisia to suffer a massive disaster hundreds of years ago because of their conflicts.  

"Sigh... I thought you would understand after everything I explained."  

You never explained anything about these gods!  

"Gods are not allowed to interfere with human affairs as they please. They also cannot just appear randomly in places where humans live. If they did, it would cause chaos."  

"Um... Ignis and Vaser?"  

Vayuna rolled her eyes. "Are you seriously comparing the graceful and noble Goddess Vint to those two barbaric gods?"  

I gasped softly. Vayuna was so casual in insulting two great gods! Was it because she was Vint’s first spirit animal that she dared to speak like this? Hopefully, those two gods never find out—otherwise, I might get dragged into trouble as well.  

"The point is, you now understand that gods cannot just descend to the human world whenever they wish. Their powers also get partially sealed to prevent them from causing havoc."  

I wanted to bring up Ignis and Vaser again, but Vayuna seemed to know what I was about to say. She looked irritated, and her wings flapped angrily. I swallowed my words. If I continued, she might never stop pecking me, so it was better to stay quiet.  

"The easiest place for them to appear is in the temples where they are worshipped."  

"So that’s why I have to go to the Wind Goddess Temple to speak with Vint? But her temple is so far away. I don’t want to take such a long journey."  

"Hah? Do you think the only temple of Goddess Vint is on Mount Vintara? That’s the main temple, but many smaller temples were built in her honor. You just need to go to the nearest one."  

Ah, I see. I really didn’t know there were other temples besides the one on Mount Vintara. The nearest temple, huh? Is there a Wind Goddess Temple in the capital? I need to find out. If I can locate the closest temple, I’ll also have to figure out how to get there. I’m sure Halilintar won’t allow me to leave the palace, even with a clear reason. I had a hard enough time convincing him when I wanted to attend the Layangara Ceremony.  

I might have to sneak out.  

The trip shouldn't take too long if the temple is in the capital. I could ask Captain Fang to accompany me and persuade Maripos and Gempa to distract Halilintar.  

Hopefully, speaking with the Goddess won’t take too long.  

...  

I woke up to an unbearable cold suddenly seeping into my room. At first, I thought my window had somehow opened, letting in the night wind, but that wasn’t the case. My window was still tightly shut, as was my door.  

This cold wasn’t natural.  

It was caused by someone.  

"Vayuna."  

"I know. I can sense someone’s presence, but I can’t pinpoint their location."  

What? Vayuna can’t detect their position?  

Could this be an assassin sent to kill Taufan?  

Could it be the same assassin who tried to kill Taufan before I entered his body?  

Did they come to finish the job?  

My blood ran cold. My heart pounded rapidly. My hands clenched tightly to stop them from trembling.  

Slowly, I climbed out of bed. Moving as quietly as possible, I pulled open the bottom drawer of my bedside table and took out the knife I had secretly taken from the kitchen.  

I made sure to stay hidden until Vayuna could confirm whether this person was truly a threat.

"How?"  

"Still not sure. They're everywhere, but they feel the same. Like one person, but also not."  

What? Why is this so confusing?!  

I couldn’t scream for the guards to enter my room. If I did, the intruder might escape, or worse, they might rush in and try to kill me. What should I do?  

"I will protect you, Taufan."  

Vayuna must have sensed my distress, which is why she tried to reassure me. I smiled faintly at her words. Right, I have Vayuna with me. She is my strong and reliable spirit animal.  

I did my best to stay hidden, avoiding the worst-case scenario. My body was tense with fear and nervousness. I kept reciting prayers in my heart, over and over. Whether they would be answered or not, I didn’t know.  

At times like this, when I only had myself to worry about, I was scared to death—so much so that I couldn’t even move my body properly. But when I was with Ice, all I ever thought about was how to protect Ice as best as I could, making me forget my own fear.  

Second by second passed, and the chilling cold remained. I shivered, not just out of fear but because the temperature kept dropping. I could even see my breath turning into mist—proof of how low the temperature had fallen.  

Then, my window swung open.  

A strong wind blew into my room, making the atmosphere even colder and more terrifying. I tightened my grip on the knife in my hand, and Vayuna remained on high alert. The room was pitch dark, the freezing air seemed determined to turn me into ice, and the fog seeping in further reduced my visibility.  

I unconsciously held my breath when I heard footsteps.

The intruder had entered my room.

They were in the same space as me now.

I remained hidden, silently hoping they wouldn’t discover my location. But if they did, I was prepared to strike suddenly while Vayuna held them off long enough for me to call the guards.

The footsteps drew closer.

My heartbeat pounded wildly in my chest as the person neared me. My hands trembled violently, no matter how hard I tried to steady them.

Am I going to die here?

No!

I must not die here!

Even if the Grim Reaper himself came to claim me tonight, I would kick him away and fight to stay alive.

I don’t want to die in this world.

When the footsteps finally stopped, I knew my hiding place had been found.

The intruder was aware of my location.

The knife in my hand felt heavy, but I refused to let go.

"Taufan, now!"

At Vayuna’s command, I leaped out from my hiding spot and attacked the intruder. They dodged my first strike, and instead of immediately launching a second, I chose to retreat. This person had evaded my surprise attack—they were skilled. I couldn’t afford to take reckless risks.

I might have to use my powers and ask Vayuna to strengthen them so I could fight properly.

As a whirlwind slowly formed around me, the fog that had obscured my vision started to dissipate. At that moment, I heard a voice—one that felt both unfamiliar and familiar at the same time.

"Brother."

"Ice?!"

Chapter Text

Boboiboy Fanfiction

©  Boboiboy | Animonsta Studio

A/N: The entire story is purely fictional, and the author does not profit from writing this story. If there are any similarities in ideas, character names, or locations, they are purely coincidental.

≫ ──── ≪•◦ ❈ ◦•≫ ──── ≪

"Ice?!"

I dropped the knife in my hand and rushed over to the teenager.

"Are you hurt? Did I hurt you?"

The poor lighting in this room made it hard for me to tell whether my attack had hit him or not. And Ice remained silent, saying nothing to help confirm my fears. God, what do I do? Did I hurt him? What should I do if I did? I don't know first aid for knife slashes. Should I call Maripos?

I shouldn't have acted so rashly. I should've made sure who it was before attacking like that. I hope Ice is okay and not injured.

The noise we made must have drawn the guard’s attention. I heard a knock on the door and the guard asking if I was alright. At that moment, I wanted to ask him to call Maripos, but Ice grabbed my sleeve and shook his head slightly. It seemed he didn’t want anyone else to know he was in this room. Though I was hesitant and worried, I chose not to reveal Ice’s presence. I told the guard that I was fine, that I had just woken up feeling thirsty. The guard asked if he should call Maripos, but I told him I could handle it myself.

Once I was sure the guard outside wouldn't bother us anymore, I took Ice’s hand and guided him to sit on the bed. In the dim light, I closed my open window, then searched for a candle and firestarter. Luckily, Maripos was considerate enough to place those items within my reach. He knew I often woke up in the early morning and liked to read something before going back to sleep. Too bad all of this wasn’t very practical. Should I ask Halilintar to buy one of those magical crystals that glow? They are expensive, and the maintenance costs are high, but if Halilintar was willing to spend so much money on Taufan’s medicine, he probably wouldn’t mind doing this either. I’ll talk to him about it when he visits.

Once the candle was lit, I hurried over to Ice, who was still sitting calmly on the bed. He’d been watching my every move since earlier, which honestly made me feel uncomfortable. I just pretended not to be affected by his stare. His gaze also felt familiar—was he the one watching me during the ball?

"Are you hurt, Your Highness? Could my attack earlier have hit you?"

Ice didn’t answer. He just kept his eyes on me. His face was expressionless, and his eyes revealed nothing. I couldn’t read his mind with such a blank expression. Even Captain Fang occasionally showed emotion in his eyes! He’s even started smiling more lately. But Ice… it felt like looking at a wooden doll, devoid of life or emotion.

"Prince, please say something. I can’t do anything if you don’t tell me whether I hurt you or not."

Still, Ice remained silent. I sighed as I faced him, "If Your Highness still refuses to say anything, I’ll call the doctor to examine you."

Ice stopped me when I tried to call the guard. This time, he didn’t look at me—he lowered his gaze to his lap. I waited for a while until finally, Ice spoke up, "There’s nothing."

His voice was so quiet I could barely hear it. Fortunately, the room was silent and there were only the two of us inside.

"Hm?"

"There’s… nothing hurt..."

Why did it feel like Ice was hesitant to say that? Was it because he was uncomfortable saying it to me? But he was the one who stopped me from calling Maripos or a doctor. He also came into my room in the middle of the night in such a frightening way.

"Really?"

"...Yes."

I let go of Ice’s hand that was still holding mine. I gently patted the back of his hand to comfort him. I walked to my study desk, grabbed a glass jar from the top, and returned to Ice. I knelt in front of the teenager, who was still lowering his head and staring at his hands in his lap. I placed the glass jar in Ice’s hands, and he instinctively gripped it tightly to keep it from falling. Only then did he finally look at me—not with that blank stare or by avoiding my gaze. He actually looked confused now.

I chuckled softly, "These are candies I made myself, Your Highness. Take one and eat it. I know you like sweet things."

Honestly, I wasn’t completely sure. But once again, I relied on the idea that Taufan’s brothers might share some similarities with my own. My younger brother, Ice, is someone who loves snacks. His room is filled with all sorts of treats, and his favorite are sweet things.

Ice still looked at me in confusion, but he eventually opened the jar I gave him, took a candy from inside, and ate it. I originally made those candies to mask the bitter taste of the medicines I have to take—even though the frequency of taking them has decreased a lot, the taste is still terrible, and I just can’t stand it. If Ice liked the candies, I’d gladly give them to him. A candy can always be made again easily, but cheering up a teenager like this isn’t something that can be done so casually.

"Do you feel better now?"

Ice only nodded. He hugged the jar I gave him so tightly, as if afraid someone would steal it from him.

Watching his actions felt like someone was squeezing my heart. Is this how he lives in the Sunrise Palace? Afraid of losing anything he owns?

I don’t know how he’s treated in the Sunrise Palace, but it probably isn’t kind. He surely doesn’t receive the same treatment Taufan gets here at the Sunset Palace. Maybe he often locks himself in his room to avoid those people. I know Blaze would try to defend and protect him, like he did at the ball, but Blaze can’t handle everything. He’s just a kid, and he’s one of the candidates to be the next king. It’s hard for him to focus solely on Ice.

"All of that is for you, okay? If it's not enough, just let me know. I still have some supplies left." I said, pointing to the two other jars on my study desk. Those two jars weren’t mine—they belonged to Duri and Solar, and I hadn’t sent them over yet. But I was sure they would understand if I told them I gave it to their quiet older brother.

Ice nodded at my words, still hugging the glass jar tightly. Even so, he looked much more relaxed than before. I decided to leave him be. I was curious about why he came all the way to the Sunset Palace in the middle of the night like this—especially since he came through my window, not the door. He must have snuck over from the Prince’s Palace to this place.

How did he even get here? The Sunrise Palace and the Sunset Palace are quite far apart. Even by horse-drawn carriage, it takes at least 10 minutes to get here. Did he walk? He must be crazy if he did. If he had Halilintar’s speed or Oak to ride like Gempa, maybe it wouldn’t be a problem. What a reckless kid.

But no matter how curious I was, if Ice didn’t want to talk about it, I wouldn’t force him. One of the worst things is being forced into saying something you don’t want to say.

I chose to read a book I hadn’t finished yet. I had a feeling this would take a while. Ice probably wouldn’t talk even if I forced him to, so I might as well wait until he decided to return to the Prince’s Palace.

I was so absorbed in my book that I didn’t notice when Ice, who had been sitting at the edge of the bed, ended up lying next to me. I only realized it when I felt his cold hand touch my cheek. His hand was so cold—like ice—that it startled me. I almost screamed from the shock, but thankfully, I managed to keep myself under control.

"What is it, Your Highness?"

Ice didn’t answer—not that I was surprised anymore. He just silently stared at me, his hand still on my face. It felt like my face could freeze from the coldness of his hand. I held his hand and moved it away from my face. "Does something hurt?"

Ice shook his head. He held my hand tightly and scooted closer to me. All of this he did without saying a single word. Did he want me to hug him? Um, Duri and Solar often fight to be hugged at bedtime. A few days ago, when I woke up, Gempa also wouldn’t stop hugging me. Maybe Ice wanted a hug like his brothers did. There’s no harm in hugging him, right?

I was hesitant, honestly, but I did it anyway. I put my book on the nightstand and adjusted my position so I could hug Ice. I was right—once I lay fully on the bed and hugged him, Ice pressed himself even closer to me. He hugged me so tightly, his hands clenching my clothes, and his arms and legs locking me in place.

Even though he’s just a teenager, his strength is unbelievable! I couldn’t turn over because he was holding onto me so tightly.

Well, in the end, Ice is just a teenager. He had just turned fourteen a few days ago—not a joyful birthday, if you ask me. He’s probably still shaken by the whole ordeal. Especially with the ongoing cold war between Halilintar and Blaze. Life is really tough for these princes.

Once I’m in a better condition, I need to make something for Taufan’s brothers and talk about Halilintar’s relationship with them.

"Don’t go." Ice tightened his grip on me. I looked down at him—his face was buried in my chest, but I could clearly hear the fear in his voice. I stroked Ice’s hair.
"I just want to blow out the candle."

"Mm."

"Go to sleep, Your Highness. I’m not going anywhere."

Ice didn’t respond, but I felt him nod. At least he wasn’t as demanding as Duri or Solar, who always wanted a bedtime story. Maybe it was because he was a lot older than the two of them.

…

It seemed that Ice returned to the Sunrise Palace early in the morning. When I woke up, he was no longer in bed. How did he get back to the Prince’s Palace? Did he walk again?

The glass jar I gave him last night was no longer in my room—he must have taken it with him. In its place, there was a small piece of paper on top of the book I had been reading. What was written on it was simple: just the words “Thank you” and a drawing of a snowflake. I assumed the thanks was for the jar of candy I had given him last night.

One more person to think about when making candy. At this rate, I might as well open a candy shop just for the princes of Ignisia.

"You’re already awake, Your Highness." Maripos sounded surprised as he entered the room.

"Yes, I woke up earlier today."

"Is your body alright?"

"It feels better than it did a few days ago."

"I’m glad to hear that, Your Highness. Should I call for Doctor Theron to check on you?"

I didn’t want to trouble that old man, but I suppose it would be better if he confirmed my condition. That way, I’d know how far along I am in my recovery. I also needed to plan for sneaking out and visiting the nearest Temple of the Wind Goddess. The sooner I know I’m healthy, the better.

"Yes. Please call him. Also, did you feel anything strange last night?"

"Strange? Like what, Your Highness? Did you perhaps feel unwell last night?"

I quickly shook my head. "No, no. I'm fine. Maybe I was just a bit dazed because I woke up thirsty."

I almost let it slip that Ice came to see me last night. Thankfully, Maripos accepted my excuse.

Theron arrived not long after. He said he no longer found any traces of dark magic in my body and declared I had fully recovered from it. However, he reminded me not to push myself too hard—which I couldn’t promise—and to get more rest. There were still some medications I needed to take afterward, but I didn’t plan to protest about that.

Since I was feeling much better and Vayuna had returned, I resumed my daily routine: sword training with Captain Fang in the morning, spending time with Gempa in the afternoon, enjoying peaceful evenings with Maripos, and practicing controlling my powers with Vayuna at night. It felt good to be active again.

Halilintar didn’t visit often, saying he was still investigating the attack on the Main Palace. It was quite a serious case. Three nobles were killed in the incident, and many others were injured. Not to mention the number of servants and guards who were also affected by the attack. If the palace didn’t take swift action to investigate the matter, the people of Ignisia would grow anxious, and chaos could break out.

All this made Halilintar’s already busy schedule even busier. I just hoped he was taking care of himself—not like when he was investigating Beruth's case.

To make up for his increasingly rare visits, Halilintar promised he would grant me anything I wanted. I asked him to buy a magic crystal so I wouldn’t have to fumble with candles every time I woke up in the middle of the night.

So, yeah, the device was now installed in my room, and I was currently learning how to operate it from Maripos. Since it was a magical item, its operation required magic. There was a sort of tool connected to the lamp, and it stored magical energy that powered the light. It worked kind of like a battery. Seeing it reminded me of a battery-powered flashlight.

When the magic runs out, a specialized mage has to be called to recharge it. Probably why maintenance costs were high.

Honestly, Halilintar wanted to install those devices all over the Sunset Palace, even more luxurious ones like those in the Main Palace, but I stopped him. He shouldn’t be wasting money so carelessly, prince or not. As I said, those things are very expensive—not to mention their upkeep. Just thinking about the money needed for all that gave me a headache. I'm not an accounting student, but I knew there would be a massive spike in expenses in the financial report if those crystals were installed throughout the Sunset Palace.

"Are you sure you only want a small one by your bed, Your Highness? Why not light the whole room?"

"I only asked for one that’s bright enough for reading at night. No need to waste money on anything else. The state’s funds don’t just come from trade—they also come from the people’s taxes. That money shouldn’t be used for the comfort of the leaders. It should be for the people." I said.

Maripos gave me a resigned smile. He probably knew I wouldn't change my mind no matter what he said.

When night came, I was genuinely excited to try out my new lamp. After months of relying on candlelight at night, I was thrilled to have a touch of modernity—though not as advanced as the world I came from.

The magic crystal was installed right next to my bed. Its light wasn’t too bright, but it was enough for reading. It felt like a nightlight. It reminded me of the nightlight I had as a kid. Since I shared a room with Halilintar, who was scared of ghosts, we had a nightlight so the room wouldn’t be completely dark at night and wouldn’t disturb others while sleeping. That lamp lasted quite a long time—it only broke when I was in my third year of high school.

I hoped this lamp would last long too, so the money spent on it wouldn’t go to waste.

While I was absorbed in my book, the same cold sensation from yesterday suddenly returned. I tensed up and glanced toward the window.

Was it Ice again, or someone else?

I reached for the knife hidden beneath my pillow, ready for an intruder. If it wasn’t Ice, then it was likely someone with bad intentions.

"Vayuna."

"Same as yesterday."

Ah, alright. Since Vayuna had confirmed it, I could breathe a little easier. I returned the knife to its place beneath my pillow and climbed out of bed. Honestly, I still questioned why Ice came all the way here, and at night, no less. Couldn’t he have come during the day? It would’ve been so much better if he came with Gempa during the daytime instead of sneaking around at night like this.

I opened my window and found a teenager hesitantly standing just outside it. Do the princes all share a hobby of sneaking in through windows? This was the second time I’d found one of them outside my window. First, it was Duri and Solar back at the Main Palace, and now it was Ice. I hoped Halilintar, Gempa, and Blaze didn’t have the same habit.

"Come in, Your Highness." I said, inviting the teen in.

Ice still looked unsure. His hands clenched and relaxed at his sides, and his eyes avoided mine. I gave a small smile.
"Come on in, Your Highness. It’s quite cold tonight, and my hands are starting to go numb from the cold."

It wasn’t good to lie, but I knew Ice would hesitate longer if I didn’t say that. Besides, the night wind was cold. I could freeze to death if Ice didn’t come in soon.

Ice glanced at my hands, a flash of guilt on his face, and finally stepped into the room. I closed the window after making sure no one saw him sneak in.

Even though he had been here yesterday, Ice still seemed awkward. He stood in the middle of the room, unsure of what to do. He was so different from Duri. That kid would immediately jump on the bed, mess up my painting tools, and then run through the halls with the servants chasing after him. Such an energetic child.

I still wondered why this teenager came to visit me at the Sunset Palace. Was he worried about his brother, who coughed up blood right in front of him? Well, it wasn’t a pleasant sight. But did he have to sneak in during the night like this? Not that asking would help—Ice wouldn’t open his mouth to answer. I wished there was someone I could ask, but that would mean telling someone that a little intruder had come to my room two nights in a row.

"I don’t have anything to offer at the moment. Even though I’d love to give you a cup of hot chocolate, Maripos would come into the room if I asked him, and I’m sure you don’t want that, right?"

Ice only shook his head. I wasn’t surprised anymore by his reaction. He didn’t like to talk—much like my own brother, Ice. In moments like this, it’s best not to force him. People like him speak when they want to. You just have to be patient and wait.

So, I returned to my bed, picking up the book I’d been reading. I had read a few pages when I suddenly realized Ice was still standing in the same spot. He hadn’t come to me like he did yesterday.

"Your Highness, it must be tiring to keep standing like that. Come here, lie down beside me."

Ice’s body language still looked uncertain, but he started walking toward the bed. He stopped right beside it, looking at me as if asking whether he was allowed to get on. I chuckled and patted the empty space beside me.

"Come on up."

In slow motion, Ice climbed onto the bed. He lay right beside me, though in a position that made me grimace in discomfort. He was lying stiffly on his back, staring at the ceiling, not even covering himself with a blanket. There was also some distance between us—unlike the night before when he had clung to me so closely. Why was this boy suddenly so hesitant?

I placed my book on the nightstand, deciding I would finish it the next afternoon. Tonight, it would be better to go to sleep early. I also turned off the lamp, letting the room fall into darkness.

Feeling around, I grabbed the blanket and covered both Ice and myself. I wanted to hug him, but there must have been a reason he kept his distance tonight. Maybe he didn’t want to be touched? So, I just lay silently by his side.

Several minutes passed, and I still couldn’t fall asleep. Should I go back to reading? No, no. If I did that, I might end up staying up all night with the book. Sleep was important—especially for a body as fragile as mine. But how was I supposed to fall asleep quickly? It was starting to get frustrating. I wanted to roll around on my big bed, but Ice was lying beside me.

"Your Highness, are you asleep?"

"...Not yet."

"Ah… alright."

So now what? Neither of us could sleep, but what were we supposed to do? Should I talk to him? But about what? Besides, Ice didn’t seem to like talking to me—though I still had no idea why he came to visit me two nights in a row. It was so awkward. I wished he had even a little bit of Duri or Solar’s personality, but that felt impossible.

Ah, this was going to be a long night.

Or so I thought—until Ice began to move, no longer frozen like before. He turned onto his side, and his hand reached out to hug me. He was more hesitant than yesterday. Tonight, Ice seemed uncertain about everything. I didn’t know what was going through his mind, and I couldn’t exactly ask. Not that he would answer me if I did, so it was better to let it go.

I turned on my side to face Ice, smiling a little when I saw the surprised look on his face in the dark.

"Do you want a hug?"

"...Yes."

What a sweet boy—though still too cold.

I pulled Ice closer, wrapping him tightly in my arms like the night before. His arms felt a bit hesitant at first, but once he hugged me, he held on tightly. I gently patted his back to lull him to sleep—it always worked well with Duri and Solar. It seemed to work for Ice too; not long after, his breathing became steadier, and a peaceful expression spread across his face. A sign that he had fallen asleep.

I smiled softly at him. For some reason, it felt like I had just put my baby brother to sleep. I guess I should go to sleep too.

The next morning, just like before, Ice was gone before I woke up. Either he didn’t want to be found by Maripos, or there was another reason.

I decided not to stress about Ice’s behavior. There were already too many things on my mind. Better to focus on planning how to sneak out of the Palace.

I knew I couldn’t sneak out on my own—I’d be caught in no time. Especially since I had no experience with sneaking around. I needed people who could help me pull this off.

Maripos and Captain Fang were definitely on that list. I knew Maripos would oppose a lot of things, but he was easier to persuade than Halilintar. I could even get Vayuna to speak up in support of my reason. Then I could ask Gempa for help, though I suspected convincing him would be just as difficult as convincing Halilintar. Still, I needed him on my side.

Gempa always visited the Sunset Palace, and I knew he always reported his visits to Halilintar. If I could get him to act like nothing was wrong, that would help me a lot. But how could I convince Gempa?

Ugh, this was complicated.

I spent the entire week thinking about my plan to sneak out and trying to gather information about the situation outside the Palace—I didn’t want to be ambushed the moment I stepped out.

Throughout the week, Ice kept coming to the Sunset Palace and sleeping beside me. He was still as cold as ever, but he no longer looked stiff or uncertain around me. In fact, sometimes I’d even find him already lying in my bed, reading my books. I didn’t understand that boy—but maybe the only person who could truly understand Ice was Blaze. The two of them were like two peas in a pod, from the same seed. As if they were once a single soul split into two different bodies. Gempa once said something similar, too.

"Your Highness, don’t you get in trouble for sneaking out like this every night?"

"...No."

Either this boy was lying or he was just incredibly good at sneaking around. In any case, I couldn’t let him keep coming to the Sunset Palace every single night only to leave before anyone woke up. Wasn’t he tired of going back and forth like that?

"This can’t keep going, Your Highness."

"What?"

"You can’t keep coming like this all the time."

It would be better if he came during the day or afternoon with Gempa. Even if he wanted to come alone, I would still welcome him with open arms—just like I was doing now.

Ice stayed quiet for a while. He stared at the ceiling, seemingly lost in thought. Then he turned to me, his face still expressionless, but I saw a hint of sadness in those usually cold eyes of his.

"Alright. I won’t come again. I’m sorry for bothering you."

"What? No. You misunderstood! I don’t mind your visits, but I’m worried about you."

"Worried about me?"

"Yes. You always come at night, sometimes close to midnight, then leave before sunrise. Isn’t that exhausting? You’re not getting proper rest."

"...I do rest properly."

"Liar."

Ice went silent. For some reason, his expression looked filled with guilt and fear. Like a child who just got scolded by a parent for doing something wrong. Oh no, don’t look at me like that! Now I feel bad about it.

"Your Highness, you’re free to come anytime you want. My door is always open for you—or my window—but I just want you to get enough rest. Come during the day."

I didn’t get a response from Ice. He turned away from me instead. It seemed like he was avoiding giving an answer. I wanted to know if I had said something wrong to make him act this way, but I chose not to ask.

All I could do was adjust the blanket we were sharing and wish him a good night.

…

There are three temples built for Vint in the Capital. One of them is located quite close to the Palace, and it is the largest among the three. Based on the information I received, that temple also has several priests assigned there to serve and assist people who come to pray. Meanwhile, the other two temples—similar to the small shrine in the middle of Fontis City’s lake—are mostly used for offering tributes to the Goddess.

The temple is called Samirana Temple.

That’s the place I intend to visit. Vayuna said it’s much closer and easier to access than the other two temples. Some of the priests there can also help in case something unwanted happens. If I remember correctly, the priests at the Wind Goddess Temple—the one I visited before—were very kind to me. They never looked down on me, in fact, I would say they respected Taufan greatly. I hope the priests at Samirana Temple are the same.

Now that I’ve decided on my destination, I just need to convince Maripos and Gempa to help me. Captain Fang will definitely accompany me without needing any persuasion—he’s a loyal guard. In return, I’ll buy him something during our little outing.

Convincing Maripos turned out to be much more complicated than I imagined. He simply couldn’t accept the idea of me leaving the palace without a full escort. He even refused to listen to my reasoning—or Vayuna’s.

"I object, Your Highness. No matter how hard you try, I will not agree."

"Maripos, come on. This is really important—Vint is calling me. I have to meet her."

"I understand that the Goddess wishes to meet with you, but what I do not understand is why you intend to go secretly. Why do you want to hide it from Prince Halilintar, Your Highness? You are not planning to go somewhere dangerous, are you?"

A dangerous place is the last thing I want to go to, Maripos. I value my life more than anything—first month in this world not included—and I’d make sure to kick the Grim Reaper’s ass if he dared approach me.

"Halilintar wouldn’t agree if I told him. You know about the recent attack on the Main Palace, right? He’s already busy dealing with that case."

"Exactly, Your Highness. You are clearly aware of the attack that occurred. You, if I may remind you, were involved in that attack. You fought those people, you were hit with dark magic and nearly died, and now you say you want to leave the palace with only one guard?"

Maripos’s voice rose slightly at the end, but he seemed to be trying to calm himself down. I saw him close his eyes and take several deep, rough breaths. I felt guilty for upsetting him like this. It’s not like I had any other choice. If I told Halilintar, he would absolutely say no. And even if he agreed, he would likely send dozens of Royal Guards to escort me. Not only would that make the citizens uncomfortable, it would also draw attention. People would know I was there at that time. Besides, the Royal Guards have more important tasks than simply escorting me to a temple.

I know Captain Fang is enough to accompany me. Besides, I’m not dumb enough to go out in my usual flashy appearance. I had asked Pavan and Gopal about the concealment magic they used when they entered the Sunset Palace, and they’d given me some advice and even sent me a potion to alter my appearance. At the very least, that should help me avoid being easily recognized.

More importantly, I really need to meet Vint. She must know why I came to this world—and how I can leave it.

I kept arguing with Maripos, trying to get him to help me, but he stood his ground. When he gets like this, I honestly feel like just running away. Unfortunately, I know better than to do that. If I run, Maripos will panic. He’ll go to the Main Palace and tell Halilintar. Then Halilintar will panic, and a massive search will begin to find me. Just thinking about that scenario gives me a headache.

I’ll give up for today. I’ll try to persuade Maripos again tomorrow. And if that fails, I’ll try again the day after. I’ll keep trying until he agrees to help me.

Chapter Text

Boboiboy Fanfiction

©  Boboiboy | Animonsta Studio

A/N: The entire story is purely fictional, and the author does not profit from writing this story. If there are any similarities in ideas, character names, or locations, they are purely coincidental.

≫ ──── ≪•◦ ❈ ◦•≫ ──── ≪

Why has Maripos become so difficult to persuade lately? It’s been nearly a week since I’ve tried to convince Maripos to help me, but he keeps refusing me over and over again. And now, it even feels like he’s avoiding me. Which is strange, because I know Maripos is the last person who would avoid Taufan.

Every time I try to talk about my plan to go to the Samirana Temple, Maripos changes the subject and sometimes even makes me forget what I was talking about in the first place. Sometimes he chooses not to respond to anything I say, pretending he didn’t hear me. At this point, I feel truly frustrated and just want to leave without telling anyone.

Maybe that’s what I should do.

I know the risks I have to bear are much greater, but I’ve run out of ideas on how to persuade Maripos.

“You seem distracted today, Your Highness,” said Captain Fang after I failed, once again, to avoid his strike.

He’s probably wondering why I’m acting like someone holding a training sword for the first time. When in fact, I had been making good progress until now.

“You’re right. I apologize, Captain.”

Captain Fang lowered his sword—a sign that he would not continue the training. I must have performed so poorly that he decided to stop the session entirely. Captain Fang approached me and took the sword from my hand. He was now holding two wooden swords.

“Would you like to take a break for a moment, Your Highness?”

“Hm? Yes, maybe a short rest would be nice.”

Captain Fang nodded. He walked to the side of the field, placed the wooden swords in their proper place, and sat on the wooden bench nearby. I followed him and sat beside him. Usually, Captain Fang would quickly stand and let me sit there alone, but perhaps he understood that I wasn’t in the mood for such formalities and stayed by my side this time.

“What’s troubling your mind, Your Highness?”

I felt touched by Captain Fang’s concern. Not to mention the fact that he had become more talkative out of worry for me. I could cry happy tears because of this.

“Eh... It’s just a small matter. You know I’ve been trying to convince Maripos to help me all week, right?”

“Yes, I’ve seen it often.”

Honestly, I felt a little embarrassed hearing Captain Fang say that, but that wasn’t the important thing now.

“I want to go to the Samirana Temple, but I don’t want to tell Prince Halilintar. He’s already busy investigating the attack on the Main Palace. If I tell him, he’ll end up paying more attention to me than the case he’s working on.”

Captain Fang nodded again—proof that he was listening. How nice it is to have a friend who’s willing to listen like this. I could cry tears of joy from how moved I feel, but I won’t, because I’m not a whiny little child.

“I wanted to ask for Maripos’s help to cover for me from Prince Halilintar. I know he always reports everything that happens to me to the Prince. Considering Prince Halilintar’s protective nature, I know he’ll send Commander Kaika and members of the Royal Guard to accompany me. I just want to visit a small temple on the outskirts of the Capital. It’s not even a journey to the temple on Mount Vintara or anything.”

Once again, Captain Fang nodded. It would be so nice if he could help me come up with a solution to the problem that’s haunted my thoughts this past week. But it seems Captain Fang is simply a good listener, not a good adviser. Of course, he’d be too perfect if he could give me good advice too.

“The point is, I might be too preoccupied with that issue, and it’s made me lose focus. Forgive me, Captain. I’ll try to be more serious in the next session.”

At that moment, I witnessed a rare sight that I will consider a miracle.

Captain Fang smiled!

Not just a small smile that could easily vanish, but he actually curved his lips into a clear smile across his face. Good heavens, has my guard always been this handsome?

“Captain, you should smile more often. You look handsome like that,” I said.

Captain Fang froze—maybe he had never received a compliment on his smile before. I chuckled softly, patted Captain Fang’s shoulder, and left the training grounds. I wanted to take a bath and go back to thinking of a way to charm Maripos.

...

Ice came again that night. For two weeks in a row, he had been doing this. I was genuinely worried he might get into trouble because of it. But every time I tried to advise him about it, he would just turn his face away and pretend not to hear a word I said. I gave up on trying to change his mind.

I really wanted to tell Halilintar, but Ice seemed to trust that I wouldn't tell anyone about his nighttime activities. I’m not cruel enough to break the trust that boy has given me.

At the very least, these past two weeks, I’ve made progress in the relationship between Taufan and Ice—though honestly, I don’t even know what kind of relationship they have, but I suspect they aren’t that close. I managed to engage Ice in longer conversations. I got him to talk about his days. It wasn’t easy, really. He’s been a quiet kid ever since I met him, but precisely because of that, he has a lot to say. I tried to coax him a little, and then he began to tell me a lot. At first, he looked scared after he finished speaking. As if he were afraid I’d scold him for talking too much. I’ve since managed to assure him that I didn’t mind whatever he wanted to talk about and would gladly listen.

Sure, Ice still hesitates when telling me things, but the last time I met him, he was even willing to start a conversation.

And that’s progress enough for me. It may seem like things are moving too fast, and I’m worried that one day, Ice might revert back to being withdrawn and quiet, but for now, I’ll keep trying to help him open up even more.

“…so I told Blaze he was an idiot.”

I chuckled. Most of the things Ice talked about were his twin brother, Blaze’s, silly antics. He rarely talked about himself. I’ve observed this over the past few nights. He only talks about himself if asked—and even then, just two or three sentences. After that, he goes back to talking about Blaze. Honestly, I’m a bit puzzled by this behavior, but I let him be. Maybe he still doesn’t feel comfortable talking about himself with me. I’ll wait patiently until he does. Besides, it’s fun learning about Blaze from him.

“Blaze is…” Ice’s words were cut off by a yawn, “…an idiot.”

I stroked his hair, pulled him close, and gently patted his back. “We should sleep, Your Highness. It’s getting late.”

“Mm.”

Ice is such a sweet and adorable little brother. Not quite as cute as Duri and Solar, who are still kids, but he has his own kind of charm. Not to mention his body feels cool to the touch when hugged—it’s like having an air conditioner in my room.

“Brother.”

“Hm?”

“…Um, the candy you gave me is almost gone. C-could I… have some more?”

Candy?

Oh! The one I gave him when he first snuck into my room?

No wonder he said it was almost gone—it didn’t have that many pieces when I gave it to him. I thought he would ask for more earlier, since his love for sweets would’ve made him finish them quickly. But it turns out he only asked after two weeks. Maybe he doesn’t like sweets that much, unlike my younger brothers?

“I-it’s fine if not. I-I don’t really need it…”

There was disappointment in his voice. I could feel his body tense slightly in my arms. He probably thought my silence meant I didn’t want to give him more, but that wasn’t the case. I was just thinking about what I should make for him. I hadn’t had time to make a new batch. I already sent Duri and Solar’s portions two days ago, so there was nothing left.

“It's okay, Your Highness. I’ll make more for you.”

“…Thank you.”

“Anytime, Your Highness.”

Ice finally fell sound asleep, while I lay awake thinking about what kind of candy I should make for these princes. If I only made candy for Ice, Duri and Solar would probably get jealous. Nothing good comes from those two youngest princes when they’re jealous. They once actually chased Gempa with arrows and spears just because he got biscuits before they did—I heard it from Gempa himself. But I also couldn’t give them more.

They’re only 9 years old, after all—eating too many sweets would just ruin their teeth. Not to mention the risk of other illnesses like diabetes. So no, I won’t be giving them any more sweets for the rest of this month.

Eh, but they don’t know I meet Ice every night. So it should be fine. Alright, I’ll make candy for Ice tomorrow. But tonight, I want a good night’s sleep.

The next morning, I woke up alone in my room, as usual. Ice always sneaks out before I wake up. The only proof he was with me last night was a piece of paper on the nightstand with a snowflake drawing.

Well, that’s nothing new.

Maybe because I was just thinking about making candy for Ice, I chose not to bother Maripos about my desire to go to the Samirana Temple. Of course, I still got suspicious looks from Maripos the whole time, but thankfully, he didn’t say anything about it.

At least today, I was more focused during my training and didn’t trouble Captain Fang.

After lunch, I finally went to the kitchen to make the candy for Ice like I promised. I thought about making something simple like Turkish Delight, or maybe I could try making ginger candy. I’d been meaning to try it for a while. Maybe it’s better if I make both and let Ice choose which one he wants.

Just thinking about the expression on that teenager’s face when he receives the candy makes me feel happy for some reason. Maybe because I really hope to see some emotion on Ice’s normally expressionless face. I giggled softly, imagining Ice’s surprised reaction to the candy I’d give him.

"What are you laughing at, Your Highness?"

"Ah! Nothing, I was just thinking about something pleasant."

"You seem to be in a good mood today."

"Let’s just say I am."

Maripos only gave a small smile. He helped take out the usual baking tools I used, while I turned to check the ingredients I needed. The ingredients delivered to the Palace kitchen were always of the highest quality. I was genuinely happy to cook with such top-notch ingredients. Once again, I had to thank Halilintar, who cared for Taufan so deeply that he paid attention to even these small details.

Just look at this big, high-quality ginger root. If my mother saw this, she’d probably cry tears of joy over such a large, aromatic, and premium ginger root.

After selecting the ginger I was going to use, I turned to the other ingredients. But unlike the ginger, which was still in abundant supply, the others weren’t. The lemon, cornstarch, and powdered sugar had all been used up in previous treats. The rest of the ingredients were also running low.

Does this mean I can only make ginger candy? What a shame—I had already planned to make two kinds.

"Is something the matter, Your Highness?"

"Some of the ingredients I want to use are gone, and the rest are nearly out."

"Ah, forgive me, Your Highness. It was my failure in properly managing supplies. I will have Ana and Papileon go buy more."

"Buy more? Where do you usually buy them?"

Maripos looked slightly confused but still answered my question, "At the market, Your Highness. The Head Chef at the Main Palace is one of my friends—he told me about some vendors who sell high-quality ingredients at reasonable prices."

"Oh? Is the location nearby?"

"Yes, it’s about a 30-minute ride by horse carriage, Your Highness."

As I was considering this, I noticed Maripos squinting at me. He looked like someone who suspected I was planning something. He wasn’t wrong—but that hurt my feelings.

"What are you planning, Your Highness?"

I pretended to be shocked and touched my chest dramatically, "Maripos! How cruel of you to think that way about me!"

Maripos didn’t look impressed. I couldn’t blame him, especially since I was planning something. I just laughed at his expression—it was genuinely fun to tease him like this.

"Whatever you’re thinking, Your Highness, I strongly advise against it."

"As if you know what I’m thinking."

Maripos snorted, "I can more or less guess, Your Highness."

It sounded like Maripos was exaggerating, but I knew full well he was serious. It felt like I couldn’t hide anything from him. It was impressive—but a little sad, too. Was I just a bad liar, or was Maripos simply that good?

"Come on, Maripos. I just want to go for a casual visit. Besides, we’re not even leaving the Capital, and I promise I’ll let Halilintar know."

Maripos seemed to consider my words. It was probably because I mentioned Halilintar.

"You are not planning this just to sneak off to the temple while we are at the market, are you?"

"What?! No!" No way! How did you read my mind, Maripos? Are you psychic or something?

Just like before, I got that look of disbelief from him. Even so, he didn’t continue the debate. Maybe because he saw that I was already starting to focus on making the candy.

Making ginger candy is quite simple—I only know my grandmother’s traditional recipe—and it doesn’t require many ingredients. All you need to do is peel the ginger, grind it—I'm using a grater, but you can finely chop it too—then boil it in two cups of water until only one cup remains. After that, strain the ginger decoction using a clean cloth. Boil the ginger extract again with sugar until it thickens. Don’t forget to add a squeeze of lemon and keep stirring to prevent burning. Make sure to use low heat.

Once it’s ready, pour the mixture onto a tray lined with parchment paper and let it cool. The mixture will solidify as it cools, and you can cut it into pieces of your preferred size. But before cutting, sprinkle some cornstarch over it to prevent sticking. And there you have it—ginger candy!

My grandmother would be proud to know I successfully recreated her ginger candy recipe… in another world.

...

"Your Highness, why are we here?"

"You mean, why did I bring you to the backyard instead of the usual garden?"

I didn't hear a direct answer from Captain Fang, but I knew that's what he was thinking. I huffed as I reached for another fruit from the tree I was currently climbing.

"Because, Captain... I want to eat this fruit again, and I don’t want to trouble anyone else to pick it for me."

"Why didn’t you ask me to get it, Your Highness? Why would you endanger yourself by climbing a tree like this?"

I tried to hold back my laughter—not wanting to draw anyone's attention to us—upon hearing Captain Fang’s words. Not because what he said was funny, but because he had been getting more talkative lately, and I found that rather amusing.

"Captain, you’ve become more talkative lately. That’s a good thing. And to answer your question, it’s simply because I wanted to."

I managed to grab another ripe fruit, looked down to check Captain Fang’s position, and tossed it to him. "Here, catch!"

Captain Fang caught the fruit with ease. Near him was a small basket already full of the fruits I’d picked. I figured that was enough. I climbed down from the tree. Captain Fang held the full basket as I put my socks and shoes back on. He shook his head and reached out to pull twigs and leaves from my hair.

"You should have ordered someone to pick them, Your Highness. Climbing such a tall tree is dangerous."

I laughed. "Don’t worry, Captain. I’m a climbing expert."

Captain Fang didn’t look impressed, but he didn’t say anything else. I took the basket from him and handed him a fruit as a reward for accompanying me. If I’d brought Maripos instead, he’d have gone hysterical the moment I started climbing. Speaking of Maripos, he was currently on his lunch break.

I could probably find him in the kitchen if I brought these fruits. I also needed to talk to him about my plan to go to the market to buy ingredients, and also to make a short visit to the Samirana Temple. Of course, I wanted to sneak out, but I knew that would be foolish. I was a stranger in this world—regardless of whether the body I inhabited belonged to a prince of this kingdom or not, I had no real knowledge of this world. I only knew the basics I’d learned from books and what others had told me. If I recklessly snuck out to a place I didn’t know, wouldn’t that be inviting danger?

I wasn’t the main character of a transmigration novel blessed with ridiculous plot armor and overpowered luck. In fact, judging by what happened when I first escaped from the Sunset Sun Palace, my luck must have been in the negatives.

So, as much as I disliked it and it went against my original plan, I promised Maripos I’d inform Halilintar about my desire to leave the palace briefly. I also promised to accept whatever arrangements Halilintar made—no matter how ridiculous. Better that than to keep postponing it.

I had already sent a letter to Halilintar, and now I was just waiting for his reply. But Halilintar’s response truly surprised me.

I thought he would send an entire squad led by Commander Kaika or someone else with a high rank to escort me. I didn’t expect him to send only Gempa. Literally just Gempa! No one else! No cavalry in full armor, no high-ranking officer, no backup hidden in the shadows. Just Gempa!

I had to check multiple times to make sure it was really just him and there weren’t any hidden troops somewhere.

"Are you alright, brother?"

"Uh… yeah. I just didn’t expect it to be only you. I thought… there would be more people." I gestured with my hands as I spoke.

Gempa chuckled softly. "I told Brother Halilintar to just send me. Leaving the palace with too many soldiers would only draw attention and make you an easy target—especially after what just happened."

Hearing Gempa’s explanation, I realized how ridiculous I’d been all this time—worrying over everything and planning for nothing. I should’ve just asked Gempa from the start to accompany me to the market; turns out, he could easily persuade Halilintar. My week-long effort to persuade Maripos was utterly pointless. My imaginary tears flowed freely.

In the end, it was just me, Gempa, Captain Fang, and Maripos who went out. Each of us used a disguise spell—similar to what Pavan used when entering the Sunset Palace—to conceal our identities. Maripos initially disagreed with this plan, but once Gempa explained the importance of disguises, he quickly agreed. Wow, Gempa’s influence is terrifying. Even my stubborn attendant gave in so easily.

We went out in a simple disguise—two young noblemen with a guard and a servant.

There were no drastic changes in Gempa and me. We just changed our eye and skin color. Our irises turned brown and our skin tanned. Captain Fang’s eyes were no longer red, but green.

The one who changed the most was Maripos. His shimmering silver hair had turned brown, and his lavender irises became a pale blue. I felt genuinely sad seeing the change in his hair. I truly loved that silver color—it was so beautiful. Especially when seen under the moonlight. His silver hair would glisten like strands of silver spun from moonlight itself.

“Maripos, never dye your hair,” I said sadly. I couldn't bear the thought of losing his beautiful silver hair.

Though he looked confused, Maripos still nodded in agreement.

We left using a simple horse-drawn carriage. Completely modest, without any trace of Halilintar’s usual lavish touches. Again, that was Gempa’s influence. Should I start learning from him?

Gempa seemed used to sneaking out of the palace unnoticed. He arranged for our carriage to leave along with those of the merchants delivering supplies to the palace kitchen today—blending in, as if we were part of the trading convoy. He even had a detailed route planned to separate from the merchants afterward. I was honestly amazed by how meticulous he was.

“There’s always someone watching who comes and goes from the palace. Since you don’t want anyone knowing we’ve left, this is the best way to avoid suspicion.”

Gempa was right. Palace life could never be free from scrutiny. Ah, I really missed life back on Earth—living without constant surveillance and being free to go wherever I wanted. Here, I felt like I was walking on eggshells. One wrong move, and I could fall without anyone able to catch me.

It was a truly heavy life.

But let’s put that aside for now—we had arrived at the market.

The capital city of Ignisia, is Catalina. A bustling place, full of all kinds of people with all kinds of business. People were running back and forth, horse-drawn carriages passing by, vendors shouting out to sell their goods, and children playing carelessly amidst the chaos. The Tarín City, which I once thought was busy, was nothing compared to Catalina. This place truly deserved its title as the capital of a great and powerful kingdom.

“You’re surprised by how much it's changed, aren’t you?” Gempa asked.

“Huh? Y-Yeah… there’s a lot that’s changed.”

I didn’t even know what changes he was talking about! When we passed through here on the way to Mount Vintara, I hadn’t paid much attention—too nervous about my first trip. And on the way back, I was more focused on Ace, who was riding the same horse as Halilintar.

This was my first time really observing Catalina, the capital of Ignisia, up close.

“Come on, Brother.”

Gempa led me to the market—the busiest, most crowded part of Catalina. I saw street performers putting on shows; I wanted to watch them, but time was short, and I knew lingering there would only be a waste.

Wow, there were so many things for sale here. Tarín had already seemed busy with plenty of merchants, but I didn’t expect Catalina to have even more! I saw fruit vendors, gem traders, meat sellers, and vendors with fresh vegetables. There were also various shops with eye-catching signs. Gempa pointed out weapon shops, clothing stores, shoe stores, and many more. It felt like I had stepped into another world. Oh wait, this is another world.

“What would you like to buy, Young Master?” I heard Maripos whisper behind me, snapping me back to reality. Right! I came here to buy ingredients for my cakes. Gosh, how easily I got distracted by trivial things.

Alright, time to focus on my goal.

Maripos led me to a stall selling fresh fruit. He said the vendor was the usual supplier of fruit for the Sunset Palace, so the quality was guaranteed.

I trusted Maripos’s judgment—he had been handling these things far longer than I had. Of course he knew better than me. We continued on like that: Maripos pointed me to the place, I chose what I wanted, he spoke to the vendor, and then paid them accordingly.

It didn’t feel like we’d been in the market long, yet the bamboo basket in Maripos’s hands was already full of various things. I offered to carry some, but he refused. So I pretended I was tired and needed to rest for a bit. No one objected—in fact, all three of them looked worried about me. Did I seem that weak to the three of them? Ouch, that kind of hurt.

While sitting on a park bench, waiting for Captain Fang and Maripos to return with whatever Gempa had asked them to buy, I began observing my surroundings. The sun was quite bright overhead, but the soft breeze blowing through made things more bearable. How nice it was to be out like this—especially without anyone recognizing me. No wonder so many celebrities hide their faces when they go out in public.

“Are you happy, Brother?”

“Hm? Yeah… I’m quite happy to be out and about without heavy security.”

Gempa smiled, turning his gaze to a group of children playing with kites. How full of energy they were—it reminded me of my own childhood. I used to love flying kites, too. It was so much fun running across the field with my friends, flying our kites high into the sky. Ah, what a wave of nostalgia.

"In the Capital, many people will recognize us, but if we go to the outskirts, only a few will know who we are. There, we'll be treated like ordinary people. Not as Princes. An old man will shout at us and ask us to lift wood, a middle-aged woman will laugh and tease us, trying to match us with her daughter, and strong young men will throw their arms around us without fear and invite us to enter the forest and hunt together."

Was Gempa talking about his experience during his trip to the Eastern Border of Ignisia? His story didn’t sound particularly thrilling, but Gempa looked so happy while telling it. He enjoyed his adventure, didn’t he?

I touched Gempa’s hand, and the boy turned to me with a questioning look.

"I bet it’s really nice to live a simple life like that."

"Yes, it must be." Gempa’s smile looked so sincere. He now held my hand and gently stroked it, "I want to live with you in a village far from the Palace. I’ll take good care of you."

I chuckled softly, "Just the two of us? What about Halilintar and the others?"

"As much as I want them to come with us, I doubt they’d want to live such a modest life."

Oh, maybe it’s because the other five princes have never gone on trips like Gempa has? I asked Gempa again, but he didn’t answer. He just gave me a quick smile and turned his attention back to the children, who were now arguing about something.

Not long after, Maripos and Captain Fang returned. Captain Fang was carrying a rather large watermelon while Maripos looked proud as I glanced at the fruit. He laughed and patted the watermelon, "I found the perfect fruit for a hot day like this."

I couldn’t help but laugh with him. I had once told Maripos that if I ever went out wandering somewhere on a hot day, I would want to eat watermelon. Don’t tell me he remembered that and actually searched for one at the market. I hadn’t seen anyone selling watermelon earlier—where did he find it?

"How do we cut it? We can’t use a sword."

Maripos gave a mischievous smile and pulled a dagger from beneath his clothes, "Leave it to me, Young Master."

I laughed again. Maripos took the watermelon and walked over to the well nearby with Captain Fang. Captain Fang drew water from the well to wash the watermelon and the dagger Maripos had taken out earlier. As I focused on watching them, I heard a soft snort beside me. Gempa was trying to hold in his laughter, his shoulders trembling and a smile spread across his face. His hand was still gently holding mine, and I gave it a slight squeeze to get his attention. He looked at me, and then we both laughed together.

A beautiful day for me.

…

The Samirana Temple isn’t much different from the Wind Goddess Temple on Mount Vintara. Of course, the Samirana Temple is much smaller than the one on Mount Vintara, but I’d still call it a grand temple.

How did I end up here?

It was quite simple.

As we were about to return to the Palace, a young girl in a brown cloak suddenly approached us and said I had to follow her. Gempa, Maripos, and Captain Fang immediately became alert, especially because the girl seemed to know who we were. I thought she might be like the people who attacked me at the Palace, or the ones who attacked me in Fontis City—but then Vayuna cried out in my head that she wasn’t dangerous. She said the girl was one of the young priestess candidates of Vint.

With Vayuna’s confirmation, I asked the girl what her purpose was. She said she had been ordered to guide me to the Samirana Temple to answer the calls from Vint.

And so, here I am, at the Samirana Temple.

The temple has white marble floors, tall pillars also made of white marble, shimmering in the light. The ceiling is open, allowing anyone to see the sky above. At the center of the temple, there is a statue of a beautiful woman—I knew this was a statue of Vint.

I didn’t think I would visit this place today, but I was wrong. I had planned so many things, but once again, it all ended in vain. Maybe I should stop making plans. It seems like none of them ever work out the way I expect.

An old man, surely older than Theron, welcomed me when we arrived at the temple. He’s the Priest of this Temple. He introduced himself as Anvindr and asked me to just call him by his name—which I couldn't bring myself to do. He looked at me with shining eyes, as if he were looking at the Goddess herself.

It seems Aarav was right—priests at the Wind Goddess Temple still respect Taufan. Unlike most of Ignisia’s people who look down on him, the priests of Vint admire and honor him. They are people who don’t care about the politics of the kingdom; they only care that the Goddess they worship and believe in has shown interest in the Second Prince of Ignisia. Now their respect and admiration for me has only grown after learning that I was summoned by Vint.

Anvindr said he had been waiting for my arrival ever since Vint spoke to him during prayer. He’s also the one who instructed the girl to come fetch me—once again, Vint had told him exactly where I was and what I looked like at that moment. Wow. I thought I was the only one eager to speak to Vint, but it turns out the Goddess herself was impatient to see me too.

And that’s what brought me here, standing before the statue of the woman I know is a Goddess in this world.

I’m all alone in the main hall of the Samirana Temple. No one is with me—Anvindr forbade anyone from entering, saying that a summons from the Goddess is sacred and that no one without purpose should approach.

I don’t know what I’m supposed to do. Vayuna hasn’t responded to my call since earlier. Either she’s pretending not to hear me, or she truly can’t hear me. It’s strange, since Vayuna has never failed to answer when I called. I’ve also felt odd ever since entering this main hall. It’s as if I’ve been cut off from the outside world, though I know I’m still in the temple. I can still see birds flying across the open ceiling above me.

"Taufan."

I felt my hair stand on end as I heard that whisper. Being alone in this room and suddenly hearing a whisper calling your name is truly unsettling. Could it be that the one who wanted to meet me wasn’t a goddess, but a vengeful female ghost?

Suddenly, a breeze blew through the room—gentle at first, but gradually growing stronger. The wind extinguished the candles that had been burning, blew away the offerings placed in front of Vint’s statue, made the bells in the room ring wildly, and above all, made me even more terrified.

Did I accidentally anger Vint? Could it be because I called her a ghost? But I only said it in my mind! Can she read my thoughts?!

I ran to the door, trying to open it. But it wouldn’t budge, firmly locked. I began pounding on it, hoping someone would hear me and open the door. No one came. The wind grew stronger and stronger. A massive whirlwind formed in the room. I thought I was done for. Dying because of a whirlwind doesn’t sound too ridiculous, but it’s still not a great way to go.

“Taufan.”

That whisper again. Louder than before. At this point, I didn’t even know whether I should panic because the voice returned or continue panicking because of the enormous whirlwind right in front of me.

Just as I thought I was going to die here, the whirlwind suddenly stopped. It disappeared as if it had never existed. The items in the temple were arranged neatly once again, the candles had relit themselves, and the bells that had been shaking were now still. It was as if there had never been a whirlwind at all. I’d think I had gone mad and was hallucinating, but I was sure of what I’d seen.

“Taufan.”

I instinctively turned toward the voice. I saw a silver-haired woman with eyes as blue as gemstones. Her long hair swayed around her as if being played with by a gentle breeze. She wore a long, translucent dress with a very open top. I immediately looked away, my face burning.

I heard her soft laughter, which only made me more embarrassed for having stared at her.

“Turn to me, Taufan.”

Hesitantly, I turned my gaze back to her. She was still wearing the same dress, but now the top part was properly covered. I let out a breath of relief without realizing it. Once again, she laughed—definitely because of how I acted.

“Do you recognize me, Taufan?”

I’m sorry I called you a ghost earlier, but yes, I recognize you. Very well, in fact. There’s a two-meter-tall statue of you right in front of me with your face on it. Not to mention your dramatic entrance. So, yes, I recognize you.

I wanted to say that, but I didn’t dare. All I did was nod in response to her question. The woman—Vint, yes, the Wind Goddess herself was in front of me—smiled and reached out her hand to me.

I didn’t understand, but I stepped closer to her, albeit reluctantly. Her hand remained outstretched, and hesitantly, I placed mine in hers. She held it gently—her touch felt so soft, almost unreal. Like I was touching a cloud. Then, with a wave of her free hand, the room around us began to fade and disappear. I couldn’t see anything around me anymore. Everything was white, with no end in sight.

“There’s a lot I’m sure you want to ask me,” she said, “but my time in the human world is very limited.”

I didn’t say anything in response—mainly because I didn’t know what to say. Vint must have understood, because she smiled at me.

“Besides,” she continued, “there’s someone who wants to meet you.”

“Me? But… who?”

“That one.” Vint pointed to a blue butterfly that had somehow appeared. Until now, I was sure it had just been the two of us.

What did Vint mean? Why would a butterfly want to meet me? She let go of my hand, letting me float in this strange white space with the butterfly flying around me. I was confused, yet somehow calm as I watched it. The butterfly landed on my finger when I reached out to it. It had beautifully blue wings and gave off a sparkling, fairy-dust-like shimmer as it fluttered. Was this butterfly some sort of spirit animal like Vayuna?

“What—” I tried to ask Vint about the butterfly, but she was already gone. Now, it was just me and the butterfly in this strange place. I thought I’d panic being left here without knowing how to leave, but surprisingly, I remained calm. Instead, I was more curious about why this butterfly had come to find me.

I flinched when I felt a touch on my cheek, like a pair of hands now cupping my face and lifting it so I would look up. And that’s when I saw them. A pair of eyes, blue and gleaming like precious gems. Eyes I had seen for months now.

The same eyes that belonged to the body I now inhabited.

The eyes of Taufan von Ignisia, Second Prince of Ignisia.

“Hello, Taufan.”

Chapter Text

Boboiboy Fanfiction

©  Boboiboy | Animonsta Studio

A/N: The entire story is purely fictional, and the author does not profit from writing this story. If there are any similarities in ideas, character names, or locations, they are purely coincidental.

≫ ──── ≪•◦ ❈ ◦•≫ ──── ≪

Taufan.

Taufan von Ignisia.

The Second Prince of Ignisia.

The true younger brother of Halilintar.

The original owner of the body I currently inhabit.

The person before me is truly him.

Not just a reflection in the mirror that I’ve seen every day since I woke up in this world. He is the real Taufan.

I don’t know what I should do or say upon seeing him. It feels strange to meet the original owner of the body you've lived in for months. The person who was supposed to live the life of the Second Prince of Ignisia.

He smiled at me. But my heart ached when I saw that smile.

Only now do I notice his figure more closely. We look so similar, yet so different at the same time. He is the real Taufan, the true owner of this body, but he looks thinner. Far thinner than when I first woke up in his body. His skin is so pale, there are deep bags under his eyes, his cheeks are sunken, his cheekbones prominent, and his lips are chapped and pale. And then his eyes...

Even though his eyes are gem-like blue, they no longer shine. That blue iris looks dull, like an old gem left in dust and grime. His smile seems fake. A tired smile worn only from muscle memory.

His eyes reflect the same exhaustion as his smile. He looks so tired and sad. The Taufan before me has lost all the light from within him.

I opened my mouth but closed it again, unsure of what to say to him. Should I ask if he was the one who brought me to this world? Or should I ask if he’s okay? Either question feels wrong to ask.

He reached out his hand to me, and I took it hesitantly.

Did he come to take his body back? Or did he want to ask what I’ve been doing with his body all this time?

But it was neither of those things. Instead, while holding my hand, he pulled me to walk somewhere unknown. His steps were steady, full of conviction, and not once did he look back at me. Meanwhile, I could only follow him obediently. Not only because I didn’t know what he was thinking, but also because we were still in a white, endless room.

Then, slowly, things began to appear in the white space. I saw purple flower petals blown by the wind, then gradually the tree from which the petals came appeared, followed by a gentle breeze against my skin, the warm sunlight kissing my skin, and the floral scent in the air. Suddenly, I was standing beneath a tree blooming with purple flowers along its branches.

I turned to Taufan, wanting to ask where we were and why we were here, but Taufan’s gaze was fixed on something else. He didn’t once look at me, even though he still held my hand.

I followed his gaze and saw a little boy, perhaps five years old, right in front of us. His cheeks were plump with baby fat, his skin soft-looking, and his hair jet-black. Still, I recognized the boy. No matter what age, I would always recognize him.

He was Halilintar.

Perhaps this was Halilintar in his childhood. I never expected that the hot-headed young man could look this adorable as a child.

“Taufan, come down. Brother is here,” he called out.

That’s when I realized he wasn’t alone here. There was someone else, too.

I turned my eyes toward the tree and saw another little boy up in it. He looked even younger than little Halilintar, smaller too, but somehow he had managed to climb a tree several times his size. Are kids really that agile? Seriously, how did that kid get up there?

And if I go by Halilintar’s words, the boy up in the tree is Taufan. The real Taufan as a child.

I glanced at the original Taufan beside me, and his gaze never left little Halilintar, who kept trying to get his brother to come down. He had no interest in his younger self in the tree. He only looked at Halilintar with longing and regret. I could even see pain in his eyes.

This... this entire situation... could it be that I’m inside Taufan’s memories?

“Taufan!”

I looked back at Halilintar. I saw little Halilintar running with outstretched arms to catch his brother who was falling from the tree—or rather, who seemed to have jumped down on purpose. I saw a small whirlwind slow Taufan’s descent, preventing him from hitting the ground immediately and instead letting him land safely in his brother’s arms. The whirlwind vanished as soon as Halilintar held his brother.

No wonder Taufan was called a genius. He clearly could control his powers well, even at such a young age. Not once did he lose control over the wind that held him, and he could dispel it with just a wave of his tiny hand. And he was only... what, around 3 years old at this point?

Damn, he’s even more incredible than I imagined.

“Brother.” Little Taufan said, placing his tiny hand on Halilintar’s cheek, patting it repeatedly until it turned red. Little Halilintar looked a bit annoyed and pulled Taufan’s hand away from his face. But then he pressed his forehead against Taufan’s and whispered, “Yes, it’s me, your brother.”

That’s when I realized. All of this truly is a memory belonging to the original Taufan.

...

Taufan was still holding my hand as we continued walking. This time, he led me into a palace. I didn’t recognize this palace. It was different from the Sunset Sun Palace I had lived in for months or the Main Palace I had visited a few times. This one was entirely unfamiliar to me. I assumed it was the Sunrise Palace, the one where the princes resided.

We walked through quiet hallways. Taufan walked in silence, and I simply followed him.

"Where are we going?"

Taufan stopped walking, turned to me, then used his free hand to point at a door to our right.

I was confused, and Taufan didn’t explain anything. Instead, he simply pushed the door open. The room behind it was a bedroom with a large canopy bed in blue and a big window leading to a balcony. A blue rug similar to the one in Taufan’s room hung on the wall, a crystal lamp—magical crystal—hung from the ceiling, and in the corner stood a bookshelf alongside a study desk piled with books and papers.

“No, please save me!”

“I’ll save you, brother!”

I turned toward the source of the voice. In a corner of the room I hadn’t noticed before, there were two little boys. One held a toy sword made of wood, while the other was lying dramatically on the floor, as if he had just been struck by something.

“Save me, Prince Gempa,” said the boy lying on the floor. Meanwhile, the boy with the toy sword began swinging it around to fight their imaginary enemies.

I stood silently, observing their play. Their shouts and laughter echoed clearly. The childish voices and their giggles. There was nothing strange about the scene in front of me. Taufan playing with his little brother, Gempa. Once they were tired, they fell asleep on the floor together, holding hands.

Taufan tugged my hand again, leading me out of the room. Leaving the two boys who had fallen asleep behind. I had no idea where he was taking me next.

This time, we were in what looked like a training field. I had heard the sounds of clashing even before we reached this place. In the field, people were engaged in a match.

Looking more closely, one of them was Taufan. He was easy to recognize, especially as he stood in the air as if on solid ground.

Flashes of lightning struck toward him repeatedly, but Taufan didn’t seem fazed. Instead, he laughed and dodged them all. I even saw him somersault and spin to avoid the incoming attacks. He looked more like he was performing acrobatics than actually dueling. I couldn’t take my eyes off his agility.

When his feet finally touched the ground, I turned my gaze to his opponent. A boy who looked older than Taufan. It was young Halilintar. He looked much older than when Taufan first showed me his memory, probably around eight or nine years old.

“That’s cheating, Taufan! You’re in the air while I’m on the ground.”

Young Taufan stuck out his tongue. “You never said I couldn’t do that.”

Young Halilintar grumbled. He didn’t refute his younger brother’s words, but I was sure he was frustrated because he couldn’t beat him. Was this what Duri meant when he said Taufan never lost to Halilintar in a duel?

Then I heard a shrill cheer from a young child. Following the voice, I saw a little boy no older than four standing at the edge of the training field, jumping up and down, waving his hands excitedly. Then he started running toward the two boys who had been dueling. He almost fell, but Halilintar moved quickly to steady him before he hit the ground.

“You shouldn’t run like that, Aze,” young Halilintar said.

The little boy named Aze laughed. He let Halilintar carry him, but his small hand pointed at young Taufan, still standing in the middle of the field. Halilintar looked resigned and carried the boy over to Taufan. As soon as they were close, Aze squirmed and jumped down from Halilintar’s arms. He ran straight to Taufan and hugged his waist.

“You’re so cool, brother. I want to be as cool as you!”

Taufan’s response was a laugh as he ruffled the little boy’s hair. “I can’t wait for that, my little brother.”

I was still closely observing the three boys when Taufan pulled my hand again, leading me elsewhere. We were walking through the palace corridors again, but this time we passed by the bedroom where I had seen young Taufan and Gempa playing. Taufan kept walking until he stopped in front of a door quite far from the previous room. Just like before, he pushed the door open and tugged me inside with him.

The room was dark. It seemed we were in the nighttime portion of this memory. Only one candle was lit in the room, placed in a corner where two children sat. I stepped closer to identify the two, and Taufan allowed me to approach them without letting go of my hand.

“Am I a monster?” the younger boy asked.

“Ice, look at me,” said the other, reaching out to touch the younger boy’s face, making him look at him. I gasped as the boy lifted his face—he had those familiar pale blue eyes, glowing. Just like when I first met Ice in the lounge. They were young Ice and young Taufan.

“You’re my brother.”

“But everyone is scared when they see my eyes!”

“Hmph! That’s just because they don’t know how beautiful your eyes are.”

Young Taufan wiped the tear tracks on young Ice’s cheeks, pressed his forehead to Ice’s, and from his fingers, I saw a faint blue glow as a soft breeze began to blow gently. Enveloping both boys in a bubble of comfort they created together.

"You’re not a monster. You have a pair of beautiful and enchanting eyes. You are my little brother, you will always be my little brother, and I am your big brother. You know what I’m saying is the truth, right?"

Young Ice touched young Taufan’s hand and smiled brightly. “Yes! Big brother always tells me the truth.”

Ice… he could smile that wide, huh.

I had never seen him smile that broadly. His face was mostly blank, making you feel like you were talking to a block of ice rather than a human being. There were only rare moments when I’d seen him smile, and even then, it was just a thin smile that faded quickly. But here, right now, in this dark room lit only by candlelight, Ice smiled freely at his brother without a care.

I hadn’t lost sight of little Ice’s smile when Taufan pulled me away again. This time, he took me to a garden, where three boys were sitting on a bench. The oldest sat between the two younger ones. He had a book on his lap, while the two toddlers leaned against him.

Young Taufan, little Duri, and little Solar.

I guessed Taufan was around eight or nine years old here.

“Look at this. This is an Ilex berry. It’s very poisonous—you must never eat it, okay?”

The two toddlers looked at him. I was sure they didn’t understand what he was saying. But they must have known that their brother only ever said good things, because both of them laughed as they stared at him.

Young Taufan turned another page of the book on his lap. Little Duri slapped at the book, while little Solar stared intently at the picture inside. Young Taufan, even though overwhelmed trying to stop Duri from chewing on paper and balancing both the book and Solar, laughed joyfully with his youngest brothers.

I couldn’t help but glance at the Taufan beside me, then back at the little Taufan in front of us.

The contrast was striking. Little Taufan looked so happy, so full of life. While the Taufan beside me looked like a walking corpse—like someone who had been through so much that he couldn’t hold on anymore. He looked so weak and fragile.

Then the entire scene vanished. We were back in the endless white room. Taufan was still holding my hand—for some reason.

“Why are you showing me all this? What do you want from me?”

Taufan didn’t answer. He smiled again. Just like before, his smile pained me. Whether it was because I was in his body and could feel his pain, or because my empathy was too high and I could feel others’ pain too deeply—either way, I still had no clarity about my current state.

“Was it you who brought me here? Why? Why me? How do I get back?” I kept asking even though Taufan wasn’t answering. Maybe if I kept at it, he’d finally give in and respond to at least one question.

Unfortunately, he didn’t. Instead, he raised his free hand and gently covered my eyes with it.

“Sleep, Taufan.”

His words must have carried some kind of magic spell. The moment he spoke, drowsiness washed over me, and I started to close my eyes. I felt like I was about to fall into a dream. Just before I did, I opened my eyes for a split second. Everything was blurry. I heard a strange buzzing sound I didn’t recognize.

What was he doing to me?

…

(Third-Person Point of View)

Sunlight streamed into the room through a gap in the curtains, disturbing the peaceful sleep of the young boy. The boy slowly opened his eyes and blinked a few times. Then he stretched and sat up in bed. His eyes were still a little drowsy—it was clear that sleep hadn’t fully left him. But the boy had no intention of going back to sleep. He climbed down from the large bed and pulled a cord beside the bed twice, then waited quietly.

Soon after, there was a knock at his door.

“Who is it?” he asked.

“Your Highness, it’s Vivi and Janet. We’ve come to help you get ready.”

Now that he knew who was at the door, the boy allowed them to enter. The door was pushed open. One maid wheeled in a trolley, while the other held a large bowl and a towel.

The maid with the bowl placed it on the bedside table. She poured water from a jug—brought in on the trolley—into the bowl. Then she dipped the towel into the water and wrung it out. The damp towel was handed to the boy.

“Let us assist you, Your Highness.”

The boy nodded, letting the two maids undress him and help him into a clean set of clothes. Once they were done dressing him, he sat and waited for breakfast to be served. The two women moved efficiently and gracefully as they served his meal. He ate in silence and with the elegance expected of a Prince. There was no clatter from his utensils, and every movement he made with the spoon and fork was flawless.

When he finished eating, the maids took away the dishes, leaving him to begin the day’s activities.

...

"Once again, you surprise me, Your Highness. I didn’t expect you to finish our lesson far ahead of schedule." The man who had been his tutor for the past six months closed the book in his hand and offered him a smile.

The boy returned a polite smile and nodded to the man as a gesture of respect to the one who had been teaching him. "Everything proceeded as expected of me, Mr. Jason."

"Even so, Your Highness, you’ve finished earlier than any other noble I’ve taught before. Is there something that motivates you to complete your education faster than the others?"

"It’s nothing big. I just want to spend more of my time with my brothers."

The man addressed as Mr. Jason gave an approving nod. He bowed as the boy stood from his seat to leave the room.

"May the sun of Ignisia always light your path, Prince Taufan."

The boy—Taufan—turned to his tutor and offered another smile. This time, it wasn’t the formal smile he had given earlier. This one was genuine, filled with gratitude toward the man.

...

Taufan von Ignisia.

The Second Prince of Ignisia.

Despite holding the title of Second Prince, he knew his people hoped that he would ascend the throne to succeed his father. He also knew that his father, despite everything, wished for him to be the next king.

There was no objection in his heart about it. He fully understood that in his kingdom, only the most capable had the right to rule. Ignisia did not care about gender, age, or birth order. They cared about talent.

Taufan had known since childhood that he was far more gifted than his older brother. He knew the power he had received through the blessing of the Wind Goddess was far stronger. He had proven it through dozens of duels against his brother. Not once had Halilintar defeated him when they dueled using their powers.

Of course, he wasn't saying that Halilintar lacked talent. Not at all. In fact, his brother was extremely talented with a sword. Taufan was sure that one day, Halilintar would become the best swordmaster in their kingdom—perhaps even the best on the continent. He was also someone utterly reliable. So, even if Ignisia followed a system where the eldest must inherit the throne, Taufan believed Ignisia would still be in good hands.

If Halilintar ever chose to compete with him for the throne, Taufan would gladly welcome the rivalry—so long as everything was done fairly.

But his eldest brother had no interest in becoming king. He had said it many times—he only wanted to grow stronger. All because he wanted to stand beside Taufan, to protect him when Taufan became king.

His first younger brother, Gempa, had said that no one else was more suited to be king than Taufan. Although his younger brother might be a little biased when it came to Taufan, he was an honest person. Besides, being a king was not just about strength.

It was a responsibility given to those who were capable. To be a king meant putting your people above all else. You had to think of your people before yourself when making decisions. Even if it meant turning away from your family, friends, or lover—you had to be able to do it for the people.

Taufan had been learning that lesson his whole life. Even so, he still wasn’t sure if he could do it—especially since he loved his brothers dearly. Could he ever turn his back on them? Deep down, Taufan knew he would throw away everything he had if it meant ensuring the safety of his brothers.

Taufan shook his head and sighed deeply. He wasn’t ready to be king. And that was alright—he still had plenty of time ahead to better prepare himself.

"Prince Taufan, how are you today?"

Taufan bowed to the woman before him. "Greetings, Mother."

He allowed the woman to stroke his hair before standing upright again, gazing at the woman—his mother and queen—with respect and admiration. She was the queen who ruled beside his father, the king. She was a figure worthy of all admiration.

Her demeanor was gentle and full of compassion, but she was not a woman to be underestimated. She may not have had the strength of knights or female warriors, but she was a well-raised noblewoman. Though some called her a flower in a greenhouse, the admiration for her went far beyond her beauty. She had a brilliant mind. She was a woman of intelligence and courage.

Taufan had heard dozens of stories about his mother’s bravery. How she traveled to the capital to learn more about the outside world—not just the lands of her own territory. How she joined the military expedition to the Western border, that had long suffered from attacks by magical beasts. And the constant threats from neighboring kingdoms. It was this woman who devised the strategies that won countless battles in that region.

Even after becoming queen, she continued to inspire admiration wherever she went.

"Will you be going on a visit today?"

"Indeed, my Prince. Come with me. Do not distance yourself from your people, for they are the heart of this kingdom."

"Of course, Mother. Please allow me to prepare myself first."

His mother smiled, nodding to give Taufan permission to return to his room and get ready.

It was a common thing for Taufan to accompany his mother or father when they made visits outside the palace. Usually, Halilintar or Gempa would also go with them, but lately, both had been less involved. Halilintar was increasingly absorbed in his sword training, while Gempa seemed captivated by their younger brothers.

Taufan wondered whether one day, when his younger brothers were older, their mother would take them along as she once did with him and his two older brothers.

Inside the carriage, his mother looked so graceful, even in a simple dress. She wore a pale blue silk gown. There were no embroideries to adorn the dress. Nor did she wear any jewelry like most noblewomen. Only her wedding ring encircled the ring finger of her right hand. Despite all the simplicity, the Queen still looked stunning. She was like a flower blooming on a cliff. Whatever surrounded her did not diminish her beauty.

This time, they weren’t going far. His mother said they were just checking on the market—ensuring things were running properly without any disputes or conflicts that could disturb or threaten others. They didn’t bring many guards. Only four of the Queen’s guards accompanied them today. But Taufan knew that some members of the Phantom Unit were watching from afar to ensure their safety. There was no way his father would allow his mother and him to go outside the palace with just four guards.

The capital city market was just as Taufan remembered—crowded and full of people. There was nothing particularly interesting to him at the market, but he enjoyed coming here with his mother. It meant he could buy something and share it with his brothers. His mother was talking to a man, but their conversation was far too dull for Taufan, if he were to be honest. Still, he stood where he was—it was his duty as a prince. He had to listen to the complaints of his people no matter how boring they might be.

But his mother was not only a good Queen, she was also the best mother Taufan could ask for. She understood that Taufan was bored at the moment, and she allowed him to wander for a while as long as he didn’t go too far. Once he got her approval, Taufan grew impatient. He didn’t forget to bow respectfully to his mother and give a small nod to the man speaking with her, though he did it rather hastily. Not exactly the proper attitude of a prince, but his mother didn’t seem to mind. So Taufan figured everything was fine.

The capital city market was always full of people, but Taufan preferred Tarín. That city, to him, was a city full of wonder. The bookstore in Tarín was his favorite. If his mother ever took him there again, he would make sure to visit that bookstore.

There wasn’t much that caught Taufan’s interest anymore. He had been to this place too many times—it all felt ordinary to him now. At least there were a few boys his age who invited him to play hide and seek, so he could have a bit of fun.

It was truly delightful to play with them. Taufan rarely had time for himself in the palace. Most of it was spent studying or training his powers. If he ever had free time, he would use it to play with his brothers so they wouldn’t feel lonely. Having the chance to play like an ordinary child was a rare thing, but Taufan never complained. He had long known that life as a prince was not easy—especially when you’re expected to be the next king.

So, while he was outside the palace like now, Taufan would make the most of his time.

He was hiding behind one of the market stalls. The stall owner was a young woman who looked kind. She was a bit surprised at first to see Taufan hiding there, but she allowed him to do as he pleased. Whether it was out of kindness or because she recognized him as the prince, it didn’t matter to Taufan right now.

One by one, his playmates were found by the seekers. Taufan covered his mouth to keep from making any noise—he didn’t want to be found yet. While he was intently observing the area, a blue butterfly suddenly fluttered across his field of vision. It distracted him from the game as his eyes followed the butterfly’s flight.

The small blue-winged creature flew past the people around, oddly unnoticed by anyone else. Taufan focused on it for a moment, but then something else drew his attention again.

This time, he saw a burly man gripping a child’s arm. It seemed the child had stolen something from the man’s stall—if the angry expression on the man’s face was anything to go by. Taufan couldn’t hear what they were saying, but he knew the man was scolding and blaming the child. The child, on the other hand, didn’t look the least bit afraid, even though the man’s body was twice his size. Though thin and frail like a twig, the child didn’t tremble.

Taufan wondered what made the boy so brave. He would even bet that his older brother, Halilintar, didn’t have as much courage as this child.

Taufan watched intently as the boy bit the man’s hand, forcing him to let go. Then, he kicked the man’s leg and ran away. Judging by the man's cry of pain—which Taufan could hear clearly—the boy must have kicked him quite hard. Remarkable. For someone who looked sickly and skinny, he had enough strength to make a grown man howl in pain.

Taufan no longer cared about the game he was playing earlier. In fact, he had already forgotten about it. He stepped out of his hiding place, asking the kind woman who let him hide to wrap several pieces of bread for him. He gave her a gold coin, then ran off with the basket of bread he had just bought.

He had to find that child. There was something about him that had caught Taufan’s attention, and he wanted to know what it was.

Finding him turned out to be much harder than Taufan had imagined. He thought it would be easy. He was just a skinny boy—how could he disappear so quickly?! Taufan had undergone intense training with the best instructors. There was no way he would give up searching for him.

When Taufan finally found him, the boy was in the shadow of a dark, filthy alley. The stench of garbage and urine was overwhelming, making Taufan want to gag and flee—if only he hadn’t remembered his goal.

The child was there, curled up behind carelessly discarded wooden crates. He looked thinner up close. His knees were tucked to his chest, and he buried his face. As Taufan approached, the child flinched but raised his head. Taufan couldn’t see his face because it was hidden behind long, messy hair, making him wonder what color the child’s eyes were.

Taufan looked left and right, searching for any signs of others nearby. He found no one. Without a doubt, this child was alone.

He might be sleeping in this place at night.

A street child.

Honestly, it was a common phenomenon. His father and mother had once told him that no matter how prosperous a kingdom might be, there would always be street children. Whether they were abandoned by their parents, had lost them, or due to other reasons. Even so, Taufan knew his parents had done everything they could to reduce the number of street children. They worked to bring prosperity to the kingdom so that no parent would abandon their child out of poverty, they tried to build more orphanages so abandoned children could have a place to live, and much more.

Perhaps this child didn’t know that he could go to an orphanage to have a comfortable place to stay. He would tell his mother about this. He could feed this child and bring him to his mother—she would surely know what to do.

"Hello... do you mind if I sit with you?"

Even if Taufan couldn’t see his expression, he could tell that the child was confused. Taufan chuckled softly and showed him the basket he was carrying. He saw the child lean slightly toward the basket, perhaps catching the scent of bread. It was a pity Taufan couldn’t buy freshly baked bread because he was afraid he wouldn’t have enough time to catch up with the child.

Without waiting for a response, Taufan sat beside the child. He heard a slight creak as he sat down, and inwardly he winced because he knew his mother would scold him for such improper behavior for a prince. Not to mention he had probably dirtied his clothes, and that would be another reason for her to scold him—but that was a minor issue.

Taufan placed the basket on the ground, opened the cloth covering it, and revealed the bread to the child. He could hear the child’s stomach growl, which made him chuckle despite himself. He took two pieces of bread from the basket, handing one to the child and keeping one for himself. He had learned a lot from accompanying his mother on visits like this. Some street children had quite a bit of pride. They didn’t want to feel pitied and sometimes rejected food from others because they felt insulted. In such moments, the right thing to do was to sit beside them and eat together, as if they were just friends sharing a meal.

His tactic clearly worked, because although hesitant at first, the child began to eat the bread Taufan had given him. At first, he ate slowly, but soon he began eating quickly, as if afraid that Taufan would take it back if his own bread ran out. Taufan wouldn’t comment on it—he ate his bread slowly.

When the bread in the child’s hands was gone, Taufan again offered more from the basket. The child hesitated, perhaps wondering what kind of trick Taufan might be playing. It took a while for him to take another piece and start eating, but this time he didn’t finish it. Instead, he tucked the bread under his clothes, and even if Taufan noticed more than one piece missing from the basket, he wouldn’t say anything.

"I'm Taufan. What's your name?"

The child was silent. Taufan could feel the nervousness radiating from his body. It made Taufan wonder if he had asked the wrong question. He tried to recall everything his parents had taught him about how to handle situations like this. But it seemed nothing had prepared him for how to ease a street child’s fear when asked their name. Taufan was sure his mother sometimes asked for children’s names during her visits to orphanages—she even memorized them all. So the question shouldn’t be wrong. Then why was this child so nervous when asked about his name?

"...I—uh... don’t have one."

"You don’t have one?" Taufan responded instinctively, not realizing his comment made the child even more nervous. Once he realized, Taufan quickly smiled. "That’s okay. But I can’t just call you ‘hey’ or ‘you.’ Is there a name you’d like? You can name yourself if you don’t have one."

"Uh... don’t... know..." his voice was soft, and Taufan had difficulty hearing it even though he sat right next to him.

Taufan thought for a moment and then turned to the child. "If that’s the case, would you like me to give you a name?"

"Can I?"

"Yes! I’ve read so many books, I guarantee I can give you a cool name!"

The child nodded, agreeing to let Taufan give them a name. Now, Taufan tried to think of what name he should give the child. He had boasted that he could come up with a cool name, yet not a single fitting one popped into his mind. He could think of so many names, but none seemed right. He looked again at the child beside him, observing carefully.

The child had shoulder-length hair that was messy and matted in places. The original color wasn’t clear, but Taufan assumed it might be gray. Their skin was covered in dust and dirt, and they were so thin they looked almost skeletal. Taufan still couldn’t see the child’s eyes, hidden behind that tangled hair.

Ah, why is it so hard just to think of a name?

Taufan looked up at the blue sky above them. A clear blue sky dotted with fluffy white clouds. He remembered the blue dress his mother had worn. What else had been blue and caught his attention today? Oh, right—the blue butterfly he had seen flying earlier. It had been so beautiful.

A blue butterfly...

That’s it! It was because of the butterfly that he had noticed this child and chased after them.

“How about Maripos?”

“Maripos?”

“Yeah, Maripos means butterfly.”

“But I...”

Though the child didn’t finish the sentence, Taufan understood what they meant. A butterfly has beautiful wings and draws the attention of many with its beauty—clearly the opposite of the child sitting beside him now. Still, Taufan had no intention of changing the name.

“Before it becomes a butterfly, it’s a caterpillar that many people fear or find disgusting. But when it transforms, everyone is captivated by its beauty. It’s okay if you don’t feel like the name fits you now. I believe one day, you’ll realize you truly deserve it.”

The child still looked uncertain, but they didn’t object to the name Taufan had given. Taufan silently cheered to himself—this meant the name had been accepted. He looked back up at the sky above them, realizing he had spent too long in this place. His mother and the royal guards were surely panicking, looking for him by now. He hated causing a commotion, so it was best to return quickly.

Taufan stood up, patting his pants in hopes of brushing off the dust. He knew his trousers weren’t as clean as before, but they didn’t look too dirty. He hoped his mother would forgive him for this recklessness.

He looked down at the child still sitting on the ground. Taufan reached out his hand.

“So, Maripos... would you like to come with me?”

Chapter Text

Boboiboy Fanfiction

©  Boboiboy | Animonsta Studio

A/N: The entire story is purely fictional, and the author does not profit from writing this story. If there are any similarities in ideas, character names, or locations, they are purely coincidental.

≫ ──── ≪•◦ ❈ ◦•≫ ──── ≪

"Prince, is there nothing you wish to say?"

Taufan lowered his head in shame. He would have twisted his clothes in anxiety if he didn’t know that such a thing was unbecoming of a prince. Although she appeared calm, Taufan knew he had made the most patient woman he had ever known angry. He had nothing to defend himself with—he was clearly at fault for making his mother worry. He should never have left without informing his guards.

"I am truly sorry, Mother. I realize that what I did was inappropriate, and for that, I sincerely apologize and am willing to accept any punishment for my actions."

Taufan still kept his head bowed, not yet brave enough to look his mother in the eye. Of course, his mother’s beautiful face would never show anger, but Taufan could always tell just by looking into her eyes. She was angry because she was worried about him, and Taufan regretted making her feel that way.

"I'm glad you realize your mistake, Prince. Now, are you willing to explain what made you leave without any notice like that?"

Taufan nodded obediently. He glanced at Maripos, who was standing a few feet behind him. The child stood out among the neatly dressed guards—he stood out like a sore thumb. Taufan gestured for him to come forward. Maripos moved hesitantly, his body language showing clear discomfort from all the attention. Still, Taufan would have to be cruel and ignore his unease for now—it was for Maripos’ own good. If he could introduce Maripos to his mother, she would know what to do. Maybe she could place him in one of the capital's largest orphanages and make sure he received the best care.

So, he pulled Maripos closer to him, making the boy stand by his side so he could introduce him to the Queen. The Queen silently observed the dirty boy her son had brought. She said nothing, clearly waiting for Taufan to explain.

"His name is Maripos. I found him in a filthy alley and gave him some food. Mother, is there anything you can do to help him?"

Taufan knew that even if his mother was angry at his carelessness, she had a heart wider than the ocean and always helped those in need. There was no way she would abandon a poor child like Maripos.

His assumption proved right when the Queen knelt down to meet Maripos at eye level—not even caring that her silk gown might get dirty. "Maripos, is that right?"

Beside him, Maripos flinched slightly upon hearing the Queen’s voice, but he quickly recovered and nodded. He wrung his hands nervously. Taufan understood that Maripos must be feeling both uncomfortable and afraid.

His mother examined Maripos from head to toe, likely assessing whether he needed immediate medical attention or if they could wait a bit. Seeing her gaze harden slightly, Taufan grew worried that Maripos might be injured or in a worse condition than he had realized. He was about to scold himself for not being more careful when the Queen spoke again.

"Maripos, may I see your hands?"

Taufan blinked in confusion and turned to Maripos, who was also looking at him—almost like he was asking for permission. Though hesitant, Taufan nodded at him. With that, Maripos slowly extended both hands to the Queen. Taufan watched as his mother gently touched Maripos’ hands—she always had such a gentle touch—and she even stroked them to calm him down.

"Have you had this for a long time?"

Taufan now saw what his mother had noticed. On the backs of Maripos’ hands were burn marks and several other wounds, some of which still looked fresh. The burn scar looked like it had been made by a hot metal rod pressed against the skin. Taufan shuddered at the thought. He had once accidentally spilled hot tea on his hand, and the burn had hurt terribly. The idea of a searing piece of metal touching your skin sounded even more horrifying.

Maripos looked at Taufan again like before. Taufan gave another nod, and only then did Maripos respond with a small nod of his own.

"How long has it been?"

Before Maripos could look at him again for permission, Taufan gently patted his shoulder and said, "It’s okay. You can answer without needing my permission."

Maripos still hesitated. He didn’t answer for quite some time, and Taufan began to wonder if he should give him permission again. On the other hand, the Queen was a patient woman and didn’t pressure Maripos to respond immediately. They could probably wait here all day for an answer. Fortunately, it didn’t take the whole day for Maripos to finally speak.

"I... don’t remember."

"That’s alright. Do you remember how old you are?"

This time, the answer came quicker. Maripos shook his head. Taufan thought this was understandable. Maripos didn’t even have a proper name before—how could he remember his age? But if he had to guess, Maripos couldn’t be that different in age from him. Maybe a year older. Or maybe even a little younger. But certainly not by much. Taufan had turned eight this year and had grown quite a bit. Maripos was slightly taller, so he was probably around the same age.

"Do you perhaps remember where your home was before this?"

Maripos surely didn’t have a pleasant home. Taufan could see him trembling when Mother asked about his home. He shook his head so hard that Taufan worried he might injure his neck.

Taufan watched his mother's expression. She still looked calm, but her eyes showed something Taufan couldn’t quite understand. She straightened up, gently brushed Maripos’ hair, and turned to the guards behind her. She ordered the carriage to be prepared immediately because they would return to the Palace at once. Taufan didn’t understand why Mother suddenly seemed in such a hurry. They hadn’t even decided which orphanage Maripos would be sent to.

"Prince Taufan, get ready. We are returning to the Palace."

"But Mother, what about Maripos?"

"He will come with us as well."

"What?"

It wasn’t just Taufan who was surprised. Maripos was just as shocked. Taufan would have bet his favorite sweets on Halilintar that he heard the guards murmur the same thing he had.

"Maripos will come with us to the Palace. There are a few things your father and I need to discuss with him."

Taufan didn’t fully understand, but if Father was already involved, then it had to be something serious. He had only thought he was bringing a street child to his mother so she could help, he never imagined he was bringing something more than that. He felt a bit guilty—toward his mother and perhaps toward Maripos too.

...

The journey back to the Palace was completely silent. Mother was lost in thought, Maripos was too scared to say anything and kept himself pressed into the corner of the carriage, and Taufan had no idea what to say. The trip was incredibly awkward, and Taufan didn’t like it at all. As soon as they arrived at the Palace, Mother told Taufan to clean himself and rest. She also summoned some attendants to bathe Maripos and find clothes that would fit him. She did not forget to ask about the King’s whereabouts.

Everything she did seemed rushed in Taufan’s eyes. He was so used to his mother’s calm and gentle demeanor. Seeing her act in such a hurry was suspicious to him. But he was a good son and a good prince. So he followed his mother’s and queen’s orders without complaint. He bowed to his mother and gave Maripos a small wave before following the attendant who would help him bathe.

What happened after that felt like a blur to Taufan. He only remembered waiting nervously in his room after apologizing to his brothers for not being able to join them that day. Taufan had been pacing around in his room, wondering what was going on with Maripos—and what was behind his mother’s behavior.

Taufan found the answer the next day, when his father summoned him to his study.

Taufan was nervous the entire way to his father's study. He feared he had caused serious trouble for his parents just because he had tried to be kind. Maybe he shouldn’t have been that kind. Maybe he shouldn’t have helped someone so carelessly.

When he entered his father's study, Taufan saw that his mother was also there. He bowed respectfully to both his parents and waited patiently until his father allowed him to sit. He didn’t say anything or touch his favorite pastries on the table because he was too nervous. His father was reading something on a sheet of paper, and his mother was sipping her tea gracefully. Once again, Taufan had the urge to twist his shirt, but he refrained, knowing it was not proper behavior for a prince.

Finally, his father lowered the paper he had been reading.

"Taufan, you’re the one who found Maripos, correct?"

Taufan swallowed a gasp that nearly escaped when he heard his father's voice. Hesitantly, he glanced at his father and mother to gauge if they were angry at him or not. Seeing their expressions were neutral, Taufan felt safe to let out a quiet sigh of relief.

"Yes, Father. I was the one who found Maripos. I found him in a filthy alley, a bit far from the market."

His father made a humming sound. He then called over Mother and handed her the paper he had been reading when she approached. Mother didn’t say anything, but it looked like she and Father were having an argument through their eyes. Taufan sat anxiously in his chair, still wondering why he had been summoned here.

When Mother returned to her original seat, she handed the paper to Taufan, signaling him to read its contents carefully.

The top of the paper showed an image. It appeared to be the emblem of an organization—two crossed swords. Taufan carefully read the sentences that accompanied the image. Apparently, this was the symbol of an underground organization involved in kidnapping people and selling them as slaves. They operated across many kingdoms and had now made their way into Ignisia.

They were called Tenevoy Bazar.

Taufan understood very well that this was a heavy issue. Ignisia had banned the slave trade since his father ascended the throne. Taufan knew the struggles his father went through to eradicate slavery and ensure that not a single person was treated like an animal to be bought and sold. He knew that many nobles still liked to purchase slaves to force them to work in their homes—or for who knows what else—and he understood how difficult it was to overturn a law that had existed for hundreds of years overnight. There were still even laws that allowed the sale of a criminal’s family into slavery for severe crimes. But Taufan also knew that his father and mother would not stop until their goal was achieved. One day, when he inherited the throne, he would continue his father’s fight. He would teach his children to continue the struggle as well. And Taufan hoped this would go on for generations to come.

“Prince, you are still very young. We should not be discussing this with you. However, Sir Jason has said that you have completed your basic education and are ready for the next stage. I believe you can understand what we’re discussing,” his father said.

Taufan turned his gaze from the paper in his hands to his father. He nodded politely and said, “That is correct, Father. I can assure you that my capabilities are more than sufficient to be included in this discussion. Please do not hold back because of my age.”

His father smiled. He looked proud upon hearing Taufan’s words. Taufan couldn’t help but puff his chest out slightly with pride for having gained his parents’ trust. He knew he was still far from being worthy of the crown, but he also knew he met the qualities his father sought in an heir.

“I’m glad to hear that, Prince. You’ve read the paper the Queen gave you, haven’t you?”

“Yes, I have. I have a few concerns after reading it, Father.”

“I understand your concerns, Prince. You’ve been taught from an early age that the slave trade is an inhumane act carried out by those who see themselves as far more powerful than others. Those blinded by wealth and power will do it without a shred of conscience. I also know you are aware of the efforts your mother and I have made to punish those who commit these acts.”

“Yes, Father. I know well what you’ve done for this kingdom, and I admire you deeply.”

His father's response was a nod of agreement. Taufan turned his eyes back to the paper in his hands. A suspicion was growing in his mind about what his parents truly wanted to talk about.

“Father… is this all about Maripos?”

His father smiled. “I knew you’d understand, Prince.”

Taufan’s hand trembled slightly as he held the paper. He pinched himself to steady his nerves before looking back at his father. The man watched him carefully from behind his desk.

“The burn mark on his hand… that’s the symbol of this organization, isn’t it?”

Neither his father nor his mother answered him aloud, but their silence was more than enough confirmation for Taufan. Looking again at the picture on the paper, Taufan shut his eyes, hoping to erase the image of the burn scar on Maripos’s hand. No wonder there were so many other wounds over it. He may have scratched or injured his hand to hide the burn mark.

“Maripos is one of the few slaves who managed to escape from the Tenevoy Bazar. We’ve verified his claims with Ice’s help.”

To be honest, Taufan disagreed with his parents’ method of involving Ice in this matter. Even so, he knew that only Ice could help them fully confirm Maripos’s words. Taufan hoped Ice was all right. He would check on Ice once he returned to the Sunrise Palace.

“There are many things Maripos cannot remember—perhaps due to shock and the torture he endured in the Tenevoy Bazar—but everything he said is true. He said he was captured by them and caged to be sold as a slave, but no one wanted to buy him. He escaped the moment he saw an opportunity.”

“Then… what will happen to Maripos?”

“At first, we wanted to help him find his original family, but Maripos said he had none. We suspect he’s been alone for a long time, even before being captured by the slavers. We planned to place him in the orphanage that the Queen just opened, but Maripos said he didn’t want to go there and begged to work in the palace.”

Hearing his father’s words, Taufan thought perhaps it was indeed better if Maripos worked at the palace. Maybe he hadn’t been able to give full information yet because he was still nervous around them. There was a high chance that, in time, he would recall more details that could help them uncover the slave trade still happening within the kingdom.

Taufan glanced at his mother, who had been silent all this time. Then he turned to face his father again. There was a smile on his father’s face, as if the man could read Taufan’s mind. Perhaps to his parents, Taufan was still like an open book—so easy to read. Seeing a nod from his mother, Taufan knew they already understood what he was thinking. Still, he would voice it.

“I believe it is indeed better for Maripos to work at the palace, Father. There’s a strong chance we will still need him to provide further information about the Tenevoy Bazar. Please allow me to handle this matter, Father. I will ask Taran to find a suitable place for him to work. Maripos will be fully under my responsibility, and I will ensure he performs his duties well.”

“Then do as you wish, Prince.”

“Thank you, Father.”

Taufan was happy that Maripos could work in the palace; it meant he could see him again. Although he would have been happier if he had entered the orphanage and didn’t have to work at such a young age. Remembering the thin child he met in the alley the other day, Taufan’s heart ached for him. He couldn’t imagine the torment Maripos must have endured at the hands of those slavers.

His father and mother then began discussing the slavers. From their conversation, Taufan learned that the slavers had entered Ignisia illegally and operated in secret locations. Maripos had indeed provided information about what he knew of the Tenevoy Bazar, but he was still a child who had been tortured and longed for freedom—he couldn’t provide precise details. At least they had some leads.

As the discussion grew more intense, his father told him he needed to return to the Sunrise Palace. Even though he wanted to stay and listen longer, Taufan obeyed like the good son he was. He bid farewell to his parents before leaving them.

On his way to the Sunrise Palace, Taufan thought about what his parents might be planning. Perhaps they were trying to find out where the Tenevoy Bazaar was operating in Ignisia. Maybe they were already preparing a plan to capture those people and save the victims. Taufan wished he were a few years older—then his parents might allow him to be part of those conversations.

Whatever it was, he knew his parents knew best. With that thought in mind, Taufan hurried to find Taran to arrange a proper place for Maripos. He wanted to see Maripos as soon as possible, but he also had to make sure Ice was doing okay.

His parents had involved Ice when they were trying to verify Maripos’ confession, so Ice was surely not in a good state. Besides, Ice had always hated his powers and didn’t like to use them.

He stopped briefly by the palace kitchen. The workers there welcomed him warmly and asked what he wanted. Taufan requested something sweet, so he could bring it back to the Sunrise Palace to share with his brothers. The head chef gladly gave him everything he asked for. Taufan even noticed the chef sneaking in a few extra pastries into his basket before handing it to him. Of course, Taufan didn’t say anything about it—he simply thanked them and apologized for the interruption.

Back at the Sunrise Palace, Taufan handed the basket of pastries to a servant, asking them to divide the treats fairly among his brothers. But for Ice’s share, he asked that it be brought to his room, not Ice’s. Taufan would personally go to see Ice.

Ice was a sensitive child, and Taufan didn’t want to make him feel even more uncomfortable. He also wanted to make sure his little brother was okay after using his powers yesterday.

One of the powers Ice had received as a blessing from Vaser was the ability to see the truth. He always knew when someone was lying or telling the truth. He could even sense people’s intentions at a glance. It was said that nothing could be hidden from Ice’s eyes—he would always know what was in your heart. From what Taufan had read in the books, this power was also called “The Eyes That See the Truth.” A truly remarkable ability.

But for Ice, his power felt like a curse. He was terrified of being around many people, and the way people treated him didn’t help. Perhaps because he couldn’t control this power. He would constantly see everything people tried to hide deep in their hearts. Others were scared of him too. They were afraid he would see the darkness in their hearts, afraid their intentions would be exposed, and afraid their lies would be revealed. Ice avoided them like a plague, and people feared Ice as if he were a monster—not a five-year-old child.

Even now, Taufan still struggled to get close to his younger brother, who often kept his distance. But that didn’t mean he would stop trying. Ice was his brother, and Taufan would never abandon him just because of something as trivial as his power.

Knocking on Ice’s bedroom door with his foot, Taufan waited patiently until he was allowed in. He balanced a tray with a plate of pastries and a glass of warm milk in his hands. Hopefully, Ice wouldn’t freeze the milk as soon as he opened the door.

The door creaked open slowly. Ice peeked through to decide whether or not he would let Taufan in. Once he decided Taufan was worthy of entering, he moved aside and let the door open wider. Taufan stepped in quickly, placing the tray on the nearest table.

He looked around his brother’s room, no longer surprised at how chaotic it was. He saw various items frozen, and the room was cold. Shaking his head, Taufan waved his hand and let warm wind fill the room. He pulled the curtains aside and opened the window to let sunlight into the room, bringing the temperature back to something that wouldn’t kill you.

“I brought some pastries from the Main Palace and a glass of milk for you.”

Ice glanced at the pastries and milk Taufan had set down. He fidgeted with his small fingers, clearly wanting the pastries but too hesitant to grab them until Taufan offered. Taufan gave a small smile, picked up two pieces of pastry, and handed one to Ice.

“So, I talked to Father and Mother. They said you helped them with something yesterday.”

Ice tensed. He looked at Taufan uncertainly—the same look he always gave people when they asked about his powers. Then, perhaps realizing it was his older brother asking, Ice gave a small nod. He looked nervous, keeping his eyes on Taufan.

“You did a great job, Ice. I’m proud of you.”

Taufan’s words instantly brightened his little brother. Ice bit into the pastry while stealing shy glances at Taufan. He looked incredibly cute when he was that shy.

Taufan stayed in Ice’s room for quite a while. He taught Ice a few things he had learned when he was Ice’s age, and they played together for a bit. He knew his time for play would become more limited—especially now that he had finished his education. More responsibilities would be entrusted to him. Taufan didn’t complain, but he did regret that it meant less time with his brothers. That’s why he wanted to make the most of every moment he still had to spend with them. Hopefully, Father wouldn’t ask him to visit another kingdom anytime soon.

...

“Maripos!” Taufan called, running toward the boy who was brushing a horse’s coat.

It had been a week since Taufan found Maripos and brought him to work at the palace. Taran had found a fitting position for him—as a stable boy. Maripos loved animals, and he seemed very skilled at handling horses despite his small, skinny frame. The other stable workers treated Maripos well too, so Taufan didn’t have to worry about the boy being bullied.

“Good afternoon, Prince,” Maripos greeted him with a smile.

Taufan liked Maripos’ smile. The boy still looked thin—there was no way he could gain weight in just a week—but he looked better than when they first met. His skin was no longer sickly pale, now a bit more radiant. His hair, which Taufan had thought was gray, turned out to be silver. It still looked dull, but Taufan was sure in another month, with good food and care, it would shine. Maripos’ eyes were a pale violet, reminding Taufan of the purple gown his mother had worn a few days ago.

Now, he suited the name Taufan had given him even more.

“I brought another book today—let’s read it together!”

Maripos smiled. He said he had to finish his chores first, and then he could spend time with Taufan. Taufan simply nodded; he knew he shouldn't interrupt Maripos while he was working. So he calmly sat on a bale of hay, tugging at a few strands to braid them together. Maripos finished his tasks quickly and then sat beside Taufan, waiting for him to open the book he had brought.

Taufan enjoyed spending time with Maripos. He wasn’t like the others who acted overly polite around Taufan—though Taufan guessed that might be because Maripos had only been at the palace for a week. Still, it was refreshing to have someone who treated him like a friend, not just a prince.

They called it reading together, but in truth, Taufan was the one reading aloud for Maripos to listen.

Maripos couldn’t read or write. Two days ago, he had asked Taufan to teach him how. Taufan was more than happy to do so. So after reading one chapter from the book, he would teach Maripos how to read and write. Teaching Maripos was also a joy, because Maripos was clever. He picked up what Taufan taught him quickly. Today, Maripos was already able to read one paragraph from the book, though still a bit haltingly. Taufan was thrilled by his progress. He handed the book to Maripos so he could keep practicing on his own.

He would teach Maripos how to count as well. Maybe tomorrow.

For now, he would enjoy the time he had with his friend.

Chapter Text

Boboiboy Fanfiction

©  Boboiboy | Animonsta Studio

A/N: The entire story is purely fictional, and the author does not profit from writing this story. If there are any similarities in ideas, character names, or locations, they are purely coincidental.

≫ ──── ≪•◦ ❈ ◦•≫ ──── ≪

It had been three months since Maripos arrived at the Palace. Taufan had done his best to manage his time so he could spend it with Maripos while still paying attention to his brothers. It wasn’t an easy task. Sometimes, Taufan wished he could split himself so he could do many things at once. Fortunately, Father and Mother helped him a lot. They gave him advice and helped Taufan organize his time well. He didn’t know what he would do without them.

In these past three months, Taufan had taught Maripos many things. Now Maripos could read books fluently and also do basic calculations. He was truly smart—Taufan was amazed at how quickly Maripos learned.

As a reward for Maripos’s progress, Taufan helped him gain access to the library in the Main Palace. Although Maripos was only allowed to enter the first floor, that level had many interesting books that expanded one’s knowledge. Taufan knew Maripos loved it—he cried when Taufan first told him the news, and looked like he wanted to hug Taufan, but he held himself back. Since then, you could always find Maripos in the library every day.

Once he finished his chores, he would clean himself up and rush to the library to read. Sometimes Taufan would accompany him, other times Maripos would go alone. Maybe it was because people knew Maripos belonged to Taufan that no one dared to disturb him. Although it felt arrogant, Taufan would take full advantage of that. Father said that a leader must be able to protect their people. If Taufan had the power to do so, he wouldn’t hesitate.

“Maripos!” Taufan ran toward the older boy. When he saw him, Maripos lowered the brush he was holding and bowed awkwardly once Taufan stood before him.

“Greetings to His Highness, the Second Prince, Prince Taufan.”

Honestly, Taufan preferred it when Maripos acted casually with him rather than like this. But Taufan also understood that Maripos couldn’t always act casually around him. He was a Prince—someone expected to become King one day—many eyes were watching his every move. Maripos’s behavior could backfire and hurt him too.

Taufan still remembered when Maripos had been harshly scolded by a servant for allegedly being disrespectful to a member of the Royal Family. He had even been punished for it. Taufan didn’t want his friend to be punished, so even though he didn’t like the overly formal attitude, Taufan would bear it—for Maripos.

“How was your day?”

“Good, Your Highness. I plan to finish the book I borrowed from the library after brushing the horses and cleaning the stables today.”

“Oh! That’s great!”

Taufan was glad Maripos had something he enjoyed doing. Mother often said that a child should enjoy their childhood. Taufan knew not every child was that lucky—Maripos was one of them. Even Taufan himself fell into that category, though clearly he was luckier than most. Still, Taufan wanted his friend to have something else to enjoy, not just work all the time.

“And how about you, Your Highness?”

“Today was quite busy. My new tutor came, and he’s very strict. He’s already punished me once for not being able to answer his question.”

“Ah... Are you alright?”

Taufan grinned and waved his hand dismissively. “No need to worry. It was my fault anyway for not preparing well. The King always says I must be ready for everything, so clearly this time it was my mistake for being unprepared.”

He hoped his words would reassure Maripos, but the older boy looked at him with a worried gaze.

“Your Highness, I hope you’re not pushing yourself too hard.”

Taufan smiled to reassure his friend, lightly patting Maripos on the arm and said, “Of course not. I know what I’m doing, Maripos.”

Although Maripos still looked doubtful, he didn’t say anything more. He resumed brushing the horse’s coat while Taufan watched him. Hm, he thought he recognized the horse Maripos was grooming. Oh! Right, it was Father’s horse! The majestic black one with its gleaming coat. A truly beautiful horse—but too big for Taufan’s liking, as it made him feel small next to it. Still, he loved it when Father let him sit on the horse with him. It was always so much fun being close to Father.

He enjoyed watching Maripos work, but then remembered that he hadn’t come just to watch the older boy. He had another reason! Taufan reminded himself that he needed to work on his tendency to get easily distracted. He reached into his pocket and pulled out a small bottle containing a shimmering silver liquid.

“Maripos, I have a gift for you.”

“A gift? Why would you give me a gift? I haven’t done anything worthy of a reward.”

“Mother said you don’t need a reason to give someone a gift. Of course, she reminded me not to do it too often. She also said great deeds deserve a reward. But for now, I’m giving you this gift simply because I want to.”

Maripos didn’t seem to believe Taufan’s words, even though he was telling the truth! He was a dutiful son and a good prince—of course he would listen to his Mother and Queen. Mother never taught him anything wrong. She always knew best, and she was the kindest person in the world. So her teachings had to be the truth.

Taufan placed the small bottle into Maripos’s free hand, the one not holding the brush. “This is for you. Just one drop each night—this potion will fade any scar! I’ve tried it myself!”

“Why... why are you giving me this?”

“I’m sorry if this offends you, but I know you don’t like the scar on your hand,” Taufan said, noticing how Maripos tensed and unconsciously covered the scar on the back of his hand, “I wanted to give you my scar ointment, but Mother said it only works for light scars. So I... uh, asked Sir Jason about it. He’s a great alchemist! He said he knew how to make a potion that works on severe burn scars. The ingredients were hard to find, though. However, I managed to obtain them and helped Sir Jason prepare them. That’s why it took me a while to give this to you.” Taufan explained quickly, watching every change in Maripos’s expression—no matter how small, nothing escaped his eyes.

Maripos looked confused at first. Then, when Taufan mentioned the scar, he appeared a little frightened and angry—Taufan immediately worried he had offended his friend—but Maripos’s expression softened as Taufan went on. His eyes even began to glisten with tears. He smiled and clutched the small bottle tightly.

Maripos held the little bottle close to his chest. “Thank you so much, Your Highness. I will never forget your kindness.”

Taufan shook his head. “Don’t mention it. You’re my friend—of course I’d do this for you.”

Maripos looked like he disagreed and wanted to argue, but Taufan stopped him by patting his shoulder and saying he had other things to do. Then Taufan ran away from the place as quickly as possible, overwhelmed with joy after giving his friend a gift he had worked so hard to make. Mother and Father had said they were proud of him, and he had even gotten a smile from Maripos. Taufan loved how Maripos smiled at him. He would’ve jumped around cheering if he had stayed there any longer. He had to run away before he did something inappropriate—though a small voice in his head said that running away was also inappropriate behavior.

Taufan defended himself by reminding himself he truly did have work to do—he had to teach Blaze how to control his power and accompany Gempa to pick berries in the palace garden. So, Taufan hadn’t lied to Maripos at all.

...

Time passed quickly. It had been a year since Taufan met Maripos and became friends with him. Just yesterday, Maripos came to ask for his opinion. Apparently, he had been offered a place in the Phantom Unit by the Captain of the Phantom Unit himself! Taufan didn’t know the details; he told himself he’d ask Father about it later. What he did know was that he was extremely impressed with Maripos, because it meant his abilities had been recognized by the Phantom Unit’s Captain. Taufan knew that the Phantom Unit was the King’s special forces and only took orders from the King himself. Rumors said they were a secret assassination force owned by the Kingdom of Ignisia. They operated to eliminate the King’s enemies and remove any threats to the throne.

Taufan didn’t know whether those stories were true or exaggerated, but he knew that the Phantom Unit wasn’t an ordinary unit. From what he’d observed, they were an elite group made up of extremely skilled individuals. Their identities were a secret because they wore masks and trained their voices to be disguised, so no one could recognize them even if they passed by. They addressed each other using some kind of secret code that only the reigning King would know. They also underwent highly classified training. No one knew where they trained, who trained them, or who they were before joining the Phantom Unit.

Honestly, Taufan didn’t want Maripos to join the Phantom Unit—because that meant he would lose his friend. Maripos would undergo intense training and Taufan wouldn’t be able to see him again. Even if he became King one day, he might not even recognize Maripos, let alone spend time with him.

But it was hard to ignore the determination in Maripos’s eyes. It was clear that he wanted to join the Phantom Unit—though Taufan didn’t know what motivated him. Taufan didn’t want to be a selfish friend, so he told Maripos to follow his heart. He also said that he would always support Maripos’s decision.

Today, Taufan had to say goodbye to his friend, and he had to do it in secret because Maripos’s departure from the Palace to join the Phantom Unit was classified. Taufan didn’t know how the Phantom Unit’s Captain managed all of this—and he figured it wasn’t something he should be trying to find out anyway.

“I’ll miss you, Maripos. Take care,” Taufan said.

He hugged Maripos tightly since they were alone in Maripos’s room. Taufan then slipped a small bottle of high-grade healing potion—taken from the palace’s storeroom—into Maripos’s hand, along with two platinum coins—the money he had saved.

“Your Highness!” Maripos exclaimed in surprise, breaking the hug. He stared in disbelief at what Taufan had given him. Taufan felt embarrassed—he knew it wasn’t proper for a Prince to give valuable things to a servant secretly. If misunderstood, it could be seen as bribery—but he couldn’t help it! He just wanted to take care of Maripos, even if he wouldn’t see him for a very long time.

“This is a farewell gift from me, Maripos. Please don’t refuse it.”

“But... I can’t accept this, Your Highness. I haven’t done anything to deserve it.”

“Do you remember what I told you a year ago? When I gave you the scar-removal potion?”

“Yes, Your Highness.” Maripos nodded hesitantly. Seeing the expression on Taufan’s face, he must’ve realized that Taufan expected more than just a simple “yes.” Reluctantly, Maripos continued, “You said... there’s no need for a reason to give someone a gift, but you also shouldn’t do it too often, and people who do good deeds should receive a fitting reward.”

Taufan clapped his hands. “You remembered it well. So why are you still questioning it?”

Maripos looked like he wanted to argue, but in the end, he said nothing. Surely, a year of knowing Taufan had been enough for him to understand that he could never win against him. He must’ve known Taufan would keep insisting he accept the gift. Maybe even add a slight threat—not a serious one, of course. So, Maripos tucked the potion bottle and two platinum coins into his cloth pouch, placing them with his other important belongings so they wouldn’t be easily lost.

“Your generosity knows no bounds, Your Highness. I will always remember your kindness.”

Taufan gave his arm a light punch. “We’re friends, and friends are supposed to treat each other kindly.”

Maripos replied with a small, sincere smile.

Taufan knew he would never find a friend like Maripos again. Their time together had been short—just a year—and they were both still so young. Taufan promised himself that he would never forget Maripos, even if he could no longer see the older boy again. Still, it comforted him to imagine that Maripos would always be close when he became King someday. Their relationship might change, but Taufan’s affection for Maripos would not. Maripos would always be a precious friend.

He was sad about Maripos’s departure, but Taufan knew he couldn’t dwell on his feelings for too long. His father had told him that as a prince—and future king—he must never put himself first. He was born to lead his people, to protect them, and to prioritize them in every decision he made. As the old nobles he met at balls often said, his feelings didn’t matter. What mattered were his people.

So even though he was heartbroken to part with his friend, Taufan carried on with his day without complaint.

...

“Brother, have you ever thought about becoming king?” Taufan asked.

At the time, it was just him and Halilintar in the training room. Blaze and Gempa, who usually watched their matches, had other things to do—accompanying Mother on a visit to Marchioness Kuputeri.

Halilintar swung his training sword, looking surprised by the question. Taufan couldn’t blame him—he’d asked so suddenly, right when they were about to spar.

“No. Why are you asking that?”

“I was just... wondering. It feels a little strange. I’ve read a lot of histories from other kingdoms, and most of them choose the firstborn or eldest son as heir to the throne. You’re older than me, and you’re really talented too. Why didn’t Father make you Crown Prince?”

Halilintar snorted. “You know that in Ignisia, the strongest is the one deemed worthy of becoming king, right?”

Taufan rolled his eyes. “I know. They’ve been drilling that into me since I learned how to read.”

“Then why are you asking? You’ve beaten me in duels many times. I rarely win, and even when I do, it’s by a slim margin. You’re also really smart—Father and Mother praise you all the time. So do our tutors. I’ve noticed Father’s already assigning you kingdom matters, and you’re the one he takes on diplomatic visits. It’s pretty clear who he expects to be the next king.”

“I know that... but, don’t you want to compete with me for the throne?”

“For what? I never wanted to be king. My dream is to become the greatest swordsman in the kingdom. So when you’re crowned king, I’ll stand beside you as the knight who protects you. Besides, being a knight is way cooler than being king.”

Taufan would say that he wasn’t touched by what his brother had just said. He would claim that the sting in his eyes was just from dust, or that the warmth in his chest was from thinking about their loving mother. Halilintar’s words were just another way of bragging about being a knight.

Of course, he refused to admit that he had secretly stored his brother’s words as a vow in his heart.

They resumed their duel and, as in most of their matches, Taufan came out the victor. He laughed at Halilintar, who lay panting on the training room floor, while Halilintar probably cursed him with every insult he could think of.

“Brother, I’ll be a just king—one you’ll be proud of,” Taufan said, offering his hand to Halilintar. His brother smiled, took his hand, and let Taufan help him up.

“I look forward to it, little brother.”

Taufan felt joy swelling in his heart. This was a promise between him and his brother. A secret only the two of them would share.

“What are you going to do after this?” Taufan asked.

“Oh, me? I’m going to accompany Ice to play with Duri and Solar.”

Taufan’s face lit up. “Can I come with you?”

Halilintar laughed and ruffled Taufan’s hair. “Of course. Our younger brothers will be happy if you join. You’ve been so busy lately that you barely spend any time with them.”

Guilt began to creep into Taufan’s heart. He had been overwhelmed with responsibilities recently, and it had made his time with his brothers dwindle. Sometimes he wouldn’t even see them for days. Taufan really did try to find time amidst his busy schedule—even sneaking in visits before his lessons—but it wasn’t always possible.

Duri and Solar had started to feel distant from him because of his absence. Taufan didn’t want his younger brothers to grow up not knowing him.

Thankfully, he had some free time today, even if just a little. At least it would be enough to play with his adorable little brothers.

He and Halilintar changed clothes first—they didn’t want to meet the younger kids in their sweaty training gear. Then they went to pick up Ice from his room. Ice looked overjoyed to see them both. He flung himself into Halilintar’s arms, hugging him and asking to be carried. Then he smiled shyly at Taufan. Taufan pushed down the jealousy creeping into his heart—Ice had chosen Halilintar over him.

"Hello, Ice. How are you?" Taufan extended his hand to Ice, watching as the little boy took it and giggled softly before hiding against the curve of Halilintar’s neck.

"I missed you, brother." Ice’s voice was soft, barely audible, but Taufan was standing close enough to hear it clearly.

Taufan offered a small smile to mask his guilt. "I missed you too, Ice."

They walked together toward the playroom. Ice chatted away while playing with the buttons on Halilintar’s shirt. Occasionally, they would respond to his stories, but for the most part, they let him speak as much as he liked. There weren’t many people in the palace that Ice could talk to—most of the servants avoided him, and Ice preferred to stay in his room. Taufan knew he was lonely. He wished he could toss aside all his duties and run to play with him. But if he abandoned his responsibilities, then they would fall onto his brothers' shoulders. Taufan didn’t want them to bear the same burden he carried. It wasn’t that he doubted their abilities; he was simply following what his heart told him. Father said that was because he was an older brother—and an older brother always protects his younger brothers.

When they reached the playroom, Ice wriggled to ask Halilintar to put him down. He jumped before his feet even touched the floor and ran toward the two toddlers already playing in the room.

Taufan and Halilintar followed. Usually, the two little ones would rush to greet Taufan first, but now they seemed more interested in Halilintar. Taufan resisted the sour taste in his mouth as he realized his brothers were slowly beginning to forget him. It had been nearly weeks since the last time he played with them—it wasn’t surprising that they now felt more familiar with Halilintar.

How did Father and Mother manage to balance their duties to the kingdom and their family? They were the best parents Taufan knew. He admired them the way most children admired their parents. They always found time for their children, yet still performed their roles as King and Queen flawlessly.

Why was it so difficult for Taufan to be both?

He just wanted to be a good prince and a good brother. He knew Halilintar and Gempa could understand his busy schedule. But it was different with the other four brothers. They were still too young and still relied on the people they saw the most.

Taufan would need to ask Father and Mother again about how to handle this.

He snapped out of his thoughts when he felt a small hand touch him. He looked down to see Solar happily holding onto his pants. Taufan smiled, picked up his youngest brother, and kissed both of his chubby cheeks. He’d ask his parents later—right now, it was better to focus on spending time with his adorable brothers.

...

Blaze and Ice were very different.

Completely different, even though they were born on the same day.

Ice was quiet, rather shy, and lacked confidence. He preferred staying in his room and avoided crowds. Taufan understood the reason behind Ice’s behavior—it wasn’t hard to figure out. And he didn’t judge Ice for choosing to distance himself from others. In his eyes, it was better for him to stay away from those who didn’t understand him and would only hurt him. Besides, Taufan would always be there to protect Ice—as both his brother and his friend.

On the other hand, Blaze was spirited, cheerful, and full of energy. He darted left and right, running around and talking non-stop. If he saw Taufan walking through the palace halls, he would rush over and leap into Taufan’s arms. Taufan never protested—he loved how active his little brother was—but sometimes he wished Blaze would stop startling him mid-walk. Taufan was beginning to worry he might die young, like that one noble who died from shock.

Dealing with Blaze required every ounce of energy Taufan had. He’d be dragged around wherever Blaze wanted to go and had to listen to all of Blaze’s endless chatter. Taufan often wondered how Blaze had so much energy. Father once joked that Blaze probably stole some of Ice’s energy—hence his boundless stamina—but he stopped when both children burst into tears.

Taufan knew he was being foolish spending time with Blaze when he was sleep-deprived, but could he be blamed for wanting to be with his brother?

He could barely stay awake during his lessons, had been scolded and even punished for his lack of focus, once tripped while walking in the garden to clear his head, and he was pretty sure he had dozed off while Father was speaking to him.

He should have gone straight to his room and slept, just as Father had instructed. But Taufan had run into Blaze on the way, and there was no way he could refuse his little brother, who wanted to play with him. So, even though he stumbled a few times as Blaze dragged him around, Taufan thought it was a worthy sacrifice.

Blaze talked the entire time. Taufan couldn’t catch most of what he said, but he managed to guess the gist of it and gave responses here and there. Still, the exhaustion was getting worse. He started losing count of how many times he nearly tripped. His eyelids were heavy, his head was spinning from lack of sleep, and he was certain he would fall asleep the moment he closed his eyes.

“Brother, are you listening to me?”

“Hu-huh?”

What had Blaze just said? The last thing Taufan remembered was Blaze talking about getting a pet like other noble children his age. Was that still the topic, or had he moved on?

Unable to recall what they’d last discussed, Taufan felt a pang of guilt as he realized he hadn’t been paying attention. Blaze looked disappointed—maybe even a little upset—just as Taufan had expected. But the boy didn’t force him to focus. That made Taufan feel even guiltier, especially when Blaze let go of his hand and turned away from him.

“I’m sorry, Aze. I guess I’m just tired from reading too many books last night.”

“Mm. It’s okay. You’re always busy. I shouldn’t have bothered you.”

Taufan bit the inside of his cheek, remembering what Halilintar had said recently about how their younger brothers missed him. He had tried to manage his time as best as he could to still make time for his brothers—but even that wasn’t enough. He also recalled how shy Ice had been when he came to pick him up with Halilintar. And how Duri and Solar had run to Halilintar instead of him, like they usually did.

Taufan had to do better. He didn’t want to let his brothers down.

“I’m sorry, Aze. How about this—next week, Father will be visiting the Fontis City. I’ll ask him to let you come along. While he’s speaking with Marquess Fjord, we can explore and play together. Fontis is a beautiful city—you’ll love it.”

“Really?”

“Yes. I’d never lie to you. There are so many wonderful places in that city I want to show you.”

Blaze smiled. “Promise?”

“I promise.”

Chapter Text

Boboiboy Fanfiction

©  Boboiboy | Animonsta Studio

A/N: The entire story is purely fictional, and the author does not profit from writing this story. If there are any similarities in ideas, character names, or locations, they are purely coincidental.

≫ ──── ≪•◦ ❈ ◦•≫ ──── ≪

"Blaze. Blaze. Blaze!"

Taufan hissed at his younger brother, trying to get his attention, but Blaze was too mesmerized by the pile of cakes in front of them. Taufan hissed again, but instead of Blaze, it was Marchioness Fjord who turned to look at him. He quickly offered her a smile, hoping she wouldn't ask him anything.

Luckily, the smile worked. Marchioness Fjord returned it warmly, then turned her attention back to Father and the Marquess, who were deep in discussion about the development of an iron mine in the Marquess’s territory.

"Blaze!"

Blaze finally looked at him, visibly confused, still entranced by the array of desserts in front of them.

"Do you want to go out now?"

Confusion was written all over his brother's face. He had forgotten that the whole point of coming with Taufan to Fontis City wasn’t to enjoy the cakes at the Marquess’s manor, but to explore the beautiful city known for its devotion to the god of water, Vaser. Why did the sweets so enchant Blaze? At the palace, he enjoyed the finest confections reserved for the royal family—plus, Taufan often smuggled treats for him and Ice whenever he visited the Main Palace.

Huh, Blaze had forgotten their purpose for being here, and now Taufan didn’t know how to ask Father for permission to leave. They had carefully planned to escape this meeting. The original plan was for Blaze to complain about how boring it was and ask Taufan to take him outside to play. But now, that plan was ruined because Blaze was too focused on the cakes.

Honestly, Taufan could just drag Blaze outside with one of the many excuses he had prepared, but he wasn’t sure Blaze wouldn’t whine about leaving the desserts behind. So, for now, Taufan had to sit through the conversation between his father and the two nobles while his little brother continued to admire the sweets in front of him.

Fortunately, he didn’t have to endure it for too long. Their father noticed his boredom and asked that they be allowed to explore the Marquess Fjord’s manor. Taufan quickly pulled Blaze out of the room—allowing him to grab a few snacks so he wouldn’t complain—and dashed off toward the manor’s gardens.

"You got distracted," Taufan scolded.

Blaze looked at him with wide, innocent eyes and a mouth full of cake, looking both adorable and infuriating. Taufan felt like pinching him and hitting him at the same time. Instead, he sighed. Blaze was just too easily distracted. This was Taufan’s fault for not having a backup plan—he needed to start being more thorough and better prepared from now on.

"Come on, I’ll show you around Fontis City."

"But we didn’t ask for Father’s permission. What if he looks for us? And aren’t we not allowed to go without an escort?"

Taufan let out a small huff, but quickly softened his expression. He had to remind himself that Blaze was different from him. Taufan had been following Father since he was five years old. He’d spent hours in rooms filled with adults talking about things he didn’t understand, and he always found a way to sneak off when he felt bored or unneeded. He’d been doing this for years. But Blaze wasn’t like that. This was his first time accompanying Father—he had no experience at all.

Taufan recalled his own first time joining Father. Back then, he’d had Halilintar with him, teaching him how to behave and how to find the right moment to sneak away. Now, as Blaze’s older brother, it was his responsibility to teach him the same things Halilintar once taught him.

"Aze, listen to me," Taufan began. His serious tone immediately captured Blaze’s attention—perhaps because he wasn't used to hearing his brother speak like that. Taufan nearly laughed at the sight of Blaze trying to look serious while still chewing.

"When Father said we could explore the manor, that meant they were going to talk about something meant only for adults. And besides, we’re never without an escort."

"What do you mean?"

Taufan glanced around to make sure no one was within hearing distance. Then he leaned down and whispered directly into Blaze’s ear, "The Phantom Unit is always watching us."

"Phan—umph!" Taufan quickly covered Blaze’s mouth before he could say it out loud.

"Don’t talk so loudly!" Taufan hissed. Once Blaze nodded, he slowly took his hand away from his brother’s mouth.

Truthfully, many people already knew about the Phantom Unit, but only a few knew that their duty wasn’t just to protect the King. It had taken Taufan a while to realize he was always under the watch of that secret unit, one that only took orders from the King. And he only found out because Halilintar had told him.

The Phantom Unit is like a shadow. They lurk in the darkness, silent and unseen. Their presence is not easily detected. It's said that even their footsteps are as quiet as a falling feather—making no sound at all. They move quickly, without a word, always watching. It would be terrifying if you were just an ordinary citizen, but they serve the royal family. The dangers that threaten them far outweigh those faced by common people.

Announcing the presence of a dangerous shadow unit watching over you is the same as announcing the location of the Phantom Unit. They are called a secret force for a reason.

"Now that you know, I hope you won’t use it as an excuse to act recklessly. Let me remind you that we are the Princes of this nation, pillars meant to uphold the kingdom and protect our people. Everything we do is for Ignisia."

Blaze nodded, and Taufan took that as a sign that he understood what had been said.

"Now, do you want to explore Fontis City with your brother, or would you rather look around the Marquess Fjord's Manor?"

"I want to go out! I want to go out!" Blaze exclaimed cheerfully. Taufan had to clamp a hand over his brother’s mouth before he ended up announcing their plan to the entire manor. He glanced around nervously, praying no one had heard Blaze—besides the Phantom Unit, of course. Thankfully, the area was quiet, and not a single servant was nearby.

Taufan grabbed Blaze’s hand and led him toward the flower bushes near the garden wall. Blaze followed him, confused but obedient. He trusted his brother to show him something amazing, and he believed that whatever Taufan did must be the right thing. After all, Taufan was his big brother, and Blaze wanted nothing more than to be as cool as him. Whatever Taufan said or did, Blaze would believe in him.

Behind the bushes, right up against the garden wall, there was a hole. It wasn’t very big, but it was large enough for their child-sized bodies to fit through.

"How do you know there’s a hole in the Marquess Fjord’s garden wall?"

"How many times do you think I’ve visited this place?"

"Did you make this hole?!"

Taufan was stunned. How could Blaze even think that?! He was a prince, and their mother did not raise him to vandalize someone else’s property!

"What do you think I am? I passed etiquette class in three months with perfect marks, and I memorized every book on noble manners and proper conduct! Mother would never forgive me if I tarnished my reputation as a prince!" Taufan hissed.

He loved all his brothers—he did—and he would do anything for them. But being accused of something so shameful was just too much! As he’d said, he was a prince—someone expected to become King one day, someone who had to carry himself with grace at all times. Sure, he bent the rules sometimes—like sneaking off to the city instead of sitting through meetings—but damaging another noble’s home was beyond imagination.

Blaze seemed to realize the weight of his accusation and looked somewhat ashamed. Taufan sighed, reminding himself that Blaze was still just a kid and didn’t know any better. This was his first visit to a noble’s home with their father—there was no way he’d expect to find a hole in the wall.

"Leön showed it to me."

"Who’s Leön?"

Taufan wasn’t quite prepared for that question, but he supposed he should’ve expected it the moment he mentioned who had told him about the hole.

"He was… the late son of Marquess Fjord."

"Was he your friend?"

"You could say that."

They hadn’t been close. Taufan had only met the boy a few times. He was the same age as Taufan, and they both shared a love for painting. Their conversations had always been engaging whenever Taufan visited. Deep down, he admitted that Leön was a friend—and he believed Leön had felt the same. They just… hadn’t had enough time to truly get to know each other.

Carefully, Taufan crawled through the hole first, showing his brother how to get through safely without getting stuck. Blaze followed behind, though he rolled around too much and ended up getting his clothes far dirtier than necessary. Taufan led him to a small wooden cabin that looked weathered and worn by time. He opened the door slowly—but it made an ear-piercing creak that sent chills down their spines. Blaze clung tightly to Taufan’s clothes, sticking to him like a leech. Taufan didn’t shake him off—he remembered how scared he had been the first time Leön had shown him this place.

It felt like some ghost or terrifying entity lived inside that cabin. Why was there a wooden shack behind the wall of a Marquess’s Manor? Taufan didn’t have an answer, and frankly, he didn’t want to know.

He took out two cloaks from inside the shack, handed one to Blaze, and put the other on himself. Blaze hadn’t said much since they’d left the manor grounds—maybe he was still hesitant or worried. Taufan didn’t blame him. He held his little brother’s hand and guided them through the overgrown brush behind the Marquess’s Manor. It felt like they had been walking for fifteen minutes before they finally reached a small footpath used by townspeople.

Taufan kept holding his younger brother’s hand, making sure Blaze didn’t wander away from his side. Fontis City was a beautiful place, though Taufan felt it would’ve been better if he were showing the city to Ice instead of Blaze. However, Blaze was always eager to learn more about his twin, including the god who had blessed Ice. And the best place for that was the city whose people had dedicated their lives to worshipping Vaser, the God of Water.

They went to the lake first. There, Taufan showed him a small shrine built specifically for Vaser. He explained its purpose and smiled slightly when he saw Blaze’s face light up. Blaze even asked if he could make an offering to Vaser on Ice’s behalf. Taufan had to disappoint his brother by telling him the truth: Vaser despised Ignis—and vice versa. This was common knowledge. Even though Blaze and Ice loved each other deeply, the gods who blessed them did not share that sentiment. Ignis would be offended to know that the human he had blessed had offered something to his enemy. Taufan didn’t want to anger Ignisia’s guardian deity. And he wasn’t sure how Vaser would react to an offering from someone blessed by Ignis. It was better to let Blaze feel a little disappointed now than risk offending both gods.

Thankfully, Blaze was easy to cheer up. Taufan only had to take him to the market and buy him something small. He also brought Blaze to the city square to show him Fontis’s largest fountain. Blaze was in awe of the statue in the center—it looked like a fish, though Taufan wasn’t entirely sure.

As they ventured further into the city, Taufan happened to spot an abandoned building that still looked fairly intact. He scrutinized it and decided he would come back to investigate it at night—of course, he wouldn’t do so alone; Taufan wasn’t an idiot. He just thought the building would make a good hideout for him whenever he visited the city. He already had one in Rimbara and another in Bayugan—having one in Fontis shouldn’t be a problem.

Besides, they were going to be in Fontis for a whole week. That was plenty of time for Taufan to turn the place into a hideout.

They returned to the manor the same way they had left. When their father came looking for them, he found them in the garden, commenting on the various flowers growing there. Blaze giggled, thinking he had successfully snuck off behind their father’s back, not knowing that their father was perfectly aware of everything they had done today. The Phantom Unit trailing them wasn’t just for show—of course, they would report everything to the King. Even so, Taufan said nothing to his younger brother.

When night came and Taufan was sure most people were asleep, he opened the window of his room and began to whistle. A high-to-low-to-high tune—this was a code his father had taught him—a code used to summon one of the Phantom Unit members nearby. Truthfully, there were many more codes related to that mysterious organization, but his father never shared those with him. The reason was simple: only the King was allowed to know them. Not even the Queen or the Crown Prince had access to those codes. Taufan hoped that one day, when he became King, his father would pass those codes down to him.

The night was quiet once Taufan finished whistling, but it didn’t take long for him to sense someone nearby. He had done this many times before, so he was familiar with the Phantom Unit’s behavior. They always hid in the shadows, never showing themselves to anyone except the King. But if you called them, they would let you know they were there.

"I’m going back to that abandoned house we passed earlier." That was all Taufan needed to say. He didn’t need to elaborate—he knew they understood what he meant. He didn’t even need a reply to know they agreed.

Taufan returned to his room, put his outer clothes back on, and grabbed the cloak he had smuggled earlier that afternoon. He moved quietly, careful not to wake anyone, even though he was alone in his room. He jumped off the balcony, using his power to create stepping platforms so he wouldn’t be injured by the fall from the manor’s fourth floor.

He moved swiftly, dodging guards and leaping over the manor walls. Throughout the entire escape, Taufan could still sense the presence of a Phantom Unit member nearby. That presence gave him the peace of mind he needed to walk freely at night. People would probably call him crazy, but hey, he just wanted to have a little fun.

The abandoned house looked far creepier at night, but to Taufan, it was just an empty house in surprisingly good condition. It was fairly large—probably once owned by a wealthy person. Entering the building, Taufan lit the lantern he had brought with him to illuminate the room. He could see a mess of objects scattered everywhere: chairs, sofas, a chandelier, tables—everything was lying on the floor haphazardly. If he had to guess, he’d say the place was abandoned in a hurry.

It was dusty and dirty, but not as bad as he expected. All the doors and windows still looked intact, with no major damage. He snapped his fingers, creating a light breeze that slowly swept up the dust around him, forming a swirling cloud. Once he felt it was enough, he directed his hand toward the door. The dust whirlwind followed his gesture and disappeared out the doorway.

Now the room was no longer buried under a thick layer of dust, allowing Taufan to see much more clearly. He noticed shattered plates, scattered cutlery, melted candles, and even a woman’s shoe in one corner. Whatever happened here before the place was abandoned must have been interesting, but Taufan wasn’t curious enough to investigate. Thinking of his hideouts in Rimbara and Bayugan, he couldn’t help but feel a little disheartened by the condition of this house. It was messy and filthy.

Taufan had no intention of cleaning or tidying it up—he only cleared the dust because he didn’t want to sneeze constantly. Other than that, he would leave it as it was. He began inspecting the other rooms, assessing each space and making sure no one else was using the place as a home or—who knows—a den of some sort.

After checking twice, he was confident that no one else was in the house besides him and the unseen Phantom Unit member lurking nearby. Still, he could tell that many people had broken in and likely stolen valuables after the house was abandoned, judging by the messy drawers and ransacked cabinets.

Taufan quickly returned to the first room he had entered, likely a living room or a ballroom. Now, it was time to begin the real work—placing wards and protections around the house. A hideout had to be a safe place to retreat to, and he didn’t want anyone else staking a claim on the property.

He cast every protective spell he knew, inside and outside the house, ensuring it was secure as a safehouse. He even placed illusion magic over it, so others wouldn’t even realize the house was there. By the time he finished, Taufan was completely exhausted.

Compared to his other hideouts, Taufan might say that this one was the safest. He had layered it with every kind of protective spell he knew, and he even planned to return later to perfect everything. Maybe once it was all ready, he could tell Blaze about it. Hopefully, that would be enough to earn Blaze’s forgiveness for not spending more time with him.

Sneaking back into Marquess Fjord’s Manor was just as easy as sneaking out. In Taufan’s personal opinion, the Marquess seriously needed to tighten his security. Taufan had done this several times and always managed to get away with it. Fortunately, Marquess Fjord was one of the kindest and most generous nobles in the kingdom—if he wasn’t, Taufan was sure he’d have been dead years ago, killed by an assassin slipping into the manor as easily as he just had.

At breakfast, Taufan could tell that his father already knew about his midnight excursion. The raised eyebrow full of disapproval said it all. But Father didn’t say anything. He merely gave Taufan one of those trademark stares, probably knowing that whatever he said wouldn’t stop Taufan from sneaking out again.

Taufan just shrugged at him—not exactly the appropriate gesture to make to your king, but right now, Father was just a father, not his King.

When Taufan was later dragged along to inspect the future mining site with Father and Marquess Fjord, he knew it was revenge. His father’s petty way of getting back at him for his little adventure. While he internally groaned, Taufan still put on a polite smile and greeted the workers preparing their equipment. In the back of his mind, however, he was already planning his counterattack. He would need to involve Mother—Father was only afraid of her. Oh, and Halilintar and Gempa too—they were both brilliant when it came to plotting pranks against their father.

Back at the manor, Taufan was too exhausted to visit the hideout again. All he wanted was to collapse in bed and sleep until dinner. All his plans were ruined when Blaze burst into his room, bouncing on the bed and demanding attention like his younger brothers always did.

Taufan summoned what little strength he had left to play a game with Blaze. It wasn't anything physically exhausting—just a simple game he made up for his overly energetic brother that they could play without leaving the manor: counting all the paintings they could find in Marquess Fjord’s home.

Blaze was thrilled. He even recruited Marchioness Fjord and several servants to help with the counting—Taufan had no idea how his brother managed to charm them into joining the game. At least the manor was big enough that Taufan got over two hours of rest before Blaze came storming back into his room, excitedly reporting all the paintings he’d found.

...

The day before they returned to the capital, Taufan took Blaze out of the manor once again. This time, Blaze didn’t hesitate as he crawled through the hole in the wall—he actually looked excited. They repeated a few things they had done on their first adventure through Fontis City.

Taufan brought Blaze to the market again, and they bought a few gifts for their brothers. He had to talk Blaze out of buying a water beetle for Ice, insisting that a gemstone or clothing would be a far better choice.

Why did Blaze think Ice would like a bug? Taufan shook his head—he had no idea what went on in Blaze’s mind.

“What is this place? Why are we here?” Blaze asked.

Taufan smirked as he opened the door to the abandoned house that had officially become their hideout in Fontis City. “I found this place and cast protective spells all around it. From now on, this will be our hideout when we visit this city.”

Blaze’s face lit up, his confusion replaced by delight. The boy bounced excitedly, asking if the hideout really belonged to the two of them or if Taufan was just teasing. He looked so overjoyed by the idea of having a secret hideout with his brother that Taufan began considering whether he should tell Halilintar and Gempa about his other hideouts in Rimbara and Bayugan too—maybe he would, the next time he visited those cities with them.

Sharing this place with Blaze was definitely the right choice. Seeing the bright sparkle in his brother’s eyes made every exhausting night spent casting spells on the house completely worth it. If Blaze ever came to the city without him, he’d have a safe place to hide—unless his attacker happened to be a powerful sorcerer… or an angry Halilintar.

After showing Blaze around, Taufan decided it was time to return to the manor. Along the way, Blaze chattered excitedly about all the things they could do in the hideout and what they should add to it. Taufan listened attentively, laughing now and then at Blaze’s idea of hiding ridiculous objects inside their secret base.

“I’m glad you like it. We’ll clean it up the next time we come to this city.”

Blaze nodded eagerly—he was probably already planning what to throw out and what to keep.

“Remember this, Aze. This is our secret. No one else can know about it.”

Blaze frowned slightly and glanced around, as if to remind Taufan about the ever-present Phantom Unit. Taufan closed his eyes for a moment—being a prince was exhausting. Sometimes, he just wanted to run away and live a normal life. When he opened his eyes, he gave Blaze a small smile. “There’s nothing I can do about them. But they only swear loyalty to the King. They don’t gossip. The information will only reach Father’s ears. And even if it does, it won’t matter—he gains nothing from it. He’ll keep quiet. But if anyone else finds out, that’s a different matter.”

“I don’t really understand, brother.”

“That’s okay. One day you will. What matters is: don’t tell anyone about this. Can you promise me that?” Taufan held out his pinky finger.

Though Blaze still looked a bit uncertain, he hooked his pinky with Taufan’s. “Okay, I promise to keep it a secret.”

Taufan knew Blaze would keep his word. Their mother had always said how important promises were. Blaze was one of the best at honoring his promises—Taufan trusted his little brother completely.

Returning to the palace meant returning to their busy lives. Taufan often wondered how busy a King’s life must be if even being a prince was this exhausting. For now, he didn’t want to think about it.

He went back to his usual routine: attending classes, completing assignments from his father, visiting various regions to check their progress, training his powers, and so on—so much that he sometimes felt like he would die young from overwork. At least now and then, he found time to spend with his family. His parents had once taken them all to the royal family's lakeside retreat. There, Taufan got the rest and vacation he so desperately needed. He slept, played, and did many fun things with his parents and brothers.

Gempa showed him a clay doll he had made. Blaze climbed trees with him. Ice played in the water by the lake with him. Halilintar picked flowers for him. Duri and Solar darted back and forth across the grass, full of energy. Taufan thought… maybe this is what life would be like if he weren’t a prince.

“What are you reading?”

Taufan looked up, pulling his attention away from the book in his hands as Gempa walked toward him. He lowered the book onto his lap and leaned against the tree trunk behind him. “Just a regular storybook.”

“Oh yeah? I want to hear about it.”

Whether Gempa was truly interested or just looking for something to talk about, Taufan didn’t care. He was just happy to have Gempa sitting beside him, also leaning against the tree trunk, while he told him the story he had been reading.

Their conversation flowed naturally, shifting from the contents of the book to other things. Gempa talked about his difficult classes, and Taufan offered to help. He also shared his progress in controlling his powers. Taufan was incredibly proud of his younger brother for learning to manage his abilities. Blaze still lost control often, and Ice disliked using his power. Duri and Solar were still too young to begin their training, so it truly warmed Taufan’s heart whenever one of his brothers came to him proudly speaking about their abilities.

“When you become king one day, I want to stay by your side,” Gempa said.

“Really?”

“Yes. I’ll study hard so I can be your royal advisor, like Uncle Pian and Father.”

“Wow, I’ll be the happiest king ever if that happens. Brother Hali wants to be my knight, and you want to be my advisor. How lucky am I?”

Gempa giggled. “Yes, you’re very lucky, brother.”

...

There was an outbreak spreading in the southeastern region of Ignisia. A mysterious illness had emerged from seemingly nowhere and claimed many lives. Both Father and Mother were overwhelmed by the crisis. Father had dispatched the Royal Army to investigate the source of the outbreak, while Mother worked with various people to help those affected.

Then, another issue arose—a new bandit group had appeared. Calling themselves Crimson Moon, they had committed numerous crimes. Taking advantage of the chaos caused by the outbreak and weakened security in several regions, they began looting and killing. Ignisia was now fighting both a deadly illness and organized banditry at the same time.

It was a difficult time for them all.

“Father, this problem with the bandits must be dealt with immediately. The kingdom is already battling the mysterious illness—if the bandits continue to run wild, a great disaster will befall Ignisia.”

“I know that, Prince.”

Taufan bit his tongue. He wanted to ask why Father hadn’t done anything yet if he already knew, but he held back. He glanced at Mother, who looked utterly exhausted after running between countless refugee camps. She had brought along many healers and doctors to help the afflicted. Many people from Count Balakung’s estate had been mobilized for this crisis. The people from that region believed in Gevix as their goddess, and many of them possessed healing abilities. Though not as powerful as Count Balakung and his close subordinates, they were still able to help treat milder cases.

But it still wasn’t enough. Every day, the death toll rose. A cure had not yet been discovered. Volunteers were beginning to burn out. Citizens from other regions were becoming anxious that the disease might spread to their areas. Trade routes were shutting down due to the plague and the bandits. The bandits grew bolder as guards were redirected to support the afflicted regions. The only region where security remained tight was the western region—but they were currently engaged in battles against both wild beasts and a neighboring country. The King refrained from calling reinforcements from the west, understanding their situation. Still, Taufan could see the looming danger if the plague and the bandits weren’t dealt with soon. The western region would lose its strength too.

Taufan knew the western lands weren’t suitable for agriculture. Their soil wasn’t as fertile as that in the South or Southeast. Most of their food supplies were imported from those regions. The fall of the Southeast would soon impact them as well. Some soldiers might survive on rations, but the civilian population would not.

If this continued, Ignisia would be struck by severe famine. They had to solve this.

He wished he could do more for his kingdom. Right now, he was still just a 10-year-old child. Despite being a prince and having accomplished much, his parents didn’t yet trust him with such massive responsibilities. He needed to talk with Halilintar. His older brother always knew what to do.

Taufan left the King’s study in search of Halilintar. He found him in the training grounds, striking down another practice dummy. His brother looked tense—just like Taufan. He knew whatever weighed on his mind was also troubling Halilintar.

When Halilintar saw him approaching, he lowered his sword and offered a faint smile. “How are you, Taufan?”

“Worried. I’m filled with worry right now, brother.”

Halilintar winced, as if he hadn’t expected such an honest answer. Perhaps it had been meant as nothing more than small talk—a way to ease into a deeper conversation.

"Did you just speak with Father?"

"I did. I shared my concerns about the current situation. Father said he’s well aware of what’s happening."

"But he didn’t say what he plans to do," Halilintar said the words Taufan couldn’t. Taufan nodded reluctantly. He had always believed their father had the answer to every problem in the kingdom. He was a wise and kind king, full of knowledge and always knew how to resolve things. And on top of that, they had Mother—the Queen of Ignisia. A veteran of war and a master strategist who had led them to many victories.

But with this growing crisis, Taufan had to accept that even their father and mother had limits.

"You want to do something about the kingdom’s current situation," Halilintar stated.

"Yes. I wish I were older. If I were already fourteen, Mother would let me go with her and help our people suffering from the plague."

At that, Halilintar scoffed. "If you were fourteen, I’d be sixteen, and Father wouldn’t be able to stop me from going out to take care of the bandits."

Halilintar was just as frustrated as Taufan. Their ages were a frustrating restriction. They both knew they could help, that they had the power to do something—but they weren’t allowed. Because under Ignisia’s law, they were still children. Still under fourteen, and not expected to take on adult responsibilities.

It was maddening.

"What should we do? We can’t just sit around and do nothing."

Halilintar paused in thought. Then he looked at Taufan seriously. "What’s the most urgent issue right now?"

"All of them are urgent. If the plague keeps spreading, all of Ignisia will be affected. We've already quarantined the infected regions, but the disease still spreads rapidly. If the bandits keep looting and killing, it’ll cause widespread panic and loss of trust in the royal family."

"I understand, but which issue do you think we should deal with first?"

"The bandits. We can only start controlling the plague once we have a cure. But the bandits—we can fight them now. If the Royal Army is deployed, I’m sure we can stop them."

Halilintar nodded. He stepped forward and placed a hand on Taufan’s shoulder. His crimson eyes shone with resolve as he said, "Taufan, you’ve always been the smartest among us. I told you before, I’ll be the knight who protects you. I’ll use my strength to face these problems—so you must use your mind. I’ll try to convince Father about the bandits. I’ll talk to you again once I get an answer."

Taufan wasn’t sure their father would grant Halilintar’s request regarding the bandits, but if Halilintar was doing everything he could for Ignisia, then Taufan should too.

"Alright, Brother. I’ll think about what I can do to help with the plague. If not, we may need to prepare for the worst."

The words "famine" were never spoken, but Taufan knew Halilintar was thinking the same thing.

Halilintar’s eyes were filled with determination, and Taufan knew his were too. They would do anything for their kingdom. As Father always said, the royal family was born to serve Ignisia, to make sacrifices for Ignisia. This was the moment their abilities would be tested. Taufan would do everything he could to save his kingdom.

Chapter Text

Boboiboy Fanfiction

©  Boboiboy | Animonsta Studio

A/N: The entire story is purely fictional, and the author does not profit from writing this story. If there are any similarities in ideas, character names, or locations, they are purely coincidental.

≫ ──── ≪•◦ ❈ ◦•≫ ──── ≪

The Southeast region had completely fallen. The plague had already spread throughout the area and had now reached the Southern and Eastern regions. No matter what efforts were made to control the spread of the disease, it continued to spread at an alarming rate.

Taufan anxiously bit his thumb. They had fully quarantined the Southeast, isolating parts of the South and East to prevent anyone from entering or leaving the affected areas. Even volunteers and soldiers assigned there could not return to their homes for fear they might bring the disease back to their families. Many medical workers and soldiers had already contracted the plague, and a significant number of them had died.

His mother hadn’t been able to return to the palace for the past two weeks. Taufan grew more anxious by the day. What was he supposed to do?

The Southern region might be able to hold out longer than the others, but that didn’t mean they could allow it to fall too. Ignisia’s food supply depended on it after the fall of the Southeast! On the other hand, the Eastern region was deeply concerning. The East was not like the Southeast or South, which were rich in resources. Their lands were sandy and barren, more desert than river. Nor were they like the North and Northwest, full of forests teeming with diverse flora and fauna. Nor even like the West, which, despite its lack of food, gained income by selling parts of the ferocious beasts that attacked their lands.

The Eastern border, known as the poorest region in Ignisia, directly bordered the “No Man’s Land,” an area shrouded in mystery with unknown dangers and contents. Plants barely grew there, animals were scarce, and those that did survive were mostly poisonous or inedible. It had no mining potential or anything else of value. The people there were already suffering greatly—if the plague reached them too, Taufan wasn’t sure they could survive.

The plague alone was enough to give Taufan a headache, not to mention the issue of the bandits. Taufan was certain that some of those bandits had also been infected—they raided plague-ridden areas, so how were they still standing?

He didn’t know how they were growing stronger over time instead of weakening, but he knew they needed to deal with the bandit problem. If infected bandits made their way to clean regions and started spreading the disease, Ignisia would descend into total chaos.

He had to act now.

“Sir Jason, I trust in your abilities with medicine. We must find a cure for the disease spreading through the kingdom. Too many lives have already been lost, and we must not allow the people to suffer any further. If you need to recruit doctors or alchemists from other nations, do not hesitate to tell me. I’ll make sure the palace covers all expenses. Also, be sure to cooperate with Count Balakung and his subordinates. They are blessed by the Goddess Gevix. I will help in any way I can.”

The man before him remained kneeling, his head bowed low. “I shall carry out your orders, Your Highness.”

Taufan gave a stiff nod. With his father and Uncle Pian busy dealing with the bandits, and his mother unable to return to the palace due to the ever-increasing rate of infection, Taufan had been left to manage everything he could as a Prince of Ignisia. Halilintar might assist in some matters, but there was still so much left to be done.

He knew he should ask for help from the senior nobles who had more experience managing territories, but Taufan didn’t want to take the risk. He wasn’t skilled at judging people—he wasn’t like Ice, who could see through someone’s hidden intentions. There was always the chance he might be taken advantage of.

All he could do was his best—stand tall as one of the pillars holding the kingdom together.

...

It took months and countless lives before they were finally able to develop a medicine that could help those affected by the plague. Perhaps it wasn't a cure that could fully heal the infected, but it was capable of easing the symptoms and curing those who only displayed mild signs. At the very least, the number of lives lost began to gradually decrease over time.

The spread had reached the entire Eastern region and was quickly making its way into the Northeast. Fortunately, unlike the East, which lacked defenses, the Northeastern region was far more prepared.

They had been making preparations since the plague entered the Eastern lands. Duchess Satriantar, who governed the Northeast, had implemented strict regulations on who and what could enter her territory. She didn’t hesitate to spend a great deal of money for the sake of her people. She ensured that none of her citizens would go hungry, even if they were temporarily cut off from the outside world.

When the plague eventually reached her region, she made sure not to incite panic. She had already prepared a facility far from residential areas specifically to treat the infected. She also constantly collaborated with volunteers stationed in regions that were infected earlier.

The discovery of the medicine for the plague was in large part due to her relentless support for the researchers.

Many gave their lives while trying to save others, but their sacrifices will never be forgotten. They might not receive the proper burials they deserved for all they had done, but Taufan made sure their names would be remembered. He had already ordered records to be kept of everyone who died during this crisis. There were many, but each of them deserved remembrance, not to be forgotten.

"This is the first sample of the medicine we've tested, Your Highness. It shows a high success rate in those with mild symptoms and eases the symptoms of those in more severe conditions. However, it does not affect those suffering from critical symptoms."

Lord Jason gestured to a vial containing moss-green liquid. It looked repulsive, but it was this very concoction that had saved so many lives. Taufan read the notes that had been handed to him—records of how many people had been saved by the medicine. He also carefully studied the ingredients listed in the formula.

"Who brewed this potion?"

"A woman named Keitha. She is a follower of the Goddess Gevix and a subordinate of Count Balakung."

"Is she blessed by the Goddess Gevix?"

"To my knowledge, yes, Your Highness. She is among the blessed."

Taufan nodded. He picked up the bottle and gently swirled the potion in front of his face. The faint golden shimmer within the mossy green mixture didn’t make its appearance any more appealing—if anything, it made it worse.

"No wonder I recognized the faint energy in this potion."

A confused look crossed Lord Jason’s face. “Forgive me, Your Highness. But what do you mean?”

“Recently, Duri displayed his powers by healing a wound on Solar’s leg. I recognize a similar trace of power in this potion—the power of the Goddess Gevix. Keitha likely channeled her divine energy while brewing it. That could explain why the potion is so effective.”

Understanding dawned on Lord Jason’s face. He didn’t ask further. Instead, he opened another box, revealing vials filled with bluish-green liquid.

“This is a sample of the potion we are currently developing, Your Highness.”

“The color is different. What sets this potion apart from the first one?”

“For this one, we attempted to include Deathroot Fang [1] and Viper Vine [2] as part of the ingredients.”

[1] Deathroot Fang, or Dens Mortiradix in Latin—meaning “Tooth of Death”—is a fictional plant created for this story. It resembles a mix of roots and fangs: its stalk is a jet-black root that juts from the ground like a giant tooth, sharp and hard like horn. The tips ooze a dark greenish liquid that is highly toxic.

[2] Viper Vine is a fictional plant created for this story. It has wide, glossy green leaves with purple streaks resembling snake scales. Its flowers only bloom at night and are shaped like tiny silver fangs.

Taufan’s brow furrowed. “Aren’t both of those plants extremely poisonous?”

“They are, Your Highness. However, when these two plants are combined, they neutralize each other and create a powerful remedy capable of curing many illnesses.”

Taufan had read about such cases before. When two poisonous plants were combined, they could produce one of two things: a deadly toxin or a powerful cure. It seemed that the combination Jason spoke of had produced the latter.

“Even so, isn’t it incredibly risky to administer this to sick citizens?”

“Yes, Your Highness. That is why the potion is still in development. We have yet to fully neutralize the residual toxins from the mixture of the two plants. However, I believe that if we succeed in perfecting this potion, it could be the breakthrough we need.”

"Deathroot Fang is a rare plant. It only grows in places with an unnaturally high number of deaths and is one of the plants whose use is strictly regulated due to the dangers it poses. I don't mean to doubt your abilities or those of your research team, but is there no alternative? The first potion—what makes it less viable than this one? I've read the list of ingredients you used, and although some are difficult to obtain, such as Paralax Poxy [3], they’re still far safer and not considered illegal."

[3] Paralax Poxy is a fictional plant created for this story. It has bluish-purple leaves with glowing patterns that appear to slowly shift, as though following the gaze of any creature that looks at it. Its stem is thin, flexible, and covered in a layer of microcrystals that sparkle under dim light. Its flowers are star-shaped with five translucent petals.

“I understand Your Highness’s concerns completely. However, the first potion we successfully developed does little for patients with more severe symptoms. If the use of Deathroot Fang is prohibited, we will do our best to find other alternatives.”

Taufan gave a slow nod. He stared worriedly at the vial of bluish-green liquid. Deathroot Fang was an extremely dangerous plant. Its poison could cause hallucinations, paralysis, and death if not treated properly. There was no way Taufan would offer something so toxic to his people under the promise of healing. He couldn't take a risk like that.

The plant wasn't called a root grown from death without reason. It was a terrifying thing—something that felt like it belonged in another world. Like it came from the darkest depths of a demon realm. Horrifying, even though he had only ever seen illustrations of it.

“Sir Jason, I trust your abilities. You and the rest of the research team have created a remedy that can help our people. Ignisia will forever be indebted to you all.”

“You honor me too much, Your Highness.”

“I will report this to the King. I hope you continue your hard work. Let me know whatever you need—I will make sure it's provided.”

“Thank you for your support, Your Highness.”

After Lord Jason had left, Taufan returned to reading the reports the man had given him. Lord Jason was someone he deeply trusted—not just because the man was his teacher, but because he was exceptionally talented. Taufan believed his talents could greatly aid the kingdom in its time of need. Still, sometimes he worried Lord Jason was too eager for recognition, so much so that he occasionally lost sight of right and wrong. Taufan sincerely hoped Lord Jason had someone to remind him that he didn’t need to go to such lengths just to be acknowledged.

Taufan already admired the man greatly. He was a good teacher and a brilliant alchemist. He had helped Taufan create wound salves for Maripos, and now he was helping to develop a cure for the plague spreading across the kingdom. Taufan vowed in his own name that when all this was over, he would ask the King to grant honors to Lord Jason and the team working alongside him. Of course, volunteers, doctors, nurses, and guards involved also deserved to be honored—including those who gave their lives in service.

For now, he should meet with his father and begin discussing their next steps. Taufan hoped Halilintar would also be present in his father’s study. He really needed Halilintar’s support and wanted to hear updates about their efforts to deal with the bandits.

If Taufan recalled correctly, Halilintar had mentioned that Father finally allowed him to join the bandit operation—though with many conditions, of course. They had summoned half the troops from the Western region for this. It wasn’t easy. The West, constantly at war with both wild beasts and a neighboring nation, had suddenly been ordered to pull back half its forces to deal with bandits. Taufan was certain there had been fierce debates between the Western nobility and other nobles demanding military assistance.

If the plague hadn’t struck the Northeast, Taufan was sure his father would have chosen to ask Duchess Satriantar to lead the forces against the bandits instead.

Perhaps the fall of the Southeast and South had affected the West enough that they were willing to send their troops to protect the food supply promised by the King. Taufan would need to ask Halilintar about this. His brother had been present during Countess Lorillis Azar’s argument with the King and the other nobles regarding her troops and the state of her lands.

Taufan had to admit, Countess Lorillis was a warrior—much like Duchess Satriantar. She had taken over leadership of the Western Region after her husband, Count Erzen Azar, died in the war. She was a strong woman, and Taufan admired her. A truly remarkable lady.

As he walked toward his father’s study, Taufan thought about the topics he needed to discuss with him, occasionally greeting servants along the way. They returned his greetings with polite nods and warm smiles.

If Halilintar was in their father’s study, Taufan would bring up the issue of the bandits as well. If not, they would focus solely on the plague currently ravaging the kingdom. They also needed to discuss the rising poverty levels over the past few months and how best to distribute aid to the people in need. Taufan already had a plan in mind—he just needed his father’s approval to put it into action. With his father’s support, Taufan was confident he could persuade the other nobles. He would also bring Gempa, his sweet and silver-tongued younger brother, to help carry out the plan.

However, Taufan couldn’t find his father in his study, the throne room, or even the library. It was unusual—his father was almost always in one of those three places at a time like this. Where could he be, if not there?

Was he visiting Uncle Pian’s office? Or perhaps speaking with one of his aides?

Luckily, Taufan ran into Taran during his search for his father.

"Taran, have you seen where the King is?"

"Greetings, Your Highness Prince Taufan," Taran bowed respectfully. The man had a kind face, lined with the creases of frequent smiles. "As for His Majesty, I believe he is currently at the training grounds with the recruits of the Royal Guard."

"Thank you, Taran."

"Whenever you are in need, Your Highness, this old servant shall always be at your service."

Taufan gave the man a soft nod, telling him he could return to his duties while Taufan made his way to the training grounds in search of his father. If his guess was correct, Halilintar would surely be there too.

Perhaps Father was giving a speech, or maybe he was personally training the newly recruited members of the Royal Guard. They had been recruiting heavily to fill the vacancies left by the soldiers sent to the plague-affected regions. These recruits were likely being prepared to help with the bandit problem.

Joining the Royal Guard wasn’t easy, normally—there were many requirements one had to fulfill to be accepted. But the kingdom was under pressure, and they could no longer afford to be selective. Those with courage, the ability to wield weapons, loyalty to the kingdom, and who had come of age were permitted to enlist. It seemed they had gathered enough people, and that was likely why Father was meeting with them in person.

Upon arriving at the training grounds, Taufan saw a group of more than fifty people standing in formation. In front of them stood his father, tall and commanding—an awe-inspiring figure in Taufan's eyes. Just three steps behind him stood Halilintar, clearly trying to mirror their father's posture. To Taufan, his brother looked just as impressive.

"You are the chosen ones, those who will serve in the Royal Guard. You may not yet possess the skills your seniors do, but with dedication and hard training, I believe you will reach—or even surpass—them. Your backgrounds do not matter here. In this place, you are comrades. You will support one another in all things. Cast aside any thoughts of ‘I am from a noble family’ or ‘he is poor.’ There is no rich or poor in the Royal Guard. Everyone is equal, and the only thing that matters here is merit!"

His father's voice thundered across the training grounds—firm, authoritative, yet kind. He was the perfect image of a just and compassionate leader. Taufan admired him greatly. He hoped that one day, when he became king, he would be able to speak with the same strength and conviction.

Unfortunately, this would likely take some time. Taufan had hoped to speak with his father and Halilintar soon. Should he wait until they finish, or go find his younger brothers to spend time with them instead? But Duri and Solar were already in their mandatory lessons, and Blaze and Ice probably still had class. Perhaps only Gempa had free time at the moment. He would look for Gempa and talk to him about his plans. His younger brother was wise beyond his years. Taufan was certain Gempa would grow up to be someone great.

"Prince Taufan?"

Taufan turned toward the voice and saw a dark-blue-haired man with sun-kissed skin standing nearby. He hadn’t even noticed the man approach! Gods—he needed to stop getting so distracted and start paying more attention to his surroundings. His father would surely be disappointed in his lack of awareness. He was someone blessed by the Wind Goddess, and most wind-bearers were sensitive to sound. Yet, being distracted meant he hadn’t even noticed something that should’ve been second nature to him. He really needed to train harder.

“Captain Kaika, I got a little distracted—my apologies for not noticing your presence.”

“No, Your Highness. The fault is mine for approaching you without warning.”

Taufan waved his hand dismissively. He had simply been too caught up in his own thoughts to realize the man was nearby. If Kaika had intended to attack him, he would’ve already been bleeding on the floor.

“Were you waiting for His Majesty and Prince Halilintar?”

“To be honest, yes. I wanted to discuss something with Father and my brother, but it seems they’re busy at the moment. It’s probably best not to interrupt them and wait until they’re finished.”

Captain Kaika nodded slowly, agreeing with Taufan’s observation.

“Are they the ones being sent to deal with the bandits?”

“No, Your Highness. They’re new recruits. It would be unthinkable to send them against the bandits who’ve been terrorizing the kingdom. The Royal Guard is stretched thin, and we need all the help we can get just to fill the gaps and carry out daily operations. These new recruits, once trained, will help with duties such as aid distribution, maintaining order in quarantined areas, and escorting supply convoys from other nations.”

“I see. Yes, I thought it would be too reckless to send them after the bandits. We’d lose too many lives.”

“Exactly, Your Highness. That’s why only the most capable members of the Royal Guard will be deployed to handle the bandit threat.”

“Does that mean you’ll be part of the operation as well? I heard you were just recently promoted to Captain, and already you’re taking on such a heavy burden.”

Captain Kaika smiled proudly, puffing out his chest as he tapped his armored breastplate. “I am honored to serve this kingdom, Your Highness. Any duty assigned to me is my responsibility to fulfill, and I consider it a great privilege to have been chosen for this.”

Taufan chuckled at the man’s earnest response. Captain Kaika truly was a dedicated soldier. No wonder Halilintar admired him so much. They were sparring partners, too—Kaika was the only one who could match Halilintar’s swordsmanship.

“How is my brother doing? I haven’t had the chance to duel him recently. Has he made any progress?”

“Prince Halilintar has been practicing some new techniques. They’re still a bit rough around the edges, but I can already see the potential. He even managed to trick me a few times with his movements.”

“I’m sure it won’t be long before you figure them out and force him to come up with even newer ones.”

Captain Kaika laughed. “You flatter me, Your Highness. Prince Halilintar is far more skilled than I am. He’s only thirteen, and already he can match nearly every adult in Ignisia. I truly believe he’ll become the greatest swordsman in the kingdom one day.”

Hearing Captain Kaika speak with such confidence about Halilintar filled Taufan with pride. His brother truly was a genius with a sword. Taufan had no doubt he would earn the title of Ignisia’s greatest swordsman before he even turned eighteen. Halilintar’s dream of becoming a strong and courageous knight no longer seemed impossible.

They continued chatting for a while, discussing the new recruits, the locations the bandits had targeted, and the damage they had caused. Time passed quickly, and when Taufan glanced back at the training grounds, the recruits were now practicing stances, mimicking Halilintar’s movements.

This would take a while. It was better for him to go find Gempa.

“It looks like my father and brother won’t be done anytime soon. I should go find my younger brother, Gempa.”

“Very well, Your Highness. My apologies for keeping you.”

Taufan laughed softly. “No need, Captain. I had a delightful conversation with you. I look forward to seeing the great work you’ll do in your new post.”

“I shall do my best, Your Highness.”

With a small wave to Captain Kaika, Taufan turned and left the training grounds. He went off to find his younger brother, Gempa, hoping they could discuss his plans. Taufan needed his brother’s input.

Finding Gempa was far easier than finding their father, as the boy was in his room at the Sunrise Palace, reading a book when Taufan arrived.

"Brother! What honor have I done to receive this visit?"

Taufan snorted. Gempa was always teasing him like that.

"I came to discuss something with you, little brother."

"Oh?"

"Yes, oh. It’s about the current state of Ignisia. I want to hear your thoughts."

Gempa nodded. He got down from his bed and gestured for Taufan to sit with him on the window ledge. Taufan followed and handed over a few sheets of paper he had brought. While waiting for his brother to finish reading, Taufan observed the room—it had changed slightly since his last visit. He noticed several messy floral arrangements placed in vases beside the bed.

"Those are from Duri and Solar. They gave them to me yesterday after messing up the palace garden," Gempa said suddenly.

Taufan turned to look at him. Gempa remained focused on the papers, unfazed.

"Ah, our little brothers are growing up quickly."

"Indeed."

Gempa lowered the papers and looked at Taufan with a complicated expression—both worried and confused. Taufan felt it was his duty to explain everything clearly.

"Sir Jason brought this report earlier. He also told me about the medicine he’s currently developing."

"The medicine is very helpful for treating those with mild symptoms. Those who were newly infected have recovered because of it, and the death toll has dropped. Is there something wrong with the treatment?"

"Exactly. The medicine made by him and his team has helped us a lot. However, it does not affect those with severe symptoms. People are still dying—we need to develop a new variant that can help those in critical condition."

"I don’t know much about medicine, brother. I don’t think I can give any proper advice on that matter."

"That’s okay. I don’t understand it well either. But the issue with the medicine is just one of many. You’ve read the list of ingredients they’re using, right?"

Gempa nodded, waiting for Taufan to continue. "Many of the ingredients are hard to obtain. The kingdom’s treasury has been rapidly depleting over the past few months. We can’t rely solely on state funds to help our people. There’s so much that needs financing, and now the kingdom’s income continues to decline day by day. Two days ago, Father passed a law to lower taxes because many citizens couldn’t afford to pay them. The developing iron mine in Fontis had to be shut down since it’s located in an area with the most volunteers. The gold mine in Oryn has also seen reduced output due to a labor shortage. Trade in the South and Southeast has been halted because of the spreading plague. And since those were the first infected regions, food production has plummeted, and many of our people are going hungry. If this continues, the consequences could be disastrous."

"I understand what you’re saying. With the kingdom in this condition, a lot of terrible things could happen. The war in the West won’t stop just because we’re struggling—if anything, this is the perfect time for them to strike while Ignisia is weak. And the signs of famine are becoming clear. With all these issues, there’s a chance that rebel factions may rise to incite the people."

Taufan nodded grimly. He was glad that Gempa understood his concerns, though hearing it spoken aloud made the threat feel all the more real. The downfall of their kingdom no longer seemed far off. There was so little he could do. That was why he needed all the support he could get.

"Exactly. I’ve been thinking of ways to replenish the treasury. One idea is to request the nobility to contribute a portion of their wealth."

"I’m not sure they’d be willing to do that."

True. It was unlikely they could simply ask the nobles to hand over their wealth—even if it was for the sake of the kingdom and its people. Many Ignisian nobles valued their luxury and comfort more than compassion.

"That’s why I think we need to set an example. As princes, we have personal wealth that isn’t tied to the state treasury. I won’t ask our four younger brothers—they’re too young to understand—but I’m hoping you and Halilintar will join me in this plan."

"I trust you, brother. I’ll give a portion of mine as well. For Ignisia."

Gempa—his sweet, thoughtful little brother. Taufan couldn’t be more grateful to have him.

"Thank you, Gempa. That means a lot."

"Anything for you, Brother."

"Of course, this won’t solve everything overnight. There will be some stubborn nobles who won’t comply, even if their prince leads the way. I plan to discuss this idea with Father. Maybe he has insights that can help refine the plan. Also, his support is crucial if we’re going to pressure certain nobles."

Gempa nodded. "Right. Father can use his authority to push those nobles to act. Ah, I do have some suggestions—would you be willing to hear them?"

"Of course, Gempa. I’d be very grateful to hear your ideas."

"I don’t think we should only target the nobility."

"What do you mean?"

"In some poor regions, like the eastern border under Baron Payekha, there might be nothing to give. I’ve never been there, but I doubt the baron has much to offer. And that area’s affected by the plague too, right?"

What Gempa said was true. Not all nobles were able to contribute—especially those in plague-affected areas. He would need to start listing which nobles should be asked to contribute and which could be exempted from the plan.

"Besides, it’s not just nobles who have money. Commoners do too."

Taufan narrowed his eyes slightly. "What are you implying, Gempa?"

"I’m not saying we should ask the poor. But aren’t there many wealthy individuals in Ignisia? People who’ve made their fortune through trade and other ventures. Some commoners are far wealthier than nobles. We could extend your plan to include them."

Why hadn’t he thought of that? Gempa was right—there were many wealthy individuals in Ignisia. After all, the kingdom was home to a wide range of people, not just nobles and peasants. Many entrepreneurs had amassed fortunes far exceeding those of some nobles. But they were businessmen—they wouldn’t just give their money away. They would want something in return. Yet another thing to discuss with Father. And Uncle Pian should be involved too.

"You’re right, little brother. Thank you for pointing out the flaw in my plan. What would I do without you?"

Gempa waved his hand modestly. "No, Brother. I only offered a few simple thoughts. It’s nothing special."

"Don’t sell yourself short, Gempa. I knew I’d gain new insight by talking to you."

Gempa’s face flushed at the praise. It was rather cute, seeing his little brother grow bashful over such a simple compliment. Perhaps Taufan should involve him in his work more often—and praise him more, too.

Taufan had just opened his mouth to say something else when a knock sounded at the door. The two brothers exchanged glances, and with a small nod from Taufan, Gempa gave permission for the visitor to enter. It was Taran, the Head Steward of the Main Palace.

The older man's expression showed a flash of surprise upon seeing Taufan, but his years of service had taught him well to mask any reaction. He bowed respectfully to both princes. For some reason, his composed demeanor only made both boys more uneasy. They knew something had happened.

“Forgive me for disturbing you, Your Highnesses.”

“No, it’s all right, Taran. Is there a problem?” Taufan asked cautiously. Given the chaos currently gripping the kingdom, he didn’t exactly expect good news.

“I regret to inform you, Your Highness, that Her Majesty the Queen fainted a short while ago.”

Mother!

“What happened to the Queen?” Taufan asked again, trying to keep calm for Gempa’s sake, who now looked visibly panicked.

“The healers suspect that Her Majesty may have contracted the illness currently spreading through the kingdom, Your Highness.”

Taufan’s mind went blank. Mother had returned to the palace a week ago. They hadn’t spent much time together because she’d been isolating herself to ensure she wasn’t infected or a risk to others. She’d even stayed in the Sunset Palace—far from the Main and Sunrise Palaces. It was all her idea to protect those in the palace in case she had caught the disease. The incubation period was said to be a week. Taufan had thought that if nothing had happened by now, she would be safe and could rejoin the family. But now Taran stood here, delivering news that she had collapsed—and may be infected?

“The Royal Physician is currently examining Her Majesty to determine her condition. You are both summoned to meet with His Majesty in his study.”

“We understand. We’ll go immediately.”

Taran took his leave, but Taufan wasn’t sure he even registered it. The world suddenly felt like it was spinning far too fast, and a wave of dizziness washed over him. A gentle touch on his hand brought him back. It was Gempa—he looked just as pale and shaken as Taufan felt. Taufan knew he had to stay strong for his brother, so he forced a stiff smile and gestured for them to head to their father’s study together.

The walk to the Main Palace was filled with silence. Taufan was lost in thought, unable to form a single word. He didn’t know if Gempa felt the same, but the walk felt endless—like they were heading to the far-off Sunset Palace instead of just across the grounds. It felt like they had been walking forever when they finally reached the study.

Taufan relied on muscle memory to knock and announce their arrival.

When the door opened, he saw their father seated at his desk with Halilintar standing before him. Blaze and Ice were sitting together on a sofa, holding hands. Duri and Solar were nowhere to be seen—likely considered too young for this discussion.

“Prince Taufan, Prince Gempa, thank you for coming,” their father said as they entered.

The tension in the room was palpable—so thick it could be cut with a knife. Taufan looked at each of his brothers in turn.

Halilintar’s expression was stern, his arms crossed, and his posture tense, clearly on edge. Gempa had taken a seat on one of the sofas and stared down at his hands, completely silent. Blaze and Ice leaned against each other. Blaze’s expression remained neutral, but the worry was clear in his eyes. Ice’s face was far more readable—he looked deeply worried, his eyes shimmering with unshed tears. He’d probably be crying already if Blaze weren’t there beside him.

Taufan turned his gaze to their father. His face betrayed no emotion. He was a master at hiding what he felt—unlike the rest of them, who were still learning how.

“I assume you’ve all heard the news,” their father said.

“Yes, Father,” they replied in unison.

“Your mother, the Queen, will remain at the Sunset Palace until the royal physicians determine her condition. That palace will remain under quarantine, and all those who have come into contact with her will be traced.”

“But Father—” Halilintar began, only to be cut off by a raised hand.

“Even though she is the Queen, we cannot take any chances. We are not risking a single life—we are risking many. I ask all of you to wait patiently for the results of the examination. Until then, none of you are permitted to leave the Sunrise Palace. Your interactions with others will also be restricted to prevent any possible spread. The servants assigned to you will be carefully selected and confirmed to be healthy.”

Taufan didn’t like this. He really didn’t like this. But there was nothing he could say to change his father’s decision. He was just as worried about their mother, and he wanted news of her condition as soon as possible. Perhaps he should write to Lord Jason and ask him to hasten the development of the new medicine in case their mother was infected. No—he couldn’t do that. He was a prince. His people came first, before his feelings.

Mother would be fine. She was being treated by the skilled Dr. Theron and surrounded by expert nurses. Mother would be fine.

Taufan repeated those words in his heart, again and again. For days, as he waited for news about his mother’s condition, those words became the spell—barely keeping his anxiety at bay.

When doctor Theron finally announced the results of his examinations and observation, Taufan thought he might forget how to breathe.

The doctor’s news was that the Queen was not suffering from the same illness spreading through the kingdom. Her illness was confirmed to be non-contagious, which meant she could return to the Main Palace. However, doctor Theron was still unsure what exactly was affecting her.

He said several illnesses shared the same symptoms as the Queen’s. Taufan made sure to ask for more information—he would investigate it further later. For now, all he could focus on was the fact that they would finally see their mother again.

Taufan kept fidgeting with his hands as the carriage carrying the Queen finally arrived at the palace. It was heavily guarded—not surprising. He wanted to welcome her himself, but Father had told them to wait in the library with his brothers. Even though she was so close, why couldn’t they see her?

The frustration almost made him want to pull his hair out, but Taufan forced himself to stay calm. He had to stay composed. Once more, he glanced out the library window. He saw Father carrying Mother down from the carriage and helping her into a wheelchair. Unfortunately, from this distance, Taufan couldn’t make out her face. He could only tell that she looked very weak, and feared that Father might not let them see her just yet.

He understood that she needed rest—but the worry inside him was burning, threatening to burst.

When they were finally allowed to see their mother, it was the following day. They were escorted to the King and Queen’s chambers and reminded to keep their voices down, as the Queen was very weak at the moment.

Taufan had to hold Blaze and Ice’s hands just to keep himself from running straight to his parents. As the door opened, they entered the room quietly.

Halilintar, carrying Solar, entered first, followed by Gempa with Duri in his arms, and finally Taufan with Blaze and Ice in tow.

On the bed, Mother lay looking extremely pale. The skin beneath her eyes was darkened, and she looked thinner than any of them remembered. Was it because of the illness, or had her time away from the palace taken such a toll on her?

Father stood by the side of the bed, exhaustion evident in his eyes. Taufan squeezed his younger brothers' hands tightly upon seeing their parents. Something stuck in his throat, preventing him from speaking.

Halilintar, being the eldest, offered his greetings first, followed by the others. Mother called them closer, her voice hoarse and frail. They approached the bed hesitantly. Halilintar gently set Solar down, and Gempa did the same with Duri. The youngest of them slowly moved into their mother’s embrace, each finding their way into her arms. Being the littlest, they must have missed her terribly.

Taufan didn’t know what magic finally made him move, helping Blaze and Ice onto the bed as well. The two of them sat quietly, not moving closer since Duri and Solar were already nestled in her embrace. Meanwhile, Taufan, Halilintar, and Gempa stood by the bedside with their father.

They all missed their mother. They wanted to cuddle up to her again, but she looked so tired and ill—they didn’t want to make her suffer any more than she already was. So they simply cherished the moment in silence—well, not complete silence, as Duri and Solar continued to chatter about many things.

...

Nearly a month had passed since Mother returned to the Main Palace, but her condition had not improved much. If anything, she seemed to grow weaker by the day. That morning, Taufan had heard she had vomited after eating—deeply worrying, considering how thin she looked.

Aside from Mother’s concerning health, there were signs of improvement in other areas. He had presented his proposal to Father and Uncle Pian. While they revised a few parts, the core of Taufan’s plan remained the same. Thanks to the funds raised through that plan, they were at least able to secure some food supplies and purchase enough ingredients for medicine production on a larger scale.

The bandits had been temporarily suppressed. Though they couldn’t eliminate them completely, holding them back for now bought Ignisia some precious time to recover.

Ignisia still had a long road ahead, but Taufan saw a glimmer of light in the darkness that had haunted their kingdom for nearly a year. Ignisia would rise again—its flame would not be extinguished. Taufan believed in that.

They would live true to their royal motto: “We Are the Flame That Never Dies.”

One day, while Taufan was busy reviewing the list of imported goods from other nations, he was summoned to meet with the King and Queen.

Since Mother's return to the palace, Taufan had only spent a few brief moments with her, as she needed constant rest. Being called to see both of his parents now only made him anxious. Had something gone wrong? Would his brothers be there too—or was it just him?

His mind swirled with all the possible reasons for the summons. He even rehearsed potential responses. But nothing could have prepared him for what awaited: his father handing him a small wooden box.

The box was made of ironwood, carefully carved and polished to a gleaming finish. The royal crest was beautifully engraved on its lid.

Still puzzled, Taufan looked to his parents for an explanation. His mother sat propped up by pillows, smiling gently at his confused expression.

“Happy birthday, Taufan,” she said.

Ah, right. Today was his birthday—but he had forgotten in the midst of all his work. And with the state the kingdom was in, no one had celebrated birthdays in a long time, so it had slipped his mind.

“That is our gift to you. Go ahead, open it,” said his father.

With some hesitation, Taufan opened the wooden box his parents had given him. To his surprise, inside was a seal bearing the royal crest.

“Father... this... isn’t this...”

“Yes, Prince. That is the Crown Prince’s seal.”

Why were they giving him the Crown Prince’s seal? This wasn’t something handed out as a simple birthday present! Did this mean... were they naming him Crown Prince? At a time like this?!

“I don’t feel worthy of receiving this seal, Father,” said Taufan. He stared uncertainly at the round, silver-toned object gleaming inside the box. It was forged with their kingdom’s emblem—a phoenix clutching a sword. Its wings were elegantly spread, and flames danced across its body. A perfect symbol for their kingdom, blessed by the God of Fire himself—Ignis.

"You have done an extraordinary job as a prince. You have proven yourself worthy of this title, Prince," the King said—calm and dignified, as always.

But Taufan couldn’t bring himself to believe his father's words. He truly didn’t think he had done anything deserving of the title he was about to be given. Even though he had long known that his father hoped he would succeed him as King, Taufan still didn’t feel worthy of being named Crown Prince.

Becoming Crown Prince meant he was one step away from becoming a King. It meant being considered ready to take the throne at any moment. But Taufan didn’t feel ready. Especially not while his mother was sick. How could he calmly accept his coronation as Crown Prince when his mother still lay in bed, unable to rise?

No, he wanted his mother to be there on the day of his coronation. He also wanted his people to celebrate the occasion with joy. Right now, Ignisia was still wounded, still struggling to recover from the devastation of disease and bandits. His coronation would only feel like salt rubbed into an open wound.

"Forgive me for being rude, Father. But I don’t feel I deserve any of this."

"Prince," Taufan turned to his mother. Her face was so pale it was almost the color of paper. Her skin was nearly translucent, and Taufan could see the bluish veins beneath. Her lips were dry and cracked, her eyes sunken with dark circles beneath them, her cheekbones prominent, and her gaze weary and tired.

The beautiful woman who had always stood with grace and charm was gone, replaced by a frail figure ravaged by a mysterious illness.

"You have shown yourself to be a just and compassionate leader to your people. You have placed them above yourself. All of this only affirms how right we are to entrust this seal to you now."

Taufan clenched his fists. He wanted to deny his mother’s words, to explain why he still didn’t deserve to be named Crown Prince. But he knew he couldn’t refuse forever. One day, his father would step down from the throne—he would need a successor ready to take his place.

He looked once more at the silver seal inside the box, then took a deep breath and turned to his parents.

"I will accept it, Father, Mother." Guilt crept into his heart as he saw the genuine joy on their faces. He didn’t want to disappoint them. Taufan hoped he could be the perfect son and prince they wanted him to be, but he knew he was full of flaws and only ever let them down.

"However, I must decline the coronation."

"What do you mean, Prince?"

"The plague is still spreading across Ignisia. Many continue to die or suffer from it. There are food shortages, a lack of labor due to illness, rising prices in the markets because we have to import from neighboring nations, and increasing poverty. And our royal treasury is being used to fund medicine production. Holding a coronation while the kingdom is still in chaos is not right, Father."

"Then why don’t we hold a private ceremony, Prince? Only a few selected individuals would attend. No celebration necessary."

That was a possible solution, but right now, his mother couldn’t even get out of bed, and the coronation of a Crown Prince—or a King—was traditionally held at the Temple of the Fire God. Taufan wanted his whole family to be there. He didn’t want to stand alone before the altar of the Fire God, listening to the High Priest proclaim him Crown Prince. He wanted his father and mother beside him.

"I... I’m not sure I’m ready."

He lowered his head, unable to meet his parents' eyes. Surely there was disappointment on their faces. How could there not be? They had prepared him for this all his life, and now he said he wasn’t ready? He was supposed to be the perfect example. A role model. But here he was, acting like a child, sulking because his mother couldn’t be by his side.

"We understand, Prince. There will be no coronation until you are ready."

They understood?

Taufan’s head snapped up. On his parents' faces were only warm, understanding smiles. Not a trace of disappointment. They didn’t pressure him to accept the title. They didn’t scold him for acting like a child. Taufan bit the inside of his cheek to keep himself from making a sound. He gave a small nod and stepped forward when his mother held out her hand.

Her hand was cold against his skin, but to Taufan, it was still the warmest hand that had ever touched him. His father placed a firm hand on his shoulder, pride shining in his eyes—pride that Taufan didn’t understand how he had earned when all he did was disappoint them.

"Even without the coronation, you are still the Crown Prince of this kingdom. Our Crown Prince."

A small smile curved his lips. When Ignisia had healed from its wounds, when his mother had recovered from her illness, then he would accept his coronation. He would stand tall and proud before his family and his people. They would see that he was worthy of wearing the crown.

Chapter Text

Boboiboy Fanfiction

©  Boboiboy | Animonsta Studio

A/N: The entire story is purely fictional, and the author does not profit from writing this story. If there are any similarities in ideas, character names, or locations, they are purely coincidental.

≫ ──── ≪•◦ ❈ ◦•≫ ──── ≪

The Queen’s condition was kept secret from the public.

People only knew that the Queen was unwell and needed to recover. No one knew that she was in a critical state. Taufan understood the reason behind that decision. His mother was the Queen of the land, the First Lady, and one of the kingdom’s rulers. If people discovered she was gravely ill, the kingdom would be seen as weakened, and threats would rise from all sides. They could not take that risk while Ignisia was still struggling to heal.

Taufan had done everything he could. He helped raise funds so that medicine could be produced on a large scale, exchanged ideas with Halilintar and his father about strategies to deal with bandits, and had already begun drawing up plans for the kingdom’s recovery. The citizens affected by the plague and the victims of banditry needed urgent attention.

He had to do whatever it took for his people. Taufan had repeated this to himself over and over—he must not act selfishly. Mother would recover; she would be all right. For now, what Taufan had to think of was his kingdom, his people. He had to do everything for them and must not be carried away by his emotions.

Yet all of this was painfully hard. Not when his mother grew weaker with every visit, not when even the royal physicians seemed on the verge of giving up, not when his father looked as though he might collapse at any moment.

Taufan did not want to act like an adult. He wanted to cry like the child he still was. He did not want to shoulder the kingdom’s burdens. He wanted to lie beside his mother and pretend she only had an ordinary fever.

But Taufan swallowed all the selfish desires in his heart and went back to his duties. He was the Prince of Ignisia—the Crown Prince, though not yet officially. Since the day he bore that title, the weight had been placed upon his shoulders, and he could not refuse it.

…

“Brother, may I have your time for a moment?”

Gempa intercepted him on his way to his father’s study. From his brother’s expression, Taufan knew that what he wanted to discuss was important. So Taufan chose to put his work aside for his younger brother.

Gempa led him into an empty room, a sign that what they were about to talk about was serious. Inside, Halilintar was already waiting with a large pile of books. Taufan recognized some of them—books about herbs and rare diseases recorded across the continent. He never expected to see Halilintar surrounded by books like this; he had always thought his brother was only interested in swords and duels.

Taufan scanned the room carefully, noticing the magical devices that made it soundproof. Though he had several suspicions about what his two brothers wanted to discuss, he decided to pretend he knew nothing for now. Better to hear them out first.

Gempa closed the door and locked it.

“I know you already know what we’re going to talk about, Taufan.”

With a stiff nod, Taufan responded to Halilintar’s words. He glanced uncertainly at his two brothers, then at the stacks of books around them.

“This is about Mother, isn’t it?”

“Yes. I feel there’s something off about her illness. Something strange,” Halilintar said. Beside him, Gempa nodded in agreement.

“We’ve read many books,” Halilintar gestured to the volumes surrounding them, ignoring Taufan’s incredulous look, “We found several illnesses similar to what Mother is suffering from, but none that match exactly. I overheard you speaking with Theron. I heard him describe her symptoms and condition. There are many diseases with similar symptoms, but none the same.”

Halilintar was right. Taufan had already examined most of the books in the room. He still did not know what illness afflicted their mother. He had studied countless medical texts and papers on various diseases, hoping to find something that could cure her. In the rare breaks between his duties, Taufan made time to speak with Theron or the nurses caring for his mother. Even they—people who had devoted their entire lives to studying medicine—did not know what kind of illness this was.

A mysterious disease that even Count Balakung, the strongest blessed of the Goddess Gevix, could not heal. An illness that even Theron, the best physician in Ignisia, did not know the cause of or how to cure.

All these problems, combined with his mother’s condition, pressed more and more heavily on Taufan over time.

“If that’s so, what is it you want to talk to me about? I’m just as blind as you are.”

“Brother, we know you’re very busy right now. We don’t mean to steal your time, but we feel this must be discussed together. Father refuses to talk about it. He may want to hide this from us. But we suspect Father knows more than he’s letting on about Mother’s condition. Lately, I’ve noticed several strangers coming and going from his study.”

Strangers? Taufan hadn’t paid much attention to who came to the palace because of how busy he was handling the ongoing epidemic, but Gempa’s words caught his attention. Perhaps he should be more aware of his surroundings.

“I’ve already looked into the people Gempa mentioned. They’re all merchants of rare plants—from the most poisonous to the most potent medicinal herbs. Some of them are also potion makers.”

“Are you saying Father is trying to find a cure for Mother?”

“It seems so. I know Father would never let Mother suffer. Outwardly, he may seem more concerned with the bandit problem and act as if nothing is wrong with Mother, but he loves her more than anything. How could he simply do nothing while she’s dying?”

“Then what exactly do you want to talk to me about? Do you want me to ask Father about Mother’s condition? You know that’s impossible, right? He’s not someone who easily changes his mind.”

Halilintar and Gempa shook their heads at the same time. If that wasn’t what they wanted from him, then what? Taufan knew they were afraid and worried, just as he was. Only now, the burden he carried was far heavier. He had tried time and again to suppress his feelings, to keep his emotions hidden so no one would see how weak he felt. He had to stay strong; he had a country to think of first.

“I know you’re very busy, Taufan. But you’re the smartest person I know. I believe you’re the one who can find what Gempa and I cannot.”

Halilintar was overestimating him. Taufan was only slightly better than average in a few things; that did not make him the best. No matter how much everyone praised him, he was still just eleven years old, full of shortcomings. Even if his father and mother believed he was worthy of being Crown Prince, Taufan knew he was not ready yet. He did not have wide knowledge, nor the wisdom, nor was he the strongest in Ignisia. He still needed much more time to learn.

“Brother, I’m just like you and Gempa. I’ve read some of the books in this room too, and still found nothing to help Mother.”

“No, Taufan. You’re more than that. Gempa and I won’t give up on finding answers, and so we beg you, don’t give up either.”

Taufan had never given up on healing his mother, but he had priorities. His priority was his people—those who were suffering now. It might sound unfilial, but he knew his mother would understand and support his decision. She had taught him herself that, as a prince, he must never make decisions hastily. He must weigh everything carefully and always think of his people first. He must put the people of Ignisia before all else.

His mother had taught him that wearing a king’s crown meant a heavy responsibility awaited him. If one day he became King, he would become the Father of the nation, and that meant he must turn his face away—even from his own family—for the sake of his people. Even if his family called him cold and unfeeling, his people would still come first.

Yet, looking into Halilintar’s and Gempa’s faces, he began to doubt. Was it truly right for him to turn away from his family? Was what he had done until now really right?

“I… I have never given up on Mother.”

“We know that, Taufan.”

“I’ll also try to find the cure. You two mustn’t give up either.”

His two brothers nodded. Their resolve was the same—they would heal their mother. They would do whatever they could for her. For the woman who had given them life and loved them all this time.

After they parted, Taufan sank back into his busyness. The medicine for the plague might have been produced, but it was still not enough. The aftermath still had to be dealt with. There was no time to rest.

…

Sitting in the same room as his mother now felt strange to Taufan. Once, he had cherished every moment he could spend with her. But now, with her confined to bed, he could no longer find the peace that had always surrounded her.

His heart was always restless, his mind never still. Mother was too silent, too pale, too weak.

It was nothing like the mother Taufan had known all his life. She should have been a beautiful woman in a simple silk gown, wearing little jewelry. A woman whose face might look gentle but whose gaze was sharp enough to silence many nobles. A brilliant strategist who had planned victories in war. A compassionate woman who had helped so many. A loving, caring mother to her children.

None of this felt real to Taufan. It felt as though he were trapped in a nightmare from which he could not wake.

Taufan gripped the fabric of his trousers and bit his lip. He must not cry. He was the Crown Prince and a boy. Boys weren’t supposed to cry, and a Crown Prince was supposed to be strong.

But even though he repeated that sentence over and over in his head like a spell, his eyes still burned and his heart still ached. He might be able to look fine in front of his brothers or others, but when it was just him and his mother, Taufan could no longer lie.

Taufan was afraid. Afraid that something terrible would happen to her. And he was sad, too, because he could do nothing for her while she suffered like this. He wanted to do something—anything—for her. Even if only to ease her pain, Taufan wished he could.

But what could an eleven-year-old do? No matter that his title was “unofficial Crown Prince,” he was still just a child. If Father—a grown man and a King—had not found a way to heal her, what could he possibly do?

This helplessness was nauseating. Taufan hated it.

“Sit up straight, Prince.”

Taufan started. He straightened his back instinctively, muscle memory from every time he’d heard that voice say those words. He turned his head quickly toward the bed and found his mother looking at him. Her face was so pale it nearly matched a sheet of paper, the skin under her eyes was dark, and her lips were dry and cracked. She looked exhausted and in pain.

Taufan rushed to her, helping her sit up. He tucked a pillow behind her back for support.

“What weighs on you, Prince?”

He could never hide anything from her. Even sick, she was as sharp as ever.

“I… I feel useless right now, Mother.”

“In what regard?”

“I can’t do anything for you, Mother. I… I’m just a useless child.”

Taufan wrung his hands nervously. His fingers trembled with guilt and helplessness. Had Father ever faced a time like this when he was Crown Prince? How had he dealt with it? Taufan wished he could ask, but he didn’t want Father to see his weakness and regret choosing him as heir.

“Prince, lift your head and stop slouching.”

Again, Taufan’s body reacted to her command. He straightened and raised his head, looking directly at the woman on the bed.

“Prince, my illness is not your responsibility.” Her voice, though weak, was still firm and left no room for argument. Her gaze was still as sharp as ever. Her face, though pale and gaunt from sickness, still held the resolute expression that made others respect and never defy her.

Right—how could Taufan have forgotten?

The woman before him was the Queen of Ignisia. Queen of the strongest kingdom on the continent and a woman who had devised countless strategies to win wars. She might not wield a sword to protect herself, but her mind was sharper than any blade.

“Your duty is to your people, not to me. Prince, our people are wounded right now. As Crown Prince of Ignisia, it is your duty to help heal their wounds.”

“I understand, Mother. But can you blame me? I am your son—my heart cannot bear these feelings when I see you lying weak in bed.”

“Prince, I understand your feelings. My father died when I was seventeen, and at the time, I was on the battlefield and could not return home for his funeral. It felt like being an unfilial child, unable to say farewell, unable even to attend his burial. But the strategy I devised in the midst of grief and pain saved hundreds of lives.”

Taufan… had never known this story. He knew his maternal grandfather had died when his mother was still young, but he had not realized she hadn’t even been able to attend the funeral.

“If at that time I had chosen to return home, how many people do you think would have died? Of course, I’m not saying our army was weak, but how many soldiers do you think would have perished without the strategy I had drawn up?”

Suddenly, Taufan felt nervous, as if he were being tested and would face consequences if he answered wrongly.

“I… I’m not sure, Mother. But based on your story, perhaps more than what was recorded.”

“Correct—more than what was recorded. The official death toll was 138 soldiers and four knights. It might have been far higher without that strategy. In war, achieving victory is most important, but ensuring casualties are kept to a minimum is also vital. What is the meaning of victory if half your army is dead?”

“I understand, Mother. I will remember this.”

His mother gave him a faint smile. “Prince, though not yet official, you are still the Crown Prince of this land. You are the next king. You must remember that your people must always come first. Even when it hurts and makes you waver, you must always put them first.”

Taufan wanted to say that he understood her words, but it would have been a lie. He had once thought he understood this truth, but now he was faced with a choice that tore him apart. His people or his mother? He kept wavering. Again and again, he wanted to run from his duty as prince and just curl up here in this room with her. He wished he could sit with Halilintar and Gempa to research what was making her sick and how to cure it.

“I’m sure you will make the right decision, Prince. Just remember what I’ve said.”

The doubt still lingered in Taufan’s heart, yet he nodded firmly—just as he always did whenever he received guidance from his parents. He still wasn’t entirely sure of his worthiness as Crown Prince, but if Mother and Father had entrusted this role to him, then they must have seen something within him and deemed him worthy of the title. Taufan would strive to live up to their expectations; he would become the perfect heir for them.

“Mother… there is something else that weighs on me. Would you be willing to hear it?”

“What troubles your heart, Prince?”

He wasn’t sure if this question was appropriate to ask the Queen, but this woman was also his mother, and Mother had always helped Taufan find answers to the things that confused him. She always guided him to make the right decisions. Taufan was sure she could give him an answer to what burdened him now.

“I don’t understand why you chose to go to the area stricken by the plague. Wasn’t that dangerous? You could have been infected yourself, and you couldn’t return to the palace for months because of how fast it spread. Why did you do it, Mother? I’m sure the people would not have blamed you had you not gone.”

Mother looked at him seriously. Though her face appeared exhausted throughout their conversation, it remained calm.

“Prince, in your view, what should a leader do when his people are in distress? Order others to help, or go down and help them himself?”

The answer was clearly the one who helped in person, but he still didn’t quite understand—did it really have to go that far? Even Duchess Satriantar hadn’t gone personally to treat those infected with the plague. Count Balakung had the protection of the Goddess Gevix, which made him immune to disease, and he had so many competent subordinates working for him—yet even he rarely handled patients directly because he was busy developing medicine with Sir Jason.

“I know you already know the answer. Prince, a true leader, does not hide behind palace walls when a crisis strikes. They go to the place where their people are hurt and help with all they have.”

Her words startled Taufan. A true leader. Once again, Mother left him in awe.

…

Doctor Theron concluded that the Queen’s illness was an unknown disease. He asked the King for permission to study it more deeply, together with other physicians—meaning he requested that the Queen’s condition be made public. Father didn’t immediately agree; he still thought keeping her state hidden was best.

“Father, I understand you don’t want people to start targeting Ignisia. But it’s been so long since Mother appeared in public; many have begun to grow suspicious, and false rumors are spreading. I’m worried things will only get worse if it’s hidden any longer,” Taufan said, trying to persuade Father to announce Mother’s health condition.

“Taufan is right, Father. If announcing Mother’s condition gives her a greater chance of healing, then we must do it at once.”

Taufan watched his father’s face—he still looked hesitant. In the room, there were only he, his two brothers, and Father. They were the eldest and understood the situation best. Blaze and the others were still too young; they shouldn’t be involved.

“Father, there’s a chance another doctor out there might provide an answer. I’m not saying Doctor Theron is incompetent, but someone may have encountered the same illness Mother suffers from,” even Gempa added, trying to convince Father.

Taufan nodded toward his two brothers. The three of them observed their father’s reaction, carefully reading his expression. Father closed his eyes and his brow furrowed—clear signs he was deep in thought. No one dared speak; Taufan even held his breath a few times from the tension.

“Many will target our kingdom if they learn of the Queen’s condition.”

Halilintar stepped forward. “Father, forgive my boldness, but Ignisia is not a weak kingdom. It is the strongest kingdom on the continent and will continue to be so. I believe we can face whatever arises, but first we must find a way to heal Mother. I say this not only because she is my mother but because she is also the mother of this kingdom. I beg you to consider, Father!”

Taufan and Gempa stood beside Halilintar, joining him in pleading with their father. They would not simply give up on Mother. Though Mother had said her illness was not Taufan’s responsibility, what child could sit still while his mother lay gravely ill?

At last, Father sighed in defeat. He said he would announce the Queen’s condition the following day and told them to prepare for every worst possibility.

He ordered them back to the Sunrise Palace, saying they needed to look after their younger brothers. Taufan knew this was Father’s way of giving them a brief respite, and he was grateful for it. It had been far too long since Taufan had spent time with his four younger brothers.

Halilintar and Gempa had wanted to return to their research, but Taufan dragged both brothers with him to the Sunrise Palace. He knew they were all worried about Mother and hoped to find something to help her, but that didn’t mean they should neglect their four little brothers. Spending even one day with them would be precious—especially after being endlessly battered by their princely duties.

When he met the four younger ones again, Taufan clearly saw the worry etched on Blaze’s and Ice’s faces. Those two were much younger than Gempa; they shouldn’t have to carry the same worries their older brothers bore. Taufan felt he had failed his duty as an older brother.

“Aze, Ice, don’t worry. Everything will be all right.”

If Ice glanced at Taufan with doubt, knowing he was lying, Ice said nothing and merely nodded. The two children held hands—the thing they always did when they felt afraid. Everything will be all right, Taufan told himself.

He then turned his gaze to Duri and Solar, his youngest brothers. They didn’t quite understand what was happening—only that something was wrong. Taufan embraced them, comforting his two youngest brothers as best he could.

God, Taufan wanted to cry. They were all still children. Even Halilintar, the eldest, was only thirteen—still not yet an adult—and now they had to be strong for one another.

Taufan felt a squeeze on his shoulder. He turned to find Halilintar standing beside him with a forced smile. Halilintar was trying to comfort him too. When Taufan looked away, Gempa, who had his arm around Blaze and Ice, also smiled at Taufan.

Everything will be all right, Taufan whispered to himself.

The next day, the King made an official announcement regarding the Queen’s condition. As expected, it caused a stir about her state, though many of the people offered prayers for her recovery.

Doctor Theron convened a meeting with the physicians at the royal academy, discussing the Queen’s condition in the hope someone might shed light on it. Lord Jason and the team helping develop medicine for the plague also joined the meeting, along with other great minds in the medical field.

Taufan noticed so many people coming and going from the Main Palace now to check on the Queen. The palace staff scurried like headless chickens while the Royal Guard trained harder, as if preparing for war.

It could be said that the palace was in chaos.

One time, on his way to his parents’ chamber, he accidentally overheard something. From one of the meeting rooms in the Main Palace came the voices of a group of people engaged in a heated discussion. They hadn’t shut their door tightly, making their words clearly audible to Taufan’s sensitive ears. He hadn’t meant to eavesdrop at first, but when he heard mention of Mother’s illness, it caught his attention.

Using his powers, Taufan made his steps so light that no one would hear him approach the room. He didn’t need to be right outside the door to catch their words; his hearing was sharp enough to make out the conversation clearly.

He recognized several of the voices arguing inside: Doctor Theron, Lord Jason, Count Balakung, some of the physicians who had examined Mother, and others he didn’t know.

“You can’t just suggest something like that, Sir Jason! Even if you’ve managed to make a cure for the current plague, that doesn’t mean you can spout nonsense like this!” cried an unfamiliar voice, furious.

“How can you call my words nonsense?! Do you still dare call yourself a physician when you’ve already given up on curing a patient?!” Lord Jason shot back, no less angry—startling Taufan, for he had never heard the man’s voice so heated before.

“The patient you’re speaking of is Her Majesty the Queen! If anything goes wrong with the treatment, our heads are on the line!”

“I’m willing to risk my head to heal the Queen,” Doctor Theron said calmly.

“Doctor Theron!”

“I am a physician, just like you, Doctor Amos. I will do whatever it takes to cure my patient, and right now, the Queen is our patient. That’s what we’re gathered here to discuss.”

“But how can it be reasonable for him to propose making a medicine with such poisonous ingredients?! I can’t even imagine using such things to treat someone.” The voice—apparently Amos—spoke again, and Taufan suspected he was pointing an accusing finger at Lord Jason.

Taufan bit his lip, suppressing any sound. He could already guess the matter; Lord Jason had always had an excessive fascination with toxic substances. Taufan had even had to stop him from using Deathroot Fangs and Viper Vine while developing the plague remedy.

And now he dared propose using poisonous ingredients to treat the Queen? Had Taufan been wrong to trust him?

“In truth, Master Amos,” Count Balakung’s deep, steady voice cut through the tension a little, “although Punarnava [1] is infamous for its deadly poison, the plant has long been used to dull pain. If you know the proper dose, Punarnava is an extraordinarily helpful medicine. Moreover, the other ingredients Sir Jason mentioned have their uses too. Most people only know these plants as poisons because they’re too afraid to study them further.”

[1] Punarnava, or “red spiderling,” is a slender, creeping plant with forked branches. In the real world, it is used in traditional medicine as a laxative, for dysentery, as a diuretic, a painkiller, and even as an antidote to snake venom. In this story’s world, Punarnava is a neurotoxin that causes paralysis.

“My lord, I know you are blessed by the Goddess Gevix, the Goddess of Plants, but at this point, we cannot act recklessly. You and I both understand how the Queen’s condition is worsening. She cannot last much longer like this.”

What?

What?

Mother’s condition was that bad?

Taufan bit down hard on his lip, choking back the sob that almost escaped at hearing her state laid out like this. Why did he have to learn of it this way? Father had never mentioned it, and the physicians tending her had never said such things. Was Mother’s condition even being hidden from them? Why? They had a right to know!

“You’re right, Master Amos—we are running out of time. That is why we must do everything we can. There are records of the ingredients Sir Jason spoke of before; they say that mixing them all produces a miraculous medicine able to cure almost any disease and repel any poison.”

“But that’s nothing more than legend, my lord.”

“Her Majesty the Queen has done everything for this kingdom; it’s only fitting we repay her in kind. I will develop this medicine, just as I did with the remedy for the plague. I will stake everything I have to heal the Queen.”

Taufan heard the murmurs ripple through the room after Lord Jason’s bold statement. Some echoed Amos’s worries; others said they had to try anything to save the Queen. Their discussion grew hotter until finally Amos relented, saying he would go along with Lord Jason’s plan. With Amos yielding, the other physicians who had opposed the idea at first began to agree as well.

“Even so, several of the ingredients can’t be found easily. Punarnava itself is a rare plant that’s extremely hard to obtain, let alone Pilea [2] and the others. Where could we even get them? Not even the black market is likely to have any.”

[2] Pilea is a small plant with abundant, light-green leaves, oval to round, only 4–8 inches long. In the real world, it’s a weed used in traditional medicine for its anti-inflammatory effect. In this story’s world, Pilea is a poisonous species that grows only in swamps; eating it can cause heart failure.

Punarnava and Pilea. Taufan would have to find out more about them.

Perhaps… perhaps he should ask Lord Jason as well. He needed to ask the man what was required and where to obtain it all. If these ingredients were the way to save Mother, Taufan would do whatever it took to get them.

Chapter Text

Okay, we will start with the characters list!

1. Name: Taufan

• Age: 21 years old
• Gender: Male
• Height: 179 cm
• Weight: 61.5 kg

Taufan is a Fine Arts student who ends up inside the body of a character from a novel. He never actually read the novel himself—he only heard the story from one of his siblings. In the real world, Taufan has six siblings and is the second child, just like Prince Taufan. His relationship with his siblings is strained, mainly because he distances himself, thinking they don't really like each other. After entering the novel, he tried many ways to return to his original world, but nothing worked. At first, he believed that letting the story play out as it was meant to would bring him back once it ended. However, that changed when he met the protagonist. Taufan began to feel that he had to ensure the main character reached a happy ending to return home.

Physical features: Warm beige skin tone, dark brown eyes, black hair, and often appears tired due to lack of sleep.

2. Name: Taufan von Ignisia

• Age: 16 years old
• Gender: Male
• Height: 165 cm
• Weight: 38.3 kg (when first possessed by Taufan)

The second prince of the Kingdom of Ignisia, blessed by the Wind Goddess, Vint. He was 'banished' to an old palace once used to exile queens or concubines who had fallen out of the king’s favor. Taufan has a frail body and must rely on daily medication. Because of this, he cannot use his powers without experiencing serious side effects. His relationship with his siblings is distant—he fears his power will one day spiral out of control and harm them, so he always maintains a boundary.

Physical features: Nearly identical to Taufan, but with pale white skin, gem-like blue eyes, deep black hair, a thin frame, and a slight hunch.

3. Name: Halilintar von Ignisia

• Age: 18 years old
• Gender: Male
• Height: 177 cm
• Weight: 65 kg

The protagonist of the novel 'The True Heir of Ignisia' and the first prince of the Kingdom. Blessed by the Lightning Goddess, Blits, Halilintar is the youngest swordmaster in the kingdom and is destined to become the strongest swordsman and earn the title 'Sword of Ignisia'. Though he holds no formal crown prince title, he plays the role. He deeply loves his siblings, especially Taufan, and frequently visits him, ensuring he receives his medicine.

Physical features: Tanned skin from training under the sun, black hair, blood-red eyes, a sturdy build, and scars on his cheek and stomach caused by Taufan’s outburst.

4. Name: Gempa von Ignisia

• Age: 15 years old
• Gender: Male
• Height: 168 cm
• Weight: 58.9 kg

The third prince, blessed by the Earth God, Terra. He has a spirit animal named Oak, a massive golden bear. Before turning 14, Gempa left the palace to search for a cure for Taufan, sending back herbs he found through Oak. He deeply cares for and admires Taufan, believing he will one day return to the person he once was before tragedy struck.

Physical features: Brownish skin from adventuring, jet-black hair, golden eyes, and a fit and slightly muscular build.

5. Name: Blaze von Ignisia

• Age: 13 (at story start), 14 (after Chapter 30: The Dance Party)
• Gender: Male
• Height: 157 cm
• Weight: 55 kg

The fourth prince, blessed by the Fire God, Ignis. Blaze has a fiery personality—easily angered, stubborn, and harbors resentment toward Taufan, despite once admiring him. He adores his twin brother, Ice, and has a complicated relationship with Halilintar, feeling Halilintar only cares for Taufan.

Physical features: Brown skin, several scars from childhood falls, orange eyes, jet-black hair.

6. Name: Ice von Ignisia

• Age: 13 (at story start), 14 (after Chapter 30)
• Gender: Male
• Height: 158 cm
• Weight: 57 kg

The fifth prince, blessed by the Water God, Vaser. Ice is not well loved by the people because his patron deity is the enemy of Ignis, and his powers are feared. As a child, he believed he was a monster. He is reclusive and avoids people—except Blaze. After meeting Taufan at his birthday party, he began sneaking into Taufan’s room for comfort. He loves sweets, especially Taufan’s handmade candy.

Physical features: Pale white skin, light blue eyes. Although slightly taller than Blaze, he appears shorter due to his constant slouching. Unlike Blaze, he has little muscle tone.

7. Name: Duri von Ignisia

• Age: 9 years old
• Gender: Male
• Height: 134 cm
• Weight: 30 kg

The sixth prince, blessed by the Plant Goddess, Gevix. He possesses healing powers. Duri often escapes from the Sunrise Palace to the Sunset Palace, where Taufan resides. At first, he hides from Taufan but befriends the palace staff. He is wary of Taufan’s friendliness at first, but after receiving a gift, he begins to open up—preferring Taufan over Halilintar because Taufan plays and shares snacks with him. He loves sweets like Ice.

Physical features: Green eyes, jet-black hair, fair skin, and slightly chubby cheeks.

8. Name: Solar von Ignisia

• Age: 9 years old
• Gender: Male
• Height: 133.7 cm
• Weight: 29.6 kg

The seventh and youngest prince, blessed by the Light God, Lig. Curious and eager to learn, Solar often bombards people with questions (to Halilintar’s distress). He admires Taufan’s intelligence and praise from tutors. More timid than Duri, but equally enthusiastic. He and Duri often sneak out at night to bother Halilintar. He also likes Taufan’s treats but prefers less sweet ones, forcing Taufan to make separate snacks for them.

Physical features: Black hair, silver eyes, under-eye bags from staying up late, and pale skin due to staying indoors, especially in the library.

I did say it was a character list, but for now, only the princes + current Taufan are in the list. Other characters will be added to this list once the story is finished. Therefore, I apologize if you can’t find your favorite character in this list.

Another thing I’ll be discussing here is the division of the palace, which I’ve noticed has been quite confusing for some readers.

So, regarding the division of palaces in the Kingdom of Ignisia, it is as follows:

The Royal Palace consists of three palace buildings: the Main Palace, the Sunrise Palace, and the Sunset Palace. Let’s go through each of them to give readers a clearer understanding.

1. The Main Palace or the Sun Palace
The Main Palace is the residence of the King and Queen. It also serves as the seat of government in the Kingdom of Ignisia. Many nobles come and go here to meet with the King and Queen or to attend the gatherings of nobles, which are always held in the Main Palace. It can be said that the Main Palace is the heart of Ignisia—almost everything happens there.

Aside from being the home of the King and Queen, the Crown Prince, who has been officially appointed, will also reside in the Main Palace. If the Crown Prince is married, his wife will automatically hold the title of Crown Princess, and they too will live in the Main Palace.

2. The Sunrise Palace
This palace is where the Princes and Princesses are raised, or their residence before they acquire their own domains. At present, the six Princes live here. Prince Taufan also lived in this palace before being moved to the Sunset Palace.

It is called the Sunrise Palace because it is here that future Kings and Queens are raised. They enter this palace at the age of one and remain there until they obtain their own residence. No Prince or Princess lives permanently in the Sunrise Palace.

3. The Sunset Palace
This palace is the one most frequently mentioned in the story and has been the residence of Prince Taufan since he was 14 years old. Originally, the palace was intended as a place to exile Queens or Concubines who had fallen out of the King’s favor. Built far from both the Main Palace and the Sunrise Palace, the Sunset Palace is also quite isolated from the outside world, surrounded by tall stone walls. Its purpose was to sever all outside ties for anyone who lived there.

Prince Taufan’s mother, the Queen, once used this palace to quarantine herself after returning to the royal palace from a region struck by plague.

Prince Taufan was the first prince to reside here, and due to Halilintar’s intervention, the palace lost its original purpose as a place of isolation.

And I know what you’re all wondering. Why does Halilintar have a room in the Main Palace? Does he live in the Main Palace? Is Halilintar actually the Crown Prince?

I’ll give you a clear answer here.

Halilintar does not permanently reside in the Main Palace. He still lives in the Sunrise Palace, as mentioned by Duri in Chapter 23: Keep Following the Light II, where it was stated that Halilintar still lives in the Sunrise Palace, though he rarely returns there. The reason Halilintar has a room in the Main Palace is precisely because of this—he seldom has the chance to return to the Sunrise Palace. His busy schedule doesn’t allow him to go back often. Of course, he could travel back and forth, but Halilintar dislikes such inconveniences and prefers practicality. That’s why he chooses to stay in the Main Palace whenever he’s occupied with work. Once his duties ease, he returns to the Sunrise Palace. The room he occupies is not the Crown Prince’s chamber, but simply a guest room typically reserved for visiting nobles. In short, Halilintar prefers the practical option.

You might also be wondering about Prince Taufan—why doesn’t he live in the Main Palace after being named Crown Prince? The answer is simple: because he has not yet been officially inaugurated as Crown Prince. He may carry the title for now, but it isn’t official. In the eyes of others, he is still just a prince, the same as his six brothers.